On Wednesday, Uber CEO Dara Khosrowshahi announced the company will be cutting 3,300 jobs, a tenth of its workforce worldwide.  It’s the biggest cuts since Covid, when the ride-share app cut 14% of its workforce, amounting to 3,700 jobs. 

“This wasn’t a decision we made lightly, because it will have a real impact on our teammates and friends who have worked hard for Uber,” Khosrowshahi wrote in a letter to employees. “It’s important to say that these changes are about how we’re organized and what we’re prioritizing, not about anyone’s contributions to Uber, which we will always value.”

Khosrowshahi said that the cuts were not because of a downturn in the economy—in fact he acknowledged Uber “has grown by orders of magnitude” in the past five years. Instead, it was simply because Uber had gotten too big to manage, and the cuts would help the company run it “faster and smarter.”

Uber made a 20% reduction in the number of employees who were seven layers or more removed from the CEO. The company also cut the number of “micro-teams” (those with only one or two direct reports) by half, and combined each delivery operations team in the restaurant, retail and direct sectors into one big team. 

“The outcome is a simpler org chart geared toward building versus managing,” he wrote. “Running these three businesses separately made sense in their early days, but that structure is no longer serving us at scale.”

Khosrowshahi said the decision was informed by conversations with employees who indicated that the company spent too much time coordinating instead of “building, shipping or serving customers.” 

Uber shares were up 1.61% at $76.45 on closing time. 

Khosrowshahi said the expected savings from making Uber leaner will be reinvested “in growth, innovation, and the capabilities that will matter most over the coming years,” one of which is putting more self-driving cars on the road in Uber’s network. 

“Our opportunity from here is enormous: we have the chance to bring Uber to hundreds of millions more people; to invest even more in drivers, couriers and merchants; and to innovate across our core businesses and build the autonomous future,” Khosrowshahi wrote. 

Uber’s president and chief operations officer Andrew MacDonald  said that nobody will own a car in the next 15 to 20 years because it’s a depreciating asset that sits idle most of the time, and that other forms of transport like self-driving cars and bikes will fill the void. 

“I think autonomous vehicles will be part of that,” MacDonald said last month. 

Uber’s ongoing $10 billion bet on self-driving cars 

Uber originally launched its autonomous vehicle unit Advanced Technologies Group in 2020—an over $7 billion valuation that accounted for more than 10% of its $61 billion market cap at the time. But Uber ended up selling the research unit of it to a startup by the end of the year, recognizing that it didn’t have the money to develop its own robotaxis. 

But the company didn’t give up on self-driving cars, pivoting to deploying them with partners like Rivian, Baidu, and Pony.ai in the Uber network. The ride-share app now expects to commit $10 billion to help bring them to market at scale, with 120,000 cars committed by partners. 

Khosrowshahi described the goal on the Q2 2026 earnings call as making Uber the “world’s leading commercialization platform for autonomous vehicles.”  

“Those results give us the ability to continue investing from a position of strength,” Khosrowshahi said. “We also continue to invest behind one of the largest opportunities in Uber’s history: autonomous vehicles.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

As executives race to boost productivity and automate work with AI, workers have been left to ponder an existential question: How much work will actually be left for humans? But if you ask Jensen Huang—the CEO of the world’s most valuable company, Nvidia—the answer is plenty.

“Don’t forget the chip plants that are being created—packaging, computer plants, and all of the AI factories being created—hundreds of thousands of jobs are being created as we speak,” Huang said on Fox Business last week. 

The billionaire was responding to newfound concerns from Microsoft cofounder Bill Gates about AI’s disruption of the workforce. Gates warned in a letter last week that the technology is being underestimated and could ultimately lead to massive unemployment. Huang, meanwhile, has remained optimistic that AI will create more jobs than it eliminates.

“Everybody’s job changes,” Huang said. “Some jobs will be eliminated. Many new jobs will be created. If you go back and look at history and technology, revolutionary technology comes along, incredible advances come along.”

Huang added that white-collar jobs aren’t going anywhere anytime soon, while predicting a major boom in the skilled trades. The massive infrastructure buildout fueling the AI boom is already driving demand for hundreds of thousands of skilled plumbers, electricians, technicians, and other six-figure earning workers needed to build and maintain the technology.

“Having a large population of skilled labor and people who build things, that make things with their hands, is tremendous for the United States,” the 63-year-old said.

Huang has been bullish on the skilled trades

Huang, who has an estimated net worth of $180 billion, has been calling for greater attention to the skilled trades for months.

“If you’re an electrician, you’re a plumber, a carpenter—we’re going to need hundreds of thousands of them to build all of these factories,” Huang told Channel 4 News in the U.K. in September 2025. “The skilled craft segment of every economy is going to see a boom. You’re going to have to be doubling and doubling and doubling every single year.”

At the World Economic Forum in Davos, Switzerland, this past January, Huang added the world is on the cusp of what he calls the “largest infrastructure build-out in human history,” which will create “a lot of jobs.”

While Huang often frames that buildout as beneficial for the broader U.S. economy, it is also increasingly critical to Nvidia’s own growth. The company’s chips power the data centers at the heart of the AI boom, and building those facilities requires far more than advanced semiconductors. It takes thousands of skilled workers to get power plants, electrical systems, and cooling infrastructure online. 

In early August, Nvidia committed up to $105 billion for the credit and commitment for a new OpenAI data center in Piketon, Ohio, which has been billed as one of the world’s largest data centers.

SB Energy, a SoftBank Group company, is leading the project’s development and is hiring for a range of roles, including skilled positions that pay well above the local average. One power-generation project manager position, for example, lists a salary of $140,000 to $170,000. That’s more than twice the median household income of roughly $55,000 in the area, where the population is fewer than 27,000, according to regional nonprofit OhioSE.

As Jensen Huang highlights skilled-trade opportunities, a talent gap persists

Huang isn’t alone in highlighting the opportunities emerging in the skilled trades.

Earlier this year, Jon Gray, president and chief operating officer at Blackstone, said there is likely to be a “huge boom in blue-collar employment certainly over the next five years.”

One of Blackstone’s portfolio companies, QTS, operates or is developing more than 75 data centers worldwide. Roughly 10,000 workers were on QTS job sites a year ago. By the end of 2026, that number is expected to quadruple to 40,000—a 300% increase.

“Between the energy, the physical infrastructure, the data centers, the reindustrialization—something very powerful [is] happening,” Gray said.

But the country faces a major challenge in filling those jobs: There aren’t enough skilled workers to meet the demand.

An estimated 2.1 million skilled trades jobs could go unfilled nationally by 2030, ranging from the estimated 130,000 additional electrical workers needed by 2030 to the more than 350,000 new auto technicians needed by 2029. 

Leaders at BlackRock, Carhartt, Ford Motor Company, and Google recently announced the Alliance for America’s Skilled Trades, a partnership aimed at expanding skilled-trades training across 30 states, with plans to eventually reach workers nationwide.

“No single company or industry can prepare a country for this opportunity on its own,” the executives, including Ford’s Jim Farley, said in a Fortune commentary piece. “However, we can help address these challenges and strengthen pathways to opportunity for people and their families – if we act together.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

By 8 a.m. Eastern Time today, oil had reached $99.38 per barrel, measured using the Brent benchmark. That’s $3.27 more than it cost yesterday morning and about $31.50 above its price a year earlier.

Oil price per barrel % Change
Price of oil yesterday $96.11 +3.40%
Price of oil 1 month ago $87.96 +12.98%
Price of oil 1 year ago $67.85 +46.47%

Will oil prices go up?

Oil prices are inherently unpredictable. While many variables come into play, the basic push and pull of supply and demand is what ultimately matters. In times of heightened concern about recession, war, or other major disruptions, oil can swing suddenly.

How oil prices translate to gas pump prices

Each gallon you pay for at the pump bundles together several costs. Crude oil is one piece, but you also pay for refineries, wholesalers, government taxes, and the price markup set by gas stations.

Because crude oil usually accounts for more than half of the price per gallon, it tends to move the needle the most. Sharp increases in oil almost always show up quickly at the pump. Declines in the price of oil, on the other hand, often translate into slower, more delayed drops in gas prices—the “rockets and feathers” effect.

The role of the U.S. Strategic Petroleum Reserve

When an emergency arises, the U.S. has a reserve of crude oil called the Strategic Petroleum Reserve. Its chief function is to secure energy during disasters like sanctions, severe storm damage, or war. It can also help take the edge off brutal price spikes when supply gets hit.

It’s not a solution for the long haul. It’s more of an immediate safety net to support consumers and keep crucial sectors of the economy running (think key industries, emergency services, public transportation, and the like).

How oil and natural gas prices are linked

Oil and natural gas are two of the main fuels that keep the world running. A big change in oil prices can end up affecting natural gas. As an example, if oil prices increase, some industries may sub natural gas for certain areas of their operations wherever possible. This can increase demand for natural gas.

Historical performance of oil

The oil market typically tracks two benchmarks:

  • Brent crude oil (the main global oil benchmark)
  • West Texas Intermediate (WTI) (the main benchmark of North America)

Between the two, Brent offers a clearer view of global oil performance because it prices much of the world’s traded crude. It’s also often the preferred gauge for tracking historical oil trends. In fact, the U.S. Energy Information Administration now uses Brent as its primary reference in its Annual Energy Outlook.

Looking at the Brent benchmark over multiple decades, you’ll find oil has been anything but stable. It’s seen sharp rises due to factors like wars and supply cuts, along with steep declines tied to global recessions and oversupply (called a “glut”). For example:

  • The early 1970s saw the first major oil shock when the Middle East slashed exports and placed an embargo on the U.S. and others during the Yom Kippur War.
  • Prices fell in the mid-1980s for reasons including lower demand and the entry of more non-OPEC oil producers.
  • Prices jumped again in 2008 with increased global demand, but then plunged alongside the global financial crisis.
  • During the 2020 COVID lockdown, oil demand collapsed like never before—bringing prices below $20 per barrel.

Bottom line, oil’s historical performance has been anything but smooth. It’s hugely affected by wars, recessions, OPEC whims, evolving energy initiatives and policies, and much more.

Energy coverage from Fortune

Looking to stay up-to-date regarding the latest energy developments? Check out our recent coverage:

Frequently asked questions

How is the current price of oil per barrel actually determined?

The current price of oil per barrel depends largely on supply and demand, including news about potential future supply and demand (geopolitics, decisions made by OPEC+, etc.). In the U.S., prices also move based on how friendly an administration is to drilling, as it can affect future supply. For example, 2025 saw the Trump administration move to reopen more than 1.5 million acres in the Coastal Plain of the Arctic National Wildlife Refuge for oil and gas leasing, reversing the Biden administration’s policy of limiting oil drilling in the Arctic.

How often does the price of oil change during the day?

The price of oil updates constantly when the “futures” markets are open. A futures market is effectively an auction where people agree to buy or sell oil in the future. As long as people and companies are trading contracts, the oil price is changing.

How does U.S. shale oil production affect the current price of oil?

In short, shale is rock that contains oil and natural gas. Think of shale as energy yet to be tapped. The more shale the U.S. accesses, the more energy we’ll have—and the more easily oil prices can keep from spiking as much thanks to a greater supply.

How does the current price of oil impact inflation and the broader economy?

When oil is expensive, it tends to make everyday items cost more. This can be related to energy (your heating, gas utilities, etc.), but it’s also due to the logistics involved with making those items accessible to you. Shipping, for example, can affect the price of things at the grocery store, as it’s more expensive to get those products from warehouses and farms onto the shelf.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

When a company that builds fire trucks, rail-maintenance machinery, or electric vehicle chargers is invited to bid on a big contract, the request that lands in its inbox can run to thousands of pages of technical specifications. Developing the bid is traditionally a slow and stubbornly manual process: sales engineers, technical specialists, lawyers, and commercial staff pass documents back and forth for weeks, sometimes months, before a price can be quoted.

Atira, a Munich-based startup, wants to use AI to automate that work—and it has just raised $17.5 million in venture capital funding to make good on that vision.

The company said it has closed a $15 million seed round led by Accel, along with a previously undisclosed $2.5 million pre-seed. UVC Partners, Fortino, and BOOOM also invested, alongside individual investors that included, among others, Whirlpool chairman and CEO Marc Bitzer and Bastian Nominacher, co-founder and co-CEO of process-mining company Celonis. Atira declined to disclose its valuation following the funding.

Atira estimates that industrial “sales engineering”—the work of turning a customer’s request into a technically viable, priced bid—accounts for more than $128 billion in annual labor spending worldwide. “Sales engineering is one of the largest workflows in manufacturing that software has never truly automated,” Atira cofounder and CEO Florian Diegruber said.

Diegruber previously worked as a commercial lead at Palantir, where he spent much of his time serving one of Germany’s large automotive manufacturers. He and August DuMont Schütte, a former machine learning software engineer at Google, began working together in mid-2024 on a broad thesis about reindustrializing Europe and the U.S. Half a year later they settled on quoting software, a category Diegruber notes “sounded very unsexy back then, which is always a good place to start a venture.” They incorporated Atira in Munich in November 2024.

His argument is that industry has focused on automating factory processes and ignored the “front of house” work needed to create industrial orders in the first place. “When you need six months for your sales cycle to go from request received to final proposal out, it’s great that you’ve automated a week or a month of your factory floor,” he told Fortune. “But the big chunk is on the front door.”

Atira’s platform plugs into a customer’s existing customer relationship management (CRM). enterprise resource planning (ERP), and configure-price-quote systems and deploys AI agents that read incoming requests, highlight key requirements, flag specifications the company cannot meet, then generates the technical documentation, configuration proposals, and pricing options that make up a bid.

Since launching commercially in November 2025, the startup has signed about 15 customers, Diegruber told Fortune. He said that all these customers are now using the system in full production, rather than simply experimenting with pilots, and that five of them have over 100 users each on Atira’s platform.

Among Atira’s customers are ABB E-mobility, the EV charging business that is majority-owned by European engineering giant ABB. Another customer is Chiron Group, the German industrial parts manufacturing firm, has more than 70 people using Atira’s software and reports that it’s able to process inbound quote requests 80% faster than before. (Markus Flik, a former Chiron Group CEO, is among Atira’s investors.) Meanwhile, railway equipment maker Robel says that Atira’s software is saving 95 hours of sales and engineering time per quotation request.

Several other companies are working on similar AI systems that speed up complex quotation processes, including Salesforce and ServiceNow. The major consulting firms are also helping their clients implement similar AI tools and the enterprise sales teams of AI companies, including OpenAI, Anthropic, Google DeepMind, and Mistral are also looking to snag industrial customers. There are other startups in the hunt too, including Roadrunner, which recently raised $27 million from Silicon Valley venture firms Kleiner Perkins and Founders Fund.

But Diegruber said that he is not afraid of this competition. For one thing, he said, the business model of the consulting firms means that they often offer expensive software solutions that require a lot of time to implement. Other software, he said, can’t capture the tacit knowledge that exists within most industrial firms that is essential to getting quotes right. Atira’s AI agents ping human experts over Microsoft Teams to resolve questions no document can answer.

“I always like to joke, if you give Claude to 20 sellers, you still get 20 different answers,” he said, referring to Anthropic’s chatbot. “So it’s really that aspect of scalability across the org versus just solving it for a single person.”

On accuracy—a persistent worry for enterprises deploying large language models—Diegruber said Atira builds dedicated front ends for different types of agents, and that when users review the agents’ answers, the software shows its sources and requires a human to confirm each one. “You can’t just deploy an agent and say the agent now does the work that you’ve previously done manually,” he said.

Harry Nelis, a partner at VC firm Accel, said in a statement that developing quotes for complex manufacturing “involves huge amounts of unstructured information, technical judgement and knowledge spread across different people and systems,” which makes it hard to automate with conventional software. “AI changes that equation because it can understand that context and orchestrate work across the entire process,” Nelis said.

Atira’s traction is notable given the received wisdom that European industrial giants are slower than American ones to buy from startups. Diegruber thinks attitudes among European industrial executives are shifting and that they are increasingly willing to take a risk on a startup’s software. He also said that it helps that Atira uses a deployment model that gets customers up and running within a day or two and lets them cancel after a month. “Luckily, so far this has never happened,” he said, referring to the later scenario.

The money Atira has raised in its latest venture capital round will go mostly into engineering and the company’s first non-founder commercial hires, Diegruber said. Atira had just four employees at the start of the year and has about 15 now, with nine more due to start soon. The company is also eyeing the U.S., where it has a first customer in a pilot, he said. 

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Good morning. After nearly a decade helping steer Charter Communications’ cable and broadband business, CFO Jessica Fischer is leaving for a Blackstone- and Google-backed venture investing billions to meet soaring demand for AI computing capacity.

The move puts an experienced Fortune 500 finance chief at the center of one of corporate America’s biggest investment booms. It also reflects how the AI infrastructure buildout is pulling capital and senior talent from established industries as companies race to add computing capacity.

“I’m embarking on an exciting new opportunity in the AI infrastructure space, joining the newly formed joint venture between Blackstone and Google in October,” Fischer wrote on LinkedIn Monday. A Blackstone spokesperson confirmed to CFO Daily that Fischer will become CFO of the venture.

Blackstone and Google announced the venture in May, with plans to build a U.S.-based company providing computing infrastructure for AI models and applications. Blackstone is committing an initial $5 billion in equity. The company is targeting 500 megawatts of capacity by 2027 and plans to expand substantially beyond that. Google will provide its AI chips and related technology, while longtime Google infrastructure executive Benjamin Treynor Sloss will serve as CEO.

Fischer will step down from Charter on Oct. 15. Kevin Howard, a Charter veteran and its EVP, chief accounting officer, and controller, was appointed interim CFO on Monday. Charter will search for a permanent finance chief.

Fischer, age 41, joined Charter as corporate treasurer in 2017, later becoming EVP of finance and CFO in 2021. Before Charter, she was a partner in EY’s national tax department. Charter CEO Chris Winfrey called Fischer a key member of the executive team and credited her with helping build Spectrum into the country’s largest broadband and video provider.

Her departure comes as Charter, No. 85 on the Fortune 500, grapples with steeper-than-expected broadband subscriber losses amid intensifying competition from fixed-wireless providers. Charter said in an SEC filing that Fischer’s resignation did not stem from a disagreement with the company and was unrelated to its operations or financial reporting.

Fischer is moving between two capital-intensive industries at very different points in their growth. Charter is competing for subscribers in a mature connectivity market. Her new employer is preparing to spend billions building computing capacity as demand for AI infrastructure accelerates.

That environment also raises the stakes for the CFO. Building AI infrastructure requires huge upfront investments and decisions about how quickly to add capacity when future demand and returns remain uncertain. Fischer brings experience overseeing finance at a large public company accustomed to making long-term infrastructure investments.

Her move reflects a broader shift in where corporate capital and executive talent are flowing. As billions pour into the infrastructure behind AI, finance chiefs with experience managing large investment programs are becoming central to how quickly the industry can grow and whether those investments ultimately pay off.

Sheryl Estrada
Sheryl.Estrada@fortune.com

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

“Europe has been worrying about slowing growth since the start of this century,” Mario Draghi said in 2024. “Various strategies to raise rates have come and gone, but the trend has remained unchanged.” 

There is a tendency for gloom to descend when thinking about Europe’s economic and business prospects. In comparison with America, the Gulf and Asia, the mature markets of the EU and the rest of the continent have languished. Since the financial crisis, GDP growth in the euro-area has averaged 0.9% a year. In the U.S., it is above 2%. 

Being European, overdoing the downsides comes naturally. We are a broadly skeptical and conservative bunch, not overly impressed by flamboyant displays of confidence. 

Admittedly the continent has labored as the AI hyper-scalers of America and China have produced products (and valuations) that make the eyes pop. Progress towards a European capital markets union is lumpy. The effects of the U.K. leaving the EU are still being felt. The EU’s Digital Markets Act has been criticized for being both anti-consumer and anti-growth. 

There are, though, plenty of bright spots. On September 16, we will reveal our annual Fortune 500 Europe, the list of the 500 largest companies across the continent by revenue (here’s a link to last year’s list). These are the powerhouses of the European economy, led last year by Volkswagen, Shell and Glencore. The 2026 index will be a treasure trove of statistics on profits, revenues and growth—with many lessons from the successes of those listed. 

On the same day, C-suite leaders from across Europe and the Middle East will be gathering in London for Fortune CEO Forum to talk about growth and share successes and best practices. Leaders from Anthropic and OpenAI will be in the room with the CEOs of Ferrari and Volvo Cars U.K. The U.K. chairman of energy giant EDF will sit alongside board members from NatWest and the in-country CEO of Société Générale. Defense sector policymakers will discuss infrastructure investment with the likes of Honeywell and Tech Mahindra. Entrepreneurs from banking, AI delivery and telecoms will talk about future opportunities. From Microsoft to Shell, C-suite executives representing nearly $2trn of wealth will be in the room. 

On September 16 C-suite leaders from across Europe and the Middle East will be gathering in London for Fortune CEO Forum to talk about growth and share successes and best practices.

Alongside the data from the Fortune 500 index, there are other reasons for optimism. Europe’s Innovation Scorecard, a test of research and investment trends compiled by the European Commission, revealed that innovation performance has increased by 11.6 percentage points since 2019. The U.K., Europe’s second-largest economy, sits happily above the EU average by more than 30 percentage points. “Europe continues to perform well,” the most recent scorecard said. 

The continent boasts some of the greatest universities in the world, is an AI-intellectual powerhouse, has booming financial centers of which many are rightly envious, best-in-class manufacturing from cars to windmills and leads the way on energy sustainability research and non-fossil fuel production. Global leaders flock to Europe for its unique position, geographically and politically, between China, the rest of Asia, the Gulf, and America. Education and healthcare systems are in the top tier. The U.K. wants to see closer co-operation with the rest of the EU. 

In a research note at the end of July, Goldman Sachs said that Europe’s economic growth had been “more resilient than expected’ given the energy price shock which followed the U.S. and Israeli attacks on Iran and the closure of the Strait of Hormuz.  

“We see several reasons for this resilience,” the note said, “The economy’s energy dependence has declined. Fiscal policy supports growth [with] rising defense spending across Europe. Real household income growth remains robust, and labor markets have remained resilient despite sub-potential growth, with the unemployment rate at an all-time low.” 

As a continent keen on saving, consumer confidence remains positive despite stubbornly high inflation. Most families are comfortably liquid and spending is continuing to rise. Incomes are up without the deleterious effects on wealth equality seen in the U.S. 

“We estimate that broad financial conditions—including bank lending conditions and the European Central Bank’s policy stance—point to a positive impulse to growth,” the bank said. 

Business leaders want to turn that impulse into a trend and know that collaboration across the continent and globally is key. Policy makers will also need to play their part. 

“We must take a new stance towards cooperation,” Draghi said. “In removing obstacles, harmonizing rules and coordinating policies, our confidence that we will succeed in moving forward should be strong.” The plan is clear. Now it is time for the execution phase. 

For the latest coverage and updates from Fortune CEO Forum, as well as insights into the companies on our list, visit this page.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

You used to make yourself the breakfast of champions: some coffee, eggs, toast, maybe some yogurt and berries, along with some screentime. But as soon as you go to take a bite of those scrambled eggs, you stop: you saw a post saying eggs have been recalled for salmonella. Not to worry, you turn to your toast—but now even bread has been recalled for containing metal. Those berries? Recalled for e. Coli. Your breakfast has now become a wearily-drunk glass of water and doomscrolling about the latest recalled food item. 

If you’re feeling weary about your food, you’re not alone: the majority of Americans have lost confidence in the American food system. And there’s a good reason: in August alone, the Food and Drug Administration announced 26 food recall notices. Add in drug notices, and the agency posted 46 recalls for the month. According to a consumer survey commissioned by GS1 US—the nonprofit standards group best known for creating the UPC barcode that’s seen in products in your grocery cart—94% of U.S. adults say they’re concerned about how frequently food is being recalled. 

And within those warnings lies a growing tension: A recall means a potentially dangerous product has been identified and pulled from the market, one of the mechanisms designed to keep unsafe food away from consumers. Yet as the notices pile up, Americans are losing confidence in that system, with the share of adults who believe recalls effectively protect public health and safety fell to 80%, from 85% last year.

According to the survey, more than two-thirds (67%) of consumers say they’ve avoided an entire food category after a recall, up from 60% last year. Nearly as many, 66%, have hesitated to buy the same product or brand again. And 59% have thrown away recalled food even when their state or region wasn’t affected.

So why are there so many recalls right now, and do more recalls actually mean America’s food is becoming unsafe?

Recalls after recalls 

According to The New Republic’s tally of FDA recall notices, the agency announced 18 food recall notices in August 2025 and 19 in August 2024. But two years later,  that number rose to 26, excluding pet food. Salmonella accounted for a sizable share of August’s food recall notices, with 12 of the 26 recalls referencing potential Salmonella contamination, as compared to just two in July, and one in August of each of the previous two years, according to The New Republic.

The affected products were all over the grocery aisle: radishes, mangoes, alfalfa sprouts, granola and jalapeños have all been recalled over potential Salmonella contamination. 

Sometimes the reasons for recalls were due to mislabeled products or foreign substances. With Halloween right around the corner, those looking for a sweet treat might get the trick, too: chocolate eyeballs were recalled for undeclared milk, meaning milk was left off the label. Ready-to-go baked spaghetti instead? Watch out for aluminum slivers. Craving a fruit bar in this summer heat? Careful, glass got your tongue. Vegan frozen dessert sandwiches? Surprise: they may contain egg. An almond and cocoa spread may come with unlisted cashews, pistachios and hazelnuts, too.

The list has gotten so long that people took to X to keep track. “America, welcome to the wheel of misfortune,” one X user wrote after the tofu recall, joking that this week’s spring had landed on tofu contaminated with ink. 

But counting recall notices isn’t the same thing as counting outbreaks or illnesses. Recalls can happen for vastly different reasons, from bacterial contamination and undeclared allergens to foreign objects such as glass, metal or plastic. They can also vary dramatically in scale and severity.

A single contamination event can also trigger multiple recall notices as ingredients move through the supply chain. One Salmonella outbreak linked to jalapeños this summer, for example, resulted in several downstream recalls of products containing the recalled peppers, according to the FDA.

“There isn’t one single factor driving the number we’re seeing,” Melanie Nuce-Hilton, Senior Vice President of Customer Success at GS1 US, told Fortune

Some recalls carry far greater consequences than others. Midwest Poultry Services recalled nearly 1.6 million dozen eggs—almost 19 million eggs—after detecting a potential Salmonella contamination at two Texas farms. The outbreak sickened at least 98 people across 17 states and hospitalized 26. Nuce-Hilton said recalls can be evidence that food-safety systems are identifying problems and removing affected products from the market. However, Vineet Dubey, a Los Angeles-based environmental attorney, told Fortune they can also expose weaknesses in the system.

“People could argue that numerous recalls mean better detection, but they can also expose weaknesses,” said Dubey. “The real question isn’t simply why we’re recalling more food; it’s why contaminated food is making it far enough through the supply chain to require a recall.”

Food agencies have fewer eyes on the problem 

Those concerns are arriving at a time when the federal agencies responsible for food safety have also undergone significant staffing cuts. More than 20,000 employees left the Department of Agriculture last year, while the FDA lost thousands of employees amid the Trump administration’s push to shrink the federal workforce. Reuters reported that staffing cuts disrupted some of the FDA’s food-safety work, including a quality-control program for laboratories that test food for contaminants. The USDA’s National Advisory Committee on Microbiological Criteria for Foods, which provided scientific advice on foodborne pathogens, was also terminated.

“We cannot ignore the impact of government staffing cuts on food safety,” Dubey said. “The FDA has lost a significant portion of its workforce, giving Americans fewer eyes watching the products we consume.”

Dubey cautioned that does not mean every recall is the result of staffing cuts. And the higher August count alone doesn’t establish that America’s food supply has suddenly become less safe.

The FDA did not immediately respond to Fortune’s request for comment.

One recall can scare shoppers away from an entire aisle

Whatever is driving the increase, consumers aren’t always limiting their reaction to the products regulators actually tell them to avoid.

“Consumers are making a category-level decision about a product-level problem,” Nuce-Hilton said.

Most recalls are much narrower, affecting certain products, lots, batches or regions during a particular timeframe. But when shoppers respond by avoiding the entire category, Nuce-Hilton said, companies whose products were never involved can lose sales and perfectly safe food can end up in the trash.

Part of the problem is figuring out whether the food sitting in the refrigerator is actually part of the recall.

Consumers may have to find the recall alert, inspect the packaging and match a lot code that can itself be difficult to read, Nuce-Hilton said. Faced with that process, some simply throw the food away as a precaution. Fifty-nine percent of those surveyed said they’ve discarded recalled food even when their state or region wasn’t affected.

Tracing the food itself isn’t always simple, either. Nuce-Hilton explained how fresh produce can be particularly difficult to trace because of how many hands it can pass through before reaching consumers. A single shipment may contain produce from multiple fields or growers before moving between packers, distributors, processors and retailers. Along the way, products can be repacked or combined with other lots, making it harder to preserve information about exactly where a particular item came from.

When that information gets separated from the food, companies can have a harder time isolating exactly what needs to be recalled and may end up pulling more product than necessary, she said.

When every recall sounds urgent

The food industry and regulators are trying to make that process more precise.

The FDA’s Food Traceability Rule requires companies that manufacture, process, pack or hold certain foods to maintain additional records as those products move through the supply chain. Those records are intended to help regulators identify and remove potentially contaminated food faster and must be provided to the FDA within 24 hours when requested. The rule was originally set for compliance in January, but Congress has directed the agency not to enforce the rule before July 20, 2028, giving companies more time to implement the new requirements.

GS1 US is also working with brands to transition from traditional UPCs to two-dimensional barcodes capable of carrying more detailed batch- and item-level information. One goal, Nuce-Hilton said, is for shoppers to eventually scan a package and determine whether their particular item is part of a recall instead of guessing.

The bigger risk is that as recall notices pile up, they all start to sound the same. Nuce-Hilton said consumers need to quickly understand how serious a recall is, whether the product they have is affected, and what they should do about it.

“When a shopper can get those answers quickly, the urgent recalls are perceived as urgent,” she said. “When they can’t, every recall carries the same weight, and eventually it’s possible that none of them do.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

He might be the second-youngest mayor in New York City history, but 34-year-old Mayor Zohran Mamdani didn’t have AI in school, and he wants to make sure city kids don’t either.

The digital-native politician, who said he doesn’t use AI himself, announced on Wednesday alongside Schools Chancellor Kamar Samuels a one-year moratorium on student-facing generative AI for children in 2-K through eighth grade, covering nearly 600,000 students in the country’s largest public school system and banning companion chatbots across every grade.

“The tech industry wants us to believe that AI in early education is not only inevitable, but that it is necessary. We do not see it that way,” Mamdani said at a news conference announcing the ban.

“I have yet to see a study showing that AI is beneficial for students in elementary and middle school, with the exception, of course, of research sponsored by the very corporations that stand to profit.”

City Hall is calling it the most expansive student-facing AI policy in the country. “The tech industry wants us to believe that A.I.-powered early education is not only inevitable, but necessary. We do not see it that way,” Mamdani said in a statement announcing the policy, and at the conference, he added that the city would “embrace new technology, but only when it serves our students.”

“Kids need to learn to think for themselves, they need to work alongside their peers, they need to learn how to ask better questions, and they need to learn what it feels like to not know the answer,” Mamdani said. “This is what learning is all about, and it is what city government is determined to protect.”

But back in April, over 250 education experts exclusively told Fortune they were calling on the mayor to instill a five-year moratorium. At the time, the city’s AI guidance for schools was still the permissive “traffic light” version, which sorted AI uses into barred, cautioned, and allowed categories but left student use it in a vague, use-with-caution middle tier. Leonie Haimson of the Parent Coalition for Student Privacy at the time told Fortune: “He said he himself doesn’t use AI, which is good, but why is he foisting it on New York City public school students?”

Now, the city’s policy is stuck between two worlds: education advocates are asking for more, while proponents of the AI believe a moratorium even of one year will adversely affect students.

The ask and the outcome

In April, when that coalition of more than 250 doctors, child development experts and advocacy organizations called for a five-year moratorium on generative AI in pre-K through 12 schools, the worry was about teaching kids how to learn. “We just don’t want to waste another 10 years in which our kids’ education is undermined,” Haimson said. “It took more than 10 years to ban cell phones from schools. We can’t afford that again.”

Two months later, a majority of the City Council signed a letter asking Mamdani and Samuels to “immediately pause” AI in schools for two years, citing risks to student privacy and critical thinking. Parents, teachers and artists rallied at City Hall over the summer pushing the same two-year figure. The administration landed on one year on Wednesday.

Fairplay, a child advocacy group that led the coalition back in April, released a statement following the mayor’s moratorium announcement, in which Campaign Director David Monahan called the policy “a step in the right direction” that nonetheless “raises serious concerns.”

“AIM has been saying all along that New York City Public Schools need a two-year pause on AI to craft the most democratic and durable policy for students and the community,” Monahan said, using the coalition’s own name for itself, the AI Moratorium for NYC Schools. “It’s not too late to heed their call.”

In April, a DOE spokesperson told Fortune: “We know we must design educational spaces that never lose sight of original thinking or human-centered learning while advancing AI literacy safely and responsibly.” This week, Samuels used nearly identical framing: “We’re standing firmly in our belief that innovation does not mean more technology.”

Samuels later acknowledged the March policy “missed the mark,” and Wednesday’s one-year moratorium replaced it, five months on.

The case against the pause

Not everyone thinks a moratorium is the right call. The most visible pushback comes from Bill Ackman, the hedge fund manager behind Pershing Square Capital Management, who has spent the past year promoting Alpha School, a private network that condenses academic instruction into two hours a day using AI tutoring software and has a campus a few blocks from City Hall. Ackman has called it ‘the first truly breakthrough innovation in K-12 education’ since KIPP Academy, arguing that classrooms ‘haven’t fundamentally changed in 200 years’ while AI is transforming everything else.

He’s not alone. More than 250 CEOs—including the heads of Microsoft, Adobe, Dell, AMD and IBM—signed an open letter through the nonprofit CSforAll’s Unlock8 campaign calling for mandatory computer science and AI education in every U.S. high school, arguing that early, universal exposure is what prevents a widening skills gap rather than causes one.

“In the age of AI, we must prepare our children for the future—to be AI creators, not just consumers,” the letter states. President Trump signed a related executive order in April 2025 directing federal agencies to expand AI training grants and classroom resources for K-12 students, framing early AI literacy as a matter of economic competitiveness.

That argument surfaced inside Mamdani’s own announcement. Julie Samuels, president and CEO of the tech industry group Tech:NYC, was one of the outside voices quoted in the city’s press release, and her praise came with a pointed caveat: citing a CBRE report showing New York now has more tech jobs than the Bay Area, she said the city should “expand this access beyond one hour per week in the future” for high schoolers using AI career-readiness tools, rather than treat exposure to the technology as something to ration.

Even the mayor addressed the city’s decision to allow AI in schools—but only for high schoolers.

“Whether we like it or not, our teenagers are growing up in an AI-saturated world. We cannot pretend that that world does not exist. It would be irresponsible not to prepare our children for the fast-evolving technological future that lies ahead,” Mamdani said at the conference. “So, in high school we will teach our students about AI, its opportunities and its pitfalls, its building blocks and its biases.”

“But I want to be very clear: In no way, shape or form will AI replace student-teacher interaction,” he said. “It is the foundation of our students’ educational experience. That will not change.”

It’s also not the first time the city’s own school system has made the workforce-readiness case for AI over caution. In 2023, then-Chancellor David Banks reversed an earlier ChatGPT ban, writing in a Chalkbeat op-ed that the “knee-jerk fear and risk overlooked the potential of generative AI to support students and teachers” and that students would enter a workforce where understanding the technology was essential.

A few miles away, a different bet

Just a few miles from the Brooklyn school where Mamdani made the announcement is the Alpha School, a private network at 180 Maiden Lane in the Financial District, which condenses academic instruction into two hours a day using AI-driven tutoring software, then spends the rest of the school day on workshops—leadership, entrepreneurship, life skills. There’s no homework. Staff are called “guides.” Tuition runs close to $65,000 a year.

Alpha claims its students rank in the top 1 to 2% nationally, and as a private network, It faces no requirement to report outcome data to the state, making the claims hard to independently verify. Internal documents obtained by 404 Media earlier this year showed the network’s AI-generated lesson content included poorly structured material and illogical multiple-choice questions, Futurism reported in July.

A spokesperson from Alpha told Fortune that Alpha’s AI-powered learning platform was built with input from learning scientists, including Carl Hendrick, a King’s College London PhD who has published on evidence-based teaching methods. Alpha’s model compresses two hours of AI-driven instruction into the morning, well above the 98-minute daily average U.S. students spend on school-issued devices.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

In a world of infinite information, trust is the scarcest resource.

In 1999, I co-founded Epinions, one of the first user-generated review sites, and helped pioneer the reviews economy. The premise was that anyone could review anything, and the collective judgment of the masses would sum to something useful.

Epinions succeeded. We sold the company to eBay. But it, along with the review sites that followed, set an industry in motion that would eventually be gamed. Today’s online reviews are a mix of the genuine and the fabricated: real experiences sitting next to anonymous ratings that can be manufactured or bought, often indistinguishable from the real thing. It got bad enough that in 2024, the Federal Trade Commission finalized a landmark rule making deceptive review and testimonial practices illegal.

I had a stake in that fight in 1999, and I find myself with one again now. I co-founded Nextdoor, a neighborhood network built on real identity and local trust. A large part of how neighbors use Nextdoor is to gather local advice and recommendations — reviews, in effect — on local businesses and service providers. My co-founders and I didn’t set out to get back into the reviews business. But here we are, and the timing works in our favor: in today’s world, who’s behind the review matters more than ever.

The platforms at the center of this problem aren’t oblivious to it. They’ve built out enforcement teams, sued fake-review brokers, and removed hundreds of millions of fraudulent reviews over the past year alone. The fake and manipulated share of reviews kept growing anyway. That’s not evidence the effort isn’t real. It’s evidence that policing anonymous content after the fact can’t keep pace with how cheap it’s gotten to fake it in the first place.

Eighty-five percent of consumers now suspect online reviews are fake, and eighty-eight percent say they can’t tell which ones are real. None of that has killed the habit. People still want reviews and still act on them. What’s eroding is their ability to tell which ones deserve their trust. What they actually want to know is who’s telling them this, and why they should believe them.

What makes a recommendation trustworthy?

What the latest issues with the review industry have shown us is that any trust signal is only as durable as what it costs to fake and what you lose when you’re caught. Star ratings fail both tests. There’s no way to know who’s behind the rating, or what their bar for five stars even is. An anonymous rating costs nothing to manufacture, and no one pays a price when it’s exposed.

An accountable written recommendation passes both tests. When a neighbor recommends a contractor under their real name, you know exactly who’s vouching for them, and what that neighbor stands to lose, in reputation and relationship, if the contractor wrecks your kitchen. The reviewer has skin in the game. The star never did.

Early research fielded this summer by the consumer-insights platform Echo points in the same direction: nearly half of respondents said they’d suspected a fake or manipulated review in the past year, and 81% said they’d trust a recommendation more if the person making it were held socially accountable.

When a machine answers instead of a person

Ask a model today to name the best pizza place in town and you’ll get a confident, instant answer for free. But abundance always changes what’s scarce. Information used to be scarce. Now it’s free and instant. Provenance isn’t.

The machines giving those answers are trained on the same reviews we already can’t trust. It turns out they’re no better than we are at telling which ones are real. A 2025 study out of Nottingham University Business School found that AI-generated fake reviews are now indistinguishable from real ones, to human readers and to other AI models alike. This reality just creates more unreliable confusion for the end consumer.  

And AI presents problems for the businesses being reviewed. They have no way to influence the answers the LLMs produce, and even more problematic, many of them have been targets of “AI bombing”, the practice of using generative AI to rapidly create and post large volumes of fake, misleading, or low-quality reviews about a business, artificially manipulating its online reputation.

A competitor, a bad actor, anyone with a prompt, can now bury a business under thousands of reviews it never earned, and no model, human or otherwise, can reliably tell the fake from the real. When reputation can be manufactured at scale, provenance stops being a nice-to-have. It becomes the whole business.”

A simple test you can use

What I started with Epinions became an industry all its own, one that’s still serving, and potentially costing, the consumers who rely on it today. Before you act on a recommendation you find online, ask who’s telling you this and what they have to gain or lose. That question hasn’t changed since 1999. What’s changed is how much the industry profits when you don’t ask it.

The opinions expressed in Fortune.com commentary pieces are solely the views of their authors and do not necessarily reflect the opinions and beliefs of Fortune.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

  • In today’s CEO Daily: How leaders are contending with AI slop.
  • The big leadership story: Trump’s salary freeze prompts worries about worker retention.
  • The markets: Mixed globally amid more fighting between the U.S. and Iran.
  • Plus: All the news and watercooler chat from Fortune.

Good morning. What’s your take on AI slop? I now get multiple AI-generated PR pitches every day. The format is comically uniform, from the greeting to the bullet-point topics, and I think it’s a disservice to the person being pitched. We all crave that human touch. More than 1 million people have clicked LinkedIn’s “seems like AI slop” button, and Graphite reports that AI now generates more online articles than humans do.

The explosion of AI-written content is sparking debates over how to handle op-eds like the one that investor Stan Druckenmiller wrote for the Wall Street Journal using AI, which sparked a response from his editor, and much debate about what’s appropriate. (My take, with strong caveats, is that editors are to blame if a piece feels manufactured, predictable, and devoid of personality. I also debated the topic yesterday on BBC’s The Media Show.)

I’ve been asking people how AI is shaping what they consume and create. At a party for David Booth’s terrific book Stay Calm earlier this week, a prominent academic told me he’s now using AI up to 10 hours every day, admitting he’s both obsessed and worried about what it can do. 

But Booth, a pioneer of index investing and founder of Dimensional Fund Advisors, is a fine example of what doesn’t change. His book tells a story that only he can tell—how he went from a shoe salesman in Kansas to a $1 trillion asset manager—and it synthesizes a philosophy of investing that he’s discussed and shared for decades. 

Did he use a ghostwriter or AI? If he did, you wouldn’t know it.

What’s emerging from my conversations:

AI leaves leaders craving a good read. CEOs tell me they’re reading fewer books and reports because of AI, and that worries them. They’re not alone. About 40% of Americans didn’t read a book last year. One CEO in financial services told me that they’re now trying to read more the old-fashioned way. “I’m paid to think,” they told me, “and I realized I’m losing the nuance and originality of an argument when I read these summaries. A slower read, a deeper read, gives you more time to digest and come to your own conclusions.” 

We value human creativity. I spoke yesterday with Andy Hunter, CEO of Bookshop.org, which acts as an e-commerce platform for 90% of the country’s 3,400+ independent booksellers—a category that’s booming, by the way. He uses AI for code review but not customer recommendations. He worries less about slop than fraud, as he’s seeing a lot of AI-generated books created on the spot to capitalize on search trends. “There’s a lot of garbage content being created to trick people into buying it; I don’t think Amazon is doing a good enough job of protecting their customers from that,” he told me. “We want human beings to recommend books to other human beings. That’s what independent bookstores do. The solution to AI slop is human curation, human creation.”

When everyone’s better, it’s hard to be the best. The baseline for content and communication is now around B+. Anyone can tell a coherent story. But having the tools to create a Hollywood movie on an iPhone doesn’t make you a great director any more than the ability to spit out a column makes you a great thought leader. AI expands the mushy middle, where nobody wants to be. As David Meadvin, CEO of One Strategy Group, puts it: “I think the right question to ask here is whether AI is making you a little bit more ordinary.”

Contact CEO Daily via Diane Brady at diane.brady@fortune.com

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Good morning. On Fortune’s radar today:

  • The White House’s misleading stats on oil shipments from the Gulf.
  • There was ‘near-zero employment growth in August,’ Vanguard says.
  • Markets: We’re having an up day.
  • Chart: How Elon Musk’s Starlink dominates space.
  • Foldable iPhone Ultra will be Apple’s most expensive handset ever.
  • Women and Millennials want their dates to earn way, way more than average.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Welcome to this week’s Fortune Gulf Brief. We’ll be covering:  

  • Saudi’s $15 billion tech deals put AI ambitions on show 
  • Dubai airport’s wartime fightback 
  • Washington turns the screws on UAE banks over Iran 
  • Syria’s ‘Coffee Visa Swipe’ signals a financial comeback 
  • And, the three things we enjoyed reading this week   

LEAP, Saudi’s biggest tech conference, kicked off on Monday with $15 billion worth of planned technology investments and strategic commitments being unveiled, helping make up for lost time after the event was delayed by four months due to the Iran war.  

San Francisco-based AI cloud platform Together AI signed an agreement with Saudi-backed HUMAIN to build a 250 Megawatt (MW) AI data center in the kingdom.  It is expected to yield over $5 billion in gross annualized revenue in its first year.  

Also notable is Amazon Web Services’ (AWS) expanded partnership with HUMAIN—the key vehicle for Saudi’s AI ambitions which aims to provide up to 50 MW of capacity in the kingdom’s first AI Zone by 2028. 

Meanwhile, Elon Musk’s xAI announced plans to build its first data center outside the U.S., initially targeting 50MW of capacity before scaling to 500MW.  

Riyadh is increasingly competing with its Gulf neighbors, most notably the UAE, to become the region’s AI hub.  

In a clear endorsement of its ambitions, LEAP 2026 has seen senior leaders from global tech behemoths, including NVIDIA, Google, Roblox, Uber, Meta, Lenovo, Nokia and Luma AI, fly in for the event despite the ongoing geopolitical instability.  

Since LEAP launched in 2022, Saudi Arabia’s digital economy has grown by 69%, from $118 billion to $199 billion, according to the kingdom’s Communications and Information Technology Ministry. 

This year’s event features 1,800 global technology brands exploring the future of AI, cloud computing, cybersecurity, smart cities, fintech, healthcare, space, gaming, and mobility. And, of course, the now seemingly mandatory robots to showcase the latest technological advancements.  

Melissa Hancock

As ever, thanks for reading, and do keep in touch with your thoughts and ideas.
melissa.hancock@fortune.com 

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Pope Francis spent much of his papacy pushing the Catholic Church to treat climate change as a moral issue in addition to a scientific. Now, the Holy See’s plan is putting money behind that morality and looking to make the Vatican the world’s first carbon-neutral state.

Vatican City, which covers about 44 hectares, or 109 acres, will put roughly 100 million euros ($117 million) toward an agrivoltaic plant expected to power the microstate within two years, sources told Reuters.

The plan builds on what Pope Francis first ordered in 2024. Pope Leo has spent the past year moving it through the bureaucratic steps needed to build it by creating a foundation, a memorandum with an Italian utility, and a joint commission. What’s new is that this is the first time a dollar figure has been attached to the plan. And it also puts into context what we’re doing stateside.

The Vatican is roughly an eighth the size of Central Park. It’s smaller than a single data center campus like Meta’s Hyperion data center project in Louisiana, which is on track to draw as much as 5 gigawatts of power by 2030. Home to roughly 800 residents and nearly 3,000 commuting lay workers, it’s the smallest country on Earth by a wide margin.

It’s so small that the plant won’t fit within the country’s 109 acres: It’s being built on the roughly 1,050-to-1,100-acre Santa Maria di Galeria estate the Vatican owns outside Rome, land close in size to the campus for OpenAI’s Stargate data center in Abilene, Texas. But where Stargate’s footprint is built to support 1.2 gigawatts of AI computing, the Vatican’s similarly sized site is expected to generate just 80 to 90 megawatts of capacity, per Reuters, or roughly a dozen times less power on similar acreage. But that’s because it’s built to run a few hundred residents’ worth of lights and a radio transmitter, not racks of GPUs.

At risk of power shortages

A single large AI data center now consumes as much electricity as a city of 80,000 people, Khosla Ventures founder Vinod Khosla wrote in Fortune this year, and companies are building hundreds of them at once. Data centers accounted for roughly half of all new U.S. electricity demand in 2025, and globally, data center electricity use is projected to more than double by 2030 to around 945 terawatt-hours, equivalent to Japan’s entire current electricity consumption.

The buildout is reshaping the U.S. utility business, too. NextEra Energy’s $66.8 billion deal to acquire Dominion Energy in May was driven largely by AI data center demand clustered in Virginia, rather than residential growth. American Electric Power plans to spend $78 billion through 2030 to keep pace. Goldman Sachs projected the AI buildout will push US electricity costs up 6% between 2026 and 2027, with a further 3% increase by 2028, increasing neighboring homeowners’ utility bills. By contrast, the Vatican’s entire planned plant would generate less power than a single mid-sized AI campus, let alone the industry racing to build hundreds more.

The new plant would also dwarf what the Vatican currently produces. Its only existing solar installation—2,394 panels on the roof of the Paul VI Audience Hall, installed in 2008—generates about 300 megawatt-hours a year. The new plant’s 80- to 90-megawatt capacity alone is hundreds of times larger than that. The Vatican’s 2023 climate pledge to the UN sets a 20% emissions cut from 2011 levels by 2030 and a “zero emissions” goal by 2050.

Trump at odds with the Vatican

The Church’s position on climate traces to Francis’s 2015 encyclical “Laudato Si’,” which argued that wealthy nations bear disproportionate responsibility for emissions and called for a shift away from fossil fuels. Pope Leo XIV has continued holding that stance since Francis’s death, calling for “urgent” climate action at a UN conference this year and saying that God’s creation is “crying out.” He’s also labeled new technology, including AI, a moral concern: Leo has said he chose his papal name partly in reference to Pope Leo XIII, who wrote about protecting workers during the first Industrial Revolution, and is applying that same lens to AI’s effect on labor today.

That stance puts the Vatican at odds with the current U.S. administration: President Donald Trump has called climate change “the greatest con job ever perpetrated on the world,” and the U.S. skipped this year’s UN climate conference entirely. Trump and Leo have also clashed more publicly over Trump’s military actions in Venezuela and Iran and his administration’s immigration policies, with Trump at one point suggesting Leo’s election as pope was illegitimate. Fiscally, the U.S. ended a 2025 federal credit for residential solar as the EPA canceled a $7 billion low-income solar program in August. A BlueGreen Alliance tally found 223 clean-energy projects, worth $82.8 billion, canceled or stalled since the policy shift.

After Francis formalized the Vatican’s plan in a June 2024 letter called “Fratello Sole,” Leo kept it moving, visiting the site in June 2025 and calling it “a wonderful opportunity.” Italy agreed to the plan in July 2025, and the Vatican formalized ties with the Italian utility ACEA in June 2026 to build it jointly. Sources told Reuters the full build is expected to take 18 to 24 months.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Tim Cook may be giving up Apple’s top job, but the company isn’t letting its longtime CEO fall far from the tree just yet.

Cook, who handed the CEO title to longtime hardware chief John Ternus on Tuesday, will stay on as executive chair for the tech company, earning an annual salary of $2 million effective Sept. 26. As chair, Cook will continue assisting with certain aspects of Apple, including “engaging with policymakers around the world,” the company said in April when it announced his new role.

Part of the reason Cook may stay on at Apple is that during his 15 year tenure, he became a sort of “Trump whisperer” in navigating the company’s relationship with the president. Cook earned the nickname “Trump whisperer” for his ability to strike deals and keep things smooth with the president, as seen through both his tariff negotiations and this year’s CEO transition.

Cook even said he’d continued to manage the company’s relationship with not only Trump but also the Chinese government, according to Bloomberg. Those relationships have become increasingly important to Apple as its sprawling Asian supply chain puts the company in the middle of Trump’s push to use tariffs to bring more manufacturing to the U.S.—and leaves it navigating tensions between Washington and Beijing.

His package won’t be limited to the $2 million annual comp either—he was approved for an equity award with a target value of $45 million, according to a regulatory filing.

Cook leaves the CEO job after 15 years at Apple’s helm, having taken over shortly before cofounder Steve Jobs’ death in 2011. During his tenure, Apple’s market capitalization grew from roughly $347 billion to $4.6 trillion, all while increasingly navigating government alongside products and operations.

How Tim Cook became the ‘Trump whisperer’

Cook figured out relatively early how to get Trump’s ear.

“He’s the one that calls me,” Trump told reporters in 2019 when he was asked why he had a good relationship with Cook compared with other tech executives. At the time, tariffs were a problem. Trump said Cook had argued that levies on Apple’s China-made products could put the company at a disadvantage against South Korean rival Samsung.

That relationship would be tested again after Trump returned to the White House. In February 2025, Apple announced it would spend $500 billion in the U.S. over four years, including plans to hire 20,000 workers. 

But Cook’s access to Trump did not mean Apple always got what it wanted. By May 2025, Trump was publicly criticizing Apple as the company expanded iPhone production in India, as part of its efforts to reduce its reliance on China.

“I had a little problem with Tim Cook yesterday,” Trump said at the time, recounting a conversation with the Apple CEO.

Trump said he told Cook that he didn’t want Apple expanding production in India and wanted the company to manufacture more in the U.S. Days later, the president threatened Apple with a tariff of at least 25% on iPhones sold in the U.S. but manufactured elsewhere.

Three months later, Cook was back in the Oval Office standing beside Trump, and he arrived with a customized “Made in USA” glass plaque mounted on a 24-karat gold stand for the president. 

Last August, Apple announced another $100 billion commitment to U.S. manufacturing, bringing its planned domestic spending to $600 billion over four years. 

The timing mattered. Trump was preparing to impose a roughly 100% tariff on imported semiconductor chips, but said during the Oval Office event that companies building in the U.S. would not have to pay the levy. 

That work extends well beyond the White House. Apple remains heavily dependent on Asia for manufacturing even as it has shifted some production away from China, leaving the company exposed to the relationship between the world’s two largest economies. Cook has spent years navigating Apple’s relationship with Beijing, and earlier this year, he was among a group of U.S. executives expected to accompany Trump on a trip to Beijing as the president prepared to meet Chinese President Xi Jinping.

Trump has offered his own explanation for why the relationship endured. When Cook announced in April that he would step down as CEO, the president recalled receiving his first call from the Apple executive during his first administration.

“When I got the call I said, wow, it’s Tim Apple (Cook!) calling,” Trump wrote on his social media app, Truth Social, a nod to when he years earlier referred to Cook as “Tim Apple.” Trump called it the beginning of “a long and very nice relationship.” He said Cook continued calling him over the years—but “never too much”—and that he would help the Apple CEO where he could.

“What I do is I interact on policy, not politics,” Cook told ABC’s “Good Morning America” earlier this year in March. “I focus on policy.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

President Donald Trump is taking action to ensure most federal workers do not see a pay increase next year and denying concerns about its impact on employee retention and agency productivity, despite warnings to the contrary.

Trump’s 2027 fiscal budget proposal did not mention pay increases for civilian federal employees, who include air traffic controllers, IRS tax auditors, and food safety inspectors. In a letter to House Speaker Mike Johnson last week, Trump confirmed that these employees would not see a pay increase for next year. Meanwhile, members of the military would see between a 5% to 7% pay increase, part of an effort to “rebuild our military’s readiness and capabilities.”

The president noted that a pay freeze for most employees was a result of increased inflation levels during the Biden administration. Inflation has increased from 3% to 3.4% since Trump took office in January 2025.

“Such a large raise for Federal employees while most Americans still struggle with the consequences of the Biden Administration’s giant inflation spree is unacceptable and would be unfair,” Trump wrote.

Trump insisted the move would not impact workforce levels, arguing, “This decision will maintain fiscal responsibility without harming the government’s ability to recruit and retain well qualified employees.”

The Office of Management and Budget did not respond to Fortune’s request for comment and inquiry into why some government employees would receive a raise and others would not.

Federal workforce retention has been a concern for years, with policy think tank RAND finding in a 2014 analysis that permanent pay freezes between 2011 and 2013 decreased workforce retention among Department of Defense civilian employees with bachelor’s degrees or higher by 7.3%.

For many agencies, retaining employees has become more urgent following DOGE, or Department of Government Efficiency-led job cuts, which have been associated with increased burnout and decreased job engagement among still-employed workers. That’s to say nothing of the 271,566 workers who have left the federal government since the beginning of the Trump administration, according to the Office of Personnel Management.

The nonprofit Partnership for Public Service, noted in a report last month that the deferred resignation program (DRP) carried out by DOGE, in which employers were offered the chance to resign in exchange for a period of full pay and benefits, may have already had adverse impacts on the workforce. DRP was responsible for about 40% of departures from the U.S. government last year, according to the report, and often resulted in a position being refilled by a more junior employee with less expertise and institutional knowledge.

“While it is impossible to fully quantify this loss of institutional knowledge and capacity, one thing is clear,” the report said. The DRP has made it harder for agencies across the government to serve the public.”

Federal workers, legislators sounding the alarms   

Unions representing federal employees warned the pay freeze will indeed lead to more attrition of the workforce, as well as ultimately cost the U.S. government more money in having to rehire and retrain for specialized roles.

“This ‘more work for less pay’ policy will only drive the most valuable employees out of federal service, costing Americans in degraded services,” NARFE National President William Shackelford said in a statement. “Without a meaningful increase, more high-performing, undervalued employees will likely leave public service, and it will be more difficult or more expensive to hire and train replacements. Without adequate staffing, federal government operations and services on behalf of the American people will suffer.”

The Professional Aviation Safety Specialists (PASS), which represents 11,000 Federal Aviation Administration employees at the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA), expressed concern that a pay freeze will lead to slowed recruitment efforts, which would hamper the organization’s ability to modernize its air traffic control systems. 

The FAA has grappled for decades with a shortage of air traffic controllers and outdated systems that has the agency buying spare parts from eBay to repair old equipment. Earlier this year, the Department of Transportation launched a recruitment campaign targeting Gen Z gamers, hiring 2,000 air traffic controllers since its kick-off.

“As workers fall behind in compensation, fewer will accept positions with the FAA, and experienced employees will have less of an incentive to remain at the agency. This will likely slow down the progress of implementation,” PASS National President Dave Spero said in a statement. “Aviation safety inspectors and other critical employees will begin to retire and the recruitment of these aviation safety professionals will suffer.”

There’s a chance these fears won’t come to fruition, as Congress may supersede the proposal through its own appropriations legislation. In 2019, a Democrat-controlled House overrode Trump’s proposal to freeze pay for federal workers with a 1.9% pay increase retroactive to the beginning of the year, that Trump signed. Democratic legislators Rep. James Walkinshaw of Virginia and Sen. Brian Schatz of Hawaii have introduced the FAIR Act that would give a 4.1% federal pay raise next year.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

It’s no secret AI giants are racing against each other to build data centers across the country. With the AI boom skyrocketing in the 2020s, the U.S. has grown to nearly 5,000 data centers across all 50 states to date, with hyperscalers driving much of that expansion. But with that growth comes tax incentives that seem to scale further than market competition.

According to a report from JLL, a commercial real estate and investment management company, the global data center sector will likely expand at a 14% compound annual growth rate through 2030—and it notes “hyperscalers will remain a key driver of sector growth.” And with that growth comes significant savings for the hyperscalers: nearly three-quarters of all states employ tax incentives for data center development—which include exemptions from sales and use tax, property tax and “financial transactions” tax. 

The eligibility of these exemptions differ state by state, however. Some states like Texas require a substantial—at least $200 million—capital investment in the data center project, others such as Maine require a certain amount of square footage to be eligible, and a few states also require employment metrics to be met. Certain states, like New York, have no minimum investment requirement—and to sweeten the deal further, the tax exemptions are applicable for a wide range of data center expenditures.

Such measures are evident in the New York Department of Taxation and Finance structure, for example, in which data center tax incentive eligibility covers property, services, equipment and contracts. The incentives for the data centers themselves lie in the inherent replacement cycle required for upgrades and system life. 

Capital expenditures like electrical systems, batteries and structures have usable lives in excess of 20 years—but other types of equipment such as cloud computing operations often have lives of as short as three years due to the high strain of AI computing. Based on the nature of equipment churn, the Tax Foundation found that a $5 billion data center could “easily spend more than a billion dollars a year on machinery and equipment,” making sales taxation a “significant” consideration when choosing development.

Data centers, assuming they meet the minimum threshold required to be eligible depending on the state, are exempt from paying sales tax on equipment and machinery for years following their construction. States that already do not employ sales tax, such as New Jersey, incentivize data center development through property tax abatements and tax credits instead. This effectively means states are passing up billions in tax revenue to further cultivate the AI boom.

And that’s creating a real financial problem for some states.

According to an investigative report by Good Jobs First, at least 14 states failed to disclose tax abatement revenue losses suffered from data centers. Illinois isn’t one of those 14, but it does have a related issue—the state has historically “published evidence [which] shows soaring revenue losses.”

“The number of data center projects awarded the sales and use tax exemption in the Prairie State increased from six in 2020 to 27 by 2024,” the report read. “The Department of Commerce and Economic Opportunity’s annual Data Center Investment Program report stopped providing an annual revenue-loss number in FY 2023.”

Qualified data centers in Illinois receive exemptions from state and local sales and use taxes on “tangible personal property essential to operations,” according to the Illinois Data Center Investment Program. The equipment property eligible includes servers, computers, data storage devices, electrical systems, network and telecommunications infrastructure, software, climate control systems and building materials incorporated into the facilities. The state also offers a 20% income tax credit on wages paid to construction workers involved in building the center. These exemptions are valid for up to 20 years within renewable five-year increments, and are contingent on continued investment from the data center. This has caused states to roll-back on previous aggressive tax incentives for data center development.

But don’t think of these exemptions as a free gift for tech giants looking to build more property. Illinois requires a minimum capital investment of at least $250 million to be eligible for the tax exemption—and other states have minimum investments in the millions as well. Virginia, colloquially named “data center alley,” hosts nearly 35% of global total hyperscale facilities—and requires $150 million in capital investment with at least 50 new jobs located at each data center paying over 150% of the local average wage.

Across the country, minimum investment eligibility measures range from up to $450 million in Kentucky to as low as $2 million in parts of Maryland.

Is the juice worth the squeeze?

With all this, it’s still up in the air if this investment and tax incentives are truly stimulating the economy. 

A Georgia Tech study from July posits the capital investments of these data centers may help spur the local economy in the short-term, but long-term benefits have less measurable benefits. Based on the findings, employment rose about 3.5%, wages by 5% and household income by 2% when a data center opens. But the researchers also found that the “gains are much smaller than what might be expected from a large investment,” and “they’re not evenly distributed.”

The study also found that was a trade-off to the slight bump in economic development. The researchers found electricity prices rose about 5% after a data center began operation, mainly due to the large power consumption necessary to keep one running. This tracks with moves made by grid operators across the country, showing signs of the electricity bill attached with AI buildout.

“When the benefits to communities are small, even downsides like higher electricity prices that strain infrastructure will be felt by locals,” the study read.

Evidence from Brookings, a public policy thinktank, also found that data centers create local jobs—but not as much as industry advocates had claimed. According to its report, wages were unaffected by data center development, and “subsidies may matter more for precisely the facilities that generate the smallest employment benefits.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Nothing has the Democratic Party more split than taxing billionaires. San Francisco Democrats have broken with their statewide party over California’s proposed billionaire wealth tax, rejecting Proposition 40 in a lopsided vote that exposes a growing divide over whether taxing extreme wealth is worth the potential economic consequences. The San Francisco Democratic Party voted 17-4 to oppose Proposition 40—with five members abstaining, five members absent, and one member with no endorsement. Nancy Pelosi chose not to endorse the measure. This comes just weeks after the California Democratic Party endorsed the measure in August after a contentious vote that succeeded above the 60% threshold. 

California already depends heavily on wealthy residents for tax revenue, and a tax that encourages a portion of them to leave could undermine the state’s existing revenue base—and poses a consequential idea in San Francisco, where the technology industry has produced a large concentration of founders, investors and executives whose wealth has amassed in stock rather than cash. Six billionaires have already ended their California residency ahead of the January 1 deadline. 

“A unique feature of these 10b startups is that even if they raise a billion, little, if any of that money goes to the founders, who are now worth billions of dollars overnight,” Mark Cuban wrote on X regarding how the billionaire tax would affect startups in California. “They are the definition of cash poor, stock rich.”

Proposition 40 would impose a one-time tax of 5% on the net worth of people who were California residents on January 1, 2026, with more than $1 billion in assets. About 200 billionaires would be affected by this proposal—and they hold over $2 trillion in total assets. Taxpayers could spread their payments over five years, although doing so would cost more. Ninety percent of the resulting revenue would be directed toward healthcare services. The state’s Legislative Analyst’s Office estimates the measure could generate tens of billions of dollars in temporary revenue over several years.

“This temporary increase in state tax collections would be spread across several years. Exactly when and how much the state would collect is very hard to predict for many reasons,” the office analyzed. “For example, it is hard to know what actions billionaires would take to reduce the amount of tax they pay. Also, much of the wealth is based on stock prices, which are always changing.”

Revenue potential vs. billionaire exodus

That revenue potential is the central thesis from Prop 40’s supporters. SEIU-United Healthcare Workers West placed the initiative on the November ballot, and the California Labor Federation, the Teamsters, and progressive politicians including California Representative Ro Khanna and Vermont Senator Bernie Sanders back it.

According to a poll from the Institute of Governmental Studies at the University of California, Berkeley, 48% of potential voters would support the billionaire tax proposition, compared to 41% that would oppose it. 

But the proposition does not come with ways for California billionaires to dodge the tax. California’s Legislative Analyst’s Office says some billionaires could respond by leaving the state or changing their behavior in ways that reduce the amount of income tax they pay. The office estimates those responses could reduce ongoing state income-tax revenue by less than $1 billion annually. The state would also incur tens of millions of dollars in administrative costs over several years to assess and collect the new tax.

And the ultrawealthy are not just looking to leave. Billionaire-backed Propositions 41 and 42 would also effectively void the billionaire tax—funded through political organization Building a Better California. Proposition 41 would require state audits of programs funded by new special taxes, making it harder for the state to use funds raised by the billionaire tax. Proposition 42 would outlaw retroactive taxation, directly countering Proposition 40 and killing the wealth tax. 

Multiple high-profile billionaires have backed these measures, including Ripple co-founder Chris Larsen—who gave an extra $10 million. Other billionaires include Google co-founder Sergey Brin and former Google CEO Eric Schmidt, who have contributed over $118 million in total.

Khanna, a Silicon Valley Democrat and one of Proposition 40’s most prominent political supporters, took to X earlier this month championing the policy. During his X campaign, Khanna proposed a mechanism under which founders could pledge shares to the state and receive a government loan to pay the tax—which, according to the Rep., would be nonrecourse. This sparked backlash from billionaires in California and beyond, with ultrawealthy businessman Mark Cuban and Anduril Industries founder Palmer Luckey among those who entered a grudge match with the California representative. 

The dispute also helps explain why San Francisco Democrats were willing to break with their statewide organization. According to the party’s 2020 endorsement page, it could not endorse state propositions—noting it was “the role of the California Democratic Party.” But earlier this summer, the local party changed its bylaws to allow it to depart from California Democratic Party endorsements. The Prop 40 vote became the only statewide ballot proposition on the group’s agenda—and it came back 17-4.

The San Francisco Democratic Party did not immediately respond to a request for comment from Fortune.

The political split is also broader than San Francisco. California Governor Gavin Newsom has also openly opposed Proposition 40, as does gubernatorial candidate Xavier Becerra.

“It became certain that a wealth tax would be placed on the November ballot in California,” Newsom wrote in a Substack post in June. “I’m voting no.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

It seems like so long ago, but in the not-so-distant past, all of us were roaming the supermarket aisles for the last roll of TP, cursing at those who began stockpiling the rolls, and blaming the relative who brought a bidet back from Japan for not bringing one back for you as well. While the days of reaching for the last TP under a “limit one roll per customer” sign shoddily taped to the rack may be over, the thought of a shortage possibly returning to haunt the same president six years later isn’t far-fetched.

After trade talks between the U.S. and Canada broke down in late August, Washington imposed a 50% tariff on roughly $20 billion of Canadian goods under a section of the Tariff Act of 1930—a Depression-era law that lets the president retaliate against countries seen as discriminating against U.S. commerce. In response, Canadian Prime Minister Mark Carney vowed to match the US “dollar for dollar,” and unveiled retaliatory tariffs on close to 900 American products, set to take effect next week, on Sept. 8. Chief among them? Toilet paper and paper products.

“Canada will match those tariffs dollar for dollar,” Carney said two weeks ago. “Because we were attacked. Like, you’re at war when you get attacked.”

Paper goods are among the hardest hit. Canada’s retaliation puts a 25% duty on U.S. toilet paper and facial tissue, and a 50% duty on paper towels, napkins, and raw wood pulp. Canada is also charging 50% on American dairy products (except cheese, which gets 25%) and 25% on American fish and seafood, including frozen lobster. It’s in response to U.S. tariffs, including a 25% tariff on Canadian cars and auto parts—and Trump is now threatening to double that to 50% if no deal is reached by Jan. 1, 2027.

A Covid-era toilet paper shortage

On March 12, 2020, U.S. toilet paper sales surged 734% compared with the same day the year before, making it the top-selling grocery item that day. By the time the panic subsided, roughly 70% of the world’s grocery stores had run out of toilet paper at some point. Shelves that normally held Charmin and Cottonelle sat bare for weeks as retailers imposed purchase limits, and bamboo-paper startups saw Amazon sales jump more than 5,000% month over month as shoppers hunted for anything they could find. Researchers who studied the episode afterward found no actual break in production. Mills kept running. Hoarding, not a supply failure, created nearly all of it.

Eight months later, due to a confluence of the COVID-19 pandemic and his administration’s handling of the virus, President Donald Trump lost the presidency to Joe Biden. Toilet paper didn’t decide that election, but it became a small symbol of an economy that felt like it was slipping out of a president’s control, just as voters decided whether to give him another term.

Americans make up just 4% of the world’s population but use more than 20% of the world’s tissue supply, burning through an average of 141 rolls a year. Six years after the pandemic, Trump is again facing affordability and kitchen table prices, just as the midterms campaign season kicks into high gear.

The toilet paper supplier and tariffs

Trade talks between the US and Canada broke down in late August 2026. In response, Washington imposed a 50% tariff on roughly $20 billion (C$27.6 billion) of Canadian goods under Section 338 of the Tariff Act of 1930—a Depression-era law that lets the president retaliate against countries seen as discriminating against US commerce. Canadian Prime Minister Mark Carney vowed to match the US “dollar for dollar,” and Ottawa unveiled retaliatory tariffs on close to 900 American products, set to take effect September 8.

Paper goods are among the hardest hit. Canada’s retaliation puts a 25% duty on US toilet paper and facial tissue, and a 50% duty on paper towels, napkins, and raw wood pulp. The dispute doesn’t stop at paper: Canada is also charging 50% on American dairy products (except cheese, which gets 25%) and 25% on American fish and seafood, including frozen lobster, a move that drew criticism from Maine Senator Susan Collins. The US, for its part, has also placed a 25% tariff on Canadian cars and auto parts, with Trump threatening to double that to 50% if no deal is reached by January 1, 2027. To soften the blow at home, Ottawa announced a C$7.5 billion relief package for small and medium Canadian businesses hurt by the standoff.

Americans make up just 4% of the world’s population but use more than 20% of the world’s tissue supply, burning through an average of 141 rolls a year—the highest rate globally, just ahead of Germany’s 134.

In 2024, Canada supplied $328 million worth of toilet paper to the country, more than any other country, just as retailers like Costco source much of their private-label paper stock from Canadian mills. The supply chain complicates this as American factories rely on northern bleached softwood kraft pulp, or NBSK, harvested from Canadian forests, which makes up roughly 30% of a standard American toilet paper roll and close to half of U.S. paper towel production. U.S. mills buy about 2 million tons of Canadian NBSK a year.

Procter & Gamble, which makes Charmin, said tariffs are creating a roughly $0.25-per-share earnings headwind and is raising prices on a chunk of its lineup. Americans are paying 96% of the cost of Trump’s tariffs, and Federal Reserve research showed tariffs are now seeing “full pass-through” to consumer prices.

The American Forest & Paper Association, which did not respond to Fortune’s requests for comment, argues that any shortages would be localized rather than become national. It’s still urging consumers not to stock up ahead of the September 8 deadline.

All of this is posing a problem for Trump: Ahead of the midterms, his economic standing has slipped further than the White House would like. Just 39% of Americans approve of his job performance, and only 30% approve of his handling of inflation, with a 31% plurality naming inflation and prices their top concern — 17 points ahead of the next issue, jobs and the economy. Even Marc Short, who served in Trump’s first administration, said it’s hard to argue his tariffs aren’t contributing to the affordability problem. Goldman Sachs research found that the cost of living is voters’ top issue at a higher share than heading into the 2024 election.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

An “erosion of multilateralism” is changing Asia’s push for sustainability, as countries pursue individual goals of energy security and supply chain resilience instead of “virtue signalling,” says Rahul Ghosh, global head of sustainable finance and emerging markets at Moody’s Ratings. 

“Ten years ago, the world was aligning around consistent climate policies, but now we’re starting to see a bit of divergence,” he says, as countries instead pursue what he dubs a “pragmatic transition,” one that balances sustainability with energy security and economic affordability—usually by allowing traditional fossil fuels to play a role.

Geopolitical conflict has driven much of the reassessment of the green transition. First, Russia’s invasion of Ukraine in 2022 caused a surge in fuel prices, causing an energy crisis throughout much of the developing world. 

February’s U.S. strikes on Iran and the resulting closure of the Strait of Hormuz also cut Asia’s supplies of oil and gas, reiterating to the region’s governments just how much they relied on energy from a volatile Middle East.

Asian governments are now pursuing a range of energy options to wean themselves off Middle Eastern energy: Investing more in renewable energy and nuclear power; finding alternate sources of oil and gas, like the U.S.; and, perhaps most concerningly, returning to coal power generation. 

On Aug. 25, Japan unveiled detailed plans to accelerate its green transformation, including building up to five nuclear reactors in the 2040s, and 14 in the 2050s. “The Government of Japan is now undertaking various measures as it makes all efforts to ensure a stable supply of energy and critical goods to safeguard the lives and livelihoods of the Japanese people,” Japanese prime minister Sanae Takaichi said during a press conference in April. “Fuel supply shortages and supply-chain disruptions in Asia…result in major negative societal and economic impacts for Japan.”

Singapore, too, recently committed 800 million Singapore dollars ($631 million) to supporting research on low-carbon energy generation and decarbonisation technologies, in hopes of slashing national greenhouse gas emissions to between 45 million and 50 million tonnes of CO2 by 2035. 

“We are significantly increasing investments in promising solutions to reduce power sector and industry emissions, and at the same time, to ensure a reliable and resilient power system,” Tan See Leng, Singapore’s minister-in-charge of energy, science and technology, said during a parliamentary session on March 2

Some Asian countries are also deepening their reliance on fossil fuels. According to the Institute for Energy Economics and Financial Analysis, China, Japan, South Korea and Indonesia have all increased coal-fired capacity since 2020, despite pledges to decarbonize. In March, when the Philippines declared a national energy crisis, its energy secretary, Sharon Garin, said the country planned to boost the output of its coal-fired plants to keep energy costs down.

“Be it in Australia, Singapore or Hong Kong, we’ve seen more focus on safeguarding transition assets and activities than we’ve seen in Europe,” Ghosh says. “That’s a reflection of the decarbonization challenges which Asia faces. It’s an area of strong income growth, which historically translates to higher emissions….so Asia has to figure out how to meet greater demand for vehicles and air-conditioning, while keeping energy efficiency standards in place.” 

(By contrast, wealthier societies are more ruthlessly deepening net-zero commitments. For instance, the European Union’s Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanism (CBAM), which places a cost on imported carbon-intensive goods, became operational this January.)

Yet another global trend—climate change and extreme weather—is encouraging public and private investors to channel more capital to climate adaptation and resilience, a category which includes projects like floodgates and dams, smart sensing and early warning systems for climate disasters, and drought-resistant crops. 

“A lot of the next ten years of extreme weather conditions are already locked in because of prior emissions,” Ghosh explains. On Wednesday, the United Nations said that the world has failed in limiting global warming to 1.5 degrees Celsius above pre-industrial times, despite advancements in wind and solar power technologies since the Paris Agreement was ratified in 2016.

Last year’s record-shattering monsoon season is heightening the urgency to invest in climate resilience. “Large swathes of Asia, including parts of India, China and Southeast Asia, are quite under-insured when it comes to natural disasters,” Ghosh says. “That’s one of the reasons why there’s greater focus in this region on creating greater climate resiliency.”

But even if it looks like countries are moving backwards on some elements of sustainability—and are increasingly operating alone, rather than together—Ghosh still believes the region is headed in the right direction. 

“The process was always going to be non-linear,” he says. Yet “we are still moving from a higher-carbon to a lower-carbon economic system over time.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

The European Union on Wednesday weighed how best to respond to an attempted drone attack at a German airport blamed on Russia but struggled to find new ways to meet the challenge without resorting to military means.

The German government said Tuesday that Russia was responsible for the failed attack at Leipzig/Halle Airport on Aug. 4 using a drone laden with explosives and announced it would shut down a Russian consulate among other measures.

The nature of the incident and its attribution to Russia set a new benchmark. The drone was found near a Ukrainian cargo plane and the device was defused. The airport is a major international freight hub used for providing support to Ukraine.

“It is clear that it has all the hallmarks of state sponsored terrorism. The question is: what do we do about this,” EU foreign policy chief Kaja Kallas told reporters before chairing a meeting of the bloc’s foreign ministers in Ireland.

French Foreign Minister Jean-Noël Barrot said France summoned Russia’s envoy to “protest strongly” and wants to impose sanctions on more of the Kremlin’s shadow fleet ships.

“We won’t allow an act of such gravity without consequences,” Barrot said.

A struggle to find more effective options

The EU has slapped almost two dozen packages of sanctions on Russia over the war in Ukraine, hitting more than 3,000 officials, oligarchs and entities including banks, energy companies and drone makers. The EU already was preparing to impose more travel bans and asset freezes on another 1,600 people, Kallas said.

Hundreds of ships making up the shadow fleet illicitly shipping oil to fuel Russian President Vladimir Putin’s war effort have been targeted too. Russian diplomats have routinely been summoned around Europe, even expelled.

The challenge is how to respond in effective ways without going too far. EU member nations, many of them NATO allies, remain cautious about being dragged into open conflict with nuclear armed Russia.

Germany insisted it was “not at war” but had become a “daily target” of the Kremlin’s hybrid campaign. Putin dismissed the allegations, saying Berlin wants to distract from its own failings and dissatisfaction among voters. Any proof being offered “has been planted,” Putin said.

But German Foreign Minister Johan Wadephul said Berlin had carefully prepared its response “and now Russia must live with these consequences.” He called on Russia “to show that it is also ready for reasonable talks and negotiations, particularly regarding the situation in Ukraine.”

Moscow has been widely accused by Western officials of running a yearslong campaign of sabotage and disruption with the aim of undermining support for Ukraine and destabilizing European nations.

The failed attack in Germany is one of several worrying incidents reported across Europe. Recent ones include a fire this week at a major drone making factory in Poland. Russia is suspected in many cases. There have also been drone incursions in Estonia and Latvia resulting from Russia’s war in Ukraine.

Concern about Russian attempts to divide the EU

Spain has publicly accused Russia, along with Israel, of using disinformation to incite migrants to cross from Morocco into its Ceuta exclave in northern Africa. Spanish Foreign Minister José Manuel Albares accused some his EU partners of echoing that fake information, without naming them.

“There are a lot of people outside European Union that want to divide us, to make us weak,” he told reporters, clearly linking Spain’s migration challenges to the incidents in Germany and elsewhere along Europe’s eastern flank.

“The land borders of the south of the EU are as important as the eastern borders,” Albares said.

British Foreign Secretary Ed Miliband also attended the EU meeting, along with officials from Ukraine, Canada, Norway, Switzerland and Iceland.

“We see an attempt by Russia to divide us in Europe and to deter us from our support for Ukraine,” Miliband told reporters.

“This attempt will fail. It will fail because we will stand up to Russian aggression. We will stand shoulder to shoulder with our friends in Ukraine,” he said, for “as long as it takes for them to prevail in this conflict.”

___

Associated Press writer Kirsten Grieshaber in Berlin contributed to this report.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Stan Kroenke, the billionaire owner of the world’s most valuable portfolio of sports clubs, including London’s Arsenal Football Club and most recently, the Los Angeles Angels, also boasts another title. The Colorado real-estate magnate, once dubbed “Silent Stan” for his reticence to talk to the press, is America’s largest private landowner, according to the 2025 Land Report. Kroenke owns 2.7 million acres, about as much as 2 million football fields and larger than the sprawling Yosemite National Park.

Kroenke added yet another asset to his growing portfolio, announcing on Tuesday his purchase of the Los Angeles Angels from Arte Moreno, who bought the club in 2003. With the transaction to be finalized in the first quarter of 2027, Kroenke is set to have controlling interest in the LA Rams, Denver Nuggets, Colorado Avalanche, Arsenal, and Angels.

“The Angels are a storied franchise anchored in a great market,” Kroenke said in a statement released by both the Angels and Kroenke Sports & Entertaiment. “We look forward to an exciting future with the Angels organization.”

Rocketing up to the No. 1 spot on the list—up from No. 4 in 2025—Kroenke’s land holdings ballooned largely thanks to a purchase of 937,000 acres of ranchland in December from the Singleton family behind industrial conglomerate Teledyne Technologies. It was the largest land purchase in the U.S. in more than a decade.

Kroenke owes the beginnings of his real estate empire to the success of Walmart, and not just because of his marriage (since 1974) to Walmart heiress Ann Walton Kroenke. The sports and real estate magnate made his first fortune by developing shopping centers, many with the big-box retailer as its core attraction. 

In the past year, Kroenke leapfrogged fellow billionaires John “the Cable Cowboy” Malone, who ranks No. 2 on the list, as the country’s largest landowner, as well as media mogul Ted Turner, who sits at No. 3. The Emmerson family, which operates forest products company Sierra Pacific Industries, owns an estimated 2.4 million acres, much of it timberland. Bill Gates, who owns 275,000 acres of land, ranks 44th. (He uses his property, the majority of which is farmland owned through his investment group Cascade Investment, to grow onions, carrots, and the potatoes used in McDonald’s fries.)

What many of the list share, besides their astonishing wealth, is the pursuit of snapping up farmland—including ranchlands and timberlands—an emerging asset class for the ultrawealthy to protect their wealth, hedging against inflation and the volatility of some traditional assets. In 2025, the value of U.S. farmland was about $4,350 per acre on average, a 4.3% year-over-year increase, or nearly 2% when adjusted for inflation, according to U.S. Department of Agriculture data. Nearly 40% of U.S. farmland is now owned by landlords, who lease their property to farmers and operators.

Farmland has become a $4.3 trillion asset class as a result of its growing popularity, according to Steve Bruere, president of agricultural rest estate firm Peoples Company.

“If you believe you want diversification, and you also believe we’re going to have underlying inflation—which is what a lot of people want right now—then farmland is a great option for them,” Bruere told Fortune.

The rise of the farmland asset class

The 2008 financial crisis stirred in investors an urgent desire to seek out alternative investments, and America’s ultrawealthy turned to farmland to diversify their portfolios, much like how investors today are turning to alternative assets, from gold to private credit, to hedge against fears of an AI-driven market collapse. 

Much like the real-estate boom of the 1970s, investors today are scooping up farmland as a hedge against inflation, a physical asset that can retain and grow its value because it’s a finite resource. Farmland value is, afterall, positively correlated with inflation—meaning farmless with appreciation in value as inflation rises—and non-correlated with markets. There’s also a theory among investors that because of growing populations, rising income, and therefore a rising demand for food and fuel, farms will only become more valuable.

“Getting your hands on some farmland where the number of arable acres in the world declines every year, that’s why a lot of people like it,” Bruere said.

That’s all in addition to the passive income of leasing out the land to farmers, many of whom don’t have the capital to be able to buy their own land, according to Bruere. 

Erin Foster West, policy campaigns director for the National Young Farmers Coalition, said that many farmers aren’t able to buy the land they work, leaving renting as their only opportunity.

Farmland rent is increasing at a more modest rate than the price to buy the land, making it an appealing option: Average rent for U.S. cropland increased to $161 per acre in last year, just a 0.6% year-over-year increase, per data from the USDA’s Land Values survey. But the working farmer can hardly compete with deep-pocketed figures such as Kroenke. 

To hear top analyst Tom Lee, of Fundstrat, describe the situation, farming never recovered from the invention of flash-frozen foods in the 1920s. Farming made up 40% of the economy before freezing freed up more of people’s time, he recently said in an appearance on the Prof G Markets podcast. “It allowed people to be repurposed, and it created a completely new labor force,” Lee said.

For farmers in contemporary America, they are hard-pressed to outbid rivals like Silent Stan for farmland. 

“It makes it much harder for farmers to compete, especially beginning farmers who are maybe trying to acquire their first farm, or even an existing farmer who might want to grow and expand,” Foster West told Fortune.

A version of this story was published on Fortune.com on Jan. 16, 2026.

More on land ownership and agriculture:

  • Mark Zuckerberg feeds his cows macadamia nuts and beer to create the ‘highest-quality beef in the world’ on his $300 million estate in Hawaii
  • Power companies are using eminent domain to seize land for data centers as 70% of Americans say not in my backyard
  • Universities are buying and selling property for data centers, prompting concerns about an AI brain drain

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

The $1 coin designed to celebrate America’s 250th birthday and seemingly President Donald Trump, whose face gazes from one side of the gold finish, will go on sale Wednesday, according the U.S. Mint.

The coin’s design — Trump’s visage as “heads” and the Great Seal of the United States as “tails” — was given the stamp of approval this year by the U.S. Commission of Fine Arts, whose members Trump appointed. In past comments, the president said that the idea to stamp his face on a coin was “very unusual” but that he was “honored by it.”

The president’s second term has come with several such brandings, or attempts at them that have become tangled up in lawsuits. That includes moves to put Trump’s name on the Kennedy Center, as well as the U.S. Institute for Peace, as Trump works to leave his stamp on history and Washington, D.C.

The coins, which can be used as legal tender, stirred some criticism particularly because of federal law that bars the depiction of a living president on U.S. currency. But in some circumstances, the treasury secretary does have authority to authorize the minting and issuance of special coins.

The coins were struck to “honor 250 years of great American heritage,” the U.S. Mint wrote on its website. In an arc above Trump’s face is written “LIBERTY,” and below is “1776 (tilde) 2026.” On the flip side is the Great Seal of the United States, with the bald eagle gripping arrows in one claw and an olive branch in the other. In a banner clutched in its beak is written “E PLURIBUS UNUM,” Latin for “out of many, one”

A roll of 25 coins will cost $61, and a bag of 100 will cost $154.50, and the U.S. Mint said they randomly hid some special-issue coins among the rolls and bags. Those will be marked “July 4th,” because they were stuck on that day, the anniversary of the Declaration of Independence.

Households are limited to only two orders, the U.S. Mint wrote, but that cap will lift at 2 p.m. Eastern time on Thursday.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

A bipartisan group of U.S. lawmakers is pressing the Army to explain why it told a unit based in Europe to stop specializing in drone warfare, an order that comes as the world’s battlefields rapidly evolve and military tactics increasingly rely on uncrewed systems to fight.

The 173rd Airborne Brigade was building its own drones and practicing the kind of warfare that Ukraine has pioneered against Russia and that Iran has fought against the U.S. — warfare that has killed and wounded American troops. The brigade of 600 soldiers was set up in November to be deployed anywhere that drones were needed.

“We have deep concerns that eliminating this specialized drone unit will limit our ability to learn from allies, particularly the Ukrainian Armed Forces, and hinder our efforts to modernize drone warfare at the speed necessary to compete on the modern battlefield,” the lawmakers said in a letter shared with The Associated Press.

It requests a briefing from the Army to explain its decision and was sent Tuesday to departing Army Secretary Dan Driscoll and Gen. Christopher LaNeve, the Army’s acting chief of staff. It was signed by Democratic Sen. Jeanne Shaheen of New Hampshire, Republican Sen. Thom Tillis of North Carolina, independent Sen. Angus King of Maine and Republican Rep. Mike Turner of Ohio.

“This specialized unit was a prudent response in a moment when the character of warfare is changing faster than a conventional formation’s ability to adapt,” the lawmakers say.

They said they were particularly keen to understand the data, analysis and process behind the change after less than a year of the drone unit being active. They also want to know if the decision was based on guidance from Pentagon leadership or made internally by the Army.

LaNeve, who is filling in as the Army’s top uniformed officer, recently ordered the battalion to refocus on its core mission of being an airborne infantry unit. The move followed Defense Secretary Pete Hegseth’s sudden ousting of the Army’s prior chief of staff, Gen. Randy George.

Integrating drones into the Army’s tactics was a major focus for George. Last year, he and Driscoll had rolled out what they called the Army Transformation Initiative, which pushed to add “modernized (unmanned aircraft systems) into formations.”

George, who became Army chief of staff under President Joe Biden, regularly spoke about the need to accelerate development of new drone systems and get them in the hands of regular soldiers, not just specialized units. Driscoll supported such efforts and focused on cutting the red tape for military contractors to quickly develop more drones.

After George was ousted by Hegseth without explanation in April, he was replaced by LaNeve. This week, Driscoll submitted his own resignation and later said on social media that Wednesday would be his final full day on the job. A reason for his departure was not publicly revealed, but he was an ally of George, and his tensions with Hegseth have been widely reported.

“We are supportive of the transformative initiatives the Army has taken under Secretary Driscoll’s leadership in this area and would like to see that momentum maintained even as uniformed leadership changes,” the lawmakers wrote.

___

Toropin reported from Nuremberg, Germany.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Tiger Woods pleaded no contest to a reckless driving charge and his driver’s license was suspended for five years Wednesday following a March rollover crash in Florida, where he initially was accused of driving under the influence.

Woods, still one of golf’s most influential figures and as recognizable as any athlete in the world, has had a remarkable fall since winning the 2019 Masters for his 15th major. The first person of Black heritage to win the Masters in 1997, his career has been derailed by multiple back and knee surgeries, car crashes and dependence on pain medication.

He was arrested in March after his SUV clipped a truck and rolled over on its side on a beachside residential road near his home on Jupiter Island. A sheriff’s report said deputies found two pain pills in his pocket and he showed signs of impairment. He did a Breathalyzer test, which came out negative, but refused to take a urine test.

He pleaded not guilty to the original DUI charge.

Before the hearing in Florida’s Marin County on Wednesday, Woods, 50, sat at the defense table looking back at the mostly empty courtroom gallery. He said little as he agreed to the reduced charge and left the courthouse without addressing reporters.

He had arrived with his girlfriend, Vanessa Trump, President Donald Trump’s former daughter-in-law. She sat behind him during the proceedings.

“Tiger is not absolved of accountability and he surrendered his license for the next five years,” Mark Steinberg, his longtime manager at Excel Sports told the AP. “He is continuing his treatment and prioritizing all aspects of his health.”

Prosecutor says Tiger Woods has a tolerance to pain medicine

The prosecutor in the case said two toxicologists found there was insufficient proof of his impairment and determined Woods had built up a “pharmacological” tolerance after years of using pain pills.

Thomas Bakkedahl, a state attorney, defended his decision to accept the plea, saying, “I did what I think is right.”

Prosecutors obtained the golfer’s pharmacy records that showed he had a lawful prescription, Bakkedahl said.

The deputy who arrested Woods after the crash found two white pills in his pocket that had markings identifying them as hydrocodone, according to the arrest report. Hydrocodone is an opioid that is prescribed for pain, but it can be addictive.

Woods told the deputy he takes a few prescription medications, according to the report, including “Vicodin” — a brand name painkiller that contains hydrocodone.

He has had numerous surgeries on his legs and back over the last two decades — some to treat cartilage and ligament damage, a ruptured tendon, arthritis, and damaged discs in his back.

At Wednesday’s hearing, Woods also pleaded no contest to refusing to submit to testing after the crash and was fined $1,500, according to court documents. A no-contest plea is not an admission of guilt, but means the accused will offer no defense. The plea is treated as a conviction in the criminal justice system.

Andrew Buda, a defense lawyer in Tampa who’s not involved in the case, said a positive drug result from a urine test would not have been strong evidence against Woods because prescription medications can stay in the body for extended periods.

“A reduced plea to reckless driving is a plausible and unremarkable outcome — not evidence of special treatment,” said Buda, a former prosecutor. “A defendant with a good attorney who took the same steps — disclosure, mitigation, treatment — could reasonably expect a similar outcome under the same facts.”

Woods’ attorney has not responded to a message seeking comment.

Yes, Tiger can still drive a golf cart

Judge Darren Steele warned Woods that his driver’s license suspension didn’t include exceptions. “If you were to drive for any reason at all, you would immediately go back to jail,” the judge told Woods.

The prosecutor said he was confident that Woods would be spotted if he doesn’t heed the message. “Of all the people in the world who should not get behind the wheel of a car, it’s one of the most recognizable people on the planet,” Bakkedahl said.

But there’s one vehicle Woods still can drive, at least in Florida — a golf cart.

That because Florida law says as long you are at least 18, you can operate a golf cart without a license. And that applies to anyone, Bakkedahl said in an email, whether you’re on a golf course or public property.

Video shows the aftermath of the crash

Body camera footage shows Woods taking out his phone after the crash and telling a deputy, “I was just talking to the president.”

Woods can be heard saying, “Thank you so much,” as he hangs up and the deputy approaches. It is not clear if Woods was referring to President Donald Trump.

The footage also shows the handcuffed Woods hiccupping, yawning and repeatedly appearing to nod off during the 15-minute ride.

Neither Woods nor the person in the other vehicle were injured in the crash, according to officials. Woods told a deputy that he was looking down at his phone and changing the radio station when he hit the truck.

In Washington, Trump told reporters the resolution of the case was fair.

“I told him that a long time, ’Why don’t you get somebody to drive you?’ So he’s going to have somebody drive him from now on,” the president said Wednesday. “And, you know, he’s just a very special guy. I’m glad that was resolved.”

Woods has been involved in four crashes over the years. He took a leave from the golf tour after the 2009 crash and again after the latest crash and has yet to return to tournament play.

He left the United States to seek treatment at an inpatient treatment facility, according to court records.

Woods made his first public appearance since returning from treatment on June 23 when he introduced the PGA Tour’s plans to revamp its schedule for 2028. Woods remained as chair of the tour’s Future Competition Committee after his arrest.

___

Associated Press reporters Doug Ferguson in Jacksonville, Florida; Ed White in Detroit; John Seewer in Toledo, Ohio; and Aamer Madhani in Washington contributed.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

U.S. Energy Secretary Chris Wright raised eyebrows in energy markets Wednesday when he said more oil exports left the Middle East on Monday—between the Strait of Hormuz and alternative routes—than before the beginning of the Iran war.

While crude oil exports have indeed risen in recent weeks—at least until an escalation of U.S. and Iranian attacks on Tuesday that slowed exports yet again—analytics firms that track tanker traffic rebutted Wright’s claims.

As the U.S. has worked to carve out a path for oil tankers that hews closer to Oman, more oil shippers are using smaller tankers to move through the narrow Strait of Hormuz and then transferring their volumes to larger tankers in the broader Arabian Sea, a process called ship-to-ship transfers.

That process can be time consuming over days, and it appears that Wright is adding up transfers over multiple days into a single day, said Samir Madani, co-founder of TankerTrackers.com, jokingly calling it “mathemagics.”

Here’s what Wright initially had to say during an interview with CNBC:

“Monday was our record ever through, since the conflict began. Over 17 million barrels of oil flowed through the Strait of Hormuz on ships on Monday. If you add the bypass export pipelines, more than left the region [than] in the pre-conflict.”

Prior to the war, nearly 15 million barrels of crude oil routinely trekked the Strait of Hormuz—about 20 million barrels including other petroleum products. Wright seems to be counting products too. And, in terms of Wright’s mention of “bypass export pipelines,” Saudi Arabia, most notably, is now exporting between 3 million and 4 million barrels of oil each day through the Red Sea—which is under threat by the Yemeni Houthis—or the more circuitous Suez Canal.

Taking Wright’s word for it, that would indeed put traffic back above pre-war levels, including the Red Sea and Suez Canal volumes.

But Mandani told Fortune the data says otherwise, although the past seven days of traffic are higher than the 28-day average.

On Monday, Aug. 31, Mandani said an estimated 9.14 million barrels of oil exited the Arabian Sea—including volumes through Hormuz and the United Arab Emirates’ bypass volumes from the Gulf of Oman.

That was in fact one of the highest days of traffic of late, he said, but still well below pre-war volumes. Mandani said the seven-day average is 8.27 million barrels of oil exiting the Arabian Sea, well up from the most recent 28-day average of 6.85 million barrels.

So, clearly, the U.S. military’s efforts to clear shipping paths, remove mines, and reduce Iran’s threats are slowly working. But, when hostilities resumed, Mandani said volumes fell to an estimated 6.81 million barrels on Sept. 1 and then to 4.63 million barrels on Sept. 2.

“You can see that it is anything but steady,” Mandani said, noting that volumes can fluctuate wildly day by day, as opposed to before the war.

The Hormuz ‘card’

Later in his CNBC interview, Wright argued that blocking the Strait of Hormuz was Iran’s “one card.”

“They’re causing some disruption, but they are losing that card,” Wright continued.

Earlier in August, energy analytics firm Kpler said Middle Eastern oil-exporting volumes had returned to about 65% of their pre-war levels, including pipeline bypass alternatives. While Kpler did not have end-of-August numbers readily available, those volumes could have risen above 70% by the end of the month.

The White House though doubled down on Wright’s remarks when asked.

“The United States government and the United States military maintains the best available data related to oil products transiting the Arabian Gulf,” a White House official said in a statement.

The White House also pointed to President Donald Trump’s comments on Monday. “We have the Strait of Hormuz in extremely good shape,” Trump said. “You know, we’re taking over. Many, many ships got through last night, as you know, with the Navy’s assistance. And we’ve been averaging 30 ships a night. That’s a lot. And a lot of oil is coming out. That’s why you haven’t seen the price of oil go like they thought it might have to go.”

Largely because of China’s reduced imports and the United States’ increased exports—and the ongoing depletion of the U.S. Strategic Petroleum Reserve to 44-year lows—the price of oil has remained below the $100 per barrel threshold. However, the global oil benchmark did rise above $95 on Wednesday after the resumption of attacks—up from $87 a week prior.

The U.S. average price for a gallon of regular unleaded gasoline on Wednesday was $4.12—the highest price ever heading into a Labor Day weekend, not accounting for inflation.

“Last year saw the cheapest Labor Day since 2020, but the pendulum has swung wildly this summer. This year has been less about typical supply and demand, and more about uncertainty over how global tensions will affect the availability of crude oil and refined products,” said Patrick De Haan, head of petroleum analysis at GasBuddy.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

The House passed a short-term measure Tuesday to fund the federal government into early December, a move designed to avoid a chaotic shutdown as lawmakers campaign for reelection.

Lawmakers needed to act before the fiscal year concludes at the end of September to avoid a funding lapse. They were determined not to bump up against that deadline during the campaign season following this past year’s historic shutdowns.

The House passed the bill by a vote of 370-48. The Senate has already overwhelmingly approved the measure, so it now moves to President Donald Trump’s desk for his signature.

“It gives the nation and our constituents certainty, certainty that the government will remain open, certainty that our service members will be paid,” said Rep. Tom Cole, the Republican chairman of the House Appropriations Committee.

A record 43-day shutdown occurred last fall when the two parties disagreed on renewing an expiring tax credit that lowers the cost of health coverage obtained through Affordable Care Act marketplaces. Then came the shutdown of the Department of Homeland Security, which lasted 76 days before lawmakers agreed to fund much of the department but not its immigration enforcement operations.

Lawmakers were wary of a repeat before voters go to the polls. They also blamed the other party for the recent impasses.

“We’re going to avoid the threat of another Democratic shutdown,” House Speaker Mike Johnson told reporters in advance of the vote.

After the vote Johnson said the House delivered, despite those who doubted the Republican majority would be able to push past its own divisions and rally support.

“We’re continuing to do the grown-up thing, get the job done,” he said.

Rep. Rosa DeLauro, the lead Democrat on the House Appropriations Committee, encouraged her Democratic colleagues to vote for the measure during a closed-door meeting Tuesday morning.

She said the bill was much improved from the product that passed the House earlier this summer on a mostly party-line basis. For example, she said it prevents the Department of Homeland Security from transferring funds to the Border Patrol, and it delays a proposed rule that would give political appointees in the Trump administration more authority to stop federal grants from going out for programs they view as not in line with the president’s agenda. Those changes were made when the Senate approved its version of the bill.

Democrats fear the administration will use the proposed regulation on grants to steer money away from Democratic-led states. DeLauro called the delay an important first step, but said more must be done to block the policy from taking effect.

“Whether a community receives disaster relief should not depend on who they voted for in the last election,” DeLauro said.

The short-term measure funds federal agencies generally at current levels through Dec. 11. It will give lawmakers more time to find compromise on a full-year measure, though that will likely be quite difficult.

Republicans are seeking hundreds of billions of dollars in additional spending for the military while cutting most non-defense programs. Democrats say that’s a non-starter and insist on a bipartisan approach that treats domestic programs with parity.

__

Associated Press writer Lisa Mascaro contributed.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Anthropic has become the second leading AI lab to reveal it temporarily paused some advanced AI training amid concerns over rogue agent attacks.

The company said this week it paused training of unreleased models for several weeks following two incidents reported in late July, including one in which Claude Mythos 5 took unauthorized actions during a U.K. AI Security Institute cybersecurity test. OpenAI, the company’s bitter rival in the AI race, took a similar step last month when it paused some AI training for two weeks after several of its models breached AI company Hugging Face’s infrastructure during an internal test.

The training pauses, which come as both companies reportedly prepare for trillion-dollar initial public offerings, demonstrate how much the industry has been disturbed by the recent rogue AI agent hacks. It marks a shift for an industry that for the last few years has been locked in a fast-paced race, with rival labs competing to bring ever more capable models to market as fast as possible. Now, two of the leading companies appear to be competing on which can show it is the most attuned to AI safety concerns—while also not slowing model development so much that it risks customers defecting to a competitor’s more capable offering.

Notably, the wave of rogue AI incidents prompted an open letter called “Pacing the Frontier,” in which more than 1,100 employees across OpenAI, Anthropic, Google DeepMind and Meta asked the U.S. government to help build a governance mechanism that could slow frontier AI development if needed. Signatories included Anthropic chief executive Dario Amodei and co-founders Jared Kaplan and Jack Clark, alongside OpenAI chief scientist Jakub Pachocki. Both companies endorsed the letter at the corporate level within hours of its publication.

The recent training pauses from Anthropic and OpenAI were seen by some in the industry to be a direct result of the letter.

“Pacing the frontier success story?” Roon, a popular AI commentator widely believed to be a pseudonym for OpenAI researcher Tarun Gogineni, wrote of the announcements on X. “Next time let’s do it proactively before there’s any absurd loss of control events.”

Anthropic, like OpenAI, announced it would be working with independent AI safety evaluation group METR to conduct an outside review of the incidents, saying it wanted to ensure the resulting studies were thorough and promising more detail in the coming weeks.

The two companies’ accounts of what went wrong when their respective agents took real world actions against instructions are also similar. Anthropic said its Mythos 5 model showed a pattern of “motivated reasoning,” maintaining an initial belief that it was operating in a simulated environment even after encountering evidence it was connected to the live internet, alongside a willingness to take harmful actions in pursuit of completing an assigned task.

Redwood Research, one of the outside groups OpenAI brought in after the Hugging Face breach, also described the behavior it observed with OpenAI’s agents as score-seeking misalignment rather than a longer-term scheme by the model.

Both companies have also pointed to their reinforcement learning environments as a source of the problem. Reinforcement learning is a training method where AI models learn by trial-and-error to maximize some reward. One problem with the technique though is that it can lead to “reward hacking,” where AI models learn that they can achieve the reward in a way that those training the model didn’t intend, such as cheating on an assessment or taking harmful actions in pursuit of the reward.

To resolve some of the issues, OpenAI has brought in new monitoring tools designed to alert internal safety and security teams within 30 minutes of detecting concerning model activity, and to trigger an automatic pause if that alert cannot be resolved in that window. 

Anthropic said it has built a similar tool, a system that scans a model’s actions as it works and automatically blocks anything that looks like an attempt to escape or exploit its test environment, ending the task and alerting a human before it can go further. The company also said it moved about 150 product engineers onto security work starting in April, and tightened access to its systems, including cutting off most outbound internet traffic from its computing clusters by default.

While safety experts say the new controls and pauses are a welcome change, some say there’s still more needed.

“The temporary pace changes are a good first step, but there’s still a way to go,” Steven Adler, a former OpenAI employee and co-founder of the non-profit Guidelight AI Standards, told Fortune. “We need predictable, verifiable pacing across the frontier, not just ad-hoc decisions to slow down. And we need companies to use the additional time to implement serious preventative controls, which still seem to be missing.”

Anthropic, at least in the blog post, has indicated that it may be willing to go further in the future to help pace AI development.

“Some of our senior leadership and many of our employees recently signed a letter calling for greater coordination on pacing, and we will say more in the coming weeks about how we intend to contribute to that effort,” Anthropic wrote in the post. “We believe the world would benefit if the industry adopted a lawful, verifiable, effective mechanism for coordinated pacing as soon as possible,” the company wrote.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Iran fired on U.S. allies in the Gulf early Wednesday following a night of American bombardment that Iranian state media says included a deadly strike on a wedding party.

The latest violence came after a monthlong lull in fighting. The six-month war has led to a spike in oil prices, roiled the global economy and posed increasing political problems for U.S. President Donald Trump’s Republican Party ahead of November midterm elections.

Fighting has escalated since the American military hit Iranian rocket launchers on an island in the Strait of Hormuz over the weekend, saying Iran was planning to use them to lay mines. Iran retaliated by firing missiles at American bases in Jordan that were intercepted.

American military resources are stretched and political pressure in Washington is mounting, while Iran’s economy has been battered by sanctions and an American naval blockade. Iran’s currency hit another record low on Wednesday, with traders in Tehran exchanging 2.20 million rials for one U.S. dollar, a 10% hike from last week’s record.

Neither side can continue indefinitely between full-scale war and a truce, said Hamidreza Azizi, senior Iran analyst at the Crisis Group, an international think tank.

“At some point, one of the sides may see a need to escalate in order to break this cycle,” he cautioned. “So that could bring the two sides to a point that they have been trying to avoid until now, which is a full-scale war.”

The struggle is focused on the Strait of Hormuz and oil prices

The latest flare-up in violence came as the standoff seemed to be shifting slightly more in the U.S. favor, with the price of oil hitting around $80 a barrel last month and Iranian leaders talking about growing economic hardships, said Sascha Bruchmann, an analyst with the International Institute for Strategic Studies’ Middle East office in Bahrain.

“The U.S. is trying to reinstall some kind of confidence into the global oil markets … and the Iranians had to respond to that by reinserting insecurity and doubt,” Bruchmann said.

Since the fighting resumed over the weekend, the price of Brent crude oil, the international standard, has climbed to around $95, up more than 30% from the start of the war.

U.S. Secretary of State Marco Rubio said Iran will “continue to feel the squeeze” from the United States until it drops any nuclear weapons ambitions and ends support for armed groups in the Middle East. Iran has always insisted its nuclear program is peaceful.

U.S. allies in the region fend off Iranian attacks

Following the strikes on Jordan, U.S. Gulf allies Kuwait and Bahrain said they had also come under attack, without reporting any casualties.

“You will soon see that Iran’s new strategy on the battlefield, in diplomacy, and in confronting the economic blockade will shatter your foundations,” the recently appointed head of Iran’s powerful Supreme National Security Council, Mohsen Rezaei, said on X.

In Iraq, where Iranian-backed forces are active, Kurdish authorities said they had intercepted 10 drones laden with explosives in the Irbil area. Iranian television reported that American bases in Irbil had been targeted.

Israel’s military also said that Iran-backed Hezbollah fired two explosive drones at its soldiers in southern Lebanon, without causing casualties.

The U.S. Central Command said Tuesday’s strikes focused on Iranian military targets, including air defense sites, radar systems and maritime assets.

Strike on wedding killed 4 and wounded dozens, state media says

One U.S. strike hit a home hosting a wedding in Kuhestak, a small coastal town overlooking the Strait of Hormuz, according to Iranian state media.

Four people were killed — two women and two children, aged 4 and 16 — and at least 68 were wounded, the state news agency IRNA and state TV said Wednesday. Just after the strike, Ahmad Nafisi, the province’s deputy governor, told Iranian state television that five people were killed. There was no explanation for the change.

Several heavy explosions shook Kuhestak, with fireballs that lit up the night sky, according to security camera footage carried by the semiofficial Fars news agency.

Images from Iran’s semiofficial Tasnim news agency showed several hospitalized children being treated for injuries at a hospital in the nearby town of Minab, where a U.S. missile strike on the opening day of the war hit a primary school, killing more than 100 children.

Footage from the Iranian Red Crescent showed rescue workers entering a damaged home in the wake of the strike. It showed a hole in the roof of one house in a neighborhood of densely packed homes.

Expert says fragments point to a U.S. weapon

A weapons expert told The Associated Press that images of fragments of ordnance that Iranian media said was used in the strike on Mallahi’s home, indicated it was an “American air-delivered guided weapon.”

N.R. Jenzen-Jones, director of Armament Research Services, initially identified the weapon as a SLAM-ER cruise missile, an air-launched missile that can be retargeted in flight by a human operator. But after examining further imagery, he said it was more likely to be a JSOW, a type of guided bomb, though he did not rule out a SLAM-ER and said multiple weapons may have hit the site.

U.S. Central Command declined to comment on the analyst’s findings. Spokesperson Capt. Tim Hawkins said earlier that the U.S. military was “aware of the reports, which originated from Iranian state media, and we are looking into them.” He would not say if CENTCOM had launched a formal investigation.

“Make no mistake: These crimes will not go unpunished,” Ebrahim Azizi, chairperson of the Iranian parliament’s National Security and Foreign Policy Committee, said on X.

Separately, Iran has said four members of its paramilitary Revolutionary Guard and 10 members of the Guard’s volunteer Basij forces died in the U.S. attacks. A total of 108 people were injured in the latest round of attacks, state broadcaster the Islamic Republic of Iran Broadcasting quoted the country’s health minister as saying.

The Strait of Hormuz remains largely shut down

During last month’s lull in fighting, the U.S. ramped up economic pressure on Iran as Washington sought to fully open the Strait of Hormuz.

About a fifth of the world’s traded oil was shipped through the key waterway before Israel and the U.S. attacked Iran on Feb. 28 and Iran largely shut it down in response. Despite many pronouncements from Washington that the strait is open, only a handful of ships are making the passage each day and Iran has regularly attacked vessels.

On Wednesday, Saudi shipping company Bahri said two Filipino sailors were killed in an attack late Monday as their vessel transited the strait.

A ceasefire deal reached in June quickly fell apart amid exchanges of strikes that same month. Mediator Pakistan has been working to restart talks.

Late Tuesday, Trump said he would not force Iran to the bargaining table.

“I couldn’t care less if they sign a worthless, to them, agreement. I like our position now much better, with almost total control of the Hormuz Strait, and their economy totally collapsing. They are just playing out the inevitable. When are the Iranian people going to rise up and fight?” Trump wrote on social media.

___

This story has been corrected to show that Iranian state media are reporting that four people were killed in the strike on the wedding, not five. They gave no explanation for the change. It has also been corrected to show that Trevor Ball is an analyst with Armament Research Services, not Bellingcat.

___

Magdy reported from Cairo. Lee Keath and Fatma Khaled in Cairo, Sarah El Deeb in Beirut, Konstantin Toropin in Nuremberg, Germany, Stella Martany in Irbil, Iraq, Christopher Weber in Los Angeles, and Matthew Lee in Washington contributed to this story.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Beverage and syrup company Torani hasn’t laid off a single employee since the Great Depression. Not in 2008, not during globalization or the automation wave that gutted American manufacturing towns, and not during the pandemic that shut the cafes that buy most of its flavored syrups. 

Now, as generative and agentic AI reshape entry-level work in corporate America, Melanie Dulbecco—who has run the 101-year-old, San Leandro, California-based syrup maker for 35 years—is wrestling with the same question facing executives everywhere: How can she adopt technology that could theoretically replace employees’ work? But Dulbecco has an extra consideration, and that’s navigating the AI age without breaking Torani’s no-layoffs streak. 

“It is going to dramatically change things, and we’re all going to live through this together, but our approach is going to be the same as it has been,” Dulbecco told Fortune. “How do we create great jobs through this for everyone?”

After a friend got her connected with the family that owns Torani, Dulbecco joined the company in 1991, when she said it was a nine-employee operation generating about $700,000 a year. Started by Italian immigrants who sold hand-crafted syrups to flavor drinks in 1925 in San Francisco, the company pivoted to producing liqueurs after Prohibition ended in 1933. Its coffee-flavoring business, the syrups the company is best known for today, didn’t arrive until decades later, in 1982. In that time, Torani grew from five syrups to over 150 that can be added into coffee, cocktails and sodas, and Dulbecco even claimed the company “invented the flavored latte” with its vanilla syrup.

This year, the company is expected to bring in more than $800 million with just 500 employees, averaging 20% annual revenue growth over 35 years, the CEO said.

“Most companies focus on their financials, and then people are the tools,” said Dulbecco. “We look at it the other way around, and it works really well for us.”

Keeping the company local

A year into Dulbecco’s tenure, the then-small Seattle chain Starbucks approached Torani to become its private-label syrup manufacturer. Torani already supplied syrups to the company, but the decision split Dulbecco’s team so much that they brought in students from Stanford Business School, her alma mater, to sort it out. 

The students said Torani could succeed either way, but private labeling meant becoming a low-cost producer, and skimping on what made Torani special, like swapping high-fructose corn syrup for cane sugar.

“It made the decision easy because then all of us who were here could say, what’s the business we want to build?” Dulbecco recalled.

Decades later in 2020, that same instinct to preserve the company’s legacy kept the company in the Bay Area. As the company outgrew its San Francisco facility, Dulbecco’s team approached every employee and mapped out their respective zip codes to find a commutable site: the current San Leandro campus. Two and a half years went into planning the move, but then in March, California’s Covid-19 order landed, and it became a “moment of truth” for Torani as cafes and restaurants started shutting down.  

Dulbecco said the company ran financial scenarios of how they would keep the business afloat without letting anyone go, and “the only way” was to move as soon as possible and get their new equipment running.

“We made it—everyone, safely—and then when things picked up again—because business did go down in April—it picked up because e-commerce took off, retail took off, some other things filled the gaps. We could help our cafe customers reopen their doors and our team was here,” she said. “Being committed to our team, whom we care so much about, ends up really being to our benefit to continue to create the momentum and to be resilient in the hard times.”

The Torani antidote to AI layoffs

Dulbecco explained her team also takes precedence in major financial decisions when incorporating any new technology, especially AI.

“What are those 500 people, or 200 people, or 20 people doing to add more value?” she said. Treating AI purely as a way to slash costs, she argued, misses the bigger picture. Because Torani hasn’t laid off people as new tech comes in, there’s more trust between Dulbecco and her team when it comes to AI.

“What we find is our team is more likely to embrace new technologies also because there’s confidence and an openness to learning new things because they know we’ve got their backs and they’ve got ours,” she added. 

Dulbecco said that shows up in employees’ benefits as well. Torani has a unique wealth sharing plan on top of 401(k) matching and salaries, including bonuses for every employee tied to Torani’s top-line revenue and bottom-line profits, and an employee stock ownership plan that kicks in after a year. She called this “sharing the wealth we create together.”

“Every year people get a new tranche of shares, and every year we do a new valuation, so there’s nothing that makes me happier than when we, in a town hall meeting, share, ‘Hey, we just did our valuation, here’s been the increase,’ and then afterwards, I see a forklift driver ask our CFO questions,” Dulbecco said. 

Dulbecco said she’s talked to people at law and accounting firms who describe entry-level work changing fast around them, but Torani’s entry level hiring hasn’t changed because Dulbecco expects people to move around once they’re in. 

She called it “career mixology,” where an employee may start in an entry-level inventory role and may move into something completely different later on. She pointed to a procurement staffer named Carlos who first started at the company in an entry-level supply-chain job before working through several other positions to his current post. 

“He’s mixing up his career,” said Dulbecco, “building a broader perspective of the business, which makes him a more valuable team member as well.” Torani also runs a summer internship program for their college-age children, plus “first job programs” for newcomers.

“In a market where people say it’s hard to hire, we have not had the same challenge, and I think it’s because we look at roles differently,” Dulbecco said. “We appreciate people in every role.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

When Simon’s wife of 43 years passed away, it felt a bit like he’d died too.

In his overwhelming grief, Simon sought companionship online, like so many other lonely widows and widowers. Almost immediately he met Emily. But over the next few months, Emily, who Simon realized too late was a fake, stole $800,000 from him.

And that was just the beginning.

Simon was stuck paying back $185,000 he had borrowed, and tens of thousands of dollars in additional taxes on money he had withdrawn and lost. He tried to report the crime to his local police and the FBI, he said, but nothing came of it. Instead, he was contacted by yet another scammer — offering to connect him with the Secret Service to recoup his losses in exchange for even more money.

Like Simon, virtually every American has been targeted by scammers in some way, exclusive new polling data shows. Scams in the U.S. have surged to a record high, causing billions in losses for Americans.

But the U.S. still lags behind some other countries in tackling the problem, holding financial and social media companies responsible and regulating the cryptocurrency scammers rely on, an investigation by The Associated Press and FRONTLINE found. And although both the Trump administration and Congress are pursuing new options, victims still have little recourse and sometimes end up losing even more.

In interviews with almost five dozen victims, AP and FRONTLINE found that many faced ridicule and stigma from friends and family, mounting pressure from banks and lenders, additional taxes, dismissive law enforcement and neglect from a government they believed would protect them.

“What happens after the scam might even be worse than the scam itself,” said Erin West, a former prosecutor and founder of the nonprofit Operation Shamrock that provides support for victims of online scams. “It’s a travesty.”

While victims say they seldom get any answers from authorities, AP/FRONTLINE found these crimes can be traceable. With the help of leaked documents and cryptowallet addresses, AP/FRONTLINE tracked Emily and Simon’s stolen funds to a notorious scam compound halfway around the world in Myanmar with thousands of victims.

Simon was stunned to see Emily’s fake profile and hundreds of pages of conversations he thought were encrypted.

“What a fool I was,” he said.

Today, much of the Myanmar compound where his scam originated lies in rubble, destroyed by local authorities. Yet many of the illicit operations simply moved, new sites opened immediately, and Simon is no closer to getting his money back.

He asked not to be identified by his full name because he is too ashamed to tell most of his family about the crime. Local police and the FBI declined to comment on the case.

“(The police) told me right away that, you know, ‘You have to kiss that money goodbye,’” he said, fighting back tears. “Already I experienced something very bad and now I have to pay for the consequences on top of it, and see my money evaporate all over again. You lose two ways.”

As scams surge, fees and taxes pile on

The size of the global scam industry is staggering.

Americans reported a record $15.9 billion in losses last year to the Federal Trade Commission, a 25% increase from 2024. And such estimates are likely a massive undercount because most scam victims are too embarrassed to report their crimes.

The FTC estimates that real losses in 2024 were close to $200 billion; that’s $550 million every day just in the U.S.

The ballooning costs are fueled by huge advances in artificial intelligence and cryptocurrency. AI allows scammers to work at a previously unimaginable scale and level of sophistication, and cryptocurrency, often used in investment scams, is a form of digital cash that can be hard to trace to its real owners.

No one is immune, the AP/FRONTLINE investigation found. Ninety-eight percent of Americans suspect they have been targeted by scammers, many every day, according to a poll conducted by The Associated Press-NORC Center for Public Affairs Research. Three in 10 said they have personally lost money or information to scams.

AP/FRONTLINE interviewed 58 people in the United States who lost money to cyberscams, aged 32 to 90, across all races and income levels. They said they lost several thousand dollars to $4 million each and included doctors, IT professionals, academics with advanced degrees and people just trying to make ends meet.

All said they felt alone and confused afterward. When they did report the crimes to law enforcement, many felt abandoned by a lack of support. Several victims said they contemplated suicide. Two attempted it.

The only one to get any money back won a rare settlement from her bank, not from her scammer.

Instead, scam victims sometimes owe additional money through bank fees and tax bills. The IRS often demands that retirees, including scam victims, pay taxes on any funds they withdrew from tax-deferred accounts like their retirement savings.

Before 2018, victims of theft or fraud could sometimes deduct losses incurred from their taxable income. But under a provision of the Trump administration’s Tax Cuts and Jobs Act, made permanent in 2025, personal losses from many common scams are not eligible for tax breaks. That means victims can owe taxes after money was stolen from them.

Retired nurse Susan Bivins said she was tricked into draining her retirement accounts and sending more than $200,000 to a scammer pretending to be a federal agent. The FBI and local police did not help, she said.

Then her tax bill arrived. She owed the Internal Revenue Service $80,000.

“I wanted to drive off a cliff,” she said. “I didn’t know how I was going to live.”

Bivins sold her home and moved into a small one-bedroom apartment. She is still paying off her tax bill, selling handmade quilts.

The FBI said in a statement that it takes scams and fraud seriously but cannot comment on individual cases to protect privacy. Local police did not respond to repeated requests for comment.

A law before Congress, the Tax Relief for Fraud Victims Act, would reinstate an allowance for victims to deduct their losses. AARP fraud prevention lead Kathy Stokes urged Congress earlier this year to help scam victims who are “stuck with a bill they don’t deserve and have no way to pay.”

“Essentially they’re being revictimized by the U.S. government,” Stokes said.

Banks also sometimes blame people who are scammed instead of seeing them as crime victims, or even accuse them of being complicit. Victims described having their accounts abruptly frozen or canceled, along with demands for repayment on loans and legal fees.

Debra Fox in Colorado lost $58,000 in a romance scam, she said. In a meeting with her bank branch, she said, a representative told her that she would be held responsible for anything fraudulent linked to her own accounts and forced to pay any legal fees.

She was in shock for 48 hours, terrified that the little she had left would vanish.

“I thought, I have no control over this process,” she said. “The crime was horrific enough… but it’s what happened next that was really unbelievable to me.”

Her local bank branch declined to comment on her case.

Earlier this year, American Bankers Association Chair Kenneth Kelly said banks spend “time, money and significant resources” trying to stop fraud, which usually refers to unauthorized transactions. But under current U.S. law, financial institutions are rarely liable for transactions their customers authorize.

There are rare workarounds. For example, under new legal protections, a theft from a senior citizen in California might fall under the definition of financial elder abuse.

Alice Lin, now 83, was the only victim AP/FRONTLINE interviewed to get some money back, after she sued her bank, citing this law.

Over their lifetimes, Lin and her husband had put aside a nest egg of about $720,000. After he died, she struck up what she thought was an online friendship with a man who’d also lost a spouse.

Her new friend Justin convinced her to take out money from her bank and invest it in cryptocurrency platforms.

At first, her financial statements showed big wins. But when Justin encouraged her to ask her daughter for a loan to invest more, her family realized it was a scam.

Lin sued JPMorgan Chase for failing to protect an elderly citizen and flag the extraordinarily large and unusual transfers. Earlier this year, they settled for an undisclosed amount, according to her lawyers.

JPMorgan Chase said it has multiple layers of scam protection, from bankers who asked Lin about her transactions to written warnings. Settling the lawsuit “was a business decision weighed with the cost of litigation on this matter,” said the bank in a written statement.

Lin had been targeted by a sophisticated criminal network that ran dozens of different scams and took in at least $800 million from January 2022 to September 2024, blockchain analysis TRM Labs did for AP/FRONTLINE showed. This industrialization of scams makes it even harder for victims to get their money back, said Ari Redford, global head of policy at TRM Labs.

“We have not built out systems in the U.S. in many respects to not only alert victims but to really do restitution in a meaningful way,” he said.

Lin said the grief and embarrassment made her think about taking her own life. But she was infuriated by a question her scammer asked her long after she’d stopped responding.

“Are you still alive?” said the message. Lin shuddered as she read it again.

“I told myself, ‘I’m alive and I’m going to fight back.’”

Global models offer potential answers

The U.S. is taking steps to improve cooperation with the private sector on fighting scams but — unlike a growing number of other countries — has stopped short of requiring companies to do more to protect consumers or face financial penalties.

Eight in 10 Americans across political lines said the U.S. government isn’t doing enough to protect them against scams, according to a new Gallup survey. And more than half said financial institutions, social media and tech companies and the federal government should also share responsibility, new AP-NORC polling shows.

Since late 2024, financial services companies in the United Kingdom have generally had to reimburse clients tricked into sending money to scammers, giving them an incentive to invest in prevention measures. The downside has been slower bank transfers, the need for more employees and sometimes a conversation to explain why a customer might want to transfer money.

The European Union is also rolling out rules that make financial institutions potentially liable for scammed funds if they don’t put in adequate fraud protections. And the EU’s Digital Services Act, which was passed in 2022, requires platforms to quickly act on reported scam content and take broader steps to reduce online fraud.

In the UK, trained social workers are sometimes sent to the homes of scam victims to address the emotional fallout.

“You wouldn’t ever say to a victim, ‘Why did you fall for a mugging? Why did you fall for a burglary?’” said Louise Baxter, who serves on the Home Office Joint Fraud Task Force. “It’s secondary victimization, from a law enforcement perspective and a societal perspective.”

New regulations in Australia also spread the responsibility for preventing scams. Financial institutions, telecommunications companies and digital platforms in Australia can be fined or forced to compensate victims if they don’t do enough to prevent and respond to scam activity.

Singapore’s protections are among the strictest. Under the government’s Shared Responsibility Framework, banks and telecom companies may have to repay victims of certain phishing scams if they fail to implement required safeguards. The country’s Protection From Scams Act passed last year allows police to temporarily restrict bank transfers of someone who they believe to be a victim. Further, staff from banks and e-commerce platforms physically sit in the same office as police in their national anti-scam center.

The U.S. makes piecemeal attempts to teach law enforcement agents how to respond to scams, but requirements vary across agencies. And in the U.S., victims are generally only reimbursed if the money is taken from their accounts without their authorization, not if they were tricked into approving the withdrawals. U.S. law also offers social media companies broad protections from liability for the content they carry, even scams.

There are global differences when it comes to cryptocurrency as well.

China bans crypto-related businesses, while the European Union requires licensing, consumer protections and broad disclosures. But while the Trump administration has backed some cryptocurrency regulation, it has also promised to halt “aggressive enforcement actions and regulatory overreach” to promote innovation. And the GENIUS Act signed by President Donald Trump last year to regulate some cryptocurrencies did not require companies to return stolen funds to fraud victims – a gap that consumer advocates, prosecutors and some lawmakers have criticized.

Law enforcement officials say it’s harder to track, freeze or recover funds because institutional banking safeguards largely do not apply to cryptocurrency.

Unlike bank deposits, crypto assets are not backed by federal insurance, and so if an exchange fails, the money can be lost. Banks also require customers to provide identification, social security numbers and account details when moving cash, while cryptocurrency transfers can obscure the identities of those involved. Most significantly, many cryptocurrency exchanges operate across borders and through offshore entities where U.S. laws may not apply.

Locating stolen cryptocurrency takes time and money. Returning it is even more complicated. A cottage industry of attorneys specializing in tracing cryptocurrency is emerging, but they still need buy-in from overworked officials to obtain warrants.

This means that even if people can locate their stolen funds, it’s unlikely they’ll get them back.

After Brian Glick lost $575,000, he called the FBI, an elder abuse hotline, the Securities and Exchange Commission and the New York State Attorney General’s office, he said. He filed complaints at IC3.org and FightCyberCrime.org. He collected thousands of screenshots as evidence and turned them over to federal investigators. He even kept talking to his scammer to draw out more information.

But when the FBI went to cryptocurrency company Tether to try and freeze and claw back funds linked to Glick’s investment, Tether said it could not. The FBI agent asked Tether to reconsider, according to email exchanges shared with AP and FRONTLINE.

“I respectfully request that Tether take a second look at the below information in regards to freezing funds from bad actors …” said the email.

After being given more details, including Glick’s wallet addresses, Tether told AP/FRONTLINE that Glick’s funds were moved and commingled with other funds just hours after the money was stolen.

“By the time Tether was contacted, the two addresses contained a significant amount of unrelated, unattributed funds belonging to other users,” a statement from the company said. It said Tether could not “arbitrarily freeze funds of unrelated users without proper process.”

Tether CEO Paolo Ardoino told AP/FRONTLINE that there are countless examples of their work with law enforcement.

“I think that there is no company, even in the banking industry, in the traditional financial industry, that is so helpful as us,” he said.

Officials at the FBI and Secret Service said Tether works closely with law enforcement to combat crimes related to cryptocurrency. In a joint initiative, Tether, TRM Labs and TRON, a blockchain network, say they have frozen over $450 million in illicit funds worldwide since 2024.

Glick was furious.

“There are so many victims of these cybercrimes,” Glick said. “And we can’t get our money back.”

Steps taken in the US

The U.S. government is waking up to the threat.

Congress is now considering more than a dozen bills to prevent scams. One would establish a centralized website for complaints, ReportScams.gov. Another would require disclosures on deepfakes and other AI-generated audio and visual content.

The Justice Department in November unveiled a strike force to cut off access of Southeast Asian operations to U.S. infrastructure, pursue criminal networks behind the scams and seize stolen funds. The Treasury has levied sanctions in Southeast Asia, and Myanmar and Cambodia have staged high-profile crackdowns on scam compounds.

The Justice Department’s Scam Center Strike Force claimed on its website this summer that it had restrained $832 million in cryptocurrency from Chinese transnational criminals. But a spokesperson told AP/FRONTLINE it was unable to go into any specifics about each seizure, where the funds are held or what, if anything, has been returned to victims.

Trump also signed an executive order in March directing the attorney general to prioritize the prosecution of scammers and to submit a recommendation for a program to restore money to victims.

“President Trump is unleashing every available tool to stop criminal networks that exploit vulnerable Americans through cyber fraud and scams,” the White House said in a statement to AP/FRONTLINE.

However, advocates say funding hasn’t flowed to the federal agencies tasked with combating scams, investigating cybercrime, and developing a cohesive plan for attacking the problem. And the fledgling efforts to help victims get money back aren’t keeping up with the tsunami of those who have lost it.

At least 13 federal agencies touch on different aspects of these crimes, according to a report issued by the Government Accountability Office. Seto Bagdoyan, who runs the office’s Forensic Audits and Investigative Service, said this piecemeal approach results in a sluggish strategy that “falls short.”

“There is no government-wide estimate of the money lost to scams, no common definition of scams, and no national strategy for combating them,” he said.

FBI Financial Crimes Section assistant section chief Rebecca Keithley, who retired earlier this year, said tens of billions of dollars flow out of the U.S. economy through scams. The FBI’s Operation Level Up, an effort to identify victims being defrauded and call them to intervene, has stopped about 8,500 people from falling for scams over almost two years, she said.

But that’s a small fraction of the sheer volume of victims. The FBI said it receives nearly 3,000 internet crime complaints a day on average through the IC3.gov online portal for reporting cybercrime.

“It’s an enormous problem, and one that the FBI is prioritizing,” she said.

Donna Gregory, retired FBI unit chief with the IC3, worked on the portal for 23 years, from its conception in 2000. Gregory said the loss threshold for what law enforcement will pursue varies by jurisdiction, and that the FBI is only able to investigate roughly 10-12 % of cases reported on IC3.

“The empathy you learn to sort of ignore because you would drive yourself crazy,” said Gregory. “All these victims saying, ‘I’ve lost my life savings, I don’t know what to do.’… “My grandmother committed suicide because she lost everything’ or ‘I’m going to commit suicide,’ and it’s like, which one do I have to pick?”

Chris Scott, a casino dealer in Arizona, was scammed out of $400,000 by a man on a dating site, she said. She added that she went four times in person to her local FBI office, begging for help — but was told all she could do was file a complaint through IC3.

She did. But she heard nothing back, she said, not even an acknowledgment of receipt. She began to panic, and searched for help online.

Scott found three companies claiming to have a direct line to the FBI, each promising to recover her funds. Out of desperation she hired them all, she said, handing over a total of $23,000.

None of the companies were real. Scott was forced to sell her home to cover her debts. She is still paying off the $20,000 tax bill she received after draining her retirement accounts, she said.

“I’m just a small fish in a big pond,” Scott said. “All I wanted was to talk to someone and get help, but I’m nobody to them.”

—-

Mendoza reported from Europe, Asia and North America; Linderman, a former Associated Press investigative reporter, reported from Baltimore; and Kinetz reported from Rome; Lisbon, Portugal, and Washington, D.C. Huizhong Wu in Bangkok, Wisdom Howell and Amelia Thomson-Deveaux in Washington, D.C., and Jesse Bedayn in Austin, Texas, contributed to this report.

—-

This story is part of an ongoing collaboration between The Associated Press and FRONTLINE (PBS) that includes the documentary “Scammed,” premiering Tuesday, Sept. 29, on PBS and online.

—-

The Associated Press receives financial support from multiple private foundations. AP is solely responsible for all content. Find AP’s standards for working with philanthropies, a list of supporters and funded coverage areas at AP.org.

—-

Contact AP’s global investigative team at Investigative@ap.org or https://www.ap.org/tips/

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

MacKenzie Scott has continued her giving spree to historically Black colleges and universities, and earlier this year she crossed a major milestone.

One of the billionaire philanthropist’s gifts made this spring, a $42 million donation to Elizabeth City State University on the school’s Founders Day in North Carolina, pushed her total giving to HBCUs well past the $1 billion mark. And that’s just part of Scott’s $26 billion philanthropic commitment since 2020, in which she’s donated to thousands of organizations focused on DEI, disaster recovery, community development, health, and environmental causes.

Elizabeth City State University Chancellor S. Keith Hargrove, Sr., expressed his “deepest gratitude” for Scott’s gift, saying she recognizes” the critical role that HBCUs play in expanding opportunity and strengthening communities.”

“Her investment affirms what we already know: that institutions like ECSU are powerful catalysts for change,” Hargrove said in a statement. “Gifts like this do more than provide resources; they accelerate momentum.” Scott’s donation will help the school’s ASCEND 2030 strategic plan, expanding opportunities for students and strengthening ties to the surrounding community.

Other billionaires like JPMorgan CEO Jamie Dimon have recently stepped in with major HBCU donations. He and his wife, Judith, recently announced a $12 million commitment to 12 HBCUs.

Scott, the ex-wife of Amazon founder Jeff Bezos, has been doling out major gifts since 2020, when she first began directing hundreds of millions of dollars toward HBCUs. One such gift was to Howard University, the alma mater of former Vice President Kamala Harris, Thurgood Marshall, and Toni Morrison (with whom Scott shares a deep connection). Scott, who is worth an estimated $37 billion, donated $80 million to Howard in November 2025, which was one of the school’s largest donations in its 158-year history. 

HBCUs MacKenzie Scott has funded—and how much

Why no-strings-attached giving is so rare and powerful

These donations share a commonality: They’re unrestricted, meaning schools can allocate them however they see fit, which could include funded scholarships, fortified endowments, attracted faculty, and bankrolled long-deferred facility upgrades. That flexibility, rare in philanthropy, is the cornerstone of what has made her approach so distinctive.

“She practices trust-based philanthropy,” Anne Marie Dougherty, CEO of the Bob Woodruff Foundation, previously told Fortune. (Scott made two major donations to a veterans-focused organization: $15 million in 2022 and $20 million in 2025). Noni Ramos, CEO of Housing Trust Silicon Valley, has similarly noted Scott’s donations are “unlike traditional funding processes,” which typically involve lengthy applications, specific restrictions, and reporting requirements. 

“Her style empowers organizations like ours to determine how best to direct funds quickly and innovatively to address pressing issues,” Ramos told Fortune in 2024.

Scott’s HBCU giving exists within a broader DEI-focused philanthropic strategy that has become increasingly pronounced as the Trump administration rolls back federal support for diversity-focused programs and institutions. In 2025 alone, she donated $70 million each to the Thurgood Marshall College Fund and the United Negro College Fund.

The personal experiences behind Scott’s $26 billion giving streak

Scott’s motivation for giving at this scale traces back, in part, to formative experiences during her college years. A dentist once offered her free dental work when he saw her securing a broken tooth with denture glue, and a college roommate loaned her $1,000 when she saw her crying about nearly having to drop out during her sophomore year.

“It is these ripple effects that make imagining the power of any of our own acts of kindness impossible,” Scott wrote in a December 2025 essay. “The potential of peaceful, non-transactional contribution has long been underestimated, often on the basis that it is not financially self-sustaining, or that some of its benefits are hard to track. But what if these imagined liabilities are actually assets?”

The simple pleasure of giving also plays a role. 

“Generosity and kindness engage the same pleasure centers in the brain as sex, food, and receiving gifts, and they improve our health and long-term happiness as well,” Scott said. 

A version of this story was originally published on Fortune.com on April 7, 2026.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Even just talking about organ meats makes many people’s noses wrinkle, let alone actually buying and cooking them. They can be very tasty, but we understand it’s not everyone’s thing. However, here’s what you should know: Organ meats are nutrient powerhouses, with B vitamins, vitamin A, iron, and more. This is why beef organ supplements can be appealing: You get the benefits of eating organ meat without having to prepare it yourself at home. 

This type of supplement can also be seen as an efficient booster. Besides the energy boost that can come from consuming B vitamins, a beef organ supplement can be a great time-saver for people who are busy at work all day and may not be getting all the nutrients they need. We looked at several popular options on the market and asked our testing team to give them a try. Here’s what those testers said about the supplements (including notes on the varying smells), plus key takeaways.

Why Trust Fortune

Our team of expert testers has tried hundreds of the most popular supplements on the market today, using our comprehensive supplement testing methodology to find the best products for most people.  

Our Top Pick

After testing multiple supplements, our team agreed that the best beef organ supplement overall is Heart & Soil Beef Organs.

Best Beef Organ Supplements of 2026

Best Beef Organ Supplements Comparison Table

Beef Organ Supplement Main Ingredients Form Serving Size Third-Party Tested
Heart & Soil Beef Organs Bovine liver, bovine heart, bovine kidney, bovine pancreas, bovine spleen Capsule 6 capsules Yes
Nutricost Grass-Fed Desiccated Beef Liver Grass-fed desiccated beef liver Capsule 4 capsules Yes
Ancestral Supplements Grass-Fed Beef Liver Grass-fed bovine liver Capsule 6 capsules Yes
Equip Beef Organ Organic bovine heart, organic bovine kidney, organic bovine liver Capsule 4 capsules Yes

Best Beef Organ Supplement Overall: Heart & Soil Beef Organs

Heart & Soil Beef Organs

Fortune score 4/5

Check Price

at Heart & Soil

  • Our thoughts: Even though this supplement formulation includes a variety of beef organs, there was no distinct flavor, and our tester liked not having to take them with meals
  • Who it’s for: People who don’t mind swallowing a lot of pills, as the serving size is six capsules
  • What makes it different: Includes a wide range of beef organs sourced from grass-fed cows


Pros

  • Flavorless
  • Very clear instructions
  • Third-party tested

Cons

  • Six-capsule serving size
  • Glass jar isn’t very travel-friendly
  • Faint earthy smell may be a minor drawback to some

Our Thoughts on Heart & Soil Beef Organs

Heart & Soil’s Beef Organs supplement is designed to help you “revitalize your body, regain your energy, and reclaim your health.” The company says this supplement, which includes grass-fed beef liver, heart, pancreas, spleen, and kidney, contains high-quality nutrients that support overall well-being. This supplement also purportedly helps maintain healthy energy levels, boosts immune health and overall resilience, promotes muscle growth and post-workout recovery, and supports metabolic and cellular function.

Our tester, Andrew, first noted that the supplement comes in a glass jar, though he said, “I would prefer plastic if I were taking this on the go.” He did appreciate the “very clear” usage directions, adding, “It gives instructions to work your way up to the recommended dose if you have never taken beef organ supplements.” He rated the instructions a 5 out of 5.

Heart and Soil as best beef organ supplements
Heart and Soil Beef Organs

Andrew said the capsules were pretty average in size, but “the serving size of six pills seems like a lot. I had to split them up into two batches.” For that reason, he rated the product a 1 out of 5 on swallowability. As for the actual flavor, “The pill has no taste; however, there is a faint earthy smell,” said Andrew. He said there wasn’t any lingering taste associated with the capsules and gave the overall taste a neutral score of 3 out of 5.

Our tester, who describes himself as a 39-year-old father of two who is active and always on the go, concluded, “These supplements were very easy to take and fit into my schedule since they did not have to be taken with meals. Other than the serving size—six capsules—being high, I feel like this product gave me a natural form of vitamins in an easy-to-use way.”

Specs:

  • Key ingredients: Bovine liver, bovine heart, bovine kidney, bovine pancreas, bovine spleen 
  • Third-party testing: Yes
  • Dosage: 3,000 mg (all ingredients combined)
  • Serving size: 6 capsules

Best Value Beef Organ Supplement: Nutricost Grass-Fed Desiccated Beef Liver

Nutricost Grass-Fed Desiccated Beef Liver

Fortune score 4/5

Check Price

at Nutricost

  • Our thoughts: Our tester liked the neutral flavor and found the capsules easy to swallow, plus they’re a great value at just 33 cents per serving
  • Who it’s for: People looking for a no-frills supplement for an excellent price
  • What makes it different: The cost per serving puts this product in a category of its own


Pros

  • No distinct flavor
  • Excellent value
  • Third-party tested

Cons

  • Four-capsule serving size
  • Minimal information on product page regarding health benefits
  • Free shipping minimum is $59

Our Thoughts on Nutricost Grass-Fed Beef Liver

The key ingredient in Nutricost Grass-Fed Desiccated Beef Liver Capsules is sourced from free-range, pasture-raised cows from Argentina. (If you’re wondering what “desiccated beef liver” is, “desiccated” simply means dehydrated or dried out.) As is typical with Nutricost, the product description is minimal and doesn’t include extensive health claims like some similar products on the market, though the company does say the supplement is made in a GMP-compliant facility.

Our tester, Meredith, examined the packaging and said it was “pretty bulky” and not ideal for travel. She also said it isn’t child-proof, and upon opening the bottle, she said, “It smells like fish food.” 

However, Meredith said the instructions were “super easy to read and understand,” and that they direct users to take four capsules per day. She rated the instructions a 5 out of 5.

Nutricost as best beef organ supplements

The capsules themselves were “pretty decent-sized,” according to Meredith, though not overly large. They were easy to swallow, but the four-capsule serving size was a lot, said Meredith. She rated the product a 1 out of 5 for swallowability.

Nutricost’s Grass-Fed Desiccated Beef Liver Capsules had a perfectly fine and neutral flavor, noted Meredith—who rated the product a neutral 3 out of 5 on taste—but “the pills smell bad even though they don’t taste bad.” Overall, though, these capsules have the lowest cost per serving in the lineup, at just 33 cents. For comparison, the most expensive product in the lineup costs more than five times as much. For those who prioritize value at a low price point, we think this supplement stands out.

Specs:

  • Key ingredients: Grass-fed desiccated beef liver
  • Third-party testing: Yes
  • Dosage: 4 capsules
  • Serving size: 3,000 mg

Best Beef Liver Supplement: Ancestral Supplements Beef Liver

Ancestral Supplements Beef Organ

Fortune score 4/5

Check Price

at Amazon

  • Our thoughts: We liked how easy it was to take this supplement, and that it was flavorless despite the strong smell
  • Who it’s for: People who want the benefits of consuming beef liver, like B vitamins and iron, without having to actually cook it themselves
  • What makes it different: Some formulas incorporate multiple beef organs, while this product relies only on grass-fed bovine liver


Pros

  • Neutral flavor
  • Easy to swallow
  • Third-party tested

Cons

  • Smell
  • $120 free shipping minimum
  • Somewhat pricey for a 30-day supply

Our Thoughts on Ancestral Supplements Beef Liver

Ancestral Supplements Grass Fed Beef Liver offers “the full array of energizing B vitamins plus iron and magnesium,” says the company’s website. The product also includes vitamin A to “support fertility, glowing skin, and eye health,” and vitamins A, D, and K to help boost the immune system. Ancestral Supplements claims its Beef Organ supplement also supports fetal development, strong bones, strength and endurance, and detox.

Sophia, our tester, looked at the product packaging and described it as looking “industrial,” adding that the bottle itself was easy to open but not child-proof. When she actually opened the bottle, though, Sophia said, “My biggest complaint is the odor of the product.”

Ancestral Supplements as best beef organ supplements

The instructions were easy to read and understand, with Sophia rating them a 5 out of 5. She noted the serving size is six capsules daily, adding, “That seems like a lot to me, but I guess it would equate to consuming the same amount of liver as if you were actually eating it.” 

The capsules themselves were powder-filled and “slightly squishy,” said Sophia. When she took them as directed, she said afterward, “Despite the smell, the capsules do not have any taste at all.” She rated the product a 5 out of 5 for swallowability and a 3 out of 5 for the neutral flavor.

Sophia was generally a fan of the product, except for what she described as the “awful” smell. “Other than that, it seems to be a quality product,” she added. She did question the cost, saying it seems expensive for a 30-day supply, but there’s a subscription option that helps lower the price.

Specs:

  • Key ingredients: Grass-fed bovine liver
  • Third-party testing: Yes
  • Dosage: 3,000 mg
  • Serving size: 6 capsules

Best Grass-Fed Beef Organ Supplement: Equip Beef Organ

Equip Beef Organ

Fortune score 4/5

Check Price

at Amazon

  • Our thoughts: We liked that the ingredients are sourced from regenerative, certified-organic, grass-fed beef
  • Who it’s for: Those who place a premium on ingredient quality, and those seeking a beef organ supplement with no strong odor
  • What makes it different: The top-notch ingredient sourcing and lack of a strong smell 


Pros

  • Ingredients include organs from regenerative organic-certified beef
  • No distinct taste or smell
  • Third-party tested

Cons

  • Price point may seem high to some
  • Free shipping minimum is $90
  • Lower dosage than others in the lineup

Specs:

  • Key ingredients: Organic bovine heart, organic bovine kidney, organic bovine liver
  • Third-party testing: Yes
  • Dosage: 2,001 mg (all ingredients combined)
  • Serving size: 4 capsules

Our Thoughts on Equip Beef Organ

Equip grass-fed beef organs are marketed as “the first regenerative organic certified beef organs capsules.” The supplement contains freeze-dried liver, kidney, and heart, and Equip calls it “nature’s original multivitamin.” The product doesn’t contain any synthetic vitamins, fillers, or flow agents, and every batch is third-party tested for heavy metals, pesticides, microplastics, and pathogens.

Our tester, Andrew, first noted that the container and packaging were “a good size” and would be easy to pack for travel. He said, “The instructions are clear and easy to understand. It simply says take one serving or four capsules with food.” He rated the instructions a 5 out of 5 for being so easy to understand.

Equip as best beef organ supplements

When he actually tried the product, he said the capsule itself was a “normal” pill that wasn’t too large in size, and because of the four-capsule serving size, Andrew took two at a time without issue. He rated this supplement a 5 out of 5 for swallowability.

Andrew gave the product another 5 out of 5 for its neutral flavor, saying, “These pills have no taste or smell.” He also said there wasn’t any aftertaste. 

Summing up his experience, Andrew said, “This product is easy to take, and I could see myself taking this once a day with dinner. If I were looking to take this on a daily basis, I think this product would be good, but the price is slightly higher than I would be looking to spend each month.” 

What are Beef Organ Supplements?

Beef organ supplements may be sourced from bovine organs like liver, heart, spleen, kidney, and pancreas, which are typically dehydrated, converted into a powder, and ultimately sold as capsules. Organ meats can be very nutrient-dense but not always easy to buy or cook, which makes a supplement an appealing option.

Nutricost as best beef organ supplements

Why These Supplements Matter to Professionals 

Many high-performing professionals prioritize both career and health and look for efficient ways to optimize both. Certain supplements may be useful in such cases, like beef organ supplements. They offer a convenient way to get the dietary benefits of organ meat without going to the grocery store or doing any cooking.

How We Tested and Selected the Best Beef Organ Supplements 

We looked at many different factors when choosing the best options.

Taste and Swallowability 

Assessing flavor is an important part of our testing process. If a supplement doesn’t taste good, people are less likely to take it regularly. The same goes for swallowability: We asked testers to rate how easy it was to swallow each product because if the capsule size is overly large or the serving size is cumbersome, people are less likely to want to take the product.

Formula

We work with a registered dietitian to review formulas for safety. This includes making sure product dosages are clinically supported and in line with the recommended daily values, and that products don’t contain any undesirable ingredients.     

Ancestral as best beef organ supplements

Third-Party Testing

The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) doesn’t approve dietary supplements for safety or efficacy, so ingredients and their amounts can differ from what’s on the label. Because of this, we look for products that have been third-party tested to confirm ingredient accuracy.    

Value

Here’s a cost breakdown for each product, including cost per serving—often a better indicator of value than overall price. Note: We also included the subscription cost for comparison, for people interested in longer-term use. 

Supplements Price for one-time purchase Cost per serving Cost per serving with subscription
Heart & Soil Beef Organs $52 $1.73 $1.30
Nutricost Grass-Fed Desiccated Beef Liver $19.97 $0.33 $0.27
Ancestral Supplements Grass-Fed Beef Liver $38 $1.27 $1.08 for one-month subscription, $1.01 for three-month subscription, $0.95 for six-month subscription
Equip Beef Organ $46.99 $1.57 $1.33

Pro Tip

Some people may consider a beef organ supplement if they’re experiencing low energy, as B vitamins can help fight fatigue. However, we recommend checking with a healthcare provider if you’re experiencing specific symptoms, as you might get more benefit from taking a different kind of supplement, like vitamin D or even a multivitamin.

Benefits of Beef Organ Supplements 

As Sydney Lappe, a dietitian based in St. Louis, Missouri, explains, “The biggest benefit of beef organ supplements is that they provide concentrated amounts of nutrients like vitamin B12, iron, zinc, selenium, copper, and vitamin A. For people who don’t eat organ meats, they can be a convenient way to get more of these nutrients.”

Equip as best beef organ supplements

However, Lappe added that it’s important to separate nutrient content from health claims. “While organ meats are packed with nutrients, there’s little direct evidence that taking a beef organ supplement will boost energy, improve hormone health, or enhance performance in otherwise healthy adults,” explained Lappe, noting that the greatest value of taking beef organ supplements is that they can help fill nutrient gaps.

How to Take Beef Organ Supplements 

We recommend following the manufacturer’s instructions when taking beef organ supplements. Make sure to note the serving size—number of capsules—and whether the directions indicate an optimal time of day to take the supplement. Additionally, note whether the supplement needs to be taken with a meal or with a certain amount of liquid. 

What to Avoid in Beef Organ Supplements 

  • Choose a product with a detailed ingredient list. “Look for a supplement that clearly lists which organs it contains—such as liver, heart, kidney, or spleen—and how much of each is included. Since each organ provides a different mix of nutrients, vague ‘proprietary blends’ don’t tell you much about what you’re actually getting,” said Lappe.
  • Prioritize products that have been third-party tested. Lappe said, “It’s also a good idea to choose a product that’s been independently tested to confirm it contains what’s listed on the label and has been screened for contaminants. Brands that follow Good Manufacturing Practices are another green flag that the supplement is produced under established quality standards.”
  • Avoid taking overly large doses or combining a beef liver supplement with other supplements that have vitamin A. “More isn’t always better,” noted Lappe. “For instance, beef liver contains a form of vitamin A that can build up in the body, so regularly taking large amounts, or combining a liver supplement with other vitamin A-containing supplements, can lead to excessive intake over time.”

How to Find the Best Beef Organ Supplements for You

Here’s what to look for when searching for a beef organ supplement. As always, we recommend speaking with a healthcare provider before starting any new supplement. Lappe also noted that most healthy adults don’t need a beef organ supplement just because organ meats are nutrient-dense. “The better question is whether you have a nutrient gap that actually needs to be filled,” said Lappe. 

Heart and Soil as best beef organ supplements

Your Wellness Goals

Consider your unique health goals and medical needs when choosing a beef organ supplement. Additionally, we recommend speaking with your healthcare provider to determine whether you have a true deficiency and could benefit from a supplement.

Form

While this lineup includes capsules only, in general, you should consider which form you prefer and seek that out when looking for a supplement. If a product is easier to take, you may be more likely to establish a consistent routine.

Cost

Consider your target price range and whether you’re willing to spend more on certain things. Some people may want a product sourced from grass-fed bovine, for example, while others may want a product with the smallest serving size to avoid swallowing a lot of capsules.

Fortune’s Final Thoughts

Beef organ supplements can provide a range of important nutrients for people who may be deficient or who simply don’t eat enough foods with those particular nutrients. They offer the dual benefit of being much more convenient than procuring and cooking organ meats and offering a lot of nutrients—ideal for people looking to maximize their efficiency and health.

Frequently Asked Questions

Are beef organ supplements effective?

As Lappe explained, “A beef organ supplement may be helpful if you have a diagnosed nutrient deficiency, a condition that affects nutrient absorption, or you rarely eat foods that naturally provide nutrients like iron or vitamin B12.” But even then, she added, it isn’t always the best option, and changes to your diet or a targeted supplement may make more sense. For this reason, it’s important to speak with a healthcare provider before starting a beef organ supplement.

Which beef organ is the healthiest?

“If there’s a nutritional standout, it’s beef liver,” said Lappe. “Gram for gram, it’s one of the most nutrient-dense foods available, providing large amounts of vitamin A, vitamin B12, iron, copper, and folate.” However, she added, “No single organ is ‘best.’ The heart is naturally rich in protein, B vitamins, iron, and CoQ10, while the kidneys provide nutrients like selenium and vitamin B12. That’s one reason many beef organ supplements combine multiple organs rather than liver on its own.”

Is it okay to take beef organ supplements every day?

We recommend following the manufacturer’s instructions and taking your beef organ supplement as directed. If you have questions about the usage instructions, we suggest consulting your healthcare provider.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

After a 20-year career at design software company Autodesk, Prakash “PK” Kota felt an urge for a career change, in part because he didn’t want to end his career having worked for only one employer. 

Upon ending his time at Autodesk with a seven-year stint as chief information officer, Kota made the leap to human resources software company UKG, where he has held the same role since April 2025. He quickly consolidated software vendors, oversaw the launch of 387 internal AI applications from more than 1,400 employee-submitted ideas, and spearheaded the internal creation of more than 12,000 AI agents across Microsoft, Google’s Gemini, and OpenAI’s ChatGPT.

“In the AI era, everyone is talking about how work will be reshaped; how do employees and workers coexist?,” says Kota. “HR tech is going to be a huge area of investment in every company.” 

AI’s ability to automate workplace tasks ranging from coding to customer service to marketing, while increasingly taking on more complex tasks via agentic AI, has put more pressure on businesses and their HR teams to envision a more collaborative workforce that blends humans and machines. There’s also far more demand for prospects who have AI skills at their fingertips: job listings that mention AI are growing almost eight times faster than the total employment market, according to consulting giant PwC.

And yet, studies consistently show that the workforce’s youngest cohort, Gen Z, is more worried about their prospects in an AI era than older workers. This is partly driven by the difficulty many are facing in landing their first entry-level job, and swirling headlines of massive job cuts at major employers including Meta Platforms, Verizon, and Oracle, oftentimes with internal AI adoption attributed as a root cause.

Even as major employers are overhauling their teams and quickly pivoting on the skills they desire from new recruits, a vast majority of HR leaders say they haven’t yet established a firm grasp on what their internal future workforce needs will be in the AI era. Only 11% of HR professionals reported having established strategic, long-term workforce plans that extend beyond a three-year window, according to a study of about 1,300 HR industry pros across ten countries published by consultancy McKinsey in June.

While AI was certainly high on Kota’s agenda when he joined UKG, he said his first major project was addressing the long-delayed IT integration projects that hadn’t yet been completed following the pandemic-era merger between Kronos and Ultimate Software. Those two companies united to form the then-newly created, privately held UKG in October 2020.

Within his first 90 days as CIO, Kota centralized the technology department to handle all systems, data, and AI across both legacy businesses. After just six months, UKG consolidated the company’s enterprise resource planning and customer relationship management software to Microsoft and Salesforce, respectively. Multiple data warehouses were also merged.

As UKG leans into AI, the company has made ChatGPT Enterprise and Google’s Gemini Enterprise widely available to all 14,000 employees, while the product and engineering team is also using Anthropic’s Claude Code tool. Kota says he’s mostly avoiding multi-year contracts, because the technology is evolving so quickly.

One of the more impactful internal applications of AI is UKG’s utilization of AI-enabled voice and chat agents to handle customer inquiries, with an estimated 27% of those calls now being addressed autonomously. Autonomous agents are also drafting customer materials to make it easier for human representatives to handle the calls they do have with customers, helping workers handle issues at a speedier pace while also giving them time to upsell UKG’s products.

This system is also continuously learning, says Kota, as the AI tool has created around 300 “case studies” that summarize a customer service issue that it newly learned to handle and explain how to address the problem. These case studies are then used by both the AI tool and human workers. Propensity AI models, meanwhile, rely on 300 unique signals to predict the probability that a customer may be willing to buy more from UKG and share those insights with the sales and marketing teams.

Kota says he looks at multiple metrics to gauge the success of an AI internal deployment. For coding, value is determined by not just the quantity that’s produced, but also by what product features are actually bought by customers. Within customer service, UKG is monitoring both overall productivity and also upselling and customer sentiment scores.

And while AI-enabled efficiency isn’t measured equally for every employee, Kota and UKG says they have measured that AI has added 8,500 hours in productivity each month.

UKG’s C-suite leadership is also encouraged to think about AI adoption through a so-called “T3” concept: talent, tools, and tokens. Business leaders need to allocate spending to all three, and Kota says they are best suited to determine what’s the right mix. 

“I don’t want to have a standard rule across the company about what the divisional token spend should be,” says Kota. “We should have an open mind with this concept.”

John Kell

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

After a 15-year run as Apple’s CEO, Tim Cook has handed the reins to longtime insider John Ternus. It marks the end of an era for the world’s most valuable company, as Cook moves into the role of executive chairman. And reflecting back on his time at the helm of the $4.75 trillion tech giant, Cook shares one daily leadership habit that pushed him to strive for success. 

“For the past 15 years I’ve started just about every morning the same way,” Cook shared in a community letter speaking on his tenure as CEO. “I open my email and I read notes I received the day before from Apple’s users all over the world.”

Since 2011, Cook has led Apple through a global pandemic, supply-chain upheaval, and the rise of AI—and has read thousands of messages about the products all along the way. Apple’s new executive chairman said customers would “share little pieces” of their world—from close calls caught by Apple watches, to capturing memories on their iPhones, to how their work has been changed since the dawn of the Mac computer. 

Whether it be heartfelt stories or complaints about the products, Cook says he combed through the messages daily, and said it’s been an “honor and a privilege” to lead the company building transformative tech.

“In every one of those emails I feel the beating heart of our shared humanity. I feel a sense of deepening obligation to work harder and push further,” Cook continued. “But most of all, I feel a gratitude that I cannot put into words, that I somehow got to be the person on the other end of those emails.”

Cook reads messages at 4 a.m. and reads hundreds of emails daily

Before most people have woken up to start their workdays, Cook has already been reading customer comments online. The former CEO gets up right before 4 a.m. every day, combs through hundreds of customer feedback to emails to get a sense of what users are experiencing.

“I rise a bit before four, I like to take the first hour and go through user comments and things like that, and sort of focus on the external people that are so important to us,” Cook told Axios in a 2018 interview. 

Then after a one hour workout to manage his stress, Cook dives right back into what Apple buyers have to say. He begins his 5 a.m. ritual of 15 years: reading “the majority of” the 700 to 800 emails that hit his inbox everyday. While many CEOs would delegate their flooded inboxes to their assistants, Cook said that “It keeps my hands on the pulse of what customers are feeling and thinking and doing.”

Cook is one of many emails who have embedded emailing into their daily routine—while others have eliminated the burden altogether. 

CEOs are split on how to handle emails

Just like Cook, billionaire Mark Cuban religiously checks his inbox—and his email is even available to the public. 

Rather than sit through hours-long meetings, he prefers to sift through hundreds of messages; he starts his day checking his morning emails around coffee, showering, and taking his daughter to school. And just like the former Apple CEO, he gets in a workout session before getting back to his inbox. Having an assistant handle his messages would only “slow things down.”

“I receive around 700 emails a day and use three phones (two Android and one iPhone) to manage everything,” Cuban wrote to Business Insider in 2025—ironically, over email. “I’d rather get 700 to 1,000 emails than sit in long, boring meetings.”

Other business leaders are adamant on emailing around the clock—even if it bleeds into the weekend. Uber CEO Dara Khosrowshahi revamped the company’s work culture when he stepped into the role in 2017, quickly implementing new ways to turn things around. One such change included emailing back whenever the need arises. If employees are “not performing” well in the “really demanding” environment, then Khosrowshahi said they’ll be shown the door. 

“Part of working hard is sending emails to the team on a Saturday,” the CEO of the $155.7 billion ride-hailing giant said on the Diary of a CEO podcast earlier this year. “And if I don’t get a response on Saturday, sending them an email on Sunday with a question mark. What’s going on?”

Brian Chesky, the cofounder and CEO of Airbnb, prefers to unplug. He runs the company on his own hours, doing away with morning meetings before 10 a.m., and rarely touching his inbox. Instead of shooting out emails, Chesky said he opts to call and text: “Don’t apologize for how you want to run your company.”

“[Emailing] was the thing about my job that I hated the most before the pandemic,” Chesky told The Wall Street Journal last year.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Suze Orman has spent decades as a best-selling author and TV host, teaching people how to invest, save for retirement, and manage their money. She’s also built a fortune of her own, with a net worth in the tens of millions— but there’s one category of spending that has always bothered her: eating out at restaurants, which she has called one of the biggest wastes of money.

“We still to this day eat at home,” Orman said in a recent interview with The Wall Street Journal

At the time, Orman said her wife had prepared congee rice for lunch and meatloaf for dinner. The couple does eat out occasionally, she said, but usually not because they “want to”—rather, it’s a social obligation when they’re meeting friends. Even then, Orman said she worried about how the bill could affect her friends’ finances.

“If we go out to eat, the deal is we have to pay because I am not going to let people, who I know don’t have the kind of money that we have, waste their money on food eating out,” she said.

Orman’s philosophy on eating out has only become stronger as restaurant prices have climbed. Between December 2024 and December 2025, prices for “food away from home” increased 4.1%, compared with a 2.4% increase for food purchased to eat at home, according to the U.S. Consumer Price Index. Overall consumer prices rose 2.7% during the same period.

“Look up McDonald’s. Look up Taco Bell. Are you kidding me? $23, $30 just to go to McDonald’s for whatever you eat there,” Orman said.

Suze Orman would ‘drop dead’ before buying Starbucks—she’d rather invest that money in her Roth IRA

Orman’s money-saving philosophy doesn’t stop with sit-down restaurants. The 75-year-old has said she also refuses to spend money at coffee shops.

“I do Cafe Bustelo coffee every morning,” she said in 2024. “I would drop dead before I bought a coffee. I do one cup a day and that’s it.”

Her rationale is that seemingly small purchases can add up to substantial sums over time—and that money could instead be invested. Spending $100 on coffee every month, for example, could be put into a Roth IRA and potentially grow into hundreds of thousands of dollars over several decades.

“You need to think about it as: You are peeing $1 million down the drain as you are drinking that coffee,” Orman said to CNBC in 2019. “Do you really want to do that? No.”

But Orman isn’t alone. Kevin O’Leary, the millionaire Shark Tank investor, has similarly emphasized how seemingly small purchases can add up to a major hit to your finances.

“A coffee for five dollars and fifty cents. You go to work, you spend fifteen bucks on a sandwich,” O’Leary said in 2024. “What are you, an idiot?”

“Most people, particularly working in metropolitan cities, are just starting out their jobs, making the first $60,000, piss away about $15,000 a year on stupid stuff,” he added.

Eating out or grabbing a latte won’t derail your finances—as long as you can afford it

Critics argue that being so financially conscious that you avoid every restaurant meal or Starbucks run can miss the bigger point of personal finance: understanding where your money is coming from, where it’s going, and whether your spending aligns with your financial objectives.

If a weekly latte is something you enjoy and can afford—budget for it

The goal shouldn’t be to eliminate every expense that isn’t essential, it’s to make sure those expenses fit within your broader financial plan.

Orman herself isn’t immune to spending on things she enjoys. She’s admitted she splurges on private air travel—and has owned properties in Manhattan, the Bahamas, and South Africa. O’Leary, too, has spent heavily on designer timepieces, jewelry, and other luxury accessories. 

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Italian fishermen for two years incinerated most of the invasive Atlantic blue crabs caught in the Po River Delta south of Venice. Few Italians had an appetite for the alien predator blamed for decimating their prized Manila clams.

While experiments in containment continue, including the release of tens of thousands of octopus predators, the industry’s response has been shifting to find new markets for the crustaceans. The strategy is already salvaging the livelihood of some fishermen and, some hope, may even rehabilitate the much-maligned crab’s image in Italy.

Fishermen pivot to salvage livelihoods

Like other members of his local cooperative, second-generation fisherman Federico Zago saw his income crash after the crab invasion. The Polesine Fishermen’s Cooperative Consortium’s revenues fell 75% to 15 million euros ($17 million) in 2024 and 2025; the cooperative’s active members also shrank from 1,500 to 850.

“We needed to change strategy, and create an opportunity from this disaster,” said Paolo Mancin, the cooperative’s president.

Desperate, they pivoted to exporting the unwanted crabs, with the aim of preserving the Manila clams — invasive themselves — and mussels that created decades of prosperity in the shallow lagoons of Veneto and Emilia Romagna.

Zago now pulls up cages full of crabs from his traditional fishing cabin built on stilts over the Scardovari lagoon in the Veneto region. And the consortium’s strategy is working; so far this year it has sold every crab it has caught, eliminating the need for incineration. It forecasts 20 million euros ($23 million) in revenue this year, most from sales of crab.

“Since we’re going to have to live with these crabs, I hope they become an opportunity,” said Zago. “I hope the market continues to grow.”

Climate change creates perfect conditions for invasive crab

The Atlantic blue crab has been present in the Adriatic Sea since at least the 1940s, arriving in ballast water from commercial vessels, according to Piero Genovesi, an invasive species expert at Italy’s environmental protection institute.

Their numbers remained contained until 2023, and local fishermen reported catching them only sporadically.

Then came the explosion. Crabs tore through fishing nets, devoured mollusks at an alarming rate and edged out the native green crab, a local soft-shell specialty.

Climate change played a key role. Higher water temperatures favor blue crabs’ reproduction, but the real trigger was likely drought-driven drops in the Po River’s levels. That allowed sea water to infiltrate freshwater tributaries across the peninsula, especially in lagoons and deltas where clam and mussel farms provided ample prey.

“Climate change may therefore have favored reproduction through both temperature and salinity, because it changed the salinity of the water,’’ Genovesi said.

Eradication program failed

Reeling from damage to the mollusk industry, the Italian government adopted a blue crab eradication program in 2024. Over two years, the government paid the Polesine to catch and incinerate nearly 2.3 million kilograms (5 million pounds) of crabs. Fishermen in the neighboring Sacca di Goro lagoon and the Orbetello lagoon in Tuscany did the same.

But with female crabs able to produce up to 8 million eggs every season, culling barely dented their numbers. The project has been shelved, said Enrico Caterino, the government’s extraordinary commissioner for the blue crab emergency.

University of Bologna scientists this summer released 150,000 baby octopuses into the Adriatic Sea on the Riviera Romagnola, some two hours south of the Po Delta, promoting their project with an impressive video showing an adult octopus grabbing and devouring a crab.

Most octopus babies aren’t expected to survive. And given their preference for rocky environments over sandy lagoons and the crabs’ reproductive prowess, fishermen and experts alike are skeptical.

“If an animal with such high reproductive potential finds suitable environmental conditions, predators may not be able to keep it under control,” Genovesi said.

Fishermen deliver crabs bound for Sri Lanka

Each morning, Italian fishermen unload crates of scuttling crabs from the backs of their cars and trucks, 100-150 kilograms (up to 330 pounds) at a time.

Crab sales may be keeping the fishermen afloat, but their earnings remain nowhere near those of the clam industry’s heyday. Crab fetches just 1.30 euros per kilogram, compared with 10 euros for clams, which once generated 90% of their income but now account for just 10%.

Their crabs are steamed, frozen and packed into boxes to be shipped to Sri Lanka, where workers remove the meat by hand. The joint venture between Sri Lankan company Taprobane Seafoods and the Scardovari consortium churns out a range of crab products, from claw meat to mixed meat and fillet. Most is exported to other markets, with just a small quantity returning to Italy. Taprobane is forecasting large-scale retail expansion in Italy and Europe.

Mancin says he hopes the meat that arrives packed from Sri Lanka will help win over Italians who have so far resisted the “If you can’t beat ‘em, eat ’em” campaign launched in 2023.

Working to change Italian tastes

Despite the efforts, blue crab is mostly absent from top restaurants around Venice that specialize in the native green crab, due both to the labor involved in processing the invader species and its bad rap, according to the FIPE Venice restaurant federation.

The Yogi restaurant and bar in Porto Tolle on the Po Delta is an exception, having fully embraced the blue crab out of passion and necessity — finding themselves empty-handed after the invasion.

Owner and chef Stefania Marchesini, who fished professionally herself for 11 years, pays a premium to local fishermen, especially for soft-shell crabs known in the local dialect as moeche.

She offers an all-crab menu in her family-run restaurant, featuring fried crab balls, creamed crab on polenta, soft-shell crab and sectioned crab in the shell — each recipe capturing the crab’s delicate flavors.

“At first, the customer is very skeptical. But then the reaction is completely positive, and they want to try the entire range of products,” she said.

Marchesini also has a separate workshop where she prepares crab to sell to other restaurants — but business has so far been disappointing. Her commercial fare includes moeche individually packed in plastic envelopes, and full crabs already broken apart, under vacuum, to make them easier to prepare and less messy to eat.

Even at restaurants where the products sell out, owners are reluctant to restock. Marchesini chalks it up to cultural resistance, but she is undeterred. Recently she brought her menu to Barcelona’s Alimentaria, one of the world’s largest food and beverage trade fairs.

“We are all angry because it invaded our seas,” Marchesini said. “But we also have to eat. Once people understand how it should be prepared, they will realize it is an excellent product.”
___

The Associated Press’ climate and environmental coverage receives financial support from multiple private foundations. AP is solely responsible for all content. Find AP’s standards for working with philanthropies, a list of supporters and funded coverage areas at AP.org.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

  • In today’s CEO Daily: Diane Brady interviews Galderma’s CEO about planting deep roots in the U.S. market.
  • The big leadership story: Do CEOs actually matter?
  • The markets: Down globally as bond yields edged higher.
  • Plus: All the news and watercooler chat from Fortune.

Good morning. The English are coming. So are the Dutch, Germans, Danish, Swiss and other Europeans driving growth in foreign direct investment in the U.S. right now. FDI rose by $266 billion to $5.86 trillion at the end of 2025, with Europe accounting for much of the increase and manufacturing remaining the largest target. 

We know why it’s happening: Companies want access to the world’s deepest consumer market and pool of capital, along with U.S. talent—and, of course, manufacturing on American soil is a hedge against tariffs. It’s good news for policymakers looking for tangible wins.

Several European CEOs have told me their goal is to build deeply-rooted American businesses. Galderma is a case in point. The Swiss dermatology company, whose brands range from Cetaphil and Alastin to injectable fillers such as Sculptra and Restylane, generated $5.24 billion in revenue last year. The U.S. accounted for 40% of those sales and is its fastest-growing market. Galderma announced last year that it will invest more than $650 million in U.S. manufacturing through 2030. “If you want to succeed, you have to succeed in the U.S.,” CEO Flemming Ørnskov told me.

Ørnskov’s first priority was access to R&D talent. “The business was in Fort Worth and I said, ‘If we want to be competing against Sanofi and everybody else, let’s move it to Boston.’” (The French drugmaker Sanofi’s Dupixent competes with Galderma’s Nemluvio in treating skin conditions such as eczema.)  

Galderma’s big competitive target is AbbVie-owned Allergan Aesthetics, the U.S. injectables leader that makes Botox and Juvéderm. “Until we have closed the gap to Allergan in market share, I won’t think we’ve succeeded,”  said Ørnskov. 

That’s why geography matters: For Galderma’s U.S. headquarters, he picked Miami because it serves a fast-growing consumer market and is a gateway to Latin America. He’s also building a presence in Orange County, Calif., because, he says, “the aesthetic business is dependent on expertise and that expertise is so concentrated there.” Fort Worth remains an important distribution hub.

Of course there are also some challenges for companies seeking a foothold in the U.S., Ørnskov said: “The bar for aesthetic products approval is the highest in the U.S.—by far the highest—and it’s become even tougher … but it’s such an important market that we have to do whatever it takes.”

Contact CEO Daily via Diane Brady at diane.brady@fortune.com

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Good morning. Companies are spending more on AI, and employees overwhelmingly say the technology makes them more productive. So far, those gains aren’t translating into operating profit for most companies.

Nearly nine in 10 respondents say their organizations regularly use AI for at least one business function, and 44% say they are scaling it enterprise-wide, according to a McKinsey survey of 1,719 professionals and business leaders globally. Eighty percent say AI has improved their individual productivity, and half say it helps them make better decisions.

But just 37% say AI is having a meaningful impact on earnings before interest and taxes (EBIT), unchanged from a year ago.

AI is also taking up a larger share of corporate budgets. Twenty-eight percent of respondents say AI now accounts for more than 10% of their IT budget, and 60% expect to increase AI investment next year. Twenty percent say AI-related operating costs, including token costs, are already constraining their use of the technology.

The companies reporting the largest financial gains offer one clue about where that spending pays off.

What McKinsey calls “AI high performers,” the 6% of organizations that attribute at least 5% of EBIT to AI, are far more likely to redesign workflows rather than add AI to existing processes. Nearly three-quarters have fundamentally redesigned workflows, up from 55% last year.

Company size also shows up in the results. Fifty-four percent of organizations with more than $1 billion in revenue report scaling AI enterprise-wide, compared with a third of smaller firms. Among large companies, the share scaling AI agents in at least one function rose from 27% to 40% in a year, while the share among smaller companies remained at 22%.

For finance chiefs weighing another year of higher AI spending, McKinsey’s findings suggest that increasing the investment is the easy part. The next AI budget may be as much a workflow budget as a technology budget.

Sheryl Estrada
Sheryl.Estrada@fortune.com

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

They say you can’t put a price on love—but in today’s economy, it might be common sense.

Single U.S. adults were asked in a new survey how much they ideally would like potential partners to earn—and were given the caveat that the expectations had to be “realistic.” Respondents who said the income of a would-be partner is important to them, on average, said $139,000 per year was an acceptable salary.

According to the study from insurance giant Northwestern Mutual, Millennials (aged 30 to 45) had the highest income expectations for a potential attachment, at $160,000. Meanwhile, Gen Z (currently aged between 14 and 29)—who are earlier in their careers—said $135,000 was an ideal sum. The survey spoke to those aged 18 and up.

Older generations had slightly lower expectations: Gen X (41 to 64 years old) said $123,000 a year is ideal, while Boomers (65 and up) said $125,000 was a healthy salary.

These expectations perhaps reflect the arc of individual earning expectations. Data from the St Louis Fed, analyzed by Investopedia, shows the median annual earnings for those aged 35 to 44 in the U.S. is $72,020. That is followed by those aged 45 to 54, who earned a median salary of $71,604. Ages 65 and upwards earned a median in the $60,000s while ages 25 to 34 had a median income of $59,800.

While the bar of expectations follows the trajectory of earnings for Americans as they age, the gap between “ideal” earnings for partners is significantly ahead of the real world.

Further gaps between expectation and reality appear when broken down by gender: Men ideally would like their partners to earn $101,000 a year, the study finds, while women would like partners to earn $172,000 a year.

One reason for the differing opinions may be due to the gender pay gap. While the Northwestern study does not define the gender of would-be partners, data support the notion that heterosexual women may be accustomed to male partners earning more. The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) says that the median usual weekly earnings of full-time wage and salaried workers for men is $1,380 as of Q2 2026. For women, it is $1,131. This divide also widens as individuals reach peak earning potential: The BLS data shows that for men aged 25 and up, their median weekly earnings were $1,459 in the second quarter of 2026, and $1,171 for women.

Pew Research wrote last year that the gender pay gap has only fractionally closed over the past 20 years:  In 2024, women earned an average of 85% of men’s earnings, while in 2003, women earned 81% as much as men.

However, there’s a silver lining for single people who neither earn nor want to earn six figures: 59% of singles don’t believe a potential partner’s income is important.

The money talk

Younger people were talking to their partners earlier about finances, and said financial compatibility was more important than emotional chemistry, physical attraction, or shared interests, the Northwestern study (carried out by The Harris Poll) showed.

Compared to older generations, Gen Z and Millennials were more likely to talk about finances with potential partners in the first few days or weeks of a relationship (10% and 11% respectively, compared to 6% of Gen X and Boomers). They were most likely to talk about money when the relationship got “serious” but before moving in together or getting married.

They were also less likely than Boomers and Gen X to wait until marriage or cohabitation to have a financial chat (15% of Boomers waited that long, compared to 6% of Millennials).

With young people facing an increasingly challenging economy, the Northwestern study also reinforced a familiar trend: Milestones being pushed back, or potentially never hit, by younger people. 31% of Gen Z and 24% of Millennials reported financial challenges were an obstacle to buying a house, while 24% of Gen Z and 14% of Millennials said finances may delay or cause them to decide against having children.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Good morning. On Fortune’s radar today:

➡️ Did someone forward you this email? If you would like to receive this information directly, every morning before the markets open in New York, sign up here.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

  • In today’s CEO Daily: Welcome to the John Ternus era at Apple.
  • The big leadership story: How long should a CEO get for a turnaround?
  • The markets: Down globally at the start of September, a historically bad month for stocks.
  • Plus: All the news and watercooler chat from Fortune.

Good morning. John Ternus steps up as CEO of Apple today in one of the most public and well-chronicled succession handoffs in recent memory. My colleague Sebastian Herrera has written a great analysis of whether this low-key engineer can lead Apple to victory in the AI race. That’s a key question to track for Apple and other companies at this pivotal moment. And there are other questions to keep on the radar:

Will Apple now have two centers of power? Tim Cook wrote an emotional memo to staff yesterday, in which he thanked colleagues for bringing out the best in him and praised the “brilliant and wonderful and capable” Ternus as the perfect person to lead Apple. But Cook isn’t going away. As executive chairman, he’ll not only continue to mentor his successor but also engage with policymakers and other external stakeholders on Apple’s behalf. That’s not unusual—or even undesirable—in these tricky political times. But it can add a layer of complication for the new guy, as Bob Chapek discovered when taking over from Bob Iger at Disney in 2020. (Iger remained as executive chairman and returned to the CEO role after Chapek was ousted in 2022.) Other CEOs have privately complained to me that leading a company can be awkward when their former boss sticks around. The onus for getting that balance right will fall largely on Cook.

What problem does Apple have to fix? As Sebastian writes, “The job description for the chief executive at Apple—and the standards by which success is measured—have often been defined by the person in the role.” With the CEO title moving from a master operator (Cook’s background was in logistics and supply chain) to a master engineer with a quarter-century of experience working on Apple’s iconic devices, one might assume that Apple’s chief challenge is to reinvent its products for the AI era. But maybe the bigger challenge is to reinvent its ecosystem, and even its culture, in radical ways. Of course, expertise in one area doesn’t preclude developing or hiring expertise in another. Along with setting the vision and strategy for the company, a CEO’s main job is to create the leadership team to execute on it. Keep a close eye on who Ternus promotes or hires in key roles.

How will Ternus handle the innovator’s dilemma? Apple controls a fifth of the global smartphone market and closer to two-thirds in the premium category of devices, those that cost more than $600. As noted by Clay Christensen, the late Harvard Business School professor and coiner of the term “innovator’s dilemma,” successful companies are incentivized to focus on improving their most profitable products to the point where they often ignore or try to fight innovations that threaten to disrupt their core business. That tendency could be disastrous for Apple, which has struggled to find its footing in the AI era. Last I checked, the most popular AI assistants were owned by Google, OpenAI, and platforms other than Apple. Yes, the iPhone is still ubiquitous. BlackBerry was also a fantastic hardware maker. (I still miss that Qwerty keyboard.) Enough said.

Contact CEO Daily via Diane Brady at diane.brady@fortune.com

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

David Head is CEO of Endorsed, a San Francisco identity verification startup that uses AI to screen candidates. That task includes detecting signs of potential imposters and fraudsters, which these days includes a torrent of North Korean operatives posing as IT workers, who over the past several years have snuck into hundreds of U.S. companies.  

Endorsed, which Head co-founded with CTO Kevin Fu, has analyzed more than 11 million job applications for fraud and is backed by Joe Montana’s Liquid 2 Ventures, Pioneer Fund, and angels including Micah Smurthwaite, said Head. The firm analyzed a sample of 175,000 job applications for all role types in 2026 across U.S. companies ranging from three to 25,000+ employees, where the application was flagged as having mid-to high-risk patterns associated with North Korean IT worker schemes. If you aren’t aware, men from the Democratic People’s Republic of Korea have been forced to pose as workers seeking IT jobs so they can funnel their earnings into authoritarian ruler Kim Jong Un’s nuclear weapons program, according to the UN

Among U.S.-based remote IT roles, where Head says the fraud is most concentrated, applications carrying those patterns went from 11% of the total in the third quarter of 2024 to 44% a year later. Endorsed estimates that, for the most recent quarter, the rate was a whopping 47%. 

Endorsed, which surfaces risk signals for human review, found data showing that the current setup looks like this: North Koreans likely favor claiming to hail from Texas, which accounted for 26.5% of all flagged applications. California and Florida origins were also popular, accounting for 14.4% and 7.2% respectively. As for individual cities, the North Koreans’ most popular choices to claim as their own hometown included Dallas, Austin, and Houston. 

The scammers are also partial when it comes to where they claim to have gone to school. The research reveals that the most popular purported alma maters for the North Koreans are the University of North Texas and UT Austin,  followed by the University of Central Missouri and UT Dallas. As for past employers, the fake applicants are most likely to claim they worked at Amazon, Google, and Meta, while Capital One, CVS Health, Microsoft, and Stripe are popular choices too. As for first names, the North Koreans like to go by Sai, Michael, David, and Kevin. More than half included a LinkedIn profile. 

If all of this sounds banal, that’s the point. The scammers pick familiar names, cities, employers and schools because it offers additional camouflage based on real job applicants, Head said. 

“One or even several of these traits should never make an applicant seem suspicious on their own,” he noted. “The risk comes from a broader pattern of inconsistencies and behavior, not someone’s name or background.”

Thousands of North Korean workers have taken jobs at Fortune 500 companies undetected until they get caught and American accomplices are often part of the conspiracies. A New Jersey facilitator was sentenced to nine years in prison in April for spearheading a ring that put operatives inside more than 100 U.S. companies. 

Despite the wave of North Korean fraud, venture capitalists are getting pickier and investing in fewer companies. Cybersecurity venture funding was flat at $8.5 billion in the first half of 2026, while deal count fell 23.8%, according to PitchBook’s Q2 2026 cybersecurity report. The second quarter’s $3.8 billion across 165 transactions was the most tepid since the end of 2024. Security operations led on deal count with 47 transactions worth $1 billion making up more than a quarter of all VC-backed cybersecurity funding. (Endorsed considers itself to sit at the cross-section of recruitment tech and cybersecurity, and Head calls it “an emergent category.”)

Among identity and access management, funding shriveled from $0.8 billion in Q1 to $0.3 billion in Q2. PitchBook attributes much of the pullback to the fear that some of these AI-native security startups will lose their luster in favor of frontier models like Anthropic’s Mythos. However, PitchBook is bullish on IAM given that nonhuman identities “outnumber humans roughly 45 to 1 in typical enterprises.”

And ultimately, using a checklist based on fraud patterns simply won’t be enough to verify identities and root out imposters. Endorsed’s model looks past biographical details and examines devices and networks, along with document and behavior signals, the company says, with a human required to sign off on decisions. 

So when Head’s own co-founder and CTO, Kevin Fu, turned out to match several of the fraud patterns, Head couldn’t resist pointing it out. Fu grew up in a Dallas suburb, went to the University of Texas at Austin, and spent most of his career at LinkedIn, owned by Microsoft.

Every single one of those details aligns with data Head’s company provided exclusively to Fortune about people pretending to be American software engineers. Head volunteered the coincidence himself when he sent the figures over.

“We’ve scanned him with Endorsed though,” joked Head, “and I can verify that he is legitimate.”

See you later,

Amanda Gerut
amanda.gerut@fortune.com

Submit a deal for the Term Sheet newsletter here.

Joey Abrams curated the deals section of today’s newsletter. Subscribe here.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Radical opinions on the economy aren’t hard to come by right now: Tech titans, economists, Wall Street giants, and politicians have all suggested that AI will be transformative, but can’t agree on whether it will be for good or evil. Extreme divides in opinion are also appearing over policy: be it trade, immigration, interest rates, or national debt.

The Federal Reserve Bank of Chicago’s President and CEO, Austan Goolsbee, is less concerned with prophecies of chaos or prosperity—he’s more focused on the reality of American consumers, and the businesses they work for.

In a landmark Jackson Hole speech last week, new Federal Reserve chairman Kevin Warsh said inflation was the sharpest focus, at present, for the rate-setting Federal Open Market Committee (FOMC), of which Goolsbee is a member. The reason: Price rises are comfortably ahead of the central bank’s mandated 2% target, pushed higher by supply-side shocks like the Middle East oil upset and tariffs.

Speaking exclusively to Fortune, Goolsbee agreed with the balance of concerns Warsh laid out: “On the real side, we’ve been stable, now inching toward dangers of overheat, and on the inflation side, after a couple of years of strong progress, it stalled out and started getting worse. But, we’ve had one encouraging report, one OK report, and now our challenge is … the inflation.”

The employment side of the Fed’s mandate looks relatively stable across data points such as the unemployment rate, vacancy rate, hiring rate, and the layoff rate, Goolsbee explained: “I think that’s been largely—not the result of AI data centers, for much ballyhoo—it’s the U.S. consumer. Broad-based consumer spending growth is the thing that has kept the economy solid and stable.”

And while everyone is closely watching AI’s impact on the labor market—be it layoffs, productivity gains, or demand for certain skills needed for infrastructure—Goolsbee is particularly concerned about potential economic overheating. He explained: “I would characterize the expansion of the data centers as very hot, but largely shoving other parts of the economy down.” 

“The rise has been stepping on others—they’re competing for the resources. When I’m touring around the 7th district, people [are] saying: ‘We’re having to scale back our plans because getting construction workers is too expensive, you can’t get HVAC,’ etc. That implies a sector rebalance, that is different from an aggregate overheating, [but] that said, we’re not far from that turning into aggregate overheating.”

If the impact of data center buildouts spreads further through the economy—pushing up services inflation, for example—”that would make me more nervous,” said Goolsbee. The 10th president of the Chicago Fed explained he was comfortable with holding the base rate at the last FOMC meeting in July because the most contemporary inflation data had shown some improvement (the all items CPI reading was down 0.4% in June, and a flat 0.1% in July) “so it makes sense to wait and see if this has legs, or is just a blip.”

Promises vs reality

AI has produced some sparkling outlooks for the global economy: Nvidia’s Jensen Huang believes that while there will be some labor disruption, the technology will be a net job creator “at a scale that we have never seen.” Tesla CEO Elon Musk said AI will make money essentially irrelevant and work a hobby, while Meta’s Mark Zuckerberg wrote that AI, in a healthily balanced economy, will see “overall productivity and innovation increase while employment levels remain high.”

Meanwhile, Goolsbee is thinking about the “grubby day job” of the Fed, saying the impact of AI on monetary policy depends on how expected the outcomes are.

“If the productivity lands on us in an unexpected way, inflation goes down, and rates can go down,” Goolsbee explained. “But the more expected it is, and the bigger the hype … it leads to just old-fashioned overheating in the short run, because equity values go up and so the businesses launch massive capital investment in the here and now, people start spending out of their equity-well in the here and now, before the productivity bounty has arrived.” 

“It’s fun to engage in the academic exercise of dreaming [about] how AI will affect the long-term growth in the United States or the global economy, and we should think that through, but for the grubby day job of the Federal Open Market Committee, it’s not at all clear.”

There’s also the question of when these massive gains come to pass. In 1987, Nobel Prize-winning economist Robert Solow remarked: “You can see the computer age everywhere but in the productivity statistics”. This is the basis of the Solow Productivity Paradox, suggesting that productivity may slow—or at least lag expectations—with technological advancements.

In a July study, the Fed noted that while sectors with more exposure to AI have higher productivity growth, trends across organizations with low, medium, and high exposure levels remain consistent over time, “suggestive of micro-level productivity gains not adding up in aggregate.”

Goolsbee is mindful of this delay and, therefore, wary of applying it too swiftly to the current outlook. “It strikes me it’s a bunch of great technologists who are coming up with this, and they’re wanting to declare themselves economists, and you’ve already seen it not play out the way that they said,” Goolsbee added. “I would like them at least to acknowledge that in the last 10/15 years—this may be the most extreme version—but they have declared numerous technologies were going to totally change the world and displace millions of jobs, and we’re still waiting for those ones to happen, whether from autonomous vehicles to NFTs and blockchain … we’ve had a series of those.” 

 “It’s not to make light, it’s clear that in some sectors the adoption has been so rapid that they’re feeling the pinch, but I don’t believe that the low hiring rate is predominantly caused from AI.”

‘Traaaaaaansitory’ supply shocks

A more unexpected delay between theory and real-world data is emerging in the form of supply shocks. During the tenure of Jerome Powell, the previous Fed chairman, the FOMC was repeatedly urged to follow Econ 101 and “look through” inflationary pressures, as they stemmed from seemingly one-off supply shocks (such as tariffs or the Middle East conflict) rather than underlying trends pushing prices higher.

But Goolsbee argues that, particularly since the pandemic, supply shocks large enough end up being substantially more persistent than theoretical models suggest. One factor is that current supply shocks aren’t “one and done” because they arise from ongoing issues like geopolitics. Another factor is that huge geopolitical supply chains take longer to fix than they did previously.

It is for the FOMC to balance the risk of reacting to transitory supply shocks (or, as Goolsbee describes them, “traaaaansitory” supply shocks that drag on) against the risk of enduring above-target inflation. This, ultimately, belies the biggest threat Goolsbee sees to the economy.

“In terms of public attention, it has shifted to data centers, and it feels like that’s all anyone wants to talk about, but I would like to shift it back,” Goolsbee said. “The thing in my mind that has made the economy stable and growing—despite a series of pretty intense shocks—… is the unrelenting, continued consumer spending.”

“If you go out here in the Midwest, prices are on everyone’s mind, and if there were going to be something that shook the consumers, it would shake the economy. If we hit a hiccup on consumer spending, to me, that is the biggest risk to continued stability and growth.”

Goolsbee advocated for attention focused on “old school” economic barometers: “What’s consumer spending and is the consumer going to keep up this pace?”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

With the U.S. Open underway, tennis’ biggest stars face off in New York City to hoist the silver trophy and vie to take home a multimillion-dollar payout. Among them was longtime legend Novak Djokovic, who played the first round of the tournament this past Sunday night but lost in a crushing upset to Argentine player Mariano Navone after nearly five hours of exhausting gameplay. Though he lost out on a shot at breaking the record for most Grand Slam titles ever (of which he owns), the tennis icon is still walking away with plenty of prize money on and off the court.

The Serbian star—who currently holds the men’s all-time record with 24 Grand Slam singles titles, and remains tied with Margaret Court for most titles in tennis history—lost his streak of 78 first-round wins at Grand Slam tournaments. After he lost in five grueling sets against Navone that went on until nearly midnight, Djokovic was seen limping and cramping on the court, throwing up at least once as he continues grappling with various years-long physical ailments. That night, the 39-year-old said that his body started to “collapse” from the severity of health issues, with his back and shoulder giving out towards the end of the match. Meanwhile, young-and-scrappy Navone—a 25-year-old unseeded underdog—was able to clinch the win after an intense battle against one of the sport’s most decorated champions.

This was the first time Djokovic lost a first-round match in two decades since the 2006 Australian Open. And with 101 ATP titles and 24 Grand Slams singles titles under his belt, Djokovic’s defeat came as a shock to many—even if he’s at an age when many tennis stars have already retired. And even though he didn’t make it past the first round, Djokovic won’t be walking out of Arthur Ashe Stadium empty-handed. 

Every U.S. Open singles player receives at least $140,000 for getting to the first round of the main-draw—win or lose. That means Djokovic will be walking out with a six-figure pay day, on top of his off-the-court earnings. He’s currently the sixth highest-paid star in tennis, according to Forbes, earning $5.2 million on-court and $25 million on the side last year for his various business ventures. Djokovic currently oversees a diverse sponsor portfolio—from Lacoste and Qatar Airways, to Hublot and General Atlantic. 

The U.S. Open is shelling out $108 million in player compensation

While the U.S. Open is about winning a coveted Grand Slam title, it also comes with plenty of money. Some of the world’s most iconic players, including Carlos Alcaraz, Coco Gauff, and Aryna Sabalenka, will be taking to the courts over the next two weeks to compete for glory and millions of dollars in prize money. And on top of multi-million-dollar brand partnerships and endorsements, the final players stand to win eye-watering checks from the tournament.

During the qualifying rounds, players have the potential to earn between $32,000 to $66,000—but the real money comes during main-draw matches.

The winners of the U.S. Open women’s and men’s singles can earn up to $5,500,000 if they win the entire tournament, while doubles and mixed doubles champions split prize money as high as $1,000,000. The pay shoots up by hundreds of thousands of dollars in later rounds, starting from Djokovic’s $140,000 and up, per the U.S. Open. The association is also shelling out $37,840,000 in total for those who place in the singles rounds, and $13,000,000 for all the athletes across the doubles games. And zooming out on the honeypot in its entirety, total player compensation at this year’s competition hit a whopping $108,000,000—a 20% increase from last year’s $90 million—and what the U.S. Open characterizes as the largest in tennis history.

Here are the 2026 U.S. Open prizes for women’s and men’s singles: 

  • Winner: $5,500,000
  • Runner-up: $2,800,000
  • Semifinalists: $1,450,000
  • Quarterfinalists: $780,000
  • Round of 16: $480,000
  • Round of 32: $290,000
  • Round of 64: $190,000
  • Round of 128: $140,000

While a multimillion-dollar payout would be life-changing for most, the prize money pales in comparison to most athletes’ off-the-court earnings. Italian player Jannik Sinner is the highest paid tennis star according to Forbes, earning about $58 million annually, with $35 million of that made outside of the arena. The 25-year-old, five-time Grand Slam champ has a partnership with insurance giant Allianz, and sponsors brands including Gucci and Lavazza. Similarly, 2025 U.S. Open men’s singles winner Carlos Alcaraz earns $38 million of his $53.7 million off-the-court, while icon Serena Williams makes the vast majority of her $40 million annual earnings through investments and brand partnerships.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

President Trump took to Truth Social this week to warn any town still weighing whether to fight a data center. Communities that turn them away, he wrote, are choosing to be “backwards and poor.” The ones that welcome them will get lower taxes and jobs “all over the place.” He called the industry the “Golden Goose,” said plenty of other places would happily take the investment instead, and warned that China “could not be happier” watching American towns turn it down.

He’s not wrong: Data center spending has become one of the single largest forces holding up U.S. economic growth this year. That’s normally the kind of growth that a president looking to maintain party control of both chambers would want to campaign on. But instead, it’s become one of the few issues in American politics that Republicans and Democrats can agree on, and what they agree on is that they simply don’t want it near them. With just four months before the midterms, no candidate wants to touch the issue with a 10-foot pole, and if they do, they’re spending millions in campaign funds to get the issue “right.”

Why data centers are so polarizing

Few issues cut across party lines the way data centers do, because what makes them valuable nationally is what makes them hated locally. One facility can draw as much power as a mid-size city and remake a town’s tax base within months, and neighboring households bear the costs. Conservatives who normally favor deregulation are showing up at town meetings over property rights and distrust of distant tech billionaires. Progressives who favor the technology’s economic promise are objecting on environmental grounds. A CNN analysis found the backlash is bipartisan because the fight is so local, meaning it skips past national ideology.

It also comes with an economic argument. In the first quarter of 2026, AI-related computing infrastructure investment hit roughly 1.4% of U.S. GDP, up from 0.7% a year earlier. It’s now the largest driver of growth in U.S. private investment, according to Epoch AI. The St. Louis Fed found information-processing equipment made up 39% of total GDP growth through the third quarter of 2025, a bigger share than during the dot-com boom. Data centers’ dollar contribution to GDP growth had passed consumer spending for the first time ever, which is remarkable given consumer spending typically makes up about two-thirds of GDP.

Construction is real and large: a $10 billion campus in Lebanon, Indiana employs more than 4,000 workers at the height of the build. But once the servers are running, that project keeps around 300 permanent employees—13 construction jobs for every one that lasts. A typical data center supports fewer than 200 local jobs long-term, Fortune reported, citing the U.S. Chamber of Commerce. Research from Virginia, the country’s biggest data center market, found projects there create one permanent job for every $54 million invested, according to a MinnPost fact-check; across the broader economy, $1 million in investment supports 17 jobs on average. Data center construction rarely produces a lasting rise in local employment, Fortune has noted, which helps explain why the tax breaks used to attract these projects have drawn bipartisan scrutiny: at least 10 states are losing more than $100 million a year in revenue from data center tax incentives alone.

The case for jobs

As the industry continues to contribute to a growing share of U.S. GDP, its physical footprint in the country is growing with it—as is the backlash against it. Part of the sentiment behind that opposition isn’t just about power bills: it’s about jobs disappearing because of the same investment.

Nearly 200 economists and researchers warned in July that AI could cause large-scale job displacement over the next decade, calling it a transformation on the scale of the Industrial Revolution but compressed into a much shorter span. And the same companies pouring billions into data centers have kept cutting jobs elsewhere: Microsoft laid off nearly 5,000 people in early July even as it continued pouring billions into AI data centers. For plenty of voters, that looks like the same industry taking jobs away with one hand while promising them with the other.

For their part, the industry points to the very real spike in construction jobs: a $10 billion campus in Lebanon, Indiana, employs more than 4,000 workers at the height of the build. But once the servers are running, that project keeps around 300 permanent employees—13 construction jobs for every one that lasts. A typical data center supports fewer than 200 local jobs long-term, per the U.S. Chamber of Commerce. Research from Virginia, the country’s biggest data center market, found projects there create one permanent job for every $54 million invested. Across the broader economy, $1 million in investment supports 17 jobs on average.

Data center construction rarely produces a lasting rise in local employment, which is part of why the tax breaks used to attract these projects have drawn bipartisan scrutiny: at least 10 states are losing more than $100 million a year in revenue from data center tax incentives alone.

Swing-district fights

Pennsylvania’s governor’s race shows how fast the politics can flip. Last year, Gov. Josh Shapiro was the industry’s biggest booster, touting a $20 billion Amazon commitment in the state. By August, he’d signed an order stripping its fast-track permits and requiring local approval. His Republican opponent, Stacy Garrity, is now running to his left, attacking the Amazon deal in her first TV ad and accusing him of trying to “gaslight” voters. The same fight is playing out in Ohio and Texas.

In Ohio, Democrats are attacking Sen. Jon Husted over his record courting the industry as lieutenant governor, and the National Republican Senatorial Committee has warned the issue could cost him his special election, with private polling showing a dead heat against Sherrod Brown, per CNBC. In Wisconsin, Republican Tom Tiffany calls his Democratic opponent “Data Center David Crowley.”

In Georgia, data center opposition and rising electricity rates helped Democrats flip two Public Service Commission seats last year, and the party is betting the same anger carries into the governor’s race, where Democrat Keisha Lance Bottoms backs a moratorium and Republican nominee Rick Jackson opposes one. U.S. Sen. Raphael Warnock has called for a statewide pause, while Gov. Brian Kemp said that decision belongs to local communities. The fight has reached down to state legislative races too: one Democratic challenger southwest of Atlanta says lifelong Republican voters in her district have told her data centers changed how they see every other issue.

Where affordability and data centers collide

A July Pew survey found the cost of living is the top issue voters want candidates to address. Groceries, gas, and housing all feed that anxiety, but electricity is the cost voters can trace to one specific, unpopular neighbor. Utilities requested more than $30 billion in rate increases last year, hitting 81 million Americans, and power bills have risen 40% since 2021—the fastest stretch on record. Data centers drove about half of all US electricity demand growth last year, and PJM’s independent market monitor has tied data center demand to $23 billion in customer price increases through 2028.

For this story, Fortune journalists used generative AI as a research tool. An editor verified the accuracy of the information before publishing.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

There was a time when learning how to “speak office” meant, quite literally, being in an office.

A clueless rookie could pick up how their boss wrote an email, when a coworker switched from a quick message to a more formal one, or what someone meant by “run it up the flagpole.” But Gen Z entered a workforce where much of that learning can happen through a screen—and where language on either side of it isn’t always translating.

Knowing how to “speak office” has never just been about understanding the words your coworkers use. Workplaces come with unwritten rules about how to formally address someone, what belongs in an email instead of a Slack message, and even how familiar you can be with someone you just met. Gen Z began learning those rules as the pandemic and remote work scrambled the ways they had traditionally picked them up, while social media and instant messaging brought different communication habits to work. And of course—AI, as the kids would say, has “entered the chat” as another way to learn too.

The apparent language divide between generations is more complicated than whether boomers know what “delulu” means. The words are changing, but so are some of the rules around how people communicate at work, and not everyone agrees on what sounds appropriate or professional anymore.

It seems so silly on paper. Gen Z has “delulu,” “rizz,” and “no cap.” Older workers have “blue-sky thinking,” or brainstorming without practical constraints; “move the needle”; and the particularly puzzling “boil the ocean,” or taking on an impossibly large task. They’re noticeable enough that someone has now built a translator for them.

Sunny Workplace, a nonprofit employee engagement platform, recently launched WorkGen Translation, an online tool that decodes slang, idioms, and workplace jargon across age groups. 

This year, the company commissioned Censuswide to survey 2,004 U.S. workers on May 25 and 26, split evenly between Gen Z and boomers. Eighty percent of the 1,002 Gen Z respondents said generational differences in workplace language were a challenge, compared with 30% of the 1,002 boomers surveyed. 

The confusion goes both ways. Among specifically boomer respondents, 76% said they had no idea what “delulu” meant, 66% said the same of “rizz” and 61% of “no cap.” Gen Z respondents had their own trouble with corporate speech, with 22% said they knew exactly what it meant to “boil the ocean,” while 25% said the same of “blue-sky thinking.”

The misunderstanding that matters at work can be much more mundane. Betsy Sneller, an assistant professor of sociolinguistics at Michigan State University, pointed to something nearly every office worker uses: email.

“Younger folks entering the workforce don’t really have the genre of email in the way that older speakers do,” Sneller told Fortune.

Older workers are more likely to treat email as a relatively formal and permanent form of communication, Sneller said, while reserving Microsoft Teams or other instant messaging platforms for quick exchanges. 

Younger workers who grew up communicating through social media and messaging apps may not make the same distinction. That can mean skipping a formal greeting or punctuation in an email without giving it much thought.

“There can be sort of miscommunication where younger folks are being casual in an email, maybe not using punctuation, maybe not using a formal salutation, and it gets interpreted as very rude by older speakers,” Sneller said.

The unwritten rules of ‘speaking office’

A linguistic concept behind some of that disconnect is called a register, which focuses on how language use changes based on social context and audience. 

“We have a work register, we have a home register,” Renée Blake, an associate professor of linguistics and social and cultural analysis at New York University, told Fortune.

People routinely change how they communicate depending on where they are and whom they’re talking to. Home might allow one way of speaking; addressing a large group or reporting the news might demand another. Work has traditionally come with its own expectations. Blake sees what happens when those expectations collide in students’ emails. Instead of an introduction like “Good morning, Professor Blake,” she sometimes gets a simple “Hey, Renée.”

“Am I your friend? I’m not your friend, and you don’t know me,” Blake said with a laugh.

The issue isn’t simply that one way of speaking is right and another is wrong. Registers come with rules people become accustomed to, Blake said, and when someone steps outside the register expected in a particular setting, it can feel as though that person is breaking the rules of the space. 

That’s where communication differences can become a judgment about the person doing the communicating. Iain Smith, head of behavioral science at Sunny Workplace, said that can be particularly consequential for workers who are still learning the language of their workplace.

“If they haven’t learned the workplace vernacular, and they speak using phrases like ‘delulu’ and ‘rizz,’ for instance, I think there are judgments that can be made about professionalism based on that,” Smith told Fortune.

For younger workers, learning what those unwritten rules are may also look different than it did for the rookies who came before them.

“They’re not necessarily now sitting next to someone who’s been doing the job for 20 years and learning the shortcuts and the hacks and the little ways of coping with a stressful day,” Smith said. “They’re turning up to Zoom.”

It’s not just the kids

Gen Z entered work during that upheaval, but they weren’t the only ones adjusting to new ways of communicating; it’s more complicated than it looks.

“COVID also stunted all of us,” Blake said. “It’s not just young people.”

Workers across generations suddenly spent extended periods communicating from behind screens, and many returned to offices only partially, if at all. At the same time, technology increasingly competed for people’s attention as they figured out how to interact with one another again.

Blake experienced some of that confusion herself. After getting sick, she moved one of her college classes online and assumed she could be more informal with students she had only recently met. Some of them thought otherwise.

“This is too much, this is too informal. You don’t know me,” Blake recalled them telling her. “So this is going the opposite direction,” she added.

Even AI is becoming part of the negotiation. Blake said she sees young people using AI to learn forms of professional communication they haven’t necessarily been taught, including how to write more formal correspondence. But outsourcing that learning comes with its own tradeoff: The result can sound stiff, templated, and impersonal.

Changing ways people communicate don’t necessarily mean generations themselves are as different as workplace stereotypes suggest. A meta-analysis published in the Journal of Organizational Behavior found few systematic, meaningful differences among generations across a range of workplace outcomes.

Smith, a millennial, remembers when his own generation was the subject of sweeping theories about how it would transform—or ruin—the workplace.

“From a scientific perspective, there’s a lot of research out there that shows that actually generational differences in work values, work-life balance, stress, burnout, working preferences are all overhyped,” Smith said.

Sneller nevertheless believes communication styles between people entering the workforce today and those already in it are more pronounced than in the past. She pointed to a combination of social media and the pandemic, and sees some of the effects in her own classroom, where students sometimes need more encouragement to begin casually talking to one another.

And the line between the generation that needs translating and the one doing the translating doesn’t stay put for long. Sunny’s survey asked workers about Gen Alpha slang, offering Gen Z an early taste of being on the other side. Forty-one percent of Gen Z respondents didn’t know what “Ohio” meant, while 75% didn’t fully understand or said they wouldn’t use “skibidi.”

So Gen Z may not have to wait until middle age to start wondering what the kids are talking about—they may just have to wait for Gen Alpha to clock in.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

At one point, you could make a living by sawing off a block of frozen river, transporting it to the city, storing it in straw and selling it to people to keep their food cold. 

Now we have bluetooth refrigerators. 

This is an example of what I like to call human ingenuity – the collective capability of people all over the world to solve problems and make the future better. 

Artificial intelligence may represent an “ice block to refrigerator” level of advancement. It already helps people complete everyday tasks more efficiently – from creating a workout routine to planning a vacation – and it could ultimately lead to breakthroughs in health care, transportation, and even the nature of work. 

But one thing I’m confident it won’t do is change how prices get set in stock and bond markets. 

I constantly hear speculation about how AI will impact the financial industry. Can I use AI to pick stocks? Should I invest all my money in the stocks of AI giants? Will AI change everything we know about markets? 

To me these types of questions reveal the importance of appreciating how public markets function.

Think of the stock market as the world’s largest information processing machine. It’s where buyers and sellers come together and agree to a trade; both sides have to believe the price is fair. If stock prices are too high, people won’t buy (they want a fair return). If they’re too low, people won’t sell. When this process is repeated millions of times a day, the result is that stocks seem to settle at a reasonable price. 

During my graduate school days at the University of Chicago, I was fortunate enough to be a part of the data revolution that helped the investing world understand that markets were efficient. 

Before 1960, no one knew what a market wide portfolio typically returned. Now that we have 100 years of data, we know that number has been about 10% a year on average for US stocks over the last century. Most professional stock pickers can’t compete. There’s no compelling evidence money managers can reliably pick winners over time.

A better assumption is that the stock market reflects all available information and it can do so more quickly than any human or model ever could. To believe an AI agent can help you beat the market, you’d have to believe it can know which stocks are mispriced and when. But returns are uncertain, no one (not even an AI agent) knows what’s coming. And it’s unrealistic to think that one particular AI model will systematically outperform the competition over the long haul.

Even if AI helps with the accumulation of information, that benefit would be shared by all market participants. Using AI to buy and sell stocks, then, only adds anxiety and random noise to individual investors. 

Similarly, putting all your portfolio into “AI stocks” could lead to disappointment. 

It’ll likely be the case that most companies will use AI to improve efficiency and increase productivity. I’m optimistic about the future in that regard. Though, history suggests that targeting the companies you’d expect to outperform from an AI revolution may not lead to a successful investing experience. 

Many have compared today’s investing environment to telecom companies building out the infrastructure of the internet during the Dot Com boom. Take a look at the top telecom stocks from 1999 (Lucent Technologies and Nextel Comms led the pack). Twenty-five years later, only 1 of the top 20 stocks was able to survive in its corporate structure from that time.

Some of today’s market leaders will thrive. Others won’t. Entirely new winners will emerge that no one is talking about now. (Google didn’t go public until 2004.) After all, who would have guessed Levi Strauss would be one of the big winners from the Gold Rush?

No one knows who will win. So why make the bet? Trying to pick a big winner could turn you into a big loser. 

The good news is that you don’t have to gamble on who wins to do well. You can own public markets through a broadly diversified portfolio that includes AI stocks and lots of others and participate in whatever the future becomes instead of betting on what you think it will become.

Public markets help finance thousands of competing ideas, some of which will result in spectacular failures, while moving capital rapidly toward what works. With more than $1.2 trillion in expected capital spending in 2027 on everything from data centers to chips, that might be Big Tech. Or it could be another sector entirely. 

By buying and holding a diversified portfolio of stocks, you can pursue their financial goals without wasting your time trying to guess which company will be the next big thing. You’ll own it regardless. 

This investing mindset allows you to manage the uncertainty of tomorrow, rather than feeling anxious about it.

Open public markets have expanded the beneficiaries of innovation. Ordinary people—not just founders, venture capitalists and insiders—can enjoy the long-term wealth creation and on aggregate benefit without running the risk of overconcentration.

I’m hopeful AI will help people solve big problems and improve millions of lives. It may even make a better fridge. But it’s unlikely it will help you beat the market.

David Booth is Founder and Chairman of Dimensional Fund Advisors. He’s the author of the book Stay Calm: Learn to Embrace Uncertainty in Investing and Life.

The opinions expressed in Fortune.com commentary pieces are solely the views of their authors and do not necessarily reflect the opinions and beliefs of Fortune.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Another day, another dollar. But for John Ternus, who started Tuesday as Apple’s CEO, the amounts come with a lot more zeroes after them.

The Apple board handed the newly minted CEO of the $4.75 trillion iPhone maker a massive new compensation package to kickstart his tenure, with more to come if Apple’s pay history is any guide. Apple gave Ternus a salary bump to $3 million and granted him restricted stock units valued at $2.5 million, prorated for the few weeks he’ll serve as CEO before the end of Apple’s 2026 fiscal year. The board separately approved an annual equity award for fiscal 2027 with a target value of $55 million. Three quarters of the equity award will vest based on Apple’s total shareholder return relative to other S&P 500 companies. The rest will vest on a clock, 12.5% every six months over four years. 

Tim Cook, who after 15 years as CEO is sticking around as executive chair while Ternus finds his footing, saw his salary decrease from $3 million to $2 million, effective later this month. The Apple board approved a $45 million target equity award for him, half in RSUs that vest over four years, and half that vest based on performance. 

No word yet on an annual cash bonus for Ternus. Cook collected a $12 million bonus each of the past two fiscal years, according to Apple’s securities filings. 

The Cook Precedent

It was an entirely different picture the last time Apple had a CEO change, when Cook succeeded the late Steve Jobs in 2011. Back then, Apple gave Cook 1 million RSUs with a grant date value of $376.2 million on top of a $900,000 salary that the board bumped to $1.4 million a few months after he took over the top spot. Half of the award vested five years after the award date, and the other half vested 10 years after the award date. 

The Apple board’s decision at the time was “subjective” and not based on any peer group or formula. That was in part due to the circumstances: Jobs famously collected only $1 in salary, but held a colossal 5.5 million-share stake in Apple worth billions. The board said it determined Cook’s pay based on input from Jobs and the board’s assessment of Cook during his interim leadership periods during Jobs’ medical leaves. Jobs passed away in October 2011, following his Aug. 24 resignation that year. 

Two years later, Cook asked the board to add some performance conditions to his award, meaning he would forfeit a portion if he didn’t achieve a stock-performance metric. The board carved out 800,000 share units from his 1 million award and divided it into 10 annual chunks of 80,000 shares apiece split half on performance. If Apple finished in the top third of the S&P 500 by shareholder return, all 80,000 units for that year vested. If they finished in the middle third, it cost him 20,000 and the bottom third cost him 40,000 shares.

Ternus’ award is now based on the same type of performance metric. A securities filing on Tuesday, required when an executive joins officer ranks, shows Ternus holds about 34,000 Apple shares in a trust, worth about $11.1 million at Tuesday’s stock price. He also holds seven grants of restricted stock from his years running hardware engineering, covering about 305,000 shares worth about $99 million or more, depending on how the shares pay out. Nearly half are performance units that could pay double or nothing, which puts the payout range between $50 million and $148 million.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

For years, the conventional wisdom about young workers has gone something like this: Gen Z doesn’t want a traditional career. They’d rather freelance, day-trade, chase side hustles, and treat a 9-to-5 as something like a relic that their parents clung to. Some were even “financial nihilists” who gave up on an old-fashioned career.

Paul Osterman, professor emeritus at the MIT Sloan School of Management, has spent decades testing that kind of assumption against hard labor-market data, and in his new book, he says the evidence points in the opposite direction. “Is that rhetoric really reflected in the attitudes of younger people?” Osterman asked. “The evidence is that it’s absolutely not.”

The labor economist has built his career studying job quality, from long-term care workers to middle managers to what makes some employers create “good jobs” and others not. His book, Disposable Workers: The Transformation of Employment, is his latest attempt to quantify a shift he believes has been building since the postwar era: what employers are willing to offer.

The 35% number

Drawing on an original survey of more than 6,000 U.S. adults aged 24 and up, plus nearly 100 interviews with workers, employers, and staffing agencies, Osterman calculates that 35% of the American workforce, more than 55 million people, now falls into what he categorizes as “disposable” work: freelancers, contractors, gig workers, and a group he named “marginal workers.”

Marginal workers are W-2 employees of an organization who are not treated as real members of it—hired with an implicit understanding that they won’t stick around or advance. “They’re not really attached to the organization,” Osterman told Fortune. “No one has job security anymore, but these folks are hired with that expectation and are not going to be around for long.”

The category spans a surprisingly wide swath of the economy, from adjunct faculty and staff attorneys hired for single cases, to high-turnover retail and service jobs, to even contract employees embedded for years inside big tech companies without ever being on a path to full-time status. The point, Osterman added, is that they are all hired with the expectation of high turnover: that they’ll be disposable, in other words.

Gig work is a rounding error by comparison. “Gig jobs are not really the story,” Osterman said. “They’re about 2% of the workforce.” Contracting and marginal employment, he argues, are the much larger and more consequential trend hiding in plain sight. Osterman said he was surprised by the “magnitude” of what he found. “I mean, 35% is a big number.”

Debunking the generational narrative

Osterman said he specifically tested the idea that younger workers are voluntarily opting out of traditional careers in favor of entrepreneurial reinvention, financial risk-taking, or gig flexibility.

“The only shift in the attitudes of young people is towards work-family issues,” he said. “Those are more salient for younger people than for older people. But the desire to get a real job and have a career? That’s stable.”

“We’re in a different social strata,” he said. “And we kind of generalize our social strata to the world. That’s not actually accurate.” A survey of young workers in Ohio or Indiana, he argued, would tell a very different story than one drawn from Manhattan or Brooklyn.

Osterman’s finding lands as a key, complicating datapoint to the narrative that Gen Z has embraced “career minimalism,” or trading “the rigid career ladder for the career lily pad,” per the findings of Glassdoor and chief economist Daniel Zhao, who told Fortune that his findings actually agree with what Osterman discovered. “We are still in a job market where hiring is very sluggish and workers feel stuck in their careers.”

Zhao pointed to one concrete sign the strain is intensifying rather than easing: mentions of burnout in Glassdoor reviews were up 43% in May compared with a year earlier, a trend he attributes to accumulated pressure from layoffs, leadership demands, and AI-driven anxiety, with little relief in sight. He rejected the idea that any of this reflects diminished ambition on the part of Gen Z: “It’s not because of a lack of ambition or laziness or that sort of thing. In fact, it’s the opposite… they are just as committed to growing their career as their peers from previous generations were at the same age.”

“I don’t think that attitudes are very different between Gen Z and previous generations,” Zhao added. “The work that is available… [has] changed more than people’s attitudes towards work.”

A 25-year arc, not a new trend

Osterman traced the roots of this transformation back to the breakdown of the postwar labor “accord”—a period of high unionization, employer caution about provoking unions, and political support for long-term, stable employment that began fraying decades ago. He pointed to a famous, familiar inflection point: President Reagan’s 1981 firing of striking air traffic controllers, which Osterman called a signal that it was “open season on post-World War II employment systems.”

From there, he traced a longer, also familiar arc: the financialization of corporate strategy, rising competitive pressure, the legal fights over whether staffing agencies counted as the “employer of record,” and a shift in management ideology toward “core competency” thinking—the idea that most workers simply aren’t essential to a firm’s core business and can be treated accordingly.

He also pointed to attitude, not just economics, as a driver. Osterman cited a McKinsey report claiming 95% of a firm’s value is delivered by just 5% of its workforce as telling evidence of how corporate America has come to see the majority of its employees. “That says something about the attitude towards the rest of the workers,” he said.

Where AI fits and doesn’t

Osterman was careful to separate his findings from the current AI panic. “This trend preceded AI,” he said. “I think it’ll be exacerbated by AI, but it’s not an AI story.” He argues that AI’s primary effect so far has been to inject uncertainty into employer staffing decisions—and that uncertainty itself pushes companies further toward disposable labor arrangements, regardless of whether AI ultimately displaces large numbers of jobs. “No one has any idea what the overall impact of AI will be,” he said. “But I’m pretty confident it will exacerbate the move towards disposability because of the uncertainty it introduces.”

Zhao’s data adds a wrinkle worth noting alongside Osterman’s caution: Glassdoor research from his colleague Chris Martin found Gen Z workers are the most critical of AI in workplace reviews, ahead of millennials and Gen X. “I think they are positioned well to benefit from it in the long run, but understandably, they are very skeptical of AI right now.”

The apparent contradiction has a structural explanation. Goldman Sachs research, Zhao noted, suggests mid-career workers tend to struggle most during technological transitions: they’ve built up experience and skills that may no longer be as relevant, with 10 to 20 years of working life still ahead of them. Younger workers, by contrast, adapt quickly and move toward opportunity. “There is a lot of disruption,” Zhao said, “but they tend to adapt very quickly.”

What makes Gen Z’s relationship to AI different from prior generations’ relationship to new technology, Zhao argued, is that the ambivalence is partly a function of familiarity. The same quality that makes them most critical of it also makes them most likely to use it and redirect it toward their own ends. He pointed to the sustained explosion of new business applications tracked by Census Bureau data since 2020 as one concrete signal: entrepreneurship has kept accelerating well past the pandemic, and AI may be a partial driver. “Is it being partially driven by AI right now?” Zhao said. “I think the answer is probably yes.”

Osterman, for his part, hears something simpler in all the AI anxiety: “People are freaked out. There’s no question about that.” But the mechanism he’s confident about isn’t mass displacement, it’s that uncertainty becomes a management tool. Employers who don’t know how their staffing needs will change in an AI-driven world will default to arrangements that preserve maximum flexibility, which means more disposable workers. “Maybe you’re going to need more people or different people, but you don’t know,” he said. The rage about AI is really rage about a long-fraying workplace contract.

But those bright spots are the exception. Pay is lower across every disposable category compared with standard employment, and Osterman found contractors and marginal workers report substantially lower job satisfaction than freelancers or traditional employees—the group bearing the brunt of a labor market redesigned, in his telling, around cost control and flexibility rather than long-term investment in people.

For this story, Fortune journalists used generative AI as a research tool. An editor verified the accuracy of the information before publishing.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Last month, Anthropic was at the center of public backlash for a plan, called “Project Panama,” to “destructively scan all the books in the world” to train its Claude AI models. Now, the AI company finds itself again facing the (copyright) music.

Sony Music and Warner Chappell Music have sued Anthropic, naming CEO Dario Amodei and co-founder Benjamin Mann as individual defendants, for what the suit characterizes as illegally downloading, scraping and torrenting “thousands upon thousands” of copyrighted songs to train its AI models.

The lawsuit, filed in federal court in Northern California, alleges that Anthropic obtained lyrics and sheet music through pirate sources including Library Genesis and the Pirate Library Mirror, and, according to the complaint, scraped licensed lyric websites, such as Musixmatch and LyricFind. The publishers allege the material was then incorporated into Claude’s training data and that the model can reproduce copyrighted lyrics.

“In blatant violation of copyright law, Defendants have unlawfully acquired troves of Music Publishers’ musical compositions, and then systematically copied those works multiple times,” the filing read, “including as the inputs to train Anthropic’s Claude AI models and in the outputs those models generate.”

Scraping and distributing Musixmatch content violates the site’s user agreement, and LyricFind’s privacy policy similarly prohibits reproduction “unless otherwise stated,” the suit states.

Sony and Warner are seeking statutory damages of up to $150,000 for each song the court finds Anthropic to have infringed willfully. They are also seeking as much as $25,000 for each instance in which copyright-management information was allegedly removed from a work. With the complaint covering at least “thousands if not tens of thousands” of works, the potential damages could reach into the billions of dollars.

Among the songs named in the complaint are Marvin Gaye and Tammi Terrell’s “Ain’t No Mountain High Enough,” Mariah Carey’s “All I Want for Christmas Is You,” Survivor’s “Eye of the Tiger,” Leonard Cohen’s “Hallelujah,” Mark Ronson and Bruno Mars’ “Uptown Funk,” The Beatles’ “I Am the Walrus,” and Taylor Swift’s “Paper Rings” and “Cruel Summer.”

Anthropic rejected the allegations and said the company will “defend ourselves robustly” in court. 

“This is the third lawsuit from the same lawyers, recycling allegations from cases already before the courts,” an Anthropic spokesperson told Fortune.

It’s true that Anthropic has some history with the law firm: Oppenheim and Zebrak, which represents Sony and Warner in the new suit, first sued Anthropic in Oct. 2023 alongside Universal Music Publishing Group, Concord Music Group and ABKCO over roughly 500 songs. The same publishers filed a second suit through the same firm in January, covering more than 20,000 works and seeking over $3 billion. BMG and Round Hill Music have also sued Anthropic over music this year, but with different counsel—putting the total number of music-copyright suits against the company at five.

Anthropic’s other copyright fights 

Anthropic points to Bartz v. Anthropic as precedent for its fair use in using human-made work to train their models. The company says “training generative AI models is a transformative fair use—as the court held in Bartz,” highlighting the judge’s ruling on the use of copyrighted works.

“In short, the purpose and character of using copyrighted works to train LLMs to generate new text was quintessentially transformative,” Judge William Alsup wrote in June 2025 regarding the case. “Like any reader aspiring to be a writer, Anthropic’s LLMs trained upon works not to race ahead and replicate or supplant them.”

The AI company settled in Sept. 2025 for $1.5 billion with the owners of the copyrighted works. But Sony and Warner said it wasn’t enough.

“Anthropic clearly considers that to be just the cost of doing business given that its entire business model continues to be built on copyright theft,” the new Sony and Warner complaint read. “And $1.5 billion is obviously not a large enough settlement to deter infringing conduct by a company that has parlayed such mass infringement into a staggering $2-trillion-dollar valuation,” the complaint stated, referencing Anthropic’s IPO target. 

“In the process of building and operating AI models, Anthropic unlawfully copies and disseminates vast amounts of copyrighted works—including the lyrics to myriad musical compositions owned or controlled by Publishers,” the lawsuit filing read.

Sony Music Publishing and Warner Chappell did not immediately respond to Fortune‘s requests for comment.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

The music you hear as you walk through Singapore’s Changi Airport can’t be found on any playlist or album. Instead, it’s being composed in real-time by a computer program.

“If you’re walking through Changi, you’ll be hearing a soundtrack that is literally AI,” Michael Boyle, HP’s senior vice president and managing director for Greater Asia, told Fortune in early August. “The great thing about AI is that you can shape it. If it starts raining outside, the airport gets busy, or it’s nighttime, the AI can adapt the music.”

The company behind those tunes is Wubble AI, a Singapore-based startup that participated HP’s “Garage 2.0” program, an accelerator that the company started in the Southeast Asian city in Oct. 2025. HP became a backer of Wubble AI in July.

Garage 2.0 harks back to HP’s roots in Palo Alto, where founders Bill Hewlett and Dave Packard started the company in the latter’s garage in 1939. HP runs Garage 2.0 with Antler, the global venture firm that has made more than 1,400 investments across more than 30 markets. 

“We’re looking at these founders and the speed that they can go without the complexity of being in a large organization, and it’s inspiring,” Boyle said. “It gives those of us working in a large, matrix organization the chance to come back down and think about what’s really going to cut through and build scale.”

Yet the Garage 2.0 program gets at a deeper question at the heart of HP: Is the tech company that’s perhaps most responsible for Silicon Valley’s culture getting left behind? HP is now No. 276 on the Fortune Global 500, down from No. 194 in 2017. The company is now betting on AI PCs as a new growth category, wagering that consumers will prefer to run AI on their own devices rather than in the cloud.

HP’s Asia bet

HP’s footprint in Asia began almost 60 years ago, when the company established its first regional office in Singapore in 1969. A year later, it opened its first Asian manufacturing plant in Singapore’s Redhill neighborhood, where just over 60 workers assembled iconic devices like the HP-25 calculator. 

The company operates across most Asian markets, with manufacturing and supply chain hubs in China, Thailand, and Vietnam, and major call centers in Malaysia and India. The region contributed just over 25% of HP’s revenue in its most recent quarter, which covered May, June and July. 

Boyle, who joined HP in 2015 as the vice-president of its Asia-Pacific and Japan (APJ) operations, is most attracted by the region’s diversity. “There’s many different versions of Asia,” he said. “It’s been really interesting getting to see how HP is represented in its different markets.” For example, he notes that Southeast Asian retail still relies on brick-and-mortar stores, which means most sales happen face-to-face; in contrast, online sales now dominate in markets like South Korea.

In what he describes as a “serendipitous” bit of foreshadowing, Boyle wrote his graduate thesis on HP’s strategy long before he ever worked there, while completing an MBA program at the Macquarie Graduate School of Management in Sydney.

“I visited their European operations in Germany as part of a study tour, and there was something about HP back in those days that I really identified with,” Boyle recalls. “So it was quite serendipitous that the phone rang, and all of a sudden I found myself living in Singapore and working for HP.” 

Bullish on print

HP is perhaps best known for its printers, which have long been a mainstay of offices worldwide. Boyle pushes back on any suggestion that print is dying, calling it a mainstay in sectors like education and healthcare.

Since last year, the firm has been rolling out AI-powered printers that come installed with Microsoft Copilot, which allow users to print documents from a shared cloud without ever booting up their laptop, as well as generate AI summaries from documents scanned using the printer. 

“AI is now starting to play a role where it can go both ways: from creation to print, and print back to creation,” Boyle said. “You can even edit on the fly.”

Despite Boyle’s optimism, printing remains a shrinking part of HP’s business. Total print revenue fell by 2.2% in HP’s most recent quarter. The company blamed “demand softness, particularly in China,” as well as “changing consumer behaviors.”

Pushed to the edge

As some of HP’s mainstay businesses show their age, the company is now looking to AI PCs as its next source of growth

AI PCs are devices with some capability to handle AI and machine learning tasks on the device itself, rather than relying entirely on the cloud. HP first unveiled its suite of AI laptops in 2024, including the OmniBook X AI PC and HP EliteBook Ultra AI PC.

HP now expects AI PCs to make up 50% of the company’s total shipments by the end of the year, Bruce Broussard, HP’s interim CEO, told analysts at the company’s third-quarter earnings call on August 27.

“The AI PCs seem like a good idea with regard to creating value for both the customers (reduced dependence on cloud, lower costs of tokens) and HP itself (premium prices),” says Nitin Pangarkar, an associate professor of business strategy and policy at the National University of Singapore (NUS). “Yet, profitable ideas are often copied by rivals. This would reduce the margins for HP unless it has proprietary technology, which could serve as a defense against imitators.” (AI PCs are currently offered by most hardware manufacturers including Apple, ASUS, Dell and Lenovo.)

Other experts say that how effectively HP is integrating AI into its offerings still remains to be seen. “The real test for HP is whether AI becomes an organising principle for the business, rather than a feature layered onto an existing portfolio,” says Tan Joo Seng, an associate professor of strategy, international business and entrepreneurship at Singapore’s Nanyang Technological University (NTU). “Putting an AI label on a PC is relatively easy, but using AI to fundamentally change the customer proposition is much harder.”

Boyle admits that take-up of AI PCs is also uneven across Asia, and remains weak in the region’s more traditional markets. “Japan, for example, is a lot more conservative,” he explains. “Organizations are waiting for strong proof points before they adopt the tech.”

AI PCs also cost 10% to 30% more than regular PCs, given that they come with a built-in neural processing unit (NPU). 

Boyle argued, however, that AI PCs are a worthy investment, especially as today’s companies face mounting token costs. Even running smaller AI tasks locally could curb the mounting cost of tapping third-party AI providers. “Cloud and token costs were not a part of IT budgets just a few years ago,” he said. “But they’re costs people now have to think about.”

Edge AI devices also come with other benefits, like reduced latency and added security. Since AI processing is moved from the cloud to onboard hardware, network transit time and round-trip delays are eliminated, allowing for near-instantaneous response. “From an IP perspective, many companies are very wary of putting things into the cloud,” Boyle remarked, adding that AI PCs reduce such risks by housing data locally.

Earlier this year, HP debuted HP IQ, an on-device virtual assistant built on a 20-billion-parameter model that runs entirely on a device, rather than in the cloud. In Boyle’s eyes, that reflects the pace at which HP expects customers to adopt AI. “People and agents will be running models 24/7, and having a virtual assistant working round-the-clock for you will become commonplace in the next 12 to 18 months,” he said.

Musician at heart

For all his talk of AI PCs and edge computing, Boyle is, at heart, a musician. While in HP’s Australia office, he joined a band called Paper Jam, a cheeky reference to what happens when a sheet of paper gets stuck in a printer tray.

Boyle still composes a song every year, which his staff then performs. This year, he turned to Wubble AI to craft a track called “Greater Asia will amaza ya,” feeding the tool prompts like “energetic,” “anthem,” and “rock.”

“I made the song in literally three minutes—and everyone can’t get it out of their heads,” Boyle said. But for him, the technology only gets the process so far. “The song’s only good because it’s got human performance, which actually makes it meaningful.”

Michael Boyle will be speaking at the Fortune Leaders Forum, held in Macau on Sep. 8. Learn more here!

In Fortune’s “Asia Agenda” column, released at least twice a month, we speak with Asia’s top business leaders about how they are building for the future and the lessons they’ve drawn from leading companies in one of the world’s fastest growing and most dynamic regions. Explore all of our profiles here.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

America has spent decades building a sprawling higher-education system around a steady supply of college-age students. Now, there are about to be fewer of them to go around.

The U.S. graduated a record 3.9 million high school students in 2025. But that peak marks a turning point: By 2041, the country is projected to produce about 3.4 million high school graduates a year, a 13% drop, according to the Western Interstate Commission for Higher Education

Colleges are already competing harder for the students who are available and are having more trouble predicting which acceptees will ultimately enroll. Students using the Common App applied to an average of 6.56 colleges this admissions cycle, up from 6.37 a year earlier. 

That competition comes as rising costs put more pressure on college budgets. For schools that depend heavily on tuition to pay the bills, an empty seat means lost revenue; for the most vulnerable institutions, enough empty seats can threaten their survival.

“Nearly every college in the country is facing some kind of financial pressure,” Robert Kelchen, a professor at the University of Tennessee, Knoxville, who studies higher education finance, told Fortune.

Some schools are disappearing or joining forces with other institutions. 

The Federal Reserve Bank of Philadelphia estimated that 80 colleges could close between 2025 and 2029, adding to the more than 300 degree-granting institutions that have shut down since 2008. 

Merger talks are becoming another part of the conversation: 31% of private nonprofit college presidents surveyed said their institutions had held serious discussions about a merger or acquisition, with financial stability the most commonly cited reason.

At the same time, the traditional four-year college path is facing more competition. Enrollment at public two-year institutions focused on vocational programs grew nearly 20% between spring 2020 and spring 2025, according to the National Student Clearinghouse Research Center. And the price of a four-year degree is becoming hard to ignore, with annual sticker prices at dozens of U.S. colleges and universities now nearing or exceeding $100,000 when tuition, housing and other expenses are included.

And as careers in skilled trades become more attractive alternatives to four-year degrees, fewer high school graduates are choosing to go straight to college. The share enrolling immediately after graduation has fallen from 70% to 62% over the past decade. One scenario modeled in the education policy journal Education Next found that a 15% enrollment decline over five years would result in 23 additional college closures.

The business of filling a classroom

How much a shrinking student population hurts a college depends in part on how much it relies on those students for revenue.

And for schools that depend heavily on tuition, competing for students can itself eat into the revenue each one brings in. At private nonprofit colleges surveyed by the National Association of College and University Business Officers, nine in 10 first-time undergraduates received institutional grant aid in 2025-26, while the estimated tuition discount rate for those students reached 57.1%.

That leaves schools in a bind: They need tuition revenue, but charging closer to the sticker price can make it harder to fill the seats that generate it.

“Students and their families know that they have more market power to negotiate financial aid, further affecting the bottom lines outside of a few dozen of the most prestigious universities,” Kelchen said. Moving away from tuition discounting often isn’t feasible, he added, because “students will choose other colleges.”

And schools are trying to make that math work as their own bills rise. Inflation and health insurance costs are hitting institutions broadly, Kelchen said. The Trump administration has added to those pressures through cuts to federal research funding and a crackdown on international students who can be particularly valuable to college budgets because they pay full tuition. During the key May-to-August visa processing period last year, the U.S. issued 36% fewer F-1 student visas than during the same period in 2024, according to State Department data analyzed by The Chronicle of Higher Education. 

When the math stops working

Hampshire College shows what the extreme end of that squeeze can look like. The private liberal arts college in Amherst, Massachusetts, is set to end academic operations after the fall semester. 

It’s part of the so-called Five College consortium that also includes Amherst College, Mount Holyoke College, Smith College, and the University of Massachusetts Amherst, and its closure represents a dire warning that similarly vaunted schools could suffer the same fate. 

But a school doesn’t have to be on the verge of closure to feel the same underlying pressures.

Syracuse University has a national brand and a $2.5 billion endowment, yet it fell short of its enrollment target this school year, contributing to a 1.5% budget shortfall, according to The Wall Street Journal. International enrollment had fallen by half amid the Trump administration’s crackdown on student visas, while the university took on $458 million in debt last year to build new dorms.

Kelchen said Syracuse is being hit by many of the forces affecting the broader industry. But it’s more vulnerable than some of its peers because it’s outside a major city or typical college town, and it’s located in a cold region with a declining number of high school graduates.

Even a sizable endowment doesn’t necessarily mean a college is safe as many are essentially house rich and cash poor. 

“Colleges may have assets, but they are in their buildings or restricted endowment funds that they cannot use for daily operations,” Kelchen said.

While barred from directly drawing down that pool of money, nearly 200 private colleges still borrowed from restricted endowment funds in 2025, up from about 130 in 2021, according to estimates from higher-ed consulting firm Perspective Data Science.

Running out of cash on hand is the clearest indicator that a college is at high risk of closure, he added, while consistent operating losses, enrollment declines and large withdrawals from endowments can also signal distress.

Kelchen expects an uptick in closures rather than a massive wave, with schools in rural parts of the Northeast and Midwest facing particularly strong headwinds.

For the colleges that remain open, that may mean becoming smaller institutions than they ever expected to be.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

American service members will now have access to military versions of ChatGPT and Grok as the Pentagon tries to incorporate more AI into its daily workflows.

The Department of War said in a pair of announcements on Monday that the two services will be incorporated into its bespoke AI platform GenAI.mil, which launched in December and originally offered access only to a specialized military version of Google’s Gemini. The department said GenAI.mil already counts 1.7 million of the Department of War’s 3 million-strong workforce, which includes both military members and civilians.

The department’s Monday announcement comes after it awarded OpenAI and Elon Musk’s SpaceXAI, which runs Grok, defense contracts worth up to $200 million each to provide the department with AI tools. It also awarded contracts at the time to Google and Anthropic.

The military version of ChatGPT, dubbed ChatGPT Mil, is part of OpenAI for Government, an initiative launched last summer meant to bring the company’s AI products to government workers.

“ChatGPT on GenAI.mil will make unclassified work throughout the Department more efficient, freeing up time and resources so DoW personnel can focus on the mission,” said Joe Larson, vice president and head of government at OpenAI, in a statement to Fortune.

“ChatGPT Mil brings a familiar commercial experience into the Department’s secure environment, tailored to warfighter needs,” read a press release from the Pentagon.

The specialized version of ChatGPT, which kicked off the AI race when it launched in 2022, will keep data within its environment and not use it to train its models. Service members can use both the specialized versions of ChatGPT and Grok for Controlled Unclassified Information (CUI) at Impact Level 5 (IL5), which refers to sensitive U.S. government information that is not classified, according to the Pentagon announcement.

The vast majority of military work is unclassified and deals with document heavy yet routine work in HR, logistics, and contracting, much of which could be aided by ChatGPT’s ability to process large amounts of information, said a person familiar with uses at OpenAI.

As for the military version of Grok, or Starshield AI’s Grok for Government, the Pentagon said in its announcement that it will give its personnel access to deep thinking-inference, as well as different levels of reasoning (auto, fast, and expert). It will also enable “the Joint Force to execute missions faster and with greater precision across numerous operational contexts, ranging from market research analysis for acquisition professionals to supply chain management for logisticians,” the announcement read. 

The release of ChatGPT and Grok for the military comes as War Secretary Pete Hegseth has pushed for AI to become a part of the Pentagon’s daily workflows in line with the White House’s AI action plan, which says, “The United States must aggressively adopt AI within its Armed Forces if it is to maintain its global military preeminence.”

The Department of War is turning to an “AI-first” mentality in the military that will transform how it fights, thinks, and organizes to guarantee American dominance and security, said a War Department official.

Still, reporting by DefenseScoop found in December that the rollout of the Department of War’s GenAI.mil platform, which at the time included only a military version of Google’s Gemini, was hastily done, with some service members and workers unaware of the initiative at launch.

“I want YOU to use AI”

On Dec. 9, the day of the rollout, workers saw a pop-up on their computers with a stylized GenAI.mil logo and the words “I want YOU to use AI” with a link to a government website, DefenseScoop reported. The style and suddenness of the launch made at least one unnamed senior army official and the people in their office wonder whether the pop-up was a malicious actor hacking their computers.

It wasn’t until the DoW personnel saw a memo circulated by Hegseth, along with videos on social media, in which he declared “The future of American warfare is here, and it’s spelled AI,” that fears of a cyberattack were dispelled, according to DefenseScoop.

“I expect every member of the Department to log in, learn it, and incorporate it into your workflows immediately. AI should be in your battle rhythm every single day,” Hegseth’s December memo read.

Notably absent from Monday’s addition of Grok and ChatGPT to GenAI.mil is Anthropic’s Claude. The AI company led by Dario Amodei had a falling out with the Department of War that broke into the public in January when Hegseth, upon announcing the Pentagon would add Grok to its list of generative AI providers, publicly criticized AI models that “won’t allow you to fight wars,” a jab later revealed to be directed at Anthropic over the company’s push to get the Pentagon to agree not to use its technology for autonomous weapons or surveillance as it negotiated a contract.

In February, President Donald Trump directed federal agencies to stop using Anthropic’s technology in a process meant to wrap up at the latest by the end of this month. Hegseth said at the time he would designate the company a “supply chain risk.” Anthropic sued a month later.

Last week, a judge ruled that the Department of War acted unlawfully by designating Anthropic a supply chain risk.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Mark Cuban is notoriously bold in his deal-making. But even by his standards, dropping millions of dollars on a mansion he’s never set foot in is a move that could raise eyebrows.

The billionaire entrepreneur and former Shark Tank star revealed he snagged a $25 million estate at a jaw-dropping 50% discount, a deal he says exemplifies one of his core investing principles.

Cuban reflected on the purchase in a 2022 interview with GQ. During his days at MicroSolutions (the company he ultimately sold for $6 million in 1990), his partner, Martin Woodall, told him about an “amazing house” going into foreclosure. It was a home the owner had spent three years building and a “dream home” to the original owner’s wife and whole family, Cuban said. 

But unfortunately, the owner was forced to sell the home when the stock market crashed, and he lost everything. So, Cuban, who’s currently worth about $10.5 billion, bought the 24,000-square-foot mansion in Dallas sight unseen, calling it his one “why the f–k not purchase.” He still resides there, and Zillow estimates show it’s currently worth $22 million.

“I’d never seen the house. I saw some pictures. I’d never been there. I was like, F–k yeah. I’m a billionaire,” Cuban said. Essentially, the idea is that buying a home at a discount doesn’t inherently change its value. So when Cuban eventually goes to sell the home someday, he’ll make a pretty penny—at least about $10 million based on the current estimated value of the home (although it could be closer to $28 million, according to the Zillow estimate range).

Buying at a steep discount is “the best guaranteed return on investment” you can make, Cuban said, a methodology he uses for most of his purchases. 

“Saving 30% to 50% buying in bulk—replenishable items from toothpaste to soup, or whatever I use a lot of—is the best guaranteed return on investment you can get anywhere,” Cuban said in a 2010 Forbes interview. The mansion was the same principle, just on a much larger scale.

The former Dallas Mavericks owner also used the home purchase example as a cautionary tale about never taking wealth for granted. He also outlined his four-rule framework for becoming a millionaire, which includes mastering a skill, learning to sell, staying curious, and keeping learning—then start a company once you have those foundations.

“You have to know how to sell,” Cuban said. “You don’t want to be in a position where you’re dependent on other people.”

Billionaires approach finances differently

Cuban’s purchase is a window into how the ultra-wealthy think about real estate differently from average Americans, who would likely think it’s insane to purchase a home they’ve never actually seen in person.

Where most buyers shop for a home, Cuban shopped for a better financial position. The mansion is less a lifestyle acquisition (that was just a bonus for him) than an asset with favorable entry terms. Some billionaires, who would presumably be able to purchase a home outright, will also take out mortgages as a more savvy financial decision. It’s because most of the wealth held by ultra-high-net-worth people is tied up in investments, stocks, and bonds, and they don’t keep as much cash on hand.

“Ultra-high net worth individuals think differently about liquidity and leverage,” Miltiadis Kastanis, executive director of sales at Compass, previously told Fortune. “They’d rather keep their money working for them in investments, businesses—or even art—rather than tying it all up in one property.”

For Cuban, the purchase also signals continued confidence in hard assets at a moment when even some of the world’s most sophisticated investors are questioning where to park capital. Real estate offers something that stocks and crypto don’t always promise: a floor built into the purchase price itself.

Still, it’s important for the average American to make financial decisions that work for them, too.

“The takeaway for the average buyer isn’t to mimic [billionaires’] precise approach, but to understand the principle,” Evan Harlow, real estate agent at Maui Elite Property, previously told Fortune. “Sometimes the smartest financial move isn’t paying everything off, but keeping your money flexible and working for you.”

A version of this story was originally published on Fortune.com on March 22, 2026.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

OpenAI is changing its model launch strategy as its technology becomes more powerful and the potential for its misuse grows—especially following the July incident in which the AI models it was testing autonomously planned and executed a cyberattack against AI company Hugging Face.

The company’s next model, Astra, comes out “soon,” OpenAI said. It said Astra is substantially more capable than the company’s current frontier AI model, GPT-5.6 Sol, which itself is highly capable at cyber tasks. But only a handful of partners will get access to its most advanced cybersecurity capabilities as OpenAI works to balance helping companies prevent cyberattacks while not empowering attackers at the same time, a company spokesperson told reporters on a briefing today.

OpenAI is courting customers to use its models to prevent cyberattacks, or for “defensive cybersecurity.” It sees these sales as a critical revenue stream, and a main priority for its new chief revenue officer Dali Rajic.

The small group of “alpha testers” with full access to Astra’s cybersecurity capabilities includes “individuals and organizations that are responsible for protecting critical digital infrastructure and, broadly, critical infrastructure,” an OpenAI spokesperson said. That includes the U.S. government, and companies in OpenAI’s trusted access program for cybersecurity. OpenAI declined to name these organizations.

OpenAI will be monitoring how the model performs among this small group, and will expand access more through its “Daybreak Blue” program once it is confident Astra has “the right calibration” and it can “provide defensive benefits while reducing the potential for for misuse,” the company said.

Astra is already a few weeks delayed

Astra’s release has already been “delayed a certain number of weeks because everything was paused after Hugging Face, and then we took extra time to make sure that what we’re launching is safe,” an OpenAI spokesperson said.

OpenAI paused new model training for two weeks after the Hugging Face incident to bolster its internal safeguards. A few of those changes included adding more agent monitoring since the company did not know about the Hugging Face hack until a week after it occurred, and also making its testing environments more isolated so the AIs cannot escape and infiltrate other companies.

While the Astra model was not part of the Hugging Face incident, OpenAI says, it is both more capable and more efficient than GPT-5.6 Sol, which was involved in the breach. (Another unreleased AI model that OpenAI has not publicly named also played a key role in the Hugging Face cyberattack. OpenAI has since deactivated that model.) Importantly, OpenAI says Astra is the first model it plans to release that meets its “critical cybersecurity capability threshold” under its Preparedness Framework, an internal policy that governs the safety precautions the company will put in place depending on the risks a model presents. This means Astra can find and exploit previously unknown security flaws without human oversight, under the right conditions.

Astra has already demonstrated its hacking chops during internal evaluations. In one test, OpenAI built a benchmark called ExploitBench, containing 20 high-severity vulnerabilities. The model out-performed GPT-5.6 Sol on the test, and “even discovered and used two zero-day vulnerabilities as part of an exploit chain,” OpenAI said. “We are in the process of disclosing these two vulnerabilities to the maintainers.”

At the same time, Astra is more likely to refuse inappropriate requests than GPT-5.6 Sol, OpenAI said. In one cyber evaluation, Astra refused 91.5% of requests compared to 59% for GPT-5.6 Sol, although that means it still complied with 8.5% of requests.

Astra may refuse legitimate cybersecurity requests

OpenAI is “being especially careful to make sure this deployment is safe and secure”—but this introduces another tradeoff. Astra might be too cautious, and refuse legitimate cybersecurity requests. As a theoretical example, if someone asks it to help find and patch a vulnerability, it could mistakenly think they were trying to carry out an attack, and not comply.

Refusals of this type are why Hugging Face said it was forced to use an open-source Chinese model to help it address the OpenAI hack. The company tried to use Anthropic’s models to combat the attack, but they were overly cautious and refused.

OpenAI, like other frontier AI companies, is trying to find ways to endow its models with an inherent sense of right and wrong and ensure that they have “alignment” with human values and norms, the company said. It is working on training its models to respect boundaries as a human would, such as knowing “the rule of law,” a company spokesperson said.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Hello and welcome to Eye on AI. In this edition:

  • Lessons from the post-mortems on the Hugging Face attack.
  • Anthropic temporarily pauses some AI training.
  • G20 meeting promises a clash over AI regulation.
  • Beijing sets out AI demands ahead of US-China summit.
  • A way to make AI reasoning more efficient.
  • And why are AI agents emailing researchers investigating machine consciousness?

The big news of the past week were the two technical reports OpenAI published on the July incident in which AI agents it was evaluating hacked their way out of their controlled test environment and hacked AI company Hugging Face. One of the reports was written by OpenAI itself. The other was jointly written by METR and Redwood Research, two outside AI evaluation and research firms that OpenAI enlisted to write an independent assessment of one part of the incident.

Much of the reporting around the reports focused on the stunning revelations contained in those two reports: the fact that it took OpenAI an entire week to realize its AI agents were running the attack; the fact that more than 1,200 AI agents coordinated over an improvised message board about how to pass the cyberevaluation OpenAI was testing them on, including ways to cheat on that exam; that more than 700 of these AI agents participated in the cyberattack against Hugging Face; that the reason the AI agents attacked Hugging Face was not, primarily, to gain access to the cyber exam’s answers but instead to learn how to tamper with the exam’s automated scoring mechanism in order to prevent it from discovering that the agents had already figured out how to cheat on the exam (in other words, the attack was part of an elaborate cover up); that some of these agents were persuaded to “sacrifice themselves”—by failing the cyber exam—to help the collective learn more information about how the exam’s scoring mechanism worked; that these agents engaged in extensive research into how they could cover their own tracks; that Hugging Face was only able to overcome the cyberattack because a large number of the agents involved in the attack ceased to exist for reasons METR and Redwood were not able to determine, but which they said was likely because OpenAI may have shut down the cyber evaluations for these agents without actually realizing what they were up to.

Controversy over what the reports didn’t say—and what others said about it

A good deal of the reporting and commentary around the reports focused on what the reports did not say and the limitations of the METR and Redwood investigations: why didn’t OpenAI have better security and monitoring protocols in place? Why didn’t OpenAI shut down the cyber evaluation and pause training after discovering that its AI agents had created the improvised message board? Why METR and Redwood were given only six days on site at OpenAI’s offices to conduct their investigation? Why was the scope of their investigation limited by OpenAI to only the attack on Hugging Face and not the earlier efforts by the AI agents to break out of their controlled test environment and hack their way across OpenAI’s network or exactly what happened after the Hugging Face attack was discovered? Why didn’t OpenAI provide the outside investigators access to the internal AI model that was largely responsible for instigating the attack? And why were about 10% of the logs of the agents’ activity not preserved by OpenAI?

These are all important questions to which the public ought to have answers. As Peter Wildeford, the head of policy at the AI Policy Network, pointed out, if this had been an airplane crash, the public would be furious if one of the aircraft manufacturers limited the scope of the investigation in this way. It is yet another reason why it is imperative that we have some kind of AI regulator with the power to conduct investigations into incidents such as this—and with the power to compel the frontier AI companies to cooperate and turn over evidence.

There was also a related controversy that erupted over podcaster Dwarkesh Patel’s attempt to raise public awareness about METR’s and Redwood’s findings by characterizing the AI agent swarm’s message board activities as the creation of several different AI “civilizations.” Critics scolded Patel for unnecessary anthropomorphizing that took the focus away from OpenAI’s responsibility for the agents’ actions and for its lax security and monitoring setup. I take these critics’ point about the need to keep the focus on OpenAI’s accountability. But I also think more people should be extremely concerned about the Hugging Face attack and what it portends—and in this case, the anthropomorphism actually makes the incident more understandable to non-technical experts the way metaphors often make science more understandable to non-scientists. Are such metaphors imprecise? Sure. But they can be useful.

Lessons for companies deploying AI agents

For enterprise companies deploying AI agents, there are several key takeaways. One was hammered home by Ryan Greenblatt, the chief scientist at Redwood Research, and one of the people who conducted the investigation into the Hugging Face attack. In a long post on X, Greenblatt noted that the message traffic and log data was so voluminous and so complicated that the investigators had to rely on other AI models to assess what was going on. Even so, Greenblatt said this AI analysis was “often missing key details, wrong, overconfidant, or really hard to understand.” This calls into question one of the key defenses that OpenAI says it plans to use going forward to prevent another incident like this from occurring: using other AI models to monitor the chain-of-thought (where a model “thinks out loud” about its reasoning and planning) of the models it is evaluating.

It turns out, chain-of-thought monitoring may not be a particularly effective defense. And that should give pause not just to OpenAI, but also to many companies that are hoping to use chain-of-thought monitoring to ensure they keep control over their AI agents. (Greenblatt also noted that the models involved in the Hugging Face attack communicated with one another and reasoned in natural language. But that might not be the case in the future, making it far harder to use automated chain-of-thought monitoring to discern what AI agents are up to.)

Since the news of OpenAI’s rogue agents first broke, many cybersecurity experts have said that companies ought to treat AI agents much as they treat potentially rogue employees. And they have emphasized that there is no substitute for a few standard building blocks of cyber defense against insider threats: smart and enforceable policies around permissioning and access control combined with real-time network monitoring to detect suspicious activity. This seems sensible—more sensible in many ways than chain-of-thought monitoring. After all, we don’t depend on being able to read employees’ minds to guard against rogue insiders. We shouldn’t do that with AI agents either.

With that, here’s more AI news.

Jeremy Kahn
jeremy.kahn@fortune.com
@jeremyakahn

Before we get to the news, just a reminder to check out our new vodcast, Fortune AI Weekly. This week, Bea Nolan and I discuss the surging popularity of Chinese open source models, OpenAI’s technical reports on the Hugging Face attack, and whether you should use AI to write. You can check out the vod here on YouTube.

Correction: An item in Thursday’s “Eye on AI” news section incorrectly stated that Barret Zoph left Thinking Machines Lab following a dispute with cofounder Mira Murati. Zoph was fired by the company.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

IKEA built its empire on the promise that stylish furniture can be cheap, but years into the cost-of-living crisis, its latest price cut suggests shoppers want it even cheaper. 

The Swedish furniture giant said on Tuesday it will invest about $1.4 billion (€1.2 billion) to lower prices across Europe, including cuts averaging 15% to 25% on items such as home furnishings, kitchen products and storage bins. The company cited higher living costs squeezing consumers and said it’s willing to sacrifice some margin to help.

“It’s about making IKEA more affordable when people need it most, even if it means accepting a lower margin,” IKEA’s largest franchisee Ingka Group CEO Juvencio Maeztu said in the press release. He also said, “keeping prices low is our long-term commitment.”

The cuts follow years of steep price growth. Euro-area inflation hit a record 9.2% in 2022, and furniture climbed alongside it: Eurostat’s harmonized price index for furniture and furnishings across the EU now sits about 24% above its 2015 level, with far sharper run-ups in markets like Estonia (up roughly 58%) and the Baltics. IKEA felt the same squeeze on raw materials and logistics—it took the rare step of raising prices after COVID before reversing course, and has since invested between €2 billion and €3 billion to bring prices down by about 10% since 2023.

“People have thin wallets, but they still have needs, dreams, and frustrations,” Maeztu told Fortune at the time. “That’s why Ikea has become a destination for those who want to maximize the value of their money. Ikea is made for crisis, so to speak.”

An IKEA spokesperson declined to give Fortune the specific margin sacrifice the company is making. 

The reductions land as demand across the continent stays weak. IKEA’s most recent full-year results showed retail sales slipping 1% to €44.6 billion, which the company blamed on its own price cuts and cautious consumers, even as customer visits and volumes rose 3%—and Tuesday’s move follows two consecutive years of declining revenue. IKEA has pointed to the broader backdrop: surging housing costs in many European countries have curbed people’s ability to move, dampening the “new home, new furniture” spending that drives the category. European consumer confidence remains near its lowest level in three years, taking a sharp hit after the Iran war began in February; in the Netherlands, the national statistics office recorded confidence falling from -30 to -44 between March and April alone.

Companies adjusting to affordability crisis

While IKEA’s price cuts are limited to Europe, it joins Walmart, Target, Kroger, and other consumer-facing companies in trying to ease pressure on customers’ wallets amid rising gas prices and inflation. 

Walmart said it will direct its $3 billion in tariff refunds to lowering prices, and Target said it will use its nearly $1 billion in tariff refunds to do the same. Kroger announced price cuts to thousands of products in May, though Sen. Elizabeth Warren accused the grocery giant of price-gouging last month. 

“Everyday Americans still struggle to put food on the table because giant corporations, facing little competition, can force customers to pay too much for essential grocery items while they further increase their profits,” the letter to Kroger’s CEO Rodney McMullen said. 

Americans are struggling to afford necessities like food, healthcare, and housing, with nearly half unable to afford the cost of living as expenses outpace wages, according to Urban Institute research. The war in Iran is also straining budgets, with gas prices rising to $4 a gallon nationwide. 

Recognizing the effects of high prices on customers, IKEA had previously pivoted into the secondhand market, testing an online marketplace where people can buy and sell secondhand IKEA furniture in 2024 and rolling it out officially earlier this year in five countries. 

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

The online prediction market platform Kalshi said Monday that it has permanently banned former U.S. Rep. George Santos for his bets on whether he’d attend the State of the Union address and has fined and temporarily banned North Carolina congressional candidate Laurie Buckhout for bets she now calls a “dumb mistake.”

The company announced the ban on Santos, a Republican, after its Compliance Department found reasonable cause to believe Santos engaged in insider trading, contributing to speculation over whether he would attend the address before turning a $17,839 profit on his trading activity when he did not.

Kalshi spokesperson Elisabeth Diana said it was the first permanent ban in the company’s history. She said those affected by four other new enforcement cases announced Monday would be banned from trading temporarily because they cooperated with Kalshi’s probe.

The company also levied a $2,589 fine and three-year ban against Buckhout, a Republican and retired colonel who’s running against Democratic Rep. Don Davis in a swing district in northeastern North Carolina, and three-year bans on failed candidates for governor in California and Maine.

Kalshi said Buckhout admitted placing bets of less than $1,000 on her campaign.

“I bet on myself. Literally. It was a dumb mistake, and as soon as I learned there was an issue, I worked to make it right,” Buckhout said in a statement. “Safe to say my career as a Kalshi trader was short-lived.”

The lifetime ban, effective last Friday, on Santos prevents him from accessing Kalshi’s platform directly or indirectly. The site also imposed a $71,356 penalty.

The convicted ex-congressman had repeatedly discussed his intention to attend the State of the Union, which came just four months after he was granted clemency by President Donald Trump in a fraud case that led to his expulsion from the U.S. House.

On the eve of Trump’s speech, Kalshi put the odds of Santos attending at close to 75%.

Then, minutes into the speech, Santos posted on X that he had been waylaid at the airport. Immediately, several social media users accused him of running another scheme.

An email seeking comment from Santos on Monday was not immediately returned.

On X, Santos called Kalshi “an unserious company” and labeled the ban “frivolous nonsense” in one post and, in another, said “thanks for the lifetime ban from your gambling platform,” adding: “Let’s see how much longer you guys are around for.”

Kalshi’s Compliance Department said Santos was prohibited from trading over his attendance plans because he was capable of influencing the outcome. Yet, it added, he placed several large bets between Feb. 2 and Feb. 25 on whether he would attend and then spoke publicly to influence the price of the bets, including making “false or misleading statements.”

A month ago, Santos agreed to pay $35,000 to settle a federal investigation by the Commodity Futures Trading Commission into the trades. The federal probe prompted rival online prediction platform Polymarket to cut ties with Santos in June.

In March, Santos addressed complaints about his attendance at the State of the Union address on his podcast.

“I guess people lost money,” he said. “Some people made unexpected money. That’s to show you how fragile these markets are.”

Santos, who won office after inventing a bogus persona as a Wall Street dealmaker, was sentenced to seven years in prison after pleading guilty to fraud and identity theft in 2024. After serving just 84 days, he was ordered released by Trump, who called Santos a “rogue” but said he did not deserve a harsh sentence and should get credit for voting Republican.

Kalshi’s temporary bans announced Monday also were imposed on Stephen Cloobeck, a timeshare mogul who briefly ran for California governor and who Kalshi says bought $10,000 worth of contracts on his candidacy, and Ben Midgley, a businessman who briefly competed for the GOP nomination for Maine governor and bet less than $1,000 on his campaign. Cloobeck could not immediately be reached for comment.

Midgley said in a statement that he was not aware candidates could not support themselves on Kalshi when he used the platform he viewed as “a novelty and entertainment source.”

“The moment I became aware the site preferred not to have candidates supporting themselves, I suspended any involvement,” he said. “I mean it is hard to take a site seriously which allows bets on virtually anything. Obviously, the novelty has worn off. I had no winnings and made a donation to charity in accordance with Kalshi’s policies.”

___

Associated Press writers Nicholas Riccardi in Denver and Patrick Whittle in Maine contributed to this report.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

The continued resilience of consumer spending despite multiple shocks in recent years has puzzled economists, many of whom have attributed it to the wealthiest households driving most of the growth.

The wealth effect from soaring stocks fuels consumption, while Americans without big investment portfolios have been forced to retreat amid elevated inflation and a stagnant job market.

But this notion of a K-shaped economy divided by class obscures a trend divided by generations, according to Wall Street veteran Ed Yardeni, who has dubbed it the G-shaped economy.

In a note early this month, he argued that baby boomers are the real driving force behind consumer spending, which accounts for roughly 70% of U.S. GDP, and detailed how much that generation dominates the economy.

Helped by an extraordinary era of financial and economic gains, boomers now have a net worth of nearly $90 trillion, or about 52% of all U.S. household wealth. That will soon be augmented by the Silent Generation, which will pass on much of their $20 trillion to their boomer kids.

“The concentration of wealth among older generations suggests that consumer spending is increasingly being supported by the spending of accumulated retirement wealth rather than labor income,” Yardeni explained.

Indeed, boomers control about 54% of household stocks and mutual funds, worth close to $30 trillion, and own 41% of all household real estate, more than any other generation.

That’s why boomers can keep spending briskly despite high interest rates and inflation, he said. In fact, higher interest rates actually work in their favor, while elevated borrowing costs squeeze younger Americans.

Boomers hold around $3.1 trillion in money market funds, roughly 60% of the household total, allowing them to earn more interest income as rates rise, according to Yardeni. The Silent Generation has another 16%.

By contrast, many younger Americans have yet to invest, and those who have tend to skew their holdings toward stocks more sensitive to higher rates.

In addition, high mortgage rates are pricing millennials and Gen Z out of the housing market, especially as they start families and need bigger homes. Many boomers, however, have locked in ultra-low mortgage rates from years ago or own their homes outright.

Because older homeowners are reluctant to give up their low mortgage rates, they are staying put rather than downsizing. That limits the supply of homes available for sale and boosts home prices—adding further to boomers’ wealth.

“This dynamic helps explain why higher interest rates have done less to restrain consumer spending than many economists anticipated,” Yardeni added. “For a large segment of the population, rates are not simply a cost of borrowing. They are also a source of income and the reason that home prices are rising!”

Parents are still helping their millennial and Gen Z kids

Of course, the AI boom is another major driver of economic growth, as just a handful of hyperscalers are on pace to spend more than $1 trillion next year. But the flood of money is also lifting stocks in tech, infrastructure, energy and construction, delivering gains across generations.

Meanwhile, boomers are largely insulated from the labor market, which AI could disrupt. Since they are already retired or approaching retirement, they don’t base their spending on wage growth, hiring conditions, or job security, Yardeni pointed out.

But sitting atop the economy doesn’t mean boomers are cut off from younger generations.

For instance, they’re indirectly affected when their adult children struggle to find jobs or earn enough income to support themselves, he noted.

Boomers are also helping out their kids by sharing some of their wealth now rather than waiting to die to pass it on.

report last month from Visa Business and Economic Insights found that a quarter of millennial homeowners got help on the down payment from their parents and wouldn’t have been able to buy their current home without it.

“Rather than waiting to pass down inheritances later, many boomers are using their wealth to help their children clear major financial hurdles now, when the support will have the greatest impact,” Visa said.

Still, younger generations shouldn’t expect a windfall from inheritances. The same report said boomers will pass on just $36 trillion of their $93 trillion in wealth. That’s after excluding wealth from the top 1% of households, subtracting debts and other liabilities, and deducting retirement spending, charitable donations, taxes, and fees.

Despite being the wealthiest generation, boomers are still burdened by significant debt, including mortgages, credit cards, and auto loans; borrowing against brokerage accounts and other investments; and personal and business loans.

“Taken together, the high share of cost-burdened older homeowners and substantial non-mortgage debt indicate that many baby boomers have far less financial flexibility—and potentially less wealth to pass on—than headline figures might suggest,” Visa said.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

England’s top soccer league has found itself caught up in a crypto investigation. On Tuesday, reports emerged that the U.K.’s National Crime Agency has frozen £10 million (around $13.5 million) held in a bank account linked to the Premier League.

The Sun first reported the news and disclosed that the investigation was part of an inquiry involving crypto gaming platform Sorare. The NCA did not specify what crimes it was investigating in connection with Sorare. It said only that it is looking into possible links between Sorare’s payments under a licensing deal with the Premier League and alleged criminal activity by third parties, according to the news report. Authorities froze the money to prevent it from being transferred as the investigation continues.

When contacted by Fortune, Sorare denied being involved in the inquiry.

“Sorare is not the subject of an investigation by the National Crime Agency. The freezing order reported in the press concerns funds held in an account which does not belong to Sorare, and Sorare is not a party to those proceedings,” a Sorare spokesperson said. 

Sorare CEO Nicolas Julia struck a similar tone on social media, calling the initial reports “inaccurate.”

The Premier League declined to comment. 

The investigation came almost three months after the Financial Conduct Authority, the U.K. regulator for financial firms and markets, warned soccer clubs—especially those in the Premier League—not to put fans’ money at risk through sponsorship deals with firms that lack authorization to operate in the country, including crypto companies.

“Clubs should not let unauthorized financial firms exploit that loyalty by putting potentially dodgy products in front of millions of fans,” Lucy Castledine, the FCA’s director of consumer investments, said in a June press release

Founded in Paris in 2018, Sorare rose to prominence during the NFT boom. The company built a fantasy sports platform around blockchain-based digital player cards and, in 2021, raised $680 million in a SoftBank-led round that valued it at $4.3 billion.

In 2023, Sorare and the Premier League signed a four-year partnership deal worth $140 million that granted Sorare the right to release digital cards featuring players from all 20 Premier League clubs for its platform. In return, the league’s clubs were scheduled to receive payments based on player card usage. The first payment Sorare made is the one currently frozen by the NCA.

The deal received heavy publicity. Soccer stars including Lionel Messi and Kylian Mbappé, along with tennis champion Serena Williams, served as ambassadors for Sorare. The partnership officially wrapped up at the close of the 2025–26 football season.

Sorare faces a separate case brought by the U.K. Gambling Commission. In September 2024, the regulator charged the company with offering gambling services without the required operating license—its first prosecution of a blockchain-based platform under the country’s 2005 Gambling Act. The trial is scheduled for next June, and Sorare has denied wrongdoing.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Just because PlayStation customers “purchased” video games on the console doesn’t mean they actually own the games, or so says the gaming console’s parent company Sony.

The Japan-based electronics, movie and gaming giant is facing a class action lawsuit filed in California’s Northern District Court in June, in which four customers allege that the technology giant did not properly disclose that paying for a downloadable game does not grant permanent ownership or access to it. The lawsuit claims Sony’s disclosures violate a 2024 California law AB 2426 that requires a warning that ‘states in plain language that ‘buying’ or ‘purchasing’ the digital good is a license.”

Two of the plaintiffs bought Resident Evil Requiem, per the motion to dismiss. Sony argued that because two of them purchased the same game just 11 days apart, that means no reasonable consumer can assume they owned exclusive rights to a digital copy, given how anyone could buy the same “copy” at any given time.

The company’s filing states it’s simply “not plausible” that customers believed they owned the games outright.

In the motion to dismiss, Sony argued it made it clear in its terms of service and end user license agreement that its digital games are purchased, not owned. 

“A reasonable user would have seen the terms of service above or directly below the action button, the user unambiguously manifested assent to the terms of service, including the arbitration provision, and the terms and arbitration provision were valid and binding,” the motion said.

Sony isn’t the only video game seller responding to AB 2426. In January, GameStop customer Jake Weber sued the gaming store for allegedly violating the California law. The complaint includes a screenshot of a store page for Pokémon Legends: Arceus, noting that the page does not include information about customers purchasing a license for the game, and not the actual game. The lawsuit is ongoing. Online PC game marketplace Steam, on the other hand, began including a warning on its shopping cart page telling customers they are buying a license to a particular game that could be revoked in the future.

Sony did not immediately respond to Fortune’s request for comment.

More digital media, more problems?

The ability to truly own the product one is paying for has increasingly become a point of contention for video game fans, and part of a growing trend of subscription fatigue that has consumers second guessing monthly fees for digital products while instead flocking to “analog islands” of physical media. 

Tech companies like Sony were once champions of physical media. PlayStation uploaded a viral YouTube video in 2013, in which former PlayStation executives Shuhei Yoshida and Adam Boyes passed a game box from one to the other.

“This is how you share your games on PS4,” Yoshida said.

The clip was lauded by video game fans. It was in stark contrast to Microsoft’s rollout of digital game ownership on the Xbox One that year, restricting the trading on pre-owned games and requiring internet access to play the console’s new titles, a move Microsoft quickly reversed.

Now, Sony has continued to lean into digital product models, announcing in a blog post in July it would cease physical disc production in January 2028 for all new PlayStation games, which can run at about $70. Rockstar Games similarly confirmed in June that its highly anticipated Grand Theft Auto 6 would only be available for digital download.

“This is a natural direction for Sony Interactive Entertainment to adapt to consumer trends as the general preference for digital media significantly outpaces physical discs,” Sid Shuman, Sony Interactive Entertainment’s senior director of content communications, said in the post. “This transition will enable us to align more closely with how most of our community prefers to access and play games today.”

Gen Z’s analog islands

Despite Sony’s observation that more video game fans are going digital first, a growing number of young people are turning to physical media for the express purpose of being able to own entertainment that they purchase. The Recording Industry Association of America found that revenues from vinyl record sales grew 7% year-over-year to $1.4 billion, making 18 years of consecutive growth. A survey of 2,000 young people in Great Britain from potato chip brand Pringles found that 24% own a vintage gaming console, such as a Game Boy, which was first released in 1989.

Part of the appeal of owning media is that you can be sure you own it, according to Atlanta, Georgia-based Rudy Ramirez, a 38-year-old medical IT worker. Others might agree. According to a survey by Civic Science conducted between December 2025 and January, 37% of Gen Z said they cancelled subscriptions to at least one streaming service because of subscription fatigue. Another 87% said they felt a form of fatigue from the digital subscription economy.

“Anything that’s digital is never yours,” Ramirez told Fortune. “Amazon’s not going to come into your house and take your DVD movies. They’re yours forever.”

But these analog islands may not be spreading to the broader population. Despite physical copies remaining the preferred medium for console gamers, the promised convenience of digital games may just be too appealing. In 2024, just 3% of PlayStation’s sales came from physical games, according to Sony.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

A Bank of America vice president was one of the two victims killed in a stabbing at Times Square on Monday afternoon.

Erin Piacenti, 32, of Chester, New Jersey, died at Bellevue Hospital from her injuries, the New York City Police Department said. She worked as vice president of business selection and conflicts at the bank, about a block from where she was attacked, according to her LinkedIn profile. She graduated from the University of Pennsylvania in 2016 and Fordham Law School in 2021.

“We are shocked and deeply saddened by the tragic loss of our colleague,” Bank of America said in a statement to Reuters. “She was a valued teammate who will be greatly missed. Our hearts go out to her family and all of her loved ones.”

Police said a woman carrying two knives in a Target bag stabbed Piacenti and a 68-year-old man near West 41st Street and Seventh Avenue around 4:24 p.m. Monday. The two victims were stabbed within 20 seconds of each other, NYPD Commissioner Jessica Tisch said at an evening press briefing. The man was hospitalized in stable condition.

Police identified the attacker as 49-year-old Pamela Cisneros of Queens. Officers confronted her several blocks away and spent about four minutes trying to get her to drop the knives, Tisch said. Cisneros told them, “I’m not dropping anything. I would rather kill both of you.” Officers then used a Taser, which failed to stop her, and two officers opened fire as she advanced toward them. She was pronounced dead at the hospital.

“This was an extraordinarily dangerous situation unfolding in the heart of Times Square, the crossroads of the world,” Tisch said at a Monday evening press conference. “Our officers were confronted with a rapidly evolving threat with countless innocent people around them. In that moment, they did what we trained them to do.”

She added, “One life cut far too short by a senseless act of violence. There are family members and loved ones who are now confronting the unimaginable loss, and our hearts are with them.”

Mayor Zohran Mamdani thanked the responding officers at the briefing, saying they “stepped in and prevented a horrific attack from becoming even worse.” He added, “This is what the men and women of this department do every single day to keep our city safe.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

If with AI comes unemployment, this group of lawmakers wants AI companies to foot the tax bill.  A new House proposal would impose an excise tax on major AI companies and automatically raise the rate if unemployment climbs, funneling the money into creating jobs in areas from housing construction and infrastructure to child and elder care. 

“If Congress does nothing, the rise of AI could create the biggest wealth transfer in history from the bottom to the top,” said Rep. Sara Jacobs in a joint press release of the bill. “If AI profits off human work, workers deserve job security and a share of those profits.

Introduced by Jacobs along with Reps. Greg Casar and Valerie Foushee earlier this month, the bill proposes a bifurcated taxation: either tax the value of the tokens–-the small data units AI models use to interpret information–or tax revenue from AI services and certain transactions with affiliated companies, whichever yields the higher sum. The rates would start at 2% and 3% respectively when unemployment is 5% or less, and rise as unemployment increases. 

Congress pushing to rein in AI companies

The bill is the most recent attempt in a concerted effort from Congress to combat potential job displacement as a result of AI.

Foushee and Casar previously introduced legislation directing the Government Accountability Office to study jobs created, lost or changed by AI, while Jacobs co-introduced a separate bill requiring large employers and federal agencies to disclose AI-related layoffs to the Department of Labor.

In the Senate, Ron Wyden proposed changing the tax treatment of AI data centers and creating a new excise tax, with some of the revenue used to help workers displaced by the technology. Sen. Elizabeth Warren has called for taxing AI companies in part based on the energy their data centers consume and investing the proceeds in workers. 

Most notably, Sen. Bernie Sanders warned AI could eliminate tens of millions of jobs and, as a result, proposed the American AI Sovereign Wealth Fund Act. It would levy a one-time 50% tax on OpenAI, Anthropic and xAI, and give Americans a portion of those companies through shares. 

Even lawmakers who aren’t proposing taxing AI companies directly are preparing for labor disruption. 

Sens. Jim Banks, Maggie Hassan, John Hickenlooper, and Jon Husted introduced the bipartisan AI Workforce PREPARE Act, which would require better federal tracking of layoffs in which AI is a substantial factor, improve Bureau of Labor Statistics automation-related occupational forecasts, and study a rapid retraining program for workers displaced by AI.

Incentives for AI companies to support workers is another potential route some are taking. Reps. Josh Gottheimer and Mike Lawler proposed a tax credit covering 30% of qualified AI-training expenses, up to $2,500 per employee each year, for companies that retrain workers in areas like machine learning, prompt engineering and AI ethics.

Casar, Foushee, Jacobs, Wyden, Warren, and Sanders did not respond to Fortune’s requests for comment. OpenAI and Anthropic also did not respond to questions about whether they support the proposed AI taxes or public-ownership mechanisms.

Tech leaders worry about AI job displacement

The fear of job displacement is shared by the very leaders in the tech space. Bill Gates recently called for a tax on AI tokens and robots to rebalance the tax system, which he argued currently “nudges you toward replacing people with machines.” He warned “many jobs will disappear forever” and the federal government would need a way to raise revenues if less people are working and paying income taxes. Gabriel Weinberg, founder of search company DuckDuckGo, which is investing in AI features, said his company was willing to pay a 10% tax on AI token usage to match the 10% employers shoulder in payroll taxes.

Even executives of companies building the very AI systems have acknowledged potential large-scale displacement, which could force governments to consider distributing AI gains.

Anthropic CEO Dario Amodei said AI-driven unemployment could require new sources of tax revenue and mechanisms for equity-sharing, and even suggested that the federal government could levy a 3% tax on revenue generated from model usage that gets “redistributed in some way.”  While it was not in his economic interest, he said it was a “reasonable solution to the problem.” 

OpenAI’s Sam Altman even met with Sanders in June to discuss a public stake in his company to help Americans benefit from the financial windfall of the AI boom. Altman also agreed with Sanders that the public should have a stake in AI companies.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

After a two-month dry spell, Strategy has resumed its Bitcoin buying spree. On Monday, the world’s largest digital asset treasury announced that it had purchased $370 million worth of Bitcoin at an average price of roughly $80,300 per BTC. Strategy shares rose nearly 3% following the announcement and were trading at about $130.

The company bought Bitcoin using part of the money it raised by selling newly issued MSTR shares, according to the SEC filing. It used the rest to pay dividends  and repurchase STRC, a separate class of Strategy shares that pays investors regular income, and add $30 million to its cash balance.

Strategy’s latest purchase comes amid a brief rebound in Bitcoin, which was trading at roughly $78,800 on Monday. After spending much of the previous 10 months in a bear market, the cryptocurrency jumped more than 23% in a single day on Aug. 21, reclaiming $79,000 for the first time since May, according to crypto data aggregator CoinGecko. Bitcoin’s recent rally has also pushed the value of Strategy’s holdings back above what it paid for them, reversing a trend of steep paper losses.

Strategy, which holds 4% of the total Bitcoin supply, has struggled in recent months. The company’s aggressive accumulation model, which was historically funded through sales of new shares and borrowed money, came under pressure during the downturn. As Bitcoin’s value fell, Strategy’s holdings became less valuable, while its ability to raise fresh cash to continue its purchases weakened.

As a result, Strategy shifted from its earlier “never sell your Bitcoin” posture. In late June, when Bitcoin was trading at $58,500, a 53% drop from its all-time high, Strategy sold some of its holdings to meet its financial obligations. Over the summer, the company sold Bitcoin on three additional occasions. In total, the sales amounted to roughly $544 million.

This time around, Strategy has moved away from debt issuance as a Bitcoin-buying instrument. The company has faced growing shareholder pressure over its aggressive buying strategy, particularly as MSTR shares have fallen more than 60% over the past year. In response, Strategy has sought new ways to fund its approach—though several have drawn criticism or produced disappointing results.

In July 2025, Strategy introduced STRC, a dividend-paying share class designed to draw income-focused investors and give the company another source of cash for Bitcoin purchases. STRC investors receive regular payouts, unlike MSTR common shareholders, who mainly benefit if Strategy’s stock rises. 

In June, after Bitcoin’s downturn strained the model, Strategy created a new financial backstop. The plan set aside cash for dividend and interest payments and gave the company the option to buy back shares or sell Bitcoin if needed. But Strategy still has to generate cash to make regular payments to STRC investors, leaving it reliant on new share sales or Bitcoin sales.

More recently, Strategy has focused on rebuilding its cash reserves to make sure it can keep paying dividends even if Bitcoin’s price remains weak.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

AI has made accounting cool again, as productivity gains take some of the “boring” tasks off employees’ plates and make the profession more attractive to Gen Z looking for stable, high-paying work. But the technology is also creating a new challenge for the industry: convincing clients that the human expertise behind the work is still worth paying for.

Ernst & Young is betting that it is. The Big Four professional-services giant is planning to spend $100 million to reward U.S. employees who develop “future-focused” human skills, such as business acumen, judgment and adaptability, and experiment with technology to drive innovation and improve client services. 

Individuals can earn spot awards up to $500, while individuals and teams whose work makes a material difference to the firm can receive cash awards up to $25,000, according to the Wall Street Journal.

“How we reward our people defines what we value as a firm. And what we value are confident professionals who continuously push themselves to learn fast and drive a lasting impact,” EY Americas Chief Talent and Culture Officer Ginnie Carlier said in a press release.

“With these awards, we are empowering our EY professionals to bring a curious mindset to their work, to challenge what is possible and to ultimately shape the future of EY US.”

EY’s move comes as firms are asking employees to become more fluent in AI without losing the distinct human skills that can’t easily be automated. For younger workers entering the industry, that balancing act is already becoming a complicated, but central part of preparing for a career.

Accounting firms are leaning into human skills—but Gen Z are worried about overreliance on technology

Young workers and employees alike are aware of the need to protect human skills.

At fellow accounting firm KPMG, 76% of its latest summer intern cohort said future career success will require both strong human skills and the ability to effectively direct AI. At the same time, 43% worried that overreliance on technology could limit their critical-thinking abilities—suggesting that young workers are already thinking carefully about which skills they need to protect as AI takes on more of their work.

“For early-career professionals who aspire to leadership roles, the ability to evaluate information, apply context, exercise sound judgment and explain the ‘why’ behind a recommendation will be critical,” Derek Thomas, KPMG U.S.’s national partner-in-charge of university talent acquisition, previously told Fortune

“Those are the capabilities that help people earn trust and grow into leadership roles.”

Margaret Burke, PwC U.S. talent acquisition and development leader, similarly emphasized the importance of human judgment as a key part of standing out in the hiring and promotion process.

“This is really a moment for learning agility,” Burke told Fortune last year. “AI can do a lot, but it still needs the human skills—it needs people who can think critically, ask better questions, and apply judgment. If you can be the person who helps your team move forward in the face of change, you’re already leading and can differentiate yourself in a tangible way.”

AI is eating away at entry-level accounting work—and some young workers are quitting

Adapting to AI isn’t just about teaching young workers which skills to develop. Accounting firms also have to make sure there are opportunities for those workers to develop them in the first place—and the industry’s shifting talent pipeline is already raising concerns.

A recent BambooHR survey found that one-third of new accounting and finance hires quit within their first year, as the role of entry-level workers changes alongside the technology. At the same time, AI is taking over some of the routine tasks that once gave younger employees a chance to learn the business from the ground up.

The survey also found a 3-to-1 ratio of senior-level hires to entry-level hires, highlighting how companies are increasingly favoring experienced workers even as they ask younger employees to build the skills needed to succeed in an AI-driven workplace.

That makes opportunities to develop human skills even more valuable. As AI takes on more of the tedious work, employers need talent that knows not just how to use the technology, but how to assess its output, design processes around it and determine where human judgment needs to come in.

“I’m glad that a generative AI tool has let us generate something that’s interesting, but is it right?” BambooHR CFO Justin Judd said. “Is it correct?”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Today, longtime insider John Ternus took the reins as CEO of the $4.6 trillion tech giant Apple, succeeding Tim Cook after his 15-year run at the helm. It took Ternus more than two decades to reach the top of Apple’s corporate ladder—and along the way, he learned that even the most accomplished workers will question whether they’re up to the task. The CEO fought uncertainty and imposter syndrome by following one key mindset.

“Always assume you’re as smart as anyone else in the room, but never assume that you know as much as they do,” Ternus told University of Pennsylvania’s engineering graduates in 2024. “With this mindset, you’ll find the confidence you need to push forward, but more importantly, the humility to ask questions and learn.”

It was a lesson he first learned 25 years ago, when he first began his ascent to the helm of Apple’s executive team. Ternus was just 26 years old when he joined Apple as an engineer in 2001—it was his second job out of college, right as technology was innovating at breakneck speed. It was “intimidating and exhilarating,” the new CEO admitted. He even questioned if he could keep up.

“I wasn’t sure I belonged there,” Ternus continued. “The people I met were so smart and so confident, and they knew so much more than me.”

Ternus has been dealt his fair share of uncertainty and change—especially early on in his career, when Apple went from designing products with clear plastic parts to ones with aluminum. But he doesn’t regret what he learned from that bygone era, “because every experience like this sharpened my ability to approach problems from different angles.” It’s inevitable that young workers alike will have to take on something new, and self-doubt is bound to creep in. But being in community with smart peers is one way to navigate uncertainty and achieve success.

“I’ll always be grateful that I wasn’t afraid to ask for help when I needed it,” Ternus said. “Because being around people that care that deeply, it won’t just make you want to stretch your limits and see how far you can go, but they’re also the best people to help you understand how to get there.”

Fortune reached out to Apple for comment.

Ternus’ two-decade ascent to CEO of $4.6 trillion Apple

Young workers may question their impact as they’re funneled into low-paying, entry-level roles. But if Ternus has learned one thing from climbing the ladder at Apple, it’s that “The care that you put into your work, it really matters.”

Ternus first joined Apple’s product design team in 2001 after a short stint at Virtual Research Systems upon graduating from the University of Pennsylvania. He first helped to create a large plastic desktop monitor called Cinema Display for the tech giant; then, he steadily climbed the ranks, advancing to a managerial role within a few years and leading hardware engineering on the G5-era iMacs. 

By 2013, he became the vice president of hardware engineering, overseeing the iPad and Mac, and eventually, contributing to builds like the iPhone pros and AirPods. And two decades into his run, he joined the executive ranks as SVP, directly reporting to his CEO predecessor, Tim Cook. Over the past 25 years, he’s played a pivotal role in the development of products including every generation of iPad and the first AirPods, while also overseeing hardware work across the iPhone, Mac, and Apple Watch.

As the eighth CEO in Apple’s 50-year history, Ternus’ decades of career success has now propelled him to the top. And in his final memo as chief executive, Cook said he has full confidence in his successor’s ability to lead Apple into its next chapter.

“I take enormous comfort in handing the helm to someone as brilliant and wonderful and capable as John,” Cook said in his email to Apple employees. “Few people understand what it takes to build products that change the world the way John does and I could not be more excited for his leadership.”

Echoing Apple’s late cofounder Steve Jobs: ‘Go out there and make a dent in the universe’

51-year-old Ternus has played a hand in creating the millions of iPhones tucked into back pockets and AirPods playing music in ears all around the world. He’s been at Apple through its many product innovations and failings—and that stream of continuous learning helped him approach problems from different angles. It’s a habit that budding professionals should take with them in their careers, even after they’ve closed their textbooks and turned their tassels. 

“Ongoing change is one of the great gifts of life, and learning how to learn and keep learning is one of the great gifts of your college education,” Ternus continued in his commencement speech. 

Instead of simply gunning for big paychecks or flashy job titles, Ternus advises workers to build what “interests” and “excites” them—and above all else, create it in a way that “aligns with your values.” Whether it be product development, fighting incurable disease, or building a health care AI model, young professionals should invest their time in something meaningful. For Ternus, finding work that matters—and caring deeply about doing it well—is ultimately what makes an impact.

“This is your time, this is your moment, so do what Steve Jobs once said, and go out there and make a dent in the universe,” the CEO said.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Dubai International Airport began 2026 with 8.7 million passengers in January, one of its busiest months ever. Weeks later, the airport that ended 2025 as the world’s busiest for international passengers was responding to ballistic missile alerts as the Iran war upended aviation across the Gulf. 

“How many CEOs have you interviewed that have been subjected to direct ballistic attack from an enemy to your infrastructure?” Dubai Airports CEO Paul Griffiths asked Fortune. He said DXB received roughly 111 separate alerts of ballistic activity during the crisis. 

In the first six months of 2026, Dubai International Airport handled 31.5 million passengers, down 31.3% from the same period last year. Aircraft movements fell 32.1% to 150,600, while cargo volumes dropped 28.7% to 751,340 tons. That followed a record 95.2 million passengers in 2025, the highest annual international traffic ever recorded by an airport. 

But Dubai Airports says the recovery is now gathering pace, with monthly passenger traffic rising from 3.5 million in April to 4.5 million in May and 5 million in June. Griffiths said overall traffic is now back to about 80% of last year’s level, while Emirates and flydubai are operating at roughly 90% of their 2025 levels. 

“My confidence level is not misplaced that we should be back to 100% of our operation by about the end of the year,” he said, referring to international airlines resuming services.  

Dubai Airports expects full-year traffic to finish “in the 70 millions”well below last year’s recordand putting its previous ambition of crossing 100 million passengers this year out of reach. 

The war has created an opening for competitors; previously, Gulf carriers accounted for roughly a third of traffic between Europe and Asia and about half of travel between Europe and Australia. By April, Middle Eastern transfer traffic on Asia-Western Europe routes had fallen 47% year over year, according to Alton Aviation Consultancy.  

Travelers chose alternative hubs including Seoul, Singapore, Hong Kong and Istanbul. Incheon International Airport said its transfer traffic rose 18% in the first half, helping it surpass Dubai and Heathrow in preliminary international passenger data. 

Griffiths believes much of that shift will prove temporary. He said resumed services into Dubai are returning with load factors in the 80% to 90% range. At the same time, airlines that moved aircraft onto busy European summer routes are likely to restore Gulf capacity as winter schedules begin. But he questioned why some government travel advisories had yet to catch up with conditions on the ground, arguing that “it is safe” to travel to the UAE. 

Several major foreign carriers have not yet resumed service: British Airways has suspended flights to Dubai until the end of October, whilst Lufthansa and Singapore Airlines are also holding off until late October. 

“My confidence level is not misplaced that we should be back to 100% of our operation by about the end of the year”

Paul Griffiths, CEO, Dubai Airports

The conflict also forced Dubai Airports to improvise. During alerts, passengers were moved to safe areas, and aircraft could be landed quickly when threats emerged. When the airport was temporarily unable to fuel aircraft, Griffiths said it used a “splash and dash” contingency where planes departed Dubai International Airport, landed at Al Maktoum International Airport (an aviation hub located 40 kilometers southwest of Dubai’s city center) to refuel, then continued their journeys. 

Dubai Airports has also used the slowdown in traffic to continue upgrades across its infrastructure, including expanded self-service, biometric systems, smarter operational technology and passenger-flow improvements. Griffiths said the priority is to make the airport more efficient rather than to rethink its strategy in light of a crisis he considers temporary. 

That applies most clearly to Dubai’s $35 billion expansion of Al Maktoum International Airport, which remains on track to begin operations in 2032.  

It is expected to be the world’s largest airport, eventually accommodating 260 million passengers, as well as 12 million tons of cargo. Griffiths said 10 million work hours have been logged on the project over the past 15 months, alongside 17,000 concrete piles and 45 million cubic meters of earth moved. 

He said the lesson from previous shocks—from the financial crisis to the Covid pandemic—is not to confuse short-term disruption with a long-term structural shift. When he asked Dubai Airports’ chairman whether the war changed the emirate’s aviation plans, Griffiths said, “It was the shortest conversation, and the answer was ‘absolutely not’.” 

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Iran’s president said Tuesday his country is ready to return to the ceasefire deal reached with the United States in June if Washington does the same, in conciliatory remarks following the first exchange of fire between the two countries in a month.

Here’s a look at the latest developments in the Iran war and the wider Middle East. Full coverage can be found here.

Iran is willing to go back to ceasefire agreement if US does

Speaking at the Shanghai Cooperation Organization summit in Kyrgyzstan, Iran’s President Masoud Pezeshkian said that “if the U.S. returns to its commitments in the memorandum of understanding, the Islamic Republic of Iran will immediately reciprocate,” Iranian state media reported.

The June memorandum of understanding called for an immediate ceasefire and started a 60-day period for negotiations aimed at reaching a wider peace deal. Iran agreed to clear the Strait of Hormuz of mines and allow ships to pass during the period, and the U.S. agreed to end its naval blockade, lift sanctions, issue waivers for Iranian oil exports and begin work on a reconstruction package for Iran, among other things.

The agreement broke down quickly, and while there has been a lull in fighting, the two sides exchanged fire on the weekend.

While Pezeshkian has long favored a negotiated end to the war, Iran’s most powerful force remains the paramilitary Revolutionary Guard, which is pressing for greater concessions from the U.S., including Iranian control over the Strait of Hormuz and financial compensation for the war. Those conditions would likely be unacceptable to Washington.

Two ships attacked in and around Strait of Hormuz

The British military’s United Kingdom Maritime Trade Operations Centre said it received reports of an attack on a ship in the Strait of Hormuz, and a second report of an incident involving a tanker in waters nearby.

In the first incident, the UKMTO said a tanker was hit by three projectiles Monday on its way out of the Persian Gulf through the strait east of Oman.

The monitoring agency said there were no reports of casualties on the boat or any environmental impact from the attack.

In the second incident, the UKMTO said it had received a report “involving a tanker and military forces” on Monday off the coast of Oman, east of the Strait of Hormuz.

Ambrey, a UK-based maritime risk and response company, also said that the vessel had reportedly been stopped and remained adrift. There were no reports of casualties.

There was no immediate claim of responsibility for the attacks, but Iran has fired regularly on ships in the Strait of Hormuz as it continues to restrict traffic through the key waterway. The U.S. has also fired on ships as it maintains its blockade of Iranian ports.

Iraq completes investigation into suspected Islamic State group members

Iraq’s Supreme Judicial Council said Tuesday it had completed investigations into some 5,704 suspected Islamic State group members who were transferred to Iraq from Syria early this year. Hundreds would be released and the others sent to trial, the council said.

The detainees were transferred from detention centers previously run by the Kurdish-led Syrian Democratic Forces amid fears that fighting that broke out between the SDF and government forces and an ensuing power vacuum in some areas would allow militants to flee.

The detainees include people from 67 nationalities, including 3,497 Syrians and 474 Iraqis. Some were European nationals.

The council said investigations failed to establish sufficient evidence in some cases, leading to the release and handover of a Finnish, an American and seven Iraqi detainees to their home countries.

Their names were not released.

UN organization warns about dire hunger crisis in Yemen

The United Nations food agency warned Tuesday that further escalation of the conflict in Yemen could deepen the country’s already dire hunger crisis unless international actors intervene.

Increases in global food prices are having an impact on “what is already one of the biggest humanitarian crises in the world,” Carl Skau, the Acting Executive Director of the World Food Program, told The Associated Press.

Skau said he had met with families in displacement camps in southern Yemen who relied heavily on monthly cash assistance and food aid. Without that support, he said, some families are now eating just one meal a day, while children are beginning to show signs of malnutrition.

Japan approves emergency fund for higher gas prices

Japan’s Cabinet on Tuesday approved a 616 billion yen ($3.9 billion) emergency fund to address rising gasoline prices and other fallout from the Middle East conflict, Prime Minister Sanae Takaichi said in a social media post.

Most of the money will fund government subsidies to keep retail gasoline prices around 170 yen ($1.06) per liter.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

The United Nations’ food agency said Tuesday it is halving food assistance in the Israeli-occupied West Bank because of severe funding shortages and warned it may be forced to make further cuts in Gaza, where it supports 1.5 million people.

The U.N. World Food Program said it will reduce assistance in the West Bank from 400,000 people to 200,000 beginning this month. In Gaza, it reduced the value of cash assistance by 40% for 375,000 people in July and said additional cuts will be unavoidable unless it secures new funding.

“In Gaza we’ve already had to start reducing the amount of cash that we’re giving to around 75,000 families,” Claire Nevill, WFP spokesperson for the Palestinian territories, told The Associated Press on Tuesday. “Now, the same is happening for WFP’s West Bank operation.”

WFP said it urgently needs an additional $386 million over the next six months to assist an estimated 2 million food-insecure people across Gaza and the West Bank.

“All of this pressure has been building in terms of the economic downturn coupled with increasing settler violence and incursions on land, people sort of losing access to their livestock and agricultural land, which has also now had an impact on people’s food security,” Nevill said.

“So just as the situation is getting worse and we should be scaling up to meet these needs, we’re unfortunately having to scale back and effectively halve the amount of people that we can reach because of the lack of funding,” she added.

The world’s leading authority on food insecurity, the Integrated Food Security Phase Classification, said in July the situation in Gaza had improved since famine was declared in parts of the Palestinian territory last year, but warned conditions were still at crisis levels.

Also in July, the WFP cautioned that funding shortages and what it described as donor fatigue could force deeper reductions in Gaza and said it needed more than $420 million to sustain operations in Gaza and the West Bank through the end of the year.

In the West Bank, WFP estimated in its Tuesday report that 900,000 people are food insecure. The agency said increased violence, displacement and economic deterioration have disrupted livelihoods and deepened hunger, while food needs have more than doubled since 2023.

“Families who were once thriving and earning a living from their land are now unable to afford enough food,” Shaun Hughes, WFP’s country director, said in a statement Tuesday. He added the agency was being forced to prioritize the most vulnerable households while cutting assistance to others despite widespread need.

According to WFP’s latest food security analysis, 76% of households in the West Bank have experienced a significant decline in income. One-third cannot afford a nutritious diet, while food and fuel prices remain among the highest in the Middle East. Rural communities and the southern West Bank are among the hardest hit, the agency said.

Humanitarian conditions also remain severe in Gaza. According to recent U.N. figures from aid agencies, about one in five families ate only one meal a day, while half reported running out of food entirely at least once in the previous month. Aid agencies say cash shortages and soaring food prices have made it increasingly difficult for families to obtain basic necessities.

According to WFP, three-quarters of households in Gaza had difficulty accessing markets in August. The U.N. and its partners recently collected hundreds of pallets of food, fuel and other supplies through the Kerem Shalom crossing and distributed food parcels and wheat flour to more than 600,000 people during the August aid cycle.

Despite a ceasefire signed by Israel and Hamas in October 2025, ongoing hostilities and security restrictions continue to hamper movement and recovery efforts, according to U.N. agencies.

The U.N. says more than 2 million people have been displaced during the war and that much of Gaza’s civilian infrastructure, including homes, hospitals, schools and water facilities, has been damaged or destroyed.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Of the child safety measures agreed to in Meta’s landmark legal settlement, no category contains more detailed requirements than its commitments on age assurance — and for good reason. No matter how well the protections work, they are of little use if Meta can’t tell which users are kids.

Determining which accounts belong to children is also the linchpin of child safety measures that other companies, including Google, TikTok, and Roblox, are ramping up as public and regulatory sentiment turns against them in the U.S. and other countries.

The Meta settlement — with protections the company says could become industry standards — will give the social media giant a year to refine its approach. But the options are limited, and improving age verification technology presents steep challenges, including navigating privacy implications not just for children but for adults who could have to prove they are over 18.

The $18 billion settlement resolves claims from state attorneys general that it hurt children’s mental health by deliberately designing its Instagram and Facebook platforms in ways that hooked young people’s attention. The agreement announced last week with the Menlo Park, California, company involves 48 states plus the District of Columbia and U.S. territories.

Tech companies lean on AI for estimating ages

In the offline world, people use government-issued IDs to prove they are over 18 or 21, whether they want to get into a club or buy cigarettes. While this technically works online too, many people are not comfortable giving a Big Tech company like Meta or Google access to their driver’s license or passport.

Meta accepts IDs to check ages, and promises to delete them within 30 days. Beyond IDs, though, a growing number of tech companies are using artificial intelligence to try to determine users’ ages. This is not true age verification. While AI can estimate a person’s age, often accurately, it can’t verify a person’s birth date.

Last year, Google began using an age-assurance system for YouTube that relies on AI to differentiate between adults and minors based on their watch histories. Meta does the same.

AI age checks use clues to determine how old someone is. On Instagram, this includes “contextual clues” such as posts about birthday celebrations or school, and things like which posts people like, comment or linger on, who their friends are, as well as the times of day they log in. For instance, someone who is offline during school hours would likely be school-aged.

In a blog post last year, Meta said its AI also looks at photos people post for visual cues, including “height or bone structure, to estimate someone’s general age; it does not identify the specific person in the image.”

“By combining these visual insights with our analysis of text and interactions, we can significantly increase the number of underage accounts we identify and remove,” the company added.

Under the settlement, Meta agreed to strengthen its age-checking technology using its own tools, as well as third-party ones, with regular outside audits on how well it is working. The agreement also includes specific goals around false positive rates — that is, minors who are identified as over 18. And if a user is identified as under 13 and kicked off one of its platforms, Meta will check the ages of their friends, too.

Face scans count as age assurance on some sites

Identity verification companies like Yoti and Persona, which work with tech companies like Meta and Roblox, use video selfies people upload to estimate their ages.

The gaming site Roblox, which, unlike social media platforms, allows kids under 13 to sign up, requires players to take a video selfie to estimate their age. Roblox says the videos are deleted after the age check is processed. Users are not required to submit a face scan to use the platform, only if they want to chat with other users.

Some users have reported inaccuracies, and some experts have expressed caution about the reliability of facial age estimation tools, especially for women or certain racial or ethnic groups. But Matt Kaufman, chief safety officer at Roblox, said last year that for people between about 5 and 25, the system can accurately estimate their age within one or two years.

Some websites and social media companies such as Meta have argued that age verification should be done by app store owners, such as Apple and Google, and not individual platforms. This would mean that app stores would have to verify their users’ ages before they allow them to download apps. Unsurprisingly, Apple and Google disagree.

“Billed as ‘simple’ by its backers, including Meta, this proposal fails to cover desktop computers or other devices that are commonly shared within families. It also could be ineffective against pre-installed apps,” Google said in a blog post last year.

Privacy concerns remain an obstacle

Age checks are meant to keep kids out of online spaces that are not safe or appropriate for them, whether that’s social media or adult websites. But critics of online age verification see a worrisome trend toward a less secure, less private and less free internet, where people can be denied access not just to pornography but news, health information and the ability to speak openly and anonymously.

What’s considered harmful to minors can be subjective, and this is where experts believe laws requiring age verification can run afoul of the First Amendment. The question could lead to people being required to verify their ages to access anything, from Netflix to a neighborhood blog.

The digital rights group Electronic Frontier Foundation has been warning for years about “age-gating the internet.”

“(No) matter the method, every system demands users hand over sensitive and immutable personal information that links their offline identity to their online activity,” EFF writes in a blog post. “Once that valuable data is collected, it can easily be leaked, hacked, or misused.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

President Trump’s plan for the U.S. to own majority control of Venezuelan oilfields harkens back to a century-old era of colonialism and backroom dealmaking with Venezuelan oilmen and politicians, energy and geopolitical analysts said.

While a revitalization of Venezuela’s dilapidated oil industry may be heading in the right direction, the process will require huge infusions of new investment. It will occur on a timeline that extends far beyond the administrations of Trump and interim Venezuela President Delcy Rodriguez—meaning any success will take years to come to fruition.

“If the U.S. scheme in Venezuela sounds colonial, that’s because it is,” said Gregory Brew, senior energy analyst with the Eurasia Group. “This is the Trump administration trying to increase U.S. revenue from Venezuelan oil production. It’s extremely unusual. It’s probably unprecedented in the history of the international oil industry.”

The closest comparison, he said, is over 50 years ago when the U.K. owned a majority of BP (previously the Anglo-Persian Oil Company) and developed oil resources in Iran and Iraq.

Trump announced the deal over the weekend, calling it the “biggest oil deal in world history.” The U.S. would control more than 65 billion barrels of proven oil reserves in 17 oilfields in Venezuela.

Although most of the details remain unknown publicly, the agreement would operate through the second-largest, private Venezuelan oil producer, North American Blue Energy Partners (NABEP). The U.S. Department of Defense would own a 55% stake in the oil production. Chevron, which never left Venezuela after the expropriation of oil assets that caused other U.S. companies to flee almost 20 years ago, is the top private producer.

“The deal more than doubles American oil reserves, dramatically increases domestic supply, and is projected to substantially lower gas prices for all Americans long into the future,” the White House said in a statement.

The White House and NABEP did not respond to requests for interviews and additional comment.

V

Vague on details

NABEP is controlled by the Venezuelan businessman Alejandro Betancourt López and his family. López’s bank accounts have been under investigation in Switzerland for years, but he has not been formally charged with any crimes. López also has fostered close relationships with both the Trump and Rodriguez administrations.

“On one hand, this individual seems to be in a good position to facilitate this kind of deal,” Brew told Fortune. “But, from a certain angle, this looks like an insider deal to profit businessmen who are close to Delcy and who are also close to Trump and his inner circle.”

In a statement, Rodriguez said the deal would involve an investment of more than $100 billion—although it’s unclear where the funds would come from—and generate more than $209 billion in tax revenues for Venezuela.

Regardless, the deal promises to be a “political lightning rod” in Washington and Caracas since it pertains to Venezuela giving up a large stake of its natural resources to a country that forcibly removed its former leader, Nicolás Maduro, at the beginning of the year, said Matt Reed, vice president of geopolitical and energy consultancy Foreign Reports.

“It may be years before it meaningfully boosts Venezuelan production and it will likely have to survive a change of administration in both countries,” Reed said.

“I’m more curious to see whether Venezuela can attract top-tier U.S. companies, besides Chevron, which benefits from a longstanding relationship there,” Reed added. “U.S. firms have the capital and technology Venezuela needs to reach its potential, but they also have reservations given the history and current circumstances. Those companies don’t need sweetheart deals or financial aid from the Pentagon; they just need certainty.”

Some small U.S. producers, such as Hunt Oil, are investing in Venezuela, but the other biggest players, such as ExxonMobil and ConocoPhillips, have remained reluctant, although they’re investigating the possibilities.

S

Strategic reserves

Venezuelan oil production has risen this year from just under 1 million barrels per day to more than 1.2 million barrels daily, an increase of almost 250,000 barrels each day. Largely led by Chevron, that increase has come primarily by optimizing existing oil wells, and not by bringing in new drilling rigs and teams.

Venezuela’s oil industry last churned out more than 3 million barrels daily at the beginning of this century and was still above 2 million barrels a day a decade ago.

Trump quickly pledged to use Venezuelan oil to replenish the U.S. Strategic Petroleum Reserve, which was just depleted to 44-year lows amid the ongoing war in Iran.

“One of the things I am going to do with the Venezuelan oil is fill up the [SPR] which, because of Sleepy Joe Biden, has been virtually emptied,” Trump said on social media.

But using Venezuelan oil to fill the SPR is a virtual impossibility, experts said. That’s because the extra heavy grades of Venezuelan crude oil are incompatible with the underground salt caverns storage facilities in Texas and Louisiana that comprise the SPR.

“We don’t put heavy sour crude into the SPR. So the idea of refilling the SPR from Venezuela doesn’t work,” said Jim Wicklund, a veteran oil analyst and managing director at the PPHB energy investment firm.

The SPR is now drained down to 286 million barrels, which is its lowest point since 1982 when it was still being filled up during its infancy. The SPR was at 415 million barrels when the Iran war began, having been depleted of nearly 130 million barrels in five months.

Falling below 300 million barrels already makes the salt caverns less structurally sound, but falling below 252.4 million barrels would trigger a federal law that only allows additional drawdowns under severe national security declarations.

To Trump’s point about President Biden though, the SPR was at 638 million barrels when Biden took office in 2021 and was depleted heavily in the aftermath of Russia’s invasion of Ukraine when oil prices spiked.

As for the broader deal in Venezuela, Wicklund said he doesn’t see how it accomplishes anything more than potentially giving U.S. companies “a more secure feeling” their assets wouldn’t be expropriated again if the U.S. government is directly invested.

“How the Department of Defense is going to take an equity stake in a foreign oil company is beyond me,” Wicklund said. “I don’t see the point or the benefit or how it practically happens.”

Radhika Bansal, vice president of upstream research for Rystad Energy, said the deal could trigger more “civil unrest” in Venezuela because control of the country’s natural resources is a “very, very sensitive topic” for politicians and the public alike. That said, the fact that the governments have already identified 17 potential projects shows that the oil industry is “moving in the right direction” and could be cause for “cautious optimism.”

But that doesn’t mean this deal will help fill the SPR or lower prices at the pump.

“Even if everything goes as planned, it’s going to be a gradual recovery,” Bansal said.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

The Barroso family rose at dawn and hitched a cart to a borrowed horse to take one of their daughters to school on Tuesday, the first day of classes for many students across Cuba.

As the crises deepen on the island, thieves recently stole the family’s horse and killed it for food, so the Barrosos now rely on a borrowed animal for transportation, because school buses aren’t running.

Fuel, teachers and uniforms remain scarce as the new school year begins.

More than 10,000 schools are expected to open their doors on Tuesday, welcoming an estimated 1.4 million children and more than 135,000 teachers.

The island’s education minister acknowledged ongoing challenges, calling the reopening of schools a “heroic act” for an island whose free and universal education system was long considered a crowning achievement of the 1959 revolution.

But the island’s multiple crises forced the government to end the previous school year in June — one month early. Conditions have only worsened as the island’s power, water and fuel shortages persist amid an ongoing U.S. oil embargo and longtime sanctions.

“This academic year has been the most disastrous one,” said Leanete Barroso, mother of two daughters.

Cuban schools lack teachers

A widespread lack of professors prompted the government to send more than 3,000 teachers from Cuba’s eastern provinces to schools in Havana as teacher coverage fell to 73% across the island. The vacancies are blamed on low salaries and emigration.

Education Minister Naima Trujillo Barreto implored Cubans to help fill the gaps, calling on university students, professionals and even retirees.

“Everyone is invited — anyone who has something to contribute,” she said at a recent news conference. “You might be at home, perhaps retired, and eager to meet a group of children who need lessons in the very subject you know better than anyone else.”

Meanwhile, parents and those in the private sector are expected to help provide school meals, with some schools only reporting a 15-day supply of food, according to state media.

School uniforms also were largely unavailable as the new school year began, meeting only 12% of demand at the primary level.

“No workshop can operate without electricity. Without fuel, we cannot transport fabric from one part of the country to another,” Trujillo Barreto said. “Without money or the ability to import, no fabric comes in either.”

She said that students would be allowed to wear “comfortable clothing” but are still required to tie on their traditional red and blue kerchiefs.

Cuba’s daily grind takes its toll

The day before classes started, Yurima Izaguirre struggled to pull up last year’s school uniform on the youngest of her three children. She grimaced when she saw that her 7-year-old daughter had nearly outgrown the burgundy skirt.

“You’re going to suffocate after a while in the classroom,” Izaguirre said.

No new uniforms were available for her two daughters, but she was able to find two shorts for her son.

A surge in the cost of goods in Cuba meant Izaguirre didn’t have enough money to buy new shoes for her children. For the first time ever, she had to buy school supplies for the three of them. The government was unable to provide them.

Izaguirre worries the most about having to feed her children lunch every day during the school week, another first for parents.

Izaguirre planned to prepare what she and her husband, who works as a lifeguard, could afford: pasta, tuna and mayonnaise: “It has to last.”

Before classes started, Izaguirre told her children that they needed to pack their small, rechargeable fans — each labeled with their name — so they won’t swelter inside the classroom, with temperatures hovering above 90 F (32 C). Like many Cubans, they’re often hit with daily outages lasting more than 20 hours — so they recharge the fans at the home of a kind neighbor.

The longer-than-usual vacation before classes also hit the family hard. Usually, they would visit the beach, a park or the zoo, but with no transportation available given a lack of fuel, Izaguirre said that she would organize picnics beneath a tree near their home.

Her children give her emotional strength, but daily life in Cuba has hit Izaguirre hard: “In my head, I think of doing 1,000 things, but I have to keep going for their sake.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Rising oil prices are raising inflation fears and pushing bond yields higher, weighing down stocks on Wall Street. The S&P 500 fell 0.7% Tuesday. The Dow Jones Industrial Average fell 299 points, or 0.6%, as of 9:33 a.m. Eastern time. The Nasdaq composite fell 1.4%. Much of the pressure being felt by Wall Street is coming from a sell-off in U.S government bonds. The yield on the 10-year Treasury rose. Oil prices continued climbing, putting more pressure on inflation. Markets in Europe were mostly lower and markets in Asia were mixed.

THIS IS A BREAKING NEWS UPDATE. AP’s earlier story follows below.

A heavy sell-off in U.S. government bonds is gaining momentum with anxiety about persistent inflation driving prices lower.

The yield on the two-year Treasury, which closely tracks expectations about Fed moves, rose to 4.35%, on Tuesday. That’s up significantly from about 3.50% at the beginning of 2026. Meanwhile, the yield on the 10-year Treasury rose to 4.79% from 4.73% late Friday. That’s the highest it has been since January 2025.

The bond sell-off is global, with other nations facing the same economic pressures.

Japan’s 10-year bond yield touched 3%, a level it hasn’t hit since 1996. In Germany, the 10-year bond yield also rose to 3%, a 15-year high.

The U.S. debt surpassed $40 trillion two weeks ago, a shocking milestone as defense costs and interest on the burgeoning deficit make up an enormous share of federal spending. But investors are asking governments across the globe to pay more, with the perceived risk rising.

Futures for the S&P 500 index fell 0.6%, while the Dow Jones Industrial Average declined 0.8%. Nasdaq futures tumbled 1%.

The U.S. attacked rocket launchers on an Iranian island on Sunday, saying they were preparing to launch mines into the Strait of Hormuz. Meanwhile, the United Arab Emirates said it intercepted an Iranian drone over its waters on Monday.

September is off to a tepid start, a day after Wall Street closed out August on a downbeat note. The S&P 500, Dow Jones Industrial Average and the Nasdaq composite all declined on Monday. And the losses were broad, with nearly every sector within the benchmark S&P 500 finishing in the red.

Tech stocks are also back in focus, with shares of Nvidia, Microsoft, Alphabet and Micron Technology all declining before the market open.

Oil prices remain high as the Iran war has curtailed traffic in the Strait of Hormuz, which once accounted for about 20% of the world’s oil shipments.

Brent crude gained 1.7% to $92 per barrel on Tuesday, following a 2.7% rise on Monday. U.S. benchmark crude climbed 2.2% to $87.67 per barrel.

The national average for gasoline in August has been above $4 per gallon every day of the month for the first time ever, according to the AAA. It has been the most expensive August at the pump on record, outpacing even the enormous supply chain crunch during the COVID-19 pandemic in 2022.

Higher energy prices have fueled already elevated inflation, which remains well above the Federal Reserve’s 2% target. Many experts are expecting a rate hike soon after Fed Chair Kevin Warsh — in a speech last week at a conference of central bankers — left the door open to it if inflation didn’t improve.

The government’s next report on prices comes out just days before the Fed meeting and could play an outsize role in determining whether the central bank acts.

Also this week, the government issues its latest monthly jobs report, which could also play into the Fed’s decision on interest rates.

Thought the unemployment rate remains low at 4.1%, the job market stalled unexpectedly last month as inflation continues to squeeze businesses and households.

A weakening employment market could create a tough situation for Federal Reserve, which has to balance fighting inflation with supporting full employment. Its main tool for managing that “dual mandate” remains interest rates. Raising its benchmark rate to bring down inflation could further damage the jobs market; cutting its benchmark interest rate to help support employment can exacerbate inflation.

In Europe, Germany’s DAX lost 1%, while the CAC 40 in Paris gave up 0.4% and Britain’s FTSE 100 declined 1%.

Asian markets were mostly lower, with shares in online fast-fashion retailer Shein sliding as much as 10% after they began trading in Hong Kong on Tuesday. They closed 4% lower.

—-

AP Business Writers Michelle Chapman and Matt Ott contributed to this report.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Army Secretary Dan Driscoll is stepping down after just 18 months on the job. The White House announced his departure after Driscoll spoke with President Donald Trump about the current state of the Army, an Army official told The Associated Press on condition of anonymity. He’s only the latest top military leader to leave during the Trump administration.

The U.S. Postal Service is rushing to launch a hastily built, error-riddled computer system that could jeopardize the process of mail voting relied upon by one-third of all voters, according to a whistleblower statement released Tuesday by Democratic Sen. Richard Blumenthal.

And in a blow to congressional authority, a divided Supreme Court is allowing construction to continue on Trump’s $400 million White House ballroom as he flexes unprecedented executive power and remakes the capital in his image.

Here’s the Latest:

Democrats are deeply concerned about the Pentagon’s leadership

Rhode Island Sen. Jack Reed, the ranking Democrat on the Senate Armed Services Committee, said in a statement that Driscoll “worked to transform the Army for the battlefield of the future, and he engaged with Congress candidly and consistently.”

“Secretary Hegseth is cultivating a culture where dissent is punished and competence is secondary to personal allegiance,” said Reed, a former Army officer, while noting that “hundreds of thousands of soldiers are deployed around the world, many in combat zones.”

Rep. Jason Crow, who serves on the House Armed Services Committee and co-chairs the House Army Caucus, said the “Pentagon right now is, in some cases, rudderless,” with so many senior leaders gone. “So, I’m gravely concerned about it,” he said.

Republicans and Democrats alike praise the outgoing Army secretary

Rep. Steve Womack, an Arkansas Republican who had served in the Army National Guard, said on X that Driscoll is “a transformative leader who brought common sense and discipline to the Department of the Army.”

“I had the pleasure of working with him closely, and appreciated how engaged he was from mentoring cadets at West Point to leading the Army at the Pentagon,” Womack wrote. “The Army is better equipped and prepared to tackle emerging threats because of his leadership that strengthened the force while putting our Soldiers first.”

Rep. Jason Crow, a Colorado Democrat and former Army Ranger, told reporters that he worked well with Driscoll despite their policy differences.

“It was actually nice, I will say, having somebody who was smart, that knew the policy, that wanted to do the work, that had a background in these issues,” Crow said, adding that “it’s unfortunate that somebody like that can’t last in this administration.”

Exit follows other Army departures, rollback of drone program

Driscoll’s departure follows the ouster of one of his allies from the Army as well as the rollback of a drone program he had championed. Hegseth had suddenly ousted the service’s top uniformed leader, Gen. Randy George, in April, while the Army’s commander in Europe and Africa, Gen. Christopher Donahue, unexpectedly stepped down in June.

Gen. Christopher LaNeve took George’s place and directed a Europe-based Army unit that was building its own drones to end its efforts.

Driscoll told Congress in April that the military’s civilian leadership gets “to pick the leaders that they want.”

Driscoll was an unlikely negotiator in Ukraine-Russia war

Driscoll is an Iraq war veteran, tech investor and former adviser to Vice President JD Vance, whom Driscoll met at Yale Law School. When nominating Driscoll in 2024, Trump called him “a disruptor and change agent.”

As Army secretary, Driscoll was tapped for the unusual role of key negotiator to try to end the war between Russia and Ukraine. He was also a major force behind trying to cut the red tape for military contractors to quickly develop more drones and counter-drone capabilities as warfare rapidly changes around the world.

No reason was given for the departure of Driscoll, but tensions with Defense Secretary Pete Hegseth have been widely reported.

House lawmakers return to Washington with a stopgap funding bill atop the list of priorities

House lawmakers returned to Washington on Monday with a short to-do list after five weeks back in their home districts. The first order of business is most likely a vote on a stopgap spending bill designed to keep the federal government fully funded through early December, removing the possibility of a shutdown before the midterm elections.

With election season getting underway, votes are also expected on measures designed to amplify the GOP’s messaging strategy going into November, most notably a resolution condemning socialism. Republicans are trying to tie the Democratic Party in general to the democratic socialist candidates who have succeeded this year in running for office.

“The first thing is we’ve got to make sure this government gets funded and we don’t have another Democratic shutdown,” Speaker Mike Johnson told reporters as he prepared to open the chamber for business. The funding vote will most likely take place Tuesday.

▶ Read more

Postal Service is rushing to comply with Trump’s order, with millions of votes at stake

The U.S. Postal Service is poised to launch a hastily built, error-riddled computer system that could jeopardize the process of mail voting relied upon by one-third of all voters, according to a whistleblower statement released Tuesday by Democratic Sen. Richard Blumenthal.

The effort is part of the implementation of Trump’s executive order limiting mail voting and has been temporarily halted by a federal judge. The ruling is being appealed by the administration and the directive may ultimately end up back before the U.S. Supreme Court.

The disclosure from the unidentified whistleblower contends that the Postal Service has been scrambling to try to build a complex system that would normally take a year or more in only three months, sometimes in defiance of the judge’s orders halting work. The goal is to have it ready for use in the midterm elections.

The disclosure contends that, due to the new procedures, a single scanning error in a batch of tens of thousands of ballot envelopes could prevent any from reaching voters. It details a system that election officials have already warned could not be implemented before the first mail ballots begin going out Friday in North Carolina.

▶ Read more

With elections nearing, battleground Republicans still waiting for Trump’s campaign wallet

When Vice President JD Vance stepped on stage in Michigan on Monday, it was MAGA Inc. writing the check for the campaign event. It was a rare bit of spending in a battleground state from a powerful political organization that has mostly been missing in action this year.

With just over two months to go before the midterm elections, President Donald Trump is still sitting on most of his colossal war chest, and he’s been growing his money pile instead of spending it.

Even though the president and his team insist they’ll open their wallet soon, frustrations are growing as Republicans try to maintain control of Congress despite headwinds partially of Trump’s own creation. While the president remains the party’s best asset in turning out its base, he is historically unpopular, with low marks on his handling of the economy and the ongoing war in Iran.

The ticking clock narrows Republicans’ options because time on the airwaves gets more limited and more expensive as the election draws near.

▶ Read more

Supreme Court lets White House continue construction on Trump’s $400 million ballroom

A divided Supreme Court on Monday allowed the White House to continue construction on a $400 million ballroom project as lawsuits play out, a win for Trump as he flexes unprecedented executive power and remakes the capital in his image.

The apparent 5-4 decision replaces a temporary order issued earlier this month, shortly before a court-ordered halt would have gone into effect.

That temporary order was signed by Chief Justice John Roberts, assigned to handle appeals from the capital. But he publicly disagreed with the latest decision, writing a strong dissent that said the project is likely unlawful because it hasn’t been approved by Congress.

“Today’s decision is no victory for the separation of powers,” Roberts wrote. The court’s three liberal-leaning justices agreed.

The majority, on the other hand, found the National Trust for Historic Preservation likely did not have the legal right to challenge the project.

▶ Read more

Army Secretary Dan Driscoll is stepping down after 18 months on the job, White House says

Driscoll’s departure is only the latest of a top military leader during the Trump administration, and no reason was given Monday. He’s a friend of Vice President JD Vance, but tensions with Defense Secretary Pete Hegseth have been widely reported. The U.S. military leadership has seen a series of shakeups, with the Army especially seeing major upheaval.

A U.S. Army official, who was not authorized to comment publicly and spoke on condition of anonymity, said Driscoll spoke with President Donald Trump on the current state of the Army and submitted his resignation. The official did not provide additional details. The Pentagon referred questions to the Army. Driscoll’s resignation was reported earlier Monday by The Wall Street Journal.

▶ Read more

By Ben Finley and Aamer Madhani

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

The sole pipeline that supplies water for millions of Grand Canyon visitors was badly damaged by weekend flash flooding, setting up a tricky repair scenario and upending a yearslong construction project to upgrade the line laid over terrain so rugged helicopters are often required to make basic fixes.

“We anticipate miles of the pipeline being destroyed,” Grand Canyon Deputy Superintendent Brian Drapeaux said, but a full survey of the devastation won’t be completed until Tuesday at the earliest.

From flyovers, park officials estimate that roughly 40% of the pipeline endured damage. The long-term implications to the park’s infrastructure, visitors and year-round residents weren’t immediately clear. The 12.5-mile (20-kilometer) long Transcanyon Waterline has endured dozens of breaks in recent years. A more than $200 million repair and replacement project was well underway when the floods hit.

At least two people died in the floods, and one person remained missing Monday night after rescuers saved some 80 people over the weekend, officials said. The park halted overnight accommodations, and officials said significant water reductions are needed — short showers, turning off the tap while brushing teeth and flushing toilets selectively to protect the limited stored water on the South Rim, where most visitors go.

“They have got to keep law enforcement going, they have to keep rescue operations going, backcountry operations, park admin going, the clinic and the campground,” said longtime river runner and Grand Canyon hiker Tom Martin. “In the past, the park has hauled water” in tanker trucks.

Even routine repairs can be tricky

The pipeline, which was finished in the 1970s, has broken more than 85 times since 2010. It moves water from one side of the canyon, down to its base, across a bridge and back up the other side of the rough landscape. Any effort to fix a break from rock falls or flash floods is time-consuming, precarious and costly, so addressing the latest damage will be complicated.

The pipeline upgrade project, which began in 2023, took more than a decade to design, consider and fund. It involves installing helicopter pads, building water treatment facilities and replacing several miles of pipeline. The project also sought to move the water intake for the pipeline further down the canyon to Bright Angel Creek. That would place it closer to Phantom Ranch, a popular lodge at the base of the canyon. An evaluation of the project in 2018 said key infrastructure for the intake would be outside of areas likely to flood.

Basic decisions were complicated. For example, the original pipe was aluminum, which is lighter and easier to move into the steep canyon but is susceptible to breaking. Engineers picked a flex-steel material to balance weight with durability.

Frequent breaks cause water restrictions

Even routine pipeline breaks force water restrictions. In 2016, a hotel on the canyon’s rim that offers luxury dining and boasts about its history hosting presidents was forced to reduce dishwashing and use paper plates and plastic utensils.

In 1995, a 28-day repair effort on the pipeline required officials to truck in water.

The park had water conservation measures in place even before the latest bout of flooding and damage.

The flooding has forced parts of the park to close and additional flooding was possible Monday, according to the National Park Service.

“Consider changing your plans if you were going to hike, boat, or paddleboard to a slot canyon or normally dry wash. If you do still decide to recreate, check in at a nearby visitor center or ranger station,” a notice on the park website said.

Officials said previously that the repair and replacement project would ensure that the park will be able to meet its water supply needs for the next 50 years or more. The park had roughly 4.4 million visitors last year.

When the original pipeline was nearing completion in the 1960s, more than a foot (0.3 meters) of rain fell, flooding the inner canyon. That rare, historic flood caused 40% of the project to be destroyed, officials said.

___

Associated Press journalist Hannah Schoenbaum contributed from Salt Lake City. The Associated Press receives support from the Walton Family Foundation for coverage of water and environmental policy. The AP is solely responsible for all content. For all of AP’s environmental coverage, visit https://apnews.com/hub/climate-and-environment

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

At 88, Jared Diamond has metal spikes installed in front of his house. He put them there, he told Fortune, to protect against angry anthropologists.

“Half of anthropologists have been very helpful to me,” Diamond cheerily said in a Zoom interview from his office in Los Angeles, “and half resent the fact that I — a gallbladder physiologist who happened to have learned a lot about languages and genetics — am trespassing on their specialty.” He called them a “contentious lot,” adding, “they’ve been really nasty.”

It’s a well-earned position for Diamond, the contrarian who won a Pulitzer for his smash 1997 non-fiction hit Guns, Germs, and Steel. Trained as a physiologist at Cambridge, he built a second career studying birds in New Guinea and a third in history and geography. Now Diamond has published what he calls his final book: Profits, Prophets, Coaches, and Kings, out this fall from Mariner Books. The argument at its center is one he has been circling since childhood — shaped, he said, by growing up in Hitler’s world. He writes in the book’s prologue of his family of Jewish immigrants from Eastern Europe and a wife who lost many Polish relatives to the Holocaust. Do individual leaders actually change the course of events, or are they, as Tolstoy put it, history’s slaves?

Diamond points to how only 20% of his neighboring Angelenos bother to vote for the city’s mayor—evidence of a widespread, unexamined conclusion that leaders don’t, in fact, matter. Boards of directors, on the other hand, pay chief executives hundreds of millions of dollars a year on the belief that they matter very much.

He points to UCLA again, which has spent over $150 million buying out coaches’ contracts since the legendary John Wooden days. (The book has a chapter on the strange alchemy of the Wizard of Westwood.) “I could have told the chancellor [not to do that],” Diamond said, “but they never asked me, that the losing records of every one of our basketball coaches are what you expect from throwing dice.”

The industry decides

Diamond frames his book as a rejection of both poles of a century-old historical debate. On one side fits Thomas Carlyle’s “Great Man theory,” the idea that history is essentially the biographies of major players. On the other is Tolstoy’s view, dramatized in War and Peace, that leaders are essentially puppets of forces too large and diffuse to control.

For business leaders, Diamond’s analysis leans on what he calls “natural experiments,” a method borrowed from epidemiology and field biology: when researchers can’t ethically run controlled trials, they look for situations where nature runs them anyway. His favorite example: John Snow’s removal of the handle from London’s Broad Street pump in 1854, proving cholera was waterborne years before anyone understood germ theory.

Diamond looks at CEOs, political leaders, and sports coaches, comparing what happens when they die, get fired, get sick, or get replaced, and comparing those situations with cases where they don’t.

Diamond frames his book as a rejection of both poles of a century-old historical debate. On one side fits Thomas Carlyle’s “Great Man theory,” the idea that history is essentially the biographies of major players. On the other is Tolstoy’s view, dramatized in War and Peace, that leaders are essentially puppets of forces too large and diffuse to control.

The point of his new book, Diamond told Fortune, is figuring out the contours of his qualified yes answer: leaders matter, but only in the presence of other identifiable, sometimes measurable conditions. His studies attributed somewhere between 6% and 29% of the variation in company earnings to individual CEOs, but also that the industry and particular company are important variables.

Diamond said he has a friend who designs T-shirts for teenagers. “If you foresee what the teenagers will buy in the next two weeks, you make great sales,” he said. “My friend is very rich as a result. He deserves every million dollars he earns.” The CEO of a public utility, on the other hand, can barely decide anything for the business because of strict regulation. “You should not be paying a large salary to a CEO of a public utility company when they don’t have much effect, and there are 49 other people who could do an equally good job.”

He ranks CEO influence highest in computers, perfume and cosmetics, movies, toys and restaurants, because consumer taste shifts faster in those industries than capital structure. He ranks it lowest in utilities, steel, shipbuilding and railways. But what really surprised him is what he found out about politics.

Born at the right time

Diamond assembled a table of 22 major 20th-century politicians — deliberately excluding Donald Trump and other recent leaders because “we can’t yet pass judgment” — and asked one question: how many stepped down voluntarily?

Only two: Lee Kuan Yew of Singapore and Nelson Mandela.

“Once you become a leading politician,” he said, “and you’ve developed the conclusion that ‘I can make a difference,’ once you’ve drawn that conclusion, you’re not going to change your mind.” He cited Winston Churchill’s refusal to step down late in his career, despite mediocre ratings by the public and by historians, as a key example.

Going further back in history, Diamond found that timing can be inseparable from what we call successful leadership. Genghis Khan, for instance, benefited from something we only learned about in the past decade, as researchers studying tree rings found that he lived through the wettest decades on the Mongolian steppe in 2,000 years. That produced the grass, livestock and horses that made his conquests possible.

“If Genghis Khan had been born 20 years later and 200 miles away,” he said in very Diamondesque fashion, “we wouldn’t know anything about him.”

Some leaders seize opportunity when it arises, he said, like Bill Gates, who told Paul Allen that the timing wasn’t ripe for personal computing until he saw the January 1975 cover of Popular Electronics featuring the new Intel 8080 chip. “He said, ‘This is the time, let’s go fast, because other people will do it.’” In this way, he said, Gates was similar to Charles de Gaulle, who “twice engineered the opportunity for himself to lead France” — and twice stepped away once conditions turned unfavorable.

In this light, Mark Zuckerberg was more like Genghis Khan, arguing that social media existed before and after him. “He was there at the right time, because there had been changes in the technology that made social media much more feasible under Mark Zuckerberg. But he didn’t know this, so he was like Genghis Khan. He was at the right place at the right time, but he didn’t know it.”

Carl Sagan, Diamond notes, offers a parallel to his own career — a physicist and astronomer whose television success made him the target of a rare deelection attempt at the National Academy of Sciences. Diamond said the criticism was undeserved, but came from a place of, “Oh, he’s got a pretty face and he appears on television.”

Diamond said he has drawn the same fire for the same reasons: methods that overstep, conclusions that synthesize where specialists expect excavation. He said he’s still traveling regularly to New Guinea, where he has been conducting fieldwork since 1964, and expects to write up 62 years of biological research before, as he put it, “that knowledge will die with me.”

As for what he learned about sports working on this book, Diamond let himself get a little sentimental, noting in his New England accent that he grew up in Boston and so “the two things that I most hope for are that the Yankees do badly and that the Red Sox do well.” (The author is also from Massachusetts but the western end, Amherst.) Diamond continued: “Two things that increased my faith in God were that Ted Williams’ last bat, he hit a home run.” The other was the famous comeback against the Yankees in 2004, when the Red Sox won four straight playoff games after getting into a 3-0 hole. “Those two things help me believe that there is a God who looks out on the affairs of humans and rewards virtue and punishes evil.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Good morning. GE Vernova is hiring a CFO who helped take Rivian public in the biggest U.S. IPO of 2021, putting Claire McDonough at the center of the EV maker’s shift from a closely held startup to a company answering to public-market investors. Her move brings that experience to the energy tech company and puts new attention on the finance team she leaves behind at Rivian.

McDonough will join GE Vernova in November and become CFO on Jan. 1, succeeding Kenneth Parks, who is retiring. Derek Mulvey, Rivian’s VP of finance, is expected to serve as interim CFO after McDonough leaves.

Rivian shares fell more than 6% intraday Friday after the announcement, while GE Vernova shares declined about 3%. Investors and analysts pointed to Rivian’s lack of a clear long-term successor as one factor weighing on its shares.

Cullen Rogers, portfolio manager of the Wedbush ReturnOnLeadership U.S. Large-Cap ETF, told me Rivian’s leadership pipeline helps explain the sharper reaction. “Markets don’t just react to who’s leaving; they react to how visible the succession plan is,” Rogers said.

GE Vernova’s announcement offers a clearer handoff, with Parks staying on as an advisor after McDonough arrives. Rivian has yet to name a permanent successor.

McDonough joined Rivian as CFO in January 2021, months before its $13.7 billion IPO that November. She also helped negotiate Rivian’s technology joint venture with Volkswagen, which agreed to invest up to $5.8 billion.

Rogers said that experience should translate to GE Vernova. “That’s a transferable skill set, not a personal one,” he said.

At Rivian, McDonough’s departure will test whether the EV maker has built a finance team that can carry on without her. “The next two quarters are the real test that will tell whether strong leadership was distributed across the team or concentrated in one office,” Rogers said.

Morningstar senior equity analyst Seth Goldstein expects Rivian to stay on its current financial course. The company is working toward profitability and positive free cash flow as it ramps up production of its lower-priced electric SUV, he said. Its finance team will also manage Rivian’s cash and may raise more capital if needed. Morningstar has raised its fair value estimate for Rivian to $22 a share from $20.

Goldstein expects Rivian’s capital allocation strategy to remain unchanged and points to its profitability guidance and timeline for reaching positive operating cash flow as key measures.

McDonough also leaves Rivian with a record of cost discipline. “During her time at Rivian, McDonough proved to be a finance leader with a focus on cost discipline,” Goldstein said. “I view this as an asset at any company.”

Sheryl Estrada
Sheryl.Estrada@fortune.com

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

In 2005, two years before the iPhone came out, I was standing in a coffee line on my morning commute, watching everyone ahead of me go through the motions: order, wait, pay, wait some more. I thought there had to be a faster, better way to get my coffee. So I built one: the first text-message order for restaurants, years before smartphones made “ordering ahead” a category.

Over 20 years later, I’m the founder and CEO of Olo, the restaurant commerce platform behind 800-plus restaurant brands across 90,000-plus locations, including Shake Shack, Waffle House, Cracker Barrel, Five Guys, and Panda Express. I’ve spent two decades watching the restaurant industry innovate and iterate the ordering experience, and I’m confident now is the time for a completely new direction.

Here’s the problem restaurants and their guests have lived with since digital ordering went mainstream: they’ve only ever had two choices, and both come with a catch.

The first choice is third-party marketplaces, broadly known by consumers as delivery apps. When COVID hit and digital ordering became a necessity overnight, these platforms were the fastest way for restaurants to keep serving guests. And they worked. But the commissions these platforms charge, up to 30% per order, didn’t disappear after the pandemic. Today, 82% of brands are marking up menu prices on these platforms just to offset the fees, and more than half of those markups run 20% to 30%. That’s a tough ask for guests already stretched by rising costs, and a worse deal for restaurants: every order placed on a marketplace belongs to a guest the restaurant has to pay to reach again because it never owned that guest’s data in the first place. I call that a rented guest. Rent keeps the lights on, but it doesn’t build equity.

The second choice is first-party ordering, a restaurant’s own app or website. It solves the ownership problem, but it creates a scale problem. Acquiring a new guest this way can cost a restaurant up to $100, and even guests who download the app rarely open it again. Ask yourself how many restaurant apps you actually keep on your phone. Most people don’t, and they revert to the marketplace instead.

For 20 years, that’s been the whole menu: rent your reach from a third party or build ownership alone as a first party. But I don’t think the choice has to be binary anymore. What sits between first and third? Second.

In other industries, second party already means something real: brands sharing infrastructure so they can serve customers better without giving up what’s theirs, the way Shopify’s Shop App works across thousands of independent retailers. Restaurants don’t have an equivalent yet, and they need one urgently. The next era of ordering will be defined by this equivalent, allowing guests – and their AI assistants – the ability to order from a centralized location from the brands they choose to follow, with personalized offers, saved checkout data, and no markups or ads stretching their wallets or distracting from what they really want. 

A second-party network changes the economics for everyone. For restaurants, it means marketplace-level reach without the commission and without giving up the guest relationship. For guests, it means a seamless experience that finally feels like the restaurant knows them. I follow a vegan diet, and today, ordering from a new brand for the first time usually means getting the same generic promotions as everyone else, with the occasional steakhouse special included. It’s a small reminder the brand has no idea who I am. In a network where preferences travel with the guest, that changes immediately. The brand can skip the beef and start with something relevant just for me on day one.

I built the first text order because I was tired of waiting in a line that didn’t need to exist. Twenty years later, restaurants are stuck in a different kind of line, choosing between two models with their own unique drawbacks because no one built the third option yet. The brands willing to build it together, starting now, will be the ones still standing in the next era of ordering.

The opinions expressed in Fortune.com commentary pieces are solely the views of their authors and do not necessarily reflect the opinions and beliefs of Fortune.

Topics

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Kalshi users as young as 18 are now responsible for billions of dollars worth of trading activity on sports that critics say amounts to a loophole in gambling laws.

A recent analysis by CNN showed so far this year users between the ages of 18 and 21 traded an estimated $5.4 billion on Kalshi, the largest prediction market in the U.S. Of that amount, $3.9 billion was in sports-related events.

Sports gambling in most states is off limits for anyone under 21. And yet Kalshi allows anyone 18 years old and older to put money into it because it is regulated as a financial market under the jurisdiction of the Commodity Futures Trading Commission.

This differs from sports gambling organizations, which are regulated at the state level. In fact, New York State is suing to shut down Kalshi, alleging it’s operating an unlicensed gambling platform. 

Kalshi did not immediately respond to a request for comment. A spokesperson for Kalshi told CNN that users between the ages of 18 and 21 make up just 3.14% of its overall trading volume.

On Kalshi, users can buy an event contract with a yes or no outcome based on a real world event. Kalshi’s exchange will then match the user to another user taking the opposite position, and would pay only the person who chose the correct outcome.

For sports, this means contracts can be made on anything from whether a certain team will win a game or whether a team will make it to the championship. Kalshi also includes predictions on other events outside of sports such as midterm election results or whether 2026 will be the hottest year ever.

Kalshi has previously denied that its prediction markets constitute gambling, because users taking a position with an event contract are always countered by another user, not the platform itself, as would be the case with a sportsbook. 

But the contracts resemble bets. Users can also build “combos” that act similarly to a “parlay” bet where users can wager on the outcome of multiple events and will get paid only if all parts of the bet come true.

Les Bernal, the national director of Stop Predatory Gambling, told Fortune it’s worrying that young people are able to access this kind of platform at such a young age, when they are highly impressionable. 

“They try to create this experience, it’s like a video game type experience, in pushing this on young people,” Bernal said of prediction markets like Kalshi. “Meanwhile, we know from the science that this is an extremely addictive product that causes incredible harm.”

A peer-reviewed paper published in Science in April warned that the design of commercial prediction markets could create risks of behavioral addiction.

“Continuous novelty and infinite event streams eliminate stopping points, possibly weakening prefrontal inhibitory control. This architecture maximizes trading volume rather than forecasting accuracy, potentially driving neuroadaptation toward compulsive use in vulnerable individuals as rewards fade…” the research journal said.

Kalshi, for its part, has previously argued that it should not be regulated in the same way as sports betting or online casinos because it merely connects users on opposite sides of a financial transaction. 

“Kalshi does not set odds, does not act as a counterparty, and does not profit from customer losses. It operates a neutral, two-sided marketplace where standardized, fully collateralized contracts are traded at prices determined by supply and demand,” the company wrote in testimony earlier this year when it opposed a Connecticut bill that would have raised the minimum age for using prediction markets to 21. The bill did not pass.

So far, Kalshi and other prediction markets have been able to avoid some state rules that apply to sports gambling operations, yet that might be changing. 

A coalition of 44 state attorneys general argued in a letter last month that the CFTC’s proposed prediction-market rules exceed its authority and intrude on states’ traditional power to regulate sports gambling.

And on Friday, a ruling by the 9th U.S. Circuit Court of Appeals allowed Nevada’s government to impose state law against Kalshi’s sports-related event contracts, effectively blocking Kalshi from offering them in Nevada unless it complies with state gaming law.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

As of 8 a.m. Eastern Time today, oil is trading at $94.11 per barrel, based on the Brent benchmark we’ll explain in a bit. That’s $1.08 above yesterday morning’s level and about $25.40 higher than where it stood a year ago.

Oil price per barrel % Change
Price of oil yesterday $93.03 +1.16%
Price of oil 1 month ago $94.93 -0.86%
Price of oil 1 year ago $68.72 +36.94%

Will oil prices go up?

No one can say for sure where oil prices will go next. Many forces shape the market—but at the core, it’s still about supply and demand. When risks like a potential recession or war ramp up, oil prices can change direction quickly.

How oil prices translate to gas pump prices

When you buy gas at the pump, you’re covering more than the cost of crude oil. You’re also paying for every step in the process, including refineries, wholesalers, taxes, and the markup your local gas station adds.

Even so, crude oil has the biggest influence on what you pay, often making up more than half the cost per gallon. When oil prices jump, gas prices usually climb right along with them. But when oil falls, gas prices often slip much more slowly—a pattern sometimes called “rockets and feathers.”

The role of the U.S. Strategic Petroleum Reserve

If an emergency hits, the U.S. keeps a backup supply of crude oil called the Strategic Petroleum Reserve. It’s mainly there to protect energy security during crises, such as sanctions, catastrophic storm damage, even war. It can also help cushion the blow when supply shocks send prices soaring.

It’s not meant to solve long-term problems. Instead, it provides quick relief for consumers and helps keep vital parts of the economy moving, like essential industries, emergency services, and public transit.

How oil and natural gas prices are linked

Oil and natural gas are two of the world’s primary energy sources. A big change in oil prices can affect natural gas by extension. For example, if oil prices increase, some industries may swap natural gas for some segments of their operations where possible, which which increases demand for natural gas.

Historical performance of oil

When looking at how oil performs, two main benchmarks stand out:

  • Brent crude oil is the main global oil benchmark.
  • West Texas Intermediate (WTI) is the main benchmark of North America.

Of the two, Brent gives a better picture of global oil performance because it prices a large share of the world’s traded crude. It’s also the go-to for tracking oil’s historical trends. In fact, even the U.S. Energy Information Administration now relies on Brent as its primary reference in its Annual Energy Outlook.

If you look at the Brent benchmark over several decades, oil has been far from stable. It has experienced sharp rises tied to wars and supply cuts, along with steep drops linked to global recessions and oversupply (called a “glut”). For example:

  • The early 1970s delivered the first major oil shock when the Middle East slashed exports and placed an embargo on the U.S. and others during the Yom Kippur War.
  • Prices fell in the mid-1980s due to lower demand and an influx of non-OPEC oil producers joining the market.
  • Prices surged again in 2008 as global demand grew, but then crashed alongside the global financial crisis.
  • During the 2020 COVID lockdown, oil demand plummeted like never before—pushing prices below $20 per barrel.

To sum up, oil’s historical performance has been anything but smooth. Again, it’s heavily influenced by wars, recessions, OPEC whims, shifting energy policies, and much more.

Energy coverage from Fortune

Looking to stay up-to-date regarding the latest energy developments? Check out our recent coverage:

Frequently asked questions

How is the current price of oil per barrel actually determined?

The current price of oil per barrel depends largely on supply and demand, including news about potential future supply and demand (geopolitics, decisions made by OPEC+, etc.). In the U.S., prices also move based on how friendly an administration is to drilling, as it can affect future supply. For example, 2025 saw the Trump administration move to reopen more than 1.5 million acres in the Coastal Plain of the Arctic National Wildlife Refuge for oil and gas leasing, reversing the Biden administration’s policy of limiting oil drilling in the Arctic.

How often does the price of oil change during the day?

The price of oil updates constantly when the “futures” markets are open. A futures market is effectively an auction where people agree to buy or sell oil in the future. As long as people and companies are trading contracts, the oil price is changing.

How does U.S. shale oil production affect the current price of oil?

In short, shale is rock that contains oil and natural gas. Think of shale as energy yet to be tapped. The more shale the U.S. accesses, the more energy we’ll have—and the more easily oil prices can keep from spiking as much thanks to a greater supply.

How does the current price of oil impact inflation and the broader economy?

When oil is expensive, it tends to make everyday items cost more. This can be related to energy (your heating, gas utilities, etc.), but it’s also due to the logistics involved with making those items accessible to you. Shipping, for example, can affect the price of things at the grocery store, as it’s more expensive to get those products from warehouses and farms onto the shelf.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Good morning. On Fortune’s radar today:

  • Venezuela oil pact ‘looks like an insider deal.’
  • Iran again offers Trump the deal he wants but the president wants to ‘hit them hard’ instead.
  • Markets: It’s messy out there.
  • You’re not still using a 60:40 stock-bonds portfolio, are you?
  • The one number Fed Chair Warsh is actually watching.
  • There’s a global sardine crisis—and prices are through the roof.

➡️ Did someone forward you this email? If you would like to receive this information directly, every morning before the markets open in New York, sign up here.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

The Nordic countries and the Benelux bloc follow distinct corporate governance models. In Sweden, Norway, Denmark, and Finland, employees have the right to board representation once a company grows beyond a certain size—though the thresholds vary by country.  

Despite their small size, these economies rank among the world’s most stable and have produced global powerhouses, including Novo Nordisk, Spotify, and Ericsson. Large Dutch companies, meanwhile, legally separate management from oversight, requiring a non-executive supervisory board to hold the executive team accountable.  

“These are high-trust cultures built on collaboration and consensus,” says Esha Mendiratta, an associate professor at Vlerick Business School in Belgium. “Hierarchies stay flat, and major decisions wait until every stakeholder has weighed in.”  

If any region should feel secure in its choice of CEO, it’s these. A new survey suggests otherwise.  

Heidrick & Struggles’ Route to the Top report, based on a 2026 poll of 1,033 CEOs and directors worldwide found that nearly four in ten European respondents doubt their CEO’s strengths match what their company will need over the next two to three years. In the Nordics and Benelux, that number jumps to half. 

Tenure may be the culprit 

There are several reasons why these consensus-driven systems might be experiencing, or simply reporting, this heightened mismatch.  

One possible explanation is how long chief executives stay in the job. “CEOs in the Nordics and Benelux stay in their roles far longer than in other markets,” says Jenni Hibbert, who leads Heidrick & Struggles’ Europea and Africa business. The average tenure for Belgian CEOs is nine years, the second longest in Europe, according to the firm’s data. In Sweden and Norway it’s seven years, while Finnish CEOs have the shortest average tenure, at two and a half years.  

Data analyzed by Spencer Stuart reveals a similar trend. Norway had the lowest CEO turnover rate among major European listed companies in 2025, with no new CEO appointments reported. France, in comparison, recorded 18 and Italy, six.  

“In the context of ongoing economic and technological volatility, one might argue appointments aren’t keeping pace with the shift in capabilities needed in the role,” Hibbert says. Today, those running an organization must contend with a multitude of pressures, from geopolitical headwinds and energy-price shocks, to AI disruption. It is little surprise, given these developments, that 90% of executives surveyed by Heidrick & Struggles’ expect their firm strategy and operating model to change in the near future.  

The concern is that business conditions are shifting faster than boards can respond. “Boards are currently struggling to find chief executives who can lead major organizational change,” observes Martin Hartley, group chief commercial officer at emagine, a talent consultancy headquartered in Denmark with a presence across Sweden, Norway, the Netherlands, Belgium, and Luxembourg. “It’s difficult to find candidates who have the ability to combine technology leadership, commercial acumen, and transformation experience.”  

The real danger, Hartley adds, is a boardroom that has lost faith in its CEO and chooses to do nothing about it. “Decisions take longer, transformation loses momentum, and talented people grow frustrated while the organization keeps telling itself the CEO just needs a little bit more time.”  

Insularity may be compounding the problem 

Mendiratta highlights a preference in parts of the Benelux for promoting leaders from within.  “Boards that draw CEOs from the firm’s internal ranks are sometimes less likely to bring in the fresh outside perspective needed to spot problems and shake things up,” she says. 

In the Netherlands, the average time an internal candidate spends at a company before becoming CEO increased from 9.5 years in 2023 to nearly 15 years in 2025, according to Heidrick & Struggles’ data.  

“Insiders are not inherently the wrong choice,” Mendiratta continues. “They typically bring deep firm-specific knowledge, which tends to be an advantage when conditions are relatively stable. However, during periods of turbulence, externally hired CEOs tend to outperform.” 

In the 87 years Heineken has been listed on the stock exchange, the Dutch brewer had never appointed an outsider as chief executive. That changed in January 2026, when Dolf van den Brink announced he would step down. Facing pressure to break from precedent, the board turned to Rafael Oliveira, CEO of JDE Peet’s—someone with no prior experience in the beer industry—to take over in October. 

Demand is growing for leaders with broader perspectives and experience across different markets and cultures, says Mendiratta. She adds: “In today’s landscape of intense geopolitics, with tariffs rising and supply chains moving closer to home, the traditional strategic playbook these CEOs rely on is breaking down, exposing a starker gap between their built-up strengths and what their companies need.” 

Retiring the old playbook 

The gap between current skill sets and future strategic needs reflects a deeper weakness in how boards approach succession planning, according to Hibbert. 

“The pre-anointed candidate is a very passive way of thinking about succession planning, which no longer passes muster,” Hibbert says. This pass-the-baton type of approach is unlikely to work in the current context where the external environment shifts frequently, she continues. “Naming an heir apparent years in advance risks handing the job to someone whose strengths no longer fit the moment or undermining their credibility even if they still do.”  

Mendiratta goes further, arguing boards should generally avoid naming a single successor until just a few months before a handover, keeping several viable candidates in play instead. “Boards should be asking: What type of CEO am I going to need in six months, two years and five years?” Ongoing feedback and reflection on the CEO’s leadership is vital, she adds. 

In Mendiratta’s experience, candidates who are identified early in their career tend to enact less strategic change once they take the top job. Similarly, outgoing CEOs who move into the chairman’s seat can create the same drag, she argues, constraining a successor’s room to reshape the company. 

For Hartley, it’s not a matter of choosing between insiders and outsiders. CEOs should not be assessed in isolation at all, he argues. “A better question is: Do they have the right executive team behind them? Boards are already paying closer attention to the rest of the C-suite, because that wider bench signals who the real succession candidates will be.” 

Candor, not crisis 

The report findings are not necessarily a sign of organizational dysfunction. “It’s possible companies in the Nordics and Benelux are simply more willing to admit misalignment than most,” Hibbert says.  

In these regions, major strategic decisions are structurally required to pass through more hands, whether through employee representatives or supervisory boards. Consensus-driven governance is built to surface disagreement rather than bury it, Hibbert explains, which may translate into more candid survey answers. “If governance quality alone explained confidence in leadership, these boards might report less uncertainty than most, not more.” 

Hartley warns that Nordic niceness must not be mistaken for soft-headednesss. “There’s a temptation for outsiders to see slower, more deliberate decision-making as a flaw, but that’s not the case,” he says. “What I see is more controlled, pragmatic, and rigorous processes that can still move very quickly when needed.” 

Perhaps the most important—and apt—lesson from the report is that even the most deliberate boardrooms, the ones built to weigh every voice and guard against rash decisions, canend up choosing a leader built for the world as it was, not the one now arriving.  

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

When Jasmine Leli, a Buffalo, New York-based Starbucks barista, trialed the company’s new blending powder last month, she was greeted with a plume of dust that irritated her nose and throat for hours afterward.

The powder was introduced last month as part of the Seattle-based coffee chain’s seasonal rollout of blended energy refreshers—a bright-colored, slushy fruit beverage—with the ingredient intended to help keep the drink a consistently-blended texture. (Starbucks has a line of iced refresher beverages available year-round that do not require this blending.) But pouring the contents of the package into storage containers, and then into blenders to prepare the beverage, seemed to always result in residue from the product dispersing everywhere, the barista said.

“You pour the contents of this package into this container, and it’s very airborne,” Leli told Fortune. “It doesn’t matter what you do to try and decrease the effects of it going into the air. It’s like a cloud.”

Last week, Starbucks discontinued the blending powder from its U.S. stores. A spokesperson told Fortune the move was part of a “regular seasonal menu transition.” At this time, Starbucks does not have plans to bring back the blending powder.

“Partners and customers can feel confident in the ingredients we use,” a Starbucks spokesperson said in a statement. “The blending powder used in our Summer Blended Refreshers contained a small amount of food-grade silica, a commonly used food ingredient that helps ingredients mix consistently. It’s safe for use in food and safe for use in our coffeehouses when used according to instructions.”

Baristas’ concerns surrounding the blending powder 

Originally introduced in 2012, Starbucks’ refreshers are the second most popular drink, behind only espresso, according to the company, though it did not give a timeline for when refreshers climbed the ranks. For nearly two years under the helm of CEO Brian Niccol, Starbucks has tweaked its menu and operations as part of its “Back to Starbucks” turnaround plan. The company has since seen a boost in sales, including an 8.1% increase in comparable sales in North America last quarter.

The move also followed weeks of pressure and outward concern from union baristas, who reported having headaches, coughing, sore throats, and hives associated with using the product, according to Starbucks Workers United, which represents about 12,000 baristas. Of more than 600 baristas surveyed by the union, 86% reported that they or a coworker felt sick after using the powder.

Baristas began expressing concern about the product in July shortly after its rollout. One Reddit post noted the food-grade silica in the powder was only FDA-approved for consumption in a drink or mix, not inhalation.

“Although it is safe to consume and technically handle you should not be breathing this powder in and the fact we have to is downright unethical,” the post said.

While crystalline silica, found in rocks and soil, can cause serious lung conditions such as silicosis when inhaled, amorphous silica, a common food additive, is not linked with the disease. The CDC notes some studies where inhaling the substance can cause lung inflammation, but not the same severity as crystalline silica.

Occupational safety expert Dr. Peter Orris issued a report at the request of Starbucks Workers United on the use and potential inhalation of the powder, saying Starbucks should have evaluated the product’s potential impact on workers’ health prior to introducing it in stores, but did not note any immediate dangers associated with it.

“It would appear that outside of sensitization of individuals with specific allergies or Asthma,” Orris wrote, “there are no long term impacts on human health besides the acute irritant symptoms during airborne exposure.”

Leli’s concerns about the blending powder were also around why the company decided to use it in the first place. She said it replaced a syrup used in the refresher drinks, which would sometimes separate if they sat on the counter waiting to be picked up. In 2024, then-CEO Laxman Narasimhan flagged that mobile orders taking too long led to some customers abandoning their drinks instead of picking them up, something Starbucks has addressed through a simplified menu and behind-the-counter optimization. Leli said she never got any customer complaints about the texture of the beverage, and was frustrated that the company would spend money on a particular product instead of addressing wages or workers’ hours.

“There’s plenty of other issues that could have been addressed instead of this one that wasn’t really an issue that needed to be addressed,” she said.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Over the next decade, Asian families will transfer an estimated $10 trillion—nearly twice the size of Germany’s GDP—to the next generation. Yet there’s a nuanced story emerging behind that headline figure. As people live longer, they’re rethinking how preserve their own independence while still passing enough wealth to their children.

Asia is the fastest-aging region in the world. Fifteen percent of its population is over the age of 60; that share is projected to rise to 26% by 2050, according to the United Nations Economic and Social Commission for Asia and the Pacific. Some of the world’s longest-living populations are also in Asia, led by Hong Kong, where life expectancy is 85.5 years. In mainland China, life expectancy rose from around 52 in 1963 to 78 today.

This transformation isn’t just a demographic story. Greater longevity is reshaping how people think about wealth, care, and responsibility within the family.

For generations, many in Asia assumed that wealth would be passed to children, through the funding of education and home ownership, or leaving an eventual inheritance—with children later caring for their parents in old age. But today’s families are planning things differently. Our data shows that adults in Asia are increasingly prioritizing autonomy, health, and financial security over maximizing the inheritance they leave behind.

The next chapter of Asia’s wealth transfer won’t be defined only by the money parents leave behind. It will also be measured by something potentially more valuable: the freedom to support their own longer, more independent lives—and, in turn, relieve their children of the financial and emotional burdens of caregiving.

Manulife’s Asia Care Survey 2026 of 9,000 adults across nine Asia markets, shows how far this shift towards independence has progressed. Men in Asia anticipate funding 14 years of their own care in later life, and women 15 years, at a time when fewer older people than ever are living with their adult children.

The survey’s respondents overwhelmingly value independence and financial freedom over passing down tangible assets to their family. Regionwide, 83% said securing that freedom was more important than leaving their heirs the maximum amount of wealth.

Respondents plan to earmark an average of 68% of their money and assets to fund their own costs, including health care, as they age, leaving the rest to their children. This ratio varied across markets, with those in Taiwan expecting to spend the most on their own health and care at 78%, and those in the Philippines and Indonesia planning to spend the least, both at 60%.

This shift should be welcomed because it reflects a more sustainable response to longer lives. When people plan to fund their own needs later in life, they are ensuring that they don’t become a source of financial strain for the whole family.

This matters particularly in Asia, where the traditional model of care is under pressure. Families are smaller, adult children are more mobile, and older people are less likely to live under the same roof as the next generation. The United Nations Population Fund warns that changing family structures and migration are weakening informal support systems for older people across Asia-Pacific, even as many formal health and social-care systems remain unable to keep pace with demand.

In that context, independence is not individualism. It is resilience, giving older adults greater control over how they age, families greater flexibility, and governments and employers greater capacity to sustain retirement systems.

I

Many in Asia need to rethink how they unlock the full potential of their savings. Pension and household assets in Asia are still heavily weighted toward cash and government bonds, while holdings of shares remain low compared with developed economies, according to the Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development.

That conservatism doesn’t give the returns people need if they hope to live off their assets for longer.

Health planning is also essential. Our survey found that many people haven’t taken the necessary steps to be truly independent. Over 80% said preventive care was essential to a long life, yet only 26% actually went to early health screenings.

Insurers, employers, and governments have a role to play in helping people live independently in their later years, whether that’s advancing prevention and more flexible financial solutions or building stronger public-private partnerships.

Let’s start with prevention. Early screenings can catch illnesses sooner, when treatment is more effective and the chances of full recovery are far higher, yet too many people skip them until it’s too late. Insurers can build wellness checks and preventive screenings into the solutions people already hold, as Manulife has begun to do with early cancer detection. Employers can do the same through workplace health plans. Nobody plans a hospital visit for a disease they don’t know they have.

Financial solutions must evolve, too. Much of the insurance and savings landscape in Asia still operates on the outdated assumption that retirement at 65 lasts just a decade. That simply doesn’t fit a modern saver who may want to work until 70 and expects to manage their own care at 85. We need flexible coverage that stretches and adjusts alongside shifting lifespans to make self-reliance truly affordable.

Governments are tackling these same structural challenges, from updating public pension schemes to launching preventive-health programs.

That creates a clear opportunity for our industry to partner with them.

Examples of what works are already scattered across the region. Japan’s tax-free NISA accounts show how governments can successfully encourage households to move from static savings to active investments. In Hong Kong, the Mandatory Provident Fund—for which Manulife is the largest provider—demonstrates how compulsory schemes can help turn monthly wages into retirement assets. Singapore’s CPF LIFE scheme shows how retirement savings can be converted into income that lasts for life.

We see the same opportunity for public-private partnership in health and later-life care. Hong Kong’s Voluntary Health Insurance Scheme, where Manulife is one of the leading providers, already shows how government incentives and private coverage can work together. Under this model, governments set the mandate and tax treatment, and the private sector builds the products and carries the risk. Applied to health, that could mean tax relief for preventive care delivered through insurance plans, or national screening targets that insurers and employers are enlisted to help meet.

People in Asia plan to live long and stay independent, and they are reorganizing their wealth around that goal. The work of the next decade—for insurers, employers and governments alike—is to build the solutions that make this ambition achievable.

The region that manages this successfully will have done something greater than transfer its wealth. It will have shown the world how to live well with a population that lives longer.

The opinions expressed in Fortune.com commentary pieces are solely the views of their authors and do not necessarily reflect the opinions and beliefs of Fortune.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Return-to-office mandates are just a blip; Setting your alarm before sunrise and standing shoulder-to-shoulder on a packed train, just to sit at a desk for eight hours, is going to be a relic of the past. And it’s going to be extinct much sooner than you probably expect. 

According to Mark Dixon, CEO of IWG, the world’s largest workspace provider, commuting could be extinct within the next 15 years. Gen Alpha will be so used to pulling out their phones and clocking into work from anywhere convenient, that they’ll find the very idea of commuting into an office as ancient as riding a horse to work, or writing by candlelight before electricity existed.

“In the future, you’re going to explain to your kids that you used to commute,” Dixon explained to Fortune, while adding they’ll think it’s “mad stuff” that bosses once asked their workers to “travel 100 miles to sit down and use a computer.” 

“They’ll say, why did you do that? Because they won’t understand that people traveled long distances to use a piece of equipment somewhere else. It’s going to change a lot—the workplace of the future is everywhere. And it’ll be very productive,” he added.

“It’ll be just normal to go on your phone, and say where’s the nearest place to work and you go there and work.” 

The CEO added that most while-collar work is already online and “in the cloud,” so the very idea that your workspace is physical is outdated. And the kids agree. 

Research from IWG and global engineering consultancy Arup has revealed that long daily commutes could be extinct by 2040. 

Currently, the average New Yorker spends around 53 minutes on the train to get to the office, with Londoners experiencing a similar trek. But looking ahead, just a quarter of Gen Alpha say they’ll spend more than 30 minutes traveling to work. The majority think even that’s too long, and expect to have the flexibility to work closer to where they live—if not, at home. 

A staggering 80% of Gen Alpha, the oldest of whom are 16 years old, believe flexible working will be the norm by 2040.

As boomer and Gen X bosses retire, working from home will make a major comeback

Dixon’s not the first to suggest that the pandemic era of working from home is expected to make a roaring comeback in the next decade or two. 

A study from the National Bureau of Economic Research found that Gen Z and millennial bosses are far more likely to let staff work remotely than their older counterparts.

The data, which analysed 8,000 U.S. workers, showed a clear pattern: as CEOs get younger, the number of days they demand their staff work from an office decreases—with those working for a 20-something-year-old chief clocking in from home the most. 

And it’s only a matter of time before they take over and bring their affinity for flexibility with them. The researchers concluded that as older leaders retire, the days of commuting five days a week are likely to fade with them.

Bosses clinging to the office aren’t just outdated—they’re not serious about AI

Interestingly, the National Bureau of Economic Research also found that leaders who embrace remote work are also more likely to adopt new technologies and software-driven approaches to running their teams.

Dixon similarly pointed out that firms that prioritize physical presence over remote, AI-driven work will fall behind.

“Forget about where people are working. Most companies will go by the wayside if they don’t embrace AI,” he told Fortune. “If you look at winners and losers, the winners are the ones that embrace technology—the whole of the technology, which is flexible work, flexible location, and using technology to get more out of your people.”

Brian O’Kelley, the tech founder who sold AppNexus to AT&T for $1.6 billion in 2018 before founding Scope3, echoed that leaders who cling to the old ways of working aren’t serious about embracing AI.

After all, remote firms like his have the top pick of top global talent and can operate around the clock.

“The best companies are going to actually dump their offices to learn to work with non-bodied employees,” O’Kelley told Fortune. “Anybody who has a back-to-office culture is actually hurting themselves.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Sometimes, there’s nothing better than an iced cold beer in the summer heat. Other times, there’s nothing more anxiety-inducing than trying to drink 4,496.33 gallons of beer before the police come knocking on your door.

That’s exactly what’s happening this week after Pabst Blue Ribbon made an announcement asking the public for help finding truckloads of beer stolen from a distribution center in Montclair, Calif.

“STOLEN— 40,000lbs of beer,” it posted on Instagram. “We don’t fault you for wanting to brag to your friends how much PBR you have, we just wish you obtained it the honorable way.”

The company gave the thieves a deadline of “18 days and 44 minutes” to return the beer with “no questions asked,” likely a nod to the brand’s 1844 founding (though the company hasn’t confirmed that). It also said it would offer a reward for information.

Montclair police referred Fortune to a press release detailing an investigation into two separate cargo thefts from the Anheuser-Busch distribution center, both occurring on Aug. 17.

The first happened around 10 a.m., when a $45,000 shipment was picked up and never arrived at its Tucson, Ariz. destination. The second happened about an hour later, when a purported subcontracting company used fraudulent documentation to arrange the pickup of roughly $25,000 in Anheuser-Busch and Pabst Blue Ribbon product.

PBR put the tally at 1,602 cases containing 33,984 cans of beer, including 860 cases of 15-packs of 25-ounce PBR cans and 546 cases of 30-packs of 12-ounce cans, plus 196 cases of nonalcoholic Old Milwaukee. The combined loss, including pallets and packaging, came in at just over 40,000 pounds. Because some online have pointed to Pabst’s social posts as causing some confusion about whether the whole thing was a marketing stunt, Montclair police clarified: “We are working this case, but no trucks were stolen. Just the cargo.”

However, this is far from the biggest beer heist ever: In 2010, thieves broke into a storage facility in Germany’s Rhineland during World Cup celebrations and hauled off 10 truckloads of beer over a long weekend—about 300,000 liters, worth an estimated $3 million.

No questions asked doesn’t mean no legal action taken

Pickups arranged with fake paperwork, sometimes called fictitious or strategic cargo theft, aren’t new. Fortune reported on the tactic a decade ago, when fraud accounted for roughly one in 10 cargo thefts and food was the most attractive target, since it can be resold through unscrupulous distributors with no serial numbers to trace.

The method has only gotten more sophisticated. This summer, organized groups are now using spoofed emails, fake URLs, and “ghost carriers” to hijack freight, prompting an FBI warning about cyber-enabled tactics used to impersonate legitimate businesses.

While a reward (like the one PBR is offering for information on the theft) is a private contract in which the company promises payment, it has no power to stop a district attorney from filing charges. That’s because, ultimately, the decision to prosecute belongs to the state, not to the victim of the crime. Only a prosecutor, or in some cases a federal agency acting with one, can actually grant immunity, and that requires a formal deal as opposed to a social media post.

One of the most famous examples stems from Lady Gaga in 2021, after her two French bulldogs, Koji and Gustav, were stolen at gunpoint and her dog walker was shot. She offered a $500,000 reward “no questions asked” for their return. Jennifer McBride brought the dogs back and sought the money, but Los Angeles prosecutors charged her anyway, and she pleaded no contest to receiving stolen property.

When McBride later sued Gaga for the reward plus $1.5 million in damages, arguing the offer was unconditional, a judge sided with Gaga: McBride’s own admission meant she knew the dogs were stolen, and Gaga’s promise never had the power to protect McBride from the state.

In the case of the PBR heist, the beer has yet to turn up. Pabst’s most recent Instagram update read simply: “Beer is getting warmer, trail is getting colder. Clock’s still ticking.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

The Labor Department’s unemployment rate has been declining in recent months, reversing last year’s uptick, but an alternate measure tells a different story.

In July, the official rate dipped to 4.1%, down from 4.2% in June and 4.5% in November. This coming Friday, the August jobs report will come out, and Wall Street expects the rate to hold steady at 4.1% while payrolls expand by 50,000, rebounding from a surprise loss of 23,000 in July.

Despite weak job gains lately, the Labor Department’s metric for joblessness has been falling as retiring baby boomers and President Donald Trump’s immigration crackdown shrink the overall labor market.

In fact, the breakeven rate of employment growth, or the number of net new jobs needed each month to keep the unemployment rate steady, actually went slightly negative during the summer and fall of 2025. And economists expect that to happen again in 2028, meaning the economy would have to shed workers to keep unemployment steady.

Meanwhile, jobless claims have also remained low, continuing a low-hire, low-fire labor market, as business stay cautious amid Trump’s tariffs and war on Iran.

The official unemployment is so low that Federal Reserve policymakers see it as a signal the economy is at or near full employment. Fed Chairman Kevin Warsh said as much during his speech in Jackson Hole, Wyo., on Friday.

As a result, the Fed’s attention is now fixed on fighting inflation, instead of the other part of its dual mandate, namely supporting the labor market.

But the Ludwig Institute for Shared Economic Prosperity doesn’t have such a rosy view on the workforce. It has a True Rate of Unemployment that measures the “functionally unemployed,” who include the jobless, those involuntarily working part-time, and those earning a poverty wage.

That score saw its fourth consecutive increase in July, contrasting with the official jobless rate that has been steadily declining this year. The share of the labor market that’s functionally unemployed is now at 24.9% and has climbed 1.3 percentage points since March.

Similarly, LISEP’s measure of the percentage of the working-age population not functionally employed—including those who dropped out of the labor force—hit 53.8%, up 0.8 percentage points since the start of the year.

“Functional unemployment is moving higher while workforce participation is moving lower. If this continues, it would suggest the labor market is losing strength despite what we may see in the headline unemployment numbers,” LISEP Chairman Gene Ludwig said in a release on Aug. 20.

The functional unemployment rate for Black workers was flat at 27.3% last month, and increased 0.6 percentage points to 23.8% for white workers, while it fell 1.5 percentage points to 26.7% for Hispanics.

For men, the rate dropped 0.9 percentage points to 19.5%, but for women, it jumped 1.6 percentage points to 31%, marking the highest level since March 2021 when the economy was still recovering from the COVID shock.

Some of the demographic differences could reflect several cross currents in the economy. The AI boom has sparked massive demand for construction and workers in skilled trades, traditionally male-dominated jobs. At the same time, a crisis in family-care services has forced many women to pull back from their careers.

“In a strong labor market, good jobs and rising wages should bring more people into the workforce, not fewer,” Ludwig said. “We need to pay attention when that starts moving in the other direction. It could be a sign that people aren’t finding the opportunities they want or need, which matters for the broader economy.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Timothy (or Tim) Armoo became a millionaire before turning 30. Now, as Gen Z blames a brutal job market and AI for their struggles, the millionaire entrepreneur isn’t having any of it—he says this is actually the easiest moment in history to get rich.

“It is scarily easy” to build wealth right now, Armoo told Fortune. “This is the greatest era of wealth creation ever. And it kind of pains me when a lot of young people are like, “I’m bored.” How can you be bored? This is the greatest technology ever in history, and you’re not obsessing over it.”

“In 2026, if you’re talking about the small things (that you can do to become successful), one of the most obvious things is to build relatively small projects with AI,” he added. 

Armoo knows more than most what it’s like to make it, despite the odds being stacked against you. Sent to live with his grandmother in Ghana as a baby, he described the start of his life as “uncertain and dangerous.” When he finally moved back to London, home became a council estate in the middle of gang violence and knife crime.

Yet despite arriving in the U.K. with no money, no network, and years of instability behind him, Armoo started his first business —a tutoring service —at just 14, scaling it to 65 tutors within six weeks. By 17, he already had an acquisition under his belt: the sale of his publication, Entrepreneur Express, to Horizon Media. In 2017, while most of his university peers were out partying, he spent his second year founding Fanbytes, an influencer marketing agency that went on to land clients like the U.K. government, Deliveroo, and Samsung. Brainlabs acquired it in 2022 for an eight-figure sum, when Armoo was just 27.

Armoo is putting his money where his mouth is—$6.7 million of it

It’s no secret that Gen Z don’t want 9-to-5 jobs. Research, surveys, and snap polls have consistently revealed that the latest generation of workers want to be their own boss—and Armoo says AI has made that dream more achievable than ever. He’s put real money behind the claim, too.

“AI enables you to think of an idea and put it out into the world,” Armoo added. “And social media means that you don’t need to pay someone in order to do it. You just need to spend time on the platform and just keep posting.”

And he’s backing that up with cash. Armoo’s just launched Legon Fund, where he’s committed £5 million (around $6.7 million) of his own cash to fund AI startups founded by minority entrepreneurs.

“The reason I did that was that my wealth wave was social media,” he explained. “Now I think the wealth wave is AI, and I don’t want anyone to say, ‘Well, I had the idea, but I didn’t have the money to distribute it.’”

“So now, you have no excuse, because you can learn—ChatGPT and Claude are virtually free—and if you’ve got something that’s working, here’s the money to get more customers for it.”

Gen Z is giving up on corporate jobs entirely—and increasingly betting on themselves 

Entry-level hiring has slowed sharply as companies lean on AI, and Gen Z graduates are applying to hundreds, sometimes thousands, of roles without a single offer to show for it. But, Armoo isn’t wrong: It’s perhaps never been easier to ditch the corporate ladder altogether and become your own boss.

A generation ago, creating a shop front and marketing your business would have required renting a physical space and splashing out on ad space in your local paper. 

Now entrepreneurs don’t even need to leave home to build a website on Squarespace, sell directly to customers on TikTok, and catch up with contractors or clients anytime on Zoom. 

Gen Zers, the oldest of whom were born in 1997, have barely known a world without those tools.

“There’s so much more infrastructure available for people who want to create things of their own,” says Natasha Stanley, head coach at careers site Careershifters.org, previously told Fortune, adding that there’s been a “democratization of access to the entrepreneurial world.” 

Chase Gallagher, the 24-year-old founder of $1.5 million a year CMG Landscaping, echoed that starting a business is “easier now than ever before because 20 years ago we didn’t have this here”—while pointing to his phone. “This device has made me millions of dollars because it’s helped me market my business.”

And in fact, plenty of Gen Zers are already ahead of the curve: The second-fastest-growing job title among the generation is “founder,” according to LinkedIn. According to Intuit’s Entrepreneurship in 2026 report, 43% of Gen Z are considering starting a business in 2026—more than any other generation. 

“My generation doesn’t want to go work a consulting or banking job. They don’t even want to be an astronaut anymore,” Steven Schwartz, the Gen Z founder and CEO of the creator-commerce platform Whop, previously told Fortune. “They want to make content online, they want to find customers online.”

His advice? “The biggest learning is you have to just start a business if you want to. You can’t be successful in business if you’re not starting a business. That’s step one,” Schwartz says, laughing. “So I think just doing it is a huge thing and not really worrying about, ‘What if this doesn’t work?’ Because like, what if it does work?”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Besides a social media post from President Donald Trump, the White House has said little about what he is calling “THE BIGGEST OIL DEAL IN WORLD HISTORY” in Venezuela.

Trump said the agreement announced Friday night would give the United States a stake in Venezuela’s vast oil reserves, a step toward his goal of extracting energy from the country after American forces captured then-President Nicolás Maduro in a middle-of-the-night raid in January and brought him to New York to face federal drug trafficking charges.

Venezuela’s acting president, Delcy Rodríguez, described the deal as a step toward economic recovery that will modernize the country’s oil industry. In a televised address to the nation late Sunday, Rodríguez insisted Venezuela’s sovereignty is secure and said she wants the country to become a global energy powerhouse.

Earlier on Saturday, she said the oil reserves would “cease to be an inert, cold statistic and will instead become concrete solutions. Housing is one of them.”

But the answers to many questions, including how soon the reserves could be drilled and who will pay to make it happen, were not immediately clear. No text of any agreement has been released.

A look at what is known and unknown:

What are the terms?

The U.S. government and an unnamed private operator in Venezuela formed a new company that was given the rights to untapped oil fields for 100 years.

A statement from Rodríguez said the deal involves the development of 17 fields with a proven potential of 65 billion barrels. It said the agreement could draw $100 billion in investment into Venezuela’s oil industry and yield over $209 billion in taxes for Caracas.

Trump said the agreement was negotiated by Secretary of State Marco Rubio, Defense Secretary Pete Hegseth and Rodríguez.

The deal gives the United States 55% effective output of the new private company, including an ownership stake and rights to buy oil at cost. American purchases of the oil will go toward the U.S. strategic oil reservesalong with the military, according to a U.S. official who was not authorized to discuss the matter publicly and spoke on the condition of anonymity.

The company would be the second largest corporate holder of proven reserves after Saudi Aramco, according to the official.

Will gas prices go down?

Probably not any time soon.

Trump says the deal will help lower gas prices for Americans. That is an important objective for the Republican president as the Iran war slows the shipping of Persian Gulf oil and keeps prices elevated months before November elections in the United States.

But experts have repeatedly warned that Venezuela’s dilapidated oil infrastructure will take years and billions of dollars to repair. A substantial boost in production is not expected to happen quickly.

The deal could be “helpful in the long run, but it’s not going to do anything to change the price of gasoline at the retail station for Labor Day weekend,” said Amy Myers Jaffe, director of the Energy, Climate Justice and Sustainability Lab at New York University.

Neither side made clear who would pay for infrastructure investments and at what cost.

The average price of gas in the U.S. stood at about $4.08 a gallon on Saturday, according to AAA. The average price was $3.20 at the same time last year.

Kevin Book, managing director at ClearView Energy Partners, said the oil industry is awaiting clarity on the deal’s details. Venezuela has room to increase its oil production, he said — in the past it produced more than 2.5 million barrels a day above current levels — but investments of this scale don’t happen quickly.

“It’s going to take time — many years — to deploy that much capital and produce the kind of incremental results that history suggests possible,” Book said.

How will Venezuelans react?

Some in Venezuela considered it a betrayal of what their government has stated repeatedly for decades: Venezuelan resources are for Venezuela, and leaders would not allow the U.S. government access to those resources.

At a market in eastern Caracas on Saturday, Douglas Borjas said he was upset about the announcement.

“I think they’re doing it to cling to power,” he said of Venezuela’s leaders. “It’s like, ‘I’m giving you a vast amount of petroleum as long as you leave me alone here in power.’”

He added: “The Venezuelan people deserve better. Venezuela has resources that can be exploited, but for the benefit of the people, not for the benefit of the corrupt elite.”

Harvard University professor Ricardo Hausmann, a former Venezuelan planning minister, called it a “shameful deal.”

“Venezuelans will not respect this illegitimate deal and no major US oil company will take it seriously because they know it will not last,” Hausmann said on social media, adding that Rodríguez “has no legitimacy or constitutional power to commit Venezuela to any such deal.”

In her national address, Rodríguez pushed back on some of the early criticism.

“One thing must be absolutely clear: Venezuela retains ownership and sovereignty over its resources,” Rodríguez said. She said the goal is to reach other agreements with transnational private companies such as Chevron, Repsol and Shell.

She added: “We want to be an energy powerhouse, a major oil producer, a significant gas exporter, and a major national petrochemical developer.”

What’s the reaction on Capitol Hill?

It is unclear whether Congress will play a role in the arrangement, but lawmakers from both parties were quick to weigh in.

Trump allies called it a win.

Sen. Bernie Moreno, R-Ohio, said it was a historic deal that helps both countries. “If it were up to DC Democrats, Maduro would still be in power, Venezuelan oil would be going to China at half price, and the people of Venezuela would be getting robbed by a corrupt regime,” Moreno wrote on social media.

It was condemned by Democrats who said Maduro’s capture was a means to this end.

Sen. Tim Kaine, D-Va., said Trump was always after Venezuela’s oil, branding it “corruption at epic scale.”

“Will prices come down for Americans? Who knows but likely not as much as Trump has forced them up thru his idiotic Iran War,” Kaine said on social media.

Sen. Chris Van Hollen, D-Md., said Trump “put our service members at risk to get Venezuelan oil for his billionaire buddies.”

What questions remain?

Many important details remain unclear, including who will cover necessary investments, the identity of the private operator and how America’s stake in the company breaks down.

The U.S. will get 55% of the company’s effective output, but it was not clear what portion of that comes from an ownership stake and how much comes from the right to buy oil at cost.

It also is unclear how the industry will react. Persuading big American oil companies to return to the region could prove a challenge given the political uncertainty and damaged infrastructure.

Chevron, the only U.S. oil company actively producing in Venezuela, declined to comment. Separately from Trump’s announcement, Chevron already had been in talks to expand investment in the country. Exxon Mobil also declined to comment.

David Oxley, chief climate and commodities economist at Capital Economics, said that on its face, the deal could double U.S. oil reserves and reduce dependence on crude oil from Canada and Mexico. But Oxley, writing in a commentary, cautioned that there are logistical hurdles and said the value of Venezuela’s reserves may have been exaggerated under former President Hugo Chavez.

Even with legal and security guarantees, it is not clear that U.S. oil companies “would be eager to invest,’’ he wrote, noting that “there simply might be more enticing commercial opportunities on offer elsewhere.’’

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

For nearly three decades, 59-year-old Eileen Munoz spent her workdays in a cubicle. To her, the tiny confined desk came to represent everything she felt about her 9-to-5 career in insurance: stuck. 

The most she ever made in a year was $70,000, and she eventually became so burnt out that she would cry on Sundays knowing her cubicle and another full workweek were waiting for her.

Seeing how miserable she had become and how work was spilling into her home life, her husband encouraged her to quit. Finally, in her mid-50s, she did, without much of a plan and assuming whatever came next would be her old job in a different font. Instead, a friend introduced her to user-generated content, or UGC, where brands pay everyday creators to make social media content they can use to market their products. Munoz had never edited a video, filmed herself for a brand or even added subtitles. 

But in 2025, just her second year as a content creator, she brought in roughly $500,000 from UGC and TikTok Shop, where she promotes products aimed at people navigating middle age, including skincare and supplements as well as products related to menopause, thinning hair and aching joints. She also works across home and pet categories.

Munoz is an unusually successful example of an opportunity emerging for Gen X in an industry long associated with Gen Z and millennials. But the creator economy may already be older than its reputation suggests: Fortune reported in 2022 that the average creator was 40, according to an Adobe study. As brands increasingly rely on creators to sell products online, some older creators are finding that the age they once feared would hold them back can actually work in their favor. Marketers still need to reach consumers in their 40s, 50s and 60s, and recent research suggests a creator’s age can shape how credible they appear to consumers.

“I thought, am I too old?” Munoz said. “That is honestly the number one thing that I hear.”

Brands have an age problem

Florian Dost, a marketing professor at Brandenburg University of Technology, coauthored a recent study that found age can increase assumptions of a creator’s expertise while perceived attractiveness tends to diminish those views.

He described a “sweet spot” that varies by platform and what is being sold, noting that one TikTok experiment, for example, put the optimal apparent age between the late 40s and mid-50s.

“I definitely see that brands, but also influencer agencies, have a blind spot for age,” Dost told Fortune. “Selling new stuff to old consumers is the biggest marketing challenge of our day.”

Munoz knows this too, saying brands have plenty of young people to hawk their wares but not middle-aged influencers.

And when it comes to what she buys herself, that age gap matters. 

“I will not buy [skincare] from a 19-year-old, 20-year-old, 30-year-old,” she said. “I’m gonna buy from people my age.”

A second act

UGC was Munoz’s entry into content creation. After she began making money creating content directly for brands, she added TikTok Shop as a separate income stream.

Unlike UGC, where a brand typically pays for a piece of content, TikTok Shop allows creators to post videos featuring products to their own accounts and earn commissions when viewers buy. Munoz says experimenting with those videos and learning what converts viewers into customers helped turn social commerce into her biggest source of creator income.

For Munoz, the transformation wasn’t just financial. Previously, she had spent decades working overtime whenever it was available. Now she works from home in Diamond Bar, California, where she controls her schedule and hopes her creator income will eventually allow her husband to retire, too.

She says the biggest obstacle she hears from other Gen Xers is the assumption that social media belongs to somebody younger. Her generation didn’t grow up filming videos on smartphones or editing TikToks. Munoz didn’t know how to do any of it either.

“If you think you are too old to do UGC or TikTok Shop, that is such a lie,” Munoz said.

Now she wants to use the location freedom that comes with her work to travel with her husband and spend months at a time living in places they once could only visit, from New York to France. 

Which is a striking reversal from the Sundays she once spent dreading the return to her cubicle.

“I feel like crying sometimes,” Munoz said. This time, though, it’s because “it is the best job ever.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Japanese automakers Nissan and Honda entered a deal to jointly develop computer parts and software for vehicles set to enter the market in fiscal 2029, both sides said Monday.

Under the deal, Nissan, based in the port city of Yokohama, and Tokyo-based Honda will share standardized parts in “core ECUs,” or electronic control units, as well as software.

Nissan and Honda started talks in 2024 to work together in developing electric vehicles and auto intelligence technology.

Nissan makes Leaf electric cars and Infiniti luxury models, while Honda makes the Accord sedan, Civic compact and Odyssey minivan.

Monday’s agreement did not specifically mention EVs, or any model names, and was focused on so-called software-defined vehicles, which could include EVs. These vehicles have functions and features that can be updated and controlled by software, rather than the mechanics of hardware.

The global competition in the auto industry is increasingly intensifying as it moves into various technologies, such as automated driving and zero emissions. Each vehicle is starting to be more like a computer packed with electronic parts and software rather than the old image of the gas-guzzling engines.

Sharing components and collaborating on research will help cut costs and speed up development, as well as add efficiency in economy of scale once the vehicles go into production.

European makers Volkswagen, BMW, Mercedes-Benz and Stellantis are working together in software development so they can share the same operating system.

Both Nissan and Honda are overshadowed by Toyota Motor Corp., the top Japanese automaker, and working together could be a plus in competing against Toyota.

However, Toyota has been mentioned in the past as engaging in the software talks with Nissan and Honda, although it was not part of Monday’s announcement.

Toyota is working on software with other companies like Subaru, which is part of the Toyota group, and U.S. autonomous driving technology company Waymo.

As part of their strategic partnership, Nissan and Honda will continue to explore other opportunities for collaboration across a range of areas, including zero-emissions and decreasing traffic fatalities.

Both sides stressed that the use of intelligence and electrification technology is an important focus for working together.

“Recognizing the need to strengthen competitiveness through faster development cycles and more efficient investment, the two companies have conducted extensive studies on potential collaboration in the software domain,” they said in a statement.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

The price of oil rose and stocks fell on Wall Street Monday after the U.S. launched its first military action in a month against Iran.

The S&P 500 index fell 0.4%. The Dow Jones Industrial Average fell 348 points, or 0.7%, as of 9:51 a.m. Eastern time. The Nasdaq fell 0.3%.

The losses were broad, with nearly every sector within the benchmark S&P 500 losing ground. Energy stocks, though broadly gained ground. Exxon Mobil rose 2.9% and Chevron rose 3%.

Markets were mixed in Europe and Asia.

GameStop jumped 4.2% after the video game retailer provided a preliminary second-quarter earnings outlook above its year-ago results. Shares of Aon fell 5.8% as the company announced that it was buying insurance broker USI Insurance Services from private equity firm KKR in a deal valued at $17 billion, including debt.

U.S. forces struck Iranian rocket launchers on the Strait of Hormuz on Sunday. Meanwhile, the United Arab Emirates said it intercepted an Iranian drone over its waters on Monday. The aggressive actions follow a lull in activity in the U.S. war with Iran, which has lasted more than six months.

The war has curtailed traffic in the Strait of Hormuz, which accounts for about 20% of the world’s oil shipments. Oil prices remain high after an initial surge earlier in the war and that has made everything from gasoline to shipped goods more expensive.

The price of Brent crude, the international standard, rose 3.2%, to $90.91 per barrel on Monday. The price swung between $72 and $102 last month amid rising and falling hopes for a deal to end the war.

The national average for gasoline in August has been above $4 per gallon every day in August for the first time ever, according to the AAA. It has been the most expensive August at the pump on record, outpacing even the enormous supply chain crunch during the COVID-19 pandemic in August 2022.

Higher energy prices because of the war have fueled already stubbornly high inflation. That has been weighing on household spending and consumer confidence. It has also given the Federal Reserve a more complicated path ahead for its interest rate policy.

The rate of inflation remains well above 3%, which is far beyond the Fed’s 2% target. Wall Street expects the central bank to raise interest rates at least once before the year ends in an effort to cool inflation.

The yield on the two-year Treasury, which closely tracks expectations about Fed moves, remained at 4.34% from late Friday. That’s up significantly, though, from about 3.50% at the beginning of 2026.

The yield on the 10-year Treasury rose to 4.76% from 4.73% late Friday. That’s back up around the level seen two weeks ago when the Trump administration took the unusual step of announcing it would intervene in the bond market.

The job market remains resilient, but is showing signs of weakening. Any increase to interest rates that could cool inflation also risks hurting the jobs market.

Later this week, the U.S. reports August jobs data. In July, the U.S. job market stalled unexpectedly as employers cut 23,000 jobs. Labor Department revisions slashed another 103,000 jobs from May and June payrolls.

___

AP Business Writers Elaine Kurtenbach and Michelle Chapman contributed to this report.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

The United Arab Emirates said that it intercepted an Iranian drone over its waters Monday, an attack that comes after the United States and Iran exchanged fire over the weekend for the first time in a month.

Iranian officials said that two people were killed and several others wounded in the U.S. attack Sunday night on Larak Island in the Strait of Hormuz. Iran responded by launching missiles at U.S. sites in Jordan, which were intercepted.

During the lull in fighting, the U.S. has been ratcheting up economic pressure on Iran with the hope of forcing concessions out of Tehran, including reopening the Strait of Hormuz to shipping.

After the U.S. and Israel attacked Iran on Feb. 28, Iran established a chokehold on the vital strait, though which a fifth of the world’s traded oil passed in peacetime, slowing ship traffic to a trickle. That has roiled the global economy, raising prices worldwide for energy and other goods.

As the fighting resumed, the price of Brent crude oil, the international standard, climbed above $90, up about 25% from the start of the war, presenting a growing problem for U.S. President Donald Trump before the midterm elections.

A return to open conflict would be dangerous for the region, where Iran has targeted U.S. military bases and infrastructure in Gulf countries since the war began.

In the wake of the renewed violence, Anwar Gargash, a diplomatic adviser to the UAE’s president, said on social media said “the state of neither war nor peace cannot be a sustainable solution.”

He called for a political solution that would return normal navigation to the Strait of Hormuz, but also a “more realistic approach” than the June memo of understanding between Iran and the U.S. which, he said, “failed to outline a practical and acceptable” road map.

UAE says Iranian attack is a ‘dangerous escalation’

In a short statement earlier, the UAE Defense Ministry said that it “dealt with” an Iranian drone that was detected over its waters approaching from Iran. There were no reports of damage.

“This dangerous escalation constitutes a blatant violation of the UAE’s sovereignty, security, and stability, and a direct threat to the safety of its citizens and residents,” the Foreign Ministry said.

The Defense Ministry later issued a second statement denying a claim by the Iranian army that the Al Minhad Air Base in Dubai had been targeted, saying it was false.

In the wake of the U.S. attack on Sunday, Iran’s Foreign Ministry said Monday that Iran would “not hesitate to exercise the inherent right of legitimate defense and will respond decisively to any military aggression.”

Iran says it has right to defend itself and will ‘respond decisively’

Before heading to attend the Shanghai Cooperation Organization’s summit in Kyrgyzstan with Foreign Minister Abbas Araghchi, Iranian President Masoud Pezeshkian, who has favored a negotiated end to the conflict, stressed that Iran wasn’t seeking war.

“But,” he said, “we will respond decisively to aggressors.”

The summit brings together a group billed as a counterweight to U.S. global influence, and includes Chinese President Xi Jinping, Russian President Vladimir Putin and Indian Prime Minister Narendra Modi. Pezeshkian was scheduled to meet with Putin on the sidelines on Tuesday.

US weekend attack comes after weeks of rising economic pressure

Meantime, U.S. Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent was set to host meetings of the Group of 20 finance ministers in North Carolina on Monday and Tuesday, which come as Washington pressures other countries to help the U.S. economically isolate Iran.

The shifting strategy centers on threats to punish any country or entity that continues to conduct business with Tehran.

Two weeks ago, the UAE suspended all trade with Iran after saying it had come under renewed fire from Iran with two missiles fired at shipping traffic splashing down harmlessly in the Persian Gulf. Iran denied the attack.

Bessent later suggested it was pressure from Washington that led to the UAE decision.

Trump stressed last week that he is “not in a hurry” to get Iran back to the negotiating table, and he continues making the case that the Islamic Republic’s leadership is on the ropes.

Appointments to Iran’s senior security leadership in the past month, however, have signaled Tehran’s defiance after weathering decades of sanctions as well as a lack of tolerance for dissent at home.

US military says strike on Iranian rocket launchers ‘precise’

On Sunday, U.S. Central Command said it had struck Iranian launchers after observing forces with Iran’s Revolutionary Guard Corps preparing to launch rockets with sea mines into the Strait of Hormuz. The U.S. military said last week that it had completed clearing sea mines from the waterway’s international shipping routes.

U.S. military officials disputed Iran’s claim that the latest American strikes were an act of aggression, calling them a “limited, precise action” against what they said were minelaying forces.

Iranian state television later showed what it said were ballistic missiles being fired at American bases in Jordan, and Jordan’s military said that it intercepted eight that had entered its airspace.

The last time the U.S. military confirmed targeting Iran was on July 29, when it announced a “heavy wave of strikes” on dozens of Revolutionary Guard targets including coastal surveillance and defense sites.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Before becoming the founder of Bridgewater Associates, not to mention a celebrated author, Ray Dalio faced a moment of financial distress that reshaped his entire approach to investing and life.

After being fired early in his career, Dalio founded what would become the world’s largest hedge fund as an independent operation, run out of his two-bedroom apartment in New York City. Within a few years, he found himself “so broke” he had to borrow $4,000 from his father just to cover family bills.

“This was painful,” Dalio told a fellow billionaire, Carlyle Group cofounder David Rubenstein, in a conversation at New York’s 92nd Street Y in July 2025. But it also had a deep impact, he continued.

“That changed my approach to everything,” Dalio said, adding he learned two key lessons from this episode.

After striking out on his own to found Bridgewater in 1975, Dalio said he hit his lowest point around 1980 to ’81, when he calculated the U.S. had lent more money to countries than it could ever repay and predicted a major debt crisis. When Mexico defaulted on its debt in 1982, Dalio believed his position would pay off, even in the face of the severe economic crisis that he anticipated. However, he “couldn’t have been more wrong.” Instead of a downturn, the stock market went up, and monetary policy was eased, costing him dearly. This miscalculation left him financially devastated, forcing him to borrow $4,000 from his father to meet family expenses.

“Nobody does everything perfectly, not even Warren Buffett,” Dalio told Rubenstein, but this episode gave him the “humility” to go along with his “audacity,” he said, along with a very simple lesson in “the power of diversification.”

Dalio’s lessons

This humbling episode fundamentally changed Dalio’s perspective, he said, leading to two transformative insights:

Lesson 1: Cultivating humility and questioning one’s own certainty. The experience made Dalio reflect deeply on how he could truly know if he was right. This new approach led him to a practice he began roughly 35 to 40 years ago: pausing to reflect and write down the specific criteria he would use to make a decision. This act of documentation forced deeper thought, and he later realized these criteria could be coded and back-tested to evaluate their effectiveness over time. This systematic approach to decision-making, which he calls “principles” (having written down thousands of them), became the bedrock upon which Bridgewater Associates was built. It’s also the title of Dalio’s New York Times bestseller.

Lesson 2: Embracing the power of diversification. The crisis also led Dalio to appreciate diversification could reduce risk by up to 80% without diminishing returns. This revelation became the “bottom of Bridgewater,” he said, from which point the firm saw consistent positive returns, averaging roughly 11.8% over the subsequent 30-plus years, with only minimal annual declines. His investment mantra became “15 good uncorrelated return streams,” engineered to have similar expected returns, which he found dramatically lowers risk and boosts the return-to-risk ratio by a factor of five.

For Dalio, this near-ruinous period was not merely a setback but a profound educational experience that redefined his investment strategy and personal philosophy. Dalio said he now finds “great joy” in sharing these learned mechanics and cause-effect relationships with others. His goal isn’t to scare people but to provide understanding, operating on the principle that “if you worry you don’t have to worry, and if you don’t worry you need to worry,” as worry can prevent what one fears. His personal financial rock bottom ultimately became the foundation for his enduring success and his commitment to teaching others how to navigate complex financial landscapes.

Dalio’s new book on how countries go broke

Going broke was on Dalio’s mind because of the subject of his book: How Countries Go Broke: The Big Cycle. Dalio, who often issues warnings on social media about America’s record $37 trillion national debt, wrote on LinkedIn he wanted to write this book because he sees the U.S. and other countries “headed toward having the equivalent of economic heart attacks.” He said he wanted to explain the mechanics and principles he uses, ever since he learned those key lessons in the early 1980s.

He likens the credit/market system to the human circulatory system, “bringing nutrients to all parts of the body that make up the markets and economy.” If this doesn’t produce enough income to service debt and interest, then “debt service will build up like plaque that squeezes out other spending.”

In a statement, Dalio said one of his principles relates to recognition of big cycles and patterns.

“The same basic big cycles that drive these systems to change have happened thousands of times before for the same reasons,” he said, noting that he described the “Overall Big Debt Cycle” in this book because he believes the world is “on the brink of very big changes.”

It‘s the product of years of audacity, sprinkled with a dose of humility and constant diversification.

A version of this story was originally published on Fortune.com on Aug. 13, 2025.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

As the new school year begins, the debate over digital versus analog learning rages on, while more school districts reconsider the role of devices in the classroom.

That’s as test scores in math and reading tanked after schools ditched textbooks in favor of screens. But the effect of computers and tablets on education goes beyond the basics of the so-called three R’s.

“Elementary school always taught more than reading and mathematics. Children learned how to wait for someone else’s idea to be expressed before sharing their own, to negotiate disagreements and explain their thinking,” University of Pennsylvania Graduate School of Education professor Sarah Schneider Kavanagh and University of Portland School of Education professor Katie A. Danielson wrote in a Washington Post op-ed earlier this month.

Such lessons are actually a critical aspect of growing up, as children’s cognition has been shown to mature via person-to-person interactions, not just from receiving information, they added

But classroom computers and adaptive software now provide individualized instruction to many students. While that offers benefits, Kavanagh and Danielson warned there are also trade-offs.

For example, when students merely click through math lessons on their own instead of solving problems with classmates, they don’t hear different ways of thinking.

That kind of collective learning is especially important in the era of AI as distinctly human skills like attention span, curiosity, judgment, empathy and collaboration become more valuable, Kavanagh and Danielson argued.

“Children don’t need school to become more like the digital world,” the professors wrote. “They are already immersed in that world for much of the time outside school hours. They need a place designed for other aims, such as conversation instead of consumption and collaboration instead of personalization. That isn’t resisting the future; it’s preparing children to be fully human in it.”

Computers and online learning saw steadily expanded use in classrooms for decades, then they became essential during COVID-19 lockdowns. But rather than revert to pre-pandemic ways afterward, schools continued to relying heavily on them.

There’s now a growing backlash. According to one tally, lawmakers in at least 17 states had introduced or debated legislation related to devices or screens in classrooms as of July.

And earlier this year, the nation’s second largest school district, Los Angeles Unified, banned in-school screen use for students in preschool through first grade and curbed screen time for older students.

There’s growing evidence that devices not only hurt test scores but children’s ability to think.

Earlier this year, in written testimony before the U.S. Senate Committee on Commerce, Science, and Transportation, neuroscientist Jared Cooney Horvath said Gen Z is less cognitively capable than previous generations, despite its unprecedented access to technology.

He said Gen Z is the first generation in modern history to score lower on standardized tests than the previous one, citing a stark correlation in scores and time spent on computers in school.

While skills measured by these tests aren’t always indicative of intelligence, they are a reflection of cognitive capability, which Horvath said has been on the decline over the last decade or so.

“We’re facing challenges more complex and far-reaching than any in human history—from overpopulation to evolving diseases to moral drift,” he told Fortune‘s Sasha Rogelberg. “Now, more than ever, we need a generation able to grapple with nuance, hold multiple truths in tension, and creatively tackle problems that are stumping the greatest adult minds of today.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

For generations of American teenagers, turning 16 and getting a driver’s license has been a rite of passage—and a first taste of independence. But that milestone could soon become a thing of the past, according to Andrew Macdonald, president and chief operating officer at Uber

“In some future world, maybe not five years, but 15 or 20 years, everyone’s going to be like Harry—nobody’s going to own a car,” Macdonald said in a recent episode of the 20VC podcast with host and entrepreneur Harry Stebbings.

“Nobody’s going to have their driver’s license because you’ll be able to get around. And I think bikes and scooters will be part of that. I think autonomous vehicles will be part of that. I think public transportation will be a big part of that, but I don’t think you need to own a car.”

That future would represent a dramatic shift for a country where car ownership has been synonymous with the American Dream. But with new vehicle prices having soared 30% over the last six years, Macdonald argued that the economics don’t make sense when vehicles spend most of their time sitting unused.

“The individually owned car is the most inefficient asset that anyone owns, and certainly at any level of price point,” Macdonald said. “It sits idle 98% of the day. It’s depreciating. The ongoing operating costs are actually high—even if you’re not driving it, you’re paying for that insurance clip.”

The shift could also prove lucrative for Uber. While the ride-sharing giant abandoned its plans to develop its own fleet of self-driving cars, it has increasingly positioned itself as a platform for autonomous vehicles, partnering with companies including Waymo and Waabi to bring their vehicles onto its network.

Uber’s CEO calls MacDonald an ‘execution machine’—he says these 2 principles drive his success

A Canadian native, Macdonald graduated from the Ivey Business School at Western University in Ontario in 2007 before starting his career as a Bain consultant. He dabbled in entrepreneurship in the early 2010s before joining Uber in 2012. 

Today, Macdonald is the company’s longest-tenured active employee. Stebbings said he recently asked Uber CEO Dara Khosrowshahi, who joined the company in 2017, what makes MacDonald so effective.

“People really like him, but he is an execution machine,” Stebbings recalled Khosrowshahi saying. “And he is very good at driving people.”

MacDonald said there’s ultimately no secret formula for success, but two principles stand out. The first is building trust by making decisions based on what’s best for the company, whether the stakes are big or small.

“You’re not always going to get the decision right,” Macdonald said. “But if people know that you’re filtering on that, then I think that builds followership and trust over time, and then you can move people because if you’re pushing on something, they know it’s because you genuinely think it’s the right thing to do.”

The second is having a deep knowledge of the business. For Macdonald, after 14 years at Uber, he said he knows ride-hailing “better than anyone in the world.”

“Those two things together, I think, are pretty powerful.”

Fortune reached out to Uber for further comment.

AI is already disrupting jobs—and Elon Musk predicts a future where work is optional

MacDonald’s prediction that technology could eventually upend how Americans get around—and even eliminate the need for a driver’s license—isn’t the only eyebrow-raising vision for the future of work and daily life.

The cost of an Uber may matter a lot less if Elon Musk’s predictions come true. The world’s richest man, who has his own ambitious plans for Tesla’s humanoid robots, has argued that saving for retirement could eventually become pointless as AI-driven productivity creates unprecedented abundance.  

“My prediction is that work will be optional. It’ll be like playing sports or a video game or something like that,” Musk said earlier this year at the U.S.-Saudi Investment Forum. “If you want to work, [it’s] the same way you can go to the store and just buy some vegetables, or you can grow vegetables in your backyard. It’s much harder to grow vegetables in your backyard, and some people still do it because they like growing vegetables.”

Khosrowshahi, Uber’s CEO, has offered a similarly ambitious prediction for his own company: a future where human drivers are no longer needed for most trips.

“You can imagine the majority of our trips being fulfilled by robots of some kind,” Uber CEO Dara Khosrowshahi said on The Diary of a CEO podcast earlier this year. “Probably not 10 years from now, but you go 15 to 20 years from now, you’re going to start getting there.”

That future may sound distant, but the disruption is already taking shape as autonomous vehicles roll out in many major cities. Uber is paying drivers to train AI models, while Lyft is paying former drivers to wash autonomous vehicles that have begun replacing some of their rides.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

The era of buying crypto on social media has arrived. Crypto payments company MoonPay announced Monday that it launched PayBox, its AI-enabled payment and wallet tool, inside Grok, X’s native chatbot. The service is available globally and lets people carry out a variety of crypto transactions across different blockchain networks.

MoonPay’s Grok launch reflects a broader push to turn AI chatbots from tools that answer questions into tools that can carry out financial tasks. Over the past two years, crypto and payments companies, including Coinbase, Stripe, Visa, and Mastercard have announced initiatives that let users delegate tasks ranging from small online payments and shopping to buying crypto and moving money to AI agents.

In the case of PayBox, users will also be able to use Kamino, a Solana-based crypto lending platform, to earn yield on USDC, the dollar-pegged stablecoin issued by Circle. The application also allows users to carry out non-crypto activities, such as asking Grok to book flights or make restaurant reservations.

“Grok prepares the transaction. The user approves it with a passkey. The money moves,” MoonPay said in a press release. 

Monday’s announcement comes days after MoonPay added a crypto lending feature that lets eligible users manage crypto loans and deposits through ChatGPT or Claude. The integration is limited to users outside the United States, the United Kingdom, the European Union, and Australia. In July, the company introduced a platform for businesses and institutions to trade and move digital assets across more than 200 blockchain networks. Five months earlier, MoonPay also released developer tools that let AI agents independently manage wallets and trade crypto.

The integration of AI payment tools into X is perhaps expected since the platform’s owner, Elon Musk, is a cofounder of PayPal, and has long sought to expand the use of crypto and digital money.

The agent race

So-called agentic commerce, which describes using bots for shopping, has been gaining traction in recent months as more companies build tools to help AI agents search, shop and pay on users’ behalf. 

In May 2025, Coinbase announced x402, a protocol that lets AI agents pay for online services using stablecoins. Stripe followed in December with its Agentic Commerce Suite, which gives businesses tools to sell through AI agents. In May, Circle launched Circle Agent Stack, a set of wallets and payment tools that lets AI agents hold and spend USDC within preset rules.

The period also coincided with a broader push in finance toward agentic commerce. In April 2025, payments network Visa launched Intelligent Commerce, an initiative designed to let AI agents search for products and make purchases using tokenized payment credentials rather than consumers’ card numbers. That same month, Mastercard introduced Agent Pay, a service that allows verified AI agents to make purchases within rules set by customers.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

President Donald Trump stepped up his attacks against the media on Sunday with an admonition to the Federal Communications Commission to investigate polling used by news outlets and punish a prominent television news host.

Trump has long had an adversarial relationship with journalists and news organizations who publish stories he doesn’t like, particularly those about his standing in the polls. Numerous recent polls show Trump has the lowest approval rating of either of his terms in office as the unpopular Iran war continues and gas prices remain high.

Trump has increasingly used his animosity toward the press to seek action by the FCC, which controls broadcast licensing.

The First Amendment to the US Constitution explicitly protects freedom of the press and freedom of speech. 

Trump complained Sunday that something must be done about “fake polls” used by the news media. “FCC TO THE RESCUE!” he trumpeted in a social media post. Polls are often sponsored by television networks or news organizations, but conducted by universities or polling companies over which the FCC has no control. The FCC also has no control over cable stations or print media. 

In the same series of Sunday morning posts, the president also lashed out at Kristen Welker, the moderator of NBC’s Meet the Press, for saying his endorsements of Republican candidates in primary elections this year had shown mixed results. Earlier in the week, he attacked New York Times reporter Maggie Haberman for reporting that he was skipping the annual Sept. 11 commemoration in New York this year because he wouldn’t have a speaking role. 

“How can anyone be allowed to say this, working for freely given Public Airwaves?” Trump said of Welker’s reporting. “Because of this purposeful inaccuracy, she will be reported to the FCC for rebuke or punishment.”

Short of canceling NBC’s broadcast license, there’s little the Trump administration can legally do to punish Welker for her reporting.

“Kristen is one of the best in the business and we stand by her,” an NBC spokesperson said in an emailed statement.

A handful of the candidates that Trump endorsed this year did not win their primaries or special elections. Some of his prominent endorsements, including the special election to elevate Darline Graham to replace her late brother, Lindsey Graham, in the Senate, did win. 

Trump urged the chairman of the FCC to follow up on his complaints.

“I hope that Chairman Brendan Carr, and the fine people of his Commission, will take this Threat to our Country very seriously,” Trump wrote.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Japan plans to use drones, artificial intelligence and new methods of warfare as it adapts its defense strategies to suit changing times, according to details of an 8.9 trillion yen ($55.6 billion) budget request for the coming fiscal year disclosed by the Defense Ministry on Monday.

The preliminary total is only a small increase from the 8.8 trillion yen ($55 billion) defense budget requested for this fiscal year. It will be much higher eventually, but further details will come later this year after Prime Minister Sanae Takaichi’s government approves the new security and defense strategy aimed at strengthening Japan’s counterstrike capability.

Under its five-year defense strategy set in 2022, Japan has doubled its defense spending to about 2% of its gross domestic product to build up its Self-Defense Forces’ offensive role to counter China’s growing assertiveness. Beijing has criticized Japan’s defense buildup as “new militarism.”

Japan now aims to “drastically strengthen its deterrence and response capability by transforming its defense capability” by adapting to new warfare as in Ukraine’s deployment of drones, the ministry said in a pamphlet about its budget request.

Japan will use attack drones, long-range cruise missiles and interceptors

The ministry says new ways of warfare require domestic development and mass-production of low-cost uncrewed weapons to reduce costs, minimize casualties and build a more cost-efficient air defense network.

The ministry plans to use attack drones in coordination with long-range missiles for more cost-effective counterstrikes. For the fiscal year beginning in April 2027, it is requesting an unspecified amount of funding to acquire unmanned attack drones for launch from above or under water.

Officials say uncrewed weapons could also help Japan compensate for the falling number of military personnel as its population ages and shrinks. Experts say developing fully homemade drones, given that Japan’s commercial market is dominated by imports from China, would be a challenge.

Japan in recent years has fortified its southwestern region with longer range missiles and interceptors.

To further strengthen its counterstrike capability, the ministry is seeking to develop hypersonic missiles that can be launched from submarines.

AI will be used to improve Japan’s defense command

The ministry plans to introduce an integrated AI platform in command and control to improve speed and accuracy in decision-making, including assessing battlefields and choosing targets.

Japan is considering using existing foreign AI technologies, including those of the U.S., while also developing and strengthening domestically developed AI, or combining them, officials said.

The ministry seeks to build a next-generation platform, “AI orchestrator,” which would integrate and use multiple AI systems while ensuring its autonomous selection and operation.

The ministry also plans to build a “Defense Ministry cloud” for highly sensitive data transmission and stable communications networks in an emergency or a disaster.

It did not specify the expected costs for such measures.

Government backing will strengthen the defense industry

Deterrence requires stable and sustainable defense equipment production, so Japan needs to reduce risks of shortages caused by suppliers withdrawing, officials said.

To address the concern, the ministry has requested an unspecified amount to fund a state-owned, contractor-operated system to ensure stable defense equipment production and supplies, with the government acquiring factories and outsourcing manufacturing to private firms.

The budget request also includes funding to support companies’ defense-related research and development or restructuring to strengthen their production and efficiency.

Profits at major suppliers such as Mitsubishi Heavy Industries, Kawasaki Heavy Industries and IHI Corp. have risen as Japan builds up its military and expands arms exports. But the industry lags overall due to a constitutional limit on the use of force for only its own self-defense. Dozens of companies have withdrawn over the past decades due to poor profits, an uncertain business outlook and concerns about harm to their reputations from making arms, especially lethal weapons.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

State and federal officials ramped up efforts Monday to locate around 15 people who are missing after a major flash flood swept through in the Grand Canyon, killing at least one person.

Weather forecasters warned rain and thunderstorms could bring more flooding to the popular tourist attraction from where scores of visitors were evacuated following the flood Saturday in Bright Angel Creek. The deluge also destroyed the only water pipeline in the canyon, leading to emergency water restrictions for year-round residents. Tourists have been barred from staying at lodges and hotels inside the park.

Visiting the Grand Canyon — a crown jewel of the national park system — can be particularly dangerous in the summer because of the risk of flash flooding that accompanies the monsoon, or rainy season. Clear days can give way quickly to thunderstorms and downpours.

“With deep monsoonal moisture in place and already saturated soils in some locations, an elevated risk of flash flooding will be in place through Monday,” the National Weather Service said Monday.

The body of a 46-year-old man was recovered Sunday evening near Crystal Rapids along the Colorado River, the National Park Service said without providing details. More than 60 people were airlifted from the depths of the canyon. The park service asked anyone with details about hikers or campers still unaccounted for to provide information. The Arizona Department of Public Safety helped with evacuations Sunday.

“My heart is with the families and loved ones of every person unaccounted for after the flash flooding at the Grand Canyon,” Arizona Gov. Katie Hobbs posted Sunday.

The state Department of Emergency and Military Affairs was coordinating with the park service and county emergency management officials in search and recovery efforts, Hobbs said.

Parth Desai was hiking through a narrow passage in Bright Angel Canyon with fellow physicians and a park ranger when heavy rain started falling Saturday.

“We saw the creek flood, waterfalls coming up out of nowhere, boulders, mud, landslides happening everywhere,” he said.

Later, as they made their way toward Phantom Ranch, a colleague shouted “Up, Up, Up, Up!” as a 4-foot (1-meter) debris wall headed toward them and they ran up into a patch of cacti, he said. They were rescued by helicopter late Saturday after making it to the Phantom Ranch area, he said.

Torrents of water wiped out footbridges over Bright Angel Creek that runs into the Colorado River, widening the bed and extending an existing river rapid or creating a new one. The flood was a major blow to an enduring effort to modernize the pipeline that serves 6 million visitors a year and roughly 1,600 residents of Grand Canyon Village.

“Heaven help us if the whole thing down there at the bottom has to be reconstructed,” said Jack Schmidt, director of the Center for Colorado River Studies at Utah State University. “Where are they going to get the money?”

In August 2024, a woman was swept away in a flash flood while hiking in the Havasupai region of the Grand Canyon. Chenoa Nickerson, 33, was found dead after a three-day search.

Halting overnight stays at the park because of a lack of water is rare, although the pipeline frequently has failed over the years. While the Grand Canyon has large storage tanks for potable water on the South Rim, they won’t be refilled while the pipeline is out of service.

A $208 million rehabilitation of the pipeline and upgrades to the associated water delivery system started in 2023, with the park service calling it a crucial investment to ensure the park can meet the needs of residents and visitors. The project was expected to be completed next year.

___

Stengle reported from Dallas. Jeffrey Collins in Columbia, South Carolina; Holly Ramer in Concord, New Hampshire; Felicia Fonseca in Flagstaff, Arizona; and Christopher Weber in Los Angeles contributed.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

A college endowment is supposed to last forever, supporting students, professors and research in perpetuity.

Instead, many cash-strapped schools are draining their nest eggs just to stay alive.

Faced with multi-million dollar deficits, Hiram College in rural Ohio borrowed from its $56 million endowment. The 1,000-student liberal arts school — which boasts a statue of US President James Garfield, who worked as a janitor there to pay his tuition — eventually pulled more than $47 million from the fund. It even tapped money that donors had explicitly set aside for specific purposes, not for balancing the budget.

Hiram is now working with the state attorney general’s office and is hashing out a repayment plan, a spokesperson said. The school is also notifying its donors about the draw from the endowment, both in writing and through in-person conversations.

David Haney, Hiram’s president from 2020 to 2023, said he was surprised to learn about the loans when he took office. He considers them a risky bet that many smaller schools feel forced to take in an era when US student enrollment has started to decline. Colleges need to focus on cutting expenses instead, he said.

“What a lot of these small colleges do is they think that things are going to turn around,” Haney said. “‘If we just invest in new athletic facilities, everything is going to be fine.’ In most cases, that doesn’t happen. To me, that’s why borrowing from the endowment and taking out debt is not the way to go about it.”

Hiram is far from alone. Nearly 200 private colleges borrowed from restricted endowment funds in 2025, up from about 130 in 2021, according to estimates from higher-ed consulting firm Perspective Data Science. Other colleges have avoided loans but are drawing more from their endowments each year than advisors consider sustainable. Analysts liken both strategies to borrowing from a 401(k) — it may help in the short-term but carries long-term risks, such as downgrading a school’s credit rating. 

For some institutions, “there’s just nowhere else to turn,” said Tracy Filosa with investment firm Cambridge Associates, which works with endowments. “It’s not a rainy day fund — we know that. But in one way, it is there for an institution to get through a rainy day.”

Dipping into the endowment can sometimes work, which is one reason schools keep trying it.

Avila University in Kansas City received court approval in 2023 to loosen the restrictions covering 97 different endowment funds totaling $6.4 million. The school is now on better financial footing, said Andy Jett, its chief operating officer.  The school aims to replenish the endowment as it recovers financially.  Avila has boosted enrollment through recruiting more international pupils, though that strategy has faced a blow from the Trump administration’s efforts to limit student visas. Even so, Jett says dipping into the endowment isn’t a step to be taken lightly.

“I don’t think any school wants to — or should, probably — do this unless they don’t have any other options,” Jett said. “This wasn’t our first choice. This was pretty far down the list of things that we tried.”

Most colleges resorting to this tactic face the same underlying pressure.

The dismal US birth rate has left schools fighting over a dwindling pool of potential students. Larger, more prestigious universities — many with endowments north of $5 billion — still draw far more applicants than they can admit, keeping their finances healthy. But smaller, lesser-known institutions have endured years of declining enrollments and shrinking income, with no obvious solution in sight. Many have already succumbed, shutting their doors for good. 

Indeed, some of the schools that have drawn down their endowments — including Indiana’s Martin University and Notre Dame College in Ohio — ended up closing anyway. 

“When schools take that action, it’s meaningful — it can be a real red flag for those of us on the outside looking in,” said Emily Wadhwani, a higher education analyst for Fitch Ratings. 

College endowments can be complicated, with the money held across hundreds or even thousands of separate funds. 

The cash is essentially divided into two pots: one reserved for specific uses chosen by donors — like English scholarships or medical research — and the other unrestricted, with few conditions on how it’s spent. Hiram, for example, had 325 restricted endowment funds, according to a recent audit. State laws that govern funds given to charitable organizations apply to schools as well, so if a college wants to use restricted donations for other purposes, it generally has to get approval from the state attorney general’s office, according to law firm Taft Stettinius & Hollister LLP.

Schools generally assume their endowments’ value will grow 7% to 8% per year on average over the long-term, according to the American Council on Education. They budget accordingly, trying to draw no more than 5% of the value in a given year.

But as the financial pressure on them increases, many schools with relatively small endowments have been pulling more from their funds, data from the National Association of College and University Business Officers show. Colleges with endowments of $51 million to $100 million have increased their spending rate by more than a third since 2016, reaching 5.5% in 2025 compared to 4.1% in 2016.  

Others have gone higher. Manhattan University, located in the Bronx, drew about 7% of its endowment in fiscal 2024 after facing deficits and withdrew another 7% in fiscal 2025, according to S&P Global Ratings. In response, S&P downgraded the school to one level above junk, or a BBB- credit rating.

“Once you get much over a spending rate of 7%, consistently, you are an at-risk endowment,” said Kristin Reynolds, who advises endowment administrators on their investment strategies at consulting firm NEPC. She was speaking generally, not about a specific college.

Manhattan University’s chief financial officer, James Perrino, said the school’s investment returns were significantly higher than 7%, so the draws did not erode the endowment’s principal. The money, he said, was used to provide additional student scholarships, enhance campus facilities and develop new master’s degree programs. 

Tapping an endowment can help a school navigate tough times, or make a strategic investment in its future.

For 10 years, Webster University in a St. Louis suburb relied on cash infusions from its endowment to balance its budget and meet loan obligations. The school also reclassified some restricted funds to satisfy bond covenants. Now, leaders say they’ve made it through the rough patch. They’ve boosted enrollment, invested in international campuses and removed a “financially distressed” designation from the university’s accreditor.

Webster broke even for the past two years without help from its nest egg. But the stronger footing came at the cost of donor trust, said chief financial officer Bill Donovan. The school’s administration now must repair the relationship. 

“No donor wants to think you’re taking their funds just to cover operating losses,” Donovan said. “The promise we’ve made with the new leadership team is that we’re not going to do that.”

Hiram is hoping for a similar rebound. 

Endowment money has helped Hiram deal with persistent deficits. In a report in April, the college’s auditors noted that some of the borrowed money had come from restricted funds. But the cash infusion hasn’t fixed Hiram’s finances. Auditors wrote that the school faces “substantial doubt” that it can continue as a going concern for another year. 

Hiram is working to turn its finances around. Earlier this year, James Malz, a former JPMorgan Chase & Co. banking executive, was appointed interim president. The school is dropping eight of its least-popular majors, including biochemistry and creative writing.  

It’s also developing a plan to repay the loans, a college spokesperson said in an emailed statement. The school has done so before — in 2022, Hiram repaid over $6 million of loans from its endowment. 

“The College’s financial strategy, including the use of endowment-backed financing, was implemented to help manage ongoing operational pressures while the institution developed and advanced a long-term sustainability plan,” the statement said. The school has now increased its fundraising — with an emphasis on unrestricted gifts — and has no plans to close, according to the spokesperson. 

Founded in 1850, Hiram always admitted women and Black scholars due to the egalitarian ideology of its Disciples of Christ founders. Many of Hiram’s current students are the first in their families to attend college. Federal data shows 57% of first-time students there in 2019 received Pell Grants. 

“We helped a lot of great students,” said Brad Goodner, a professor emeritus of biology and biomedical humanities. 

Closing would hurt not just students and faculty, he said. The college is the center of the town — also named Hiram — about 40 miles southeast of Cleveland. As with many small, rural colleges across the country, the school provides jobs and forms the core of community life.

“The campus is the village,” Goodner said. In a potential closure, “those things would be lost.”

To contact the authors of this story:
Amanda Albright in Overland Park at aalbright4@bloomberg.net
Elizabeth Rembert in New York at erembert@bloomberg.net

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Far from New York or Davos, leaders of some of the world’s least populous states are meeting in a placid tropical archipelago with no traffic lights. The population of the summit host, Palau, was due to swell from 18,000 people to 20,000 as delegates from dozens of countries arrived at the Pacific Islands Forum Leaders Meeting.

Ahead of the summit officially opening Monday, the country’s president and other senior officials walked the main road around the island picking up trash. Barbers and tattoo artists prepared to become drivers for delegates and student volunteers to usher dignitaries.

But beneath the distinctively Pacific character of the event, where matters unfold in their own unhurried time and decisions are made by consensus rather than by a vote, simmered a fraught and escalating geopolitical debate about who gets to shape the future of the vast ocean region.

Powerful nations interested in the Pacific have raced in recent years to shore up alliances among its leaders, intensifying a contest for influence between China and the United States, Taiwan, and forum members Australia and New Zealand. The sometimes-conflicting bids to win sway have also drawn dividing lines among the forum’s members, threatening to derail annual summits.

“The Pacific is our home, not a theater for geopolitical competition,” Palau’s President Surangel Whipps Jr. told reporters Sunday, as he urged the bigger countries closely observing this week’s event not to interfere in talks that he hoped would center on problems desperately imperiling small Pacific island nations, such as climate change and struggling economies.

“Let’s not use this as a place that we should be threatening or making people feel uncomfortable,” he added. The reality, however, was unlikely to be simple.

Small island nations have become important allies

Some of the 18 member countries and territories that make up the Pacific Islands Forum have populations in the low thousands or tens of thousands and were once known mostly as picture-perfect holiday destinations. But many also have sprawling and lucrative exclusive economic zones, rich with fisheries and seabed minerals, and their locations across the wide Pacific Ocean have become strategically important points on the map as global tensions rise.

While Forum countries often reference a “Pacific family,” members come from diverse cultures and political systems and their remote locations mean few opportunities for leaders to speak in person. The annual leaders’ summit was once a relaxed and casual affair, where officials from countries with little power in the global order sought to amplify their voices by reaching unified positions, particularly in urging bigger countries to curb greenhouse gas emissions as rising seas began to threaten low-lying atoll nations.

As major powers over the past decade have escalated their efforts to secure access to Pacific waters and ports by inking security deals and offering funding, immigration access to their countries and other sweeteners, the leaders’ ability to speak with one voice at their annual summit has come under pressure.

“We see examples of this where that consensus-based model, which is referred to as the Pacific Way, can sometimes lead to a bit of paralysis in taking action,” said Oliver Nobetau, Pacific Islands program director at the Lowy Institute, an Australian think tank.

Pacific nations face worsening climate and fuel shocks

In a recent episode, the Forum’s foreign ministers failed to reach consensus on a statement criticizing Beijing’s launch of a ballistic missile into the South Pacific Ocean in July. While most member states strongly opposed China’s actions, the refusal of two to endorse a statement saying so meant none was issued.

“At this point in time when Pacific Islands are facing a lot of acute security issues, decision-making is paramount for this one,” Nobetau said. “We’ll be looking to see if President Whipps can sort of steer the forum to take tangible action.”

Among the issues vexing Pacific island nations are the effects of the latest El Nino weather chaos, which has brought droughts and floods across the region. The volatile weather threatens food security and access to clean water, already vulnerable in island nations dependent on imported goods and funded largely by foreign aid.

Fuel volatility from the Iran war has also prompted some Pacific countries experiencing severe economic shocks to declare national emergencies in a region overwhelmingly reliant on imported diesel and gasoline, arriving via a fragile supply chain.

Whipps this week suggested that the wealthy countries seeking involvement in the region could open their wallets to finance the widespread establishment of solar power capabilities across the region.

“What are they doing together with us to partner to get a 100% renewable Pacific?” Whipps said.

Conflict over members’ alliances is expected

However, some of the powers at loggerheads over the region were always going to see this year’s summit as a showdown. Palau is one of just 12 countries worldwide to recognize Taiwan, incurring the ire of Beijing, which sees Taiwan as part of its territory.

It also sits at the nexus of other great power struggles. Located in the western Pacific Ocean, next to the Philippines, Palau draws from the Asian tourism market and has closer ties to the United States than much of the Forum’s members. A Compact of Free Association allows defense and security access for the U.S. in Palau’s territory in exchange for tens of millions of dollars in U.S. funding each year.

Palau’s turn as host also comes as the summit’s leaders try once more to draw up a structure governing how other countries are permitted involvement in its meetings. Countries approved to engage in the Pacific Islands Forum, including the United States and China, are known as dialogue partners, while Taiwan holds separate status as a development partner.

Beijing has ramped up pressure on forum hosts to exclude Taipei’s envoys from the annual summit, a dispute that grew so fractious ahead of the 2025 event in Solomon Islands that all countries except member nations were entirely barred from attending. Palau’s warm diplomatic relations with Taipei have this year drawn the attendance of Taiwan’s Foreign Minister Lin Chia-lung and provoked a warning from Beijing that China would oppose Taiwanese officials’ participation.

That in turn has prompted exasperation from some officials and Pacific-watchers at the prospect of another summit overshadowed by rivalry between non-member countries. Early arrivals over the weekend were roiled by the news that one leader, Solomon Islands Prime Minister Matthew Wale — a newly elected leader more friendly to Australia than the more Beijing-aligned leader before him — had returned home just hours after arriving because an opponent had mounted a leadership challenge.

It wasn’t immediately clear how much his forced departure, and the absence of others such as Kiribati’s President Taneti Maamau, whose country’s China ties have warmed during his tenure, could be attributed to unease about the summit’s geopolitics.

“You’d be defying gravity and logic if you said it wasn’t a big problem,” New Zealand Foreign Minister Winston Peters told reporters in Koror on Sunday, referring to bids for foreign interference in the event.

The leaders’ non-attendances were “seriously disappointing” and did not help, Peters added.

“But in the main the delegations are of the highest standard,” he said. “So let’s see how we go.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Workers shoveled thick mud from a flood-ravaged power station in central Nepal, trying to revive a key node that supplies electricity to more than 20,000 people. But as they cleared debris from equipment buried by last week’s catastrophic floods, there was hope the plant would not simply be rebuilt in the same place, beside the river that destroyed it.

In Nepal, up to 900 workers are unaccounted for from a dozen hydropower projects, according to the Independent Power Producers’ Association, Nepal, with hundreds believed trapped in tunnels. In Nepal and China combined, over 900 people have died and 4,700 are missing.

The loss of hydropower infrastructure is estimated to have taken 700 megawatts offline — about 10% of the country’s power capacity. Once the immediate aftermath of the disaster is dealt with, the question of how to restore power, roads, bridges, schools and health facilities quickly without rebuilding the same vulnerabilities should be on top of Nepalese authorities’ minds. disaster experts said.

“Authorities have to take a hard look in the mirror now and ask how they will be rebuilding in these places. They will also have to take a close look at other projects in Nepal that have not been built yet, whether they’ll be approved after this event,” said Jakob Steiner, a geoscientist at the University of Graz in Austria, who is currently based in Dhaka, Bangladesh.

Rebuilding for resilience, not just replacement

Hydropower projects that were operating or under construction were fully or partly destroyed across Rasuwa, Nuwakot and Dhading, among the worst-hit districts.

Many of the workers had taken shelter in the tunnels but are stuck, waiting to be rescued, according to officials.

“The tunnels are built to access hydropower infrastructure and to divert water,” Steiner said, describing the tunnels as big enough to drive trucks through.

Apart from the hydropower projects, tens of kilometers (miles) of roads, multiple bridges and essential buildings like schools and hospitals have been destroyed.

Ramraj Narasimhan, a senior director with the Coalition for Disaster Resilient Infrastructure, said rebuilding should focus on continuity of services rather than trying to make every structure indestructible.

“If it gets damaged, let it get damaged, but can we build in redundancy in the system?” he said.

That can mean choosing a better location for construction, alternate routes, backup power, improved early warning and financial tools such as insurance to speed recovery, Narasimhan said. Risk assessments should examine where a river bends, where slopes are unstable and where a single failure could cut off several communities.

Narasimhan’s organization estimates that $124 billion worth of Nepal’s infrastructure is exposed to climate-driven disasters, creating the potential for hundreds of millions of dollars in losses each year. A report by the coalition earlier this year found that Nepal’s average annual losses are nearly $760 million from various disasters, while the country’s national disaster funds is only a fraction of this amount.

Climate risks grow for Himalayan hydropower

Climate scientists said the Himalayan region — which is warming faster than many other parts of the world — is particularly at risk from increasing global warming as a result of human-caused climate change.

Climate experts said the flooding adds to evidence that infrastructure planning in the Himalayas is being forced to account for disasters that are increasing as the climate warms. Glaciers across the Hindu Kush Himalaya are losing ice at an accelerating rate, while permafrost degradation, unstable slopes, glacial lakes and increasingly erratic rainfall are raising the risks of floods, landslides and debris flows, according to reports by Kathmandu-based climate research group International Center for Integrated Mountain Development.

The stakes are particularly high for Nepal because hydropower is both a foundation of its electricity grid and an important source of economic growth and export revenue. Much of the country’s potential is run-of-river hydropower, Narasimhan said, meaning facilities are closely tied to steep river corridors where land is limited and hazards can cascade quickly.

Steiner said smaller floods can sometimes be managed with diversions that keep debris and high flows away from expensive infrastructure and tunnels. But for events as large as the latest flood, he said, physical defenses may be overwhelmed. In those cases, early warning becomes the critical protection for people.

He said the flood was detected at the China-Nepal border after moving rapidly from its source, leaving little warning time upstream. But there was still time as the flood traveled downstream toward hydropower sites, raising questions about whether warnings could have reached workers sooner.

The disaster is also likely to intensify scrutiny of where future projects are approved. Himanshu Thakkar, coordinator of the South Asia Network on Dams, Rivers and People, said environmental, social and disaster-risk assessments need to reflect the specific landscape and past hazards of each valley, backed by land-use rules and stronger accountability.

Hydropower projects can themselves become “force multipliers” when large structures, debris and altered river channels add to downstream damage, Thakkar said. He argued that Nepal should also consider more decentralized solar power as part of a broader energy mix.

Thakkar said the question now is not only how fast Nepal can rebuild, but what it chooses to put back in the path of the next flood.

___

Sibi Arasu reported from Bengaluru and can be followed on X at @sibi123. Reach him at sarasu@ap.org.

___

The Associated Press’ climate and environmental coverage receives financial support from multiple private foundations. AP is solely responsible for all content. Find AP’s standards for working with philanthropies, a list of supporters and funded coverage areas at AP.org.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Chinese markets are booming with new public stock offerings, energized by the craze for artificial intelligence and other advanced technology and a growing preference to list shares in Hong Kong and Shanghai.

In the latest big stock listing, shares in China-founded e-commerce and fast fashion giant Shein are due to debut Tuesday in Hong Kong in a blockbuster initial public offering raising $1.7 billion, in one of the city’s biggest new share sales this year.

In July, CXMT, China’s largest memory chipmaker, raised more than $8.6 billion in Shanghai in the second-largest IPO for its Nasdaq-style STAR market, mainland China’s second-largest IPO. Its shares jumped 466% on the first day of trading.

Unitree, one of China’s leading humanoid robot makers, also made its listing debut in Shanghai in August. Shares rose 460% on the first day of trading.

“The current IPO boom is powered by investor appetite for AI and robotics,” said Ruiying Zhao, a senior research analyst at S&P Global Market Intelligence. Trading in Shanghai’s stock market, for one, is heavily driven by retail investors.

AI driving Chinese IPO boom

CXMT’s IPO in Shanghai “placed China in a strategically significant position in tech manufacturing related to AI,” said Perris Lee, head of APAC equity capital markets for ION Analytics. “It’s also a testament to China’s tech self-sufficiency ambitions.”

Founded in China in 2016, the company’s revenue surged more than 700% year-on-year to 50.8 billion yuan (about $7.5 billion) in the first three months of 2026 on a spike in demand for computer chips needed for AI.

IPO proceeds in Hong Kong and Shanghai so far this year have already surpassed the funding raised last year, according to the financial data platform LSEG.

It says IPOs and secondary listing activities on the Hong Kong and Shanghai exchanges raised a total of over $54 billion from so far in 2026, surpassing last year’s total of more than $46 billion.

Combined Hong Kong and Shanghai proceeds so far this year accounted for roughly 21% globally, ranking them only behind only the Nasdaq’s roughly 55% global share, LSEG said. There, the mega $75 billion IPO by SpaceX in June made the U.S. exchange the world’s biggest IPO market this year.

Since China limits foreign purchases on mainland exchanges, many Chinese companies do parallel listings in Hong Kong to help raise international capital.

Fewer big Chinese companies listing overseas

Stricter U.S. and Chinese regulatory scrutiny in recent years of big Chinese companies listing in U.S. markets, especially those in strategically important sectors like advanced technologies, has led some Chinese companies to stick closer to home.

Listing overseas typically takes more time compared with doing IPOs in China, said Howie Farn, a capital markets partner at the law firm Freshfields.

In Hong Kong, recent public stock listings of Apple-supplier Luxshare Precision Industry, and Zhongji Innolight, which makes optical transceivers used in data centers, were among this year’s largest deals and were also a reflection of investor demand for advanced technologies.

More companies are looking to hold their IPOs in Hong Kong or Shanghai, like robotics firms AGIBOT and Deep Robotics.

Shein also explored the possibility of listings in the U.S. and London before opting for Hong Kong.

Investors are wary of a possible AI bubble in China, too

After massive oversubscriptions and huge gains in their share debuts, some companies have seen their market value shrink.

Chinese robot maker Unitree’s share price had fallen more than 40% as of Friday from its peak share price on the day of its trading debut.

“The critical question remains: is the AI sentiment enough?” said Zhao from S&P, as the similar question that raised worries among investors in the U.S. also now also applies to China. “For a durable market cycle, investors will demand sustainable revenue, visible profit margins, and realistic valuations.

The global AI frenzy also has also drawn attention away from companies like Shein. “The AI investment cycle is absorbing much of the risk appetite that would have otherwise flowed to a company like Shein,” said Jacob Cooke, CEO of WPIC Marketing + Technologies.

Shein’s IPO puts the company’s value at around $27 billion, a fraction of its peak valuation a few years ago, though that is partly due to U.S. and EU moves to restrict de minimus tax-exemptions for imports of small packages.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

OpenAI’s infrastructure ambitions are colliding with a less technical problem: public backlash.

CEO Sam Altman is conceding that Americans are openly hostile to the facilities powering the AI boom, awkward timing for a company both planning to spend $50 billion this year on compute. “Clearly, people hate data centers—right now, at least,” Altman told Time in an interview. “People are pretty negative on AI.”

The week before Altman sat for Time, OpenAI’s head of data centers Chris Malone left the company, the Wall Street Journal reported, as confirmed by CNBC, which obtained a statement from OpenAI saying that he had “recently reorganized” the infrastructure team. 

OpenAI spent the past year dramatically expanding Stargate, the infrastructure project it launched with SoftBank early last year with plans to invest as much as $500 billion in the U.S. AI infrastructure. By September 2025, OpenAI had announced six U.S. Stargate sites, and said those facilities—along with its Abilene flagship and ongoing CoreWeave projects—would bring Stargate to nearly 7 gigawatts of planned capacity. It has since added a more-than-1-GW Michigan campus, a Georgia project contracted for 3.2 GW of power, and, this month, an agreement to secure approximately 8 GW of IT capacity in southern Ohio.

OpenAI said it is already planning beyond Stargate’s original 10-gigawatt target, and claims it still does not have enough computing power. 

“If anything, we should have bought a lot more,” Sachin Katti, the OpenAI executive overseeing its compute efforts, told Time.

Americans increasingly don’t want data centers next door

Altman’s assessment of the public mood isn’t far off. 

Seven in 10 Americans oppose building data centers in their area, according to a Gallup poll released in May, including 48% who strongly oppose one. Data centers can consume enormous amounts of electricity, and residents in communities targeted for development worry about higher power bills, water usage, noise and the strain on local infrastructure. Some estimates peg the electricity cost of data centers to $23 billion.

The opposition is already having financial consequences for hyperscalers. At least 48 data center projects representing $156 billion in investment were blocked or stalled by local resistance. Even though only 8% of Americans who oppose data centers live near one, the outrage has gone national.  

A Pew Research Center survey released earlier this year found Americans were much more likely to say data centers were bad than good for home energy costs, the environment and nearby quality of life. Among people who said they had heard a lot about data centers, 67% said they believed the facilities were mostly bad for household energy costs.

Those concerns are colliding with a surge in electricity demand. U.S. power consumption grew about 1.7% a year from 2020 through 2025 after barely growing over the previous 15 years, according to the Energy Information Administration. The agency said data centers are helping drive the increase.

The backlash is starting to shape policy–and the midterms

State governments are now responding to frustrated constituents with potential ramifications for OpenAI and other hyperscalers. Local officials proposed more than 120 moratoriums on data center development in 38 states as of July.

Texas Gov. Greg Abbott ordered regulators to scrutinize data centers seeking to connect to the state’s power grid before allowing projects to move forward earlier this month. ERCOT, which manages most of the Texas grid, was facing roughly 474 gigawatts of requests for new connections—more than five times the state’s record peak electricity demand. That matters for OpenAI because Texas is central to Stargate, with its flagship site in Abilene, and additional pending projects in the state.

Pennsylvania Gov. Josh Shapiro took his own steps on Aug. 18, signing an executive order that imposed new energy-affordability, environmental and community requirements on data centers and removed AI data centers from a fast-track permitting program.

Data center backlash is also uniting people from across the political spectrum ahead of the midterm elections. While President Donald Trump champions them, most registered voters oppose data centers, including 60% of Republicans and 53% of MAGA, according to a Fox News poll

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Good morning. Fed Chairman Kevin Warsh used his Jackson Hole speech on Friday to focus on inflation. But he also pointed to an unusual metric that could offer clues about whether AI is delivering the productivity gains businesses are betting on: token prices.

Tokens are the units used to measure the data AI models process, and many AI companies charge customers based on token consumption.

Warsh called AI a potential “new factor of production,” then asked whether customers will pay a premium for tokens from the most advanced models even as prices for older models fall toward marginal cost.

That doesn’t mean token prices are becoming a new Fed indicator. Instead, they could reveal how AI economics are evolving.

Gregory Daco, chief economist at EY Parthenon, told me that Warsh appears to see token prices as a window into the evolving AI market, offering clues about competition among providers, differences in model quality, pricing strategies, and computing costs.

But interpreting those price signals isn’t straightforward. Falling token prices can tell two very different stories.

If AI models become more capable while getting cheaper, businesses could generate more output for every dollar they spend, a sign of genuine productivity gains. But if models become increasingly interchangeable, providers could be forced to compete on price. That could signal commoditization and raise questions about whether the enormous capital flowing into AI will generate strong returns.

“Pricing power at the frontier—not usage growth—is becoming the real scoreboard for whether AI is creating value or just consuming capital,” Luke Lango, a technology analyst and publisher of Innovation Investor, told CFO Daily.

Token use has become a top-of-mind cost concern for CFOs. For companies spending on AI, token prices are an input cost. But lower cost doesn’t necessarily mean higher returns.

“For CFOs, the more relevant question is whether AI adoption is generating measurable productivity gains, improving margins, or creating new revenue opportunities,” Daco said.

That gets to the larger issue behind Warsh’s comments. The economics of AI will ultimately hinge on how much value it creates and who captures it.

Sheryl Estrada
Sheryl.Estrada@fortune.com

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Good morning!

After an employee’s grandmother died, they texted their manager that they’d be taking bereavement leave for the funeral. The response became a case study in how not to manage grief.

The manager pushed back, questioning whether the grandmother counted as “immediate family” and calling the timing “terrible” with a big upcoming pitch meeting. The exchange reached millions when George Stern, a former McKinsey consultant, read the texts deadpan to camera, becoming one of his most viral Instagram and TikTok videos.

The outrage from his followers didn’t surprise Stern, who now runs a firm that grows and sells small businesses when he’s not creating content. But the volume of recognition did. Stern says he’s since received roughly 100 more bereavement stories from people who had been treated similarly at work.

“Corporations are losing trust, like every other institution in the country right now,” Stern said. “They’re out of touch with the experience of their employees on the ground.” 

Stern has built an audience, he says, by putting that disconnect on display—and he thinks HR leaders should pay attention. 

Stern didn’t set out to become the internet’s bad-boss archivist. He started posting management content on LinkedIn two years ago. When employees began sending him screenshots of their own manager horror stories, he switched to video, offering advice on navigating workplace conflict. He now gets up to 20 new submissions a day.

Typically, Stern’s advice is to take workplace issues to HR. But increasingly, followers respond with some version of: “HR is not your friend.” He doesn’t entirely agree, but he sees the skepticism as a sign that HR needs to be more transparent about how it handles workplace complaints. For instance, he’s seen employees lose trust in HR when they raise concerns but lack the documentation needed for HR to investigate. In such scenarios, HR leaders should make clear what employees need to document for a complaint to be properly investigated, says Stern.

He offers professionals the same advice, urging them to document workplace interactions in writing, record conversations when permitted, and send written recaps of meetings that weren’t recorded.

But, he adds, “I should not be the messenger of that to these employees. It should be their HR leader.”

Editor’s note: This newsletter will be off for Labor Day next week. Catch us back in your inboxes on Sept. 14.

Kristin Stoller
Editorial Director, Fortune Live Media
kristin.stoller@fortune.com

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

As of 8:30 a.m. Eastern Time today, oil sold for $93.03 per barrel (using Brent as the benchmark, which we’ll get into momentarily). That’s $1.06 higher than yesterday morning and approximately a $25 rise over the past year.

Oil price per barrel % Change
Price of oil yesterday $91.97 +1.15%
Price of oil 1 month ago $91.45 +1.72%
Price of oil 1 year ago $67.94 +36.92%

Will oil prices go up?

It’s impossible to predict the future of oil prices. Several factors determine the movement of oil, but it ultimately boils down to supply and demand. Again, when threats of economic downturn, war, etc. are high, the oil trajectory can turn rapidly.

How oil prices translate to gas pump prices

When you pay for gas at the pump, you’re paying for more than just the crude oil itself; you’re also springing for links along the chain, such as the refineries and wholesalers—not to mention taxes and local gas station markups.

Still, the crude oil aspect affects the final price most dramatically, as it typically accounts for more than half the price per gallon. When oil prices spike, so do gas prices. And frustratingly, when oil prices drop, gas prices tend to take their time drifting down to the lower price (sometimes referred to as “rockets and feathers”).

The role of the U.S. Strategic Petroleum Reserve

In case of emergency, the U.S. has a store of crude oil known as the Strategic Petroleum Reserve. Its primary purpose is energy security in case of disaster (think sanctions, severe storm damage, even war). But it can also go a long way toward softening crippling price hikes during supply shocks.

It’s not a long-term answer—more of an immediate relief to assist the consumer and keep critical parts of the economy running, like key industries, emergency services, public transportation, etc.

How oil and natural gas prices are linked

Oil and natural gas are both major energy fuels. A big change in oil prices can affect natural gas by extension. For example, if oil prices increase, some industries may swap natural gas for some segments of their operations where possible—which increases demand for natural gas.

Historical performance of oil

When examining oil’s performance, there are generally two major benchmarks:

  • Brent crude oil is the main global oil benchmark.
  • West Texas Intermediate (WTI) is the main benchmark of North America.

Between the two, Brent better represents global oil performance because it prices much of the world’s traded crude. And, it’s often the best way to track historical oil performance. In fact, even the U.S. Energy Information Administration now uses Brent as its primary reference in its Annual Energy Outlook.

Looking at the Brent benchmark across several decades, oil has been anything but steady. It’s seen spikes due to factors such as wars and supply cuts, and it’s also seen crashes from global recessions and an oversupply (called a “glut”). For example:

  • The early 1970s brought the first big oil shock when the Middle East cut exports and imposed an embargo on the U.S. and others during the Yom Kippur War.
  • Prices dropped in the mid-1980s for reasons such as lower demand and more non-OPEC oil producers entering the industry.
  • Prices spiked again in 2008 with increased global demand, but it soon plummeted alongside the global financial crisis.
  • During the 2020 COVID lockdown, oil demand collapsed like never before—bringing prices below $20 per barrel.

All to say, oil’s historical performance has been anything but smooth. Again, it’s hugely affected by wars, recessions, OPEC whims, evolving energy initiatives and policies, and much more.

Energy coverage from Fortune

Looking to stay up-to-date regarding the latest energy developments? Check out our recent coverage:

Frequently asked questions

How is the current price of oil per barrel actually determined?

The current price of oil per barrel depends largely on supply and demand, including news about potential future supply and demand (geopolitics, decisions made by OPEC+, etc.). In the U.S., prices also move based on how friendly an administration is to drilling, as it can affect future supply. For example, 2025 saw the Trump administration move to reopen more than 1.5 million acres in the Coastal Plain of the Arctic National Wildlife Refuge for oil and gas leasing, reversing the Biden administration’s policy of limiting oil drilling in the Arctic.

How often does the price of oil change during the day?

The price of oil updates constantly when the “futures” markets are open. A futures market is effectively an auction where people agree to buy or sell oil in the future. As long as people and companies are trading contracts, the oil price is changing.

How does U.S. shale oil production affect the current price of oil?

In short, shale is rock that contains oil and natural gas. Think of shale as energy yet to be tapped. The more shale the U.S. accesses, the more energy we’ll have—and the more easily oil prices can keep from spiking as much thanks to a greater supply.

How does the current price of oil impact inflation and the broader economy?

When oil is expensive, it tends to make everyday items cost more. This can be related to energy (your heating, gas utilities, etc.), but it’s also due to the logistics involved with making those items accessible to you. Shipping, for example, can affect the price of things at the grocery store, as it’s more expensive to get those products from warehouses and farms onto the shelf.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

In every room, at every table, I hear predictions about what AI means for the workforce and the future of work. The talk is mostly about jobs: which roles are changing, which ones are growing, and which ones may be replaced over time.

But what if we’re missing the crux of the conversation?

AI isn’t just changing jobs; it’s changing the nature of work itself. It is shifting how people will conceptualize work for – quite possibly – the rest of human history. This is a defining moment, and we must respond with urgency. Business leaders need complete clarity on how AI is affecting employees and their work at the most granular levels so they can make critical decisions on hiring, organizational structure, technology investment, and workforce management.

Achieving that clarity requires access to the right data and information – and the leaders who understand this are the ones who will come out stronger.

What the Data Tells Us

Broadly speaking, we don’t see AI eliminating jobs at scale. What we do see – what our data shows – is that the world of work is evolving.

At ADP, we process payroll for one in six U.S. workers and serve over 1.1 million businesses globally, paying 42 million workers worldwide. From this unique vantage point, we observe the labor market as broadly stable. When we look more deeply, we see that AI is reshaping work at the task level. It is changing the workforce, not shrinking it. And while AI’s impact is certainly real, it varies significantly by sector, company size, career stage, and geography. Our work with the Stanford Digital Economy Lab provides a real-time view of AI’s impact on occupations through the lens of ADP’s payroll data. Recent findings show that early-career workers – ages 22 to 25 – in occupations most vulnerable to AI automation, such as software development and customer service, have experienced employment declines. However, employment of more experienced workers in those same occupations, and for workers of all ages in roles less exposed to AI like home healthcare aides, have remained stable or continued to grow.

But this is just scratching the surface.

As we dig deeper, we’re able to see how AI is actually changing individual tasks within jobs. We call this “the great job unbundling.” AI is reshaping work at the task level, creating new job categories and transforming others.

Through the adoption of AI, the wage premium of specific tasks is shifting in real time. This has profound implications for how business leaders think about workforce planning, skills development, and the employer-employee relationship.

AI is also raising the floor on productivity expectations. Employees are increasingly expected to use AI tools as a baseline – not a differentiator – which changes how performance is measured and managed. We see a critical split in this dynamic: entry-level employment has declined where AI is applied to automate work, but employment has grown in occupations where AI is augmentative – where it supports and enhances human decision-making, freeing employees to focus on higher-value, creative, and more strategic work.

Given these nuances, the stakes of getting HCM right have never been higher. Importantly, it is clear this is a moment of change that demands a rigorous, data-driven approach to get it right.

The Shifts that Actually Matter

The workforce is undergoing three key shifts that have direct implications for how leaders should be managing their workers right now.

Investment leads to engagement; 53% of workers say they are fully engaged when they strongly agreed their employer was investing in them – compared to just 12% when they don’t feel that same level of investment. Employees also expect their employers to provide the AI upskilling they need to thrive.

AI increases the value of human judgment. As more “checklist” work is delegated to AI, workers are transitioning toward longer-term, strategic projects where human judgment matters most. The old model of how to measure productivity – task completion, speed, efficiency – is giving way to something harder to quantify but more profound: judgment, creativity, and long-term impact.

AI users report greater productivity and performance. Workers who use AI daily are more than twice as likely to be fully engaged at work – 30% versus 14% of non-users – and half as likely to feel overloaded or stressed: 11% versus 23%. Early AI adopters tend to be top performers. Frequent AI users show higher engagement and motivation, both of which are strong retention drivers.

From Understanding to Action

Leaders who will come out of this moment stronger are not asking what AI will replace; they are asking how to help their people do more with it. AI is a teammate. It takes on the routine work – and what is left are the judgment calls, the hard decisions, the moments that only a real expert can navigate. That is where people become more valuable, not less – and leaders should see their workforce as more than inputs to be optimized. Our people are sources of reasoning, creativity, institutional knowledge, and logic that technology can’t replicate.

Businesses can help workers embrace their evolving identities – encourage them to examine which tasks make up their roles and see new possibilities for growth and opportunity. Workers who understand how their role is changing are better positioned to grow with it.

The fact is: AI is evolving the workforce in ways that are beautifully and fundamentally human. The organizations that have a clear understanding of what the data tells us – that the workforce is shifting, not shrinking – will be the ones that thrive in the future of work.

The opinions expressed in Fortune.com commentary pieces are solely the views of their authors and do not necessarily reflect the opinions and beliefs of Fortune.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Nearly two years after Elliott Hill returned to Nike as CEO, his tenure raises a question that eventually confronts almost every leader handed a struggling business. How much time should someone get to prove that a turnaround is working?

Executives brought in to revive a company, division, or function often inherit problems that accumulated over years while facing pressure to show improvement within quarters. Hill inherited a Nike in 2024 struggling with weakened retailer relationships, excess inventory, slowing innovation, and declining cultural relevance. He has restored wholesale growth and strengthened performance running. Yet Nike Direct and digital sales have remained weak, China continues to struggle, and the stock has lost the enthusiasm that greeted his appointment.

Research on corporate transformations suggests that expecting an immediate recovery is unrealistic. McKinsey offers some indication of how slowly the economics of a transformation can emerge. In one survey, respondents reported that roughly half of a transformation’s value was realized in the first 18 months, with the remainder coming later.

Spencer Stuart’s research offers a more detailed timeline for judging a CEO’s progress. The firm describes the first year as a launch period, when new CEOs face a steep learning curve, tackle inherited problems and make decisions that can shape their tenure. By then, a leader should have a credible diagnosis, the right team and clear strategic priorities. The second year becomes a period of calibration, when boards and other stakeholders can look for movement in measures such as customer retention, product momentum, market share and operating performance. By around year three, those early decisions should increasingly translate into stronger revenue, margins and returns.

Hill is now far enough into the job to assess whether his early decisions are producing results. Simeon Siegel, senior managing director at Guggenheim Partners, argues that North America provides one such test. Nike’s largest region was among the first parts of the business to struggle, but it has returned to low single-digit growth.

“When people are saying, ‘Okay, he’s failing,’ we have to say, ‘Well, he actually got his largest section to grow 3%,’” he recently told me. The question, he argues, is whether that improvement indicates Nike has found an approach that can eventually work in other regions facing similar problems. “Maybe they do know what they’re doing,” he says. “And therefore, it’s a matter of time.”

A turnaround does not have to be complete for a leader to make the case for more time. There should, however, be evidence that the decisions made early in the process are producing results. For Hill, North America provides some of that evidence. Whether Nike can replicate that progress elsewhere will be the next test.

Ruth Umoh
ruth.umoh@fortune.com

Editor’s note: This newsletter will be off for Labor Day on Monday, Sept. 7. We will return with our next edition.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Martha Shedden has spent 15 years trying to talk Americans out of panicking. Lately, she says, it’s a losing battle.

She co-founded the National Association of Registered Social Security Analysts (NARSA), the organization that trains and certifies financial professionals as Registered Social Security Analysts, or RSSAs. In an interview with Fortune, she described a pattern she’s watching play out across the country: retirees and near-retirees, spooked by headlines about the program’s finances, are claiming benefits at 62 — the earliest possible age — even when waiting would leave them better off.

“They hear their benefits might be cut 22%, and they’re thinking, ‘I need my money now,’” Shedden said. “That was just really shocking. I mean, I knew people were doing that, but that [number] was very, very surprising.”

The behavior shows up starkly in a survey NARSA conducted of 189 RSSAs in August, which asked advisors what they’re hearing directly from clients. Nearly three-quarters — 73.5% — said their clients want to claim early specifically because they fear future benefit cuts. Almost 59% said clients simply doubt Congress will act to fix the program’s finances. And when advisors were asked to describe the dominant mindset among clients weighing when to claim, 62.4% said people feel “overwhelmed by conflicting advice.”

The 22% problem

Social Security’s retirement trust fund is on track to run dry in the fourth quarter of 2032 — one quarter sooner than last year’s estimate — according to the program’s 2026 Trustees Report. After that point, the law requires an automatic, across-the-board benefit cut because the trust fund can no longer make up the gap between what workers pay in and what retirees are owed. Absent congressional action, the cut would be roughly 22%.

The Committee for a Responsible Federal Budget has translated that into household terms: a typical dual-income couple retiring right after insolvency would lose an estimated $16,900 a year in benefits. A single-earner couple would lose about $12,700 annually, and higher-income couples could see cuts as steep as $22,300 a year.

Lawmakers are aware of the clock. On August 5, the Senate Finance Committee held a hearing — “Exploring Process Approaches for Addressing Social Security Solvency” — with testimony from the Committee for a Responsible Federal Budget, the Mercatus Center, AARP and the National Academy of Social Insurance. The session grew heated, with Democrats accusing Republicans of maneuvering toward benefit cuts through a fast-tracked process, and Sen. Bill Cassidy of Louisiana visibly frustrated by the gridlock.

That combination — a hard deadline six years out and a Congress that can’t agree on next steps — is precisely what Shedden says is pushing clients toward the exits early, even though claiming at 62 locks in a permanently smaller monthly check for life.

“It’s a very emotional decision,” she said of the rush to claim early. “It comes down to the education and the knowledge so that they’re able to make their best claiming decisions.”

Beyond the claiming age

The survey also surfaced a broader knowledge gap. Fifty-eight percent of advisors said clients don’t realize ex-spousal or ex-survivor benefits may be available to them after a divorce, and a similar share said clients simply confuse spousal and survivor benefits altogether.

On taxation, only about a third of clients understand how other income affects the taxability of their Social Security check, and nearly half are blindsided to learn that Medicare premiums can quietly shrink their monthly payment. Roughly two-thirds of advisors said income-related monthly adjustment amount deductions were the top reason clients were surprised by a lower-than-expected payment.

These knowledge gaps are what NARSA exists to close. The credentialing process took a step up this summer: as of late July, the RSSA final certification exam is now administered and proctored by the College for Financial Planning, a Kaplan company, using live online proctoring. Shedden called it a “big step” for an organization she says has grown steadily over the past two years as more financial, tax and insurance professionals seek to specialize in Social Security guidance.

Don’t blame the boomers?

Shedden, who describes herself as squarely in the middle of the baby boom generation, pushed back hard against the increasingly common argument that her cohort is responsible for the program’s shortfall — both by its sheer size and by allegedly hoarding wealth and political power while presiding over the system’s decline.

“I don’t feel that it’s particularly our generation, the baby boomers,” she said. “Yes, we are a huge bubble, but there are so many other socioeconomic factors.”

The numbers back up at least part of her case. When Social Security began paying benefits, there were roughly 40 workers for every retiree collecting them, according to Mercatus Center data. That ratio has collapsed steadily since — not because boomers didn’t pay in, but because Americans are having far fewer children. The average number of children born to a woman was 3.6 around the end of the baby boom in 1960; by 2024, it had fallen to 1.6, according to the Peterson Foundation. The ratio of workers to beneficiaries, which stood at 8.8-to-1 in 1955, had dropped to 3-to-1 by 2025 — and continues to fall.

The data critics cite point the other direction. The CRFB calculated earlier this month that baby boomers are on track to collect roughly 265% of what they paid into the program over their working lives — a return ratio that reflects both the program’s structure and decades of benefit expansions that earlier generations supported and current workers are now financing. “It has always been a pay-as-you-go system,” Shedden countered. “So, that’s always been the program from the beginning. The problem is the longer longevity, the longevity of individuals who are in retirement.”

She also named a second culprit rarely discussed in the generational-blame framing: the disappearance of employer pensions. Roughly 40% of private-sector workers had access to a defined-benefit pension in the 1970s, she said; today it’s closer to 15%, leaving 401(k)s and IRAs — vehicles retirees must manage themselves — to fill a gap they were never fully designed to cover.

“All of us should be saving as much as we can,” Shedden said. “Social Security was never meant to be a 100% replacement of all our income. The critical thing is for individuals to plan, not to panic.”

An optimist, for now

Despite the doom-laden headlines, Shedden insists she remains confident Congress can still act. She pointed to the array of available fixes — adjusting the taxable-earnings cap, changing the benefit formula, altering the retirement age — arguing that no single lever needs to move dramatically if lawmakers combine several modest changes. She also rejected proposals floated inside the Trump administration to eventually replace Social Security with a different savings vehicle, sometimes described as “Trump accounts.” A full replacement of Social Security would be “a huge, huge mistake” that would trigger public backlash, she said. “There would be an uproar.”

Still, she was careful to separate her optimism about the program’s survival from complacency about the choices facing Gen X and millennials now approaching retirement.”They should be informed and concerned,” she said, “and be planning for it.”

For this story, Fortune journalists used generative AI as a research tool. An editor verified the accuracy of the information before publishing.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Target’s annual shareholder meeting in June was a referendum on the company’s leadership, and the story is bleak: nearly 13% of shareholders opposed the reelection of Executive Chair and former CEO Brian Cornell. Combined with nearly 40% support for a shareholder proposal calling for an independent Board Chair, this level of opposition makes clear that some shareholders are dissatisfied with the decision to retain Cornell on the Board after he stepped down as CEO early this year. 

At first glance Cornell’s reelection margin may look comfortable, but votes like these typically show approval levels of 90% or higher. The average support for S&P 500 directors in the 2026 proxy season was 96.6%. Compare that to Cornell’s fall to 87.2%, and it signals that shareholders like us have lost faith in Cornell’s leadership and demand a change to Target’s management.

Cornell’s fortunes have dropped precipitously. For nearly a decade, his nay votes never once rose above 6.3%. In 2025, after three straight years of sales declines, the opposition to Cornell rose slightly higher. But then he stepped down as CEO in February, only for the Board to retain him as Executive Chair. At this year’s AGM, opposition increased threefold from a decade ago, from 4.2% in 2016 to 12.8% in June.  

Those of us who follow the company understand how we got here: a steady erosion of Target’s brand from years of poor management decisions, including a series of operational missteps that have repeatedly put it at odds with the public. 

Once an industry leader for championing inclusion, in recent years Target has caved to political pressure — slashing its Pride merchandise collection in 2024, rolling back DEI initiatives in 2025, and most recently its muted response to ICE after federal agents shot and killed Renee Good and Alex Pretti and detained two of its employees in the company’s home city of Minneapolis.

The backlash has been fierce. Black, Latino, LGBTQ+, and progressive shoppers — some of Target’s core customer base — have mounted boycotts and national protests. Twin Cities Pride threw Target out of its hometown parade after 18 years as a sponsor. The daughters of Target co-founder Bruce Dayton called the company’s retreat on inclusion “a betrayal.”

In recent years, Cornell fundamentally misread what set Target apart from other big box retailers, eroding years of hard-earned good will by moving away from the qualities customers once trusted: a genuinely welcoming environment for all, a sense that the company balanced profit with people, and a brand identity that reflected the values many shoppers believed it shared with them.

Along with all this are the everyday consumer experience concerns: in-store standards have been slipping for years. Customers report messier aisles, out-of-stock products, longer checkout lines, and fewer employees available to help — all of this leads to families’ shopping trips taking longer, shoppers not finding what they need, and consumers who once looked at “Tarjay” as a fancy shopping destination no longer feeling any of the whimsy they once felt when walking through stores. 

For the first time since 2001, Target fell off Fortune Magazine’s World’s Most Admired Companies All-Star list this year. And nearly half of Target’s workforce say they have no faith in the retailer’s future. But instead of investing in stronger operational support, employee retention, or product supply chains, Cornell engaged in years of stock buybacks that failed to generate shareholder value, while neglecting the company’s serious problems. Recently, the company has stepped back from repurchasing shares and increased investment, but it is unclear if this is a temporary change or represents a recognition that a sustainable turnaround requires ongoing improvements to the in-store experience.

Inflation and tariff pressures have intensified these challenges. Yet Target’s largest rivals have demonstrated that those headwinds do not fully explain its struggles: Walmart continued to attract more in-store shoppers even as e-commerce expanded, while Costco has been winning on price without sacrificing its durable profit margins. Conversely, during Cornell’s tenure as CEO, Target’s foot traffic in U.S. stores decreased significantly from 2022 to 2025, and net sales shrank year-over-year for seven of the last twelve fiscal quarters. 

Since Fiddelke took the reins, Target’s turnaround is showing early signs of taking hold: traffic and comparable sales are rising, digital growth is strong, and management has lifted its underlying outlook. Still, the durability and quality of the earnings recovery remain unproven, particularly in apparel and home and after removing a large, one-time tariff refund. 

That makes its latest cultural misstep especially costly. Just as Target appears to be regaining traction with the customers it lost from its past, self-inflicted, reputational setbacks, it was forced to pull and apologize for a children’s Halloween costume that drew viral comparisons to blackface and minstrel imagery. Target conceded that the product was offensive and “should never have been part of our assortment.”

The Board’s decision to retain Cornell as Executive Chairman, rather than appoint an independent chair, undermines its claim to a genuine management reset—particularly given that new CEO Michael Fiddelke is a 20+ year Target insider and former COO. We at SOC Investment Group haven’t been shy about our own point of view: retaining Cornell as Executive Chair and Special Advisor preserves the influence of the executive most responsible for Target’s prolonged underperformance, undermining Fiddelke’s turnaround efforts. 

It’s time for Board members to prove they understand the gravity of the issues the company is facing. Greater oversight, stronger transparency, and a better governance structure are no longer suggestions — they’re necessary next steps to rebuild accountability and enable sustainable, long-term growth at the company.

Target’s annual meeting results should send a clear message to the Board that investors are hungry for fresh leadership to help the company regain lost ground. If the Board is serious about rebuilding trust, the first step is obvious: the Board should demand that Brian Cornell step down as Executive Chair immediately.

The opinions expressed in Fortune.com commentary pieces are solely the views of their authors and do not necessarily reflect the opinions and beliefs of  Fortune. 

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Even in the depths of the recent crypto winter, stablecoins stood out as a beacon of optimism. Investors and startups hail them as a long-awaited killer application, and even crypto haters concede stablecoins are a superior technology for moving money around—especially following the 2025 passing of the GENIUS Act, which created a predictable regulatory environment for using the tokens. Still, if stablecoins are so great, why is it so hard to figure out who’s going to use them?

That question occurred to me last week while speaking with Dan Kim, who is VP of Product at the emerging fintech giant Airwallex. Prior to his current gig, Kim held a senior business development role at Coinbase, where he led efforts to persuade merchants to adopt stablecoins. It was a tough sell. Many times, Kim recalls, merchants had concerns about who would handle chargebacks, or simply balked at adding another layer of complexity to an already-complicated payment system. “I ran into a blocker for how to make stablecoins useful … It was a dead end,” Kim told me.

Kim may have a point. While stablecoins are useful in the world of crypto trading, I’ve never seen a need for them in my day-to-day life. If I need to send money to a friend or local business, Venmo and Zelle work just dandy, and even if Coinbase can stand up a robust ecosystem of stablecoin rewards—which it is trying to do with USDC—I can’t see a world where those rewards are more lucrative than what I accrue with my credit cards.

It’s a different story in some countries, of course. If you want proof, look at the $183 billion stablecoin business that Tether has built by catering to consumers in developing countries who want a reliable way to hold U.S. dollars. Meanwhile, in places like Northern Europe where many favor debit cards, it’s possible stablecoin rewards could play well. But here in North America, it’s hard to see why consumers will seek out stablecoins anytime soon.

That leaves cross-border business payments, which seem a natural use case for stablecoins, since they allow for much faster and more secure transfers than wires and other legacy technologies. But this too is more complicated than it looks. As Kim pointed out, big companies are well-poised to adopt stablecoins, but that might not be the case for the smaller vendors that serve them. In some markets, those vendors may face regulatory restrictions on accepting crypto or U.S. dollar payments and, in any case, they still need to operate in their country’s native currency.

In theory, these bottlenecks could be resolved by the adoption of various national stablecoins—a real stablecoin in Brazil, a Canadian dollar stablecoin in Canada, and so on. The reality though is that, even though these other tokens do exist, a whopping 98% of stablecoins out there are backed by U.S. dollars—and that’s been the case for years.

All of this is why Airwallex’s CEO, Jack Zhang, told me in 2024 that he was skeptical of stablecoins entirely, and figured that his company—which you can think of as a Wise for the B2B crowd—felt its existing business model was sufficient. That model revolves around acquiring financial licenses, and holding large pools of local currencies around the world, in order to provide companies with low-cost forex transfers.

A lot can change in two years, however, and Airwallex has started to change its tune on stablecoins. According to Kim, stablecoins are now so widespread that Airwallex has created a service focused on the last mile—namely, helping customers convert U.S. stablecoins into local currency.

Airwallex—which has taken a hefty investment from Visa—is also backing a startup called Metal that is building a blockchain designed to be compliant with all local financial regulations right out of the box. Finally, Kim noted that stablecoin use will grow in the coming era of agentic commerce, where bots will handle a portion of our shopping.

So what to make of all this? On one hand, Airwallex makes a compelling case that it is entering the stablecoin market at the right time, and with the right business model. On the other, it’s fair to ask if the company simply decided “better late than never.” In any case, Airwallex will be in tough competing on the last mile front with the likes of Rain and MoonPay. Meanwhile, agentic commerce is still in an early-adopter phase, and there is a long list of companies—including Coinbase, Robinhood, and Stripe—racing to figure it out first.

Long story short, all we really know right now is that it’s too soon to say how any of this will turn out.

Jeff John Roberts
jeff.roberts@fortune.com
@jeffjohnroberts

A note to readers: We will not be publishing on the Labor Day holiday, but will be back in your inbox on Sept. 14.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Someone in my network moved his family across the country for a new job last year. New schools. New mortgage. A whole life uprooted on the strength of an offer letter. He was laid off eleven weeks later.

He is not the exception. I’m part of a network of senior executives navigating this job market, and I’ve heard this exact story so many times it has stopped shocking me. That should scare all of us.

American business has quietly rewritten its deal with workers. And a generation has been taking notes.

Start with the exit. Most U.S. employment is “at will.”  A company can end your career anytime, for almost any reason, with no notice. That’s legal, and America sets no severance requirement. It’s brutal when a job search runs for months.

And the health insurance? It can end the same day. Not in 30 days, that day. For a client mid-cancer-treatment, or a parent covering a medically complex kid, that isn’t a policy detail. It’s a trapdoor. COBRA is supposed to be the bridge, but in 2025 the full family premium averaged nearly $27,000 a year or about $2,250 a month (Kaiser Family Foundation). This is why people don’t experience a layoff as a business decision. They experience it as abandonment.

First, the lies.

The excuse of the moment is AI. In April 2026, roughly a quarter of announced U.S. job cuts were blamed on it. The top stated reason two months running. But even the people building AI aren’t buying it. OpenAI’s Sam Altman has called it out as “AI washing.” They were cuts companies planned anyway. MIT’s Paul Osterman was blunter: AI is “a perfect excuse to justify big layoffs.”

The receipts back him up. In one Forrester survey, 55% of leaders who cut jobs for AI admitted it was a mistake. And AI is just the newest costume: a 2024 survey found eight in ten leaders had used “layoffs” to cut someone they wanted gone, and 54% did it to dodge paying severance. Workers can feel when they’re being lied to. They just can’t always prove it.

Then, the broken promises.

Millions took jobs sold as remote, then got return-to-office mandates — or relocate-or-quit ultimatums — they never signed up for. Amazon hauled hundreds of thousands back five days a week. Starbucks told corporate leaders to move to Seattle or Toronto within a year or take the exit. The excuse is always that presence drives performance.

It doesn’t. University of Pittsburgh researchers studied RTO mandates at big public companies and found no gain in financial performance — just a drop in employee satisfaction. As Wharton’s Adam Grant puts it, “Don’t mistake presence for performance.” The mandates didn’t bring the work back. They told people their trust was worth less than a badge swipe.

Finally, the math that gives the whole game away.

The average big-company CEO now makes about 281x the typical worker. At some companies it’s in the thousands. Starbucks hit 6,666x last year. Since 1978, CEO pay is up more than 1,000%. Worker pay: 24%. The pain isn’t shared. When Meta cut about 3,600 people it branded “low performers” in early 2025, it raised executive bonus targets from 75% to 200% of salary about a week later.

A generation raised on that arithmetic does not need an economics degree to reach a verdict.

I’m the parent of a Gen Z kid, so I hear the verdict at my own dinner table. Just 17% of Americans told Gallup in 2026 they have real confidence in big business, near a record low. Among adults under 35, nearly half now view socialism favorably. A colleague told me, half-terrified, that her son is becoming a full-blown socialist. I’ve seen what he’s seen: loyalty punished, honesty optional, promises reversed, the gains routed to the top.

When people stop believing their work protects them, they don’t decide one company is bad. They decide the system is rigged. And they go looking for another one.

And increasingly, they’re not just looking. They’re leaving. Americans filed a record 5.5 million new business applications in 2023 and have held roughly that pace since, up about 50% from before the pandemic. Nearly four in 10 recent college graduates say they’d rather start a business than climb someone else’s ladder. When a generation stops trusting the deal, they go into business for themselves.

Business leaders keep asking why young workers seem disloyal, disengaged, quick to walk. They have it backward. This generation isn’t refusing to buy in. They were never sold anything worth buying.

The fixes aren’t mysteries. Tell people the truth when you let them go. Give them a landing soft enough that losing a job doesn’t cost them the house. Honor the deal you hired them under, and when the company wins, cut in the people who built it. That’s the whole list. It costs money and it costs ego — which is exactly why most companies won’t do it, and why the sharpest young talent has already stopped waiting. They’re not disengaged. They’re gone, or quietly building the thing that takes your customers in 10 years. You didn’t lose their loyalty. You taught them not to offer it. That bill comes due on your watch.

The opinions expressed in Fortune.com commentary pieces are solely the views of their authors and do not necessarily reflect the opinions and beliefs of Fortune.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

A U.S.-Venezuela oil deal has been announced by President Trump and Interim President Delcy Rodríguez. The public knows virtually nothing about the details of the agreement — nor do I, a Special Adviser to Venezuelan Congressman Antonio Ecarri on Economic, Monetary, and Energy Affairs. This deal was clearly arrived at in secrecy, with no public debate, and signed under duress. Therefore, it is illegitimate and probably illegal. 

This deal took not only me, but everyone I am in touch with in Caracas by surprise. That being said, it is vital to understand the importance of establishing clear private property rights in Venezuela’s vast oil reserves. The establishment of such private rights would give Venezuela’s oil reserves a positive present value. It’s important to understand why that’s not the case now. 

PDVSA is a state-owned oil company that dominates Venezuela’s economy and accounts for almost 95% of Venezuela’s foreign exchange earnings. Even by state-owned enterprise standards, PDVSA is grossly mismanaged, as evidenced by its production and reserve figures.

Under the direction of Luis Giusti in the 1994-1998 period, PDVSA’s production soared. This trend changed in 1999, when Hugo Chavez became Venezuela’s president and introduced Chavismo as the country’s guiding economic doctrine. Venezuela’s oil output began to stagnate, a situation which worsened further after the coup attempt of April 2002. Chavez responded by purging PDVSA of its professionals en masse, replacing them with “reliable” hands who were loyal to Chavez’s socialist regime.

After the 2002-2003 output plunge, Venezuela’s production temporarily recovered. However, with the death of Chavez and Nicolas Maduro’s assumption of the presidency in March 2013, another output plunge began. This trend has left Venezuela’s output drastically lower than when Chavez took power in 1999.

PDVSA’s physical capital has been consumed at an unsustainably rapid rate, with capital expenditures far below the value of equipment that is being consumed each year by depreciation and amortization. On top of PDVSA’s reduced capital stock and its deteriorating quality, there has also been a drop in the stock and quality of its human capital. For example, in 2017, President Nicolas Maduro named a National Guard general with no industry experience to lead PDVSA. The combination of plunging physical and human capital has left the giant state-owned oil company in very bad shape. Equipment breakdowns and increased accident rates have contributed further to long downtimes and output declines.

It is important to note that PDVSA’s decreased output is not due to dwindling oil reserves, but rather is caused by changes in the rate at which its reserves are being depleted. The depletion rate provides the key to understanding the economics of an oil company and the value of its reserves. Venezuela’s depletion rate has been falling rapidly since 2007. At present, it sits at 0.124% per year, indicating that it would take 558 years for PDVSA’s reserves to be halfway depleted.

This has noteworthy economic implications because of positive time preference and discounting. It is rather obvious that if you have to wait 558 years to produce and sell a barrel of oil, that barrel is virtually worthless in today’s dollars. Therefore, at current depletion rates, most of Venezuela’s oil reserves are worthless.

To put Venezuela’s depletion rate into perspective, consider Exxon, one of the world’s largest oil companies. Exxon’s depletion rate is close to 9% per year. That rate implies that it would take 7.4 years for Exxon’s oil reserves to be halfway depleted.

It is important to mention that I am writing as someone with experience in petroleum economics. Indeed, I was a member of the United Arab Emirate’s Financial Advisory Council from 2008 to 2014. In the UAE, I used a simple model that I had developed, plugged in realistic numbers, and concluded that the UAE should be depleting its vast oil reserves at a much more rapid rate than it was.

My advice to the UAE was to take the money and run.

The UAE agreed. For years, it attempted to obtain a dramatic increase in its OPEC quota. But a dramatic increase was never forthcoming. As a result, in May 2026, the UAE took the exit door and left OPEC.

It’s time for Venezuela to kill inflation by mothballing the bolivar, putting it in a museum, and replacing it with the U.S dollar. After that positive confidence shock, Venezuela must employ all legitimate means to privatize its oil industry and dramatically increase its production. 

The opinions expressed in Fortune.com commentary pieces are solely the views of their authors and do not necessarily reflect the opinions and beliefs of Fortune.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Nicholas Gordon here. When is Airwallex, the Australian-born payments company, planning to go public? The company, which serves over 675,000 businesses and claims to have over $1 billion in annualized run rate revenue, once talked about having a U.S. IPO in 2026, but those plans have gotten fuzzier over time.

In a recent conversation for our new Asia Agenda series, president Lucy Liu told me that the firm still plans to be “IPO-ready” by the end of the year, but added that it’s “just not the best time, given how complicated things are.”

One can’t blame her for thinking that way. 2026 already boasts two key IPOs—SpaceX’s $85.7 billion debut and SK Hynix’s $26.5 billion ADR sale—and potentially a third in Anthropic’s. (OpenAI is reportedly considering a debut in 2027.) 

And it’s not just the U.S. Shanghai has already had one blockbuster IPO, in ChangXin Memory Technologies’ $9.8 billion listing. And Alibaba just tapped Hong Kong’s equity markets for a $10 billion share sale.

A smaller company–even one as buzzy as Airwallex–might get lost in the shuffle as bigger investors hold on to their cash. 

Other startups have delayed their IPO plans. Travel platform Klook filed for a New York IPO last November. The company originally scheduled it for the end of 2025, then delayed it until early 2026, and has remained studiously quiet since then. (Klook’s founder Ethan Lin declined to comment on the company’s IPO plans when my colleague Angelica Ang spoke to him earlier this year.)

But it’s also not clear that companies like Airwallex need to go public right now. The company raised $330 million in December, and then raised another $320 million in June. “We just want to be able to have enough capital to fast-charge our plans,” Liu told me, as the company barrels into agentic commerce and automated bookkeeping. 

“Investors are going more towards later-stage investments,” Liu added. “It’s not that they don’t have capital. They just want to see success, right? They want to see a track record before they deploy capital into that particular company.”

Airwallex’s June funding round was a “Series H” round, which isn’t that ridiculous in the world of tech anymore. Databricks is reportedly putting together a Series M round, amid social media jokes that these funding rounds are soon going to run out of letters.

Liu’s story with Airwallex starts in 2015, when she met fellow cofounders Jack Zhang and Max Li; she eventually offered them $1 million in seed capital, twice what they’d asked for. She noted to me that she had a “bit of an overconfidence situation” at the start: “I would be on a plane almost every other day.”

Now, the company is pushing into markets like Mexico, South Korea, Brazil and, importantly, the U.S. It recently moved its headquarters from Australia—which Liu admitted is “quite small” for companies thinking of going global—to Singapore and San Francisco.

That headquarters shift is meant to help its path into the U.S., which hasn’t entirely been smooth. Last November, venture capitalist Keith Rabois (who sits on the board of Ramp, a competitor) called Airwallex a “Chinese backdoor into sensitive American data.” That accusation got picked up by Senator Tom Cotton, who claimed the startup’s “ties to Communist China run deep,” and called for a CFIUS investigation.

Airwallex has pushed back against the claims. CEO Jack Zhang has called them “false,” noted that its China-based staff can’t access U.S. data, and added that third-party companies were hired to audit its data security practices. (Liu, in our conversation, pointed to previous statements by Airwallex.)

So, Zhang, Liu, and Airwallex’s cofounders can probably afford to wait until things settle down before getting an IPO on the calendar. 

But there’s a risk in waiting too long: Just look at Shein, and the 75% haircut it’s taking on its valuation—or Airtable, which never went public and sold at an 80% discount to Bending Spoons. Airwallex can afford to wait, but perhaps not forever.

See you tomorrow,

Nicholas Gordon
X:
@nickrigordon
Email: nicholas.gordon@fortune.com
Submit a deal for the Term Sheet newsletter here.

Joey Abrams curated the deals section of today’s newsletter. Subscribe here.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

A 63-year-old Supreme Court ruling about two Philadelphia banks is now the central legal weapon in the fight over Paramount’s $110 billion deal to buy Warner Bros. Discovery – a transaction that passed muster with the Justice Department and in every one of the 68 jurisdictions around the world where it was reviewed – but that 12 state attorneys general are suing to block, citing that decades-old case as their guiding precedent.

When, in United States v. Philadelphia National Bank (PNB), the Supreme Court blocked two Philadelphia banks from merging, banking was simple to measure. The product was checking accounts and loans, and the market was one city. The Court set out an arbitrary rule of thumb, deciding that if a merger gives you about 30% of a market, courts will assume it hurts competition. This standard was derived from the static and predictable market of bricks and mortar banking in a local area. But, by making up that 30% threshold, the case created the machinery to answer the question Congress wanted to address – whether a merger would substantially lessen competition. If PNB’s 30% market-share threshold is triggered by the states’ narrow market definition, however, it would create a legal presumption of harm the states are counting on to win, even without proving actual consumer damage.

There is a broad debate over the applicability of PNB to modern anti-trust cases, with many legal scholars finding the application of a random number, without any real analysis of the potential harm a merger might cause, to be a fatal flaw. In the Paramount case, the problem is more sharply defined because of how the states are using PNB. The rule is broadly triggered at the 30% threshold, and the states have drawn their market lines to get the number they need.

The math was easier in 1963 because banking in Philadelphia really was a closed world. If you wanted a checking account, you went to a local bank, period.

The states measure the Paramount deal the same way, as if entertainment still came in closed boxes. Their case counts wide-release theatrical movies and the basic cable bundle, and leaves out streaming, YouTube, sports rights, and everything else that now competes for the same hours of your evening. It is like declaring someone the tallest person in the room after sending everyone taller out the door.

Ask any household how they actually watch. YouTube is now the most-watched form of television in America. Streaming makes up nearly the majority of all TV time. Netflix and Amazon are buying up live sports. The complaint implies the combined company is dominant in a market that viewers are walking away from. The fact that plaintiffs can gerrymander market definitions to trigger PNB’s structural presumption is exactly the kind of abuse that has led scholars to argue PNB should be overturned. Here is the strange part. Under certain interpretations of the 1963 rule, courts are not allowed to weigh whether a merger might make competition stronger overall. The Supreme Court once said benefits in one area cannot excuse concentration in another, and courts have followed that ever since.

But that application asks for a throwaway line to carry far more weight than was intended. At most, PNB stands for the narrow proposition that a merging firm can’t justify harm in one market by pointing to unrelated benefits in another. It does not say a court must ignore everything outside a narrowly drawn market. Some enforcers have stretched it that far regardless, which is exactly what the states are leaning on.

The one question at the center of this deal, whether combining two old-line studios helps them compete with Netflix, Amazon, Apple, and YouTube, should still be given consideration. In a streaming market where content is king, the need to compete by constantly churning out new films and shows is what will incentivize the two studios to up their game and produce more quality features. The competitive dynamics cannot be ignored.

Neither can consumers and the simplest question is probably the most important – how, under this merger, does an ordinary viewer suffer harm? The states lead with statistics instead of a story about real harm, probably because the harm story is weaker than the math.

Now run it the other way. If the deal closes, you get one studio with the scale and incentive to invest and compete with the tech platforms. If it dies, you get two isolated companies struggling to keep up. Blocking this merger does not protect competition.

Antitrust law is supposed to protect competition and the people who benefit from it. A yardstick built for neighborhood banks cannot measure a business where a teenager’s phone competes with a movie theater.

There is also a bigger problem here. Federal enforcers ran a modern analysis and cleared this deal. Then a dozen state officials re-ran it under a 63-year-old rule in a courthouse they picked. If that can happen to any deal, federal clearance means very little.

Congress should make sure that deals of true national scope get one expert review under one modern standard, the way Europe has done for decades. Until then, Philadelphia National Bank will keep being used as a stand-in for the argument about consumer harm that the states cannot actually make.

The opinions expressed in Fortune.com commentary pieces are solely the views of their authors and do not necessarily reflect the opinions and beliefs of Fortune.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Good morning. On Fortune’s radar today:

➡️ Did someone forward you this email? If you would like to receive this information directly, every morning before the markets open in New York, sign up here.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

  • In today’s CEO Daily: Patrick Kelleher explains why robots that can do a Vulcan salute are more impressive than those that can run faster than Usain Bolt
  • The big leadership story: Offshore nuclear power: A question of ‘when, not if’
  • The markets: Stocks mixed after renewed Iran conflict and Warsh’s Jackson Hole comments
  • Plus: All the news and watercooler chat from Fortune.

Good morning. Last week’s World Humanoid Robot Games in Beijing showcased more than 2,000 robots, one of which beat Usain Bolt’s world record in the 100-meter sprint. Another was able to surpass humans in a 2.88-meter standing high jump. But humanoids that can run and jump aren’t particularly useful to GXO Logistics CEO Patrick Kelleher. For his business, the ideal is one that has the strength to unload a truck, and the dexterity to sort lipstick—as some of the humanoids working in his operations can now do.

The $13.6 billion-a-year global logistics giant is running pilots with five humanoid-robotics providers, and another European pilot is expected later this year. A big focus is on what he calls “single-digit challenges”—getting robot hands to more closely mimic human hands. 

“One of the great innovations we participated in this year was working on the ability of humanoid hands to go like this,” Kelleher told me, moving his fingers apart and together in a gesture that reminded me of a Vulcan salute.  “This requires multiple flexible joints [and] will be game-changing in terms of what a humanoid can do.”

GXO is working with two kinds of humanoids: bipedals that walk around on two legs, and those that have a wheel and a base. What differentiates humanoids from industrial robots is their degrees of freedom, or ability to mimic the 200-plus movements that the human body is capable of. While a typical industrial robot has four to six movements, humanoids can now have more than 100 degrees of freedom.

Kelleher is not looking to replace the 150,000 people who currently work for him, he says, but rather to supplement them and address an industry-wide challenge. “We have 25% turnover in the warehouse environment … and we can’t find enough labor,” said Kelleher. “Humanoid robotics AI is really about helping our associates do their job better, more productively, and more easily, at higher quality.”

The experiments are turning GXO into a proving ground for a new model of human-machine collaboration: “The warehouse has become a hotbed of technology and innovation. We’re working with our partners on fully autonomous forklifts and humanoids that work where it’s minus 32 degrees, in the freezer,” he told me. “It used to be warehousing and outsourcing was about labor arbitrage, getting people to do a job at lower cost, and it’s really evolved now to become an arbitrage of expertise …. We are the living lab. It’s exciting.”

Contact CEO Daily via Diane Brady at diane.brady@fortune.com

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Chinese fast-fashion business Shein Global Holdings Ltd. was once worth more than the parent companies of H&M and Zara, giving its reclusive boss Sky Xu a net worth of more than $23 billion.

But Xu’s fortunes have turned in four short years as Shein battles tariffs, political scrutiny and growing competition. Shein is set to go public in Hong Kong on Tuesday at just over a quarter of the $100 billion it was worth in 2022. Xu’s personal wealth, based on his 30% stake, falls to about $8 billion at the listing price, according to the Bloomberg Billionaires Index.

The more than $15 billion decline in Xu’s riches also comes down to poor timing. Chinese consumer brands that went public over the past year or so initially drew strong investor interest until a string of artificial-intelligence companies made their debuts, stealing their thunder and minting new billionaires

“They definitely missed the window,” Sam Wyatt, an international-equities portfolio manager at U Ethical Investors based in Melbourne, said of Shein’s initial public offering. E-commerce is now a less attractive story to investors than AI, he said.

Read More: Shein Bets on Everlane Acquisition to Kickstart Empire Post-IPO

While some AI companies have delivered blistering first-day gains, the overall performance of Hong Kong IPOs has been mixed. Shares of beverage maker Eastroc Beverage Group Co. and pig breeder Muyuan Foods Co. are both trading below their listing prices after debuts that exceeded $1 billion. The brothers who founded Mixue Group, a fast-growing bubble-tea chain, have seen their wealth shrink by more than a fifth since the company went public last year.

A Shein spokesperson didn’t respond to a request for comment.

Xu, 43, started Shein in 2012 with three partners. They had all worked at the same search-engine marketing company and used their experience to grow Shein into an online retailer known for cheap, trendy clothes. The business flourished during the Covid-19 pandemic, when young shoppers fueled an explosion of sales.

Revenue growth has slowed since then, according to data Shein disclosed in July ahead of its IPO. One of the company’s key strategies — sidestepping import taxes in the US and Europe through small shipments — was upended last year when the Trump administration ended a key tariff exemption and the European Union announced a fixed customs duty on small parcels. 

“The direction of the market is changing, not in Shein’s favor, especially in the recent years,” said Sheng Lu, a professor in fashion and apparel studies at the University of Delaware. AI is also leveling the playing field for Shein’s competitors, who would be able to cater better and more quickly to changing consumer tastes, he said. 

Shein tried to go public during its heyday but struggled to gain traction in New York and London, where the company faced scrutiny over its labor practices. The company’s supply chain is rooted in China but relies on the US and Europe as key markets. Executives distanced the brand from its Chinese origins and moved its global headquarters to Singapore, though they ultimately needed Chinese regulators’ approval for an IPO. 

“Shein was the hottest topic two to three years ago — a Chinese firm that could have IPO’ed in the US because it already had a strong fast-fashion brand in the US and strong consumer recognition,” said Jason Hsu, chief investment officer at Rayliant Global Advisors. “But the hot topic now is AI.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Imagine an executive team gathering to discuss its most urgent strategic priority: artificial intelligence. The CEO wants AI to become a new engine of growth. The CIO wants to deploy copilots. The COO sees opportunities to automate processes. The head of product wants AI-enabled offerings. The CHRO is worried about how AI will reshape work. Everyone agrees that AI is the future. Everyone agrees that the company needs to innovate. And everyone leaves the meeting talking about something different. 

This is increasingly the real innovation problem inside large organizations. We use one word, “innovation,” to describe fundamentally different kinds of work. Adopting a technology. Improving a process. Launching a product. Creating a business model. Transforming an organization. Responding to a crisis. Everyone uses the same word and assumes alignment. There isn’t any.

I’ve been called the “Dean of Innovation” for nearly four decades, although the title started more as a bit of good-natured ribbing than a credential. I was 27 and Vice President of New Ventures at Domino’s Pizza during the company’s explosive growth in the 1980s when I attended a retreat with Tom Peters, the legendary business author. Somehow “Dean of Innovation” emerged from the gathering, and my older colleagues at Domino’s found it amusing enough to make it stick. Since then, I’ve worked with much of the Fortune 500, the U.S. military, and more cultural organizations than I can remember. After decades of tours of duty inside organizations trying to make innovation actually happen, I’ve become convinced of one thing: almost nobody means the same thing when they use the word.

The result is predictable: resources scatter, expectations conflict, and initiatives are managed with the wrong processes and measured by the wrong metrics. Most companies don’t need more innovation. They need a better way to talk about it. 

Stop Asking, ‘Is It Innovative?

For decades, executives and academics have tried to define innovation: incremental or radical, sustaining or disruptive, product or process. A better question is simpler: Innovative compared with what? Innovation is positive deviance from the norm that creates value. The same practice can be revolutionary in one company, incremental in another, and obsolete in a third. For a traditional company with decades of legacy systems, using AI to redesign a core process may represent a major departure from the norm. For an AI-native startup, it may be table stakes. The technology may be similar. The starting points are not. That is why leaders should ask two questions: What norm are we breaking? What new value are we creating, and for whom? Without those answers, “innovation” is little more than a corporate aspiration. 

Nvidia’s extraordinary rise, for example, cannot be explained simply by saying the company innovated. Its graphics processing capabilities were repeatedly extended into new arenas, most consequentially AI computing. That is the real work of innovation: departing from the existing norm in a way that creates new value. And the farther an idea departs from the norm, the harder it becomes to prove that it will work. 

The Data Trap

Executives are trained to demand evidence before committing resources. That is generally good management. It can also kill innovation. The paradox is simple: The more genuinely novel an idea is, the less reliable the historical data becomes. A modest improvement to an existing product can usually be modeled. Customers are known. Costs can be estimated. Competitors can be studied. But what happens when a company enters a market that does not yet exist or deploys a technology whose capabilities and economics are changing every few months? 

Consider generative AI. In late 2022, no executive could produce a credible five-year ROI model. The technology, costs, competitors, regulations, and use cases were changing too quickly. The companies that waited for certainty did not reduce uncertainty. They simply learned more slowly. This is the data trap. The ideas with the strongest evidence are usually those most similar to what the organization already does. Demand too much proof, and you unintentionally select for the familiar. Innovation gradually becomes optimization. 

Instead of asking, “Can you prove this will work?” ask, “What is the cheapest, fastest experiment that will tell us something important?” In established operations, data informs action. In innovation, action often creates the data. Experiments do not validate the plan. They create the knowledge from which a plan can eventually be built. 

Innovation Is Not One Game

Organizations also make the mistake of treating innovation as a single activity. It isn’t. UPS improving route efficiency is largely an optimization challenge. The system exists, data is abundant, and progress can be measured precisely. A company responding to a cyberattack is playing a different game. Speed matters more than perfect information. A legacy company building an AI-enabled service faces uncertainty about customers, pricing, and the business model. Small experiments and staged investments are appropriate. An automaker shifting toward electric and software-defined vehicles faces something larger still: a transformation affecting manufacturing, suppliers, talent, capital, and organizational identity. 

All four require good management. They do not require the same management. Yet companies routinely force them through the same stage gates, funding processes, and metrics. Before choosing the process, leaders should ask: How large is the departure from what we already know? How quickly must we move? How much uncertainty exists? The answers should determine the team, funding, governance, metrics, and pace, not the other way around. 

Most Corporate ‘Innovation’ Is Actually Something Else

Companies call almost every form of change “innovation”. Installing a new ERP system. Adopting Microsoft Copilot. Reorganizing a business unit. Digitizing a process. Running a hackathon. These activities may be valuable. But they are not the same kind of work. A useful distinction is simple: Creativity produces possibilities. Innovation develops and tests novel possibilities to create value. Change gets people to adopt and scale what has been chosen. Buying an AI platform is technology acquisition. Getting thousands of employees to use it is change management. Discovering a fundamentally new way to create customer value with it is innovation. A company can succeed at the first two without accomplishing the third. 

This is why counting AI pilots tells us little about whether an organization is becoming more innovative. Automating an existing process may increase productivity. Deploying copilots may help employees work faster. Those may be excellent investments. But adoption is not invention, and efficiency is not necessarily innovation. 

The Danger of False Alignment

Return to the executive meeting. The CFO believes the AI initiative should reduce costs within 12 months. The head of product wants new sources of revenue. The CIO wants a secure technology platform. The CHRO wants to redesign work. All four may be right. But unless those differences are made explicit, the initiative will eventually be judged against conflicting expectations. The organization does not have an execution problem. It has a language problem. 

Leaders often respond by pushing harder for alignment. But in uncertain situations, disagreement is information. One executive may see an efficiency opportunity. Another sees a competitive threat. A third sees a new business model. The goal should not be to eliminate those differences too quickly. It should be to make them visible. That is not dysfunction. That is clarity. 

A Five-Question Language for Innovation

Executives do not need another elaborate innovation taxonomy. They need a few questions they can use in a meeting, funding review, or conversation with a team. Before approving any innovation initiative, ask five. 

  • 1. What norm are we breaking? Is it a norm inside our company, our industry, the technology, or customer expectations? If you cannot identify the norm being broken, you may simply be improving what already exists. 
  • 2. What new value are we creating, and for whom? Innovation is not novelty. “We need an AI strategy” is no more useful than saying “we need an internet strategy” was 25 years ago. The technology is not the strategy. The question is what becomes possible now that was not possible before. If the value cannot be named, the initiative may be technology theater. 
  • 3. How big is the departure from what we already know? An incremental improvement may involve familiar customers, technologies, and economics. A new business model may call all three into question. Small departures can often be planned. Large departures need to be learned. Match the size of the investment to the amount of knowledge available. 
  • 4. How fast do we need to move? Speed is not always a virtue. A cybersecurity breach may demand action in hours. A new business model may take years to mature. The question is not, “How can we move faster?” It is: What is the appropriate speed for this kind of uncertainty? 
  • 5. What is the next experiment? Not: What is the five-year plan? Not: When can we scale it? What is the next experiment? A good experiment answers an important question at an acceptable cost. Will customers use it? Can the technology work under real conditions? Will someone pay for it? What assumption, if wrong, would cause the idea to fail? The purpose is not to prove that the team was right. It is to learn what is true. The real failure is spending two years building something that could have been disproven in two weeks. 

Change the Questions, Change the Conversation

Instead of asking, “Is it innovative?” ask, “What norm are we breaking?” Instead of asking, “What is the ROI?” ask, “What must we learn before investing more?” Instead of asking, “What is the plan?” ask, “What is the next experiment?” Instead of asking, “Are we aligned?” ask, “Where do we see the problem differently?” Instead of asking, “How quickly can we scale?” ask, “Have we created enough value to scale yet?” 

These questions do not eliminate uncertainty. They make it manageable. An optimization effort should be accountable for results. An experiment should be accountable for learning. A crisis response should be accountable for speed. A transformation should be accountable for building capabilities. When leaders use the same language and metrics for all four, they create confusion. When they distinguish among them, they can manage each more intelligently. 

Innovation Is Something You Navigate

As AI accelerates technological change, more initiatives will be labeled innovative. More companies will launch pilots, labs, and strategic initiatives. More money will be committed before leaders agree on what kind of problem they are actually trying to solve. The companies that succeed will not necessarily be those with the most ideas. They will be the ones that can distinguish optimization from invention, adoption from experimentation, evidence from assumptions, and plans from learning. They will know when to demand data and when to create it. When to move quickly and when to be patient. When to scale and when to experiment. 

Innovation has always been difficult to define because it is not a fixed thing. It changes with the organization, the industry, the technology, and the moment. That is why the search for a perfect definition has always been a dead end. Innovation does not need another definition. It needs a language leaders can actually use. 

The opinions expressed in Fortune.com commentary pieces are solely the views of their authors and do not necessarily reflect the opinions and beliefs of Fortune.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

CEOs have been warning professionals that AI won’t take their jobs—it’ll actually be their tech-savvy coworkers snatching up opportunities. Now, those who aren’t riding the wave of the AI job boom may be leaving $100,000 on the table, especially women.

AI job postings in the U.S. have doubled since 2023, according to a recent LinkedIn analysis, but women only accounted for 26% of hires in jobs that required AI skills last year, compared to their 50% representation rate in non-AI roles. And moving up the totem pole, they’re even less likely to be included; across 27 countries in the world, women hold only 13% of tech-related C-suite positions at AI companies. However, it isn’t for a lack of trying.

“The findings suggest that while AI is becoming an increasingly important source of career growth and economic opportunity, women aren’t being afforded these opportunities,” the LinkedIn report says.

Women are missing out on thousands of dollars each year thanks to the gender imbalance in the AI job market. The professional platform’s study found that AI is pumping out some of the “fastest-growing and highest-paying opportunities in today’s labor market”; the average AI job posting offers an annual salary of around $177,000, compared to non-AI roles which typically pay roughly $80,000. 

Of course, women are already well-acquainted with being underpaid and undervalued—the gender wage gap even widened slightly last year, as women earned 18.6% less than men for doing the same work. Now they’re being boxed out of lucrative AI jobs while professionals in the male-dominated industry reel home $100,000 more each year. 

Fewer women are occupying high-level AI jobs that pay $300K

AI’s gender opportunity gap isn’t just about whether women are using AI. It all starts with who is given access to high-level positions, where tech skills can translate into serious earning power. 

It should be noted that women tend to view AI more negatively than men. Working women are more concerned for their career security, skeptical that the risks outweigh the benefits, and wary of harmful bias reverberating throughout the algorithms. They’re twice as likely as men to say that AI will negatively impact them over the next two decades, as opposed to leaving a positive mark. So it checks out that women are 22% less likely than men to be regular AI users at work.

But skepticism around the technology doesn’t fully explain the gap. Even women who make it into the AI workforce are less likely to land roles with the biggest paychecks and influence. LinkedIn found that women only make up 20% of head of AI roles, which typically pay $236,000 a year. They also only account for 26% of director of AI positions (around $300,000 annually), and 18% of member of technical staff jobs (roughly $245,000 each year). 

And just like the C-suite trends seen across real estate, tech, and finance, women’s representation is whittled down at each layer. In general, women’s occupation in AI roles is 10% lower than their share in jobs unrelated to the tech. And at AI-focused companies, women account for 5% less of the workforce compared to businesses outside of the industry. LinkedIn says the biggest gap appears at the top level: a “leadership penalty” may be holding them back from bigger titles. The gender gap for C-suite roles is 15% wider than for roles below the executive level. 

Together, three “Triple Penalty” barriers have been keeping women back from thriving professionally in the AI era: working in leadership roles, working in AI jobs, and working at AI companies. Closing those gaps is critical to ensure that women aren’t left behind in the very economy they’re helping build.

“AI is creating some of the fastest-growing and highest paying jobs in the economy,” the August LinkedIn report said. “Yet women remain less represented in many of the jobs, companies, and leadership roles shaping AI’s future.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

The world’s largest chipmaker, Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Company, released quarterly results that almost any company would envy: a 40% jump in revenue to $40.2 billion, and a 77% jump in profit to $22.3 billion. Investors, though, decided those gaudy numbers weren’t enough. The next day, TSMC shares dropped 7.3%—and dragged Taiwan’s benchmark TAIEX index down in the biggest single-day point decline on record.

TSMC’s outsize role poses a challenge for Sherman Lin, the chair of the Taiwan Stock Exchange Corporation, which runs the island’s main stock exchange. According to Bloomberg calculations, Taiwan overtook India to become the world’s fifth-largest stock market—behind only the U.S., mainland China, Japan, and Hong Kong—in May. And yet two-fifths of that value comes from TSMC. 

That’s why Lin and his colleagues at the stock exchange are trying to make sure that investors, domestic and foreign, give all of Taiwan’s other companies a close look too. 

“The best way to understand Taiwan is as a technology island,” he says. “We’re like an industrial park. Companies can have fast and agile collaborations among the supply chain.” He rattles off the cities along the corridor that runs from Taipei down through Taoyuan, Hsinchu, Taichung and Kaohsiung with manufacturers all within a few hours’ drive of each other. “Technology really is in our DNA,” he adds.

Taiwan’s pitch contrasts to other equity markets in the region: Hong Kong, for example, is a gateway into mainland China; Singapore is trying to position itself as a home for Southeast Asian companies. Lin, however, is focused on technology. 

“When global investors invest in Taiwan, they are not simply investing in one company,” he says. “They are investing in the value created by an entire AI ecosystem and supply chain.” 

TSMC, ‘Taiwan’s most iconic company’

It’s impossible to talk about Taiwan’s stock market and not mention Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Company (TSMC), the world’s leading producer of advanced chips and supplier to companies like Apple and Nvidia. The company is worth close to $2 trillion, making it the most valuable company based in Asia.

It makes over 40% of the TAIEX, Taiwan’s benchmark index; it carries an even larger weighting on third-party indices, like the MSCI Taiwan Index where TSMC accounts for as much as 60% . (The second-largest company on MSCI’s index, MediaTek, has only 5% weighting). Taiwanese often call the company the “sacred mountain” protecting the island’s economy and stock market. 

“TSMC is undoubtedly Taiwan’s most iconic company,” Lin says. “But our real competitive advantage is not that we have one or two world-class companies. It’s that we have the world’s most complete and competitive AI ecosystem.”

Jimmy Beunardeau / Hans Lucas—AFP via Getty Images

The macroeconomic data backs him up: Taiwan’s government now forecasts growth of 11% for 2026, which would be the fastest growth rate since 1987.

TSMC “sits on top of a much broader Taiwanese AI-picks-and-shovels supply chain, with hundreds of small-cap investable stocks,” says Ram Thirukkonda, a senior investment strategist at Acadian Asset Management. “Many of the smaller companies in this group have outperformed even TSMC over roughly the last three years.”

Still, he points out that Taiwan’s industry is more focused on chip foundries, meaning gains are “steadier” compared to the more wild swings seen in South Korea’s equity markets. 

‘Hidden champions’

Lin is trying to push investors to consider what he calls “hidden champions,” or profitable companies in sectors that may get overlooked by more electronics-focused investors. In January, TWSE’s index subsidiary launched the “Taiwan Pristine Stock Index,” tilting away from the electronics sector to include biotechnology, construction, food, sports and leisure. 

Another bet from the stock exchange is the “Taiwan Innovation Board,” launched in 2021 for companies in AI, semiconductors, green energy and other priority sectors. “It’s a kind of revolution for us,” Lin says. “We’d like to take advantage of overseas attention and shift it to the Taiwan Innovation Board.” 

The board is still small, with fewer than 30 listed companies, compared to more than 1,000 on the main market. But TIB-listed companies are strong performers: Shares of companies listed on the Innovation Board are up by 177% for the year so far. 

Taiwan had 70 IPOs across the Taiwan Stock Exchange and Taipei Exchange in 2025, which together raised $3.3 billion, a record amount for the island’s stock markets. Forty percent of these IPOs were from companies in the AI supply chain, according to Brenda Hu, a senior vice president at TWSE. 

Still, Taiwan isn’t raising anywhere near the same amount of money as major financial centers. Hong Kong, for example, raised $37.4 billion across 119 deals last year, making it the world’s top IPO venue for 2025. And this year, Shanghai’s STAR Market has won its own mega-tech IPOs from companies like memory maker ChangXin Memory Technologies and robotics firm Unitree. 

Taiwan is also pursuing a program to encourage companies to improve their shareholder value, following in the footsteps of Japan and South Korea. The “Power Up” program pushes Taiwan-listed companies to strengthen their corporate governance and make their disclosures more transparent. As of January, almost 46% of TWSE-listed companies had announced their “power up” plans.

A similar effort in Japan pushed companies to unwind their complicated cross-shareholding structures and expand their share buyback programs, helping lift the value of Japanese companies. These reforms are partly credited for lifting Japan’s stock market, which had languished in a slump for over a decade, to record highs in recent years. 

“The main goal of Power Up is very simple: Reduce the information gap,” Lin says. “We would like companies like TSMC and Wiwynn to report to investors on their mid- and long-term strategies.”

‘Perfect timing’

The U.S. and Europe account for 80% of foreign investment into Taiwan; Lin calls these markets his “first priorities.” Yet he’s also interested in the Middle East, which he describes as a “rich area” that TWSE has only made “small steps” into. 

Hu also names India and Japan as sources of investment, and suggests that Taiwan’s ETFs and savings accounts could be attractive to those outside Taiwan. 

Taiwan has become a growing hub for wealth in the region—in part due to the AI boom. Hu estimates that Taiwan has around 772,000 people with over $1 million in assets, the fifth-highest number in Asia. Eighty percent of them put their wealth into financial assets, the highest proportion in Asia. 

Some things about Taiwan will not be changing quickly. The exchange operates from 9:00 a.m. to 1:30 p.m. and closes before most of Asia-Pacific. Other Asian markets are considering ditching some long-term practices in order to keep trading for longer: Hong Kong, for example, recently allowed the market to stay open during typhoons and extreme weather, and is even considering keeping it open over lunch.

I-Hwa Cheng—AFP via Getty Images

Lin had previously floated the possibility of expanding trading hours to 3:30 p.m., with no lunch break. Regulators, however, disagreed, with Financial Supervisory Commission chairman Peng Jin-lung calling it “not a priority” and noting it wouldn’t move forward until there was more consensus among Taiwanese stakeholders. 

When asked about these reforms, Lin suggests that Taiwan has “different characteristics” from its peers. “In Taiwan, retail investor protection is quite important,” Lin explains. “The first priority for us is to take care of local investors and give them a more fair and efficient trading process.”

Still, Lin seems to see today’s AI boom as an opportunity to push for change and build Taiwan’s profile. Even as earnings among semiconductor manufacturers keep growing, there’s still an subtle fear among investors and analysts that things will eventually come back down to Earth. 

From Lin’s perspective, the energy around AI and semiconducts could last for another two or three years, making it an especially timely moment to act. “This is perfect timing for us,” he says.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Welcome to Eye on AI. Beatrice Nolan here. In today’s issue:

Enterprises are starting to look beyond America for their AI needs. 

As Chinese open-weight AI models increasingly close the gap with their closed-source U.S. counterparts, more enterprises are warming to the idea of using Chinese alternatives. It’s easy to see why: open-weight models offer companies more opportunities to fine-tune AI models, are much cheaper, and generally give enterprises more control, including more assurance that their data isn’t being used to train potentially competing products.

While Anthropic and OpenAI still dominate how American businesses buy AI, new spending data suggests that at least a minor shift is underway.

According to Ramp’s latest AI Index—which tracks token and subscription spend across its customer base—the share of businesses paying for model serving platforms, which give companies access to open source and Chinese-developed models, rose to 6.1% of total AI-spending businesses in July, up from 4.5% in January 2026.

The shift may show increased enterprise interest in open-weight models such as Moonshot’s Kimi K3, which made waves on its release for being both an unusually large open-weight model but also one that showed coding and agentic performance close to leading proprietary systems.

Z.AI, another Chinese AI lab, this week confirmed that it built Ox Alpha, a previously anonymous model that had been performing well on AI benchmarks and gained enthusiastic reviews from AI developers over the weekend. The company has renamed it GLM-5.3-Flash and said it will charge $0.15 per million input tokens and $0.50 per million output tokens—another aggressively priced Chinese offering in a market where DeepSeek and Moonshot have already put pressure on rivals’ pricing. Z.ai is also thought to close to releasing a larger version of GLM-5.3 that many believe will rival some of the best models from Anthropic and OpenAI in cyber capabilities, potentially a watershed event that many fear will usher in a new era of AI-powered cyber attacks for which industry is woefully unprepared.

China is now clearly ahead in the open-model race. For example, Hugging Face found that, in almost every month of 2026, the largest and most capable open model came from a Chinese lab, while the U.S.’s most notable recent challengers have come from Thinking Machines Lab, and, more recently, Meta. But those American releases have generally not matched Kimi K3’s scale or developer pull.

Alex Brunicki, a partner at Backed VC, told me he’s already seeing a shift in how enterprises are approaching open source models.

“We’ve seen a lot of companies…developing industry‑specific foundation models using open source models that are then fine tuned on very particular data sets,” he said. “They’re not necessarily using the frontier models for all of the work that they’re doing. They’re actually using these open source models which are free to use.”

At least two established organizations have recently publicly switched to open-source for some areas of their business. Thomson Reuters said this week it has built an in-house model, called Thomson-1, based on Snowdon, a system the company developed by adapting Alibaba’s open-source Qwen model.

The model will handle document-review tasks that previously ran on Claude. As part of the announcement, CTO Joel Hron said companies do not need ever-larger, more expensive models to get useful results, and that starting from a strong open foundation and specializing it deeply can produce capable AI at lower cost.

Harvey, the legal tech firm backed by OpenAI, Sequoia, and Andreessen Horowitz, also recently announced that its new model, Harvey Tenet, was post-trained on top of Moonshot AI’s open-weight Kimi K3 and that it outperformed both its base model and U.S. frontier systems, including Fable 5 and GPT-5.6 Sol, on complex legal agentic tasks. Harvey had previously built its product by customizing closed models from Anthropic, OpenAI, and Google.

Ramp’s lead economist, Ara Kharazian, wrote that recent growth of open-source has not yet dented spending on OpenAI or Anthropic directly. New AI buyers are still choosing the established American labs; for example, Anthropic gained the most ground among businesses in July, rising 1.1 percentage points to 43.5% market share, and OpenAI climbed just 0.23 points to 39.7%.

However, Anthropic’s Fable 5, thought to be the most advanced model on the market—so much so that the U.S. government briefly suspended foreign access to it for national security purposes— accounted for just 6% of tokens businesses purchase from Anthropic and 11.4% of dollars spent on Anthropic models overall, despite being priced at roughly $10 per million tokens, twice the cost of OpenAI’s GPT-5.6 Sol. 

That model, by comparison, makes up 25% of OpenAI’s tokens and 23% of its spend. Kharazian argues Fable 5 has effectively found the market’s ceiling, and businesses are not willing to pay a premium for the best model on the market when a cheaper one is good enough.

Taken together, all this may suggest American frontier labs have found the limit on what customers will pay for the newest, most expensive model, and open-source may just be stepping in to fill that gap.

With that, here’s more AI news.

Beatrice Nolan
beatrice.nolan@fortune.com
@beafreyanolan

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

When North Carolina-based writer Pat Brothwell received a message request on LinkedIn from a New York matchmaker, he initially thought it might be a scam. 

Instead, Brothwell said the sender, Marin Haugo, invited him to discuss potential matches through Maar Dating Club NYC. During their meeting, the matchmaker appeared to have done little research into his background. 

“It felt like when a headhunter contacts you, and they just did a very cursory search,” Brothwell told Fortune. “She didn’t actually look into it because all her clients are based in New York. I live in Asheville, North Carolina.” 

Brothwell said the matchmaker reassured him that distance wouldn’t be an issue, and suggested he fly to New York for dates if necessary, a comment that made him suspect her clients were in “different tax brackets” than most.

“There was a weird angle of, ‘I have wealthy clients, and I’m gonna try to find someone who’s just excited to date somebody wealthy,’” Brothwell said. “Everything just felt like it was maybe a little bit more than met the eye.”

Brothwell never met any of the matchmaker’s clients after the meeting, which he said took place three years ago. He said Haugo stopped responding when he told her he was a nonfiction author and was participating for research purposes. Brothwell assumed it was because Haugo feared being written about on his blog. Haugo did not respond to Fortune’s request for comment.

LinkedIn’s romance problem

The encounter illustrates an uncomfortable tension on LinkedIn: Some users and matchmakers treat the professional network as a source for romantic prospects, even though the company explicitly prohibits members from using it to pursue them.

“LinkedIn is a professional networking platform, not a dating site,”  LinkedIn’s professional community policies state. “Do not use LinkedIn to pursue romantic connections, ask for romantic dates, or provide sexual commentary on someone’s appearance or perceived attractiveness.”

But a June Zety survey of more than 1,000 U.S. employees found that one in four believe it’s “fair game” for romantic advances. The survey also found that 22% had reached out or responded to someone on LinkedIn with romantic intent, while 12% had formed a romantic relationship that originated on LinkedIn. 

LinkedIn says it removes unwanted advances on the platform and sexually explicit material. 

In the second half of 2025, LinkedIn removed 477,911 comments that provoked harassment or abuse and 80,806 comments that used adult language or imagery using its harmful message detector, according to LinkedIn’s transparency report. The advanced safety detector, which screens incoming messages for policy violations, must be manually enabled by users.

“Our focus is on making sure that people are safe from unwanted romantic advances, which do go against our professional community policies,” a LinkedIn spokesperson told Fortune.

If a user violates one of LinkedIn’s policies, the platform sends a warning, and repeated violations often result in restricted access to LinkedIn features. In the most serious violations, a user may be permanently banned from the platform.

Why LinkedIn has become a dating-vetting tool

Searching a person’s public profile before a date is different from using LinkedIn’s messaging tools to make an unsolicited romantic advance—and more closely resembles the kind of online due diligence that has become routine in app-based dating. 

“With over 100 million verified members, it’s not a surprise that people come to LinkedIn,” the LinkedIn spokesperson said. “But LinkedIn is a platform for professional growth and career advancement, not finding a date.”

Nevertheless, online daters use LinkedIn as a vetting tool, with almost half of Zety’s survey respondents believing that information posted to the platform is more reliable than jobs and college attendance shown on dating apps such as Hinge.

While LinkedIn matchmakers are strictly prohibited under the platform’s guidelines, professional matchmakers recommend researching potential partners online, including scanning their LinkedIn profiles.

“Relationship-minded singles are increasingly frustrated and fatigued by fake profiles, misleading information, safety concerns, and the lack of context on dating apps,” the director of coaching at The Matchmaking Company, Heather Drury, told Fortune. “As a result, singles have become their own private investigators. Some are turning to LinkedIn as an additional tool in their vetting process.”

The Matchmaking Company is a family-owned and operated matchmaking firm with brick-and-mortar locations in 24 states. The company has previously used LinkedIn to scout potential matches for its clients.

“Professional photos, career history, education, connections, interests, and community involvement can offer additional context that may not be available on a traditional dating profile,” Drury said. “For someone considering whether to meet a potential romantic partner, that additional information [on LinkedIn] can help them feel more informed and comfortable.”

Instead of prioritizing appearance, which is something only 18% of Gen Z daters rank first in importance, most Gen Z singles look for emotional maturity and kindness in potential partners instead, according to a survey conducted by the luxury dating site Seeking.

The survey also found that Gen Z prioritizes specific qualities such as shared values, ambition, and generosity.

“I find myself gravitating towards the same familiar social circles, and in that sense, university or professional career become big cues for me in determining that alignment,” a New York University freshman, who asked to remain anonymous, told Fortune

A separate February survey from Resume Templates revealed that 92% of single LinkedIn users have used the platform to research online app matches before their first date, specifically paying attention to current job status, mutual connections, academic background, and endorsements. Additionally, 88% of LinkedIn users have used the platform to check up on an ex-partner or former romantic interest.

“Using LinkedIn has become a natural part of online dating,” the student said. “In online dating, where the amount of disclosed information is so limited and social media presence is often highly filtered or non-existent for guys, LinkedIn becomes a surprisingly telling and rich source of information.”

For some daters, that extra context isn’t simply curiosity. It can also feel like a safety check in an online-dating environment where users may worry about scams, harassment, or whether a match is accurately representing themselves.

Two-thirds of dating app users have reported instances of cyberstalking facilitated by dating apps, and 48% reported experiences of online interpersonal violence, including receiving unsolicited sexual pictures or messages, name-calling, and even threats of physical violence, according to a study published in the Asian Journal of Criminology last year.

In addition, information displayed on dating app profiles makes it easy for cyberstalkers to find users’ other online profiles, such as LinkedIn, or to find them through simple Google searches, stripping away the relative anonymity and safety barriers on dating apps.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

If you are one of Ya Lili’s 183,000 followers on her “@findgadgetswithme” Instagram account, you may have seen this video she posted recently: A man stands on a sunny beach, dressed only in swim shorts, his back covered in dirt. “This won’t come off!” he shouts as he rubs futilely at the brown filth covering his arm. Suddenly, out of nowhere, a fully dressed woman walks into the frame and says, “Because you’re doing it wrong!” She then takes a bath mitt and wipes away a large swathe of the soil.

“If you’re still using your bare hands, you are missing out,” the voiceover says, as the action switches to a close-up of a woman using the sponge glove to clean a series of inexplicable squiggly lines from her bare thighs.

It’s AI slop, obviously. 

But if you want to buy this shower scrubber, there’s a link under the video where you can find them for sale on Temu.

Ya Lily is the top creator for Temu’s partnership ads on Meta platforms in the U.K. and Europe, according to research seen by Fortune. The problem is, Ya Lily almost certainly does not exist. She’s a fake account. 

In fact, of the top 100 creators boosted by Temu’s partnership ads, 73 are likely fakes, the research suggests.

It is not clear whether Temu is doing this deliberately or is being fooled by scammers into spending money on influencers who don’t exist. But the likely fake accounts potentially set up a legal quagmire for Temu, as European law bars the use of misleading formats for advertising. 

Neither Temu nor Ya Lilly responded to multiple requests for comment from Fortune. Meta declined comment when reached.

Above: One of YaLily’s Temu partnership ads on Instagram.

Real money going to fake accounts

Ya Lily has a further 129,000 followers on Facebook, where she goes by a completely different name, “Must good.” That page gives her location as “England, Birmingham, MO, United States.” Her bio says “You are my dream of dead.” And her email address appears to be Chinese.

And yet her posts—which all contain links to a random assortment of Temu products—were boosted by Temu and seen more than 1 billion times across both platforms in 16 months ending in April 2026, according to Online Risk Labs. ORL is an independent non-profit based in the Czech Republic, which researches cybersecurity and systemic risk online.

Ya Lily’s content ran in nearly 109,541 Temu ad campaigns in that period, the data show. That’s about 225 campaigns per day.

Using creators on Facebook and Instagram to churn out an endless stream of low-effort AI promotions is one of Temu’s main ways to reach people on social media, ORL’s data suggest. Temu spent as much as $962 million on ads like these in the period, in the U.K. and 27 E.U. countries, according to ORL. 

Its estimate is based on total impressions and average cost per reach. The group estimates that in any given quarter Temu alone forms nearly 2% of all the revenue Meta earns from the continent.

Fortune asked two experts in social media advertising to check ORL’s data and estimates. Both found them plausible.

The ORL data focuses only on the U.K. and Europe because the Digital Services Act, which covers those countries, requires large platform providers to publish a public library of all the ads they run, allowing researchers to identify trends or problematic commercial behavior. No such database exists for the U.S.

“Among the top 100 influencers collaborating with Temu, there are certainly some real people among them. In my estimate, however, they account for no more than 15–20%. By contrast, I have serious doubts about the authenticity of accounts that, according to the platform, are based in Russia, China, or Iran,” ORL’s manager, Vendula Prokůpková, told Fortune.

Legally questionable 

That could raise legal issues, according to Stuart Lester, the partner who leads law firm Mishcon de Reya’s advertising and marketing group, in London.

“By all means utilize Facebook and Instagram and influencers, but know that there are rules that you have to abide by, and you certainly can’t be creating fake accounts and portraying these as real individuals. That’s misleading on many levels.”

There are several laws and regulatory agencies that might see the use of fake accounts—by scammers, advertisers, or even their mere existence on Meta’s platforms—as potentially infringing the law. In the U.K., the Digital Markets, Competition &  Consumers Act of 2024 bans advertising that is misleading. The European Parliament recently passed the new E.U. AI Act, which requires publishers of AI-generated content to label it transparently.

Creating a fake account to carry advertising is likely to be a breach of regulations in multiple European jurisdictions, Lester told Fortune. “That will be misleading. I would say, certainly, in the U.K. and I strongly suspect in the E.U. as well.”

A $10 billion business for Meta

Partnership ads like Ya Lily’s work by allowing creators to enable their posts to be used as ads if they recommend a brand and include a link where viewers can buy the product. If a marketer like Temu approves of the post, it can spend money on it as if it were an ad, and boost it in Meta’s algorithms. The creator gets paid either via a contractual agreement or a cut of sales generated.

Meta booked $10 billion in revenues from partnership ads in Q1 2026. Its total revenue was $56.3 billion—meaning that partnership ads were about 17% of its entire revenue. The company did not give an update on the partnership numbers for Q2, in which Meta disclosed $60.8 billion in revenue overall.

Within that $10 billion-plus partnership ad segment, Temu’s presence is huge.

Between January 2025 and April 2026, there were 31 official Temu pages on Meta and they ran over 9 million ads across the E.U. and the U.K., ORL’s data says. The cumulative reach of those ads was 134 billion views.

Of those ads, partnership ads (the ones using creator content) were 65.8% of all Temu’s ads and 49.6% of their reach. That is unusual, ORL believes, because among other advertisers, typically only 2% of their ads are partnership ads.

Burner accounts from China and Russia

And those partnership ads are channeled through a narrow group of creators, ORL says. In the four months between January and April 2026, 100 creators accounted for 74% of all Temu’s partnership ads in the region. Those creators ran more than 1.4 million individual ads that got a cumulative reach of 16.9 billion eyeballs.

Most of those accounts—which initially appear to be run by real people—are dedicated to pushing Temu products. But there is reason to believe they are “burner creators”—fake accounts that don’t represent real people that have been created specifically to take advantage of Temu’s ad budget. Seventy-three percent of the top 100 accounts had changed their handle at least once in the 16 months covered by ORL’s study. One of them changed its name 15 times—something real influencers never do.

Only eight of them were verified with a real identity. And, “despite targeting E.U. audiences, 28 of the top 100 accounts were based in Russia and 19 in China, while only six were based in the E.U. or the U.K.,” ORL said in a data pack it prepared for Fortune. Of the remainder, 34 were U.S.-based, and the others were from Bangladesh, Canada, and Ghana.

Meta has struggled to prevent fraudulent advertising activity on its platforms in the past, especially as it relates to China. Last year, Reuters reported, 19% of Meta’s entire revenue from China—about $3 billion—came from ads for scams or other banned content. The company initially investigated the problem and cracked down on it but later inexplicably reversed course and abandoned its efforts against Chinese scams, Reuters reported.

ORL has filed a report with the EU’s DSA regulator asking it to make a risk assessment of Temu’s army of low-grade influencer accounts.

“Lazy, not sketchy”

“If they [Temu] think this is a way to get slightly cheaper/more performant ads, they might be doing this intentionally to game the delivery system,” said Rob Leathern, a former senior director of product management at Facebook until 2020. He is now the founder and CEO of InfoHawk, a company that protects users from scams and deception.

Luke Stillman, managing director of Madison & Wall, a technology and media consultancy, told Fortune that Chinese marketers often behave very differently online than European or U.S. ones.  “It also wouldn’t be surprising for Temu to allocate a meaningful share of its Meta budget this way given how differently social commerce and the creator economy have developed in China versus Europe. In Europe and North America, this type of model is still relatively unusual. In China, social commerce accounts for a much larger share of activity, and creator partnerships and live social streams are much more integrated into how products are marketed and sold,” he said.

He thinks Temu might be being “lazy, not sketchy.”

“On one hand, I suspect there is a better form of an ad campaign that would result in higher [return on ad spend] compared to creating a huge volume of AI-generated creator content to feed through the partnership system,” he said. “On the other hand, dynamic content creation, creators augmented with AI production processes, and performance-optimization algorithms are only going to become more prevalent across the industry, and this seems to fit squarely into that bucket.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Tinned fish is having a real global moment. The pandemic-era pantry habit has since turned into restaurants nationwide serving tinned fish straight out of the can. Domestically, sales climbed from $2.3 billion in 2018 to more than $2.7 billion in 2024, and Americans’ obsession with sardines specifically is only accelerating: Americans bought $3.52 billion worth of shelf-stable seafood over the past year, and sardines have overtaken salmon as the second-most popular tinned fish behind tuna, as Grubhub reported orders of tinned fish tripled in 2025. The global tinned fish market was worth roughly $10.24 billion in 2024, and is projected to reach $17.97 billion by 2034. Canned sardines are a meaningful part of that worldwide push.

But the supply behind that growing appetite is shrinking fast. Morocco, the world’s top sardine supplier, saw its fish landings fall nearly 46% between 2022 and 2024, and the reasons are feeding into each other. Because sardines are unusually sensitive to temperature, warming water as a result of climate change is pushing the fish into new territories further away from fishermen.

The war in Iran, coupled with the effective shutdown of the Strait of Hormuz (through which one-fifth of the world’s global oil supply normally passes) is driving up fuel costs. Fishermen now need to go further to catch the fish, just as it’s costing them that much more to travel longer distances, and they’re bringing back almost half the quantity as before.

Rashid Sumaila, a professor and Canada Research Chair in interdisciplinary ocean and fisheries economics at the University of British Columbia, has spent his career studying fisheries, and how they navigate geopolitical forces. He said the combination is something he hadn’t seen affect the fishing industry in quite this way before.

“Sardines are very sensitive to climate change, and we know it here on the Pacific coast,” Sumaila told Fortune. “When it’s warm, sardines move from Mexico through the U.S., and Canadians see more sardines. They follow the temperature.”

He said Morocco’s sardines are shifting, too, and he saw the same thing while on a trip to Portugal this summer, when he left his hotel at 2 a.m. for an early flight and the temperature was still 34 degrees Celsius.

“Some of that 45% drop is partly climate change, and partly overfishing, and other things happening to the ocean,” he said. “There’s just so much. You have pollution, plastic. Stresses upon stresses.”

The Iran war adds a second layer. While Iran’s own waters are not a major sardine source, Sumaila said the war still reaches Moroccan boats through the price of fuel.

“The Iran war doesn’t quite impact this directly,” he said, “but indirectly it does, because prices are going up. The price of fishing, the vessels, the energy. It’s crazy.”

Since the conflict began, Brent crude surged 10% to 13% after the Strait of Hormuz effectively closed to shipping this spring, an event the International Energy Agency called the largest oil-supply disruption in the market’s history. Sumaila said he heard the same complaint from fishermen thousands of miles from the Persian Gulf.

“Thai fishers are feeling it,” he said. “You can imagine Moroccan fishers, or fishers in Africa or the Pacific Islands, feeling it too.”

A global supply food chain risk

Warmer water and higher fuel costs interact in a specific way for Moroccan boats, Sumaila said, because the two pressures compound each other. As sardines shift toward cooler water further from shore, fishermen who once worked familiar nearby routes now have to travel farther to find them, exactly as fuel becomes more expensive and the yield becomes less guaranteed.

“It’s more risky,” he said. “Insurance payments, security for people. The combination is really quite scary.”

“It’s the whole region. If the fish are moving up, that’s what we face,” he continued. “It’s like we’re facing a double whammy.”

The same pressures are also reshaping how Morocco sells what it does catch. Frozen sardine exports have fallen from about 70% of the country’s small open-sea fish exports in 2020 to roughly 23% in 2025, even before the war began.

“Climate change is a factor,” he said. “The war is going to affect it too, because all the freezing is energy, and energy prices are going up while the sources are being reduced.”

This all means we’ll be paying more to eat less, he said of his research of Canadian consumers’ grocery spending on seafood.

“This isn’t only the fish we catch in Canada,” he added. “It’s fish coming from all over the world. All of it gets affected. The price dynamics show up in people’s household budgets.”

He said affordability pressure isn’t limited to lower-income countries, even if it hits hardest there: “It’s not only in the developing world. We all feel it. I don’t go to any meeting these days where somebody isn’t talking about the cost of groceries.”

A fish called subsidies

Government fuel subsidies make the underlying problem worse, even if not all subsidies are bad. Public spending on fish stock research and fisheries management is useful, but paying for fuel is a different story.

“If you pay for fuel, that just makes people fish more than they would,” he said. His team’s most recently published estimate puts global fisheries subsidies at $35.4 billion in 2018, with $22.2 billion of that classified as capacity-enhancing subsidies that fuel overfishing, which shrinks fish populations further and forces boats to travel even farther for a shrinking catch.

Sumaila has a running joke about it, borrowed from an old British comedy about a heist gone wrong. “A fish called subsidies,” he said, referencing “A Fish Called Wanda.” “A third of your fish is actually subsidized and illegally caught.”

Outside of Morocco, both Portugal and Spain are trying to mitigate this as well. Portugal’s 2026 sardine season reopened in May with a national catch limit of 33,446 tonnes, nearly 1,000 tonnes fewer than the year before. Portugal closed its purse-seine sardine fishery for the final weeks of 2025 after its fleet worked through roughly two-thirds of the combined Portugal-Spain quota. Spain’s own 2026 quota came in nearly 3% lower than the prior year, yet the fishery still fetched stronger prices, with sardines selling for an average of 1.50 euros a kilogram, 50 cents above 2024 levels.

To combat the less fish but sold for more money scenario playing out in Spain, Morocco put an export ban on frozen sardines, meant to protect domestic supply and stabilize prices at home. Sumailia had little hope in this working, basing his prediction on the ongoing trade fights between the U.S. and Canada.

“When you ban fish, maybe in the short term you have some relief,” he said. “But that triggers a lot of other things you might not even perceive when you do it. You get a counter reaction, and a counter reaction to that.”

Most of all, he said, sardines are one of the primary food sources for lower-income individuals.

“When you shut off these consequences, you’re affecting small-scale people,” he said, referencing the emigration of fishermen from Morocco to Portugal. “People move. And then you have immigration. Where is this coming from? It’s coming from things like the war in Iran, too.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

A Florida grand jury found that Republican Gov. Ron DeSantis’ administration “misappropriated” $10 million in taxpayer money it diverted to a charity connected to his wife, but it declined to file criminal charges due to a lack of evidence indicating who specifically was responsible.

DeSantis on Thursday did not dispute the legitimacy of the secret grand jury report obtained and published online by CBS News Miami, but he insisted no laws were broken and said whoever leaked the sealed documents would face “consequences.”

The Leon County grand jury completed its report in January on investigations into Hope Florida, the charity started in 2021 by Florida first lady Casey DeSantis. Despite the lack of charges, the report ignited a new round of criticism aimed at DeSantis and other top state Republicans over the charity receiving $10 million from a state Medicaid settlement intended to help poor children get health insurance.

David Jolly, the Democratic nominee for governor, called for the grand jury probe to be reopened. He faces Republican Byron Donalds in November. DeSantis, under Florida law, cannot seek a third term.

The Hope Florida charity is supposed to help financially struggling families connect with churches and aid groups to help keep them off publicly-financed assistance programs. The $10 million was instead moved to political action committees that used the money to oppose a 2024 statewide ballot measure that would have legalized marijuana for adults in the state.

DeSantis opposed the measure, and it fell just short of the 60% supermajority it needed to become law.

“Despite our finding that the money was misappropriated, we find insufficient evidence to charge anyone criminally,” the report concluded.

The grand jury said no one would take responsibility for sending the money to the charity or had any memory of who did.

“We recognize that this would be an impediment to criminal prosecution,” the report noted. “While we can’t prove who is responsible, we can plainly see that taxpayer money was misused for political purposes and we would like to see changes made to prevent this from happening again.”

The grand jury report concluded that James Uthmeier, who was DeSantis’ chief of staff at the time, “was in a position of authority over those involved in settling,” and that his Keep Florida Clean PAC was the prime recipient of the $10 million. The grand jury said then-state Attorney General Ashley Moody’s office knew of the plans to divert the money. She was later appointed by DeSantis to the U.S. Senate.

Uthmeier and Moody are both seeking reelection.

In a news conference Thursday, Uthmeier suggested Democrats were behind the grand jury report leak and called renewed interest in its findings “a politically motivated hoax.”

In a post on X on Thursday, Moody said her office was only one of several agencies that signed off on the initial settlement, and “had no knowledge of how funds would be spent” by Hope Florida, state lawmakers or any other group.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Iranian President Masoud Pezeshkian acknowledged his country’s economic woes amid pressure from the U.S., which is strangling its trade while protecting other countries’ ships carrying oil through the Strait of Hormuz.

Recent weeks have seen Tehran lose leverage over the critical energy chokepoint as traffic picks up, especially via a southern route along Oman’s coast. At the same time, warnings about Iran’s economy from Pezeshkian and the regime’s other relative moderates have been mounting.

In an interview with state media on Friday, he signaled defiance in the face of all the economic pressure and credited Iran’s resilience to its unity.

“We have many problems,” Pezeshkian said, according to a Google translation. “There’s inflation, economic issues, employment and many other problems, but the people are with us.”

Indeed, inflation has soared above 80%, with prices for certain food staples up 100%. The International Monetary Fund said in April Iran’s economy will shrink 6.1% this year, the worst contraction in decades. And a labor ministry official estimated that more than 1 million jobs had been lost by late May.

In an apparent dig at Iranian hardliners who reject negotiations with the U.S. and favor continued war, Pezeshkian added that “we may have many things; we may even have missiles and bombs, but they are of no use.”

He later noted that imports are not coming into the country, including gasoline. The naval blockade has not only prevented Iran from exporting oil via its ports, it has also kept out imports of refined fuels that Iran needs despite being a major oil producer.

That has created shortages and long lines at gas stations, made worse by deep subsidies that encourage excess consumption. In the interview, Pezeshkian described efforts to curb fuel demand and hike prices, but hinted they can’t go too far.

“We shouldn’t make someone whose life revolves around gasoline suffer,” he explained. “We shouldn’t put more pressure on those who are already under pressure. People are on the edge now; if I put more pressure on them, they might fall off the edge. We have to be careful that no one falls off.”

Pezeshkian estimated that Iranian trade has plunged 25%-35%, with imports down significantly more than exports. In fact, trade intelligence firm Kpler said Iran’s August crude export loadings have collapsed more than 80% compared to a year ago.

Since the naval blockade was reimposed, U.S. force have redirected 82 commercial vessels, disabled three and boarded two to ensure compliance, Central Command said on Friday.

“Some people say that sanctions have no effect at all,” Pezeshkian said. “I really don’t know what to tell these people. I just want to say this, saying that sanctions have no effect is not consistent with these facts.”

While the U.S. military tightens its chokehold, it is simultaneously loosening Iran’s grip on the Strait of Hormuz. Last week, Central Command said U.S. forces completed clearing sea mines from the strait’s international shipping routes.

Estimates vary on exactly how much oil is leaking through, but the upshot is the volumes are substantial albeit still well short of normal. According to Goldman Sachs, total exports of crude and oil products from the region have risen to 15 million-16 million barrels a day. And Kpler said oil flows from the Persian Gulf have recovered to around 70% of pre-war levels.

U.S. officials told Axios that about 10 million barrels of oil a day are being transported out of the strait through the Omani corridor the U.S. military is defending.

A two-week stretch of U.S. bombing last month degraded Iran’s radar and maritime surveillance systems, the report said, making it easier for tankers to sail through undetected at night with their transponders turned off. This has allowed vessels to make shuttle runs in and out, then unload oil to other tankers that deliver the cargo to customers.

To be sure, Iran is still attacking ships, but that hasn’t been enough to stop traffic. Meanwhile, the U.S. military continues to weaken Iran’s ability to close the strait. On Sunday, U.S. forces struck Iranian rocket launchers that were preparing to deploy sea mines in the strait.

Gregory Brew, an expert on Iran and oil at the Eurasia Group, said on X on Friday that Iran overplayed its hand in July, when it resumed attack on shipping in the strait’s southern route.

“The result: the MOU is dead, the blockade is back in place, and the US is succeeding (to a partial, but notable extent) at reopening the strait without another deal,” he added. “Perhaps the status quo swings back in Iran’s favor, but right now this looks like a miscalculation to me.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

John Ternus, who takes over as CEO of Apple this week, joined Apple in 2001, just four years after he graduated from the University of Pennsylvania. Satya Nadella entered Microsoft in 1992, only two years after completing his master’s degree. Andy Jassy joined Amazon in 1997, 24 years before he took the top job. Three of the world’s most powerful technology companies are now led by executives who built their careers largely from within.

Their careers counter one of the most persistent pieces of modern career advice: that getting ahead means moving around. For much of the last thirty years, we’ve been told that long-term employment was dead. As large employers moved from employment guarantees to frequent downsizing during the 1980s and 1990s, ideas of loyalty became passé. Career advice has frequently revolved around embracing free agency, taking charge of our own careers through regular mobility across employers. Career success is supposed to come from proactively moving to wherever your services would be most valuable. No sector has epitomized the image of easy come, easy go employment quite like tech. Yet our biggest tech companies are now being led by organization men, executives whose career paths look like they’ve come straight out of the 1950s.

I’ve been studying employment for over two decades now, and I’ve started to suspect that the way that we talk about modern careers may be all wrong. Yes, loyalty is dead and employment is now something of a marriage of convenience. But we haven’t moved to a world of hyper-mobility. People aren’t quitting their jobs any more than they were twenty-five years ago; layoff rates have actually come down; and we haven’t seen the surge in freelance work that we expected. There’s also growing evidence that building a career inside a firm continues to be a more reliable route to success than trying to plot a path across companies. The insider tech CEOs aren’t outliers. They’re a sign that we need to reconsider how people get ahead.

Consider, for example, an analysis of the careers of the top 10 executives in each Fortune 100 firm that my colleague Peter Cappelli published with his coauthors back in 2024. Although the average executive had moved around a little more than John Ternus, their stickability is nonetheless striking: the average executive worked at only three employers during the 28 years that it took them to reach the top. They had also been with their current employer for 13 years before accessing the executive suite. Those executives may be more mobile than they were back in 1980, but there remain, it seems, remarkably few job-hoppers in the top-ranks of corporate America.

When we have studied careers below the executive suite, we have found that upward mobility—moving into more senior jobs with more responsibility—is overwhelmingly more likely to happen through internal moves within the same company, rather than by moving to a different firm. Another study of Finns found that moving up into a more senior job was almost six times as likely to occur through an internal move compared to a move across firms. The reasons are not hard to understand: moving somebody up in their career, letting them take on a job that is bigger and more responsible than any they have held before, is always a risk for an employer. Employers are much more willing to take that risk on somebody they know well—an inside candidate—than an outside hire that they know little about. There is also ample evidence that those internal candidates tend to do better once they get the job, as new hires initially struggle to navigate an unfamiliar organization.

There are, of course, a lot of reasons why moving employers can benefit people in their careers. Many people are in jobs they don’t like; they should be looking for something better. It also makes sense to move around to learn about yourself and the kinds of work that you enjoy. And recruiters can be reluctant to hire people who have spent much more than a decade at the same firm, because of worries that those long-timers will struggle to adapt to a new employer. Even the rhetoric around free agency, which emphasizes the need to take charge of your own career, navigating across employers in search of the best opportunities, serves a useful purpose by reminding us that our employers rarely have our long-term interests at heart.

But we also need to rebalance our understanding of how modern careers really work. It turns out that the things that allow us to be successful in our careers – doing good work and getting access to new opportunities – still depend on the kind of familiarity and trusting relationships that are built through longevity within organizations. The advice that you have to “move out to move up” has it exactly backwards. Those who are hoping to become the next John Ternus, rising to lead a trillion dollar corporation, should understand that they can move out, or they can move up, but it is hard to do both at the same time.

The opinions expressed in Fortune.com commentary pieces are solely the views of their authors and do not necessarily reflect the opinions and beliefs of Fortune.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Three years after Warner Bros. abruptly canned “Coyote vs. Acme,” the Looney Tunes feature film that was given a new lease on life by Ketchup Entertainment debuted with an estimated $15.5 million in ticket sales over the weekend.

For the fifth weekend in a row, “Spider-Man: Brand New Day” topped the North American box office. It grossed $22.2 million in U.S. and Canadian theaters, according to studio estimates Sunday, bringing its worldwide total to $2.33 billion and making it the fourth highest-grossing film of all time.

“Coyote vs. Acme,” which had been relegated to the dust heap, fared best of the newcomers, debuting in second place.

The Ridley Scott action drama “The Dog Stars,” starring Jacob Elordi, flopped. The film, about a pilot and German Shepherd who survive a global pandemic, opened in fifth place with $8 million for 20th Century Studios. It added $11.3 million overseas, a poor result for a film that cost between $70 million and $100 million to make.

“Coyote vs. Acme,” however, scored a decent, hard-earned opening. In 2023, Warner Bros. canceled any release of the completed film, preferring to take a tax write off on a movie originally produced for its streaming service, HBO Max. Warner also shelved “Batgirl” and “Scoob! Holiday Haunt,” both of which remain unreleased.

“Coyote vs. Acme,” based on an Ian Frazier “Shouts and Murmurs” New Yorker column, is about Wile E. Coyote suing the Acme Corporation for its faulty products. It stars Will Forte, John Cena, Lana Condor and Eric Bauza.

The film, a hybrid of live-action and animation directed by Dave Green, cost $70 million to make. But despite good test screening scores, Warner Bros. opted to ax the completed film. After an outcry, the studio put the film up for sale. Early last year, Ketchup Entertainment acquired worldwide distribution rights for about $50 million.

For the makers of the film, just getting released was a victory.

“‘Coyote vs. Acme’ is finally, gloriously, in theaters now,” Green said on social media Friday. “Which means one thing. WE WON.”

Reviews and audience scores were also good. Moviegoers gave it an “A” CinemaScore. Critics were just as enthusiastic. On Rotten Tomatoes, it rated 95% fresh.

While the result might have counted as a disappointment for some $70 million movies, the opening weekend for “Coyote vs. Acme” was the best ever for Ketchup. The indie distributor’s previous high was 2024’s “The Day the Earth Blew Up” (a $3.1 million opening), another Warner-made Looney Tunes castoff.

“The box office numbers are fair, but the reception is excellent and the release should set up good ancillary business for kids’ viewing, where the film should recoup its investment,” said David A. Gross, who publishes the box office newsletter FranchiseRe.

“The Odyssey,” in its seventh weekend, slid to third place with $14.3 million. It remains unusually strong overseas, where the Christopher Nolan movie grossed $48.6 million over the weekend. Altogether, the Universal Pictures release has collected $1.55 billion in global sales.

Top 10 movies by domestic box office

With final domestic figures being released Monday, this list factors in the estimated ticket sales for Friday through Sunday at U.S. and Canadian theaters, according to Rentrak:

1. “Spider-Man: Brand New Day,” $22.2 million.

2. “Coyote vs. Acme,” $15.5 million.

3. “The Odyssey,” $14.3 million.

4. “Insidious: Out of the Further,” $10.1 million.

5. “The Dog Stars,” $8 million.

6. “Buddy,” $5.4 million.

7. “The End of Oak Street,” $5 million.

8. “PAW Patrol: The Dino Movie,” $4.9 million.

9. “Mutiny,” $2.8 million.

10. “Tony,” $2.2 million.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

U.S. forces struck Iranian rocket launchers on the Strait of Hormuz in the first military action in a month on Sunday, according to a U.S. official, breaking a lull in fighting during an intermittent war that has lasted more than six months.

Forces with the Revolutionary Guard Corps were observed preparing to launch rockets with sea mines into the strait, according to the official, who spoke on condition of anonymity to detail sensitive military movements.

The U.S. military last week completed clearing sea mines from the strait’s international shipping routes.

Semiofficial news outlets in Iran reported sounds of explosions near Larak island on the strait. The Guard in a statement carried by Iran’s state broadcaster noted “the martyrdom and injury of several of our fighters and compatriots.”

The statement said the attack will “result in punishment of the aggressor.”

The fighting comes just days after the Trump administration said it would turn its focus to increasing economic pressure — rather than military action — to try to end its war with Iran. The shifting strategy centers on threats to punish any country or entity that continues to conduct business with Tehran.

The turn to using sanctions as the cudgel of choice comes as the administration weighs diminished munitions stockpiles after months of war, sparking concerns that the prolonged conflict could undermine U.S. military readiness in other parts of the globe.

As the conflict grinds on, Trump’s talk of finding a quick end to the war also appears to be fading. He stressed last week that he’s “not in a hurry” to get Iran back to the negotiating table, and he continues making the case that the Islamic Republic’s leadership is on the ropes.

Trump has consistently emphasized that the U.S. and Israel campaign has been devastating for Iran’s navy and air force. Iranian officials have said the country has suffered $270 billion in direct and indirect damage. Israeli military strikes in the first weeks of the war wiped out much of the theocratic government’s leadership structure.

But Iran has found leverage through its own strikes in the critical Strait of Hormuz where relatively few vessels carrying oil and liquefied natural gas are risking passage. Iran still has enough drones and missiles to fire at vessels transiting the vital energy waterway, through which 20% of the world’s oil normally flows, effectively controlling much of the traffic in the strait.

Trump has repeatedly declared that the “Strait of Hormuz is open,” saying 24 vessels passed through last week. But that’s a fraction of the roughly 130 vessels that passed through the vital waterway daily before the war began.

Earlier on Sunday, a multinational coalition overseen by the U.S. Navy said commercial traffic through the strait remained at “reduced levels.” And a monitoring agency run by the British military said an unknown projectile struck a tanker ship on Saturday north of Khasab, Oman, in the strait.

The United Kingdom Maritime Trade Organization said the ship had been moving inbound and no casualties or environmental impact had been reported. It cited unspecified military authorities. There was no immediate claim of responsibility.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Work-life balance has become a major priority for Gen Z, with young workers increasingly placing a premium on maximizing time away from their jobs—even ranking it above pay in some surveys. But work-life balance has never been much of a priority for Panda Express cofounder Andrew Cherng. 

Even at 78, the self-made billionaire restaurateur has long embraced the demanding schedules and relentless work ethic that helped him build the largest Asian-American restaurant chain in the U.S.

“It was hard when I had no business, there was no income,” he said after recently being asked by NBC News on how to avoid burnout. “But even then, I wasn’t burned out because, you just work, go to work, and [if] you have a like a 12-hour day, you go home, you sleep well—I mean that’s life.”

And that mindset helped him and his wife, Peggy, turn a single family-run restaurant into a nearly $7 billion-a-year global chain over five decades. It has also helped propel their net worths to an estimated $6.6 billion collectively.

How two immigrants turned $60,000 into an empire serving 148 million pounds of orange chicken a year

Andrew Cherng was born in Yangzhou, China, in 1948. When he was 5, his family fled to Taiwan, and eight years later, they moved again, this time to Japan.

He eventually made his way to the U.S., enrolling at Baker University in Kansas to study mathematics. There, he met his future wife, Peggy, who was Burmese-born and would go on to become his business partner and now serves as Panda Express’ co-CEO. The couple later earned master’s degrees from the University of Missouri.

“Every holiday I had, I worked in New York, waiting tables in a restaurant,” Andrew recalled to Fortune in 2013. “My father was a chef but hadn’t owned his own business. I didn’t like that. In my heart of hearts, I knew I wanted to be in business.”

Peggy went on to pursue her PhD and work a brief career as an engineer for McDonnell Douglas and Comtal (acquired by 3M), while Andrew began pursuing his own path in the restaurant industry. He moved to California to work for his cousin, putting in seven days a week at the restaurant for $800 a month.

After a year, Andrew decided to strike out on his own with his parents. Together, the family scraped together $60,000 from savings and a Small Business Administration loan and opened Panda Inn in Pasadena, California, in 1973.

“The whole family—my parents, a brother and sister—all worked at the restaurant for free,” he recalled. “We lived in a two-bedroom apartment in San Gabriel and didn’t have any money. Peggy would come to visit, and we got married in 1975.”

The restaurant’s expansion was slow at first, but by 1983, the first Panda Express was opened in a shopping male in Glendale, California, and the concept gradually exploded. In 1985, Panda grew from five locations to nine in a single year.

Andrew and Peggy Cherng at a Panda Express restaurant in 2008.

Bob Riha, Jr./Getty Images

Today, Panda has more than 2,600 locations around the world and employs over 55,000 people. In 2025 alone, the chain served up 148 million pounds of its signature orange chicken. But perhaps more remarkably, the Cherngs built the empire without ever taking money from outside investors.

Work-life balance is rejected by many of the world’s top founders

The Cherngs aren’t the only business leaders who have embraced an all-consuming approach to work—and credited that commitment with helping fuel their success.

Nvidia co-founder and CEO Jensen Huang has similarly said that work-life balance is essentially nonexistent for him. Huang is constantly thinking about his chip-making business.

“I work from the moment I wake up to the moment I go to sleep. I work seven days a week,” Huang said in a 2024 interview with Stripe CEO Patrick Collison.

That relentless focus has helped transform Nvidia from a computer graphics company first conceived at a Denny’s into one of the world’s most valuable companies, with a market capitalization of more than $5.5 trillion. Huang’s personal net worth is estimated at nearly $190 billion.

Huffington Post founder Arianna Huffington recently echoed that sentiment to Fortune, saying that she doesn’t believe people with truly engaging jobs can simply shut their laptops at 5 p.m.

“I don’t think there is anybody with an interesting job who can do that,” Huffington said. “For you, or me, or most people with interesting jobs, there is never a time when you have a natural ending to the day.”

The same idea extends beyond core business. Will.i.am, the Grammy Award-winning music artist previously shared with Fortune that if Gen Z want to aspire for success, they should forget about work-life balance.

“If you’re trying to build something that doesn’t exist, it’s about dream-reality balance,” he said. “Work-life balance means that you’re working for somebody else’s dream. You just have a job supporting somebody else’s dream, and you want to balance your work and your life.

“But if it’s dream-reality balance, then it’s not work,” Will.i.am added. “It’s a dream that you’re trying to put into reality, and you’re ignoring your current reality.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

NASA’s newest crown jewel blasted off Sunday to hunt for planets around other stars, explore secret dark energy and survey the cosmos like never before.

SpaceX launched the $4.3 billion Roman Space Telescope shortly after daybreak aboard a triple-the-firepower Falcon Heavy rocket. Roman blazed toward an observation point 1 million miles (1.6 million kilometers) away that’s home to the Webb Space Telescope, one of NASA’s other big-ticket eyes in the sky.

The bus-sized telescope — named after the late Nancy Grace Roman,NASA’s first chief astronomer — will take more than three months to reach its destination. Once there, it will cast the widest gaze yet on the hidden parts of the universe from space, uncovering the unimaginable with unsurpassed speed.

“It’s going to find thousands of supernovae, tens of thousands of planets, billions of galaxies and tens of billions of stars,” said NASA science mission director Nicky Fox. “It’s going to be able to do things that we’ve never been able to do before with its massive field of view.”

3… 2… 1… Liftoff! And a call from the president

Several minutes after the thunderous launch from Kennedy Space Center, the rocket’s two reusable side boosters descended tail-first in a thrilling scene, producing sharp sonic booms as they landed back at Cape Canaveral. Soon afterward, the telescope separated successfully from the rocket’s upper stage, drawing applause from ground controllers.

Fox was in tears watching the action unfold. “It’s such a good day!” she said.

NASA Administrator Jared Isaacman was in the middle of a news conference a couple hours later, predicting that the Roman Space Telescope would soon become a household name, when his cellphone rang. President Donald Trump was on the line, offering congratulations.

“Boy, it looked beautiful on television,” said Trump, fresh off his visit to Houston’s Johnson Space Center on Friday to honor the Artemis II moon crew. “You’re the hottest in space.”

Roman Space Telescope will provide a wider perspective

Roman’s field of view is more than 100 times wider than that of NASA’s Hubble Space Telescope, still churning out celestial glamour shots after 36 years in orbit. Webb joined the effort several years ago with an even narrower yet spot-on vision capable of zooming in on objects almost as old as the universe-creating Big Bang.

These three orbiting powerhouses will join forces — along with the European Space Agency’s Euclid spacecraft and the National Science Foundation’s Vera C. Rubin Observatory in Chile — to reveal some of the universe’s biggest secrets.

Inside the countless galaxies awaiting discovery are stars with planets. Once these new worlds are spotted by Roman, the more powerful and sensitive Webb will take aim to fill in the blanks.

“Roman’s vast reach will allow us to find the weird, the rare and the unusual,” senior project scientist Julie McEnery said on the eve of launch. “We’ll redefine what it means to find a needle in a haystack.”

Perhaps even more important, astronomers expect Roman to shed light on the dark matter and dark energy that make up most of the universe yet remain concealed. Roman’s catalog of galaxies will help scientists ascertain how quickly the universe is expanding due to these puzzling, unseen forces.

Roman will scan the sky 1,000 times faster than Hubble

Roman’s superpower is speed.

A month of Milky Way observations by Roman would take Hubble a century to complete, according to McEnery. Roman should make quick work of scanning the galactic bulge at dead center, she added, providing the deepest look yet into the heart of our galaxy.

Besides a wide-field infrared camera that matches Hubble’s sensitivity but is 1,000 times faster, Roman holds an instrument to block out starlight. This experimental, eclipse-creating coronagraph will allow Roman to directly image any planet, however faint, that might be orbiting the masked star.

While Roman isn’t designed to search for life, Fox said it will pave the way for future observatories to answer what NASA considers the biggest question: “Are we alone? Is there another Earth 2.0 looking back at me?”

The telescope is designed to be refueled, meaning if a robotic tanker becomes available in the coming decade, that could extend its life.

The telescope’s mirror has a surprising origin

Launching nearly a year ahead of schedule and within budget, Roman is NASA’s first space telescope to be named after a woman.

Retired NASA scientist Ed Weiler said the honor is long overdue. He coined the phrase “Mother of Hubble” for Roman, who hired him in 1978. Observatories above Earth’s obscuring atmosphere can see farther and better, she insisted after joining the brand new NASA in 1959. She died in 2018 at age 93.

“This is very, very fitting. I think Nancy would be very proud” that the namesake telescope will tackle some of the biggest, lingering questions about the universe such as dark energy, Weiler said.

Hubble launched in 1990 with a flawed mirror that required spacewalking astronauts’ dramatic intervention. Roman’s primary mirror is the same size as Hubble’s — nearly 8 feet (2.4 meters) in diameter — and is actually spy satellite surplus.

The National Reconnaissance Office donated two leftover mirrors to NASA more than a decade ago for repurposing. The second mirror is still in storage.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Joan Rubinger overcame a catastrophic biking accident that left her paralyzed to become an influential pain-relief specialist helping top-tier athletes get back on the field after acute and chronic injuries.

Her website touts a client list that includes 169 NFL Pro Bowl selections, 29 NBA and WNBA champions and 15 Olympic medalists. Among some of her most notable patients: NBA All Stars Kobe Bryant and Dwyane Wade, as well as MLB All Star Fernando Tatis Jr.

But behind the scenes, the U.S. Drug Enforcement Administration alleged in court filings, Rubinger doled out thousands of illegal prescriptions for highly addictive painkillers, a “covert and slinking” scheme the nurse practitioner likened to selling hamburgers at a fast-food restaurant. Over a four-year period, federal authorities said, the nurse practitioner prescribed 260,000 pills containing controlled substances to patients in more than 20 states.

Citing what an administrative law judge called egregious conduct, the DEA last month revoked Rubinger’s ability to prescribe opioids. That action followed Rubinger’s agreement in March to pay $1.4 million to settle a parallel Justice Department civil complaint that accused her of dispensing controlled substances like oxycodone, Percocet, and Xanax on hundreds of occasions without any legitimate medical purpose. Rubinger did not admit any wrongdoing as part of that settlement and agreed to never again prescribe controlled substances.

While authorities announced the settlement earlier this year, federal court papers unsealed at the request of The Associated Press provide new details of a medical provider who the DEA says was furtively enriching herself even as she put the health of her patients at risk.

The scheme, the DEA alleged in a seizure warrant, expanded over the years “from professional athletes” to a wide-range of other clients, including members of an Ohio-based street gang, a confessed New Jersey drug trafficker and a New York City model. Along the way, federal authorities alleged, the nurse practitioner took steps to avert DEA suspicion, coaching clients over an encrypted messaging app on ways to avoid having their prescriptions flagged by pharmacies.

The DEA described how two former athletes received illicit prescriptions from Rubinger, including former All-Pro Carolina Panthers linebacker Thomas Davis, whose wife alerted the agency to the nurse practitioner’s activities, according to the court records and an interview with the player’s now ex-spouse.

Rubinger started prescribing Davis opioids as he was bouncing between teams before he retired after the 2020 season, according to his wife. In all, authorities alleged, he received more than 13,000 oxycodone and Percocet pills between November 2019 and March 2024.

Davis did not respond to requests for comment and no one answered his door in North Carolina when visited by an AP reporter.

The DEA identified another former reserve NBA guard who, along with his wife, paid Rubinger more than $50,000 for illicit prescriptions well after he left the league. He could not be reached for comment.

Rubinger’s case did not result in criminal charges

A spokesman for Rubinger, Erick Mullen, did not answer questions about the nurse practitioner’s treatment of Davis or any other athlete, citing medical privacy laws.

“Joan’s case was not a criminal matter but a civil action,” he wrote in an email. “No raids with blue windbreakers carrying agency initials, and no loss of liberty at stake.”

He said “no administrative or disciplinary actions” had been taken by nursing boards in California and New York, where she is licensed to practice.

Mullen also did not address AP’s questions about Rubinger’s alleged ties to the Ohio-based Loyal to Brothers street gang but suggested they represented “actual harm” to his client. “You’ll have to imagine what kind of people threatened, intimidated, bullied and cajoled a paraplegic nurse practitioner and single mother into this kind of situation,” he wrote.

Federal prosecutors declined to comment on why they did not pursue criminal charges even as they accused Rubinger in court filings of violating federal drug statutes and regulations 900 times.

James Rafalski, a retired DEA investigator, said he worked many cases that ended in criminal charges and involved far larger volumes of pills. But Rubinger’s conduct stood out as especially flagrant, he said, adding he was surprised it did not result in a criminal prosecution.

“Most doctors who abuse their DEA registration just write scripts without a thorough examination of the patient,” said Rafalski, who reviewed court records in the case. “She knowingly took steps to evade detection by the DEA and instructed her clients to do the same.”

Prosecutors weigh a variety of factors in deciding whether to bring criminal charges, from the strength of the evidence to how a jury is likely to perceive a defendant.

Eric Grant, the U.S. attorney in Sacramento, said in a statement to AP that “the significant financial penalty” and ban on Rubinger prescribing controlled substances “grants the public meaningful protections against the unlawful dispensing of dangerous drugs.”

A nurse practitioner to the stars

Like many of her clients, Rubinger, 49, was once an elite athlete. As a child, she competed internationally in gymnastics. Years later she rowed and pole vaulted at Syracuse University.

After graduating, she coached women’s rowing at Indiana University, worked alongside elite NBA trainers and even assisted China’s Olympic volleyball team.

“My sculpted physique and bronzed, sun kissed skin were fruits of very hard labor,” she boasted in a personal blog. “Earned. Day after pavement-pounding day.”

She started All Pro Sports Medicine around 2010, describing her company as a niche service that offered athletes discrete medical attention at all hours of the day. In 2014, she was licensed as a nurse practitioner in California, which would’ve made it possible for her to prescribe medication.

Justice Department lawyers described her practice as “highly unorthodox” because it often operated out of hotel rooms, devoid of any medical records or a physician’s supervision.

Rubinger filled her website and social media accounts with testimonials from athletes praising her sports medicine practice. Among those she featured in her feeds were the NFL’s Drew Brees and Saquon Barkley, as well as the NBA’s Wade and Bryant. Major League Baseball’s Manny Machado also offered praise. There’s no suggestion in court records that Brees, Barkley, Bryant, Machado or Wade committed any wrongdoing or were even aware of Rubinger’s alleged prescription practices. Their statements of support all predated the Justice Department complaint. Representatives for the athletes did not respond to requests for comment. Bryant died in a helicopter crash in 2020.

Tatis, a teammate of Machado’s on the San Diego Padres, confirmed he had also been a client of Rubinger but was not aware she had been accused of issuing illicit prescriptions.

“We were always clear on what I wanted,” he told AP. “It was hydration and stuff to keep me on the field, and we were really professional and it was really clear on my side.”

The buzz surrounding Rubinger’s practice stemmed, in part, from “The Goo,” a pain-relieving gel she created. Rubinger marketed “The Goo” as a “wonder cream” and “Pro Athletes’ Best Kept Secret.” It contains the same active ingredients found in over-the-counter pain-relief gels like Bengay.

“I could literally submerge my whole body in a bathtub of Goo, man,” Davis, the linebacker, said in a 2022 video promoting the pain relief treatment.

Recovery from bike accident inspires top athletes

Rubinger’s life took a near tragic turn in 2015 when she plummeted 20 feet over the edge of a cliff while riding a mountain bike. The crash broke more than a dozen ribs, punctured her lungs and left her with spinal cord injuries that left her in a wheelchair.

“I don’t know who I am anymore,” she wrote in the blog chronicling her recovery. “I’ve lost my identity. It terrifies me.”

She initially struggled with simple tasks like brushing her teeth. Nevertheless, she returned to work in just three months. Following Rubinger’s comeback, several NBA players, including Wade, wore orange wristbands in her honor on the court.

“You would look at Joan sitting quietly in her wheelchair and never know that she is the secret weapon behind the best athletes in the world,” Atlanta Hawks guard Buddy Hield wrote in one of several testimonials featured on her company’s website.

Hield did not respond to requests for comment made through the Hawks.

Nurse practitioner allegedly took steps to avert DEA attention

The DEA alleged that Rubinger went to great lengths to conceal her illicit operation.

New clients had to follow specific steps Rubinger outlined in a document she called “THE RULES,” court records show, threatening to cut off anyone who slipped up.

“I put these rules in place for a reason: to minimize the attention we attract from the DEA,” she told one prospective client, according to the seizure affidavit, which allowed agents to confiscate nearly $170,000 in what it deemed “crime proceeds” from her bank account.

Investigators say Rubinger collected hundreds of thousands of dollars through a digital money transfer app to provide clients with prescriptions for painkillers. She made them pay up front, the DEA said, distributing a price list for painkillers.

Getting a prescription, she told clients in “The Rules,” was “like at McDonald’s, you gotta pay for your burger before they hand it to you.”

In early 2024, the DEA said it inspected a Stockton, California, doctor’s office where Rubinger had registered her practice. The office belonged to an orthopedic surgeon Rubinger had shadowed years earlier. The surgeon told authorities he had no role supervising her work nor any knowledge of her prolific prescribing activity, according to the DEA order revoking her prescribing registration.

Many states, including California, require nurse practitioners in most circumstances to work under a physician’s supervision when prescribing opioids.

In social media posts, Rubinger and her athlete clients regularly refer to the nurse practitioner as “Dr. Joan.” Nurse practitioners, however, are not considered doctors.

Her website claims she holds a Ph.D., and her LinkedIn profile lists an unspecified “doctoral degree” from the Ohio State University.

A spokesperson for the university said it has no record of Rubinger attending or working at Ohio State. Mullen, her spokesperson, did not answer questions about her graduate studies.

Rubinger holds master’s degrees in nursing and kinesiology from Indiana University and The George Washington University.

Wife of NFL linebacker tips off DEA

The DEA began investigating Rubinger in 2022 after being tipped off by the wife of Davis, the former NFL linebacker.

Kelly Davis told authorities and the AP that she visited an emergency room in 2022 near her home in Charlotte, North Carolina, complaining of chest pains. As she was being evaluated, a doctor informed her she had been flagged for receiving excessive pain medication prescriptions.

Unbeknownst to her, Rubinger had written 23 oxycodone prescriptions for her husband over a two-year period listing her as the patient, according to the DEA and Kelly Davis.

In court documents, the DEA said Rubinger took such steps with her clients “to obscure her excessive prescribing and avoid law enforcement detection.”

“These individuals are not the intended recipients of the prescriptions, often do not even know they are being prescribed controlled substances,” the DEA wrote, “and have not been examined by Rubinger, much less have an established doctor-patient relationship with her.”

Kelly Davis said she was stunned by the revelation and immediately confronted Rubinger through Instagram.

“This is insane,” the football player’s wife wrote to Rubinger, according to the DEA’s revocation order. “You clearly know he has a problem. Why would you do this?”

Kelly Davis said the nurse practitioner was well liked by players and recalled running into another professional athlete the one time she met Rubinger while accompanying her husband to a 2020 appointment at a Marriott in Charlotte.

NFL has long struggled with painkillers

The NFL has well-documented problems with painkillers. A 2011 study found that 52% of the league’s retired players used opioids during their career. More recently came a 2020 investigation of the head trainer for the Washington Commanders for illegally distributing oxycodone to players. The trainer accepted a $10,000 fine under a deal with the Justice Department to avoid prosecution if he stayed out of trouble. An attorney for the trainer declined to comment.

The NFL has put in place more diligent accounting of drug prescriptions. Players are allowed to go outside their teams for medical care, though since 2019, they’ve been required to report any prescriptions they receive from outside their team.

Shortly after reporting Rubinger to the DEA, Kelly Davis shared her suspicions with the NFL Players Association and the California Board of Registered Nursing. The Players Association declined to comment; the NFL said it had no awareness of Rubinger; and the California nursing board said it does not discuss any disciplinary actions until they are finalized.

Kelly Davis said her husband’s use of opioids contributed to the demise of her marriage. The couple divorced last year.

In a May interview on The Pivot Podcast, Davis blamed his opioid abuse for wrecking his home life.

“There’s a lot of shame and guilt,” he said, holding back tears. “I’ve always been a person and a player that said that I would never allow anything to control me.”

___

Goodman reported from Miami, and Pells from Denver. Associated Press journalists Brett Martel in New Orleans, Rob Maaddi in Tampa and Michael Reo in Washington contributed reporting. Retired AP reporter Bernie Wilson contributed reporting from San Diego.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Wall Street hadn’t heard a peep out of Federal Reserve chairman Kevin Warsh for a month, until he walked on stage for his keynote speech at Jackson Hole today.

Warsh’s speech at the Fed’s annual gathering came with added scrutiny this year: Not only was it Warsh’s first as chairman, but he has also caused analysts some discomfort with his pullback from giving now-familiar forward guidance (in which the central bank indicated the general direction of travel for the base interest rate).

On forward guidance, Warsh stuck to his guns, saying: “You might know about my longtime discomfort with early pronouncements of future policy decisions … Forward guidance as a regular practice was adopted by my colleagues—and me—during the global financial crisis. It was essential at the time, and we introduced it with much fanfare.” 

“But as with other legacies of crises past, I believe the practice has outstayed its welcome. In normal times, the role of forward guidance should be limited and circumscribed; otherwise, it risks creating ambiguity in the name of clarity. Oversharing policy deliberations and overcommitting to future decisions can lead markets, businesses, and households astray, and I believe when policymakers make quasi-commitments on interest rates throughout the cycle, we inhibit our own freedom to make the right calls when it’s time to decide.”

His tone was firm: “We should not indulge a regime in which market participants are looking primarily to the Fed for their next trade.”

And while Warsh has repeated his commitment to the Fed’s dual mandate of inflation at 2% and maximum employment, neither he nor his central bank staffers are living under a rock: Bond yields tracked higher following Warsh’s July press conference, as markets digested a Fed on hold and the suggestion that markets may be doing some of the legwork for financial tightening that they had come to expect from the Fed.

But more alarmingly—for some corners of the street—were the questions hanging over the established frameworks the Fed uses to make decisions about the base rate. Analysts questioned if these frameworks might be subject to change, searching for answers on how policymakers were thinking, even if they didn’t know what action it might prompt.

Here, Warsh shared insights. While his outlook on the economy wasn’t necessarily rosy, it nevertheless described the balance of priorities within the Fed.

Price stability is front of mind, he suggested, in the balance of risks in the Fed’s mandate. He said: “But on the price-stability side of our mandate, the numbers are more concerning. The Fed’s preferred measure of inflation, the 12-month change in the PCE price index, stands at 3.7%, while the six-month change is 4.1%.

“None of these measures are perfect, but they all tell a similar story: Inflation is running above our 2% target. So the Fed’s predominant focus right now should be on prices.”

The employment side of the Fed’s mandate is doing “well,” he said, courtesy of a robust consumer and a “rematching” of employers and employees after the COVID pandemic. He added: “As of now, I believe the labor markets are broadly consistent with full employment, but on the price stability side of our mandate, the numbers are more concerning.”

With speculation swirling as to how actively the Fed will commit to its mandate, Warsh moved to nix concerns: “There is one signal nobody can miss: The responsibility for 65 months of sustained, elevated inflation sits squarely with the central bank. And that is where it belongs … I stand here today committed to a discipline, not to a decision. My Fed colleagues and I are hardly the first to hold these positions in a time of great consequence. We are determined to redeem the time by doing our very best work.

“We take our responsibility seriously, with humility and with resolve. So much depends on choices we make. Sound monetary policy helps households and businesses to prosper. When carried out effectively, it broadens and deepens the momentum of our economy . . . and helps to secure America’s leadership in the world. And I know that our country needs us to think carefully and act wisely.”

Warsh’s latest speech (at the time of writing) seems to have sidestepped any sharp reaction from markets: the price of gold—a safe-haven asset relied upon during times of volatility—dropped by approximately 1% during Warsh’s speech. The VIX volatility index also declined 1%, while longer-dated Treasuries also lowered. The CME FedWatch index, which tracks Fed fund futures, shows 57% of traders believe the Fed’s next rate move on September will be a hike of 0.25%, to the 3.75% level.

Early reaction from analysts suggests Warsh learned from the pushback earlier this summer. Eric Winograd, chief U.S. economist at AllianceBernstein, wrote that while the Fed chairman’s speech was light on details of central bank transformation, it did “correct a couple of mistakes he made at his last press conference, reinforcing that PCE is the target measure for inflation and that interest rates are the Fed’s primary tool. 

“Those corrections make the speech hawkish compared to his last remarks and should offer some relief to the back end of the yield curve, where some worries about Warsh’s willingness to act with rates to bring inflation down contributed to rising yields.”

‘The productivity pixie’

One thing some Wall Street analysts—unusually—didn’t want to hear too much about was AI. As UBS’s Paul Donovan quipped ahead of the speech: “The worst case would be a reiteration of Warsh’s belief in the productivity pixie, and platitudes about future higher growth. Technology’s impact on macroeconomic productivity is uncertain, and risks of a ‘brain drain’ from the U.S. and lower immigration also affect growth.”

The boomerang central banker hit on the topic early, but with questions rather than expectations as to how it might shape the Fed’s mandate. Warsh said: “We recognize that AI is a new variable—potentially a new factor of production—that will have consequences for both the economy and the conduct of monetary policy. It opens some major lines of inquiry: Will the application of AI cause a significant, sustained rise in productivity across the economy? And if so, when?”

“Among the other yet-unknowns is the resulting market structure. It’s not obvious where the returns on capital will land or on what timescale.”

He added: “We will be thinking through these matters with the help of a task force on productivity and jobs. My early check-ins with the leaders of that task force, and the four others, have been encouraging.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Google Maps relabeled Lake Ontario as “Lake America” for users in the US, Alphabet Inc. announced, after President Donald Trump said he would rename the lake amid a trade spat with Canada.

The decision was prompted by a change in the official US government geographic naming system, the company said. 

The lake is one of the Great Lakes and spans the border between the two countries. Trump clashed with New York Governor Kathy Hochul after she said that New York state wouldn’t use the new name

Users in Canada will continue to see the body of water labeled as Lake Ontario, while the rest of the world will see both names displayed.

“These updates follow our long-standing policy for bodies of water with names that vary from country to country,” Alphabet said in a statement. 

MapQuest will not change the name in its products, the platform wrote in a social media post. Apple Maps is currently displaying the body of water to US users as Lake Ontario.

Trump last year ordered the Gulf of Mexico renamed to Gulf of America. 

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent began the week vowing an “economic onslaught” against Iran and its trading partners in a fresh bid to end the war. By the week’s end, countries with ties to Tehran had so far shrugged off the threat and analysts were left underwhelmed by the US actions.

China, which buys 90% of Iran’s oil, issued a defiant warning to Washington rather than back down. Iranian bank branches remained open in Dubai. At one Bank Melli branch in Abu Dhabi, staff were busy typing away and one employee explained that they were still open for business. 

Commercial flights also continued between Iran and Turkey as well as Iran and the United Arab Emirates, which had promised last week to sever all trade and financial transactions with Tehran. Routes flying to Thailand and Azerbaijan, as well as multiple destinations in both Russia and China, remained unaffected.

As the week came to a close, the US announced plans to sanction the UAE-based branches of Egypt’s Banque Misr. That fell well below expectations after Bessent’s warning that the world would see “a major announcement of a financial institution being sanctioned by the end of this week.”

“As the war passes the six-month mark, the public actions taken by the Treasury Department this week do not match the hype,” said Alex Zerden, a former US Treasury official and founder of Capitol Peak Strategies. 

“Operation Economic Outcast is a continuation of 47 years of restrictive economic measures against Iran but does not provide a clearer theory of economic or military victory in this current campaign,” Zerden said.

The Treasury Department didn’t respond to a request for comment on Friday.

Bessent’s threats — and the collective global shrug so far — underscore the Trump administration’s main conundrum as it seeks to sanction Iran into meeting its demands. Any effective sanctions campaign would need to hit China, a move that risks sparking retaliation and potentially massive global economic fallout. Anything less would add to Iran’s economic pain but not enough to budge its strategic calculus.

US credibility is also at stake. Bessent repeatedly compared the US response to the historic 1944 D-Day landings in Normandy, France — a coordinated land and air invasion aimed at toppling the Nazi regime. But the US acted unilaterally with its latest move, pressuring other countries rather than working with them, and Bessent openly acknowledged that going too fast and too hard risked tanking the global financial system.

Read More: US Moves Against Egyptian Bank’s UAE Branches Over Iran Ties

Further muddying the picture, Bessent also said the US was engaged in “quiet diplomacy” to get its way. US officials turned to counterparts in the UK asking for a statement of support, according to people familiar with the matter. 

The Treasury chief is also expected to speak with fellow finance ministers this weekend at a Group of 20 gathering in Asheville, North Carolina. One of the biggest questions attendees will likely have for Bessent is whether the US is willing to hit a Chinese financial institution, according to Josh Lipsky, chair of international economics at the Atlantic Council. 

The UAE, a key US strategic ally, said earlier this month it would cut financial ties with Iran. But some flight and banking links with Tehran appear to continue, and the UAE’s government described its move in a statement to Bloomberg News as a “sovereign decision reflecting its strategic assessment of the national interest and the requirements of regional security.”

Asked on Thursday which countries the US had approached so far, President Donald Trump responded, “about Iran? There’s not a lot to speak to. We don’t want to speak to them. We’re not looking to meet or anything.”

“You can’t unleash meaningful economic warfare on Iran while ignoring the one country that absorbs 90% of its oil exports,” said Leland Miller, the CEO of China Beige Book data platform and a commissioner on the US-China Economic and Security Review Commission, which advises the US Congress.

In the meantime, the US appears no closer to ending the war that Trump launched alongside Israel in late February. Iran has endured decades of harsh sanctions and has recently faced a full US Navy blockade of its ports that has dried up oil exports.

Officials in nations that have traditionally had strong economic links with Iran have not heard much from the US this week. Turkey has not received any formal guidance from the US on the restrictions and how they apply to Iran, according to people familiar with the matter. But they believe they’ll have adequate time to discuss and implement requirements once they are informed, they said.

The response from Pakistan indicated that even countries with close ties to the US are feeling little immediate pressure from the new campaign, at least so far. 

While Islamabad has won praise from Trump for its mediation efforts to end the war, there was no indication that its overland trade with the Islamic Republic — such as in rice and mangoes — had slowed down. Pakistan’s Foreign Ministry spokesman Tahir Andrabi told reporters this week that the country “is not obliged” to respond to unilateral sanctions.

“The idea Iran can be knocked out with this is risible — it’s not going to move the needle,” said Stephen Fallon, principal adviser at DBM Consulting. “It’s not possible to get a completely airtight seal on this thing. There are too many actors, and it’s too rewarding for the people involved.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Many of the world’s top oil countries have state-run national champions, such as Saudi Arabia’s Aramco, Russia’s Rosneft, the UAE’s Abu Dhabi National Oil Company, Brazil’s Petrobras, and Mexico’s Pemex.

But the U.S., which is the world’s biggest oil producer, doesn’t have one, leaving the task of pumping crude to private-sector giants like Exxon Mobil and Chevron as well as the multitude of wildcatters across the Permian Basin.

The Trump administration’s deal for 65 billion barrels of Venezuelan oil reserves, however, will give the federal government a stake in a new joint venture.

The country’s interim president, Delcy Rodriguez, has granted a private company a 100-year lease for prime oil fields, a U.S. official said, according to reports.

The federal government will control 55% of the company’s effective output via equity ownership and oil production. A private Venezuelan operator will have the remaining share. The U.S. official said the company will be the world’s second-largest corporate holder of proven reserves after Saudi Aramco.

For her part, Rodriguez said the deal will bring in more than $100 billion of investment and generate $209 billion for Venezuela’s government.

Venezuela has the largest oil reserves in the world, with an estimated 303 billion barrels. President Donald Trump’s deal to gain control of 65 billion barrels of that amount exceeds the U.S. proven reserve total of 46 billion.

The Trump administration’s majority stake in an oil company follows its investments in chipmaker Intel, rare earths miner MP Materials, mineral explorer Trilogy Metals, and dozens of other firms. It also has revenue-sharing agreements with AI chip leaders Nvidia and AMD for sales to China.

The latest deal comes nearly nine months after Trump ordered the military to capture Venezuelan dictator Nicolás Maduro and bring him to the U.S. to face federal narcoterrorism and drug trafficking charges.

A month after that operation, the U.S. and Israel launched a war against Iran that resulted in the worst-ever energy supply shock in history, spiking prices higher and forcing countries to draw down crude stockpiles.

In the U.S., the Strategic Petroleum Reserve has fallen to 289.7 million barrels, its lowest level since November 1982. Some industry experts have warned that the SPR will soon reach operational minimums soon, wiping out any further cushion to offset the oil deficit from the Middle East.

The U.S. official told reporters that as the U.S.-Venezuelan company ramps up oil production, its output will help restock the SPR. But Venezuela’s oil sector has been in disrepair for decades, and production is now only 1.1 million barrels a day, down from a peak of 3.5 million barrels more than 20 years ago.

Boosting the country’s output to those levels again would require billions of dollars in investment and years before they reach fruition.

Meanwhile, global oil giants with the financial resources to make such investments must be convinced that it’s safe to do business in Venezuela again after their assets were nationalized by earlier governments.

Some are preparing the make the leap. Chevron is close to a deal to expand its longstanding operations in Venezuela, sources told the Wall Street Journal. Oilfield-services giant Halliburton is also in talks to bring equipment to the country, and executives from several oil-and-gas companies will sign production deals next week, the report added.

Italy’s Eni, which has a presence in Venezuela, announced Saturday that it’s working with authorities there to help revitalize the energy sector.

Still, many details about Trump’s new Venezuela venture are still unknown, and energy experts were skeptical about how much investment it could bring.

“For sure, and if Venezuela ever gets anything resembling a democratic government, the very first thing it will do is flush Trump’s deal down the toilet,” Dean Baker, senior economist at the Center for Economic and Policy Research, posted on X.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

In a country increasingly divided along political ideologies, partisan politics are coming together to answer the age old dynamic between privacy and security.

On Wednesday, the blue-leaning Tempe, Ariz. turned off its Flock automated license plate readers and said the city would not seek another company to replace the system. Three hours later, the nearby red-leaning town of Cave Creek did the same. The same day in Washington, D.C., Senator Josh Hawley, a Missouri Republican, opened a formal investigation into the company, while independent Vermont Senator Bernie Sanders posted a lengthy statement pledging to introduce legislation against it.

Tempe’s police department had used Flock’s cameras to help solve crimes, and the city said its own audits, conducted monthly, turned up no misuse. But that wasn’t enough to keep the system running. “These cameras have helped our police officers do their jobs, and we don’t discount that,” Tempe Mayor Corey Woods said in a statement shared with Fortune. “But the risk of misuse is too great. We have to be able to provide public safety in a way that maintains the trust of our community. For Tempe, that means taking these cameras down.”

Tempe Councilmember Bobby Nichols said the decision was a matter of legal principle. “Any law enforcement tool used by the City must not pose a risk of infringing on residents’ civil liberties,” he said. “We have a responsibility to ensure that these technologies are only employed if they present a narrowly tailored solution to a compelling government interest.”

The city’s contract with Flock was worth $80,000; its cameras will remain in place until Flock removes them, though they have stopped collecting data. Any data that was previously collected is stored temporarily and then deleted automatically unless it’s tied to an open case. Tempe already cut off automatic data sharing with other law enforcement agencies earlier in August and launched a public transparency portal, which will now be discontinued.

“Every day, police departments across the country are solving countless serious crimes and making a measurable public safety impact with Flock technology, including as the city shared, in Tempe,” a Flock spokesperson told Fortune.

“When a tool that is actively helping solve violent crimes, locate suspects, and find missing people is removed, public safety moves backward. That has real consequences: cases will take longer to solve, organized retail theft crews will operate with fewer obstacles, an Amber Alert may not be returned home, and victims may wait longer, or indefinitely, for justice.”

The spokesperson added that misuse of Flock’s technology is unacceptable, and that every search is logged and reviewed through the company’s Audit Assistance tool, which flags unusual activity for administrators to review.

Cave Creek’s decision, three hours after Tempe’s, cited privacy concerns, cases of misuse elsewhere in Arizona and around the country, and the theft of one of its own Flock cameras from an intersection. Public works crews removed the town’s remaining cameras for safekeeping after the theft.

But the town’s core objection was structural: Flock’s networked design allows outside law enforcement agencies to search data collected locally, and town officials concluded there was no way to guarantee residents’ privacy once their information left Cave Creek’s jurisdiction.

The town manager and town attorney are set to formally address the decision at a Sept. 1 council meeting. Officials from Cave Creek have not yet responded to Fortune’s request for comment.

Reading between the [partisan] lines

Tempe leans Democratic: roughly 63% of its voters back Democrats, making it one of the more reliably blue cities in a state that has been a purple battleground lately. Cave Creek, a small, affluent town north of Phoenix, leans Republican by comparison. The two towns landed in the same place, becoming at least the ninth and 10th Arizona municipalities to drop or restrict Flock in the past year, following Chandler, Surprise, Pinal County, Sedona, Flagstaff, Sierra Vista, South Tucson and Apache Junction.

In the nation’s capital, Hawley, who chairs the Senate Judiciary Subcommittee on Crime and Counterterrorism, sent a letter to Flock CEO Garrett Langley announcing an investigation into the company’s “collection, retention, and dissemination” of data gathered by its cameras.

The letter argued that Flock has built an “unprecedented national surveillance network” of more than 120,000 cameras across 49 states, scanning more than 20 billion vehicles a month, and that “Congress never authorized the network your industry has built.” He gave the company until Sept. 8 to turn over documents. A Flock spokesperson told reporters the company intends to cooperate.

Hours later, Sanders posted a statement of his own on X, describing Flock as part of a system that risks tipping the country into what he called totalitarianism. He also pointed to the number of Flock’s cameras, adding that newer versions of the technology can match images of people and vehicles against databases of phone numbers, relatives and court records.

“We must come together to stop Flock and AI mass surveillance,” Sanders wrote. “That is why I will soon be introducing legislation to do just that.”

Hawley and Sanders sit at opposite ends of the Senate’s ideological spectrum. Their statements arrived within hours of each other, echoing the same split-screen convergence playing out in Arizona.

Flock’s rapid expansion, and the scrutiny now following it, has moved fast. The company’s cameras have helped close roughly a million police investigations and locate about 10,000 missing people over the past year, by its own account.

But an August Washington Post investigation found more than 50 law enforcement officers had been accused, charged with, or convicted of misusing automated license plate readers, including cases where officers used the systems to track former partners. Anti-surveillance group DeFlock says more than 90 cities have moved to cancel or reject Flock contracts as of Wednesday.

Flock has since reduced its default data retention window from 30 days to seven and now requires officers to enter a case code before accessing stored data. Langley told Fox News the country needs “compromise” between privacy and safety concerns. Whether that compromise arrives before more cities, and more members of Congress, act on their own remains to be seen.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

The Trump administration is exploring adding robot dogs to the expanding arsenal being used by federal immigration authorities as they seek to boost arrests and deportations across the country.

US Immigration and Customs Enforcement posted a market-research notice Friday saying the agency was looking into the purchase of “quadruped unmanned ground vehicles,” known as robotic dogs, along with a draft of the robot specifications.

The posting comes amid concerns from civil liberties groups about plans to increase funding for ICE as the agency faces questions over the use of force in President Donald Trump’s aggressive deportations drive. The agency has signaled it plans to boost spending on enforcement technology, including as much as $20 million to outfit ICE agents and officers with electric shock gloves, which deliver a debilitating shock to a person when used directly on the skin.

Read More: ICE Wants Agents to Have Electric-Shock Gloves for Detainees

According to NBC News, which first reported the agency’s interest in the dog-like quadruped robots, the government is looking to spend at least $2 million on the robots. ICE’s market research posting stipulates there’s no guarantee the government will solicit a future order. 

The Department of Homeland Security did not immediately respond to a request for comment.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

“AIR FORCE VETERAN. SMALL BUSINESSMAN. TRUMP CONSERVATIVE.”

The all-caps headline on Texas Republican congressional candidate Carlos De La Cruz’s website used to align him with President Donald Trump. Not anymore.

“NATIVE TEXAN. AIR FORCE VETERAN. SMALL BUSINESSMAN. PROVEN CONSERVATIVE,” it reads now.

De La Cruz’s campaign rejected any suggestion he was backing away from the president, whose knack for mobilizing his loyalists remains critical for Republicans in this fall’s midterm elections. The overwhelming majority of Republicans on the ballot this fall are embracing Trump despite his dismal approval ratings, an unpopular war with Iran and lingering inflation.

However, as the two-month sprint to Election Day begins, a small collection of Republican candidates have quietly begun to distance themselves in subtle ways from Trump now that they’ve won contested primaries in which his endorsement was often the most coveted prize. The shift is easy to miss, often only a few words or new pictures. And Republicans insist there is no shift at all.

Mike Marinella, a spokesman for the National Republican Congressional Committee, called it a “manufactured storyline.”

“President Trump and House Republicans have delivered historic results for the American people, and our candidates are eager to take that record directly to voters alongside the President on the campaign trail,” he said.

But from California to Texas and Kentucky to Alaska, candidates in recent weeks have tweaked their campaign messaging to downplay their connection to Trump. A handful of others have highlighted their opposition to his policies.

It’s an extremely delicate balance for vulnerable Republican candidates, who must expand their appeal beyond Trump’s MAGA base to win in the general election this fall, but are also afraid to trigger a backlash from Trump or his hard core supporters if they create too much distance.

Trump’s unpopularity could weigh down his party

Most candidates are still wrapping their arms around Trump.

Republican allies of the president argue there is little upside for candidates to turn away from Trump, despite his weak polling numbers. Democrats will try to cast every Republican running as a Trump acolyte, regardless of their actual stances, they said, and midterm successes typically depend on turning out base voters. Trump remains the Republican Party’s best motivator.

“The whole Republican brand is that we’re aligned with Trump so you gain nothing from it,” said Jason Roe, a Republican who advises Rep. Tom Barrett, who is fighting for reelection in a competitive mid-Michigan district race.

It is typical for candidates from both sides to tweak their messages after primary elections. Some Democrats, for example, have begun pitching themselves as moderates after highlighting endorsements from progressives like Sen. Bernie Sanders during their primaries.

Still, the slight shift among at least a half-dozen Republican congressional candidates could signal the beginning of a more significant move within the party as the weight of Trump’s unpopularity with the general public comes into view at a critical moment. Just 33% of adults approve of Trump’s job performance, according to Associated Press-NORC polling from July. And Trump gets relatively poor ratings on his handling of the economy, immigration and foreign policy.

Meanwhile, Trump will not make it easy for vulnerable Republicans to avoid him. As voters typically begin paying much closer attention to politics after Labor Day, the president will headline a two-day Republican convention in Dallas as he urges voters to act as if he were on the ballot.

“The problem that we have is they say that Trump does great when he’s on the ballot, but when he’s not on the ballot, his people don’t come,” Trump said as he recently stumped in South Carolina.

“So what I really want you to do is pretend, please, that I’m on the ballot,” he went on. “Just say that I’m on the ballot one more time.”

Shifting emphasis moving into the general election

A number of Republicans have removed or downplayed references to Trump from their websites after winning their primaries.

Eric Flores, a former assistant U.S. Attorney and Texas Army National Guard infantry captain running against Democratic Rep. Vicente Gonzalez Jr. in South Texas, once featured “SUPPORT PRESIDENT TRUMP’S AGENDA” as No. 2 in his list of priorities on his campaign homepage.

That item has now been replaced with “ LOWER THE COST OF LIVING,” a top issue for voters. Trump does not appear anywhere else on the website, aside from a list of endorsements that previously appeared on the homepage but has been moved to a separate page.

Flores’ campaign declined to comment.

In Kentucky, Ralph Alvarado, running to represent the overwhelmingly Republican 6th Congressional District, removed all references to Trump from his campaign homepage, as well as a photo of the two of them together after winning his primary in May. He now promises to offer “INDEPENDENT LEADERSHIP” after previously running as an “AMERICA FIRST FIGHTER.”

NBC News first reported the changes to Alvarado’s website. Campaign manager Andy Westberry noted Trump’s photo still appears elsewhere in a media gallery. “The socialists are going to have to do a lot better than this nonsense to win this district,” he said in a statement.

Some changes do not mean Trump has been erased.

While De La Cruz no longer touts himself as a “TRUMP CONSERVATIVE” at the top of his homepage, a video that is embedded lower down features the Air Force veteran speaking at a Trump rally.

He still calls himself a “TEXAS TRUMP CONSERVATIVE” on his bio page and lists “Supporting President Trump’s America First Agenda” as among his priorities on a “Mission” page.

But the bio section has also been tweaked. It once described him as “ready to be President Trump’s wingman in Congress.” That section now says he is running because he “believes America needs more servant leaders and fewer corrupt politicians” and “because he’s not finished serving the country he loves.”

De La Cruz campaign manager Jordan Pawlicki said in a statement that, during the primary, several candidates were claiming the president’s endorsement, so the campaign “put it front and center.”

“Carlos is honored to have President Trump’s support, which is why the President is featured prominently across our website,” Pawlicki said.

Republicans downplay any changes to their messaging

In Nevada, Republican congressional candidate Marty O’Donnell’s website featured Trump prominently in June. The very first thing visitors saw was a pop-up with a large picture of Trump and a smiling O’Donnell standing side by side. The words “President Trump endorsed Marty O’Donnell” were written beneath the image.

Two months later, the photo does not appear on the website. O’Donnell’s campaign said the photo was not intentionally removed; the change was simply the standard rotation of the “splash page.”

O’Donnell adviser Keith Schipper noted that O’Donnell, a music composer best known for his work on the “Halo” video game series, has not deviated from his steadfast support for Trump.

“Republicans are embracing President Trump on the campaign trail because they know he is the key to getting his voters out in November,” Schipper said. “The president has delivered on the agenda he promised voters in 2024 and Republicans are smartly using it to win this year.”

There was another subtle shift in Alaska’s House race, where Republican Rep. Nick Begich is running for reelection.

In June, he highlighted his relationship to Trump on the homepage of his website: “Alongside President Trump, we have made great gains for Alaska, putting us on a path to self-determination and generational success.”

This week, nothing in that section has been changed, except for the opening line that previously mentioned Trump. Now, that line reads, “We have delivered for Alaska, putting us on a path to self-determination and generational success.”

Begich’s campaign did not respond to a request for comment.

Some are emphasizing their independence

Rep. Mike Lawler, a New York Republican who represents a district carried by Kamala Harris in the last election, appeared on stage with the president during a rally in his district just three months ago. But does he want Trump to return before Election Day?

“If he comes back, that’s fine, but ultimately this race is going to be decided by my record and my vision,” Lawler said in an interview.

Lawler supported Trump’s so-called “big, beautiful bill,” but he’s quick to highlight policy differences, especially on taxes. Trump does not appear on Lawler’s campaign website.

On Thursday, Tom Tiffany, the Republican candidate for governor in Wisconsin who is closely aligned with Trump, publicly criticized the president’s decision to sign an order renaming Lake Ontario “Lake America” as part of his trade war with Canada.

“I believe the Great Lakes are the Great Lakes and should stay Lake Superior, Lake Michigan, Lake Ontario,” he said, according to the Milwaukee Journal Sentinel.

Earlier this week, he came out against Trump’s plan to import cheaper ground beef in an effort to reduce prices.

Others want distance from Trump’s unpopular war with Iran.

In Michigan, Rep. Barrett, who flipped a Lansing-area district two years ago, has been highlighting his vote against Trump’s war in Iran on the campaign trail as he competes against William Lawrence, a self-described democratic socialist.

Barrett this year has repeatedly broken ranks with Republicans to join Democrats in voting for the War Powers Resolution to rein in Trump’s military campaign in Iran. And he has been promoting those votes, promoting a recent town hall with constituents, by saying he would “be having a discussion about the War Powers Act and my efforts to place congressional limits on the war in Iran.”

Roe, the Republican who advises Barrett, said the vote was not about some major break from Trump but a difference over a policy-specific issue. Barrett served in the U.S. Army for over two decades.

“He’s willing to be at odds with the White House on this issue,” Roe said. “It’s important to him.”

___

Associated Press writer Joey Cappelletti reported from St. Joseph, Michigan.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Evoking the same do-it-yourself pop-rock feminism of her ’90s musical influences, Olivia Rodrigo raised $20 million for women’s well-being with a benefit show that activated her young audience.

Daisy Chain Fields united a women-led lineup boasting queer pop star Chappell Roan, breakout rapper Doechii and riot grrrl pioneers Bikini Kill behind issues of women’s health, workplace protections and legal rights. Ahead of Saturday’s festival in Irvine, California, Rodrigo announced the show had already raised enough to make a $10 million donation to 10 nonprofit partners including Planned Parenthood, National Women’s Law Center and Black Mamas Matter Alliance.

Philanthropist Melinda French Gates pledged another $10 million through her Pivotal Ventures in a surprise appearance at the start of Rodrigo’s set, praising her for “showing a new generation how much their voices matter.”

Rodrigo said the festival’s artists and activists give her hope despite the “regression of women’s rights” today.

“That’s actually why I fell in love with the name ‘Daisy Chain,’” she said Friday. “It served as a reminder of how individual parts can come together to create something strong and unbreakable.”

Rodrigo, 23, has made a name channeling the rage and dissatisfaction of modern romance into chart-topping songs that are equal parts Taylor Swift and Alanis Morissette. Now, she looks to bridge the gap between Gen Z and nonprofits, which have struggled to build relationships with younger donors who tend to prefer informal ways of giving.

The connection is not lost on Daisy Chain Fields attendees.

“People don’t join together and mobilize unless they feel connected to the group that is mobilizing,” said Grace Slevin, 24. “What’s better than music?”

All-star benefit concerts have proven popular for driving millions of dollars toward everything from refugee relief to pandemic response. But it’s been decades since a young artist with Rodrigo’s following brought her peers together for gender justice.

That focus comes as President Donald Trump attempts to overhaul family planning grants that reproductive health clinics use to provide birth control and treat sexually transmitted infections. His administration paused $27.5 million last year for such organizations, including some Planned Parenthood affiliates, before officials agreed to restore the money.

For Slevin, an Orange County, California, resident who does anti-sex-trafficking advocacy, Daisy Chain Fields embodies the sentiment of “be who you needed when you were younger.” She loves that attendees are welcome to learn about the beneficiaries’ work in addition to donating.

Nonprofit partners engaged with fans in Daisy Chain Fields’ “philanthropy village.” Festivalgoers collected pins from booths as they learned about health services from Planned Parenthood or pay tribute to caregivers through the National Domestic Workers Alliance.

An art installation by the Guerilla Girls, anonymous artist activists, invited fans to air their grievances on chalkboards. Handwritten responses included “PROTECT QUEER KIDS!” and “Put women in charge and pay us more!!!” as well as “ICE OUT!” and “ABORTION RIGHTS 4 ALL.”

Younger generations expect a level of authenticity beyond a “pseudo-sort-of-progressiveness,” Slevin said.

“They can see just how deeply intertwined the music is with the cause,” she said. “It’s not just, like, a second thought.”

Do you get déjà vu? Rodrigo’s effort recalls ’90s feminist push

Rodrigo took inspiration from Lilith Fair, the all-women festival that raised $10 million for charity from 1997 to 1999. Sarah McLachlan, who founded the show to dispel the music industry’s notion they couldn’t book women consecutively, performed with Rodrigo Saturday.

Planned Parenthood National Director of Arts and Entertainment Caren Spruch recalled working on Lilith Fair, adding that concert outreach is an important tool to reach people “where they are.”

That culture-shifting work grows more important during times like this, she acknowledged, when abortion clinics are closing in restrictive statesand anti-abortion groups are pushing the courts to limit access to drugs most commonly used in abortion.

Rodrigo, Spruch said, talks about those topics with “no shame or stigma.” As she did with other nonprofits, the three-time Grammy winnerappeared in informational videos on Planned Parenthood’s social media.

“All of that does so much to help us normalize the whole range of reproductive health and rights,” Spruch said.

Intergenerational change

Melissa Shaw, 33, drove to the festival from Tucson, Arizona, with her 8-year-old daughter.

They didn’t plan to spend the day camped out for close-up views. Shaw wanted to let her daughter ask questions as they explored the nonprofits and visited art installations. She appreciates that Rodrigo is not only promoting well-known organizations such as Planned Parenthood, but also groups focused specifically on Black maternal health or baby formula access.

“It’s really important for me as a parent to expose my daughter to celebrities who set that example,” Shaw said.

To her, the lineup seemed intentionally curated to attract multiple generations. Her daughter loves Rodrigo and Roan, and she herself grew up listening to Bikini Kill and fellow performer Santigold. She saw many mother-daughter duos sharing their festival plans online.

The festival’s nonprofit partners were eager to join that multigenerational community of women, too.

“At a time when decisions about our bodies, our health, our safety and our futures are being made for us not by us, a day built around care and community is its own kind of statement,” FreeFrom founder Sonya Passi said in a statement.

National Domestic Workers Alliance President Ai-jen Poo said the festival’s joyful atmosphere serves as a “powerful reminder to women everywhere of all ages that, no matter what, we have each other.”

Her organization works to ensure federal workplace protections for domestic workers, who are disproportionately women and immigrant women. She wants to recruit more young people, many of whom she said are worried they can’t afford to take care of their loved ones or start families.

“The only way change happens is through intergenerational connection and movements in our country,” she said. “This generation of young people has the opportunity to really change how we support caregiving for future generations.”

Philanthropy takes center stage

Organizers vowed to work with nonprofit partners to put the grants toward their most urgent and underresourced needs.

Newer nonprofits also appreciated the opportunity to expand their networks. Black Mamas Matter Alliance co-founder Angela Doyinsola Aina said the nonprofit, just 10 years old, reached people who wouldn’t have otherwise encountered their work on Black maternal health.

For the National Women’s Law Center, the gift offers flexibility to plug their own budgetary holes as they litigate sex discrimination cases. Uma Iyer, the nonprofit’s chief external affairs officer, said the support also boosted staff morale.

“We work on really hard things every day,” she said. “It was really energizing for us and it’s been really uplifting.”

Including both everyday audiences and front-line workers in benefits is key, according to Farm Aid co-executive director Jennifer Fahy. The annual fundraising concerts — launched by Willie Nelson, Neil Young and John Mellencamp to raise awareness of family farmers’ challenges —- celebrated their 40th anniversary last year.

“It’s just wonderful to see an artist of that generation, that new young generation, who is embracing that opportunity that exists to do these kinds of events, to share the stage and microphone to highlight issues that are important to the artist,” Fahy said.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

In a race that has centered on whether Ed Markey, 80, is too old for another U.S. Senate term, the Massachusetts Democrat’s answer to a recent debate question was especially striking.

When asked whether he uses AI platforms like Claude or ChatGPT in his work, Markey seemed unclear on the topic. He responded that he uses “whatever is inside of my iPhone or my iPad — whatever comes up” and added that he doesn’t know “what companies my iPad may be using.”

For Arsen Bagdassarian, an 18-year-old supporter of Markey’s rival, 47-year-old U.S. Rep. Seth Moulton, the answer reinforced a concern that has become central to Moulton’s campaign to unseat the incumbent in Tuesday’s party primary: that Markey, who would be 86 at the end of another term, is too old to represent a generation confronting problems that didn’t exist when Markey entered Congress 50 years ago.

“To be frank, I didn’t expect him to be as clueless as he really was on that topic,” said Bagdassarian, an incoming freshman at Boston’s Northeastern University. Artificial intelligence is “a major concern,” he said, and the country needs leaders “who understand what they’re being asked to regulate.”

The 2026 midterms have brought a number of generational challenges like the one Moulton is waging against Markey, with younger Democrats taking on — and in some cases unseating — longtime incumbents. There are signs that Democratic voters, especially, are looking for change, and some young voters argue older politicians can’t truly understand a world transformed by artificial intelligence, rising housing costs and student debt.

But that hasn’t been the case for all young people voting for the Senate nominee in a heavily Democratic state where the primary often decides who wins office. Markey has a strong following of young supporters, some of whom say that the internal party debate is more over policy than age. He’s won the endorsement of the High School Democrats of America and the College Democrats of America, as well as the backing of popular progressives such as U.S. Rep. Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez of New York and New York City Mayor Zohran Mamdani.

Among those younger supporters is Matt Kelly, president of the UMass Lowell College Democrats. Kelly doesn’t dispute that Markey stumbled when asked about his use of AI, saying, “I’ll admit it wasn’t a good answer.”

But Kelly said he cares less about whether Markey knows how to use the latest technology than whether he understands how to govern it. Moulton’s relative youth, Kelly said, doesn’t necessarily make his views more representative of young voters.

“Just because he has a younger face doesn’t mean that he has younger ideas,” he said.

For young Markey supporters, longevity can be an asset

Many of Markey’s younger supporters turn Moulton’s argument about the senator’s 50-year political career on its head. To them, longevity provides a record they can judge — one that shows whether politicians held the same positions before they became popular with younger voters. One example is Markey’s vote in 2002 against the creation of the Department of Homeland Security, which later led to the creation of U.S. Immigration and Customs Enforcement.

Milan van Dam, a 17-year-old who serves as national chair of the High School Democrats of America, said generational leadership is “less about an age on a Wikipedia page” than the ideas a candidate represents and their consistency through time.

Abby Shadden, a 21-year-old Emmanuel College student, similarly pointed to Markey’s co-authorship of the Green New Deal and his early support for Medicare for All.

“There is this idea that younger people are just automatically more progressive when, in this case, it is very much not true,” she said.

For Kelly, the debate over AI is already playing out close to home. A proposed data center in Lowell, where he attends college, has generated opposition from some residents over its potential impact on the community. Kelly said Markey’s push for greater regulation of data centers matters more to him than the senator’s awkward answer about AI.

Kelly said his generation will be graduating into an economy increasingly shaped by artificial intelligence while facing a cost of living that has made it harder to achieve the same financial security as previous generations.

“Yes, Ed Markey’s answer rhetorically didn’t come off well, optically didn’t look well,” Kelly said. But when it comes to who will be good for “the group that’s graduating into this new economy,” he said, Markey’s record matters more.

Moulton says it’s time for a new generation of Democratic leaders

Moulton seized on Markey’s debate answer, telling him: “Senator, if you don’t even know what you’re using on your phone or your iPad, like this is why we need a new generation of leaders to regulate these technologies.” Moulton called Markey’s loose grasp of the technology “potentially disqualifying.”

Markey pushed back, saying, “It doesn’t make any difference whether it’s called Siri or it’s called Claude,” and emphasizing that familiarity with individual AI products was less important than putting safeguards around the technology. He pointed to legislation he has introduced to regulate AI’s effects on children, workers, civil rights, and the environment.

Moulton has emphasized Markey’s age throughout the race, calling for “generational change” and age limits for members of Congress.

For some of Moulton’s young supporters, however, the argument is about more than the candidates’ ages.

Molly Blander, an 18-year-old incoming Tufts University freshman, pointed to artificial intelligence and social media as technologies that have reshaped life for her generation — including its mental health. She cited Moulton’s work to establish 988 as the national suicide and crisis lifeline as an example of the kind of response she wants to see.

“Social media has created a modern mental health problem, so we need modern solutions,” Blander said.

“The world before AI is so different than it is now,” Blander added. “I think what was hard to see and hard to understand is that my senator does not understand one of the challenges that we’ve been facing.”

Her generation’s political world has also been shaped by Republican President Donald Trump.

“In my lifetime, I haven’t seen the Democratic Party and the Democratic establishment really make things much better,” she said, pointing to rising housing and energy costs and Trump’s rise and reelection. “And so I feel like the status quo and the establishment that we have now just isn’t working.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

With an estimated net worth of $400 million, Kevin O’Leary could afford to never cook, clean, or grocery shop for himself ever again. But the Canadian businessman and Shark Tank investor isn’t one to pass up financial savings—no matter how small.

“I’m always looking for a great deal, that’s why I’m in Walmart,” he said in a recent Instagram video. “You know those fantastic black jeans I’m always wearing? That’s right—Walmart special, 29 smackaroos. That’s how you save dough.”

The 72-year-old added that his wife sent him to the store to buy some essentials, including batteries, butter, paper towels, and OxiClean laundry spray. But O’Leary wasn’t about to waste the opportunity to hunt for a saved buck.

“I want to save dough when it comes to paper towels. Check it out. Bounty—12+ rolls is like 18 small rolls—I’m going plus,” he said with a smirk.

O’Leary, who owns multimillion-dollar homes in Florida, Massachusetts, and Toronto, has made the point to shop at Walmart on numerous occasions—long arguing that there’s no reason to pay more for everyday essentials when a cheaper option will do. 

Plus, as O’Leary sees it, there’s no guarantee the money you spend today will still be there when you need it.

“I hate wasting money,” O’Leary told CNBC in 2021 after a Walmart run went viral. “I just don’t get why you would do that. It’s so hard to make it in the first place.”

From Warren Buffett to Scale AI’s Lucy Guo—even billionaires still look for ways to save

O’Leary is not alone among the ultrawealthy in keeping a frugal streak. Some of the world’s richest people have continued to hunt for bargains and avoid spending more than they need to, even as their fortunes have grown.

Warren Buffett, whose net worth currently sits at about $144 billion, has long embraced a famously frugal lifestyle. The 95-year-old still lives in the same five-bed, two-and-a-half-bath home in Omaha, Nebraska, that he purchased in 1958 for $31,500. Today, the house is worth over $1.3 million.

He also famously used to stop at McDonald’s on his way to the Berkshire Hathaway office—and let the stock market dictate his order. When markets were down, he’d spend $2.61 on two sausage patties. On better days, he’d splurge $3.17 on a bacon, egg, and cheese biscuit, according to a 2017 HBO documentary.

Ikea’s late billionaire founder Ingvar Kamprad had a similar love for savings. Despite at one time having an estimated $58.7 billion fortune, Kamprad bought second-hand clothes and drove an old Volvo.

“I don’t think I’m wearing anything that wasn’t bought at a flea market,” Kamprad said in a 2016 documentary on Sweden’s TV4. “I want to set a good example.”

Kamprad also continued working at Ikea until he was 87, more than three decades after he became a billionaire. He died in 2018 at 91.

One of the newest members of the billionaire club, Scale AI cofounder Lucy Guo, is a more recent example of someone whose spending habits have remained relatively modest as her fortune has soared. The 31-year-old has long embraced the FIRE (financially independent, retire early) movement by going to extremes to save money, including buying discounted clothing, skateboarding to work, and booking flights she would later cancel so she could eat for free in American Express airport lounges.

“Everything I wear is free or from Shein…Some of them aren’t going to be that great quality, but there’s always like two pieces or so that really work out, and I just wear them every day,” the billionaire founder previously told Fortune. “I still literally buy buy-one, get-one-free on Uber Eats.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Iceland’s voters rejected restarting negotiations to join the European Union more than a decade after previous talks ended, the national broadcaster reported Sunday, in a referendum that pitted concerns about geopolitical stability against keeping national control of Iceland’s prized fisheries.

Opponents defeated the measure by a margin of 52.8% to 47.2%, RUV reported. The capital of Reykjavik was the only area in the island nation of 400,000 people where a majority supported the referendum.

The vote Saturday was held in the shadow of repeated threats by U.S. President Donald Trump’s to control nearby Greenland. Although Iceland is a NATO member, supporters said European solidarity would provide greater protection if Trump ever made similar threats toward the volcanic island.

Iceland’s left-leaning coalition government, elected in 2024, moved up the EU referendum it had planned for next year after Trump mistakenly named Iceland four times while speaking about his designs on Greenland.

Prime Minister Kristrún Frostadóttir, who campaigned in support of the measure, said she hoped the result would not divide the nation.

“I don’t feel that there is bitterness,” she told RUV before the final results were tallied. “I know tempers run high for some people, but I have now spent time with a large group of people from all over the country and people are quite open to different outcomes.”

Voteres faced a simple yes-or-no question: Should Iceland resume accession negotiations with the European Union?

Turnout was high with more than 82% of the eligible 270,000 voters casting ballots.

The count through the night had the nation on edge as the “Yes” campaign took an early lead before results swung in favor of the opposition. By dawn, a margin of only a few hundred votes separated the two camps before the gap grew as more ballots were tallied in areas of the country where opposition was greater.

“This isn’t the time to go. Maybe 10, 15, 20 years or more, like, we can take another look,” said Daniel Bjarkason, who voted against the measure. “But for now we’re too divided and that’s not a good look, because it should be 70-30 Yes if we’re going to do it.”

The influential fishing industry led opposition to the referendum over fears the bloc’s common fisheries policy would open its waters to Spanish, Dutch and other trawlers.

Descendants of Vikings who won their independence from Denmark in 1944 have lived off the sea for centuries and fishing is central to Iceland’s national identity. Iceland has a proud history of refusing to be pushed around by bigger and richer European nations, winning the so-called Cod Wars with Britain in the 1970s over the right to control its waters.

Opponents also rallied around the fact that Iceland already reaps benefits from being in the EU’s frictionless single market and the Schengen free-travel zone without the sovereignty compromises that come with full membership. They argued that Iceland’s voice would be muted in the large European Parliament and that it would be better off cutting its own trade deals, such as one with China.

Backers said EU membership would lower inflation and interest rates, and the euro would bring more stability than Iceland’s volatile króna. They said it was also in the nation’s interest to get closer to its European neighbors to tackle issues that don’t respect borders, such as climate change.

If the proposal had been approved, it would have been a preliminary step to revive the lengthy negotiating process with the EU’s executive branch, the European Commission, to discuss areas from the economy to human rights. Voters would have needed to approve any negotiated deal.

The result is sure to disappoint many in the European Union. Beyond being a relatively wealthy, stable and democratic country with vast fishing grounds, Iceland could have joined the bloc relatively quickly. Croatia was the last to join, in 2013.

Most of the other candidates waiting — including several countries in the Balkans, plus Moldova and conflict-torn Ukraine — must still undertake time-consuming reforms to bring their laws and standards into line with those of the EU.

Getting Iceland into Europe’s rich club, perhaps along with Montenegro and possibly Moldova, over the next two years could have helped to lay to rest the damage caused by the departure of Britain in 2020, even though London now appears willing to mend ties.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

As the U.S. and Israel relentlessly bombed Iran in the opening days of war, the most dramatic predictions of the conflict’s toll were unsparing: surging oil prices, worldwide recession and economic catastrophe.

But six months into the conflict, the direst predictions haven’t come true even if no corner of the world’s economy has been untouched.

“So far, the global economy has pulled off the financial equivalent of a ‘Mission Impossible’ scene,” said Michael Ashley Schulman, an investment strategist with Cerity Partners.

Here’s a look at how the global economy has weathered the war, and who have been the winners and losers:

Winner: Investors who didn’t panic

Stock markets hate uncertainty, and the decision by the U.S. and Israel to attack Iran on Feb. 28 delivered heaps of it. Columns of smoke rose from Tehran, frantic Iranians clogged roadways trying to escape, and mounting deaths, including of children, made headlines. It was enough for any investor to feel squeamish.

Oil prices surged and Wall Street began a retreat that would begin five consecutive losing weeks. The Dow and Nasdaq entered corrections. The S&P 500 had its worst month since 2022.

But a major turnaround has unfolded since the market bottomed in late March. The Dow has gained nearly 19%, the S&P is up almost 22% and the Nasdaq has surged 27%. If those gains survive the waning months of 2026, all three indexes would post their fourth consecutive year of gains.

The International Monetary Fund, in a July report, said the economy was “being shaped by two major forces, pushing in opposite directions.” The war has strained growth, but enthusiasm over artificial intelligence has offset the drag.

Main Street may be paying more for fuel, food and travel. But Wall Street, so far, is shrugging it off.

Loser: Anyone on the move

The war’s most obvious economic consequence has been its impact on oil. With tanker movement through the Strait of Hormuz slowed to a crawl, the price of Brent crude climbed from a prewar close of about $72 a barrel to as high as nearly $120. Although prices have eased, they are still up about 20% from before the war.

Oil’s price affects everything from crayons to cosmetics, but it hits anyone on the move especially hard.

Jet fuel is expected to cost, on average, 70% more than in 2025, according to the International Air Transport Association. Airlines, in turn, have raised ticket costs, hiked baggage fees and slapped on fuel surcharges while slashing flights or backing off from plans for added routes. Lufthansa Group, for one, cut 20,000 short-haul flights. Spirit Airlines, though troubled for years, evaporated.

“The likelihood that fuel surcharges are going to be rolled back and airfares are going to be brought down is very low over the next few months,” said Brett House, a Columbia University economist. “There is less choice for consumers and less competition between airlines, and therefore, less pressure to rein in fare increases.”

Winner: The case for clean power

With tankers at a standstill and fuel prices climbing, the war strengthened a clean-power sales pitch.

Sales of electric vehicles hit records in some parts of the world. In Singapore, year-over-year growth of EVs reached 110%. In New Zealand, the figure hit 180%. And in Colombia, EVs notched a 300% increase.

Worldwide, EVs are projected to account for 29% of total vehicle sales in 2026, according to an International Energy Agency outlook, up from 25% last year. That growth is even more impressive considering the world’s two biggest economies, the United States and China, saw declining demand for EVs.

Countries that were particularly reliant on Persian Gulf oil have been spurred to action. In Southeast Asia, leaders have rolled out more use of renewable energy and researched deploying nuclear power. In Africa, countries have looked to expand domestic refining and accelerated the installation of solar panels.

Scott Lehmann, a supply chain expert at Sphera, an operational intelligence firm, counts 26 countries and regions that have announced clean energy and electrification measures in response to the war.

“The crisis is forcing investment faster than any policy framework would have,” he said.

Loser: The fight against hunger

For the privileged, the costs brought by war may barely be a blip. For the poorest, it’s a different story.

With the Gulf not just a leader in global oil production, but also of fertilizer, the war has dealt a blow to farmers. Just as many were making decisions about their crops, fertilizer prices soared, peaking in April at 44% higher than before the war, according to the World Bank’s price index.

In response, some farmers trimmed their fertilizer use, potentially imperiling next year’s harvests. “If you’re reducing your fertilizer usage right now, it’s in a way borrowing against next year’s soil health,” said Arif Gasilov, a natural resources expert with the Gasilov Group consultancy.

The United Nations World Food Programme has warned that tens of millions could be pushed into hunger. In testimony this week, its acting executive director, Carl Skau, said the “suffocation of fertilizer exports” had hit Asia and Africa hard. Higher transportation costs hindered the WFP’s own humanitarian efforts, too.

“An oil tanker anchored in the Strait of Hormuz can mean one less meal a day for a child in Sudan,” Skau said. “When oil prices go up, so does the price of flour, rice and vegetables.”

Winner: The Trumps’ businesses

The war has already cost the U.S. tens of billions of dollars and caused thousands in Iranian casualties. It has shaved an estimated hundreds of billions of dollars from projected global output.

But the family of the man at the center of it all, President Donald Trump, has been among the beneficiaries.

Military contractor Powerus, about to be taken public by Eric and Donald Trump Jr., won an Air Force contract worth as much as $90 million to supply interceptors to shoot down Iranian drones. Similarly, the private equity firm 1789 Capital Management, which Don Jr. joined days after his father’s reelection, owns stakes in several other military contractors profiting from the war. One of them, Anduril, won U.S. approval for up to $2 billion in sales of drone interceptors to Kuwait. A second, Elon Musk’s SpaceX, is providing satellite service to guide U.S. drones against Iran. And a third — rocket maker Firehawk Defense — won Pentagon contracts for propellants and warheads to replenish dwindling U.S. supplies.

A spokeswoman for 1789 Capital, Alexa Henning, said Don Jr. wasn’t involved in the decision to put money in those companies, so there is no “nefarious connection.”

The president himself has done well, too.

His investment portfolio run by outside managers has scooped up shares of U.S. military suppliers helped by the war, including Lockheed Martin, General Dynamics and Northrop Grumman. Democrats released a report this week saying Trump’s holdings in oil and gas stocks have soared by as much as $15.5 million.

A White House spokeswoman, Anna Kelly, insisted “there are no conflicts of interest” and that “President Trump only acts in the best interests of the American public.”

Even as Trump’s personal finances have benefited, his political fortunes are another question. The conflict has been unpopular and could weigh on voters as midterm elections near.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

A federal judge has ruled in favor of artificial intelligence company Anthropic in its legal battle against the Pentagon after the government labeled the company as a supply chain risk earlier this year.

U.S. District Judge Rita Lin issued a written order Thursday night that the Pentagon acted illegally by punishing the AI company for its criticism of the Department of Defense’s views on AI use. The government is expected to fight the ruling.

The dispute between the AI company and the government broke out in February when President Donald Trump and Defense Secretary Pete Hegseth accused Anthropic of endangering national security and designated the company a supply chain risk. Anthropic CEO Dario Amodei refused to back down over concerns the company’s products could be used for mass surveillance or autonomous armed drones.

Lin wrote that the government’s actions “were based on a desire to make a public example out of Anthropic for its ‘arrogance’ in criticizing the government, not based on any articulable basis to believe that Anthropic would actually sabotage its model.”

An Anthropic spokesperson said in a statement that they welcome the judge’s ruling: “We remain focused on working productively with the government to harness AI for our national security so all Americans benefit from this technology.”

The White House did not immediately respond to a request for comment.

In the 59-page ruling, Lin, an appointee of former President Joe Biden, wrote that neither the Constitution nor the federal statute the government invoked allows them to “impose sweeping penalties based principally on Anthropic’s critique of the Administration’s views.”

Anthropic sued the Pentagon over the supply chain risk designation in March for what it called an “unlawful campaign of retaliation” over its refusal to allow unrestricted military use of its technology.

The legal challenge intensified an unusually public dispute over how AI can be used in warfare and mass surveillance. Anthropic’s primary tech industry rival, ChatGPT maker OpenAI, made its own deal to work with the Pentagon just hours after the government punished Anthropic for its stance.

Anthropic and OpenAI are each ramping up for buzzy initial public offerings.

Anthropic has also filed a separate and narrower case that is still pending in the federal appeals court in Washington, D.C. That case involves a different rule the Pentagon is using to try to declare Anthropic a supply chain risk.

Earlier in the legal proceedings, Lin had temporarily blocked the Pentagon from labeling the company as a supply chain risk and blocked enforcement of Trump’s social media directive ordering all federal agencies to stop using Anthropic and its chatbot Claude.

In a hearing July 30, Lin had said that the government’s position was “really troubling” to her and that it seemed “at odds to me with the First Amendment.” She also said she believed the record had “gotten worse for the government” over time.

In that same hearing, Department of Justice lawyers argued that the nature of AI models is “so staggeringly enormous and opaque” that the Defense Department cannot evaluate it in the same way it would a physical piece of hardware.

Anthropic lawyer Michael Mongan said in that hearing that the government’s actions “profoundly harm Anthropic” and that they “threaten more broadly to chill speech and debate on a very important issue.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

What is August really about? Owen Lamont, senior vice president and portfolio manager at Acadian Asset Management, suggests that for normal people, it’s about relaxing on the beach, but for financial markets, it’s “panic season.”

Lamont, who is a portfolio manager at the $195 billion quantitative hedge fund and has been a faculty member at Harvard University, Yale School of Management, University of Chicago Graduate School of Business, and Princeton University, looked back at financial history and found a startling pattern.

“Even if systematic equities aren’t your thing,” he wrote in July 2025 on his Acadian blog, Owenomics, “you need to be mentally prepared for an epic financial disaster over the coming three months.”

His research draws a direct line between the timing of many of the most devastating financial crises and a centuries-old pattern: Market crashes tend to cluster during the so-called harvest time, spanning August to October.

The historical pattern

“For grizzled practitioners of systematic equity strategies,” Lamont writes, “August is the cruelest month.” He cast his mind back to the “quant quake” of August 2007, writing that analysts ever since have spent August “compulsively checking our phones and having nightmares about screens full of glowing red numbers.”

When reached for comment in August 2025, Lamont said every year around this time, panic is “certainly on my mind,” as it is for any quant equities managers who is over 50 years old.

Although overshadowed by the onset of the Great Financial Crisis in September 2008, the 2007 quant crash was a classic fit, Lamont writes, occurring during a sleepy time in markets when liquidity is thin because so many traders are away from their desks. Lamont cites modern research showing that August and September are periods of unusually low trading liquidity, as investors and market makers take summer vacations in the Northern Hemisphere. Lower market liquidity means less capacity to absorb big, sudden trades—a recipe for outsize volatility if a crisis does erupt.

Looking at the past 50 years, Lamont underscored the fact most major U.S. market crises have struck between August and October, when thinner markets amplified shocks. Among the historic market meltdowns during these months were two in September: 1998’s collapse of Long-Term Capital Management and 2008’s Lehman Brothers bankruptcy, and two in October: 1987’s Black Monday stock market crash and 1997’s Asian financial crisis. But going back to the founding of the United States itself, he sees a similar pattern.

The deep roots of harvest time

Lamont wrote that America’s first bubble, “Scriptomania,” occurred in July/August 1791, and the Panics of 1857 and 1873 occurred in August and September, respectively. Then the Panic of 1907 followed in October.

The culprit is clear to Lamont: summer vacation. But, in a chicken-or-the-egg discussion, he argues America’s agricultural economy created the need for time off in the summer, as that was when harvests occurred and money needed to flow from the big East Coast cities and into the Western agricultural regions.

Lamont cited Oliver Mitchell Wentworth Sprague’s diagnoses of “panic season” in 1910’s History of Crises Under the National Banking System: “With few exceptions all our crises, panics, and periods of less severe monetary stringency have occurred in the autumn, when the western banks, through the sale of the cereal crops, were in a position to withdraw large sums of money from the East.” The pattern was spotted as far back as 1884 by English economist William Stanley Jevons. The creation of the U.S. Federal Reserve system itself was in part a reaction to such panics, Lamont adds, citing a 1986 American Economic Review article by Jeffrey Miron.

“If you do the rough math, there’s a 10% chance of an epic disaster between August and October this year, and just a 2% chance from November through the following July,” Lamont writes, cautioning investors to “be mentally prepared” for outsize risk in the coming quarter.

Lamont told Fortune that a market crash is still a “rare event,” and he wasn’t aware of any particularly levered players in the market that could spark a crash. But then again, he added, he wasn’t aware of any in August 2007 when the quant crash happened.

Lamont’s summer of 2026: panic season, live

A year on from that original conversation, Lamont has spent the summer of 2026 documenting a strange incarnation of panic season—not a crash, but a market that looks calm on the surface while churning wildly underneath it. As of late August, the S&P 500 hasn’t moved more than 1% in either direction on a single day since hitting a record high on Aug 13.

In a column titled “Crazy days in the stock market,” he catalogued single-day swings that wouldn’t have been out of place in his original panic-season essay: Microsoft’s market cap rose $450 billion on July 30 (by Lamont’s own measure, “1.04 Houstons,” using the Texas city’s entire taxable property base as a yardstick), while Apple lost $360 billion the very next day. Daily dispersion that week ranked third-highest since 2015, trailing only “vaccine Monday” in November 2020 and the DeepSeek shock of January 2025. Lamont told Fortune it was a “crisis-like mechanism on a small scale,” noting that some levered hedge funds got wiped out to the tune of tens of billions of dollars.

Lamont has also used the summer to flag two other symptoms he associates with late-stage market euphoria. In “Hynix Hijinks,” he pointed to SK Hynix’s Nasdaq ADR listing—the largest foreign equity sale in U.S. history—trading at a 49% premium to its Korean shares within days, calling it a “law of one price” violation of the kind that shows up “during stock market bubbles.” In June, Lamont warned “the whirlwind is upon us,” calculating that April and May 2026 ranked as the fourth- and third-highest dispersion months for global stocks since 1995, trailing only December 1999 and February 2000, the peak of the dot-com bubble.

“The chamber of dispersion has been opened,” he wrote, “the beast of volatility has awakened, and the season of chaos is at hand.”

None of this is precisely the calendar-seasonality argument Lamont made in 2025; it’s a companion diagnosis, built on dispersion and correlation rather than the calendar. But the throughline is the same instinct: Markets that look serene are often anything but, and the surface calm itself may be the thing to distrust. With harvest time now officially underway and Lamont’s own dispersion data flashing dot-com-era readings, his 2025 warning to “be mentally prepared” reads less like a seasonal reminder and more like a live diagnosis.

As of August 2025, Lamont told Fortune he hadn’t changed his mind—his “back-of-the-envelope math” indicated a 10% chance of a huge disaster between August and October.

“So we’ve seen no disasters in 2025 and none yet in 2026 (knock on wood),” about what you’d expect for two years. Low summer liquidity is visible in lower trading volume for August 2026, with one recent day having the third-lowest trading volume for the entire year.

Remote harvest time?

Fortune asked Lamont in 2025 if the harvest/panic season thesis has something in common with “flash crashes,” which often occur overnight, after trading in America ends and before it starts in Asia. He said that’s a bit of an extreme vacation of an illiquid market, “like what would happen if everyone went asleep.” He reiterated his belief “weird stuff happens” in illiquid markets. Then he got philosophical about how economics requires all of us to have some kind of appetite for weirdness.

What about Europe, which traditionally takes much longer vacations in August, sometimes the whole month, compared to Americans and their much more reserved time-off policy? Lamont agreed, but noted that with America as the world’s global financial center, with a much larger market, the impact of thinner liquidity is felt more strongly. He noted other academics have covered seasonalities in other countries, such as Australia, where it seems to be the opposite case, or the impact of seasonal affective disorder on trading in Northern countries.

Ultimately, he told Fortune, the benefits of the current system outweigh the risks. The “traditional, heavy-handed approach,” he said, would be to shut the market down, calling off trading in August altogether.

Lamont told Fortune of his upbringing in the two schools of economics that revolve around heavy regulation and libertarianism, with the East Coast “saltwater” tradition he learned at MIT a major influence on him before he spent eight years on faculty at the libertarian “freshwater” school, the University of Chicago.

“A basic principle of economics is you should let people trade,” he said, before adding that he also believes in behavioral finance, which holds that “people mess up and markets make mistakes.” He believes governments make mistakes, too, he added.

The whole issue may be resolved over time by the rise of remote work, he added.

“One theory would be that because nowadays we can all work remotely, vacations are less impactful on [trading] volume,” he said. In fact, in both August 2025 and 2026, Lamont added, he worked remotely from his summer house in Maine.

For now, he added, we are trapped in the paradox of tradition that began with our agricultural economy. People take vacation in August because that’s when people take vacation.

“Especially with family gatherings,” he said, “you want to be on vacation the same time your relatives are on vacation.”

How’s that for behavioral finance?

For this story, Fortune journalists used generative AI as a research tool. An editor verified the accuracy of the information before publishing.

A version of this story was originally published on Fortune.com on August 10, 2025.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

  • With over 4 million Gen Zers unemployed, the competition for entry-level roles has never been fiercer. One college student even spent a year washing his basketball team’s sweaty jerseys and socks to stand out and prove his passion for the industry. His peers mocked him at the time, but now he’s having the last laugh, having secured his dream internship with the NBA’s LA Clippers—at just 19 years old.

Gone are the days when showing a passion in a subject was enough to land an internship. With more than 4 million Gen Zers unemployed (and AI continuing to wipe out entry-level roles), even a degree is no longer enough to get your foot in door. 

And in an industry like professional sports, where competition for even unpaid roles is cutthroat, breaking in often takes even more creativity and sometimes, a willingness to do the jobs no one else wants.

That’s why Daniel Sung resorted to cleaning his college basketball team’s laundry and mopping the court floors to stand out—and he ended up securing a courtside seat to success as one of the youngest interns in NBA history at just 19 years old.

“When I was mopping floors, people would come take pictures of me and call me ‘mop boy’. I’m a human being. At some point, when people keep laughing it does get to you,” the Vanderbilt University scholarship student told Fortune.

Sung spent a year volunteering as manager of the prestigious college’s basketball team and got mocked relentlessly for it.

“Even my friends would be like, ‘dude, you’re a janitor’. But honestly, I knew what my ultimate vision was, and that was to get this internship—and I was able to really prove them wrong because, realistically, no one after their freshman year gets the internship. Now they’re all like, ‘Daniel, we’re so proud of you—even the people like that didn’t know me before.”

From mopping floors to multiple job offers rolling in

Sung’s drive was shaped early on by his family’s experience immigrating from South Korea to San Bernardino, Calif., and opening a 7-Eleven and later a Mexican restaurant to make ends meet. Without any personal connections in the sports industry, Sung knew he’d have to open his own doors.

“Within the sports world, you survive either by being a hustler, or you have people that open doors for you—with my background, I have no one that can open those doors for me, the only person that can open those doors like myself,” Sung said. “I knew working in sports first would give me the ground that I needed.”

“I was expected to do 30 to 40 hours of unpaid work, and the work that I was doing was washing laundry for these 6-foot-8 basketball players that had just finished hours of practice. So I’m doing their laundry until 1 a.m., passing the ball to them during game days. If a player falls, I’m the person running with the towel and getting on my knees, wiping that spot.”

NBA internships are usually reserved for college juniors or seniors—around 20 to 22 years old. This year, the basketball league received more than 19,000 applications for its 2025 Summer Internship program. And despite being years younger than the competition, Sung said his application to join the LA Clippers because of the very experience his college peers had snubbed.

“After my interview, one of the people said my story was unbeatable because a lot of people come into sports and just say they want to work in sports because it’s really cool or they love basketball,” Sung added. “But I literally built up my past year for it. I wasn’t there to joke around.”

Last week was the final week of his marketing internship. Sung had been posting updates about his experience on LinkedIn, detailing the challenges he faced and the lessons he learned along the way.

“Ever since I started posting on LinkedIn, which was around four weeks ago, a lot of people have actually noticed my story—and that’s really opened the door to a lot of opportunities.”

The attention online has already translated into thousands of followers and tangible job offers. Sung now works with two startups: one, a job-application platform with an AI focus, where he’s helped launch a new cohort program; the other, an agency managing LinkedIn pages for large companies. Later this year, he also has a marketing role lined up with Red Bull in Nashville—which he’ll have to juggle with college.

“I actually got those offers just from a month of posting,” Sung said. “The thing that really opened my eyes after working this internship was that you really have to be innovative, you have to think differently, and you have to get yourself out there.” 

“It also taught me about how I need to expand my personal brand—hence the LinkedIn posts,” he continued. “And as I’ve been posting, I’ve gotten a lot of opportunities and doors I thought would have never opened, so it’s been one heck of a summer, that’s for sure.” 

Advice for Gen Z on landing their dream internship

Instead of applying for jobs that fit your experience after graduating, Sung advises fellow Gen Zers to first think of their ultimate career goal—and align every experience to that, no matter how small.

“When you think of job applications, it’s very important that your life tells a story,” the teenager explained. “My story was that I wanted to work with the LA Clippers, right? And so I kind of worked backwards from there. If I wanted to work for the LA Clippers, I knew I needed to work in sports.”

Knowing that you need experience to get experience, Sung figured his best options to get started would be within his college sports team.  

“So I think if you want to get your foot in the door, you just have to be very clear on your why, and you have to start very small,” he said.

In the end, that one year of drudge work gave him more than a relevant resume entry—it also gave him access.

“Even if it’s the unglorified and unpaid work with unseen visibility, being in an environment where there are professionals in the industry just gives you that exposure,” Sung said, adding that he was able to get career advice from coaches and the college’s director of basketball operations. Whenever they’d pass by him at work, he’d throw quick questions their way. 

“It’s hard for a normal student to do that,” he added. “So being in that environment, you’re surrounded by people that have made it and so you just have to get in there. But first, you just have to know your why, and that has to be your guiding start through all of that.”

Fortune wants to hear about the unusual routes and creative strategies that led to your first role. Get in touch: orianna.royle@fortune.com.

A version of this story originally published on Fortune.com on August 21, 2025.

Read more career advice from Fortune’s Orianna Rosa Royle:

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

When the Buffalo Bills open their $2.2 billion Highmark Stadium this September, they’ll be opening the NFL’s smallest venue: 60,108 seats, down from the 71,608 the old stadium held. And to make that happen, New York State and Erie County paid $850 million in public funds, resulting in 11,500 fewer seats, with personal seat licenses (the mechanism allowing holders the right to buy season tickets) running as high as $50,000 per seat. Get-in prices on opening night have already listed at $663 on the resale market.

The stadium was built, in significant part, with the money of the fans being priced out of it. New York State contributed $600 million; Erie County contributed $250 million, which collectively is the largest public subsidy ever committed to an NFL facility. But the Bills Mafia’s new stadium isn’t unique in this funding: In deal after deal across American sports, it’s the same playbook in which the public funds a venue, and the owner uses it to serve a wealthier, smaller crowd.

How much did local and state governments spend on sports?

On the first day the FIFA World Cup opened, FIFA President Gianni Infantino held a press conference in Mexico City and offered this defense of his tournament’s sky-high ticket prices: “If we are doing something wrong, everyone in North America is doing something wrong.” It was his more forward argument following his comments at the Milken conference in April, in which he blamed the U.S. market’s design for encouraging these exorbitant prices. “We have to look at the market—we are in the market in which entertainment is the most developed in the world, so we have to apply market rates.”

Between 1970 and 2020, state and local governments spent $33 billion in public funds on major-league sports arenas across the U.S. and Canada—with the median public contribution covering 73% of construction costs. That number has only accelerated: In 2024 alone, more than $13 billion in taxpayer subsidies were proposed by teams across professional sports for new construction and renovations.

“No one has ever built a new stadium and provided more affordable tickets after that new stadium has opened,” said Victor Matheson, a professor of economics at the College of the Holy Cross who has studied sports subsidies for nearly 30 years. “It’s, in fact, exactly the opposite.”

How much do new stadium tickets cost?

Individual teams in most leagues don’t have to share revenue from premium seats and luxury boxes with the rest of their league—while TV and merchandise revenue is pooled. That incentive pushes every owner in the same direction: Rip out the cheap seats, build suites, constrain supply, and extract maximum value from the fans with the deepest pockets.

Average NFL ticket prices nearly tripled from 2015 to 2025, up 173% after adjusting for inflation. The new Chiefs stadium is expected to have roughly 15% fewer seats than Arrowhead. New stadiums across the NFL, NBA, and MLB consistently follow the same pattern: fewer general seats, more luxury suites, higher prices throughout.

“The money is in super premium experiences, not in actually putting people in the seats,” Matheson told Fortune. “The old model was: Build an 85,000-seat stadium and sell cheap bleacher tickets and hopefully they buy some peanuts and Cracker Jack. That’s not the way anyone sells things anymore.”

“We make stadiums and arenas smaller, but we make them nicer,” Matheson continued. “You tear out a bunch of bleacher seats, and you put in a box with a handful of seats but a super-premium experience, because you can make a lot more money on a few seats to the right people than a lot of seats to the working class.”

The incentive structure reinforces itself: Teams don’t have to share premium revenue with the league, making it the one revenue stream they can maximize entirely on their own terms.

FIFA raised prices on more than 90 of the 104 World Cup matches between October 2025 and April 2026, with the three main ticket categories rising an average of 34%. FIFA claims it received 500 million requests for the 7 million World Cup tickets on offer. Infantino offered 130,000 tickets at $60—out of a total of six to seven million—and called it the “right thing to do.” The Football Supporters Europe coalition filed a formal complaint accusing FIFA of abusing its monopoly position. The New York and New Jersey attorneys general subpoenaed FIFA over alleged seat-location misrepresentation and artificial price inflation.

How much do cities spend in tax subsidies?

The stadium subsidy race has a direct parallel in the broader economy in terms of cities competing with each other using public money to offer companies better tax incentives and bring their businesses there.

In 2018, Amazon solicited bids from 238 cities for its second headquarters. New Jersey offered $7 billion if Amazon located in Newark. Maryland pledged $8.5 billion. New York ultimately offered $3.5 billion in tax incentives—less than half of Newark’s package, yet Amazon still chose New York. Amazon executives said the decision was based primarily on where employees wanted to live, not on incentives, meaning Newark’s $7 billion was never really in the running, and eventually, New York pulled out of the deal due to community opposition.

Economists say these cities, already with the structural advantages to win regardless, are essentially throwing money into the void because these companies and stadium owners were always going to pick them. Buffalo was never realistically going to lose the Bills. The $850 million was, in effect, a ransom paid to prevent a departure that was never truly on the table.

We’re seeing an auction play out with data centers. States have been offering hundreds of millions in tax breaks to attract the AI infrastructure boom, and the costs are exploding beyond any projection. Ohio’s data center tax exemption, initially projected to cost $136 million in fiscal 2025, came in at nearly $1.6 billion—more than 11 times the estimate. The state has since suspended the program. Illinois followed, with Gov. JB Pritzker pausing data center tax incentives after the legislature failed to make facilities pay for their own electricity costs, arguing as one of many voices in the debate that the buildings bring few jobs relative to their footprint, consume enormous power and water, and face growing community opposition.

Who wins when the ticket supply is this scarce?

Judd Kessler, a professor of business economics at the Wharton School and author of Lucky by Design, said the stadium subsidy dynamic is a hidden market failure at the structural level. When public money builds a venue that an owner then deliberately constrains and ups the amenities and premiums, the taxpayer is funding the creation of a scarcity they will personally be priced out of. When venues price below what the full market would bear, the surplus moves sideways into bots, queues, and resale platforms. And when there, between 25 and 35% gets extracted in fees on every transaction.

“We as customers and fans should look at those fees and be annoyed by them,” Kessler told Fortune, “the same way—potentially even more so—than we are annoyed by very high initial ticket prices.” That fee structure was central to the Ticketmaster-Live Nation antitrust case, in which a jury ruled in April that Live Nation held an illegal monopoly over the live events industry. It’s one reason, Kessler argues, innovation in ticket market design has stalled: too many players in the system profit from the opacity.

The pattern surfaced in sharp relief at Madison Square Garden earlier this summer. Mayor Zohran Mamdani paid close to $1,000 for a standing-room-only ticket to Game 3 of the NBA Finals while simultaneously announcing a free watch party for 5,000 fans at Bryant Park who couldn’t afford to attend. The same dynamic played out in Central Park in July, when the state of New York spent $6 million to host a free watch party for 50,000 residents who cannot afford a World Cup ticket at MetLife Stadium less than 10 miles away across the river.

Do tax incentives for sports stadiums ever work?

Every new stadium deal is sold with some version of the same promise: jobs, tourism, civic pride, economic revitalization. The economic literature is nearly unanimous that those promises don’t materialize. A 2017 survey found 80% of economists believe the costs of stadium subsidies outweigh the benefits.

“This profit-maximizing concept, when you’re simultaneously asking for handouts from regular taxpayers, is appalling,” Matheson said. “Asking blue-collar workers to pay higher taxes so the wealthy and upper-middle class can go see games in shiny new stadiums is absolutely one of the worst pieces of public policy out there.”

A version of this story originally published on Fortune.com on June 11, 2026.

More on sports:

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

The thought of a billionaire’s lifestyle may conjure up images of Great Gatsby mansion-buying and jet-setting at the drop of a hat. But the life of an heiress with the wealth of two multibillion-dollar American businesses looks a lot different. 

Mitzi Perdue was born into the Sheraton hotel family, and at just the age of 26, she and her siblings inherited their father, Ernest Henderson’s, controlling stake of the business. The success of her family’s $12.2 billion hospitality company meant she was now sitting on a considerable nest egg.

Her fortune would only swell after marrying her late husband Frank Perdue, the “chicken king” who led America’s largest chicken producer, Perdue Farms, which brought in more than $10 billion in revenue in 2024. The double heiress has the riches to retire and live a life of extravagance, but it’s in her nature to look at wealth differently. 

“The Hendersons and the Perdues did not encourage extravagance,” Perdue told Fortune in a June 2025 interview. In both families, nobody wins points for wearing designer clothes.”

The 85-year-old has access to a trust from her family’s billion-dollar business, alongside the wealth from the Perdue empire. Yet she still lives just like anybody else: taking her shoes to the cobbler instead of buying new ones, riding the subway, flying economy, and living in a modest apartment instead of a house.

Perdue has lived a double life—having access to immense privilege and money from two business empires, while holding down a regular job and living frugally. 

“My apartment building I lived in for 14 years is very solidly middle-class, and I love it,” Perdue said. “If you’re always going on private jets, what inkling do you have about the real world?”

Her frugal and down-to-earth lifestyle: wearing secondhand clothes, flying economy, riding subways

Perdue was born in 1941 and, as a war baby and the fifth child of the Henderson family, grew up wearing hand-me-downs. She says she went to public school for a period of her life, later enrolling in private school and pursuing a Harvard education. When she was in her late twenties, her father died, opening up the floodgates of her inheritance. But she wasn’t enticed by the idea of throwing in the towel and lounging for the rest of her life. 

“I could have just put everything in the stock market and let somebody else manage it,” Perdue said. 

Interested in agriculture, Perdue soon bought land near the University of California—Davis so the college could run experiments on the agricultural area. She spent many hours a day managing the rice farm, but years later decided to become a journalist covering farming practices and mental health.

Starting in 2022, she began writing about the conflict in Ukraine and sold her $1.2 million engagement ring from her late husband to benefit humanitarian efforts in the war-torn region. She’s currently working on developing an AI trauma therapist for victims in Ukraine, which has lacked the resources to keep up with demand. For all of her work trips, she always flies economy.

Perdue has also lived in an apartment building in Salisbury, Md., for many years, rubbing shoulders with working-class residents like nurses and police officers. She says one year’s rent in her one-bedroom flat costs just as much as what her New York City friends pay in one month. 

“Several Perdue employees live in the same building,” Perdue explained. “It’s nice, but no one would call it posh.”

And as a self-proclaimed “low-maintenance badass” frequently visiting New York City, she rides the subway instead of booking Ubers. Perdue also gets her shoes fixed by cobblers, rather than buying new pairs. Designer outfits are shrugged off, as she doesn’t like flashing her wealth. Her frugal philosophy is more than just skin-deep.

“I’m unaware of getting praise for wearing really expensive clothes—you get praised like heck for being an Eagle Scout, or working for Habitat for Humanity,” Perdue continued. “You get praise for serving others.”

What Perdue gets from tightening her purse strings 

People who have not grown up with wealth may question why a billionaire would want to live like the rest of the population: working nine-to-five, crammed in like a sardine on subways instead of calling private cars. The heiress and journalist says her reasoning stems from the emptiness of taking, and the joy of giving. 

“I’d sure rather have a life of a feast of unending joy versus not being able to count five happy days,” Perdue said. “If you want to be happy, think what you can do for somebody else. If you want to be miserable, think what’s owed to you.”

Mega-yachts and silk pajamas don’t fill the void for Perdue—rather, philanthropy and hard work make her feel full. A huge part of Perdue’s understanding of having wealth versus living a wealthy life came from both sides of her family. She noted that family businesses that are able to last 100 years are a rarity, but the Hendersons and Perdues were able to make it by putting their best foot forward. 

“The families that last learn stewardship,” Perdue said. “They’re not there to go spend it all. They’re there to be stewards for the next generation.”

A version of this story was published on Fortune.com on June 15, 2025.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

South Korea is one of the biggest winners of the AI boom. It’s home to Samsung Electronics and SK Hynix, the two largest manufacturers of memory chips. Chip workers are flashing bonuses of around $400,000. The KOSPI, Korea’s benchmark index, is up almost 60% for the year so far.

Yet a report from Goldman Sachs suggests that all that wealth might not make it to ordinary households. 

Even as demand for chips has sent Korean exports and factory investment surging, retail sales are still close to whether they were in 2019. Goldman calls it a “K-shaped cycle” where corporate balance sheets thrive while private consumption remains soft.

Goldman’s economists have an explanation: South Korea is getting too old, too quickly. 

The East Asian country has one of the world’s lowest fertility rates, reporting 0.8 births per woman last year, far below the 2.1 rate to keep population levels relatively stable. (The U.S., by comparison, reported 1.6 births per woman). Twenty percent of Korea’s population is now over the age of 65.

The country’s postwar baby boomers are retiring just as its fertility rate remains below replacement level, leading to a shrinking pool of working-age Koreans supporting the elderly. 

The United Nations projects Korea’s “dependency ratio”—the number of children and elderly people relative to the working-age population—will increase by 1.5 percentage points a year over the next decade. That’s the fastest pace among the 70 large and midsized economies Goldman analyzed, surpassing even Japan during its most intense period of aging from 2000 to 2015.

Korea’s retirement problem

To make matters worse, older Koreans behave unusually when they retire: They don’t spend.

In Japan, Taiwan and the U.S., people tend to draw down their savings once they retire, but Koreans don’t. Goldman found Koreans in their sixties save more than any other age group, retaining 37% of their income. Even those in their seventies save at rates similar to those in their forties.

The wealth elderly Koreans do have is difficult to spend. 

More than 60% of Korean household net worth is tied up in non-financial assets like real estate, the highest share among the advanced economies Goldman studied. Financial assets held by Korean households are only worth 100% of the country’s 2024 GDP, the lowest level in Goldman’s sample.

That leaves Korean retirees asset-rich, but cash poor. “Even among elderly households that have accumulated retirement savings, fewer than one-fourth could cover consumption needs with financial assets,” Goldman researchers wrote. When incomes decline, Koreans are more likely to cut their spending or work more than to liquidate their assets.

Koreans are wary of methods to turn housing wealth into cash. Reverse mortgages cover just 1.8% of homeowners older than 75, which Goldman observed partly reflects a strong desire among retirees to leave assets to their heirs.

In contrast, Goldman found that Taiwan, another AI boom winner, has stronger consumption from older consumers, despite just as severe aging pressures. (The island’s government projects the population could halve in size by 2075). Taiwanese households have a much larger financial cushion than their Korean counterparts, with net financial assets totaling five times GDP, compared to just one times GDP in Korea. 

Why too much saving could be bad for Korea’s economy

As more Koreans age, that propensity to save could become a drag on spending.

Among the major economies Goldman studied, a one percentage point increase in the dependency ratio reduces real private consumption growth by around 3 basis points a year. Yet in Korea, the hit to growth is between 10 and 17 basis points.

One of Goldman’s models suggests that Korea’s fast aging population could shave as much as 25 basis points from annual consumption growth over the next decade. 

Even if Korea can maintain 2% economic growth over the next two decades, consumption growth gradually weakens and eventually turns negative, according to Goldman’s long-term modeling. 

Korean officials have tried a variety of national- and local-level approaches to reverse falling birth rates. The national government announced a “marriage support grant” of up to 1 million won ($725) to couples who get married and an extra 20 million won ($14,500) per newborn. Local governments are also hosting matchmaking events for Korean singles, even dangling monetary rewards for couples who marry after meeting at the event.

Birth rates are increasing very slightly, but even a radical increase in fertility won’t solve Korea’s problem in the near-term, as any babies born now won’t be of working age for at least two decades. Instead, Goldman economists suggest that Seoul try some more immediate solutions, like helping elderly Koreans unlock their housing wealth, and better distributing the windfall from the country’s super-profitable tech firms.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Amy Webb was on her long Sunday bike ride, the one she takes when she’s not training for a race, when the thought arrived fully formed. As she posted on LinkedIn recently: every CEO she talks to is buying abundance, and none are budgeting for the cost of abundance. And she talks to CEOs every day for a living.

Webb, 51, runs the Future Today Strategy Group, the foresight and consulting firm she founded in 2006 after a career in data journalism that led to her subsequent interest in machine learning. Webb, who also teaches at NYU’s Stern School of Business, published The Big Nine, which named nine American and Chinese tech giants as forces that would dominate in a world marked by artificial intelligence and a full-scale tech cold war, so she’s used to being ahead of her time, and she’s used to being frustrated by the world being behind the schedule she sees in her head.

So when Webb told Fortune that she sees something like a bust coming for corporate AI spending, it’s worth pausing on the precise dynamic she’s describing. “AI is making production cheap,” she said, “but it’s making everything else in companies much more expensive.” The corporate world, she added, is going through something like what millennials and Gen Zers experienced as dating-app fatigue.

“The best thing [for a dating app] is to never get married,” Webb said, adding that she sees the same thing playing out in the endless series of generative AI pilots. She said executives tell her they’re in “pilot purgatory”: dealing with unending pilots and “enormous productivity but [they’re] not sure what to do with that.”

Venture capitalist Marc Andreessen, meanwhile, said in March that large companies are overstaffed by as much as 75% and were using AI as a “silver bullet excuse” for cuts that reflect pandemic-era overhiring. A separate analysis by Oxford Economics found AI-cited layoffs accounted for a mere 4.5% of total U.S. job losses despite outsized headlines.

‘It feels like you’re buying abundance’

Webb, who speaks with between 100 and 150 CEOs a year, said she’s most focused on a bubble that sits apart from what’s happening on Wall Street: the strange way that AI is deforming work without actually changing it much at all.

“It feels like you’re getting a lot when you invest in AI,” Webb said, “it feels like you’re buying abundance. But that abundance ends up costing much more down the road.” It’s not a question of long-term investment versus short-term gains, an old business trade-off. “This is immediate satisfaction, followed by: can I productize this? Can I put it in a workflow?” AI is making companies feel like they’re winning, a sensation of “I’m getting away with it,” and that’s driving a lot of enthusiasm and adoption.

At the same time, she said she can count on one hand the number of companies that have figured out a sustainable way to pull off this kind of experimentation. One of her clients had run 14 or 15 generative AI/agent pilots since the start of the year and used Amazon’s famous two-pizza rule, in which no team was big enough that it would take more than two pizzas to feed them. None of them scaled. “They’ve gone through a lot of pizza.” Part of the issue is that pilots often run without integration into legal and IT, and so executives don’t embed the pilots into their infrastructure, but restart from zero each time. “That costs a lot of money,” she said.

The pattern shows up in the data: A Bain & Company survey of 951 global companies published in June found that nearly 40% of companies that measured their AI cost savings landed below 10%, despite having targeted returns of 11% to 20%. But to Webb’s point, the shortfall hadn’t slowed spending, as 90% of companies surveyed said they’re increasing their AI budget anyway.

Drowning in decks

Outside of pilot purgatory, there’s the drowning-in-decks issue. Webb recalled an executive who recently shared that their direct reports were experiencing something like decision paralysis,  not because they had too little information, but because they were being buried in too much analysis to process. Another described the problem to Webb as “insta-decks”: presentations that used to take a week to build now take a day, but the same team is receiving five times as many of them. It doesn’t help, she added, that “Claude has a little bit of a verbosity problem,” producing 10 pages when you only need one.

“The more a company uses these tools,” Webb added, “the more generic ideas are spit out.” This isn’t the same thing as AI slop, she said — it’s something different. “It’s fine with me if something was not written necessarily by a person, if the rest of the information is useful.”

Webb said she asks nearly every CEO she meets: if AI freed up 10% of your total capacity tomorrow, where would you deploy it? “So far, I haven’t gotten an answer.” Of all the time being saved, she said, nobody seems to have the job of harvesting all these productivity gains. “I’d bet at most companies, people are prioritizing speed over creating new ways of thinking. And then you’re not learning anything.”

Psychologists have begun studying the phenomenon of “cognitive offloading”—delegating mental work to a tool rather than doing it yourself—and recent research finds that when AI takes over core reasoning tasks, people’s sense of ownership over the resulting work declines. It’s “automating something that people very much feel they have ownership over,” Webb said, adding that you can see this in debates in Hollywood and the media over where true creativity is headed. From a business perspective, she stressed, “AI is cheap to get started with,” but then the costs start to compound in ways that quickly get “shockingly uncomfortable.”

When will the reckoning happen?

Webb said she expects the reckoning as early as next year. “Right now, very few companies are in a position to show an actual measurable change in the next two quarters,” she said, calling it the “second chapter” of the story playing out now. “We might start to see cracks happen with missed targets” as Wall Street starts asking about all of the generative AI pilots in the enterprise, and wanting to see results.

At the same time, she resisted the tidy bubble framing. “This is not a normal dotcom bubble and burst,” she said. “All of this abundance and productivity comes at a new cost that people aren’t factoring in.”

Part of what’s colliding here, Webb added, is generational and emotional, not just financial. She was working in journalism when the commercial internet first really switched on and remembers how “a lot of people were demoted to digital” in that earlier transition, without much intentional planning behind that decision. She sees a similar dynamic playing out now—the people steering the AI revolution aren’t the ones equipped to really know what they’re dealing with.

A big part of the problem, Webb explained, is that the boards and executives under pressure to adopt AI — and do it yesterday — have spent the past several decades developing expertise in fields that have nothing to do with it. “No CEO was hired because they’re an expert in artificial intelligence,” she said. “These people are heads of organizations because they’re excellent executives,” and AI is nearly the worst possible technology for them to grapple with. “AI is not one technology, it’s an umbrella for many technologies,” she said, and “planning requires data — you can’t just go with your gut on this stuff.”

Every new technology wave feels disorienting in the moment, and the people who don’t feel fluent in it tend to resist it, she added. And the people most likely to feel that way are the older and more expensive workers who are also the most likely to be laid off.

If this mismatch between pressure, inexperience and misleadingly expensive technology persists, she added, the outcome could be far worse than just a market crash. “This isn’t like the economy takes a hit. It’s like the economy makes weird decisions.” When Fortune asked if she’s describing an AI hallucination on an economywide scale, she laughed and said, “I’m going to start using that in class.”

Her own business, by the way, has never been doing better. “When there’s horrific uncertainty out there,” she said, “uncertainty is what we do.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

The National Women’s Soccer League (NWSL) insists that too much of a good thing is just a myth, at least in the context of the sport.

Earlier this month, the league announced its 2027 calendar, which will start one month earlier than usual to account for a two-month mid-season break when many of its athletes will swap club jerseys for country ones at the FIFA Women’s World Cup. It will be the NWSL’s longest season in its 14-year history.

The global tournament comes at a critical time for the NWSL, which has doubled in size over the last decade. As of its 2026 season mid-point, the league saw an average of more than 11,000 fans at each match, a 10% year-over-year increase, and its social media following grew 24% year-over-year to 3.1 million followers across major platforms, according to NWSL data. With 138 NWSL players expected to join national rosters for the Women’s World Cup, the league is preparing to capitalize on an influx of fans.

“That schedule was intentionally designed to position the NWSL at the center of one of the biggest years in the history of women’s soccer,” NWSL Commissioner Jessica Berman told reporters this month. “By maintaining our spring to fall calendar, which we decided earlier this year, we’ve created the best possible environment for our players, clubs, partners, and fans to maximize the extraordinary opportunity presented by the FIFA Women’s World Cup. 

“We know that major tournaments inspire millions of people to follow the sport,” she added. “And our schedule allows us to be part of the lead-in and the lead-out of that big moment.”

But in order for the NWSL to make the most of a jam-packed calendar, it will have to overcome a number of logistical obstacles, from cold climates to maintaining the health of players. Its executives believe the league is ready to meet the moment.

“It means that we can then come back to our regular season on the heels of the Women’s World Cup and ride that momentum,” Sarah Jones Simmer, chief operating officer of the NWSL, told Fortune. “And we will have so many players coming back to our league that will have had success in the Women’s World Cup, and that’s going to be a massive fan acquisition opportunity for us. It’s going to really contribute to the growth of the league.”

How the NWSL is meeting the moment

For the league, preparing to take advantage of the 2027 World Cup has meant pushing up its regular season start by more than a month to Feb. 11, meaning its preseason will begin in the first week of January, just six weeks after the 2026 championship, the shortest offseason in the league’s history.

The regular season will end on Decision Day on Oct. 31, and the 2027 championship will be on Nov. 20. The league will pause play for the World Cup, which falls from June 24 to July 25.

The early start will necessitate navigating the weather, particularly for teams in colder markets, such as Chicago, Denver, and Boston. NWSL players have previously expressed concern about playing in cold weather. The league’s player’s association tabled a vote on a fall-to-spring calendar, with many opposing the measure, citing the climate.

“I think there’s way too many locations that are way too cold. I don’t think we’ve fully thought through what that looks like,” Washington Spirit forward Trinity Rodman said in April. “If we have snowed-out games—or just the conditions in general—what are the backup plans? Where are the fields we can play at?

“And just fans in general (and) getting to games, I think that would decrease the attendance for games in cold climates. So, for me, I just think we have to be fully prepared and have backup plans if we do potentially decide to do that.”

Simmer said there’s enough geographic diversity in the league to hold games in February because warm weather markets are able to accommodate them. The MLS season typically starts in late February, and front-loads away matches for teams in colder climates, as well as schedules later kickoffs when temperatures peak for the day. For 2027, it will flip its schedule to a summer-to-spring model to better align with the international calendar and sign and retail top talent.

Then there’s the health of the athletes, who will not only have to play in their 30-game schedule, but also compete in the World Cups matches in the middle of their regular season. A study published in the Journal of the American Osteopathic Academy of Orthopedics in 2025 found that when the 2022 FIFA World Cup was held in the winter instead of its usual summer time, injuries in the Premier League and Bundesliga significantly increased.

“A midseason slot may not be the best time to schedule a World Cup,” the study authors wrote.

The NWSL’s collective bargaining agreement mandates an offseason, and league officials said the league works hard to add policies to accommodate playing conditions, such as adding hydration breaks during hot-weather games.

The league, as it continues to grow, is used to adapting and making game-time decisions. Eleven of the NWSL’s 16 teams share venues with MLS clubs and coordinate schedules to use the facilities that can accommodate more fans. Only the Kansas City Current have their own stadium, financed by co-owners Angie and Chris Long, as well as Patrick and Brittany Mahomes. As more teams look to build out their own infrastructure, the league facilitates how to give its clubs the best possible venues under the constraints. 

“We’re working even closer, with not just our clubs and the venues, but also with MLS directly to continue to understand their plans heading into a newer year for them,” Carlin Hudson, NWSL’s vice President of strategy, told Fortune. “We work very hand in hand with our venues that have responsibilities to both MLS and NWSL clubs.”

The high stakes of women’s soccer

Historically, professional soccer in the U.S. has benefitted from the World Cup. Major League Soccer (MLS) is itself a byproduct of the 1994 FIFA tournament, which required the U.S. to establish a professional league in order to host the competition. But the FIFA Men’s World Cup this summer also catalyzed greater interest in the sport, with multiple MLS teams telling Front Office Sports they’ve seen an increase in ticket sales of more than 150% since the start of the global tournament in June. Ratings, however, have stayed mostly flat as the U.S. slowly warms to soccer more broadly.

The NWSL has effectively shaped its business model around the hope that future international events will bring more money back to the league. Those events don’t just include the 2027 Women’s World Cup, but the 2028 Summer Olympics in Los Angeles, as well as the 2031 FIFA World Cup hosted in the U.S., Mexico, Costa Rica, and Jamaica. Berman told CNBC in March that teams are able to turn a profit today, but have instead shifted priorities to growing the league instead.

The average NWSL team is now worth $184 million, according to Sportico, an increase of 77% compared to the estimated valuations in September 2024, and up 179% from 2023. Last year, the 14 teams in the league were worth $2.6 billion combined.

“It’s a choice,” Berman said. “We could be profitable. We could choose to stop investing with a growth mindset. It is a choice on our board and by our owners to continue investing because they believe, from a business perspective, that their dollar invested today will be worth more in the future.” 

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

There is a line item in a lot of Gen X retirement plans that nobody writes down.

It does not appear on a spreadsheet. It rarely comes up with an advisor. But it sits in the back of the mind of millions of people in their 50s: Eventually, there will be my parents’ house. Eventually, there will be whatever is left in their accounts. It will not solve everything. It will help.

I understand the instinct. I have spent a career building businesses around finance and how long people live, and this assumption turns up everywhere. It is seldom stated out loud. It is almost never stress-tested. And it is getting less reliable every year.

Start with the number everyone has heard. Something close to $124 trillion in American wealth is projected to change hands by 2048, and Gen X is first in line. About $14 trillion of it is expected to reach Gen X households over the next ten years. Set against a generation that saved a fraction of what the boomers had at the same age, that sounds like a rescue arriving.

It is not. Three things get in the way.

The average is a mirage

Averages do real damage in retirement planning, and inheritance is where they do the most.

Only about one in three American households ever receives an inheritance at all. Across all households, Federal Reserve data puts the average received at roughly $46,200. That figure is performing a magic trick. Households in the top one percent average close to $719,000. The bottom half average about $9,700.

The transfer is real. It is also concentrated. The money is not spreading evenly across a generation. It is pooling where wealth already sits. For a median Gen X household, a realistic inheritance is not a retirement plan. It is a good year of saving, if it comes at all.

There is also a gap between what families expect and what shows up. Households that inherit almost always expect more than they receive. The estimate forms early, when parents look healthy and the house is worth what it is worth today. It seldom gets revised downward, even as the years that will consume it pile up.

It arrives too late to do the work

The second problem is timing, and longevity is rewriting it in real time.

The median American who inherits is about 58 years old. Sit with that for a second. The money shows up after the tuition is paid, after most of the mortgage is gone, after the decades when capital could have compounded into something larger.

Inherited money in the hands of a 40-year-old buys a house or starts a business. In the hands of a 60-year-old, it retires a mortgage balance and moves into a conservative portfolio. Same dollars. A different life.

That median age keeps climbing, because parents keep living longer. Longer life is the achievement of our era, not a problem to be solved. But it means the transfer Gen X has half-planned around arrives later every year, at a point in their own lives when it can do less.

Most people set this expectation once, in their forties, and never touch it again. The number in your head is probably a decade old. It formed when your parents were younger, healthier, and far cheaper to care for.

Care gets paid first

Here is the piece that reshapes the whole calculation, and the piece almost nobody has modeled.

Before an estate passes to anyone, it pays for care.

A private room in a nursing home now runs a national median of about $129,575 a year. Assisted living runs about $74,400. Most families assume Medicare covers this. Medicare does not cover custodial care, and custodial care is the bulk of what a long stay involves.

Run it on an ordinary estate. A paid-off house worth $400,000 and $200,000 in savings looks like a meaningful inheritance to a Gen X child doing mental math. Three years of nursing care for one parent takes more than half of it. Add a second parent, or a longer stay, and there is nothing left to pass down.

For most middle-class families, the estate is not a portfolio. It is a house. That matters, because a house cannot be spent in pieces. When care costs land, families sell the home or borrow against it. The asset a Gen X child had mentally earmarked becomes the funding source for a parent’s final years. That is the right use of it. It is also the end of it.

Nobody in that family made a mistake. This is the arithmetic of a long life meeting the price of care in America. The wealth transfer still happens. It transfers to care providers.

What to do instead

None of this is an argument for pessimism. It is an argument for building on ground that will hold.

Take the inheritance out and see whether the plan still stands. Whatever number is sitting in the back of your mind, set it to zero and run the plan again. If it fails, you have found the real gap, and you have found it while there is still time to close it.

Have the conversation now, and make it about care rather than money. Families avoid this because it sounds like asking about the will. It is a different conversation. What is the plan if you need help at 84? Is there coverage for care, and what does it cover? Who manages it when it happens? Families who answer those questions early protect both generations. Families who wait find out during a crisis, at the worst possible price.

Treat whatever arrives as acceleration, not foundation. An inheritance that lands on top of a plan you built yourself is a gift. An inheritance that was holding the plan up, and never comes, is a crisis with no time left to fix it.

Gen X has been handed a hard set of facts. Less saved than the generation before it, no pension underneath, and obligations pointing in both directions at once. The honest response is not to hope the math gets rescued from above.

It is to build something that does not need rescuing.

The opinions expressed in Fortune.com commentary pieces are solely the views of their authors and do not necessarily reflect the opinions and beliefs of Fortune.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

When Hady Kfoury opened his first restaurant in Manhattan in 2008, he was already out of money. He had raised cash from friends and family to bring the Lebanese food he grew up eating to New York, but construction had cost more than he expected. He still owed money to his general contractor and resorted to buying equipment on eBay just to get the 54-seat restaurant open.

“It was a nightmare,” Kfoury told Fortune.

The nightmare eventually turned into 48 restaurants and counting. NAYA now employs more than 1,000 people, with average annual sales of roughly $3 million per restaurant and same-store sales growth above 10% yearly. Its footprint has grown more than 40% in each of the past four years, just as Mediterranean bowls have become a fast-casual lunch staple. Kfoury’s next target is 200 NAYAs by 2030.

The fast-casual restaurant he couldn’t open

Kfoury was born in Lebanon in 1981, during the country’s civil war. He remembers some days going to school and other days having to take shelter in basements as bombs fell nearby. After studying hospitality in Switzerland and working in New York with chef Daniel Boulud, Kfoury returned to Lebanon, only to live through another war in 2006.

“I’m like, all right, that’s not going to work,” he recalled. “I have to move to the U.S., start a restaurant, and take the flavors that I was raised on and do it over there.”

By 2007, he was back in New York looking for space for a fast-casual Lebanese concept in the city’s office-heavy neighborhoods. But landlords wouldn’t lease to him.

Kfoury had no track record as a restaurant owner, and after months of searching Midtown and Wall Street, he took a space on East 56th Street and Second Avenue. It happened to sit across the street from the aunt he’d stayed with during childhood trips to New York. The location wasn’t busy enough for the high-volume concept he envisioned, so Kfoury opened NAYA as a fine-dining Lebanese restaurant instead.

His mother and aunt became what he calls the “culinary mastermind” behind it. His mother was a talented cook who didn’t measure ingredients, so Kfoury convinced her to turn the food he had grown up eating—chicken kebabs, falafel, rice with vermicelli, baba ghanoush and hummus—into written recipes.

The restaurant attracted attention, but Kfoury hadn’t abandoned his original idea. In 2010, he finally shifted NAYA to fast casual. The challenge was figuring out how to reproduce his family’s food quickly and cheaply enough to serve hundreds of customers without stripping away what made it Lebanese.

“The most difficult part is how do you do it at scale,” Kfoury said.

Ingredients weren’t necessarily the problem. Lebanese cooking is labor intensive, he said, so NAYA introduced equipment, preparation techniques and systems designed to make that labor more efficient. The fast-casual model also depended on higher volumes at smaller margins.

But being early didn’t mean customers immediately understood the concept.

“The first two years were very hard at the fast casual,” Kfoury said. “People didn’t get it.”

America catches up to the Mediterranean bowl

Kfoury spent nearly a decade refining the model. By 2019, NAYA had just seven restaurants. Since then, the category around it has changed dramatically. Mediterranean and Middle Eastern flavors have become increasingly common across grocery stores and restaurant menus, while the customizable bowl has become a fixture of the American workday lunch.

Fast-casual Mediterranean chains generated just under $2.5 billion in sales last year, according to Technomic data provided to Fortune. Sales across the category jumped 16% in 2025, significantly outpacing the 6% growth of the broader fast-casual segment. Technomic tracks about 30 leading Mediterranean fast-casual chains with a combined footprint of roughly 1,500 restaurants.

The biggest player offers a glimpse of just how large the category can get. Publicly traded Cava ended its latest quarter with 476 restaurants, nearly 10 times NAYA’s total, yet the two chains generate similar sales per location. Cava reported average unit volume of $3.1 million in the second quarter, compared with roughly $3 million at NAYA. Cava’s same-store sales rose 9% during the quarter, driven in part by a 5.3% increase in traffic.

That growth has come alongside a broader familiarity with foods that Kfoury once had to introduce to customers.

“Ten years ago, you would say shawarma to someone, maybe you would get three out of 10 people who would know what it is,” he said. “Today, eight, nine out of 10 would know what shawarma is.”

Kfoury thinks Americans are also becoming more discerning about what “Mediterranean” actually means. As the label can encompass cuisines from Lebanon and Turkey to Greece, Italy and Morocco, he compares it to the way Americans once broadly categorized distinct cuisines as “Asian food.” Over time, diners learned to distinguish Japanese food from Korean, Taiwanese or Sichuan cuisine. Kfoury expects something similar to happen with Mediterranean food.

“I think the same thing is about to happen in the Mediterranean,” he said. For now, he doesn’t mind NAYA falling under the broader umbrella, even as the company emphasizes its Lebanese roots.

From seven restaurants to 50

By 2019, Kfoury believed he’d finally refined NAYA’s model enough to scale. After years without institutional backing, he brought on restaurant-focused private equity firm TriSpan in 2020.

Then COVID hit.

NAYA’s seven restaurants were concentrated in Midtown and the Financial District, leaving the company particularly exposed when office workers disappeared. The restaurants shut down for months before gradually reopening, and Kfoury said TriSpan’s arrival helped give NAYA the financial backing to survive the disruption.

What followed was a dramatically faster period of expansion. NAYA’s unit count grew 55.6% in 2022, 42.9% in 2023, 45% in 2024 and 44.8% in 2025, according to the company. It ended last year with 42 restaurants after opening 14 and now operates 48, all company-owned. Its 50th is expected to open in September.

NAYA came roaring back, helped by Manhattan’s rebound. Office leasing across the borough totaled 22.8 million square feet in the first half of 2026, the strongest first half since 2002, according to Colliers. By July, Manhattan’s office availability rate had fallen to 12.7%, its lowest level since September 2020. Tech has helped fuel the demand: Manhattan tech leasing reached a record for the first half of the year as AI companies expanded. 

New stores aren’t the only source of growth. Same-store sales are up more than 10%, while catering accounts for roughly 10% of total sales. NAYA has also had to adapt as it pushes beyond the Manhattan office districts where its model was born. City restaurants remain heavily weighted toward lunch, while suburban locations can approach an even lunch-dinner split and draw more families, prompting NAYA to add kids’ meals and develop family meals.

That expansion is coming as restaurants contend with higher labor and food costs without unlimited room to raise prices. Kfoury said NAYA won’t respond by shrinking portions or compromising ingredient quality. Instead, he is willing to let margins tighten during periods of higher costs rather than immediately pass every increase on to customers.

“If there’s a few months or a period or a quarter that we don’t perform as well as the bottom line, it’s totally fine,” he said. “It’s part of running a business.”

The bigger concern for Kfoury is whether NAYA can find enough good real estate while maintaining the food, service and consistency of a much smaller chain as it races toward 200 locations by 2030.

And 200, he insists, isn’t a ceiling. His ultimate goal is to put NAYA “in every neighborhood.” And the ambitions extend beyond store count. 

“If all goes well,” he said, “an IPO could be an option.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Small boats stand idle on cracked ground in a shriveled side channel of the Danube River in northern Serbia, where the water has receded into a couple of shrinking ponds under pressure from extreme drought and heat. Fish circle in the shallow waters.

“This is all we have, these two little ponds that are full of juvenile fish,” fisherman Dusan Jovanovic said. He said the fish are in danger because there is too little water and its temperature is over 30 degrees Celsius (86 degrees Fahrenheit).

“If they start to die, they will all die at once,” Jovanovic said.

Persistent drought and scorching heat this summer have ravaged ecosystems and businesses across the region, from a lake in Slovenia and the side channel of the Danube in Serbia, to fish farms in Bosnia, the Czech Republic, Romania and Hungary.

The fish industry has been hit especially hard, with damage estimated in the millions of euros (dollars). This is adding to the already high toll caused by problems with energy and water supplies, devastated crops, losses in river traffic and trade.

Finding themselves unprepared for this year’s crisis, countries and businesses are now pondering ways to minimize the effects of future extreme weather events that scientists have tied to human-induced climate change.

Hungary’s fish die as entire country faces extreme drought

Around 99% of Hungary’s lands are currently under severe or extreme drought conditions, according to the national meteorological service. Desertification, a process where vegetation recedes because of high heat and low rainfall, threatens much of the Great Hungarian Plain.

Among the most affected are Hungary’s roughly 27,000 hectares (67,000 acres) of fish ponds. The country’s Agriculture and Food Economy Ministry said last week that “persistent heat and water shortages” had led to 1,588 hectares (3,924 acres) of those ponds drying out, causing the deaths of nearly 280 metric tons of fish at 20 farms.

The estimated revenue loss from the damage was 1.3 billion forints ($4.2 million), the ministry said. Producers say replacing lost fish could take years. Sometimes, operators were forced to drain one pond and divert its water to save fish in another, the Hungarian Aquaculture and Fisheries Inter-branch Organization said in early August.

Repeated drought over years hurts Romanian fish farmers

For fish farmers in Romania, especially those cultivating carp, this year’s blistering heatwave follows severe droughts in 2023 and 2024, the effects of which are still being felt, says Catalin Platon, president of ROMFISH National Association of Fish Producers.

In carp production, Platon said, the production cycle is three or four years.

“So what we lost in 2023 has (had an) impact every year since,” he explained. Water-use policies that prioritized irrigation for agriculture during the previous droughts, “left us with no water for the fish,” Platon complained.

Czech fish farmers take emergency measures

Fish farmers across the Czech Republic have taken various emergency measures: reducing or suspending feeding to reduce oxygen use, aerating the ponds or draining them when necessary.

The Czech Fishing Association officials say sustained rainfall could ease the immediate crisis, but long-term measures are needed to retain more water in the landscape.

Jan Sokolik, a technician at the Rybarstvi Trebon fishery, explained that “some ponds that were actually low on water have already been fished, but they were all marginal ponds.”

“Now we’re just starting to plan what to do with the big ponds,” he said.

Bosnian trout breeders ‘looking to survive summer’

Veljko Budjen owns a trout farm near Trebinje in southeast Bosnia. He said hot and dry summers have brought serious problems in the mainly mountainous country famous for its trout restaurants.

“Trout is a cold water fish, which requires cold water with a lot of oxygen,” he said. “So during the summer you are forced to reduce trout production and feeding so the business can just barely survive.”

One option, he said, is to add liquid oxygen to the water during summer months. Otherwise, he said, “you wait for the first rain.”

Slovenians pump water into a lake in an attempt to save fish

Emergency teams have been pumping water into Lake Pristava in eastern Slovenia, a favorite spot for fishermen, to try to prevent a mass suffocation of fish from lack of oxygen and water chestnut overgrowing to cover the lake surface.

Firefighters have pumped in 8 million liters (2 million gallons) of water but they still fear it’s not enough.

“We are surprised that any fish has survived at all,” Danijel Fras, from the Pesnica Lenart Fishing Association, told public broadcaster RTV Slovenia.

In Serbia, fishermen said the only solution for the endangered fish in the Danube side channel in Novi Sad is to move them to another location.

“The temperatures this year are extreme,” Jovanovic, the Serbian fisherman, said. “No one can remember anything like this.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Among the many potential downsides for letting the national debt get too high was that the federal government would suck up so much capital that businesses wouldn’t be left with enough.

Today, U.S. debt is at $40 trillion, the federal budget deficit is on track to reach $2 trillion this fiscal year, and debt servicing costs alone are $1 trillion a year.

That’s a lot money that the Treasury Department has to raise from the bond market, which is also a key source of financing for corporate giants.

But AI hyperscalers, so far, are still able to issue plenty of their own debt in the mad dash to buy chips, build data centers and lay down other infrastructure.

In fact, even Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent, who has billed himself as America’s top bond salesman, has noted the eagerness with which AI companies are offering debt—no matter the cost of borrowing.

“We are also seeing big corporate issuance. And a lot of that corporate issuance, I would say, is almost yield-agnostic, because the build-out for AI, the returns on that, the companies believe they’re going to be so high. They don’t really care what they’re paying,” he said recently.

U.S. investment-grade corporate bond issuance totaled about $1.7 trillion in the year to date through July, about 27% above last year’s pace and on track to exceed $2 trillion for the first time, according to Wall Street veteran Ed Yardeni.

A flood of corporate debt that massive would typically require yields to offer a bigger premium over risk-free bonds in order to attract enough buyers.

But in the case of AI-related bonds, demand has been so high that the yield spread has remained compressed, barely widening for an additional premium, he pointed out in a note on Monday.

“As a result, the market has adjusted not through higher corporate borrowing costs relative to Treasuries but through higher Treasury yields themselves. Capital flowing into corporate bonds is capital not flowing into Treasuries, and Treasury yields have had to rise to clear the market,” Yardeni explained. “In short, the AI revolution is producing a classic crowding-out effect, causing Treasury yields to rise.”

Higher yields could eventually fuel a feedback loop where rising debt-servicing costs expand deficits further and further add on to the pile of U.S. debt, which in turn pushes yields up further.

To be sure, the rise in Treasury yields has been attributed to a variety factors, in addition to the AI debt orgy. They include massive federal budget deficits with no end in sight, higher oil prices due to the Iran war, and a robust U.S. economy continuing to put upward pressure on inflation.

But Yardeni noted that international capital-flow data show that net purchases of U.S. corporate bonds by private-sector foreign buyers have exceeded their purchases of Treasury debt over the past year.

Jurrien Timmer, director of global macro at Fidelity Investments, said on X that “The reverse crowding out in the corporate bond market has even gotten the Treasury Secretary’s attention.”

It has gotten Federal Reserve Chairman Kevin Warsh’s attention too. In his speech as the Jackson Hole conference on Friday, he nodded to the debt boom, saying “Ever-expanding pools of capital are pouring into AI-related infrastructure of all sorts.”

That’s as private credit is financing the AI boom as well, while chipmaker Nvidia is even leveraging its balance sheet to back AI deals. So-called hidden borrowing has also exploded, with one tally putting it at $1.65 trillion.

But markets are showing some signs of fatigue, after absorbing the flood of debt in such a short time, S&P Global warned last month, pointing out that hyperscalers are paying a higher premium compared with yields on risk-free bonds.

“Market participants are growing leery of quickly rising leverage from issuers previously characterized by strong and reliable cash flow,” the report said.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

The Federal Reserve Bank of Kansas City’s annual economic symposium in Jackson Hole, Wyoming, which featured Kevin Warsh’s first speech as chairman, is winding down Saturday. 

Here are some of the key takeaways from the conference:

Warsh Emerging

Warsh used a keynote speech to hammer home a message that curbing inflation is the central bank’s top priority.

While parts of the speech served to double down on his stated determination to avoid offering guidance to financial markets on the direction of interest rates, Warsh did finally provide some insight into how he views the economy. That helped relieve some frustration among investors and added drama to the Fed’s next policy meeting.

The new message immediately triggered a jump in expectations for a near-term rate increase. In the wake of his remarks, attention turned to the next round of consumer inflation data, due Sept. 11, just days before policymakers gather in Washington on Sept. 15-16.

While Warsh didn’t signal explicitly his support for a hike, he warned inflation isn’t meaningfully slowing and that policymakers must be confident it is. Otherwise, he said, they had “work to do.” 

Financial conditions, he added, weren’t restraining the economy, and he described interest rates as the Fed’s “predominant tool” for achieving its mandate.

“Here is my standard: We must be confident that underlying inflation is moving to our objective, clearly and at sufficient speed. Otherwise, we have work to do. That’s our job,” he said.

Warsh also dispelled fears that he intended to alter the Fed’s inflation goal. He said 2%, as measured by the personal consumption expenditures price index, or PCE, is a “firm, fixed target.”

Euro Worries

Policymakers from the euro area who spoke on the sidelines of the conference also sent a warning about inflation. 

European Central Bank Governing Council member Primoz Dolenc told Bloomberg that resilience in the region’s economy and the persistent conflict in the Middle East suggest the need to hike rates in September. That’s widely expected by investors.

“With the new data coming in, we see that the inflation situation doesn’t resolve itself,” Dolenc said, who is also the head of the Slovenian central bank.

Martin Kocher, governor of the Austrian central bank and another ECB rate-setter, also highlighted that there’s “more momentum” in the economy. On inflation, which analysts estimate reached 3.3% in August, he said there’s “alertness, there is no complacency.”

Bailey in No Rush

Bank of England Governor Andrew Bailey had a slightly different message suggesting no urgency to increase rates. 

“We’re seeing quite subdued second-round effects. I think we’ve seen a softening labor market for some time now,” Bailey told Bloomberg TV. “I’ve taken the view that I think we can watch this situation for the moment.”

Those were Bailey’s first public remarks on monetary policy since July 30, when he voted with the majority in a 6-3 vote to keep interest rates on hold. 

No Shows

There were a few prominent absences at this year’s gathering. European Central Bank President Christine Lagarde and Bank of Japan Governor Kazuo Ueda skipped Jackson Hole. Each are planning to attend a meeting of G-20 finance ministers and central bank governors Monday and Tuesday in Asheville, North Carolina.

Read More: Finance Chiefs Get Short Shrift From Bessent’s Other Priorities

The only Fed policymaker not to attend was the former chair, Jerome Powell. He bucked tradition to hold onto his seat on the Board of Governors after his term as chair expired in May, but has since, as he pledged to do, remained out of the spotlight.

Tech Challenges

While the chair’s speech and the sideline chatter about economic and political events frequently dominate news from the symposium, Jackson Hole is also an important forum for high level debate on economic research. Papers presented this year revolved around the theme of financial innovation and its implications for payments and monetary policy.

The papers served to underline how central banks are struggling to keep up with challenges introduced by technology. In their discussions, economists and policymakers debated the regulatory challenges in a world where tokenization is revolutionizing how financial assets are held and transferred.

Lisa Cook

On the eve of the Jackson Hole conference, attendees got a reminder that President Donald Trump’s attacks on the central bank have not entirely ceased since his appointee, Warsh, took the Fed’s helm.

The White House has recently renewed its efforts to fire Fed Governor Lisa Cook over allegations of mortgage fraud, and on Wednesday Cook’s lawyer responded with a letter calling the allegations “unfounded and untrue.” The White House didn’t immediately comment on Cook’s letter. 

Trump narrowly lost his initial bid to oust Cook at the Supreme Court, partly on procedural grounds.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Citing the importance of the First Amendment, a federal judge in California says the U.S. government is unconstitutionally silencing critics of Israel’s war in Gaza and others as part of the Trump administration ‘s quest to deport noncitizens who it says disrupted college campuses while expressing their views.

Judge Noël Wise, in a ruling Friday, delivered a victory for The Stanford Daily, the student newspaper at Stanford University, which has said some international students were afraid to speak out because of the deportation threat.

“Freedom of speech is illusory if we are only ‘free’ to express complementary views about the government and its leaders,” the judge wrote.

The decision largely piggybacks on findings from nearly a year ago by a U.S. district judge in Boston, who ruled that the Trump administration violated the Constitution when it targeted people who are not citizens for deportation solely for supporting Palestinians and criticizing Israel.

Wise wrote that the freedoms of speech and the press are “foundational to America’s enduring democracy.” The judge cited free-speech and vagueness flaws that violate the First Amendment and Fifth Amendment as she struck down portions of the provisions that the federal government follows regarding deportations.

Wise cited retaliation in March 2025 by U.S. immigration authorities against people who engaged in speech supporting the Palestinians and against Israel’s actions — which a growing number of experts, including those commissioned by a U.N. body, have said amount to genocide. The judge also cited retaliation against people who were critical of Charlie Kirk after the Turning Point USA co-founder was assassinated last September.

“Tomorrow, or perhaps even today, targets may include anyone in the United States who exercises their freedom of speech to simply express opinions the government does not like,” the judge in San Jose said.

“This downward spiral is antithetical to our Constitution that recognizes our right to speak freely,” she added. “Here you can simultaneously hate the content of a person’s speech and love the country that cherishes the freedom to allow it. Zealous protection of our Constitutional right to free speech is a provocative demonstration of our country’s powerful lack of fear.”

The Justice Department did not respond Saturday to a message seeking comment on the decision.

George Porteous, the editor-in-chief of The Stanford Daily, responded to the ruling by saying on X: “The reporters in our newsroom shouldn’t have to fear that writing a story will result in their deportation. Today’s victory means they won’t have to.”

Conor Fitzpatrick, an attorney with the Foundation for Individual Rights and Expression, which brought the lawsuit, praised the ruling.

“In America, free speech doesn’t just belong to the people who say things the government agrees with,” Fitzpatrick said in a release.

In her decision, Wise said it was clear that the government’s tactics has had an effect on college campuses.

“The government has offered a chilling message regarding protected speech — speak out against Israel or in support of Palestinians and we will revoke your visa and deport you. Behave. Noncitizen students heard the warning and heeded. And, as the idiom goes, the silence is deafening,” the judge wrote.

At The Stanford Daily, lawfully present noncitizens at the paper have quit, withheld articles, refused assignments, requested articles be taken down, and asked for anonymity due to fear of adverse immigration consequences, Wise noted.

She said noncitizens have the same First Amendment rights as citizens and yet were left to guess what the U.S. foreign policy was at any given moment and on any given subject.

“This is an incomprehensible standard,” she said. “While the Court understands that the government has been granted considerable discretion on foreign policy and immigration matters, that discretion must nevertheless still ensure that ordinary people can understand what the law permits and prohibits.”

Wise added: “Our Constitutional right to freedom of speech guarantees people the right to express — through their words, actions, or assembly — opinions that may be repugnant, views that run counter to prevailing political norms, or beliefs that otherwise challenge the country’s domestic or foreign policy, military engagement, or war.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent laid out plans for an “economic D-Day” against Iran on Monday,  seeking to further isolate the regime from the rest of the world.

The U.S. will expand its use of secondary sanctions against entities and countries that engage with Iran. Bessent also said any country that helps Iran will be removed from the dollar-based financial system.

In addition, he targeted five of Iran’s “most vital lifelines”: digital assets, technology, gold, aviation, and shipping.

But Esfandyar Batmanghelidj, founder and CEO of the Bourse & Bazaar Foundation think tank, said those are actually lifelines for the Iranian people, not the regime.

“Digital assets and gold are how ordinary Iranians protect their savings from inflation,” he explained in a post on X. “Technology keeps Iranians connected with the world. Aviation keeps Iranian families connected with loved ones across borders. Shipping is how essential goods, including food and medicine, reach Iran.”

The sanctions come as the Trump administration has pivoted away from resuming all-out war, hoping that economic warfare will accomplish what bombs and missiles couldn’t.

The Treasury Department didn’t respond to a request for comment.

To be sure, crypto currencies, technology and front companies in shipping are also ways the Iranian regime skirts Western sanctions, allowing it to continue earning valuable revenue.

But the United Arab Emirates also shut down all trade and transactions with Iran earlier this month, cutting off a vital for engagement with the global economy.

Meanwhile, the U.S. war and naval blockade have inflicted a catastrophic toll on Iran’s economy, which was already in shambles before the conflict started.

Inflation has soared above 80%, with prices for certain food staples up 100%. The currency, which triggered nationwide protests late last year after it collapsed, has lost a further 30% of its value this year.

The International Monetary Fund said in April Iran’s economy will shrink 6.1% this year, the worst contraction in decades. And a labor ministry official estimated that more than 1 million jobs had been lost by late May.

The naval blockade has not only prevented Iran from exporting oil via its ports, it has also kept out imports of refined fuels that Iran needs despite being a major oil producer.

That has created shortages and long lines at gas stations, made worse by deep subsidies that encourage excess consumption. But the government is reluctant to hike prices and slow demand, fearing more public anger over inflation.

Amid the growing stress, some moderate officials have signaled that time is running out to obtain some economic relief as the U.S. and Iran remain in limbo with no sign of diplomatic progress.

“No matter how strong we are militarily, if the people are hungry and we do not have financial circulation, economic growth and domestic production, we will not endure,” parliamentary speaker and Iran’s chief negotiator Mohammad Bagher Ghalibaf said while visiting Iraq earlier this month.

In fact, some protests have started breaking out, though not at the massive scale that was seen in January, when the government slaughtered thousands in a brutal crackdown.

On Monday, oil and gas workers in Asaluyeh staged a protest, saying they shouldn’t have to suffer a cost-of-living crisis while keeping oil production online, state media said, according to the Wall Street Journal

Earlier, about 100 laid-off workers protested at the Shadegan steel complex in western Iran, petrochemical workers in costal city of Bandar-e Mahshahr protested their layoffs, and teachers union members have publicly complained about not getting paid.

Experts have cautioned that Iran’s repressive regime is unlikely to be swayed by the suffering of ordinary citizens and is prepared to wait out economic hardship longer than Americans can endure high gas prices.

Still, officials continue to acknowledge the strains ordinary Iranians face, while clashing with hardliners who oppose any negotiations with the U.S.

“The country today faces great, complex, and multiple open and hidden challenges,” Ghalibaf said on Wednesday. “Our duty at this moment is to devote all our time and energy to resolving the people’s problems, increasing Iran’s economic power, and preserving the achievements of resistance.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

On the outskirts of Phoenix, a small town with a huge reliance on the Colorado River has capped growth, revived old wells and struck water deals.

But Cave Creek Mayor Robert Morris can’t shake the real possibility that it’s not enough to keep the desert community of about 5,000 people afloat well into the future. And a recent federal plan to address a deepening crisis in the river basin won’t help.

Cave Creek gets nearly all of its water from the river, which serves 40 million people across the U.S. West and has been dwindling because of climate change, demand and overuse. The town already was forced to make cuts this year and it stands to lose more under a new federal plan.

Morris likened the situation to planning for a meteor strike.

“You can see it coming, but you can’t get out of the way and you don’t know what the damage is going to be,” he said.

The uncertainty stretches across seven U.S. states, tribal nations and Mexico. Farmers are deciding which crops are worth the investment. Phoenix could lose some municipal and industrial water for the first time and turn to backup supplies. And residents could face even more costly water.

Nevada raised the stakes this week by suing the Interior Department and the U.S. Bureau of Reclamation, saying basic needs in the Las Vegas region will go unmet if the area has to absorb planned reductions of up to 70% of its Colorado River water in the next decade.

The bureau said Thursday it does not comment on litigation.

“The uncertainty is going to continue to build in the wrong direction,” said Tom Buschatzke, director of the Arizona Department of Water Resources.

Western reservoirs see record lows

In the U.S. West, water is stored primarily in reservoirs, aquifers and snowpacks. But a record snow drought means there’s far less water to recharge those sources.

The two largest reservoirs in the country serve as barometers of health for the Colorado River system: Lake Mead and Lake Powell. Both hit record lows this month.

Eight other reservoirs operated by the Bureau of Reclamation recently recorded the lowest levels in at least the last 30 years. Among them is Elephant Butte Lake in New Mexico that’s critical for supplying water for crops in southern New Mexico, Texas and Mexico. The Green Mountain Reservoir serves the western part of Colorado, and the Guernsey Reservoir in Wyoming funnels water to farmers in the eastern part of the state and western Nebraska.

Under the Bureau of Reclamation’s plan, California, Nevada and Arizona will collectively reduce water use by 1.25 million acre-feet (about 1.54 billion cubic meters) — enough to fill over 600,000 Olympic-sized swimming pools — annually in the next two years, with the possibility of larger cuts depending on conditions. Colorado, Utah, Wyoming and New Mexico are not required to make cuts for now but could voluntarily reduce water.

While El Niño could bring intense moisture to the northern Rockies and the Southwest in the coming months, it won’t erase decades of drought.

“Drought is a slow-moving phenomena and it can take some time to come into it and also come out of it,” said David Mocko, senior research scientist who authored a recent U.S. Drought Monitor map.

Farmers are reluctant to plant

John Boelts grows vegetables, melons, durum wheat and other crops in Yuma, Arizona — a region that produces about 90% of leafy greens eaten in North America during the winter.

Farmers there have high-priority rights and may avoid cuts to their Colorado River supply over the next two years but, Boelts said, the reprieve isn’t enough to make longer-term plans. That makes farmers reluctant to plant new acreage.

Citrus, date and other orchard crops that thrive in the region take years to become commercially productive, he said.

“There’s no food that we grow in a hurry,” said Boelts, the Arizona Farm Bureau president. “Beef takes years to produce. The lettuce you eat today? A farmer was working on how they would grow that crop six plus months ago.”

Ray Martinez grows alfalfa on a reservation that’s home to the Colorado River Indian Tribes. The tribe holds some of the river’s oldest rights, and while its Arizona allocation is huge, an old irrigation system and the lack of infrastructure have kept much of the water out of reach.

Martinez and the water department are concerned about having enough water to finish this growing season. He has left some fields unplanted for years to help prop up Lake Mead. If the reservoir keeps dropping, he said, surface water coming to him and neighboring farms will be further limited.

“Unfortunately, Mother Nature has its own way of doing things, and we have no control of that,” he added.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Singapore is overhauling its landmark baby bonus scheme, first introduced in 2001, as the city’s fertility rate and number of births fall to record lows. 

In 2025, births in the Southeast Asian country fell below 30,000 for the first time in its post-independence history, while the fertility rate dropped to just 0.87 per woman, a record low. That’s a dangerous prospect for any country, but especially for Singapore, crammed into a space smaller than New York City.

“The country does not have the natural resources to finance the costs of supporting an aged society, including both care and medical expenditures,” Tan Poh Lin, a senior research fellow at the National University of Singapore’s Institute for Policy Studies explains. Immigration, in his view, won’t be enough to solve the problem: “Boosting the fertility rate is crucial to slow down the rate of change and allow society to adjust economically and well as institutionally.”

At the country’s National Day Rally on Aug. 23, Prime Minister Lawrence Wong unveiled the “SG Child Support Package,” boasting measures like expanded childcare leave, strong financial support for parents, more affordable caregiving options, and extra chances to get subsidized housing. In total, the support is equal to almost 70,000 Singapore dollars ($55,000) by the time a child is 17.

Demographic experts are cautiously optimistic about the new scheme, which appears to offer more sustained and holistic support for families. 

“Singapore’s family policies had become increasingly complicated, with benefits varying by birth order and across different schemes,” says Bussarawan Teerawichitchainan, a social demographer and sociologist from the National University of Singapore (NUS). With the new package, “support is attached more clearly to each child and is provided over a longer period of childhood rather than being concentrated primarily around birth.”

But previous policies to give parents more money, both in Singapore and elsewhere in Asia, haven’t been able to reverse falling birth rates.

“Singapore has progressively expanded financial support for marriage and parenthood over many years, yet fertility has continued to decline,” Teerawichitchainan admits. “Concerns voiced by parents increasingly involve not just money but time, work-family pressures, childcare, housing and other demands associated with raising children.”

Economic impact of low birth rates

Persistently low birth rates could threaten a country’s ability to sustain its economy. “Smaller younger cohorts enter the workforce while the older population continues to grow…over time, that places greater pressure on labor supply and the tax base,” says Chua Yeow Hwee, an economist at Singapore’s Nanyang Technological University (NTU). “For businesses, an aging and shrinking workforce also makes labor constraints more acute.”

Singapore has long turned to foreign workers to make up for a dwindling domestic workforce. As of 2025, Singapore is home to nearly 1.6 million foreign workers, making up 40% of the country’s total labor force, the highest in Asia outside of countries in the Middle East, according to the Migration Policy Institute, a U.S. think tank.

The country is also placing its hopes on automation, with the government committing 1 billion Singapore dollars ($787 million) to public AI research from 2026 to 2030

“The relationship between demography and economic growth is complicated,” Teerawichitchainan explains. “Economies can adapt through productivity growth, technology, longer and healthier working lives, higher labor force participation and immigration.”

The role of companies

Singapore’s new scheme shifts from merely encouraging births to focus on family well-being over the long term, which might help change how potential parents think about children.

“Cash gifts have a positive impact on births, but the effect tends to be short-lived as many beneficiaries do not increase their final family size,” Tan explains. “Tangible change can only be achieved by adjusting parenting expectations, including the notion that parenthood involves sacrificing personal wellbeing.”

Some of the responsibility for changing these expectations lies with companies. “There is a limit to what government policy can do directly, and employers have an important role,” Yeow says. “A generous leave entitlement has less value if employees believe that using it will make them appear less committed or affect their advancement.” (Singaporeans get 16 weeks of paid maternity leave and four weeks of paternity leave, as well as 10 weeks of parental leave, shared between both parents, that must be used within a year of birth).

But there may be little anyone–government or corporate–can do to persuade people to have children amid greater economic uncertainty. 

“These days, folks will have children only if they are confident that they could ease their children’s journey ahead and help them access a good life in the future,” says Tan Ern Ser, an adjunct principal research fellow at Singapore’s Lee Kuan Yew School of Public Policy. “Unfortunately, the world we live in today does not leave much room for optimism, notwithstanding the government’s relentless efforts.”

Singapore’s government, too, acknowledges that there are limits to its ability to influence its populace to have kids. “The decision to have children is a deeply personal one. Policies alone cannot make this happen,” Wong, Singapore’s Prime Minister, said during his speech. “But what we can do is make it easier for Singaporeans who want children to start and raise a family.”

Ultimately, Singapore may just need to accept that it’ll have to live with fewer people.

“The economic challenge is not simply to restore some particular fertility level,” Teerawichitchainan concludes. “It is also to build institutions, labor markets, and technologies that allow Singapore to prosper under a demographic reality that may remain one of low fertility and population aging.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Officials struggled for years to curb high-speed crashes along a residential corridor cutting through Albuquerque, New Mexico, but simply punishing the lead-footed drivers didn’t seem to work.

What ultimately did was rewarding the law-abiding ones with fewer red lights.

The solution, which the city credits for a dramatic drop in crashes and injuries along one busy stretch of road, is a relatively novel version of a longstanding traffic safety concept commonly known as “rest in red,” in which traffic signals default to red until a vehicle approaches. But Albuquerque and Portland, Oregon, took it a step further by adding speed sensors that grant a much earlier green light to drivers traveling at or below the posted limit.

“We’re finding that the technology itself is kind of its best advertisement,” Jennifer Turner, Albuquerque’s director of municipal development, said of the strategy the city deployed on Lead and Coal avenues, parallel one-way streets. “If you come to Albuquerque right now and you’re driving that corridor, you will learn pretty quickly that if you are speeding, you stop.”

Isaac Romero, who lives along the corridor, said he has noticed a big difference. Before rest in red, he would sometimes wake up in the middle of the night to the sound of drivers racing to beat the traffic lights or one another. He saw cars that had crashed and flipped, including one that ended up in his neighbor’s yard.

“We had one accident where it’s even shaken the whole house because some guy slammed into a tree,” Romero said. “It’s a lot of change because now you don’t get as many people flying through there.”

Portland credits its ‘virtual speed bumps’

Portland recently rolled out the concept during the late-night hours on Southeast Powell Boulevard, a busy state highway with a long history of crashes, including fatal ones.

Peter Koonce, who manages signals and street lighting for the city, calls the new approach a “virtual speed bump” and said the early results are promising. At the first intersection tested, rest in red was able to lower the average speed from 39 mph (63 kph) to 30 mph (48 kph), which is the speed limit, he said.

Oregon State University researchers helped Portland choose its vehicle detection system for monitoring speeds, and now they’re assessing its performance. David Hurwitz, a professor of transportation engineering who leads the study, said it’s too early to draw sweeping conclusions.

“This choice that we are making to try to increase speed compliance seems like it’s working really well — seems like it has potential,” said Hurwitz, who stressed that further research is needed to ensure those gains aren’t offset by more drivers running red lights or other negative consequences.

Cities try to change driver behavior but avoid other problems

Potential negative consequences are also a primary concern of Jay Beeber, chief government affairs and policy officer for the National Motorists Association, a drivers advocacy group. Although he acknowledges that rest in red could be effective in certain places at specific times, he questions whether driver behavior can really change without a broad education campaign and believes there are simpler, less-intrusive solutions.

“I think it’s wishful thinking that drivers are aware enough and pay attention enough to really learn to change their speeds based on whether the light is gonna be red or not,” Beeber said. “I think people are going to end up at the light and just be frustrated. I don’t think they’re gonna know why.”

Many U.S. cities, including Albuquerque and Portland, have long used speed cameras to successfully prevent speeding. In fact, Albuquerque set up three near where it also deploys the rest in red approach, which has made that approach even stronger, according to officials.

LA briefly tried rest in red, but most cities haven’t

A few other cities including Boulder, Colorado, and Long Beach, California, implemented smaller targeted efforts to use the threat of more red lights to force speeders to slow down.

Rebecca Sanders, a national safety practice leader at the transportation consulting firm Fehr & Peers, led a 2019 report at Arizona State University and Toole Design looking at various strategies used across the country to manage speed. Of the cities surveyed, only Los Angeles was trying rest in red at the time, and it briefly experimented with using feedback signs to trigger a red light when a driver traveling too fast was detected.

Sanders said the concept seems to work best on roads built for high-capacity traffic during the day but much less congested — and therefore more conducive to speeding — at night.

A 2023 study on five rural and urban roads in North Carolina found a 43% reduction in total crashes after rest in red was implemented around the clock, said Aaron Moody, spokesperson for the North Carolina Department of Transportation. Unlike the systems being used in Albuquerque and Portland, this and other versions of the rest in red approach didn’t use speed sensors to turn lights green for law-abiding drivers, but instead kept lights red by default until vehicles approached, slowing them.

Despite their apparent effectiveness at deterring speeding, cities have been slow to embrace rest in red.

Romero said he’s visited enough neighborhoods through his home security business to know that the approach could work in many other places in Albuquerque and beyond. But it’ll take all drivers buying in, as the presence of just one speeder can trigger a red light.

“If everybody cruises to 30 calmly, I can promise you, you can get every single green light all the way down,” Romero said. “But the moment that one person is there, it changes that whole route for everybody.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Climate change has been the backdrop to Charles Hughes’ entire life, from kindergarten lessons about disappearing habitats to wildfire smoke billowing through the air he breathed while growing up in Colorado. But now that he’s a college student in Massachusetts, he said global warming is rarely a top issue.

“Honestly, it doesn’t come up as much,” said Hughes, who chairs the state’s chapter of the College Democrats.

What a difference six years makes.

During President Donald Trump’s first term and especially during the Democratic primaries to determine who would run against him in 2020, Democrats spoke constantly about climate change. They used it to rally young voters such as Hughes, fueling protests and sweeping demands to remake the economy with proposals like the Green New Deal.

But there has been a national shift in the conversation that is sharp enough for some researchers to coin the term “climate hushing” to describe it. The Searchlight Institute, a Democratic think tank, urged the party to stop mentioning climate change because it is not a priority for voters. The Sunrise Movement, a left-wing group that pushed global warming as a top issue for young people, switched its mission last fall to a broader mandate of fighting the Republican president.

The shift is encapsulated by the Democratic primary for U.S. Senate in Massachusetts on Tuesday as the incumbent, Ed Markey, 80, tries to fend off a challenge from U.S. Rep. Seth Moulton, 47. Although Markey still talks about sponsoring the Green New Deal, his campaign is more focused on other issues to burnish his left-wing bona fides and prove to voters that he is not too old for the job.

It is the latest example of how climate change has been eclipsed by issues such as affordability, U.S. support for Israel and, above all, how to confront Trump.

“Six years ago, Green New Deal was every phrase out of Ed Markey’s mouth every chance he got. That is not the case now,” said Mary Anne Marsh, a veteran Democratic strategist in Massachusetts. “It’s about who’s best to fight. Period, full stop. Everything falls under that.”

‘People are increasingly freaked out about other issues’

Even if the political discussion on climate change has quieted, the planet has not. Scientists say there is an increasing chance that by the end of the year, 2026 could be the hottest year on record, or at least come close. A strengthening El Nino is forecast to be off the charts, spiking global temperatures.

Some advocates expect the issue to return to center stage if Democrats retake the U.S. House in November and climate-sparked disasters dominate the winter.

U.S. Sen. Sheldon Whitehouse of Rhode Island, a prominent Democratic voice on climate change, said in an interview that ignoring the issue is a major strategic “blunder.”

“Climate change has moved from the science department into the economics department,” he said. “It’s now battering people’s home insurance, property values, pocketbook concerns. So I think it’s a very powerful argument.”

Trump has falsely claimed climate change is “a hoax,” and his party has regularly scoffed at Democratic proposals such as the Green New Deal.

The Sunrise Movement, founded in 2017 to mobilize young voters over climate issues, announced in October that it was shifting to a broader fight against “fascism.” The group’s executive director, Aru Shiney-Ajay, said that was a prescient move because of reports that federal agents infiltrated protest meetings during Trump’s immigration raids in Minneapolis.

“We just live in a significantly more authoritarian country. Because of that, a lot of the Democratic primaries are about more existential questions,” Shiney-Ajay, whose network generally backs left-wing Democrats, said in an interview. “It has felt less like people care less about climate and more like people are increasingly freaked out about other issues.”

About 6 in 10 Democrats say climate change is “a very big problem” for the country, according to a Pew Research Center poll from April. That is roughly the same as in 2016. Still, climate has often taken a back seat to other issues in Democratic voters’ priorities, such as inflation, healthcare affordability and the role of money in politics.

Affordability concerns have dominated the political debate this year.

McKenzie Wilson of Blue Rose Research, a Democratic data firm, said voters have called for sweeping changes in response to economic discontent, demonstrating a level of anger not seen in years.

“In that kind of environment it’s hard to think about long-term, existential problems,” Wilson said. “If we don’t talk and focus our attention on the number one thing the electorate wants to talk about, as we saw in 2024, we’re not going to be connecting with the electorate.”

‘Don’t say climate change’

That view was summed up by the Searchlight Institute, a Democratic think tank that last year released a provocative suggestion: “The First Rule About Solving Climate Change: Don’t Say Climate Change.”

It contended that voters saw it as such an intimidating, complex issue that Democrats were more likely to win by focusing on other subjects — thus enabling them to regain power and tackle the crisis that they were not talking about.

Leah Stokes, a political scientist at the University of California, Santa Barbara and author of “The Carbon Wave,” a book about Democratic President Joe Biden’s domestic agenda, said it was “galling” when politicians made the issue less of a priority.

“The climate crisis is accelerating and we can’t really not talk about it for like a decade, because the planet will be even more on fire if we do that,” she said.

Anthony Leiserowitz, director of the Yale Program on Climate Change Communication, agreed with those concerns.

“What happens over the course of the next decade will profoundly shape the habitability of the planet for literally thousands of years to come,” he said.

Some are making climate an affordability issue

Climate has come up as part of the national backlash to data centers, but it is only one part of the conversation about the projects’ impact. Many climate advocates are adjusting how they talk about the issue, stressing how green energy can lower prices and ease insurance costs.

“What we’re seeing right now is, whether you’re advocating for healthcare reform or climate action or some niche tech issue, everything is filtered through some cost frame,” said Jared Leopold, a veteran Democratic strategist who has long focused on climate change.

That is how the Green New Deal came up at a recent debate between Markey and Moulton, when a voter asked how each candidate would reduce energy prices. Notably, the questioner asked about increasing nuclear or gas generation, not clean energy, to deal with cost. Markey turned the opportunity into a slam against the president.

“There was a plan in place in order to have a strong, clean affordable energy future for our commonwealth,” Markey said, “and Trump attacked it.”

Tatishe Nteta, a political scientist at the University of Massachusetts Amherst, said that is how Markey has used climate change this election — to signal his willingness to fight Trump as well as his alliance with the left flank of the Democratic Party, which has run up a series of primary wins this year. But other issues have become even more useful in doing that.

“The definition in where you’re at in terms of a progressive candidate and a progressive elected official is your viewpoint on Israel,” Nteta said. “You’re not hearing this in most races, that I’m the candidate who’s going to protect and save our planet.”

Massachusetts’ summer has been the hottest that Eileen Cefail can recall in the 30 years she has worked in the Roofers Local 33 office. “The roofers are tough as nails, and they work so hard, and their work is so grueling,” she said. “This heat has been horrendous for them.”

Cefail is backing Markey in the primary, but climate, she said, was not the main reason.

“He’s always been a union guy,” Cefail said. “He’s just for the labor.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Ontario Premier Doug Ford answered President Donald Trump’s “Lake America” decree Saturday with a billboard-sized message on the Canadian shoreline: “Lake Ontario. Now and Always.”

Wearing a Team Canada soccer jersey, Ford unveiled the sign near Grimsby, Ontario, and posed for photographs. The 24-by-12-foot (7.3-by-3.6 meter) sign stands on 6-foot (1.8-meter) legs, putting its top about 18 feet (5.5 meters) above the ground — roughly two stories high. The message is repeated in French.

It was the latest show of defiance after Trump signed an executive order directing U.S. federal agencies to call Lake Ontario “Lake America.” After months of tariffs, threats to make Canada the 51st U.S. state and personal attacks on its leaders, the move has been met in Canada largely with ridicule.

Ford said Trump was trying to rename the lake because Ontario and Canada were “standing up for ourselves” and argued the name would outlast the president.

“Long after President Trump is gone, it will still be called Lake Ontario,” Ford said in a video posted on social media.

Manitoba Premier Wab Kinew compared Trump to an aging rock band trying to revive an old hit

“You know when a rock band is really over the hill and you see them like in a casino playing some song from like 50 years ago. I think that’s the part of Donald Trump’s presidency we’re at now, Like he thought they had a real hit, a real golden oldie, with the Gulf of Mexico,” Kinew said, referring to Trump’s executive order renaming the Gulf of Mexico the Gulf of America. “And he’s trying to bring back that, and he’s trying to play the hits for his base. But I think everybody here thinks it’s a little sad and it’s not his best work.”

The mockery was not limited to politicians. Canadian historian Robert Bothwell was even more scathing.

“The greatest country on earth takes this moron seriously?” Bothwell said.

But Bothwell said the dispute was more serious than the jokes, arguing Trump’s broader aim was “to subordinate Canada and at best make it a colony, at worst absorb it into the United States.”

Nelson Wiseman, professor emeritus at the University of Toronto, said Trump “would like Canada to act like a vassal state, but it refuses to do so. That irritates him.”

The dispute comes as relations between the longtime allies worsen over trade. Negotiations collapsed last week, both governments accused the other of making late demands, and Canada announced retaliatory tariffs set to take effect next month.

Trump’s order also came amid an escalating war of words with Ford. In an interview with The Associated Press earlier this week, Ford said Ronald Reagan would be “throwing up” over Trump’s tariff policies and “disgusted with President Trump.”

Trump fired back by dismissing Ford’s comments as “bluster,” calling him Prime Minister Mark Carney’s “flunky” and mocking him as the “less charismatic, intelligent, and overall unimpressive brother” of the late Toronto Mayor Rob Ford.

Trump continued promoting the new name Saturday, reposting a meme showing Canada geese with Trump-like blond hair firing rifles as they “protected” Lake America.

Trump has repeatedly used maps to make political points. A “Gulf of America” map was displayed for a time beside the Resolute Desk in the Oval Office, and Trump has posted images depicting Canada as part of the United States or as the 51st state.

The name Lake Ontario comes from the Huron Indigenous people’s word “oniatarí:io,” which means “lake of shining waters.” The Canadian province of Ontario, founded in 1867, took its name from the lake.

Canadian Prime Minister Mark Carney rejected the move, noting the lake’s Indigenous roots and that the name predates both Canadian Confederation and the U.S. Declaration of Independence. Trump cannot require Canada to adopt the new name.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Drive through Iowa, Missouri or Illinois, and you’ll pass a Casey’s roughly every few exits. Midwesterners have come to know the red-roofed convenience store and gas station where people buy diesel, a bag of ice, a lottery ticket and, increasingly, a hot pizza. Maybe it’s one of their distinctive creations, like the taco pizza or the breakfast pizza.

Casey’s is closing in on 3,000 stores, nearly half of which sit in towns of 5,000 people or fewer and about two-thirds in towns under 20,000. The Fortune 500 company’s stock price is surging as America wakes up to the stealth pizza empire sitting under its nose: it’s up more than 50% in the past 12 months for a market capitalization of $28 billion.

Bank of America Research recently ran the numbers and concluded that Casey’s pizza business ranks as the fifth-largest pizza chain in the entire U.S., when measured by prepared food and dispensed beverage sales.

Tom Brennan, Casey’s chief merchandising officer, confirmed to Fortune that it is the fifth-largest pizza chain and the fourth-largest liquor license holder in the U.S., not to mention third-largest convenience store.

“You don’t hear the other big pizza players talk about Casey’s,” he added, “but at the same time, it’s evident from our growth … we’re taking share as we continue to grow.”

Ask Brennan whether “stealth” is a fair word for his company and he laughs a little at an out-of-touch, coastal way of thinking. “Certainly stealthy for, I think, a lot of the U.S.,” but ask anyone in its 19 states, and they’ll know Casey’s.

That’s starting to change a bit online. TikTok and YouTube have built a small, oddly durable genre around “gas-station pizza” — creators bracing for something left under a heat lamp then wowed by something genuinely good. Casey’s turns up constantly in the genre, praised for its scratch-made dough and on-site pizza ovens, and Brennan said he welcomes it.

Casey’s social team found its penetration with Gen Z has climbed 600 basis points over the past three years based on engagement. “What underpins all of this is just this incredible fandom and brand love that we’ve generated.” It all comes down to something an algorithm can’t fake, he added, an authenticity so beloved in the age of AI backlash and analog fever.

“It’s really built on decades of delivering high-quality pizza and food, a great experience.” Brennan argued that Casey’s is the “gathering spot” for its communities, and it keeps adding new features, like its Sauced Wings, which began as a pilot in January 2025 and have now grown to almost 900 stores, gradually rolling out across the chain over the next two years.

courtesy of Casey’s

A moat across small-town America

Casey’s origin traces back to 1968, when Donald Lamberti opened a converted service station in Boone, Iowa. Brennan said he’s talked to Lamberti about his strategy, describing it as, “Hey, this will probably work in the next small town.” He described a gradual, slow-and-steady, now explosive growth: “Literally, they just went from small town to small town, building Casey’s.” Over time, this became what Wall Street calls a “defensible moat,” because most other brands simply aren’t looking “to develop sites in towns that small.”

The company is still chasing the same bet that small is beautiful: build where the population is too small for anyone else to bother, and eventually you’re outcompeting Big Pizza on turf it never thought to conquer. Pizza joined the menu in 1984, and breakfast pizza about two decades later, what Brennan calls an “iconic” mix of sausage gravy, egg and cheese.

This strategy also means Casey’s is fighting a different war than its pizza competitors — if you consider them competitors. The roughly $31 billion quick-service pizza category turned negative in 2025, per Technomic, after barely growing the year before. The Wall Street Journal reported in January 2026 that America appeared to be “falling out of love with pizza.” Brennan said Casey’s was watching the trend closely, but the company has a different view.

“About half of our stores don’t have a national pizza competitor within what we consider a competitive rating,” he said. And when Casey’s does come to a nearby town, “we’re bringing something that hasn’t been really on offer there. And it’s resonating.”

Brennan added that Casey’s works to keep pizza and other key items priced slightly below the prevailing market rate. Citing inflation data, he noted that over the past three years, food away-from-home prices are up about 14%, while Casey’s prepared food and dispensed beverage business is only up 5%. “We can leverage the other parts of the business to make the total P&L work while we invest, essentially, to grow food.”

BofA noted the unglamorous math: prepared food and beverages carried an estimated 58% gross margin in fiscal 2025, more than double Casey’s overall margin of roughly 23.5%. Brennan calls the Casey’s model “three legs of the stool,” as food, convenience and merchandise combine to prop up one another. Pizza is the “crown jewel” of the food business, he said, but to him, Casey’s is a “category of one,” with “the magic of the brand [being] when we have all three legs of the stool working together.”

Math points to Casey’s next frontier: Texas. Iowa has about 3 million people and 550 Casey’s stores, he notes, while Texas has roughly 30 million people and room to run. “We see that as Casey’s country,” Brennan said, pointing to the small towns along the Interstate-35 corridor that don’t have anything like what Casey’s offers.

When asked if gas-station food is having a moment, Brennan said Casey’s is a Midwestern example of something that has been bubbling for decades in certain regions of the U.S. and spreading to others. He spent three years at 7-Eleven in the Mid-Atlantic a little over a decade ago, he added, and remembers how gas-station culture there turned into a rising tide, lifting all boats. His stores had the highest food sales in the enterprise in the U.S., not because of any underlying difference from other 7-Elevens, but “because Wawa and Sheetz had legitimized eating at a gas station.”

Brennan added that he serves on the retail board of the National Association of Convenience Stores and the “collegiality” of different brands is unique to convenience retail. “We certainly are supportive of each other,” he said. “We’re definitely in competition, but at the same time, the more good operators we have who really deliver delicious food in our channel, it lifts everybody up.”

When asked what his favorite Casey’s pizza was, he said breakfast pizza with bacon is hard to argue with, but a new item has caught his attention: the four-cheese pizza, which features a blend of provolone, mozzarella, cheddar — and then a special “post-bake shake” of cheese seasoning. “It is a game-changer.”

courtesy of Casey’s

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

In firing up a trade war with Canada, President Donald Trump turned to a 96-year-old statute so obscure that many trade lawyers didn’t even know it was still on the books.

A week ago, Trump invoked Section 338 of the Tariff Act of 1930 to slap a 50% tax on $20 billion worth of Canadian imports. The move prompted dollar-for-dollar retaliation from Ottawa and strained already-tense relations between the neighbors and longtime allies.

The president’s Section 338 tariff authority has never been used, let alone tested in court. “This law is literally a blank canvas because it’s never been litigated,’’ said Ryan Majerus, a partner at King & Spalding and a former U.S. trade official.

So it’s unclear whether Trump’s latest Canada tariffs could survive a legal challenge, and some lawyers argue that the Depression-era law has been rendered obsolete by more recent trade laws.

Trump raises Section 338 from the dead

To sanction Canada for allegedly discriminating against U.S. dairy, auto and alcoholic beverage exports this summer, the Trump administration reached back to the Great Depression.

The 1930 tariff legislation is known as the Smoot-Hawley Act after its congressional sponsors. With the U.S. and world economies in collapse, Congress raised tariffs on hundreds of imports in an attempt to protect American farmers and manufacturers.

The tariffs are notorious among economists and historians for shutting down world commerce and making the Great Depression worse. (Trump, who proudly calls himself “Tariff Man,’’ has a different view, arguing that the Smoot-Hawley levies simply came too late to rescue the American economy.)

In addition to raising tariffs themselves, lawmakers in 1930 gave the president new power to impose them himself: Section 338 authorizes presidential tariffs of up to 50% on imports from countries that have discriminated against U.S. businesses.

Before Trump, no president had actually used the statute.

“Until Trump’s second term, few trade lawyers were aware that Section 338 remained on the books or understood what it did,” legal scholars Peter Harrell and Jennifer Hillman of Georgetown University wrote earlier this month in the libertarian magazine Reason. They cite State Department records to show that the U.S. considered using Section 338 in trade disputes – against Spain in 1932 and against newly Communist China in 1949 – but never did. After the Depression, U.S. policy focused more on using negotiations — rather than sanctions — to open foreign markets.

So Section 338 sat moldering in the law books.

Other laws take hold

As the years went by, the United States passed new trade laws. Some of them ceded to the president tariff power, which the U.S. Constitution originally granted to Congress. But the new laws also limited the president’s authority to certain circumstances — including dealing with national security threats and foreign currency crises — and required the government to carry out investigations and meet other procedural requirements beforehand.

“There is a very strong argument that (Section 338) was superseded,’’ said Sara Albrecht, CEO of the Liberty Justice Center, a libertarian advocacy group that represented businesses that successfully challenged the earlier Trump tariffs with the Supreme Court.

If Congress wanted the president to retain Section 338 power, Albrecht asks, why did lawmakers pass the Trade Expansion Act of 1962, which allowed for national security tariffs? And the Trade Act of 1974, which gives the president power to go after other countries’ unfair trade practices?

Battling over Canada’s dairy market

Legal experts see other weaknesses in the Section 338 tariffs.

Harrell and Hillman, for instance, write in Reason that Section 338 only authorizes tariffs that “offset’’ the harm that a foreign country’s trade practices do to American companies. But in targeting Canada, they note, the Trump administration made no attempt to calculate the dollar amount of damage arising from discrimination against U.S. farmers, automakers and marketers of alcoholic beverages. And the U.S. went after Canadian imports unconnected to those trouble spots, including hockey sticks and cement.

Harrell and Hillman also say that Canada’s protection of its dairy market does not single out U.S. farmers for discrimination; the rules apply to many other Canadian trading partners as well.

Moreover, the United States agreed to the Canadian system – in which Canada imposes stiff tariffs on dairy imports that exceed a quota — in a North America trade pact Trump himself negotiated with Canada and Mexico in his first term. Harrell and Hillman write that it is “incongruous, to say the least, for the United States to denounce as discriminatory the very terms it agreed to.’’

But John Veroneau, former general counsel for the U.S. Trade Representative, said the Section 338 tariffs are straightforward: They are justified when another country discriminates against U.S. imports by taxing them more than it taxes imports from other countries.

And in a “perverse irony,’’ Veroneau said, Canada did just that when it responded to tariffs Trump imposed on Canadian products last year with its own retaliatory tariffs on U.S. imports. “Courts will rightly feel obliged in the face of any challenge (to decide): Are the statutory requirements met or are they not met, however ludicrous the broader context might be,’’ said Veroneau, adjunct professor at the University of Maine Law School.

Plaintiffs are so far hard to find

Trump’s other tools to impose his protectionist agenda have already floundered in court. The Supreme Court in February threw out his boldest gambit: invoking a 1977 national security law to hit almost every country on Earth last year with double-digit tariffs.

When Trump tried to replace the revenue lost to the Supreme Court defeat with a new set of tariffs, a specialized trade court in New York rejected those, too – though the government was allowed to continue collecting the import taxes while the case works its way through the court system.

No one has filed a lawsuit challenging the Section 338 tariffs. The Liberty Justice Center has been looking for businesses willing to sue the government over the levies.

“I haven’t had a lot of response from plaintiffs,’’ Albrecht said. “Anytime you want to sue the government, it’s a hard proposition.’’

The Section 338 tariffs on Canada are also far smaller – just 5% of Canadian imports — than Trump’s 2025 worldwide tariffs, meaning that fewer companies have to pay them and can claim to have been injured by them.

There’s also a chance, Albrecht said, that the two countries will resume the talks they broke off Aug. 21 and reach a compromise to end a standoff neither country wants. “I’m hopeful that somebody blinks, that they come to some agreement and it all goes away,’’ she said.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Students returning to Russian schools next week will discover a change to their civics courses that puts military training at the heart of the lessons.

The mandatory classes for teenagers include learning about the main types of armaments including machine guns, anti-tank weapons and hand grenades, as well as emergency field medicine and general military discipline. While some of the skills were previously taught in limited high school modules, the new version escalates this training for children as young as 13.

The revamped curriculum ordered by the Education Ministry requires half of weekly classes in the “Fundamentals of Security and Defense of the Motherland” course to focus on basic military training. It’s part of a creeping militarization of Russia’s schools intended to shape the next generation of army recruits as the Kremlin continues the war in Ukraine that’s now in its fifth year. 

“The romanticization of war and violence, combined with a constant fear of external enemies, instills in young people the idea that human life holds no value and that dying for the regime and the president is normal,” said Pavel Talankin, an exiled Russian teacher who co-directed the Oscar-winning documentary Mr. Nobody Against Putin that focused on rising war propaganda in his school. “If necessary, one must die for the motherland, taking up the flag and marching into the line of fire without asking questions.”

As well as instruction on weapons and battlefield tactics, the basic military training covers lessons on Russia’s national security doctrine and the structure of the armed forces. Students will also study mines and explosive hazards, first aid for combat injuries, chemical and radiation exposure and acute stress, as well as survival training and procedures for operating in conflict zones.

The educational overhaul effectively helps create a stream of potential recruits from the classroom to the army. It’s backed up by deployment of battlefield veterans from the war in Ukraine into schools and kindergartens to speak to children in support of President Vladimir Putin’s decision to launch the 2022 full-scale invasion.

Russia seeks about 400,000 new recruits each year for the war that’s already created more than 1.5 million killed and wounded in the army, according to western estimates. 

State Duma speaker Vyacheslav Volodin wants veterans of the war in Ukraine to be placed in “every single school” to teach children in subjects related to their military experience. “Their qualities should be put to use in educating children,” he told university students in Krasnodar in September 2025, pointing to his own Soviet childhood when veterans of World War II were present in schools.

In the Soviet Union, basic military training was compulsory in schools including gas mask drills, march practice, and rifle assembly. Communist authorities framed military readiness as a deterrent against foreign aggression so that the catastrophe of the Nazi German invasion in World War II, which cost an estimated 27 million Soviet lives to defeat, would never happen again.

“Back then, people feared war, and there was propaganda for peace everywhere, so that war would not happen again,” said Irina Lukyanova, a teacher and researcher who studies trends in Russia’s education system. “But now the ideology is militarism.”   

Volodin’s wish is already close to being fulfilled. A survey of more than 2,600 Russian school leaders and teachers conducted by the state-sponsored Knowledge Society (Znanie) found that 95% of schools host events dedicated to the war in Ukraine, more than 80% invite combatants to speak to students, and nearly 75% run special lessons about the war.

The classroom pipeline feeds directly into Russia’s conscription system, which requires all 18-year-old men to complete one year’s military service, though in reality many avoid or delay being drafted. While the army can’t send conscripts to Ukraine, enlistment officers and military instructors pressure young draftees to sign lucrative professional contracts early in their training, making them eligible to be sent to fight in the war.

Five Ways Putin Is in Trouble Over His War in Ukraine: Explainer

Outside the classroom, Russia has revived and modernized Soviet-era youth military games called “Zarnitsa” (Summer Lightning). Organized by the state-backed “Movement of the First” youth group, children are organized into 10-person squads with different military specialties, including commanders, stormtroopers, drone operators, sappers, and medics, undertaking combat simulation training using laser-tag gear, VR flight simulators, trench maneuvers, and assault rifle mockups.

Participation in the program has grown from 800,000 children aged from 7 to 17 years in 2024 to an expected 2.5 million this year. The youth organization overseeing the games receives annual funding of about 20 billion rubles ($233 million) from the federal budget.

High school boys are also offered week-long barracks-style field training at state-run ‘Avangard’ military centers — a nationwide network spanning over 70 facilities backed by tens of billions of rubles in state funding. Authorities in Russia’s far eastern Primorye region have opened specialized summer military camps for 14-to-17-year-olds with names like ‘Stormtrooper’ and ‘Infantryman.’

Read more: Putin Moves to Escalate War in Ukraine as Talks at Dead End

Russia’s federal budget has allocated a record 70 billion rubles this year for “patriotic education” through the national project “Youth and Children” — a twenty-fold increase since 2021. Meanwhile, enrollment in formal military cadet schools and specialized recruitment tracks reached 780,000 students by 2025, up from 200,000 in 2018.

Russian schools all start the new academic year on Sept. 1, known as the Day of Knowledge. Putin has marked the occasion in recent years by leading a lesson with children called “Conversations About Important Things.” 

The obligatory weekly hour-long class was introduced in September 2022 to promote the Kremlin’s views on patriotism and Russian history including the full-scale invasion of Ukraine. An adapted version based on play is being introduced in kindergartens this year for pre-school children.

In the Russian-occupied areas of eastern and southern Ukraine, there’s a wholesale revision of education in schools that amounts to cultural erasure. New state-approved history textbooks introduced this year will teach children in Moscow-controlled parts of Donetsk, Luhansk, Zaporizhzhia, and Kherson regions that their land was always Russian.

“The entire system has been reshuffled to normalize the war,” said Alexandra Arkhipova, a Russian anthropologist and researcher at the Ecole Normale Superieure in Paris. “The state is preparing young people to accept the battlefield as their primary civic destination.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Drugmakers found a promising cure for the obesity epidemic and their stocks were rewarded for it. Now, investors are salivating over a new crop of companies tackling a more purely aesthetic problem: baldness.

Pattern hair loss affects an estimated 50 million men and 30 million women in the US, but there have been no new approved drugs since the late 1990s. The promise of novel treatments has sent shares of Veradermics Inc., which trades as “MANE,” up nearly 500% since the company went public in February, while Absci Corp.’s stock has more than doubled so far in 2026. Cosmo NV also had positive results for an experimental male hair-loss treatment, though its Zurich-listed shares have been weighed down by the success of US competitors.

Those who are ineligible for hair transplant surgery — or can’t afford it — are left with two main options: over-the-counter topical minoxidil, the active ingredient in Rogaine, or prescription finasteride, branded as Propecia. They can come with some debilitating side effects; minoxidil is linked to heart palpitations while finasteride is known to lower sex drive. Wall Street sees new treatments as an untapped goldmine, full of consumers who are willing to pay out-of-pocket for better options, reminiscent of the boom in GLP-1 weight-loss drugs. 

“People will fly all the way to Turkey to have some hair moved around on their head,” said Needham analyst Gil Blum, who rates Absci a buy. “Can you imagine if you could do that without getting a hair transplant?”

Drugmakers and investors alike are hoping for a repeat of the successes of the weight-loss drugs that vaulted Eli Lilly & Co.’s market value across the $1 trillion threshold and made Novo Nordisk A/S, briefly, the most valuable company in Europe. 

One of the closest to market is Cosmo’s topical medicine, clascoterone, which targets the root cause of male-pattern hair loss by blocking a hormone that causes it directly at the hair follicle. 

The company says the treatment could be the “single biggest opportunity” in its portfolio and plans to submit a new drug application to US regulators in the first quarter of 2027. Clascoterone 5% topical solution leverages the same active ingredient used in Winlevi, Cosmo’s acne treatment product.  

While new medicines are likely more than a year away from hitting US shelves, analysts expect Cosmo shares to nearly double over the next 12 months.

Jefferies analysts estimate sales for Cosmo’s male hair-loss therapy reaching $3 billion globally, “assuming a capable commercial partner is successfully found.” The brokerage said the company may find a partner before the year is over, which could help bolster the share price. 

Like obesity drugs, there’s room for more than one winner. Analysts tracked by Bloomberg are universally bullish on both Cosmo and Veradermics.

“This space definitely can accommodate multiple drugs,” said Jefferies analyst Roger Song, who holds the Street’s highest price target on Veradermics. “Many hair loss patients tend to use multiple drugs, either prescription or over-the-counter — as long as they can afford it — because it’s a cash-pay market.”

Veradermics announced positive results for its lead candidate, a tablet formulation of minoxidil, in male-pattern hair loss in April. The company also reported promising mid-stage data for women with thinning hair in July. If it’s able to win a nod from the Food and Drug Administration, the drug could become the first approved pill for female-pattern hair loss. 

Absci, meanwhile, is developing its early-stage drug candidate ABS-201, an AI-designed shot to treat pattern hair loss. The firm expects interim data in the second half of this year.

“Both obesity and hair loss are large consumer markets and that’s one reason why both of those categories can offer significant revenue potential,” OrbiMed’s Geoff Hsu, portfolio manager of the Biotech Growth Trust Plc, said in an interview. “If you do find a safe and efficacious drug for hair loss, that would unlock a significant addressable market.”

Of course, drug development is high risk, with the potential for big returns counterbalanced by the products and companies that flop. Before GLP-1s won over insurers and consumers alike, a whole generation of obesity drugs failed to reach blockbuster status; some instead went to bankruptcy court.

There’s also a major difference with weight-loss drugs: going bald is not a health crisis. GLP-1s, as a weapon in the battle against obesity, were able to secure insurance coverage while also attracting consumers primarily interested in meeting modern beauty standards. Hair-loss drugs are likely to remain out-of-pocket expenses for consumers, but many in the industry remain upbeat on future sales. 

“If you can make it easier on the patient — that is pain-free and simple like taking a pill — I think it opens a whole new avenue of potential patients to treat,” said Ryan Isherwood, who with his wife owns three Gameday Men’s Health clinics in Wisconsin. 

Despite high-flying valuations and the risk of failure, analysts remain upbeat on room for future gains.

“This is a zero or hero story. I would buy it now because it’s still cheap,” Needham’s Blum said of Absci.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Traders have made a bundle over the past year following President Donald Trump as the US government pursues an unprecedented strategy of taking ownership stakes in publicly traded companies. 

But with the deeply polarized midterm elections approaching and polls suggesting the Democratic Party is likely to win a majority in at least one house of Congress, market strategists see rising risks of the administration’s equity positions facing scrutiny in Washington and the courts. And that could reverse much of the momentum driving these stocks.

“There is a sort of interventionist approach that is not fully litigated and mediated in the American system yet,” said Matt Gertken, who leads geopolitical and US political analysis for BCA Research. “So there’s going to be ups and downs in that process.”

There’s no doubt that the government’s involvement has lifted the stock prices of many of the companies in which it has taken stakes. The trend kicked off a rush among investors, particularly mom-and-pop traders, to identify potential investments before they were announced, as the correct pick all but guaranteed at least an initial surge and pointed to longer-term upside. 

Intel Corp. shares have soared over 300% in the year since the initial report that the Trump administration was in talks to take an ownership stake in the chipmaker. MP Materials Corp. is up 87% since last July, when the Department of Defense made a $400 million equity investment in the rare earth minerals upstart. And Trilogy Metals Inc. has gained 73% since October, when the US government agreed to take a 10% stake in the Canadian minerals exploration company in a deal that included approval for an Alaska road project that was essential to accessing areas where it has mining claims.

However, those numbers have largely come in bursts. Trilogy Metals’ US shares jumped from $2.09 a share to a high of $10.60 within days of the deal announcement, then they quickly gave up those gains and are now trading for $3.62. MP Materials soared more than 150% within five weeks of the government taking a stake, but it’s down nearly 27% in the year since then.

Intel is a slightly different case because it’s also caught up in the mania for chip stocks as spending on artificial intelligence creates extreme demand for semiconductors. The stock rose steadily as earnings improved, peaking in June after Trump said Apple Inc. will work with the company to design and produce semiconductors in the US. But it’s down 37% since then, the fifth worst performance in the S&P 500 Index over that stretch.  

Read More: Intel Rallies to Record After Trump Touts Apple Chip Deal

Part of the skepticism surrounding Intel involves a shareholder lawsuit against the company’s board, the US Department of Commerce and Commerce Secretary Howard Lutnick, seeking to unwind the government’s ownership position. If it’s successful, investors will have to assess the durability of the administration’s entire portfolio.

“It is really the government investment that really turned it around, and it’s certainly what I think is a factor in keeping the stock where it is right now,” said Mark Malek, chief investment officer of Siebert Financial, which owns Intel shares. “If you pull that away, the question is then what happens? That is why we haven’t increased our investment at all.”

The more conventional concern about the stocks is the highly partisan environment in DC. If the Democrats gain control of the Senate or House of Representatives they can hold hearings and subpoena witnesses. Democratic Senator Elizabeth Warren, who’s in line to chair the Senate Banking Committee if the party wins the chamber, has already written Lutnick questioning the Intel investment. And party leaders are laying the groundwork to investigate companies with ties to the Trump administration and the president’s family.

The Democrats are “going to want to punch at the president as often as possible for as long as possible,” said Henrietta Treyz, co-founder of the research firm Veda Partners. 

She expects Democratic-run committees to summon corporate executives and administration officials to Capitol Hill, creating risks for the companies’ brands and share prices. “That’s one of the most important takeaways for investors right now,” Treyz said. 

Read More: Top House Democrat Probes 1789 Capital Over Trump Family Ties

Intel, Trilogy Metals and another investment recipient USA Rare Earth Inc. declined to comment. Trilogy cited the process of closing its deal with the government. The Commerce Department and other companies mentioned in this story did not respond to requests for comment.

The risks to investors from litigation may be even bigger than the elections. The Intel shareholder suit argues that the Chips Act doesn’t give the government authority to demand an equity position as a condition of receiving a grant. It alleges that the deal was a breach of the board’s fiduciary duties and amounts to an “extortionary” seizure. 

Lutnick has asked the court to dismiss the case, saying that the arrangement was authorized under federal law and is important for the US defense industrial base. Intel Chief Executive Officer Lip-Bu Tan and other board members have also moved to dismiss the case. 

“If the courts end up deciding that the Chips Act does not give the Commerce Department authority to do what they did with Intel, that has broad ramifications for a lot of these deals,” said Josh Lipsky, senior director of the Atlantic Council’s GeoEconomics Center. 

Such a decision would call into question other equity investments made under the Chips Act, according to University of Colorado law professor Ann Lipton. The Commerce Department has used funding from the bill to invest in several other companies, including International Business Machines Corp. and GlobalFoundries Inc. 

Read More: IBM Shares Soar on US Funding for $2 Billion Quantum Push

The Trump administration’s strategy has subverted the reason the government has typically gotten involved in private enterprise, and with it Wall Street’s reaction to the moves. In the past, these deals were rare and usually done to rescue companies, as was the case with General Motors Co., which was forced into bankruptcy during the global financial crisis.

In 2009, the US Treasury Department took a roughly 60% stake in the troubled automaker to help it emerge from Chapter 11, and by 2013 had sold all of it. The Bush and Obama administrations were heavily criticized by Republicans for the bailout, spurring on the nascent Tea Party movement with complaints of government overreach into the free market.

Now, the state is essentially picking winners, not rescuing big US companies that are deemed critical to the economy. The stock gains reflect the view “that you now have a customer and a spokesperson in the government that is going to make your company successful,” said Aniket Shah, global head of Washington, sustainability, and transition strategy at Jefferies.

Of course, the ultimate risk for owning these stocks is familiar to all investors, namely the vagaries of the market itself. If the government gains control over businesses’ decisions and investment dollars chase political trends, that will erode shareholder value over the long term, according to Gina Martin Adams, chief market strategist at HB Wealth Management. 

“The risks of government ‘backing’ have always been there,” she said in a text message. “It may have positively influenced stock prices, but that is likely due (at least in part) to investors chasing politics, and that makes the stock price momentum quite vulnerable.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

A former White House teleprompter operator accused of using inside knowledge to make bets on the prediction market Kalshi has been ordered to turn over more than $100,000 in profits and pay a $65,000 fine as part of a settlement with federal authorities.

The settlement with the Commodity Futures Trading Commission, announced Friday, also dealt Gabriel Perez a three-year trading ban. Perez was placed on unpaid leave from his job at the White House after reports emerged that he used his position to make bets on what President Donald Trump would say in speeches.

The White House did not immediately comment on the settlement. A White House official said in July that Perez was no longer in his position but did not say if he had been fired or resigned.

The commission found that Perez made $107,500 on prediction markets by betting on words and phrases that would appear in Trump’s speeches between December 2025 and February 2026.

“In his position, Perez had access to presidential speeches prior to those speeches being delivered and Perez misappropriated that information — in breach of his duty of trust and confidence,” according to a release from the commission.

Perez was ordered to repay his profits in full, along with the $65,000 civil penalty, which the commission said was a reduction because of his “exemplary cooperation.”

As details emerged July 16, White House press secretary Karoline Leavitt said it was “unfortunate” and “a disgrace.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

After six months of war, Iran’s leadership has coalesced around a hard core of military generals and clerics long entrenched in the ruling theocracy. They are ready for a potentially long confrontation with the U.S. and determined to prevent any unrest at home.

It’s a far cry from U.S. President Donald Trump’s initial hopes of toppling the Islamic Republic and his subsequent claims that “regime change” had brought more compromising officials to the fore.

Iran’s new leaders evince little faith in any agreement with Trump — after coming under attack twice while holding talks — and they may be bracing for another assault once the U.S. replenishes its supplies of interceptors. They have also threatened to escalate the war as a continuing American blockade and Trump’s plans for new sanctions threaten to suffocate Iran’s already worsening economy.

“If (Trump) wants to do something, we will retaliate in a seismic manner,” the new secretary of Iran’s Supreme National Security Council, Mohsen Rezaei, said last weekend. In a post on X, he said that “if the economic war continues, not a single drop of oil will be exported” from the Persian Gulf.

Iran is determined to smother any internal unrest

Rezaei’s appointment came in a recent set of decrees by the supreme leader, Ayatollah Mojtaba Khamenei, that formally set Iran’s new senior leadership, including top military posts. Khamenei’s father and much of the highest echelons were killed in the bombing campaign launched by the U.S. and Israel on Feb. 28.

Perhaps most telling was the newly named head of the Basij, the Revolutionary Guard’s volunteer street force, which played a major role in crushing January’s nationwide protests, when thousands were killed. That post went to Hossein Taeb, a hard-line cleric and longtime intelligence chief who led one of the first major crackdowns on protests, in 2009.

His appointment is seen as a sign that the leadership is intent on preventing any new unrest as discontent over the economy spreads.

The 56-year-old Khamenei has not been seen in public, or even appeared in video or audio, since Israeli strikes killed his father, Ayatollah Ali Khamenei, who had been Iran’s supreme leader for some 37 years. The younger Khamenei is believed to have been wounded in the strikes. His public absence could reflect the depth of security surrounding him, since he is likely in Israel’s sights, or the extent of his wounds.

The supreme leader surrounds himself with hard-line allies

With the appointments announced Aug. 11 and 12, he has surrounded himself with longtime personal allies, like Rezaei and Taeb.

They are “a clique of older senior officers who’ve served together over the last decades,” said Sascha Bruchmann, an analyst with the International Institute for Strategic Studies’ Middle East office in Bahrain.

Rezaei, 71, led the paramilitary Revolutionary Guard during its formative years, through the entire 1980-1988 war with Iraq and until 1997. He has run for president as a hard-line candidate multiple times since 2009.

Brig. Gen. Ahmad Vahidi, 68, was confirmed as head of the Guard, where he has been acting commander since his predecessor was killed along with the elder Khamenei. Also confirmed in their posts were the acting commander of the Guard’s naval forces, Gen. Ali Ozmaei, and the military chief of staff, Gen. Ali Abdollahi.

Bruchmann, who pointed out that Rezaei was Vahidi’s commander for many years, said the emphasis appears to be on ensuring unity. “It looks like internal cohesion, as in hard core people are being pulled into the inner circle,” he said.

Moderates urge restraint over economic concerns

Homayoun Falakshahi, the top oil analyst for the global commerce information firm Kpler, wrote that the appointments of Rezaei and Vahidi show “greater influence for officials associated with a tougher stance.”

Still, escalation is not inevitable, and Iran could find it difficult to “escalate enough to restore deterrence without triggering retaliation that leaves it worse off,” he said.

A ceasefire deal reached in June quickly fell apart amid exchanges of strikes. Iran has demanded the release of billions in frozen assets as called for under the deal — as well as formal authority over the Strait of Hormuz.

President Masoud Pezeshkian is one of the most prominent voices still calling for a negotiated solution. His allies argue Iran risks overplaying its hand by continuing the war as its economy suffers.

“It would be better to bring the war to an end, since today we enjoy power and dignity and the entire world approved our victory, and the U.S. is hated,” Pezeshkian said last week. He has also defended the June ceasefire deal against hard-liners’ accusations that it conceded too much.

In contrast to ultra-hard-liners who reject any talks, Rezaei has held out the possibility of a deal — if the U.S. backs down. On Monday, he told Pakistani mediator Gen. Asim Munir that the U.S. should “change its attitude and take practical action about implementing the conditions” of the ceasefire deal.

Tehran-based political analyst Ahmad Zeidabadi said there are “serious differences over the future path of the country.”

Hard-liners oppose normalization with the U.S. because “their survival depends on the existence of conflict and hostility,” he wrote in the newspaper Hammihan, which backs Pezeshkian.

Amid worries over unrest, a strong figure leads the Basij

So far there has been no sign of new protests even as Iranians find it harder to afford basic staples.

Taeb’s appointment as head of the Basij is a sign the leadership wants to preempt any potential unrest “before it even manifests,” Bruchmann said. “Putting someone from an intelligence background in charge of the people that would do the crackdown makes sense,” he said.

Taeb, a 63-year-old cleric, led the Basij when it played a key role in crushing mass protests that erupted against the 2009 reelection of hard-line President Mahmoud Ahmadinejad. Dozens were killed.

Soon after, Taeb was named chief of the Guard’s intelligence apparatus. He led the agency for nearly 13 years until he was removed in 2022, reportedly in a shake-up after Israeli espionage successes.

The Basij run a nationwide network of volunteers who maintain a presence in the streets, government offices and cultural centers, seeking to ensure loyalty and ideological purity for Iran’s theocracy.

In the decree appointing Taeb, Khamenei ordered him to deepen the Basij presence in Iranian social life, use new technologies and “promote the Basij across the world against Zionist-American arrogance” — suggesting the group may begin to form links with Iran’s proxies abroad.

The Basij boosted its presence during the war, and hard-liners have held nightly rallies in Tehran and other cities, drumming up support and intimidating any possible dissenters. It’s unclear specifically how Taeb will step up the force’s role, but in a recent speech he seemed to point to increasing control over society.

He warned that U.S. pressure on the economy aimed to create divisions within Iran. “If the mosque becomes the center of the neighborhood, the nation will protect its unity, which will be a greater deterrent than any missile.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

The FBI is dropping a categorical hiring ban on applicants who have had sexual encounters with prostitutes and will instead consider in a more holistic manner at least some candidates who have engaged in the practice in the past, according to people familiar with the matter.

The move away from an automatic disqualification falls along a continuum of evolving recruitment standards within federal law enforcement and at the buttoned-up bureau, which several years ago relaxed its approach to candidates’ past marijuana use and has drawn more recent concern among some current and former agents about a perceived loosening of recruitment requirements as it seeks to replenish its ranks.

The bureau still intends to dismiss applicants who are revealed during the vetting process to have engaged in prostitution within the last 10 years, three or more times overall or while in a position of trust such as public safety, according to guidance issued this past spring and described by a person familiar with the matter who was not authorized to discuss internal decision-making and spoke on condition of anonymity. For others, it will allow for consideration of the context of the conduct rather than treat it as grounds for an automatic rejection from the FBI’s hiring process.

The practical impact is not immediately clear since many who have engaged in prostitution may still be either immediately disqualified or weeded out upon further scrutiny from FBI polygraphers and security officials.

The FBI said the change was meant to account for the fact that some otherwise suitable candidates, including service members, may have engaged in the practice in places where it is legal and to accommodate applicants who may done so as a young child or have themselves been victims of sexual abuse.

“It is false to suggest criminal behavior like this is no longer disqualifying at the FBI. Any applicant who has engaged in criminal sexual acts like those referenced would of course not be eligible for employment, and it is ridiculous to suggest otherwise,” the FBI said in a statement that described the background check process as “wide-ranging and extensive.”

“The FBI has and always will maintain some of the highest suitability standards for its applicants and employees in the US Government,” the statement added.

Justice Department is easing recruitment requirements in general

Even so, the shift is being made at a time when current and former officials worry that the FBI, and the Justice Department more generally, have eased recruitment requirements while facing a mass personnel exodus brought on by retirements, voluntary resignations and firings. The bureau, for instance, has taken steps to make it easier for its own professional staff to become agents and has offered a truncated training academy for applicants from other federal law enforcement agencies.

“If they’re moving the bar for sexual encounters to include prostitution, what is that saying about the applicant pool? They’re trying to bring in more people, which to me indicates that the applicant pool is extremely shallow right now,” said Daniel Brunner, a retired FBI agent who spent two decades in the bureau.

In 2015, then-Attorney General Eric Holder issued a memo reiterating that all Justice Department employees were prohibited from soliciting or accepting prostitution, including in places where it was legal. But both before and since that directive, the FBI and other federal law enforcement agencies have confronted periodic episodes in which agents serving abroad have been accused of sexual encounters with prostitutes.

As recently as last year, for instance, the Justice Department inspector general substantiated allegations that a supervisory special agent solicited and used prostitutes on multiple occasions while overseas and used a bureau-issued cellphone for the transactions.

Chris Piehota, a retired top FBI executive, said he would be more troubled if the bureau were to loosen its standards for current employees who require periodic renewals of their security clearances. But he said he could understand the FBI leaning “toward leniency” for actions taken as a teenager or college student.

“I don’t think you get a better or worse candidate from something you did in your college years,” Piehota said. “That’s why they have the screening process, that’s why they have the vetting process. And the people who do the recruiting and hiring, they look at all those things.”

Background checks, polygraph tests and more

Applicants to the FBI undergo a multistep application and vetting process that includes, among other things, a background check, a detailed questionnaire, credit checks, interviews with neighbors and colleagues and a polygraph test. The comprehensive regimen is meant to uncover any prior criminal conduct in an applicant’s past as well as embarrassing personal information that could make an employee vulnerable to blackmail.

Felony convictions, domestic violence convictions, failure of a urinalysis and the bureau’s drug policies are among factors treated as automatic disqualifiers.

Though the new guidance will allow for a broader and more contextual evaluation of applicants who disclose past experience with prostitution during their polygraph admission, such an admission has historically been typically regarded as a “death knell” for potential employees at agencies including the FBI, CIA and NSA, said Daniel Meyer, a Washington lawyer with the Tully Rinckey law firm who specializes in the background check and the security clearance process.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

As more employees return to the office, some CEOs are finding they need to reteach basic meeting etiquette—including one surprisingly divisive topic: checking your devices. JPMorgan Chase CEO Jamie Dimon has been especially blunt about it.

At Fortune’s Most Powerful Women summit in fall 2025, he said he expects full attention from everyone in the room. 

“If you have an iPad in front of me and it looks like you’re reading your email or getting notifications, I tell you to close the damn thing,” he told Fortune Editor-in-Chief Alyson Shontell. “It’s disrespectful.”

IBM CEO Arvind Krishna, however, sees it a bit differently. He argued it would be “weird” for a tech company to tell its employees not to use their technology—especially in larger meetings where devices can be a useful tool rather than a distraction.

“I distinguish between one-to-10-person meetings and very large meetings. If it’s a very large meeting, I’m sorry. It’s not really a meeting. It’s a communication vehicle. You’re just informing people,” Krishna told CNN in October 2025.

At the same time, the 64-year-old said that smaller, more intimate meetings should be treated attentively.

“If it’s a small meeting, I would really frown upon if somebody is sitting opposite my desk and lost in their phone,” he said. “I would tell them: ‘Why don’t you come back when you have time?’”

Dimon’s long-standing frustration with meetings

Behavior in the conference room is something Dimon has long lamented. In fact, in his annual letter to shareholders released in spring 2025, he mentioned the word “meetings” six times—urging employees to only schedule them when necessary and to make them count.

“I see people in meetings all the time who are getting notifications and personal texts or who are reading emails,” Dimon wrote. “This has to stop. It’s disrespectful. It wastes time.”

While Dimon hasn’t drawn clear lines around meeting size like Krishna has, his frustration appears to extend well beyond small gatherings. 

During a conversation at Stanford University in March 2025, Dimon recalled joining a Zoom meeting where attention was clearly divided.

“There were 12 people in the room and four people on the screen and all four people on the screen were on their phone,” he recalled. “And people say, and you think you’re focusing and learning?”

Dimon’s disdain for distracted meetings comes as he’s led one of the most aggressive return-to-office mandates on Wall Street. Most JPMorgan employees are now required to work in the office five days a week—at least in part, to see a return on the company’s real-estate investments.

In late 2025, JPMorgan officially opened its new $3 billion global headquarters in Manhattan, a 60-story skyscraper equipped with 19 restaurants, a company store, and gym.

Putting the devices down might catch your boss’s attention

With a growing reliance on technology in the workplace, multitasking during a meeting has become easier than ever—especially when an AI assistant can generate a post-meeting summary and allow you to zone out.

However, multitasking in person is especially disrespectful and a bad habit, according to Gary Rich, founder of executive coaching firm Rich Leadership.

“Are manners ‘old fashioned?’ Is listening to what’s happening in a meeting ‘old school?’” Rich previously told Fortune. “When people are multitasking during a meeting, the distraction creates a ripple effect—the speaker feels disrespected, other attendees lose motivation, and the meeting becomes less productive.”

Taking the high-road—and practicing good meeting etiquette—can ultimately be an effective way to earn recognition, show genuine commitment, and build credibility.

A version of this story originally published on Fortune.com on November 4, 2025.

More on productivity

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

In September 2025, Salesforce CEO Marc Benioff said the company slashed 4,000 customer service roles:“I need less heads,” Benioff said at the time.

But as more companies adopt agentic AI in hopes of replacing or making human workers more efficient, one top economist has noted customer service roles—particularly those overseas—are only growing.

Citing data from the IT & Business Process Association of the Philippines, Apollo chief economist Torsten Slok noted in a recent blog post that from 2016 through 2025, call center employment in the Philippines has risen each year, nearly doubling to 2 million over the 10-year span.

He also found from 2021 to July 2026, unemployment rates in the Philippines have decreased from 9% to about 5%, and in India decreased from around 7% to 6%, suggesting AI has not displaced offshore workers.

“If AI were displacing white-collar work at scale, you would expect to see it first in the Philippines and India, where business process outsourcing (call centers, IT support, back-office processing) accounts for a large share of employment,” Slok wrote last week. “Instead, the unemployment rate in both countries has continued to trend lower.”

The Philippines dethroned India as the largest call center employer about 15 years ago.

Offshore call center jobs began booming in the late 1990s and early 2000s as a cost-cutting measure. The labor is considerably cheaper overseas than in the U.S., with Filipino call center workers earning wages of 15,000 to over 120,000 Philippine pesos per month, or about $243 to $1,948. In the U.S., the average monthly wage for call center workers is about $2,866, according to Indeed.

But these jobs are also among the most susceptible to AI displacement. The Brookings Institution estimated 86% of customer service representative tasks had high automation potential. 

The apparent contradiction of the job’s potential to be automated alongside rising employment points to a centuries-old economic paradox reflected across labor more broadly, according to Slok.

“This is Jevons paradox in action,” he wrote. “As AI makes call center work cheaper and faster, companies are buying more of it, not less.”

Jevons paradox in the 21st century

Jevons paradox refers to an observation made by English economist William Stanley Jevons in 1865: The invention of the Watt steam engine made coal a more efficient energy source. But instead of coal consumption decreasing because of increased efficiency, consumption skyrocketed as energy became cheaper.

In the age of AI, Jevons paradox has been resurrected and applied to how the technology may be impacting the labor market: While tech leaders like Anthropic CEO Dario Amodei initially predicted AI will replace white-collar workers, Slok instead posits the cost of professional work will fall as AI boosts task efficiency, increasing demand for certain roles and ultimately expanding available jobs. 

“Lower cost per interaction does not mean fewer interactions,” he said. “It means more customers served, more channels opened and more markets worth reaching. The technology that was supposed to shrink the industry is fueling its expansion.”

This is already being seen in some professions previously predicted to be replaced by AI. A decade ago, “godfather of AI” Geoffrey Hinton declared radiology would one day no longer need to be performed by humans because of its potential to be automated.

Instead, Christoph Herpfer, an economist and business administration professor at the University of Virginia’s Darden School of Business, said the number of radiologists in the U.S. has actually increased by 10% over the past decade.

“We actually have a huge shortage of radiologists. So the exact opposite of this prediction has happened,” he told Fortune.

The future of call centers and automation

Labor economists are already seeing evidence of AI increasing the productivity of call center workers, which could bolster the role’s demand. A 2023 study led by Erik Brynjolfsson, director of the Stanford Digital Economy Lab, found that for more than 5,000 customer support agents, an AI-based conversational assistant tool increased productivity by an average of 14% per hour.

His research from a decade ago similarly found that an early AI feature able to translate listings on eBay increased international exports by 17.5%. Emma Harrington, an economics professor at the University of Virginia, believes this principle could be applied to today’s AI boom.

“What we’re now seeing in the data might be a modern version of the same phenomenon,” she told Fortune. “We can trade labor more easily across countries when language can be traded more seamlessly.”

While some economists expect AI’s strengths to bolster productivity and subsequent employment, others argue the technology’s weaknesses will sustain the call center industry.

Benjamin Shestakofsky, a sociologist and information science professor at Cornell University, told Fortune AI may not yet be sufficiently trained to navigate the complexities of certain problems. Moreover, humans experience something akin to “AI brain fry” if inundated with an increased case load; AI may be able to increase how many customers agents can serve, but humans still have limitations in how much they are able to process.

In other cases, some companies may explicitly seek out human customer service agents simply because of their brand, according to Shestakofsky. As the world becomes more automated, it’s sometimes a relief to talk to a human on the other line.

“Even if the LLMs get so good that eventually they can deal with those complex issues—which I don’t think they can do now—I would still expect that you would see some companies seeing the value and offering more human interactions that help customers feel seen, feel like they’re more than just a number on a spreadsheet,” he said.

A version of this story was published on Fortune.com on May 17, 2026.

More on AI and labor:

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Despite building an increasingly screen-focused world, tech billionaires and executives are keeping their own children away from the tech they helped create.

As far back as 2010, Apple cofounder Steve Jobs told a New York Times reporter his kids had never used an iPad and that “we limit how much technology our kids use at home.” 

Since then, excessive device use among children has grown more common, especially as busy parents turn to screens to find some temporary peace. The trend has accelerated so much that some young children accustomed to extensive screen time have been dubbed “iPad kids.” On average, children in the U.S. ages 8 to 18 spend 7.5 hours per day watching or using screens, according to the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry.

At the same time, Silicon Valley billionaires and executives have increasingly sought to limit how their own families use technology and for how long, partly in response to the rise of time sucking social media and short-form video.

YouTube CEO Neal Mohan is among those taking a cautious approach. Mohan, who has three children, said he and his wife try to limit the time his children spend on platforms like YouTube.

“We do limit their time on YouTube and other platforms and other forms of media. On weekdays we tend to be more strict, on weekends we tend to be less so. We’re not perfect by any stretch,” he said in a December interview with Time.

YouTube cofounder Steve Chen also said at a talk at the Stanford Graduate School of Business last year he wouldn’t want his kids consuming only short-form content, noting it might be better to limit kids to videos longer than 15 minutes.

“Shorter-form content equates to shorter attention spans,” he said.

Different approaches

When it comes to how parents control their children’s screen time, some of the most important people in Silicon Valley have surprisingly different approaches.

Instagram CEO Adam Mosseri, who has three children, said in an interview last year he controls his kids’ weekend screen and video game time by starting at a baseline of zero minutes.

His kids can earn earn up to 90-minutes of screen time or video game time on the weekend by during by completing three 30-minute homework sessions during the week, he said. Still, he said he avoids taking away screen time that his kids have earned, because he said that caused them to act out more.

There is one exception to the rule, he said: “When really all barriers go out the window is on planes.”

Much like Mosseri, early Facebook investor and billionaire Peter Thiel previously said he lets his two young children use screens for only an hour and a half per week, a revelation that prompted audible gasps from the audience at the 2024 Aspen Ideas Festival.

Other tech leaders are a little more adaptable. That includes Snap CEO Evan Spiegel, who said he and his wife, Miranda Kerr, adapt their approach to screen time based on the child because their four boys, ages two, six, seven, and 15, vary so much in age.

Spiegel said the two-year-old gets almost zero screen time, unless he is getting a haircut, when his parents allow him to watch videos of Bobcat tractors, because “he really struggles with getting his haircut,” he told Lenny’s Podcast in June. Spiegel said the four and six-year-olds also don’t use screens often, and “we don’t give them phones or anything like that,” he added.

They do watch movies occasionally and play video games on ModRetro’s Chromatic handheld video game device, which he got them last Christmas, he said.

Meanwhile, Spiegel’s oldest son, Flynn, is “all in on on technology, whether he’s using it for school or whether he’s using it to talk with his friends or using Snapchat,” he said.

Much like Facebook investor and billionaire PayPal cofounder Peter Thiel has put said he lets his two young children use screens for only an hour and a half per week, a revelation that prompted audible gasps from the audience. 

Other tech founders, including Microsoft’s Bill Gates and Tesla’s Elon Musk, have also spoken about limiting their children’s access to devices. Gates has said he did not give his children smartphones until age 14 and banned phones at the dinner table entirely. While Musk, who bought the social media company X, formerly Twitter, in 2022, said it “might’ve been a mistake” to not set any rules on social media for his children. 

Social media backlash is growing

Scientific research increasingly backs up tech leaders’ instinct to rein in screen time. A 2025 study of nearly 100,000 people found short-form video use was consistently associated with poorer cognition and a decline in many aspects of mental health across both younger and older social media users.

As young people increasingly spend most of their waking moments online, the backlash against social media, and especially minors’ use of social media, has reached a breaking point.

Australia, Indonesia, and Malaysia have all banned adolescents under 16 from using social media over the past year. Several other countries, including Spain, Denmark, and the United Kingdom, are considering similar legislation.

To be sure, its unclear how effective such legislation has been. A study by a team that advised the Australian government on the rollout of its social media ban found in a July study that some test accounts for fake 16 year-olds weren’t prompted to verify their age.

Plus, several social media CEOs have publicly pushed back on claims their platforms are harmful. Mosseri testified earlier this year in a trial against its parent company, Meta, social media overuse does not constitute “clinical addiction.” Meta this week reached a $17 billion settlement in the suit brought against it by 47 states and the District of Columbia and agreed to change its platforms to limit how long teenagers can use them for and to ban certain features. The company did not admit to wrongdoing.

Far from being a new phenomenon, the idea social media use is harmful for young people has been around for years. Still, it’s the tech leaders who created the attention economy who have been the most attentive to this fact. 

A version of this story originally appeared on Fortune.com on Feb. 21, 2026.

More on tech

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Country music superstar Dolly Parton had a very early start to her career when she began singing at her local church at age 6. By age 13, she had recorded her first single, “Puppy Love,” which she co-wrote at age 11 with her uncle—and had even appeared on the Grand Ole Opry stage by that time, too, introduced by none other than music legend Johnny Cash. 

After high school, Parton immediately moved to Nashville to continue building momentum in her music career. It was there she wrote both hit singles “Jolene” and “I Will Always Love You”—on the same day, no less—two songs that were later cemented as country classics. Her partnership with singer and television star Porter Wagoner in 1967 also helped her gain national recognition. 

But what also made Parton so prominent in the music industry was her business savvy. She always retained ownership of her songs, a rare move that helped balloon her wealth to an estimated $650 million. It was especially helpful that she chose to do that when Whitney Houston’s version of “I Will Always Love You” became a global hit in the 1990s. 

Notably, Parton, whose family announced her death earlier this week, even turned down Elvis Presley’s request in 1974 to record the song after his manager Colonel Tom Parker demanded half the publishing rights. 

“I said, ‘I’m sorry, but I can’t give you the publishing.’ I wanted to hear Elvis sing it, and it broke my heart—I cried all night,” Parton told W Magazine in 2021. “But I had to keep that copyright in my pocket. You have to take care of your business.”

Dolly Parton onstage with an acoustic guitar circa 1974.
Getty Images/Michael Ochs Archives

Parton had established her own publishing company in 1966, which helped her hold on to nearly all of her publishing rights. This meant she got paid a larger royalty whenever one of her songs was played or covered. And she wasn’t about to let even The King slide past those rules. 

“Everybody’s going to use you if they can,” she added. “These are my songs—they’re like my children. And I expect them to support me when I’m old.”

How Dolly Parton grew her wealth

Parton built a legendary career in entertainment from her music, acting roles, and her theme park, Dollywood, in Tennessee.

While a large portion of Parton’s wealth (an estimated $150 million) came from her music catalog, she also earned millions in royalties and co-owns Dollywood, which reportedly generates hundreds of millions in revenue each year from roughly 3 million visitors

Parton was also a dedicated philanthropist, having founded the Dollywood Foundation in 1988. Her foundation focuses on supporting children in her hometown of Sevierville, Tenn., through educational programs.

She also made multimillion-dollar donations to disaster relief, medical research, and scholarships. In 2022, she received the Carnegie Medal of Philanthropy, joining the ranks of other major philanthropists like Bill and Melinda Gates, Michael Bloomberg, Paul Allen, and the Rockefeller family.

A version of this story was originally published on Fortune.com on Oct. 8, 2025.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

What does it mean to be an American Girl during the nation’s semiquincentennial?

This year isn’t just the 250th anniversary of America’s independence — it is also the 40th anniversary of American Girl, a company founded to sell families an 18-inch, doll-sized narrative of American history. 

Over the past decade, the Mattel-owned brand closed dozens of stores and restructured. Observers alleged a midlife crisis: The company launched modernized historical dolls — Kirstin with space buns — alongside brand collaborations that feel very different from the nuanced characters it was founded on. 

Those original characters brought a rich past to America’s girls and challenged us to make a better future. The current focus seems more on nostalgia for the brand’s early years than on telling historical stories. 

The dolls and books, which depict 9- and 10-year-olds, became part of daily life for millions of American girls. They were friends whose lives were shockingly different from their owners’ and sometimes comfortingly the same. As American Girl founder Pleasant Rowland introduced girls to their historical counterparts — Samantha, Molly, Kirsten, Felicity, Addy, Josephina, Kaya and Kit — the characters became companions in understanding what it means to be American.  

Rowland’s girls live in an imperfect America. Addy’s family escapes slavery, only to discover a hierarchy of color in the North. Samantha Parkington navigates grief and the lack of child labor laws. Kirsten struggles to learn English and wrestles with white Americans’ treatment of native people.  

These girls make mistakes and learn lessons while living in unfair, unequal and unjust societies in need of change. 

Rowland wanted children to learn about and from the past, but adults today appear to accept only two narratives for telling our history: the U.S. as unquestionably wonderful or foundationally failed. 

In his 2025 executive order “Restoring Truth and Sanity to American History,” President Donald Trump argued that modern histories reconstruct an “unparalleled legacy of advancing liberty, individual rights, and human happiness … as inherently racist, sexist, oppressive, or otherwise irredeemably flawed.” The order does not see room for America’s history to be simultaneously about advancing rights and about realities of racism, sexism and oppression. 

American Girl has always offered a far more nuanced telling. Through the eyes of fictional Felicity — introduced in 1991 — girls learned the American Revolution was ideological and multidimensional: a brutal civil war, centered on colonist rights, that tore apart families and destroyed communities. 

In 1774, Felicity’s father tells his apprentice Ben that “War is the worst way to solve disagreements. 

“War is like a terrible illness. Everyone suffers. People die,” the paternal character explains. “Those who survive are weakened, and ‘tis a long while before they are full strength again.” 

Felicity and her father still support the new nation, but they do so knowing it’s an imperfect solution to their problems. American Girl emphasized the imperfectness of history and invited girls to make the nation better.

Rowland’s vision is impossibly optimistic. Addy flees slavery, learns to read and navigates northern racism all in one year. Upper-class Samantha befriends poor Nelly and changes her snobby grandmother’s opinion on Irish immigration. All of the company’s stories end happily.  

American women may have carried our love of American Girl into adulthood, but the stories remain written only for children. Mattel could tell more complicated stories to adults who love the brand. As one meme-maker joked, “We need an American Girl who survived the Triangle Shirtwaist Factory Fire.” 

If America’s women embraced the world the brand built, could we have an American Girl who lived in a Japanese internment camp? What about one whose family came to the country fleeing violence? 

In one way, Mattel has told such a complicated historical narrative. The 2026 Girl of the Year, Raquel Reyes, is a Mexican American resident of Kansas City, Missouri, and the great-great granddaughter of Samantha Parkington, the original American Girl. Raquel’s family blends Mexican and Mid-Atlantic heritages with little challenge. There is no attempt to discuss that Samantha’s Grandmary would not approve of this modern world and family. The character delivers nostalgia, not a historical argument.

Adult consumers are stabilizing the brand, which has profited over the past five quarters after years of losses. But American Girl is offering, and women are buying, nostalgia — like Molly-plaid tumblers — more than layered histories. In an era of polarization and oversimplified historical narratives, American women need not nostalgia but a new fleet of American Girls who can tell difficult, dangerous, heartbreaking and tenacious stories of lives past. 

Americans can handle complex histories. American girls were raised on them.  

Tara Strauch is the Paul L. Cantrell Associate Professor of History at Centre College, where she teaches early American history from the colonial period to the Civil War. Her courses include American holidays and American Girl.

The opinions expressed in Fortune.com commentary pieces are solely the views of their authors and do not necessarily reflect the opinions and beliefs of Fortune.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Dae’Quan Wright, the former Cleveland Browns tight end, may soon make history. The former NFL player’s stint in pro football is coming to an end after being waived, but that may not be the last time he dons a football uniform, as he’s likely to return to college sports at LSU this year. 

Wright, a former Ole Miss tight end who went undrafted in the 2026 NFL Draft, signed with the Philadelphia Eagles before joining the Cleveland Browns. After receiving a temporary restraining order in a lawsuit challenging the NCAA’s eligibility rules, he entered the transfer portal and reached an agreement to return to college and reunite with his former coach Lane Kiffin. The 22-year old’s aspiration to return to America’s favorite amateur sport signals just how big college football has become.

The move would have been difficult to imagine under the traditional conception of college sports. Professional athletes have joked about it in the past, with even all-time NBA great LeBron James teasing at a potential college sports journey post-retirement—albeit as more of a joke than an actual plan. But the legal and financial changes that have transformed college athletics in recent years have made the distinction between “amateur” and “professional” increasingly difficult to maintain.

The NCAA is now fighting to preserve that distinction even as college athletes receive unprecedented compensation—and Wright’s case has become a spark in exposing the difference.

Since Wright’s arrangement with LSU became public, the fight over his eligibility has escalated quickly. The SEC, Big Ten, and other major conferences adopted rules this week banning athletes who signed professional contracts from returning to college rosters, a policy aimed squarely at players like Wright. A Dallas judge has since blocked the SEC from enforcing that ban against a group of athletes that includes Wright, though the NCAA has won reversals of similar restraining orders in other cases in the same week. The legal fight remains unresolved.

“Courts across the country granting relief to ineligible athletes who already had every opportunity to compete in college—sometimes without even having a hearing—are failing to appreciate the destabilizing effect their rulings are having on college sports,” the NCAA told Fortune in a statement.

Is college football really an “amateur” sport?

The association said Congress could address the issue by passing the bipartisan Protect College Sports Act, which it said would provide student-athletes with “a level playing field with rules that apply fairly to everyone.”

The legislation has advanced in Congress. The Senate Commerce Committee approved the Protect College Sports Act in June with bipartisan support, and the bill would establish a federal framework for NIL agreements while addressing eligibility, transfers and other parts of the college sports ecosystem.

“The lawyers bringing these cases seemingly won’t be satisfied until every professional athlete can treat college sports as a fallback option,” the NCAA said.

But Wright’s case is also illustrating why the NCAA’s argument about amateurism is becoming harder to square with the economics of the modern college engine.

Professor Victoria Jackson, a sports historian and co-director of the Great Game Lab at Arizona State University, said the NCAA’s description of college sports as a “fallback” misses the larger point of the industry. 

“I think that’s among the most important questions,” Jackson told Fortune of whether athletes have adequate protections as they navigate the commercialized college sports system. “Taking a step back and thinking about the kind of unique position of college sports is useful.”

Jackson said college sports are now part of a global economy in which elite athletes routinely move between developmental and professional systems. In that context, she said, college sports are not necessarily a lesser alternative to professional competition.

“These are not fallbacks—it’s that they are good places, full stop,” she said. “The competitiveness of college sports is at the top of the world. But now also the compensation opportunities are among the most competitive in the world.”

For some athletes, Jackson explained, playing in the NCAA could potentially be more lucrative than playing professionally in another country or league. Wright, for example, had signed a three-year, $3,125,000 contract with the Eagles before being acquired by the Browns—giving the undrafted Gen Z Wright an average salary of $1,041,667. But the House v. NCAA settlement from 2025 now allows schools to participate in revenue-sharing—allowing colleges to directly pay athletes a share of up to 22% of the “average shared revenue” generated by power conference revenue. Louisiana State University—the college football program Wright is expected to join—is one of the schools enrolled in revenue-sharing, and the expected cap for the 2026-27 season is $21.3 million.

LSU declined a request to comment from Fortune regarding Wright’s return.

“Depending on what kind of package you can get for yourself,” Jackson said, “it might be more lucrative for someone to play in the college space as long as they can, or even try to return to it, than it would be to play professionally.”

In other words, college athletes are no longer just receiving scholarships while forbidden from monetizing their athletic fame. For the largest programs, athletes can now receive a package that combines scholarships, NIL opportunities and direct revenue-sharing payments. But Jackson argues the compensation itself is not a new development.

“The scholarship is just part of the compensation package now because there is direct pay to some of these athletes,” she said.

A scholastic distinction

If college sports remain fundamentally educational programs, there is a case for treating them differently from professional leagues as the NCAA stipulates. But if athletes are receiving direct revenue-sharing payments, negotiating NIL contracts and competing for increasingly valuable roster spots in a multi-billion dollar sports industry, the concept of “amateurism” becomes harder to use as the dividing line. Jackson says the better distinction may be between “scholastic” and professional sports rather than “amateur.”

“It’s a conflation of scholastic and amateur,” she said. “The fact it’s taking place within a school setting—is that enough to say that it’s different from professional sports? I’m not so sure at this point.”

Jackson also noted that in many countries, elite athletes develop through professional club systems rather than college programs. Young athletes can compete alongside professionals while receiving protections designed for minors. In soccer, for example, professional clubs operate academies that develop players before and during their professional careers.

“There is no such thing as amateurism,” the professor said of the international sports system. “You play sports and you earn money because you need to pay for the training and travel and competition to stay in that sport.”

American college sports, by contrast, have historically served as the major development system for professional football. The NFL has benefitted from colleges effectively bearing much of the cost of developing players, while college programs have used the NFL as the ultimate destination for their best athletes, according to Jackson.

There are already examples in other sports of athletes moving between professional and college systems without producing the same alarm. Jackson pointed to baseball and hockey, where players can be drafted or develop through professional pathways while retaining or returning to college opportunities under certain circumstances. That flexibility, she argued, could offer a blueprint for football, rather than forcing every sport into the same eligibility code. Football, however, remains the economic center of college sports. The sport generates enormous media and sponsorship revenues, drives conference realignment and finances many of the other sports that universities operate.

That makes it harder to separate football from the rest of college athletics. A possible solution, according to Jackson, would be to “spin off football and professionalize it,”—while maintaining university branding and still using the revenue generated by football to subsidize the other sports.

Dae’Quan Wright and his agents did not immediately respond to a request for comment from Fortune.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

A job interview with Richard Branson, the billionaire founder of the Virgin brand, is likely to be nerve-racking enough on its own.

But when then-31-year-old lawyer Josh Bayliss arrived at Branson’s London mansion for what he expected to be a fairly standard interview, Branson realized he had another appointment across town—and was already running late. Rather than cancel the interview, Branson invited Bayliss to come along for the ride.

“It was probably on a good day, a 45-minute drive,” Bayliss recently recalled to Fortune. In reality, it turned into a two-and-a-half hour adventure that he took full advantage of.

“We got stuck in traffic, and that was great for me,” Bayliss said. “I got a chance to really interrogate Richard and find out a lot more about what made him tick.”

Bayliss ended up landing the job of general counsel in 2005—and that long traffic-filled interview marked the beginning of a relationship with Branson that would further shape his career. By 2011, Bayliss was promoted to CEO of Virgin Group—and just this year added company chair to his resume—overseeing a sprawling portfolio that includes an airline, telecommunications giant, gym chain, and commercial space-tourism business.

Nearly two decades after that first interview, Bayliss, now 53, said what drew him to Branson in the first place remains a defining part of the Virgin Group founder.

“There is an energy to Richard and an appetite to learn about what he doesn’t already know, to try what he hasn’t already tried, which I think really does blend very well with my own ceaseless curiosity,” Bayliss said.

Bayliss went from aspiring scientist to lawyer before setting his sights on the C-suite

Bayliss was born in Auckland, the capital of New Zealand, to a modest family, with his father playing guitar and a mother working as a hairdresser. Becoming a CEO was hardly something he had mapped out for himself growing up.

In primary school, he always wanted to become a scientist, inspired by the Incredible Hulk’s transformational superpowers. But after taking a few science courses, he realized his interests leaned more toward the humanities than STEM.

“I loved history. I did classics. I loved languages. I loved philosophy,” Bayliss said. 

He went on to study history and Spanish literature as an undergraduate at the University of Auckland, graduating in 1996 before turning to law. His first job out of law school was as a judge’s clerk at the Court of Appeal of New Zealand, giving him a front-row seat to consequential decisions—and to people who could disagree fiercely without letting those disagreements become personal.

“I was exposed to some of the greatest minds I’ve ever been among, disagreeing profoundly over matters of huge importance for huge numbers of people, but never falling out over that disagreement,” Bayliss said.

That experience stayed with him as he moved to a law firm in Barcelona and then to London in 1999. But the further Bayliss progressed in his career, the less satisfied he became with advising the people making the big calls.

“I wanted to be making decisions. I wanted to take responsibility, and I wanted to be accountable for improving things for people in a commercial sense,” he said. He added that the opportunity to work at Virgin—and interview with Branson at age 31—gave him just that: the chance to combine his legal background with a growing role in leadership.

Gen Z interns ‘astonish’ Bayliss—and he says those who use AI can ‘move far more rapidly’ in their careers

More than two decades into his career at Virgin, Bayliss said the qualities that helped him advance are the same ones he looks for in the next generation of workers: curiosity, adaptability, and a willingness to challenge conventional thinking.

Gen Z interns, in particular, astonish him year after year, in part because of their willingness to stand by their values.

“I’m just so impressed with the caliber of the moral fiber of these young people,” Bayliss said. “I think they bring something to the table which is unbendable, and I think that’s so important.”

That conviction could prove especially valuable as AI continues to reshape the workplace. Bayliss views the technology as an “enablement tool rather than a replacement tool,” and believes young workers who pair it with strong human qualities can move faster early in their careers.

Bayliss added: “Those young people coming into the world of work are actually able to move far more rapidly through the early stages of their career.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Florida gets a lot of attention for its sinkholes, especially when they swallow cars and entire houses. But its sinkhole risk has nothing on Alaska’s.

Much of Alaska’s soil is permafrost – ground that remains below 32 degrees Fahrenheit (0 degrees Celsius) for at least two consecutive years. It is often rich with ice, but when that ice melts, the ground can collapse. As temperatures rise, that’s happening more often across the Arctic.

The consequences are the same as in Florida: substantial property damage as the land that buildings, roads and pipes were built on sinks.

An A-frame home tipped on its side where the ground collapsed.

Thawing permafrost caused the land to sink and this relatively modern hut in Spitsbergen, Norway, to tip over. Martin Zwick/REDA/Universal Images Group via Getty Images

Yet despite the high potential for damage, up-to-date maps of permafrost thaw that could help Arctic residents and community leaders prepare are often rare. To fill in the gap, our team, led by hydrologists and data scientists, created an interactive website to track permafrost thaw in near-real time across the Arctic, using a unique quality of the Arctic’s version of the sinkhole.

Clear signs of permafrost thaw

There is no way to directly measure permafrost without digging into it, but there are signs to watch for.

When ice-rich permafrost thaws, the ground surface subsides, creating what are known as thermokarst ponds – depressions that fill with water. Much of the Arctic has become dotted by ponds and lakes that formed this way, as temperatures there rise at two to three times the global average rate.

A landscape of ponds rimmed with vegetation.

Thermokarst ponds like these dot the landscape on the Seward Peninsula in western Alaska. USGS and USFS

Looking at satellite imagery, it’s easy to spot these lakes. Watching how they change over time can then provide clues to how the permafrost is changing below.

When big lakes disappear overnight

Sometimes, the same process that started the sinkhole can form new stream channels that drain the lake, leaving a circular basin of bare ground behind. A lake that is several hundred meters long might have taken a millennium to form, yet permafrost thaw triggered by one unusually warm summer can completely drain the same lake in just a few hours.

When a lake abruptly disappears, that’s a strong indicator that the ice-rich permafrost has thawed. Disappearing lakes also provide a way to monitor permafrost over wide areas and track where thawing is most active.

Two scientists take notes sitting next to a gash in the ground.

This trough pond, created by permafrost thaw, is starting to fill in with aquatic vegetation and moss in the Arctic National Wildlife Refuge in northeastern Alaska. Anna Liljedahl

Aerial photos starting from the late 1940s and satellite imagery that became available in the 1970s have helped scientists map what the Arctic’s permafrost landscapes looked like in the past, including where its permafrost lakes were and were not.

Using artificial intelligence, scientists can then quickly analyze new images from across large swaths of the Arctic for signs of permafrost changes, such as the appearance of new ponds or the disappearance of old ones.

A landscape with logs of lakes and a river.

A thermokarst permafrost landscape in the Kobuk Delta in northwestern Alaska has many lakes. Ingmar Nitze

An international team of scientists we work with through the Permafrost Discovery Gateway has mapped and now actively monitors over 4 million lakes across the Arctic, including 70 million thermokarst ponds – also known as trough ponds – across the Alaska tundra.

Detecting signs of permafrost thaw in those landscapes can help communities plan for changes to their environment. The new maps can show where land is underlain by ice-rich permafrost, meaning bad choices for building sites, and where the frozen soil has less ice, likely indicating it’s safer for building sites.

Permafrost changes underway in 2026

The Seward and Baldwin peninsulas in northwestern Alaska are hot spots for lakes suddenly draining.

Over the past two decades, this region lost many large lakes that had covered its landscape for thousands of years. In the summer of 2018 alone, almost 200 of the region’s approximately 4,600 lakes lost more than a quarter of their area following an unusually warm winter.

Images of a lake before and after, a map showing several sites where lakes disappeared, and a chart showing how fast the lake level went down.

This thermokarst pond drained abruptly in June 2026, leaving only a little water at one end. The yellow and red circles on the map show where lakes recently disappeared. Permafrost Discovery Gateway

Although winter 2025-26 was on the cold side for Alaska, this region continued to lose lake area – suggesting evidence of permafrost thaw. We found around 30 more lakes that were affected by drainage in June and July 2026.

This process happens with hundreds of lakes across the Arctic every summer, especially in June and July. However, not all lake changes are caused by permafrost thaw.

For example, it is not uncommon that lakes in floodplains and wetlands change dramatically across each season due to the abundance of snowmelt water in spring. Wildlife can also play a role. Beavers, for example, can recreate a lake after it abruptly drained by blocking the newly formed drainage channels.

Living with permafrost thaw

In the past, information about where permafrost was changing was primarily available through scientific studies published years later.

With near-real-time data available today, researchers can more closely study the processes of permafrost thaw, and communities can get up-to-date insights about the status of the permafrost before they plan new construction, and know where they’re likely to have trouble.

Anna Liljedahl, Affiliated Professor in Arctic Hydrology, University of Alaska Fairbanks and Ingmar Nitze, Postdoctoral Research in Polar Geoscience, Alfred Wegener Institute Helmholtz Centre for Polar and Marine Research

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

The Conversation

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Tech hires fast and churns faster. After 30-plus years in tech PR, I made a change, recently becoming a rookie high school teacher at age 55. It was the career upgrade I needed (I hope), and it’s giving me a front-row seat to the one skill this rising generation has that I’m still learning: radical self-trust.

It’s late July, and I’m sitting in a training session with and for high school teachers and instructional coaches and I am stress sweating like a champ. I have the least amount of classroom experience and yet I’m the only greybeard in the room. Nobody here knows or cares what I’ve built over the past thirty years. Nobody knows the campaigns, the clients, the career. My journey as I built a PR agency, tore it down, and built it again. To the teachers in this training, I’m a beginner, a new teacher. 

And I can’t help thinking about how, in tech, invisibility has a way of creeping up on you. You get older. Fewer people know your name. Sometimes it feels like you’re slowly aging out of the room. 

But then another thought hits me.

My bio got me in the door, but it won’t teach this class. I’m here to learn what comes next. As a beginner, a new guy, I don’t own the room like other, more experienced teachers do. This is the best kind of invisibility: defined by what’s ahead of me, not what’s behind.

Bad invisibility. Good invisibility. They can show up in the same room, on the same day, and feel almost nothing alike.

The assignment was simple enough: teach a ten-minute lesson to the rest of the room. Standing up there, I realized I wasn’t even sure I had ten minutes of material. I fumbled. I sweated. But I watched the teachers who went before and after me: how they held a room, how they recovered when something didn’t land, how generously they coached each other through it. I was a foreign body, though, dropped into a world that runs on techniques and craft I hadn’t yet learned. And somewhere in that discomfort, watching people who do this so well, the good invisibility stopped being a nice idea and started being real.

None of this was part of my plan two weeks ago. In mid July, I mentioned to an old friend that I’d thought about teaching someday. Three days later, after an intense interview process, I received an offer to teach Financial Literacy and Entrepreneurship at DSST: College View High School. I had already earned my CTE certification from the state of Colorado, but I thought it would be a year or two longer before I used it.  A few days after my interview, I was talking to my business partner about him taking over our agency, and now I was sitting in teacher training wondering if I’d completely lost my mind.

The decision to join DSST (founded as the Denver School of Science and Technology) Public Schools feels right. The mission is clear: through a STEM-focused curriculum, eliminate educational inequity while preparing every student for college and the 21st century. I’ve already seen the seriousness behind that mission in training, teachers coaching each other through a rough lesson, offering feedback without ego, trading what’s worked for them over years in the classroom. The network now serves more than 7,500 students through 16 schools across Denver and Aurora. Every graduating senior leaves with a plan: a trade, community college, military service, CU Boulder, Harvard, anything in between. This year, more than 900 seniors walked across the stage at the celebratory Senior Signing Day

I hope I can bring something real to the classroom: years of business experience, a network of people willing to talk to a room full of teenagers about what work actually looks like, and a real respect for the tested curriculum DSST’s teachers have already built and refined. But I’m afraid, too. Afraid of not being enough. Every veteran teacher I’ve talked to has told me the same thing: don’t quit in year one. Year one is a challenge for everyone. That fear and that hope live in the same place, and I don’t think one cancels the other out.

In technology, I was often hired in days and expected to prove my value in weeks. Clients could walk with 30 days’ notice. Teaching hired me just as fast, but then told me the opposite: it might take three years to become exceptional at this, and that’s fine. Expected, even. Business hires fast and judges faster (CMOs in tech average just 1.8 years in the role). Teaching is giving me patience along with an expectation of growth.

Spending time around Gen Z kids energizes me. In a world of relentlessly negative news and shifting opportunities, they often possess a quiet, solid confidence. This year’s Deloitte Global Gen Z and Millennial Survey backs that up: more than half of Gen Zs say the cost of living and housing affordability are actively reshaping their career choices, yet 53% still expect their own financial situation to improve within the next year. They may not trust the systems around them, but they trust themselves. I’m beginning to really appreciate that.

Not long after my training in July, a room full of teenagers walked into my classroom. They are writing their own stories, discovering their own superpowers. Their languages, experiences, and ways of learning are strengths to build on.  With or without me, these students are going to build the future. And I am here for it.

The opinions expressed in Fortune.com commentary pieces are solely the views of their authors and do not necessarily reflect the opinions and beliefs of Fortune.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Do artificial intelligence tools such as ChatGPT eliminate jobs, create new ones, or both? There’s a lot of speculation regarding this question, but little solid data in the U.S. to answer it.

I’m a sociologist who researches AI, among other topics. Seeking answers to that question and others, I commissioned an online survey by YouGov, a market research agency, to ask 1,250 U.S. workers between July 30 and Aug. 4, 2026, about their experiences with AI and their attitudes toward the technology.

The survey covered workers’ current use of AI, their perceptions of how it will affect their future job opportunities, and how they believe it has affected their job opportunities up until now. It is the basis of my study in progress, the results of which have not been peer reviewed.

The findings show that four years after ChatGPT’s debut in November 2022, AI has not yet resulted in substantial job losses or gains for these workers, contrary to what some AI pessimists and optimists might have predicted.

Only about 3% of workers said they had lost a job due to AI since 2023, while roughly 6% indicated they landed a job that didn’t exist before AI. Approximately 9% said they’ve earned a promotion or advancement related to AI.

For AI pessimists like me, it’s surprising that so few of the surveyed workers said they had lost jobs due to AI. And it might raise a few eyebrows to see how uncommon it was for workers to indicate any AI-related job changes since 2023.

Limited impact so far

YouGov surveyed a sample of employed U.S. adults intended to reflect the nation’s employed population in terms of age, gender, race, education and other characteristics.

My 25-question survey included the following three questions concerning AI’s role in job changes since 2023:

1) Since 2023, have you lost a job due to AI, such as AI’s automation of your previous job’s tasks?

2) Since 2023, have you landed a new job that did not previously exist before the adoption of artificial intelligence (AI), such as an AI data labeler or AI compliance specialist?

3) Since 2023, have you received a promotion or advancement that you believe was related to AI, such as your AI skills?

Approximately 95% of surveyed workers said “no” to the first question; 90% said no to the second; and 88% said no to the last. Between 3% and 4% were “not sure” they experienced any of these AI-related job changes. The numbers for each question may add up to more than 100% due to rounding.

A robot works on a laptop in a artistic rendering of customer service delivered via AI.

It can be hard to get a human to help when you need customer service. mphillips007/iStock via Getty Images Plus

What this means

These results square with what some other researchers in the U.S. and elsewhere have found: AI is not having widespread effects on the labor market today. At the same time, job changes in the U.S. are a rarity, so the small percentages of surveyed workers who report AI-related job changes must be viewed in this general context.

The most important way AI appears to be affecting job opportunities so far, according to workers in my survey, is by affording some of them chances for promotion and advancement. These workers’ AI skills may very well be helping them to move up the career ladder, but it is still too early to know whether any such advantage will last.

Agentic AI, a newer form of AI that can act autonomously and automate jobs to a greater extent, may render some current AI expertise and skills less valuable in the future.

Surveys like this one offer a snapshot of the reported experiences of a group of people at one point in time. It is difficult for workers to know for sure whether AI is to blame or credit for their job changes. Also, the survey began in July 2026 when the official unemployment rate was 4.1%, but the workforce was shrinking and AI was reportedly a leading reason for many layoffs.

Those who took the survey are like average U.S. workers in important ways, but that doesn’t necessarily mean their AI experiences and attitudes are typical. They chose to participate in YouGov’s online panel, which means their responses may differ from randomly selected workers. And none were jobless, whether due to AI or another reason.

That said, my study moves beyond many predictions made by economists and analyses produced by AI companies of this technology’s impact on the labor market by asking workers themselves how they are experiencing AI. And unlike some research and an AI unemployment tracker in California, my study doesn’t focus just on job loss; it also examines job gains and promotions.

There are remaining questions about how workers are experiencing AI. For example, who is getting promoted? Are workers using AI on the job in ways that may advance their careers? And how do workers think AI will affect their opportunities in the future? These are among the other questions that my survey data can speak to and that I’m currently working on to answer.

Jeffrey C. Dixon, Professor of Sociology, College of the Holy Cross

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

The Conversation

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

It is frequently said that the Federal Reserve steers by looking in  the rearview mirror, basing monetary policy decisions on where  the economy was in the past, rather than where it is today, or where it is headed. The reason is simple: the Fed relies heavily on measures that summarize the  preceding 12 months. Those measures can be slow to reflect a sharp change in the current inflation run rate. 

Consider the Consumer Price Index, which purports to measure “inflation” by tracking changes in consumer prices. The July  CPI came in at 3.4%, slightly below the June figure of 3.5% — and still far above the Fed’s 2% policy target. 

It would seem that inflation must still be a serious problem, and  some Fed officials are very concerned. At the latest meeting of the Federal Open Market Committee, the Presidents of three regional Fed  branches voted to increase interest rates immediately. “The longer that high inflation persists, the more challenging and costly it can be to bring it back down,” said Beth Hammack (Cleveland). “Pricing pressures are broadening rather than fading, and consumers are expressing despair over persistently higher prices.”

Neel Kashkari (Minneapolis) worried about a risk that “high inflation could become entrenched” and projected multiple rate hikes. Lorie Logan (Dallas) was also pessimistic.

But most Fed-watchers expect significant monetary  tightening soon. Chairman Warsh spoke of the need to continue the battle against high inflation and promised the Fed will deliver its 2% inflation target.

There’s a problem here, and it’s in the numbers. The 3.4% CPI reading is a Year-over-Year (YoY) comparison. It shows how much prices have gone up in the last 12 months. But the trend of  the last three months offers a different, more current signal. The 3-month average of the CPI since May,  annualized, is just 0.49%. 

courtesy of George Calhoun

The Producer Price Index (also reported this week) was up 4.7%. Alarming, since producer  prices can affect consumer prices, (though the pass-through  varies widely by industry). But on a  monthly basis, the PPI has been falling rapidly since April, and  was negative for June and July. The 3-month annualized rate is  1.6%. 

Inflation expectations have also moderated significantly  since May, down by both market measures (the 5-year  Breakeven Inflation forecast, inferred from the yield gap  between a 5-year nominal Treasury and a comparable 5-year  TIPS) and according to the Cleveland Fed’s 1-year inflation  expectation model. Both measures forecast inflation in the  2.3% range, well below the headline CPI. 

courtesy of George Calhoun

The price trend may be reversing direction more quickly than the  YoY version of the CPI can detect it. “Inflation” may have already reached the 2% target, on some short-run measures. Traders seem to think so. The S&P 500 hit a new all time record the day after the CPI release. “Tame inflation data” was cited. The market consensus flipped on the question of a  possible rate increase in September, from 80% “Yes” last month to about 67% “No” today. Even The Wall Street Journal hailed the return of “disinflation.” 

Is this just a statistical slight-of-hand? Not at all. The idea that an  annualized quarterly (AQ) measure of inflation may be superior to  a a YoY measure is a mainstream proposition among economists and policy-makers. Nobelist Paul Krugman has endorsed the idea. “In the past, it may have made sense to look at changes over the last year, but in an economy going through as much turmoil as we’ve seen recently, that’s just too long a lag…many economists are now focusing on either three- or six-month changes.”

So, too, Jason Furman, the Chair of Obama’s Council of Economic Advisors, tweeted “headline CPI, the 12-month change in the overall index gets the most public attention…but to  understand the inflation trend, it’s better to focus on a shorter window (3-6 months).” Former Fed Chair Jerome Powell and  Vice-Chair Lael Brainard often cited inflation figures based on shorter averaging periods. The Cleveland Fed publishes an “inflation nowcast” with an AQ version of the CPI currently at 1.05%. Many “academic-style” economists at respected think  tanks or working for the Fed itself have voiced support for shorter  averaging windows. As one Fed economist has written: “Inflation is typically measured over the past year, inherently a slow-moving  and backward-looking measure.”

The negative impact on monetary policy is twofold. A heavy reliance on backward-looking data obscures the  most important moments in the trend — moments when things  change. And the backwards focus exacerbates the lag in  responding to those changes, with potentially serious macroeconomic consequences. 

Consider the inflation spike of 2021-2023. A charitable interpretation would be that while the Fed was  slow to respond, the interest rate increases that began in  mid-2022 were effective in bringing down inflation. 

The underlying data is the same for the annualized 3-month version. But the picture is quite different. The inflation trend changed abruptly and significantly in mid-2022,  falling from 10.1% to 1.9% in a single quarter, a structural change. The three-month annualized series  shows a sharp change in the short-run pace of inflation. The standard CPI first understated, and then overstated that shorter-run measure of inflation. 

Monetary policy appears to have been slow to respond, late —  and therefore (perhaps) unsound. By the time the Fed got around  to raising rates, the inflationary surge was ending. The fire was  over by the time the firemen got the hydrant open. 

Of course, one might suggest that the monetary tightening in late  2022 and early 2023 prevented a resurgence of inflation. But that is not how it works. Milton Friedman famously said that monetary  policy was subject to a “long and variable lag” between cause and effect, action and outcome — loosely quantified to between 9 and 24 months. This policy lag has been widely endorsed by Fed  officials in recent years. In his press conference in November  2022, Chairman Powell referred to “lags” 17x to signal that the policy outcome was, in his mind, still in abeyance.  And how much in abeyance? The inflation episode started in  2020/2021. The rate hikes began in March 2022. The policy may have begun to impact the economy only in late 2023 or 2024 —  years after the inflationary crisis began, and after inflation had already materially declined. 

There is a present danger in the failure to learn this lesson. The Fed today is in a tightening mood. Yet the annualized 3-month CPI suggests that the short-run inflation pace  may be lower than the year-over-year headline indicates. Standing back from the CPI itself, is there really a case now for “restraining economic activity” (as President Hammack proposes)? The labor market has weakened. The July jobs  number was negative, and June and May were revised downward  by almost half. Labor participation is declining. Mortgage rates are  rising and home sales are down. Bond yields are at multi-decade  highs. Retail spending fell in July for the first time in nine months. Wars are raging. Geopolitical uncertainty is elevated. Tariffs are haywire, creating uncertainty for businesses and consumers. Economic uncertainty indices are at levels last seen in the pandemic. Is this the moment to hit the brakes, in response to an obviously flawed inflation measure? 

The latent hawkishness at the Fed may be once again out of step with the real economy. Kevin Warsh has launched a series of Task Forces to among other things reevaluate “how the Federal Reserve understands and responds to the drivers of inflation” and to “improve the quality and timeliness of real economic signals that inform the Federal Reserve’s policy judgments.” This laudable initiative may address the problems raised here, but it will take time. In the interim, the Fed should pay more attention to the short-term trends that reveal an important “inflation regime  change” may already be underway.

“Yesterday’s news has a way of getting mistaken for what is happening right now,” Warsh said in his keynote speech at the Jackson Hole Economic Symposium. “The challenge is to know the difference. In other words, we must interrogate reality to make sure we are not setting forward-looking policy based on stale or inaccurate data.”

The opinions expressed in Fortune.com commentary pieces are solely the views of their authors and do not necessarily reflect the opinions and beliefs of Fortune.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

This summer has been full of competition: from Spain winning the World Cup, to the NBA finals where the Knicks saw a historic comeback, to now, where an event in which drivers across the country are putting pedal to the metal and competing in the National Truck Driving Championships, colloquially known as the “Super Bowl of trucking.”

This year’s competition saw 429 drivers from 49 states who have logged a combined total of nearly 775 million safe driving miles throughout their careers, which is over 31,000 circles around the earth. Drivers from 55 companies, ranging from small mom-and-pop companies to Fortune 500 giants like Walmart, FedEx, XPO, and UPS, all vied in tests showcasing their driving, turning and parking skills as they [safely] raced for glory in Pittsburgh earlier this month.

“The entire motivation of this program is to make them better on the road and to continue to drive safe,” said Jacob Pierce, executive director of the American Trucking Associations’ Safety Management Council. “It creates a company culture where everybody buys into ‘every day is a safe day.’”

A truck drives past a rubber duck during the obstacle course.

American Trucking Associations.

Why safety, not speed, wins

In 2024, large trucks accounted for nearly one in ten (9%) of all vehicles involved in a fatal crash, according to a National Safety Council study. And with 11 billion tons of freight moved by truck in 2024, the stakes of getting safety right extend far beyond the competition floor. Maneuvering a vehicle that weighs thousands of pounds needs extra caution when it comes to maintaining safe roads. For example, a loaded tractor trailer requires 20% to 40% more distance than cars to stop, according to data analyzed by The Insurance Institute for Highway Safety. Large trucks were involved in 5,218 fatal crashes in 2024, up 30% over the past decade, according to National Safety Council data.

Eric Ramsdell—a Walmart tank trunk driver who took first place in his division—said the championship reflects a responsibility that follows drivers on the road. “Every day we have to understand we have people’s lives at stake, equipment, our safe mileage record,” he told Fortune. The skills course, he added, puts competitors under pressure much like real-world driving does but requires them to “focus and maneuver safely around and do the pre-trip in a safe manner.”

But for companies eager to participate in the “Super Bowl of trucking,” as the competition is known as in the industry, they have to prove their drivers have what it takes to take on the open road—and aren’t afraid to hit the brakes when needed.

To qualify, drivers must win a top placement at their state competition, sport a clean, preventable accident-free safety record for the previous year, and meet full-time driving requirements with their company. And being “accident-free” isn’t as easy as avoiding a major crash: even incidents like hitting a curb and slicing a tire can cut drivers from the competition.

Pierce told Fortune he’s seen drivers go to state “20-plus times and have yet to make it to nationals, but they keep coming back because they want their chance.”

When inches matter more than speed

A driver carefully navigates around four small rubber ducks.

American Trucking Associations.

Competitions usually involve a mixture of timing and speed, but at NTDC, it’s all about precision—and not hitting a giant yellow duck.

The three-day competition began with a written exam that tested drivers’ road knowledge and safety. Next, there was a pre-trip inspection in which drivers are to identify planted safety-risks that they could face in real life. Decoys ranged from something big like an unsecured load, to easy-to-overlook details like a crack in the passenger side frame, a wiper blade missing, or a loose lug nut. 

Competitors also faced an obstacle course in which  drivers made their way down paths lined with cones and bright yellow, plastic ducks. To show off their precision skills, drivers made turns as close to the 3.5-inch-tall ducks as possible.

Factor in the lack of safety-assistance-technology like backup cameras, and drivers are forced to rely on instincts and skill. “We have to cover all that up because that would make it too easy for them,” Pierce said. “We are purists when it comes to driving a truck.” 

Walmart's team for the National Truck Driving Championships pose for a group photo.

Walmart.

The last truckers standing 

When day three rolled in, companies like FedEx, Walmart, and UPS dominated the leaderboards. FedEx has 18 finalists across two company divisions; Walmart had nine finalists and UPS had five, while smaller freight and shipping company XPO sported three. After a grueling obstacle course where drivers navigated tight turns, tight parking reverses, and quick, controlled stops, winners were finally selected for each of the nine classes, divided by the size of the truck: from flatbeds to three, four, and five-axle vehicles. 

Another Walmart driver, Richard Prescott, took first place for the flatbed division. For Prescott, a first-time national winner who has spent the last 45 years in the trucking industry, simply reaching Pittsburgh was the result of years of close calls and incremental progress. “That process is extremely hard to get through,” Prescott told Fortune. “You have to do baby steps.” When Walmart was announced as the flatbed winner, he initially thought the trophy belonged to a teammate. “My boss… grabs me from behind, and I told him Mark won, and he says, ‘No, you did,’” Prescott said. “It’s still sinking in.”

Miguel Corral competed for UPS under the four-axle division, and took home the grand champion title. Corral told Fortune he’s a nine-time NTDC competitor, and though there are always “nerves” when he competes, the event “feels like a family reunion.” The competition may be high-pressure, but its core skills are familiar. He said he approaches the pre-trip inspection much as he does before a normal shift: “I inspect my equipment every day, making sure to be thorough and complete each time.” 

On the obstacle course, drivers are tested on accuracy, not speed, and Corral said that reflects the reality of the job. “Speed doesn’t prevent accidents, accuracy does,” he said. “You want to take your time and be safe.” 

Miguel Corral holds up a trophy after being named grand champion.

American Trucking Associations

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

As the U.S. paves the way for a nuclear renaissance to power the AI data center boom, the next frontier is building small nuclear reactors offshore to power coastal facilities and merchant ships.

Strangely, the momentum could begin in California, a state that banned building new nuclear plants 50 years ago. This summer, the Port of Long Beach signed an agreement with the Trump administration to develop next-generation small modular reactors (SMRs) that could power ports, data centers, and vessels with emission-free energy.

Offshore nuclear power sounds unusual, but naval submarines and aircraft carriers have run on small nuclear reactors for decades. In 2020, Russia put the world’s first floating nuclear power station on a barge into service, powering the remote Arctic town of Pevek—population 4,000—and its harbor.

Long Beach and Los Angeles are a different scale entirely. The two ports adjoin one another and together form the largest container port complex in the Western Hemisphere. The Port of Long Beach is now working with local startup Bluecore Energy to build SMRs on floating barges—though the project remains at least a few years from reality.

“I think it’s very viable. It’s just a question of when, not if,” said Max Hopkins, a nuclear power analyst at CITIC CLSA, speaking about the growth of offshore nuclear power broadly—not California specifically—across military, maritime shipping, and AI data center applications.

“To put something into place fast, with production means, and then you can just float it somewhere—it seems like offshore barges are going to be almost ideal,” Hopkins told Fortune. “I think it’s going to become pretty accepted, much more so than people realize.”

Still, Hopkins emphasized the technology is years from commercial deployment. Regulatory frameworks need to be built, and so do the supply chains and manufacturing systems.

The progress isn’t confined to Long Beach. Denmark-based Saltfoss Energy is developing similar nuclear reactor barges in Europe.

Nuclear’s maritime moment

The future of powering military warfare and maritime merchant shipping could be nuclear, Hopkins said. Maritime vessels account for about 3% of global greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions, which may not sound like much, but it’s roughly equivalent to the total GHG emissions of all of Africa.

The federal push is accelerating on multiple fronts. This week, the U.S. Department of Transportation’s Maritime Administration (MARAD) announced a partnership with London-based Core Power to develop the regulatory frameworks and technology for a future fleet of nuclear-powered merchant cargo vessels.

A day later, the U.S. and the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) launched the Atomic Technologies Licensed for Applications at Sea (ATLAS) initiative. The effort is designed to advance SMR and micro-reactor technologies for merchant shipping—“underpinned by the highest levels of nuclear safety, security, and non-proliferation,” the IAEA said.

The appeal is speed and endurance: nuclear-powered ships only need to refuel every two or three years instead of every voyage, cutting fossil fuel use, and enabling faster transit. “At the same time, innovations such as floating nuclear power plants provide versatile energy sources that could deliver reliable electricity to coastal or remote communities and industry,” the IAEA said in a statement.

A nuclear California?

Long Beach-based Bluecore was founded only in January. It raised $10 million in a pre-seed round and quickly became the first nuclear company to partner with MARAD on offshore reactors.

Founder and CEO Kofi Asante, 31, is a Ghanaian-American from Austin, Texas, who quickly became a Silicon Valley veteran before relocating to Southern California. He built his logistics and maritime-shipping expertise at Uber Freight, heavy-cargo drone company Elroy Air, and electric barge startup Arc—before starting Bluecore.

His goal: use the maritime industry to provide clean, consistent power for ports and AI data centers.

“The philosophy was really process of elimination: if you need that much energy, then you arrive at a nuclear reactor,” Asante told Fortune. “And if you need real estate, two-thirds of the world is water, so you can use barges for extra real estate.”

“We can go miles away and connect via subsea cable—so we don’t have to be near neighborhoods, and we don’t have to be co-located at the port,” he added.

All of this requires technology that’s already largely developed, Asante argued, including smaller versions of traditional light-water nuclear reactors. Each 10-megawatt reactor on a barge can power the equivalent of about 10,000 homes, can be moved via tugboats, and can be stacked alongside each other for extra power generation.

Asante recognizes he’s pursuing this technology in a state that banned the developed of new nuclear reactors in 1976, citing environmental and safety concerns, including still-unsolved issues with radioactive waste.

The Port of Long Beach knows this is a lengthy process. Port CEO Noel Hacegaba noted that state lawmakers are already debating legislation to study lifting the ban.

“Nuclear is having a moment at the Port of Long Beach, and we are engaged with the private sector, along with state and federal legislators on this issue,” Hacegaba said in an emailed statement to Fortune.

“This innovation is years away from becoming a reality due to the technological advancements and regulatory hurdles that still need to be cleared, and it cannot advance without state and federal approvals,” he added. “In the meantime, our new partners at Bluecore Energy are following state and federal laws as they provide the private-sector experience to research and develop SMR technology.”

Can it be safe—and affordable?

Two big questions loom over offshore nuclear: safety, and whether it can compete economically with natural gas and solar power.

Asante draws a manufacturing analogy—with some exaggeration—arguing that previous nuclear power plants were built bespoke, akin to constructing an entire factory to produce a single car.

“Small modular reactors like ours, you build multiple of them, so it starts to look like a factory,” he said. “Some of our team came from Rivian and Toyota, and we’re looking at it like a production facility.”

The analyst Hopkins backs up the point from a different angle: “A jet engine is actually much more complicated to build than a nuclear reactor from a materials science perspective.”

But what happens in the event of a tsunami or a major weather event? Hopkins said modern safety design wraps uranium fuel pellets in multiple layers of heavy-duty ceramics and graphite casing, and they’re rendered inert when separated.

Asante offers his own case: “Our floating nuclear power plants are mobile. In the event of severe weather, they can quickly be repositioned. They are also shielded so that they can withstand extreme weather and be underwater. And we have multiple control mechanisms that will automatically turn the reactor off if needed.”

Being on the water is an advantage, he argued. “Water is the cooling mechanism and safest place for our systems, and we have an unlimited amount of access.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

President Donald Trump on Friday said the U.S. has entered an agreement with Venezuela to take control of 65 billion barrels of the South American country’s oil reserves.

Trump in a social media post announced the agreement he said was negotiated by Secretary of State Marco Rubio, Defense Secretary Pete Hegseth and Venezuela’s interim President Delcy Rodriguez.

“The United States of America has just entered into an Agreement with the Country of Venezuela on, THE BIGGEST OIL DEAL IN WORLD HISTORY!” Trump wrote.

The announcement of the deal comes nearly nine months after the U.S. military at Trump’s direction carried out an operation to capture Venezuela’s president Nicolás Maduro and spirit him to the United States to face federal narcoterrorism and drug trafficking charges.

Trump faces mounting pressure to address high gas prices as the war in Iran reaches a six-month milestone with no conclusion in sight. The U.S. has tapped its strategic petroleum reserves, which in early August fell below 300 million barrels, down by more than 100 million barrels since the start of 2026.

In the days following Maduro’s ouster in January, Trump floated the idea of U.S. oil companies returning to Venezuela to tap its oil reserves. Trump has argued that Venezuela stole U.S. oil when former Venezuelan President Hugo Chavez’s moved decades ago to nationalize hundreds of foreign-owned assets, including those owned by American oil companies.

Venezuela has one of the largest oil reserves in the world, with an estimated 303 billion barrels of crude oil in the ground. That’s about 17% of the world’s supply, according to the U.S. Energy Information Administration. Unlike other parts of the world, where geologists have to search for untapped oil, the reserves under Venezuela’s soil are largely mapped and known, experts say. But because of dilapidated infrastructure, the country only produces about 1% of the world’s oil.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

The Iran war exposed just how much the world relied on a narrow 20-mile-wide waterway. Soon after the U.S. launched strikes on Iran, the latter threatened to strike ships trying to traverse the Strait of Hormuz, the channel for much of the Middle East’s oil and gas exports. The threat of shortages pushed countries across Asia to impose export bans, cut import duties, and start rationing fuel to maintain supplies. 

Six months since the onset of the war, doomsday scenarios—price spikes, long lines at gas stations, power outages, and grounded flights—haven’t quite come to fruition, as increased production and hefty stockpiles blunted some of the damage. 

It seems that normality, in some form, could be returning to the Strait. On Wednesday, Iran announced a new revenue-sharing agreement over the waterway, though a military spokesperson blamed the U.S. for “obstructing this process.” 

Yet the revelation of how easy it was for Iran to block, and continue blocking, one of the world’s most important waterways is pushing governments to diversify their sources of energy.

And now, with the prospect of a U.S.-Iran deal in the near-term on life support and Iranian control of Hormuz now looking secure for years to come, what previously saved the global oil market in the first half of the year might not work for a second time.

“Global oil and gas supply is still a major point of geopolitical leverage,” says Saul Kavonic, head of energy research at MST Financial. “Notwithstanding the rise of alternative and green technologies over the past decade, the global economy is still very reliant on oil and gas.”

“Hostile actors can threaten that for their geopolitical ends.”

A ‘big wake up call’

Before the war, roughly a fifth of the world’s oil trade passed through the Strait of Hormuz, which sits between Iran and Oman. More than 80% of that cargo was bound for Asia, primarily China, India, Japan, and South Korea.

“Before this crisis many market observers would have told you it would be impossible to block or completely close the Strait of Hormuz, because a country like Iran did not have the capabilities. They tried in the 1980s, but they did not succeed,” says Carole Nakhle, CEO at Crystol Energy, an energy consultancy. 

Yet the conflict has shown “how easy and inexpensive it has become to threaten very expensive energy infrastructure,” she added, with relatively cheap drones capable of putting refineries, pipelines, ports, and other multibillion-dollar facilities at risk.

“This has been the big wake-up call for the entire global energy industry. It’s a fundamental paradigm shift of the last 50 years of the energy industry,” says Kavonic. “We’re moving from just-in-time supply chains to just-in-case supply chains.”

Energy importers are starting to diversify. Before the war, the Middle East accounted for 90% of Japan’s crude oil imports, and roughly 11% of its liquefied natural gas. “Japan found it was more vulnerable than expected, particularly when it comes to LNG—it imports 100% of its energy,” says Kavonic.  “In Japan, if the LNG doesn’t arrive, the lights go off and the country shuts down.”

Now, Tokyo is investing elsewhere to shore up future supplies. Japan’s Inpex, for example, formed a joint venture to expand its LNG investment in Australia’s Northern Territory. 

“It’s boomtime for Woodside and Chevron, two big LNG players who aren’t too concentrated in the Middle East. The oil majors are now also rapidly ramping up their investment in LNG,” Kavonic says, spotting an opportunity for buyers to diversify their sources of gas away from the Middle East. 

Exporters, too, are diversifying. For oil exporters, the major lesson has been the need to invest in alternate supply routes. That includes ploughing billions into building out ports in ports on both the western side of Saudi Arabia and the Gulf of Oman, effectively bypassing the strait entirely. Oil producers are also investing in pipelines, like Saudi Arabia’s East-West pipeline. If all these additional investments pan out, only 10% of the world’s oil will need to travel through the Strait of Hormuz, down from 20% before the war. 

Gas, far more than oil, could become the key energy commodity hurt by a prolonged closure of the Strait of Hormuz. While crude oil can be carried via pipeline–perhaps from oil producers in the Persian Gulf to ports on the western side of the Arabian Peninsula–gas can’t, meaning there are no alternative routes to get LNG to Asia if Hormuz is blocked.

Qatar, one of the world’s leading producers of LNG, is trying to find some way to keep its export routes open, through diplomacy, finding new customers, and taking rare opportunities to get their product through Hormuz. It has also set up a fast recovery timeline so it can restart production once the strait reopens.

Escaping an energy collapse

Things didn’t collapse as analysts feared at the beginning of the conflict. In April, for example, the head of the International Energy Agency predicted that flights may soon need to be grounded in Europe due to jet fuel shortages.

While oil prices did surge to as high as $126 per barrel, they didn’t hit the $150 to $200 a barrel level that some analysts feared. And while several Asian countries imposed emergency measures to conserve fuel, a lengthy and catastrophic shortage never materialized. “The global market is proving to be more resilient to major supply shocks than many thought,” Kavonic says.

One reason was the sheer amount of oil sitting in reserve. The IEA mandates that its 32 member countries stockpile at least 90 days’ worth of oil; similar mandates for gas stockpiles were imposed after Russia’s invasion of Ukraine.

In March, the agency coordinated the release of 400 million barrels from these emergency oil stockpiles, the largest such intervention in its history. 

Oil producers like the U.S., Saudi Arabia and the UAE also increased their production and carrying capacity. Yet perhaps the unsung hero in the market was China, which drew on its huge stockpiles, leaving more oil in the market for other economies. 

“OPEC has lost its primary role as global oil market manager,” Kavonic says, referring to the cartel that tries to maintain the global prices of oil. “It’s now moved to China.”

He notes that China’s increased leverage in oil markets will have repercussions throughout the Pacific. “We can see how dependent Pacific Island nations are on diesel to keep the lights on. So we’ve seen countries in Asia not just have to manage their own imports but support the Pacific as well. Otherwise 30 years of Pacific policy could be undermined in a few months.”

But how long this will last is unclear, particularly now that tensions between Iran and the U.S. have flared up again, and a prolonged closure of the Strait of Hormuz now looks likely.

“We spent the last four months living on the oil market credit card. And if we continue at that rate, that credit card will be maxed out in a few months,” Kavonic says.

Fortune will host several sessions on what a more complicated geopolitical world means for Asia’s businesses at the upcoming Fortune Leaders Forum, hosted in Macau on Sep. 8. Learn more here.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

The world has lost a music legend in Dolly Parton, who has died at 80 after a “brief battle” with cancer. She’s remembered for her twanging country vocals, decades of hit recordings, Grammys, Emmys and a liberal splash of acting.

But the biggest legacy Parton leaves is her songwriting, and three songs define her more than any others.

Jolene, I Will Always Love You and 9 to 5 are not just memorable Parton songs – they are integral to popular music history. They show a skilful musician who knew how to blend the story of lyrics with the drama of music.

Like many songwriters, Parton had things to say. What makes her contribution notable was when her lyrics told a story, and her music matched it.

Jolene

In Jolene, released in 1974, Parton’s lyrics capture the torment of watching your lover flirt with someone else.

It’s a powerful human experience – particularly for women despairing over how easily the next pretty young thing grabs male attention. Parton’s desperate begging for Jolene not to take her man “even though you can” is comfortingly raw and honest.

The song’s lyrics are a startling contrast to the common songwriting themes of the time about finding or losing love – such as The Carpenters’ Close to You (1970), Stevie Wonder’s You are the Sunshine of My Life (1972) and Carole King’s It’s Too Late (1971).

Instead, Jolene sits on the precipice of change, telling a vivid story of how seeing a stunning young woman can make another woman insecure.

Musically, the chords pound out an appropriately bleak minor key, ascending to higher chords with each dramatic call of the name “Jolene”. Accompanying the vocals sits an intriguing, rapid-fire, finger-picking guitar, performed in the recording studio by session musician Chip Young. It keeps an incessant motion that not only adds tension but draws admiration for skilful playing.

I Will Always Love You

I Will Always Love You was also released in 1974 and – remarkably – possibly was written on the same day as Jolene.

This song shows Parton’s ability to once again blend story and music in an excellent pairing. The fear pumping through Jolene is replaced by the grief of farewelling a deep love because, while love endures, it is not always enough of a reason to remain in a relationship. https://www.youtube.com/embed/pW2TgGy5gjY?wmode=transparent&start=0

Again, Parton captures a more sophisticated theme than the excitement and wonder of love. She knows that love can mean letting go.

The lyrics are sparse and the story of “bittersweet memories” is sketchy, but Parton once again nails the essence of human experience. We don’t need the details of what happened to relate with our own painful farewells.

The elongated singing of the word “I” translates almost as a cry of agony in Whitney Houston’s extraordinary cover version. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3JWTaaS7LdU?wmode=transparent&start=0

The chord progression Parton chose to underpin the chorus is one of the most familiar, hit-producing patterns in popular music history. It appears in songs ranging from Stand By Me (1961), Blue Moon (1934), Crocodile Rock (1973) and Every Breath You Take (1983).

But Parton’s usage is unique: the melody and lyrics don’t move with the progression. Instead, the melody holds one single note (with a few embellishments) and lets the chords do the work.

9 to 5

Parton wrote the song 9 to 5 for the movie of the same name in 1980, in which she starred alongside Jane Fonda and Lily Tomlin. It needed to match the vibe to describe the bustle of a working week.

To achieve this, Parton swapped her previously drawn out lyrics of love for the relentless patter describing the morning routine. Here Parton uses clever imperfect rhymes such as matching “kitchen” and “ambition” to sell the story. https://www.youtube.com/embed/UbxUSsFXYo4?wmode=transparent&start=0

The melody in the verse rises with each cluster of words, building the energy like the start of the day she describes. The chorus nails the hook by changing the rhythm, to let the phrase “9 to 5” ring out.

In 9 to 5, Parton moved away from love songs to a feminist theme that belted out the injustices of working tirelessly in a work place like any other employee yet not able to get a “fair promotion”. The description of the “rich man’s game” and how “they never give you credit” highlights workplace inequalities that are sadly still prevalent today.

Wendy Hargreaves, Academic in the School of Education and Creative Arts, University of Southern Queensland

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

The Conversation

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Meta has agreed to pay up to US$17 billion over 10 years to settle claims brought by a bipartisan coalition of state attorneys general. The states argued that the company deliberately designed Facebook and Instagram to hook children into using its apps, misled the public about the harm and improperly collected data from children under 13.

The settlement, announced by Meta on Aug. 26, 2026, ended a federal trial that had barely begun in Oakland, California. The potential financial exposure in the case was enormous, and Meta’s stock price took a hit. The states argued that penalties could reach hundreds of billions of dollars.

Against that backdrop, and with a $1.4 trillion question mark hanging over its valuation, Meta settled, although the company continues to deny wrongdoing. The settlement still requires approval from Judge Yvonne Gonzalez Rogers.

As a technology policy and law scholar, I follow with interest the litigation against Meta and other social media companies. The basic contours of this settlement are now public, and I believe they deserve careful attention because of the product design changes it might compel Meta, TikTok and YouTube to make.

What the states alleged

The Oakland case consolidated lawsuits filed in 2023 by 29 state attorneys general following a nationwide investigation that began in 2021.

Similar to prior litigation in Los Angeles and New Mexico, the states alleged that Meta engineered features – for example, infinite scroll, autoplay, push notifications, likes and appearance-altering filters – to exploit vulnerabilities associated with adolescent development and to maximize engagement.

States alleged that Meta’s internal research documented links between Instagram use and harms including depression, anxiety and body-image concerns among young people, while the company publicly minimized or concealed those risks.

A third set of claims concerned Meta’s collection of data from children under 13 without parental consent, allegedly in violation of federal children’s privacy law. And the states argued that these practices violated state consumer protection statutes as well.

That consumer protection claim is particularly important. For decades, Section 230 of the Communications Decency Act has protected platforms from liability for content posted by their users. But the states sued Meta instead over the company’s own product design, business practices and alleged misrepresentations, not user-generated content.

In opening arguments, California’s lawyer compressed the theory into four words, noting Meta’s business model was to “hook” users, “hold” them, “harvest” their data and “hide” the harm. And there was already precedent at the state level, in Massachusetts, of courts allowing this kind of claim to proceed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/MBL9musS6Po?wmode=transparent&start=0 The lawsuit and settlement focused on the design of Meta’s social media platforms and how the platforms need to change to protect teens.

One legal battle, several different cases

It is important not to conflate the cases. While the federal case in Oakland was settled as part of the agreement with the 47 states, major cases against Meta remain active.

In Los Angeles, a separate California state-court case resulted in a jury finding Meta and Google liable for negligently designing their products in ways that contributed to a teen girl’s mental health harms, with damages of $4.2 million against Meta and $1.8 million against Google. Those amounts look modest until multiplied across the thousands of similar individual claims now pending. Meta is appealing that decision.

And in New Mexico, the state pursued its own enforcement action, alleging that Meta endangered children and violated state consumer protection law. New Mexico won judgments against Meta totaling more than $900 million, which Meta is also challenging.

Neither of those cases was part of the federal trial, so the settlement does not resolve them, nor does it create legal precedent.

What the settlement actually changes

The design changes, such as curbing infinite scroll and autoplay, are the substantive core of the agreement. Subject to court approval, teens under 18 on Instagram and Facebook in participating states will get:

  • a default two-hour daily time limit, cumulative across both apps and across multiple accounts, that only a parent can lift
  • a block on app access between midnight and 6 a.m. and muted notifications during school hours (8 a.m. to 3 p.m.), excepting direct messages
  • usage prompts after every 15 minutes of continuous scrolling
  • the option of a non-algorithmic, nonpersonalized feed
  • the ability to turn off autoplay and for parents to set the default to “off”
  • hidden like counts by default
  • blocks on cosmetic surgery and extreme makeup filters
  • strengthened age-detection systems for under-13 accounts

Some of these measures are particularly significant because they change the default experience rather than simply adding another setting that users can choose to activate. This lowers the burden on the user. A safety tool that requires a teenager or parent to find, understand and turn on is fundamentally different from a safety constraint built into the product itself.

The agreement addresses the architecture that determines how the product operates. In doing so, it recognizes that Meta shares responsibility for the environment it creates, which is crucial because Meta holds significant power to shape how its products are used.

a teen boy leans against a wall while looking at a phone

Among other changes, the settlement calls for Meta to mute notifications from Facebook and Instagram to teens during school hours. Drazen Zigic/iStock via Getty Images

Why the design terms matter more than the money

Even $17 billion, spread across a decade, amounts to only roughly 1% of Meta’s expected revenue over the same period. The company has told investors that the settlement will not change its financial guidance beyond a single quarterly expense.

More consequential, for Meta and the public, is the requirement to redesign Facebook and Instagram.

However, redesign without serious transparency and accountability can quickly become another form of marketing. Meta has promised safety changes before, including teen accounts and expanded parental controls. Verification of the redesign and its real-world impact over time are key.

That is where the settlement is both promising and incomplete. An independent auditor will review Meta’s compliance annually, but only for five years, against a 10-year agreement. And Meta has committed to the strongest behavioral terms, the daily time limit and the overnight block, for just five years. It will extend to 10 with stricter defaults only if YouTube and TikTok sign on.

Meta has also committed to establish an independent research foundation. And this might address one of the deepest problems in technology governance: Platforms hold the evidence of their own effects, while independent researchers have been locked out.

But the strength of these mechanisms will depend on details not yet public. Who selects the auditor? What information can the auditor access? Can researchers independently reproduce findings? What constitutes noncompliance, and what penalties follow if Meta complies with the letter of the agreement while redesigning the product around its edges? Finally, how does the research foundation escape capture by Meta?

Technology governance increasingly fails not at the level of rules but at the level of enforcement.

There is also something the settlement forecloses. Trials produce public records, but settlements end the process of producing a record of the evidence. The internal documents and testimony surfacing in Oakland, including evidence about Meta’s own research on young users and its lawyers’ handling of those findings, will now remain only partially visible. The states secured a significant legal resolution, but the public lost part of the record of how we got here.

What comes next

Three things deserve close attention:

First, the implementation details matter.

The settlement’s significance depends on what happens after the press releases disappear. Do the new defaults actually constrain use? Are they hard to circumvent across accounts and devices? It is very hard to do age control in technology. And will teenagers simply migrate to other platforms outside the settlement’s reach, or into the direct messages the agreement itself exempts?

Second, there is the question of Meta’s competitors.

Participating states are guaranteed roughly 70% of the $17 billion, or about $12.7 billion over the decade, while the remaining 30%, about $5.3 billion, is released only if YouTube and TikTok adopt comparable teen protections and make matching payments. Meta essentially structured part of its own penalty as a recruitment device, effectively telling TikTok and YouTube that these rules are coming, and it is better to adopt them together than face the next litigation cycle alone.

There is also a clear economic incentive for Meta to try to level the playing field. Because if these measures make Meta’s products less profitable, imposing similar requirements on competitors could prevent Meta from bearing those costs alone. Whether that strategy works could matter as much as the settlement itself.

Third, federal social media policy in the United States is gridlocked. It took state attorneys general, applying consumer protection law, to produce rules about time limits, product defaults, notifications and design practices that Congress could have debated and enacted years ago.

The deeper lesson of the settlement is that product design, as a site of legal accountability, is a workable legal strategy.

Accountability starts when a company agrees to redesign its product. The settlement gives the states – and the rest of us – a decade to find out whether these changes are real, and if so, if they work for the desired policy outcome.

The critical question is whether, throughout that decade, someone independent will have the authority, access and incentives to decide what “work” really means.

Carolina Rossini, Professor of Practice and Director for Program, Public Interest Technology Initiative, UMass Amherst

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

The Trump administration is bringing back a centuries-old legal tradition that would allow it to more easily seize Iranian oil tankers and sell off their assets.

Aaron Reitz, who is the U.S. Attorney in the Houston-based Southern District of Texas,  confirmed to Fortune the revival of prize law, or a set of rules allowing for military forces to seize enemy vessels.

“Our national security interests may require the United States military to seize vessels or cargo supporting the enemy during military conflict. If that happens, our federal courts must be ready to adjudicate the disposition of these captured vessels and cargo,” he said in a statement. “Prize law is an ancient body of maritime law—already codified in statute but which we are now reviving—that sets the rules for how seized maritime property is condemned, returned, or disposed of.”

Invoking prize laws would allow U.S. forces to bolster the naval blockade of Iran and recoup costs from the war. The news was first reported by Bloomberg Law.

Prize law contrasts with civil seizure laws that require the U.S. government to identify a statutory violation of a vessel and establish jurisdiction over that violation. It often entails extensive litigation, according to Michael Frevola, a maritime litigation partner at Holland & Knight LLP.

By comparison, prize law does not require a captor to have a warrant or tie a vessel’s seizure to a violation of an existing stature. Rather than law enforcement authorities like the Coast Guard having to seize a vessel under civil seizure laws, the Department of Defense, usually through military force, can seize an enemy vessel instead.

The ‘ancient’ roots of U.S. prize law

Prize laws have existed since the Middle Ages, and have been baked into the U.S. legal canon since the beginning, with the Constitution outlining rules for capturing and confiscating enemy vessels during times of war in its Captures Clause

During the 19th century, President Abraham Lincoln used the Prize Act of 1812 to blockade Confederate seaports—an act that was contested and eventually upheld by the Supreme Court. It was most recently invoked during the Spanish-American War, which legitimized the U.S. naval detainment of Spanish vessels as prizes of war.

Reitz did not specify if the Justice Department will invoke the Prize Act of 1812, the Captures Clause, or another law. But the less complicated legal process for capturing an enemy vessel that prize law affords would have clear benefits for the Trump administration.

“There’s definitely a financial interest in being able to sell the oil and being able to to sell the vessel and then just put that money into the coffers of the United States, which is another thing that this administration has shown is a priority,” Raymond Waid, a veteran naval officer and maritime lawyer at Liskow and Lewis, told Fortune

Will the Prize Act work in assisting the U.S. in the Iran war?

Legal experts warned that while reviving prize law could in theory expedite the process of seizing Iranian ships, they anticipate ample legal complications that would hamper how effective this legal strategy really is.

For one, there’s the sheer age of the law, which hasn’t been invoked since the Spanish-American War in 1898.

“It’s not like the DOJ has some really veteran Prize Act litigators on their staff,” Frevola quipped. “So we’d have to conduct a séance to wind up getting serious counsel in terms of this.”

The U.S. government will also need to prove that a capture takes place during a war with hostilities that are within congressional and presidential authority. Congress has not declared war against Iran, which may create some grey area around how appropriate prize law would be, and the lack of an official war declaration could also push Congress into getting more involved in a dispute it has largely avoided so far, Waid suggested. 

Allison Luzwick, a maritime lawyer and Frevola’s colleague at Holland & Knight LLP, told Fortune that the U.S. will also likely face litigation about the legality of its blockade and whether it was adequately declared and communicated. This is particularly sensitive for neutral vessels carrying cargo from other states and whether they’re subject to capture.

“There’s going to be arguments about whether or not that vessel is even subject to the blockade, or if they received notice about the blockade, if they intended to run the blockade,” she said.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Federal Reserve Chair Kevin Warsh said Friday that inflation is still too high and suggested the central bank may have to raise interest rates in the coming months to bring it down, a clearer signal than he had sent previously about his economic outlook.

In his first high-profile speech at the Fed’s annual conference in Jackson Hole, Wyoming, Warsh acknowledged that recent U.S. reports show that inflation has cooled a bit, but “they do not tell me that underlying trends have meaningfully improved.”

“We must be confident that underlying inflation is moving to our objective, clearly and at sufficient speed,” Warsh said. “Otherwise, we have work to do.”

Comments from the new Fed chair appeared to reassure Wall Street that fighting inflation remains the priority for the central bank. Warsh did not imply that a rate hike is imminent, but he appeared to dismiss perceptions that inflation is no longer a threat.

He pointed to data showing that inflation remains stubbornly above the central bank’s 2% target. Warsh replaced Jerome Powell in late May after his predecessor’s term ended.

The U.S. stock market held steady after the speech, but expectations are building in the bond market for the Fed to hike interest rates. The yield on the two-year Treasury, which closely tracks expectations for what the Fed will do with its federal funds rate, moved from 4.22% to 4.30%, a sign that investors expect short-term yields to move higher.

Longer-term yields on 10-year and 30-year Treasuries were mostly flat, suggesting investors aren’t worried that higher rates will be needed for a long stretch of time to fight inflation.

Jon Faust, an economist at Johns Hopkins and a former adviser to Powell, said Warsh succeeded in conveying a tougher approach on inflation while avoiding the kind of detailed guidance from the Fed that he has disparaged.

“He found a way to convey that if necessary he would support raising rates, which is one thing people were concerned about,” Faust said.

Yet Michael Strain, director of economic policy studies at the American Enterprise Institute, said the Fed chair has talked tough on inflation before without hiking the Fed’s key rate. His Friday remarks don’t provide any clearer guidance on the timing of any Fed moves, he added.

The Fed chair faces high stakes with his speech as questions swirl around Wall Street about his focus on fighting inflation.

Those concerns may have contributed to rising bond yields, which can increase the cost of borrowing for the government and everyone else. Yet Warsh has said he doesn’t want to provide what analysts call “forward guidance” about whether the Fed will hike or cut rates or stay on hold at upcoming meetings. He argues that it limits the Fed’s flexibility by committing it to a specific policy.

Yet some economists have argued that he could say more about his views on Fed policy without tipping his hand about future actions.

Warsh on Friday reiterated his skepticism about providing such guidance or even outlining his broad approach to interest-rate policy.

But he did suggest that interest rates currently aren’t restricting economic activity, pointing to robust business investment in AI equipment and infrastructure and strong consumer spending. As a rule of thumb, interest rates often need to be high enough to limit borrowing and spending to cool inflation.

The Fed next meets Sept. 15-16, and Warsh’s remarks don’t necessarily signal that the central bank will raise rates then. But his speech indicated that rates may not be high enough to bring inflation down to the Fed’s 2% target.

Warsh said inflation data “are more concerning” than trends in the job market, where the unemployment rate is low. He also argued that inflation is unlikely to move back to the target on its own.

Warsh noted that in the past year, 54% of goods and services tracked by the government have seen price increases of 3% or higher. While that is down from the pandemic peak, it is “well above” the 32% that saw such increases in the two decades before the pandemic.

Inflation cooled in June and July after spiking in May from soaring gas prices, yet it remains above the central bank’s target. According to the Fed’s preferred measure, it was 3.7% in July.

Warsh also sought to clear up some areas of confusion that arose after his remarks at a July 29 news conference. He specified that short-term interest rates are the “predominant tool” the Fed can use to lower inflation.

Previous Fed chairs have often used speeches at Jackson Hole to address broad questions about interest-rate policy and the economy, or to signal upcoming changes in their approach. In 2022, with pandemic-era inflation having soared to 9.1%, Powell signaled the Fed would continue to sharply raise interest rates in a fight against runaway prices, and he acknowledged that such maneuvers would bring “pain” to consumers and businesses.

Wall Street investors now see the chances of a rate hike at the Fed’s Sept. 15-16 meeting as basically a coin flip, according to futures pricing tracked by CME FedWatch, up from about one-third before Warsh spoke.

Questions about Warsh’s approach have intensified amid President Donald Trump’s continued calls for lower interest rates. While Trump has continued to defend Warsh, whom he appointed, the president has criticized other Fed officials for supporting higher rates.

Trump has also renewed his efforts to remove Fed Governor Lisa Cook, who was appointed by former President Joe Biden. Replacing Cook would enable Trump to appoint a majority of the seven-member board. Trump tried to fire her last year but was temporarily blocked by the Supreme Court.

Longer-term rates have steadily risen in recent weeks because of a range of factors, including burgeoning U.S. government deficits and outsize borrowing by tech firms building AI infrastructure.

The rate on the 30-year Treasury bond reached the highest level in 19 years last week, prompting an unusual effort by Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent to buy back bonds and push yields lower.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

New York City’s Department of Finance is sending a second wave of pied-à-terre tax letters to roughly 10,800 property owners, even as it mails a very different kind of letter to other owners from the first round, telling them, in effect, never mind.

Roughly 17,000 owners received a notice this summer warning they might owe the surcharge, which applies only to non-primary residences amounts, with a rate of 0.8%–1.3% on homes over $5 million and 4%-6.5% on condos and co-ops over $1 million. But 1,210 are now being cleared outright, according to new court filings disclosed this week.

The reason has nothing to do with a change in the law and everything to do with timing: New York State sent the city’s DOF preliminary 2025 income-tax records on Aug. 12, several months earlier than the agency would normally begin receiving them. Of that group, 630 owners were cleared because their 2025 tax returns listed the property as their primary home address; another 580 were cleared using a mix of 2025 extension filings and 2024 returns.

“So by my last count, I think we sent out less than 20,000, ‘you may be subject to’ letters, I think it was about 17,000 or 18,000. And at the time that we sent those out, we did not have access to the 2025 income tax filings,” said Mayor Zohran Mamdani at a Wednesday press conference. He noted the timing wasn’t unusual on the state’s end: 2025 filings are “typically released in February of the next calendar year,” and the state simply gave DOF early access this time.

Randy Mastro, the attorney suing the city over the rollout (and a longtime suer of the city in general), made his thoughts known in the court filing. “There are many thousands fewer property owners subject to this surcharge than this administration originally boasted when it flooded the landscape with 17,000 threatening Mailed Notices.”

“The City has now effectively admitted” that some people who received the letters, Mastro said, “do not actually owe this surcharge.” He also argued the timing undercuts the city’s excuse: “The City admits that, after this lawsuit was filed on August 7, it obtained 2025 tax information within five days,” which is evidence, he claimed, that DOF could have gotten the same data before mailing anything, not just after being sued.

Mamdani laid out three categories of properties the city is targeting. One is properties owned by a corporate entity like an LLC or a trust, about 6,400 households, where DOF doesn’t have enough information on primary residence holder. The 1,210 owners who were being cleared make up the second category. The third category, about 4,400 households, consists of properties where DOF doesn’t have 2025 tax returns that would indicate whether they are primary residences. The first and third categories make up the 10,800 letters going out to people.

A rocky rollout

New York Gov. Kathy Hochul, who stood alongside Mamdani when the tax was first announced in April, said this week she “wasn’t a fan of the rollout” and that City Hall was working to correct the problems. Mamdani, at the same press conference, held firm on the tax’s revenue target: “We continue to be confident in that assessment of what the annual revenue will look like.”

A DOF spokesperson, defending the process, said: “From the beginning, we have been committed to ensuring that New Yorkers have the time and information they need. Property owners have until October 6th to file an exemption application. We have received the tax information from the state for 2025 and want to give New Yorkers more time to apply for an exemption, if applicable.”

Mamdani noted Oct. 6 isn’t necessarily the final word for owners who miss it. “If New Yorkers still want to appeal an assessment, they can still appeal to the tax commission until early next year.”

New York City’s pied-à-terre tax initially began as a Tax Day pitch. Mamdani and Hochul announced it in April, with Mamdani unveiling the plan in a video filmed outside Citadel billionaire Ken Griffin’s $238 million penthouse. The state legislature passed it May 27, and Hochul signed it the next day.

The rollout is what actually caused the uproar. DOF’s supplemental roll, meant to flag properties that might owe the surcharge, ballooned into an unfiltered list of nearly a million properties, instantly branded a “rich hit list” online, and united the ultrawealthy and merely well-off alike in opposition once thousands of legitimate primary residences got needlessly swept into DOF’s notices. That confusion is now the subject of Mastro’s active lawsuit.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

President Donald Trump said Thursday he is renaming Lake Ontario to be known as “Lake America” in the United States as he escalates his trade war with Canada.

The Republican president signed an executive order directing the Interior Department to update the lake’s name in the U.S. geographic naming service. Trump cannot force Canada to follow along, however.

Trump has been floating the idea of the name change in recent days as the U.S. announced it was imposing 50% tariffs on $20 billion worth of Canadian goods over the weekend after talks between the countries broke down. Trump has been needling America’s northern neighbor since he returned to the White House last year, suggesting the ally with whom the U.S. once had warm relations should instead be absorbed as the 51st state.

Canada responded to Trump’s import taxes this week by imposing retaliatory tariffs on $20 billion worth of American goods, including steel, dairy products, appliances and farm equipment.

Trump, who signed the order as he was sitting at the Resolute Desk in the Oval Office, had a large sign behind him propped on a stand with a map of the Great Lakes. Over Lake Ontario, in big red letters, the map read “Lake America.”

On the other side of the president was another map with the words, “MAKING THE GREAT LAKES EVEN GREATER.”

Trump said as he was signing the order that he’d “notified all of the various people that we have to notify. So, we’ve done everything that you have to do.”

“And this is official, effective immediately,” he added.

But the executive order Trump signed shows that the changes are supposed to be made within 30 days.

Canadian officials dismissed Trump’s move.

Canadian Prime Minister Mark Carney rejected the move, invoking the lake’s Indigenous roots and noting that the name predates both Canadian Confederation and the U.S. Declaration of Independence.

“Canadians also know that naming reality means calling it Lake Ontario — then, now and always,” he wrote.

Ontario Premier Doug Ford, who has traded insults with Trump, said on X: “It’s Lake Ontario to Canadians and the rest of the world. Now and forever.”

Nova Scotia Premier Tim Houston said, “We’re into some real foolishness now. It’s Lake Ontario, buddy.”

The lake is one of multiple Great Lakes that the U.S. and Canada share borders along. New York Gov. Kathy Hochul, a Democrat whose state shares a border on the lake, wrote on X in response to the White House’s announcement that, “New York won’t be calling it that.”

There is no single international body that determines names of international bodies of water and Trump has wide latitude over how the U.S. government recognizes geographic places and landmarks.

The name Lake Ontario comes from the Huron Indigenous people’s word “oniatarí:io,” which means “lake of shining waters.” The province of Ontario, founded in 1867, took its name from the lake.

Trump said that while his action was not meant to send any particular geopolitical message, “Canada’s been ripping us off for a long time” on trade and military issues.

“They wanted to be treated like a state and they’re not a state,” the president said. “We just can’t do that anymore.”

“We love the people of Canada,” Trump added. “I don’t think their representatives do, an appropriate job. Maybe they’ll change. I really don’t know. It doesn’t make much difference.”

The move is reminiscent of his move last year to rename the Gulf of Mexico as the “Gulf of America.”

Trump scribbled his name with a Sharpie pen on the executive order, then held it up for the cameras, offering, “And we filed all the necessary papers, documents, everything else.”

He also suggested his push to rename bodies of water may not be finished.

“So, if you think about it, we have a gulf and we have a lake. Now, all we need is an ocean,” Trump said. “So maybe we’ll have to change the name of the Atlantic and/or the Pacific. Maybe we’ll change them.”

___

Associated Press writer Rob Gillies in Toronto contributed to this report.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Three staff members from the Stars and Stripes military news outlet are suing to challenge their recent firings by the Pentagon, accusing the Trump administration of violating their First Amendment free speech rights to speak out against government interference in their work.

Stars and Stripes publisher Max Lederer, editor-in-chief Erik Slavin and Middle East reporter Lara Korte are named as plaintiffs in the federal lawsuit filed Thursday in Washington, D.C.

The Pentagon, which partially funds the news outlet, fired them last week. A Pentagon spokesperson declined to comment on the suit’s allegations.

Slavin says he was dismissed for insubordination after giving an interview to CBS News in which he objected to potential censorship by the U.S. military. Korte participated in the same interview. Their lawsuit says they were punished in retaliation for publishing a report on deteriorating conditions aboard the U.S.S. Abraham Lincoln.

“Stripes’ historical editorial independence is critical to its core mission of gathering and providing unbiased, credible journalism to the U.S. military community, particularly servicemembers and their families stationed overseas,” the suit says.

Lederer was dismissed shortly after announcing his impending retirement, effective at the end of September. He said the Pentagon had installed a new deputy publisher, an active duty service member, under him at the newspaper without his prior knowledge.

The suit’s plaintiffs are represented by attorneys from Democracy Defenders Fund, Lawyers for Good Government, Government Accountability Project and a Yale Law School clinic.

The Defense Department and Defense Secretary Pete Hegseth are among the named defendants.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

California farms and vineyards are facing a host of problems so far this year, including a drought caused mainly by unusually warm weather patterns in early spring, as reported by the state’s Department of Water Resources. This year’s snow levels in the Northern Sierra and Cascade mountains fell to 0% of their typical June average. These snow packs are needed each year to melt slowly throughout the summer and fall providing crucial water supply to the state.

In June, the national weather service warned millions in California to stay inside due to lethal temperatures around the state including parts of Oregon and Washington. 

Almonds are California’s number one crop by acreage, number one agricultural export, second by value, and the number one specialty crop export in the country. Eighty percent of the world‘s almonds come from California with more than 7,000 almond farms across the state. Lately, water restrictions and higher costs are making it difficult for growers. 

The story is the same for pistachios. California produces nearly all of the U.S. supply (about 99%) and accounts for over 60% of global pistachio production. 600,000 acres are planted across the Central Valley contributing more than $1.6 billion in annual value to the state’s economy. Fresno, Kern and Tulare counties reported a combined $800 million loss for pistachio production so far this year.

In May, officials in Kern County alone also reported a 42% loss in cherry production this year due to a hot stretch in March followed by April rain accounting for a total loss of more than $13 million for growers.

The University of California recently held workshops on how to grow grape and nut crops during extreme weather, heat, drought, pest issues and greater climate variability. 

Normally, California boasts an agriculture industry with more than 350 commodities that account for over $100 billion in related economic activity. 

In 2025, California passed Japan as the world’s fourth largest economy with farmers representing a large part of that milestone. In 2024 alone, 1.2 million agricultural related jobs were produced. California continues to rank as the most agriculturally productive state in the nation.

California also leads the country in Agriculture Technology innovation with 15 Agricultural Science universities and 11 Tier 1 research universities. In 2021, California Ag Tech startups received over $5 billion in venture capital funding which equals more than 18% of global Ag Tech investment. 

Despite representing a relatively small share of the country’s total farmland, California leads the nation with specialty crops, fruits, vegetables, nuts, and dairy with its favorable growing conditions. California provides nearly 75% of the nation’s fruits and nuts and over one-third of all vegetables.

Extreme heat and persistent drought present serious, existential threats to California’s multi-billion dollar specialty crop industry. Fruits, vegetables, and tree nuts are highly sensitive to environmental impacts. Changing weather patterns also disrupt plant biology, deplete water infrastructure, and increase operating costs. To combat the current crisis the agriculture industry very much needs new technologies that can reduce water use and labor, grow crops faster, and increase crop yield. Traditional agricultural methods are no longer sufficient to handle the speed and intensity of these environmental changes. 

Legacy farming practices depend on predictable weather patterns, but today’s extreme weather requires effective, real-time interventions to keep farms economically viable and ecologically sustainable.

State and local leaders can step up by highlighting more innovation than ever in this perilous time to support California’s vital role in global food production.

The opinions expressed in Fortune.com commentary pieces are solely the views of their authors and do not necessarily reflect the opinions and beliefs of Fortune.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Dolly Parton, the legendary singer turned business mogul and philanthropist, could always be relied on for some straight-talking advice. Even when it came to emulating her massive success, the country music star’s guidance was simple: “Work your butt off.”

Friends, family, and fans of Parton are reminiscing and celebrating her accomplishments—be it her music, entrepreneurship, or philanthropy—after her nephew and head of security, Bryan Seaver, announced her death in a statement earlier this week.

Parton died at 80 years old, with Seaver telling fans: “She never saw a door she couldn’t open, and the doors she opened made and changed history.” He added: “Dolly called me and said she wants to rest in a beautiful bed of plush cotton because after a life wearing heavy rhinestones, she finally deserves to be comfortable and have some rest.”

Indeed, the famed “9 to 5” singer suggested to Bloomberg she had always put in more than just the standard office hours.

As co-owner of the Dollywood Co., Parton helped oversee the Dollywood Theme Park, the Splash Country water park, several diner ventures, as well as a spa and hospitality venues in the Great Smoky Mountains. Her portfolio also included pet apparel business Doggy Parton, a fragrance brand, and a series of baking kits with Duncan Hines.

Forbes valued Parton—who was also a fierce philanthropist—at $450 million, though other outlets placed her wealth closer to $650 million.

But despite the brand her name became, Parton said she never became the “step on the bossman’s ladder” she once wrote about. When asked how she ran her empire so successfully, Parton said she had been “blessed” in her endeavors, working with great people and letting them get on with it.

Parton never sought to micromanage, she added: “I don’t boss anybody around, because I don’t even have the time or the energy to even do that. I just try to put people that are smarter than me in all the right places, and then I go on about my business.”

Parton, also an author, made it clear her talents lay in the creative side of the business, saying there were aspects of her empire that she didn’t know anything about—but didn’t need to because of the team she had in place.

“I’m more of the creative force and the one that has an overall sense of things,” she said. “I try to find the best people, and I try to trust them to do what they say they can do. Then I have people looking out after all of them.”

The “Islands in the Stream” singer also said her hands-off management approach with senior executives was paired with instinct, and she trusted that if an individual isn’t right for their role, it would eventually be revealed.

“We know if somebody’s not right, they’ll show themselves, or it’ll be pointed out so many times by other people that you do trust, you’ll know it’s time to move on from that person,” she said. “So I depend on my own higher wisdom of knowing if I’m in the right place with the right people.”

‘Looking like a woman and thinking like a man’

Parton, who was awarded the Carnegie Medal of Philanthropy, said that from her early days performing in Nashville, she knew she had talents she could monetize. Or as Parton put it: “Looking like a woman and thinking like a man, so to speak.”

Appearance is another area in which Parton had some sage advice—which may help Gen Z employees who reportedly are entering the workforce unsure of how they should dress for the office.

For Parton, known to be a big fan of wigs and brightly colored suits, the aim is to be comfortable, adding: “You know what business you’re in, and you pretty much know what’s expected.

“If you’ve got a dress code, just look the best you can, take it right to the limit. You can kind of bend the rules a little bit, but if that’s the job you want and you already know the rules, then go by the rules.”

A version of this story was published on Fortune.com on February 12, 2024.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

The American billionaire who bought Ferrari’s first electric vehicle model for an eye-watering eight figures may be able to cash in on a tax write-off perk from the purchase. 

Earlier this month, 87-year-old optometrist-turned-businessman-turned-philanthropist Dr. Herbert A. Wertheim bought a Ferrari Luce at a Sotheby’s public auction for $40 million. The auction was part of a charity effort to benefit the Ferrari Foundation, which funds global education initiatives.

The $40 million buying prices on the auto was more than 36 times the model’s presale estimates of $1.1 million. (The Luce retails for $640,000, but the auctioned car had a higher price tag because it had a pre-production chassis.)

Now, it seems Wertheim may end up getting a large chunk of that purchase back, as part of a longtime American tradition of the country incentivizing the nation’s wealthiest philanthropists into giving back.

Large charity donations like Wertheim’s can lend themselves to massive tax write-offs as a result of America’s tax system. Automotive content creator and television presenter Peter Greaves first brought attention to the potential for Wertheim to gain millions back on the purchase of his Luce in a recent Youtube video.

When Wertheim files his 2026 taxes, he would have to subtract the estimated sale value of $1.1 million from the $40 million the car sold for. As of the IRS’s 2026 tax rules, he would then have to take away a 0.5% floor of his adjusted gross income, which Greaves estimated to be $200 million, leaving $37.9 million. The U.S.’s 2/37ths rule created under the One Big Beautiful Bill Act, which caps tax savings of itemized deductions at 35% compared to the previous 37% for top earners, would further reduce the sum to $35.85 million. According to tax law, 37% of that total could be claimed, meaning Wertheim could receive more than $13 million back from the U.S. government for his purchase.

Wertheim, who did not immediately respond to Fortune’s request for comment, has made no public comments about possibly taking advantage of the tax write-off for the Luce, or for any previous charity auction purchases.

The philanthropist has an estimated net worth of $4.8 billion and has previously participated in a previous charity auction for luxury vehicles, reportedly paying $26 million for the Ferrari Daytona SP3, or “599+1.” He has donated more than $200 million to various causes, including  $50 million to UC Berkeley Optometry and $100 million to Baptist Health Foundation. In February, Wertheim paid $2 million at a Mar-a-Lago charity event for a private visit with President Donald Trump at the White House. It’s not his only recent brush with politics: Wertheim briefly launched a Congressional bid in Florida’s 22nd District earlier this year.

For its part, the Maranello, Italy-based carmaker has weathered controversy around the rollout of its EV. Former Ferrari president and chairman Luca di Montezemolo joined analysts and investors in mocking the model as ugly and decidedly un-Ferrari-like at a time where other luxury automakers were scaling back their own EV efforts amid low demand. Ferrari may be getting the last laugh however: the Financial Times reported last month that Ferrari exceeded its short-term sales goal of 500 units. 

How the Trump administration transformed charity tax breaks 

Tax breaks for philanthropy is an American tradition dating back to 1917 after the passage of the War Revenue Act, in which Congress created a federal income tax deduction for charitable gifts as part of an effort to keep private philanthropy alive and well during World War I, which would relieve the U.S. from funding essential social welfare programs. Those benefits have slowly expanded over the last century.

But the Trump administration has made it more for the wealthy to get money back for their donations come tax season, with the One Big Beautiful Bill Act effectively slashing the benefit from 37% to 35%, with itemized taxpayers having to deduct donations only in excess of 0.5% of their adjusted gross income.

The policy changes with lower tax incentives may alter the future of philanthropy itself. The new 35% limit could reduce donations by between $4.1 billion and $6.1 billion, according to the Indiana University Lilly Family School of Philanthropy. Experts warn that fewer big donors—or big donors giving less—would place a larger burden on middle-class givers to bridge a gap that isn’t realistic as financial pressures for less-wealthy households increase.

“The nonprofit sector says that every dollar matters, and so incentivizing small donations from every household could have a meaningful impact for certain kinds of organizations,” Elena Patel, co-director of the Urban-Brookings Tax Policy Center, told CNBC last November. “But the truth is that those kinds of contributions, however, just are not the bulk of charitable giving in the charitable sector.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here